E

EN ZION
UT
E MAN
I U SO NG
D T U
N U AL E
A N LE I
R E TIEN
MA U N GS J Z I NG D ’ E NT
I N I T
B EDIE KSAANW TION E B O OK
I ILIS A
D
E B RU ’ U T C T ION
NL
G LD TRU ES
N U E I N S I O N
F MA T OR’S STRUC
C
P E R A
E I N Õ E S Η Σ ΗΣ
GB
O
U A LD S T RUÇ Υ Ν ΤΗΡ
MAN L D E IN Σ ΚΑΙ Σ
UA ΗΣΗ
E
M A N Χ Ρ
P
ΕΙΡ ΙΔΙΟ
GR
ΕΓΧ
 INTRODUZIONE
Per un corretto impiego della troncatrice e per evitare incidenti, non iniziare il lavaro senza
aver letto questo manuale con la massima attenzione. Su questo manuale sono indicate
le spiegazioni di funzionamento dei vari componenti e le istruzioni per i necessari controlli
e per la manutenzione.
N.B.: Le descrizioni e le illustrazioni contenute nel presente manuale si intendono
non rigorosamente impegnative. La Ditta si riserva il diritto di apportare eventuali
modifiche senza impegnarsi ad aggiornare di volta questo manuale.
EINLEITUNG
Lesen Sie diese Brochüre vor Arbeitsbeginn aufmerksam durch, um mit dem Trennschleifer
richtig umgehen zu können und Unfälle zu vermeiden. In dieser Bedienungsanleitung finden
Sie die Erklärung der Funktionsweise der verschiedenen Bauteile und Hinweise zu den
anfallenden Kontroll- und Wartungsarbeiten.
ANM.: Die in dieser Broschüre enthaltenen Beschreibungen und Abbildungen
sind unverbindlich. Der Hersteller behält sich das Recht vor, eventuelle
Veränderungen vorzunehmen, ohne jeweils vorher eine Anpassung der vorliegenden
Bedienungsanleitung vorzunehmen.
INLEIDING
Om de snijmachine op de juiste manier te kunnen gebruiken en ongelukken te voorkomen
eerst deze gebruiks aanwijzing aandachtig doorlezen alvorens ermee te gaan werken. In
deze gebruiksaanwijzing zijn de uitleg van de werking van de verschillende onderdelen en
de instructies voor de noodzakelijke controles en het onderhoud opgenomen.
N.B.: De beschrijvingen en de figuren in deze gebruiksaanwijzing zijn niet bindend.
De fabrikant reserveert zich het recht eventuele veranderingen aan te brengen zonder
zich te verplichten iedere keer deze gebruiksaanwijzing bij te werken.
INTRODUCTION
Pour un emploi correct de la découpeuse et pour éviter les accidents, ne commencez
pas le travail sans avoir d’abord lu attentivement le manuel. Vous trouverez les
descriptions du fonctionnement des divers composants et les instructions pour les
contrôles nécessaires et pour l’entretien.
N.B.: Les descriptions et les illustrations contenues dans ce manual n’engagent pas
rigoureusement le constructeur. La société se réserve le droit d’apporter d’éventuelles
modifications sans devoir mettre à jour à chaque fois le manuel.
2
INTRODUCTION
To correctly use the power cutter and prevent accidents, do not start work without first
carefully reading this manual. You will find explanations concerning the operation of the
various parts plus instructions for necessary checks and relative maintenance.
NOTE: Illustrations and specifications in this manual may vary
according to Country requirements and are subject to change without notice by the
manufacturer.
INTRODUCCION
Para una correcta utilización de la cortadora y para evitar accidentes, no empiece a
trabajar sin haber leído atentamente este manual. Ud. encontrará las explicaciones
de funcionamiento de los diferentes componentes y las instrucciones para el control y
mantenimiento de la motosierra.
P.D. Las descripciones contenidas en el presente manual no se consideran
rigurosamente obligatorias. La empresa se reserva el derecho de aportar eventuales
modificaciones sin obligarse a poner al día este manual.
INTRODUÇÄO
Para um emprego correto da moto cortador e para evitar acidentes, não iniciar o trabalho
sem ter lido este manual com a máxima atenção. Neste manual encontram-se as descrições
de funcionamento dos diversos componentes e as instruções para o necessário controle
e para a manutenção.
N.B. As descrições e as ilustrações contidas neste manual não se consideram
rigorosamente obrigatórias. A Empresa reserva-se o direito de realizar modificações
sem ter que atualizar cada vez este manual.
∂π™∞°ø°∏
°È∙ ÌÈ∙ ÈÔ Û̂ÛÙ‹ ˉÚ‹ÛË ÙÔ˘ ‰›ÛÎÔ˘ ÎÔ‹̃ Î∙È ÁÈ∙ Ó∙ ∙Ô‰ÂˉÙÔ‡Ó ∙Ù˘ˉ‹Ì∙Ù∙, ÌËÓ
ÂÚÁ∙ÛÙ›Ù ˉ̂Ú›̃ ÚÒÙ∙ Ó∙ ‰È∙‚¿ÛÂÙ Ôχ ÚÔÛÂˉÙÈο ÙÔ ∙ÚfiÓ ÂÁˉÂÈÚ›‰ÈÔ. ™ÙÔ ∙ÚfiÓ
ÂÁˉÂÈÚ›‰ÈÔ ÂÚȤˉÔÓÙ∙È ÔÈ ÂÍËÁ‹ÛÂÈ̃ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›∙̃ Ù̂Ó ‰È∙ÊfiÚ̂Ó ÂÍ∙ÚÙËÌ¿Ù̂Ó Î∙È ÔÈ
Ô‰ËÁ›Ẫ ÁÈ∙ ÙÔ˘̃ ∙∙Ú∙›ÙËÙÔ˘̃ ÂϤÁˉÔ˘̃ Î∙È ÙË Û˘ÓÙ‹ÚËÛË.
™∏ª∂πø™∏: √È ÂÚÈÁÚ∙ʤ̃ Î∙È ÔÈ ÂÈÎfiÓẪ Ô˘ ÂÚȤˉÔÓÙ∙È ÛÙÔ ∙ÚfiÓ ÂÁˉÂÈÚ›‰ÈÔ ‰ÂÓ Â›Ó∙È
‰ÂÛÌ¢ÙÈΤ̃. ∏ ∂Ù∙ÈÚ›∙ ‰È∙ÙËÚ› ÙÔ ‰ÈÎ∙›̂Ì∙ Ó∙ οÓÂÈ ∙ÏÏ∙Á¤̃ ˉ̂Ú›̃ Ó∙ ÂÓËÌÂÚÒÓÂÈ
ÙÔ ∙ÚfiÓ ÂÁˉÂÈÚ›‰ÈÔ.
 Italiano
Indice
PRIMA DI COMINCIARE:
leggere attentamente tutte le avvertenze e le istruzioni prima di utilizzare il troncatore da taglio descritta nel presente manuale.
SEGUIRE ATTENTAMENTE LE AVVERTENZE E I RICHIAMI CONTENUTI IN QUESTO MANUALE! IL MANCATO RISPETTO
DELLE AVVERTENZE PUÒ RISULTARE IN INCIDENTI MORTALI O GRAVI LESIONI PERSONALI. È RESPONSABILITÀ
DELL’UTENTE assicurarsi che le persone addette all’uso del troncatore da taglio abbiano letto il presente manuale.
Definizioni dei simboli ..........................................................................................................................................................5 - 7
Modello di riferimento............................................................................................................................................................... 8
Etichette adesive ...............................................................................................................................................................9 - 10
Norme di sicurezza – COSE DA FARE, COSE DA NON FARE ............................................................................................... 11
Utilizzo .................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Componenti della troncatrice ................................................................................................................................................. 20
Dati Tecnici ............................................................................................................................................................................. 21
Istruzioni:
Assemblaggio .............................................................................................................................................................22 - 27
Avviamento ........................................................................................................................................................................ 30
Arresto Motore ................................................................................................................................................................... 34
Manutenzione - Rimessaggio .....................................................................................................................................36 - 41
Kit acqua (opzionale) .............................................................................................................................................................. 44
Avviso importante................................................................................................................................................................... 44
Riparazione / Ricambi ............................................................................................................................................................ 44
Certificato di garanzia ............................................................................................................................................................ 46
Nederlands
Inhoudsopgave
ALVORENS TE BEGINNEN:
Lees en begrijp alle waarschuwingen en aanwijzingen alvorens de in deze handleiding beschreven afsnijzaag te gebruiken. DE
WAARSCHUWINGEN EN VOORZORGSMAATREGELEN VAN DEZE HANDLEIDING DIENEN TE WORDEN BEGREPEN
EN IN ACHT GENOMEN! HET NIET IN ACHT NEMEN VAN DE WAARSCHUWINGEN KAN ERNSTIG LETSEL OF DE
DOOD TOT GEVOLG HEBBEN. HET BEHOORT TOT UW VERANTWOORDELIJKHEID u ervan te vergewissen dat alle
personen die de afsnijzaag gebruiken deze handleiding inderdaad gelezen hebben.
Uitleg van de Veiligheidssymbolen ......................................................................................................................................5 - 7
Referentie model ...................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Plakplaatjes .......................................................................................................................................................................9 - 10
Waarschuwingen i.v.m. veiligheid – WAT MOET & WAT NIET MAG. ...................................................................................... 13
Gebruik ................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Figuren / Bediening en Kenmerken ........................................................................................................................................ 20
Technische Gegevens ............................................................................................................................................................ 21
Aanwijzingen:
Montage ......................................................................................................................................................................22 - 27
Starten ............................................................................................................................................................................... 31
Stoppen Van De Motor ...................................................................................................................................................... 34
Onderhoud - Opslag ...................................................................................................................................................36 - 41
Kit Voor Nat Zagen en Watervoorraadtank (optie).................................................................................................................. 44
Belangrijk Advies .................................................................................................................................................................... 44
Herstellingen / Onderdelen..................................................................................................................................................... 44
Garantie Voorwaarden ............................................................................................................................................................ 46
Deutsch
Inhaltsverzeichnis
VOR ANFANG:
Vor Gebrauch der Schnittsäge, die in diesem Heft beschrieben ist, erst alle Warnungen und Anleitungen lesen und verstehen.
DIE WARNUNGEN UND HINWEISE DIESES HEFTES MÜSSEN VERSTANDEN UND BEFOLGT WERDEN! DAS
NICHTBEACHTEN DIESER WARNUNGEN KANN LEBENSGEFAHR ODER ERNSTHAFTE KOERPERVERLETZUNGEN
ZUR FOLGE HABEN. SIE SIND DAFÜR VERANTWORTLICH, daß alle Personen, die eine Schnittsäge benutzen, dieses
Heft durchgelesen haben.
Definition der Symbole ........................................................................................................................................................5 - 7
Modellbeschreibung ................................................................................................................................................................. 8
Warnschilder......................................................................................................................................................................9 - 10
Sicherheitswamungen – Gebote und Verbote ........................................................................................................................ 12
Gebrauch ................................................................................................................................................................................ 19
Abbildungen / Kontrollen und Merkmale ................................................................................................................................ 20
Technische Daten ................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Anleitungen:
Montage ......................................................................................................................................................................22 - 27
Startvorgang ...................................................................................................................................................................... 30
Motor abstellen .................................................................................................................................................................. 34
Wartung - Lagerung ....................................................................................................................................................36 - 41
Nasseinheit und Wassertank (zusätzlich) ............................................................................................................................... 44
Wichtige Ratschläge............................................................................................................................................................... 44
Reparaturen / Ersatzteile ........................................................................................................................................................ 44
Garantiebedingungen ............................................................................................................................................................. 46
Français
Table des matières
AVANT DE COMMENCER:
Avant d’utiliser la scie à trancher décrite dans ce manuel, veiller à lire et à comprendre toutes les mises en garde et instructions.
LES MISES EN GARDE ET PRECAUTIONS FIGURANT DANS CE MANUEL DOIVENT ETRE COMPRISES ET OBSERVEES !
LA NON-OBSERVATION DES MISES EN GARDE RISQUE DE PROVOQUER DES BLESSURES GRAVES OU MORTELLES.
VOUS AVEZ LA RESPONSABILITE de vous assurer que toute personne devant utiliser la scie a lu ce manuel.
Définitions des symboles ....................................................................................................................................................5 - 7
Référence des modèles............................................................................................................................................................ 8
Autocollants.......................................................................................................................................................................9 - 10
Mises en garde de sécurité – FAIRE, NE PAS FAIRE ............................................................................................................. 14
Utilisation ................................................................................................................................................................................ 19
Figures de référence / Commandes et dispositifs ................................................................................................................. 20
Données Techniques .............................................................................................................................................................. 21
Instructions :
Assemblage ................................................................................................................................................................22 - 27
Mise en route ..................................................................................................................................................................... 31
Arrêt du moteur.................................................................................................................................................................. 34
Entretien - Stockage ...................................................................................................................................................36 - 41
Kit Pour Usage Humide et Réservoir D’alimentation en Eau (option) .................................................................................... 44
Conseil Important ................................................................................................................................................................... 44
Réparations / Pièces de rechange ......................................................................................................................................... 44
Conditions de garantie ........................................................................................................................................................... 46
3
 English
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION:
BEFORE YOU BEGIN: Read and understand all warnings and instructions before operating the Cut-off saw described
in this manual. You will find explanations concerning the operation of the various part plus instructions for necessary
checks and relative maintenance. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS IN THIS MANUAL MUST BE UNDERSTOOD AND
FOLLOWED! FAILURE TO OBEY WARNINGS MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. IT IS YOUR
RESPONSIBILITY to make sure persons who use a cut-off saw have read this manual.
Symbol Definitions ..............................................................................................................................................................5 - 7
Model Reference ...................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Decal Descriptions and Locations.....................................................................................................................................9 - 10
Safety Warnings – DO’S and DO NOT’S ................................................................................................................................ 15
Use ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Reference Figures / Controls and Features ............................................................................................................................ 20
Technical Data ........................................................................................................................................................................ 21
Instructions:
Assembly ....................................................................................................................................................................22 - 29
Starting .............................................................................................................................................................................. 32
Stopping the Engine .......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Maintenance – Storage ...............................................................................................................................................38 - 43
Wet Kit and Water Supply Tank .............................................................................................................................................. 45
Important Advice .................................................................................................................................................................... 45
Repairs / Spare Parts ............................................................................................................................................................. 45
Warranty Conditions ............................................................................................................................................................... 47
Português
Indice
ANTES DE COMEÇAR:
Leia e entenda todos os avisos e instruções antes de operar a serra de decepar descrita neste manual. OS AVISOS E AS
PRECAUÇÕES NESTE MANUAL DEVEM SER ENTENDIDOS E SEGUIDOS! A FALTA DE CUMPRIMENTO COM ESTES
AVISOS PODERÁ RESULTAR EM FERIMENTO GRAVE OU MORTE. É sua RESPONSABILIDADE assegurar-se de que
todas as pessoas que usarem a serra de decepar tenham lido este manual.
Definições dos Símbolos.....................................................................................................................................................5 - 7
Referência Modelo ................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Decalques - Descrições e Locais ......................................................................................................................................9 - 10
AVISOS DE SEGURANÇA - SIM E NÃO ................................................................................................................................ 17
Uso ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Referência / Bediening en kenmerken ................................................................................................................................... 20
Dados Tecnicos ...................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Instruções:
Montagem...................................................................................................................................................................22 - 29
Para dar partida ................................................................................................................................................................. 33
Paragem do motor ............................................................................................................................................................. 35
Manutenção - Armazenagem .....................................................................................................................................38 - 43
Estojo molhado e tanque de suprimento de agua (opcional)................................................................................................. 45
Recomendação Importante.................................................................................................................................................... 45
Reparos / Peças Sobressalentes ........................................................................................................................................... 45
Condições de garantia ........................................................................................................................................................... 47
4
Español
Indice
INTRODUCTION:
A N T E S D E C O M E N Z A R : A n t e s d e p ro c e d e r a l m a n e j o d e l a s i e r r a d e t ro c e a r d e s c r i t a e n e s t e
manual, lea y entienda todas las advertencias e instrucciones. ¡RESPETE Y SIGA TODAS LAS
ADVERTENCIAS Y PRECAUCIONES QUE APARECEN EN ESTE MANUAL! ELNO RESPETAR ESTAS ADVERTENCIAS
PUEDE PROVOCAR LESIONES GRAVES O LA MUERTE. USTED ES REPONSABLE de asegurar que las personas
encargadas de usar la sierra hayan leído este manual.
Definiciones de los símbolos...............................................................................................................................................5 - 7
Modelo de Referencia .............................................................................................................................................................. 8
Calcomanias ......................................................................................................................................................................9 - 10
Advertencias de seguridad – HACER y NO HACER .............................................................................................................. 16
Uso ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Figures de referencia / Controles y características ................................................................................................................ 20
Datos Tecnicos ....................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Instrucciones:
Montaje .......................................................................................................................................................................22 - 29
Puesta en marcha .............................................................................................................................................................. 32
Parada del motor ............................................................................................................................................................... 35
Mantenimiento - Almacenaje ......................................................................................................................................38 - 43
Juego de aspersion y deposito de suministro de agua (opcional) ......................................................................................... 45
Consejo Importante ................................................................................................................................................................ 45
Reparaciones / Piezas de repuesto........................................................................................................................................ 45
Condiciones de garantia ........................................................................................................................................................ 47
EÏÏËvÈk∙
¶∂ƒπ∂Ã√ª∂¡∞
¶ƒπ¡ •∂∫π¡∏™∂∆∂:
¢È∙‚¿ÛÙ Î∙È Î∙Ù∙ÓÔ‹ÛÙ fiÏẪ ÙÈ̃ ÚÔÂȉÔÔÈ‹ÛÂÈ̃ Î∙È Ô‰ËÁ›Ẫ ÚÈÓ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ‹ÛÂÙ ÙÔ ÎÔÙÈÎfi ÚÈfiÓÈ fi̂̃ ÂÚÈÁÚ¿ÊÂÙ∙È Û’
∙˘Ùfi ÙÔ ÂÁˉÂÈÚ›‰ÈÔ. √𠶃√∂π¢√¶√π∏™∂π™ ∫∞𠶃√ºÀ§∞•∂π™ ™’ ∞À∆√ ∆√ ∂°Ã∂πƒπ¢π√ ¶ƒ∂¶∂π ¡∞ ∂Ã√À¡ ∫∞∆∞¡√∏£∂π
∫∞π ¡∞ ∞∫√§√À£√À¡∆∞π! ¶∞ƒ∞§∂πæ∏ ™∆∏¡ À¶∞∫√∏ ∆ø¡ ¶ƒ√∂π¢√¶√π∏™∂ø¡ ª¶√ƒ∂π ¡∞ ∂Ã∂π ∞¶√∆∂§∂™ª∞
™√µ∞ƒ√ ∆ƒ∞Àª∞∆π™ª√ ◊ £∞¡∞∆√. ∂π¡∞π ¢π∫∏ ™∞™ ∏ ∂À£À¡∏ Ó∙ ‚‚∙È̂ı›Ù fiÙÈ Ù∙ ¿ÙÔÌ∙ Ô˘ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔÈÔ‡Ó ¤Ó∙
ÎÔÙÈÎfi ÚÈfiÓÈ ¤ˉÔ˘Ó ‰È∙‚¿ÛÂÈ ∙˘Ùfi ÙÔ ÂÁˉÂÈÚ›‰ÈÔ.
¶ÂÚÈÁÚ∙Ê‹ ™˘Ì‚fiÏ̂Ó .........................................................................................................................................................5 - 7
∞Ó∙ÊÔÚ¿ ªÔÓÙ¤ÏÔ˘ ................................................................................................................................................................. 8
∞˘ÙÔÎfiÏÏËÙ∙ - ¶ÂÚÈÁÚ∙Ê‹ Î∙È £¤ÛË ................................................................................................................................9 - 10
¶ƒ√∂π¢√¶√π∏™∂π™ ∞™º∞§∂π∞™ - ∆π ¡∞ ∫∞¡∂∆∂ ∫∞π ∆π √Ãπ ............................................................................................. 18
XPH™H.................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
∂•∞ƒ∆∏ª∞∆∞ ¢π™∫√À ∫√¶∏™ ............................................................................................................................................ 20
∆∂áπ∫∞ Ã∞ƒ∞∫∆∏ƒπ™∆π∫∞ ................................................................................................................................................. 21
√‰ËÁ›Ẫ:
™À¡∞ƒª√§√°∏™∏ ....................................................................................................................................................22 - 29
∂ÎΛÓËÛË ............................................................................................................................................................................ 33
™∆∞ª∞∆∏ª∞ ∆√À ª√∆∂ƒ ............................................................................................................................................... 35
™˘ÓÙ‹ÚËÛË- ºÀ§∞•∏ .................................................................................................................................................38 - 43
™∂∆ À°ƒ∏™ §∂π∆√Àƒ°π∞™ ∫∞π ¢∂•∞ª∂¡∏ ∆ƒ√º√¢√™π∞™ ¡∂ƒ√À (ÚÔ∙ÈÚÂÙÈÎfi) .......................................................... 45
™∏ª∞¡∆π∫∏ ™Àªµ√À§∏ ...................................................................................................................................................... 45
∂ÈÛ΢¤̃ / ∞ÓÙ∙ÏÏ∙ÎÙÈο ..................................................................................................................................................... 45
√ƒ√π ∂°°À∏™∏™ .................................................................................................................................................................... 47
Definizioni dei simboli • Divieto
• Prohibition
Symbol Definitions • Verboten
Definition der Symbole • Verboden
• Interdiction
Uitleg van de Veiligheidssymbolen • Prohibición
Définitions des symboles • Proibição
• ∞∙ÁfiÚ¢ÛË
Definiciones de los símbolos
Definições dos Símbolos • Triangolo di avvertenza
• Warning Triangle
√ÚÈÛÌfĩ ™˘Ì‚fiÏ̂Ó • Warndreieck
• Waarschuwingsdriehoek
• Triangle d’avertissement
• Triángulo de advertencia
• Questo simbolo indica che la macchina è conforme alla direttiva europea. • Triângulo de Aviso
• This symbol indicates that the machine is in conformance with the applicable European • ∆Ú›Á̂ÓÔ ¶ÚÔÂȉÔÔ›ËÛË̃
directive.
• Dieses Zeichen bedeutet, daß die Maschinae der europäischen Richtlinie entspricht. • Portare occhialoni di sicurezza
• Dit symbool betekent dat de machine voldoet aan de Europese richtlijn. • Wear Eye Protection
• Ce symbole signifie que la machine est conforme à la Directive Européenne. • Augenschutz tragen
• Este anagrama certifica que la máquina cumple con la normativa europea. • Draag oogbescherming
• Este símbolo indica que a máquina está conforme a diretriz européia aplicável. • Port obligatoire des lunettes de protection
• ∞˘Ùfi ÙÔ Û‡Ì‚ÔÏÔ ‰ËÏÒÓÂÈ fiÙÈ ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ Û˘ÌÌÔÚÊÒÓÂÙ∙È Ì ÙËÓ ∙ÚÌfi˙Ô˘Û∙ ∂˘Ú̂∙˚΋ • Usar gafas de protección
√‰ËÁ›∙. • Use Proteção para a Vista
• ºÔÚ¿ÙÂ ¶ÚÔÛÙ∙Û›∙ ª∙ ÙÈÒÓ
• Prima della messa in funzione, leggere attentamente le istruzioni d’uso e prendere confidenza
con la macchina. • Portare una maschera di protezione antipolvere
• Please read the instructions for use prior to operating the machine for the first time. • Wear Breathing Protection
• Bitte lesen Sie vor Inbetriebnahme die Bedienungsanleitung aufmerksam durch und machen • Atemschutz tragen
Sie sich mit der Maschine vertraut. • Draag ademhalingsbescherming
• Voor het in gebruik nemen van de machine, eerst aandachtig de handleiding lezen en uzelf • Port obligatoire d’un masque respiratoire protecteur
vertrouwd maken met de machine. • Usar máscara de protección
• Avant toute mise en service, lire attentivement la notice et se familiariser avec la machine. • Use Proteção para Respiração
• Antes de la puesta en marcha, lea detenidamente las instrucciones y familiaricese con la • ºÔÚ¿Ù ¶ÚÔÛÙ∙Ù¢ÙÈÎfi ∞Ó∙ÓÔ‹̃
máquina.
• Por favor, leia as instruções de uso antes de operar a máquina pela primeira vez. • È d’obbligo la cuffia antirumore
• ¶∙Ú∙Î∙Ï›ÛÙ Ó∙ ‰È∙‚¿ÛÂÙ ÙÈ̃ Ô‰ËÁ›Ẫ ˉÚ‹ÛÂ̂̃ ÚÈÓ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ‹ÛÂÙ ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ ÁÈ∙ • The use of ear protection is mandatory
ÚÒÙË ÊÔÚ¿. • Gehörschutz tragen!
• Dragen van oorbescherming verplicht!
• Obbligatorio • Port obligatoire d’un casque antibruit
• Mandatory • Es obligatorio el uso de protección auditiva
• Verpflichtet • O Uso de Proteção para o Ouvido é Obrigatório
• Verplicht • ∏ ÃÚ‹ÛË ¶ÚÔÛÙ∙Û›∙̃ ∞ÎÔ‹̃ ∂›Ó∙È ÀÔˉÚÂ̂ÙÈ΋
• Obligatoire
• Obligatorio • Portare un elmetto rigido
• Obrigatório • Wear a Hard Hat
• ÀÔˉÚÂ̂ÙÈÎfi • Schutzhelm tragen
• Draag een helm
• Indicazione • Port obligatoire d’un casque de protection
• Indication • Usar casco duro
• Hinweis • Use Proteção para a Cabeça
• Aanwijzing • ºÔÚ¿ÙÂ ∫Ú¿ÓỖ
• Indication
• Indicación
• Indicação
• ŒÓ‰ÂÈÍË

5
 • Calzare scarponi di sicurezza rinforzati • Pericolo: gas di scarico tossici
• Wear Safety Shoes • Danger, Poison Exhaust Gas
• Sicherheitsschühe tragen • Gefahr - Giftiges Abgas
• Draag veiligheidsschoenen • Opgelet, giftige uitlaatgassen.
• Port obligatoire des chaussures de sécurité • Danger. Gaz d’échappement toxiques
• Usar zapatos de seguridad • Peligro, gases de escape tóxicos
• Use Sapatos de Segurança • Perigo, Gás de Escape Venenoso
• ºÔÚ¿Ù ¶∙Ô‡ÙÛÈ∙ ∞ÛÊ∙Ï›∙̃ • ∫›Ó‰˘ÓỖ, ¢ËÏËÙËÚÈÒ‰Ë ∞¤ÚÈ∙ ∂Í¿ÙÌÈÛË̃

• Indossare adeguati indumenti di lavoro • Non autorizzare l’accessso all’area di lavoro ai non addetti.
• Wear Appropriate Clothing • No Non-working Personnel In Area
• Entsprechende Kleidung tragen • Keine Nicht-Arbeitende Personen im Arbeitsbereich
• Draag aangepaste kledij • Alleen werkend personeel op de werf.
• Port obligatoire de la tenue appropriée • Zone interdite au personnel non-ouvrier
• Usar ropa adecuada • Prohibido para personas ajenas a la obra
• Use Roupas Apropriadas • Proibida a Presença de Pessoal que Não estiver Trabalhando na Área
• ºÔÚ¿Ù Ù∙ ∫∙Ù¿ÏÏËÏ∙ ƒÔ‡ˉ∙ • ¡∙ ªËÓ À¿ÚˉÂÈ ¶ÚÔÛ̂ÈÎfi ¶Ô˘ ¢ÂÓ ∂ÚÁ¿˙ÂÙ∙È ÛÙËÓ ¶ÏËÛ›ÔÓ ¶ÂÚÈÔˉ‹

• Arresto motore • Vietato fumare

• Motor off • No Smoking
• Motor abstellen! • Nicht rauchen
• Motor uitzetten! • Verboden te roken
• Arrêt du moteur • Défense de fumer
• Parar el motor • No fumar
• Desligue o Motor • É Proibido Fumar
• ∫ÈÓËÙ‹Ú∙̃ ™‚ËÛÙfĩ • ∞∙ÁÔÚ‡ÂÙ∙È ÙÔ ∫¿ÓÈÛÌ∙

• Utilizzare in presenza di un’adeguata ventilazione • Non utilizzare senza i dispositivi di protezione debitamente montati.
• Use In Well Ventilated Area • Do Not Operate Without All Guards In Place.
• In gut ventilierten Räumen benutzen • Die Maschine nur benutzen, wenn alle Schutzvorrichtungen korrekt angebracht sind.
• Gebruik de machine in een goed verluchte ruimte. • Start nooit de machine zonder correct gemonteerde beschermkappen.
• A utiliser dans un endroit bien ventilé • Ne pas utiliser avant d’avoir installé toutes les protections.
• Usar en una área bien ventilada • No operar sin todas las protecciones in su sitio.
• Use em Áreas Bem Ventiladas • Não Opere Sem que Todos os Protetores estejam no Lugar.
• ¡∙ ÃÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠™Â ∫∙Ï¿ ∞ÂÚÈṲ̂ÓÔ˘̃ ÃÒÚÔ˘̃ • ¡∙ ªË ÃÂÈÚ›˙ÂÛÙ Ã̂Ú›̃ ŸÏ∙ Ù∙ ¶ÚÔÛÙ∙Ù¢ÙÈο ∫∙χÌÌ∙Ù∙ ÛÙË £¤ÛË ÙÔ˘̃.

• Non utilizzare in aree esposte a rischi di incendio. • Tenere sempre montati i carter disco.
• Do Not Use In Flammable Areas • Always Keep the Blade Guards In Place.
• Nicht in feuergefährlichen Bereichen einsetzen. • Schutzvorrichtungen immer an ihren Platz behalten.
• Gebruik nooit de machine in een ontvlambare ruimte. • Hou de beschermkappen steeds op hun plaats.
• Ne pas utiliser dans des ambiances comportant un risque d’incendie • Toujours vérifier que les protections de disque sont bien en place.
• No usar in áreas inflamables • Mantenga siempre las protecciones de la hoja en su sitio.
• Não Use em Áreas Inflamáveis • Sempre Mantenha os Protetores da Lâmina no Lugar.
• ¡∙ ÌË ÃÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠™Â ∂‡ÊÏÂÎÙÔ˘̃ ÃÒÚÔ˘̃ • √È ¶ÚÔÊ˘Ï∙ÎÙ‹ÚẪ ¶Ú¤ÂÈ Ó∙ µÚ›ÛÎÔÓÙ∙È ¶¿ÓÙ∙ ÛÙË £¤ÛË ÙÔ˘̃.

• Rischi inerenti al macchinario. Tenere lontano le mani e i piedi dalle parti mobili della macchina. • Rumorositá elevata: rischio di lesione all’apparato uditivo
• Machinery Hazard, Keep Hands and Feet Clear. • Dangerously High Noise Level
• Vorsicht, Gefahr! Hände und Füze der Maschine fernhalten. • Gefährlicher hoher Schallpegel
• Opgelet, gevaar! Hou handen en voeten uit de buurt van de machine. • Gevaarlijk hoog geluidsniveau
• Danger! Rester à distance de la machine • Niveau de bruit dangereux
• Máquina peligrosa - Mantenga manos y pies alejados de la máquina • Nivel de ruido elevadamente peligroso
• Maquinário Perigoso, Mantenha Distância das Mãos e dos Pés • Nível de Ruído Altamente Perigoso
• ∫›Ó‰˘ÓỖ ∙fi ªËˉ∙Ó‹Ì∙Ù∙, ∫Ú∙Ù‹ÛÙ Ù∙ äÚÈ∙ Î∙È Ù∙ ¶fi‰È∙ ª∙ÎÚÈ¿ • ∂ÈΛӉ˘Ó∙ À„ËÏ‹ ŒÓÙ∙ÛË ◊ˉÔ˘

6
• Mantenere l’area di lavoro pulita e correttamente illuminata. Rimouvere tutti gli elementi che • Diametro del disco
presentino un rischio potenziale per la sicurezza. • Blade Diameter
• Keep Work Area Clean/Well Lit, Remove All Safety Hazards • Trennscheibendurchmesser
• Arbeitsbereich sorgfältig aufgeräumtund gut beleuchtet halten + alle eut. Risiken entferneu • Zaagbladdiameter
• Hou de werkplaats proper en goed verlicht. Verwijder alle risicopunten • Diamètre de disque
• La zone de travail doit toujours être propre, bien éclairée et ne présenter aucun risque • Diámetro de la hoja
• Mantenga limpio el sitio de trabajo/bien iluminado, elimine todos los riesgos de seguridad • Diâmetro da Lâmina
• Mantenha a Área de Serviço Limpa/Bem Iluminada: Remova Todos os Riscos de Acidente • ¢È¿ÌÂÙÚỖ §Â›‰∙̃
• ¡∙ ¢È∙ÙËÚ›Ù ÙÔ ÃÒÚÔ ∂ÚÁ∙Û›∙̃ ∫∙ı∙Úfi / ∫∙Ï¿ º̂ÙÈṲ̂ÓÔ. ∞Ê∙ÈÚ¤ÛÙ ŸÏÔ˘̃ ÙÔ˘̃
∫ÈÓ‰‡ÓÔ˘̃ ∞ÛÊ∙Ï›∙̃ • Numero di giri al minuto (velocitá de rotazione) del disco
• Number of Revolutions Per Minute, Rotational Speed
• Prestare la massima cura e attenzione alla preparazione della macchina prima della MESSA • Umdrehhungen je/pro Minute, Arbeitshöchstgeschwindigkeit
IN MOTO. • Aantal omwentelingen per minuut, toerental
• Pay Extreme Attention To The Care And Protection Of The Machine Before Starting Up • Nombre de tours/minutes, vitesse de rotation
• Bereiten Sie die Machine vor Inbetriebnahme immer mit größen Sorgfalt vor • N° de revoluciones por minuto, velocidad de rotación
• Besteed bijzondere aandacht aan onderhoud en voorbereiding van de machine voor • Número de Revoluções por Minuto, Velocidade de Rotação
ingebruikname. • ∞ÚÈıÌfĩ ¶ÂÚÈÛÙÚÔÊÒÓ ∞Ó¿ §ÂÙÒÓ, ¶ÂÚÈÛÙÚÔÊÈ΋ ∆∙ˉ‡ÙËÙ∙
• Accorder une très grande attention à la sécurité et à la préparation de la machine avant de
commencer à travailler • Velocità nominale
• Ponga extrema atención al cuidado y preparación de la máquina antes de ponerla en • Rated Speed
marcha • Richtgeschwindigkeit
• Preste Muita Atenção ao Cuidado e Proteção da Máquina Antes de Ligar. • Nominale snelheid
• ¡∙ ¶ÚÔÛ¤ˉÂÙ ¶Ôχ ÁÈ∙ ÙËÓ ¶ÚÔÛÙ∙Û›∙ Î∙È ºÚÔÓÙ›‰∙ ÙÔ˘ ªËˉ∙Ó‹Ì∙ÙỖ ¶ÚÈÓ ÙËÓ ∂ÎΛÓËÛË • Vitesse nominale
• Velocidad nominale
• Togliere tutti gli attrezzi dall’area di lavoro e dalla macchina. • Velocidade nominal
• Remove Tools From Area and Machine • µ∙ıÌÔÓÔÌË̤ÓË ∆∙ˉ‡ÙËÙ∙
• Alle Werkzeuge aus dem Arbeitsbereich und Maschine entfernen
• Verwijder gereedschappen van de werf en de machine.
• Enlever les outils de la zone de travail et de la machine
• Elimine las herramientas del área y de la máquina
• Remova as Ferramentas da Área e da Máquina
• ∞Ê∙ÈÚ¤ÛÙ Ù∙ ∂ÚÁ∙Ï›∙ Î∙È ÙÔ ªËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ ∙fi ÙËÓ ¶ÂÚÈÔˉ‹

• Solo benzina senza piombo

• Unleaded fuel only
• Nur bleifreies Benzin
• Alleen loodvrije benzine
• Carburant sans plomb uniquement
• Solamente combustible sin plomo
• Apenas Combustível sem Chumbo
• ∞ÌfiÏ˘‚‰Ë µÂÓ˙›ÓË ªfiÓÔ

• Disco diamantato
• Diamond Blade
• Diamantscheibe
• Diamantzaagblad
• Disque diamanté
• Sierra diamantada
• Lâmina de Diamante
• §Â›‰∙ Ì ∞‰∙Ì¿ÓÙÈÓË ∂ÈÎ¿Ï˘„Ë

7
 ATTENZIONE!!! ACHTUNG
RISCHIO DI LESIONE ALL’APPARATO UDITIVO GEFAHR FÜR GEHÖRSCHADEN: BEI NORMALER BENUTZUNG DIESER
NELLE NORMALI CONDIZIONI DI UTILIZZO, QUESTA MACCHINA PUÒ COMPORTARE PER L’OPERATORE MASCHINE KANN DER BEDIENER EINEN SCHALLDRUCK VON
ADDETTO UN ESPOSIZIONE ACUSTICA DI LIVELLO PARI O SUPERIORE 85 dB (A) UND MEHR AUSGESETZT SEIN.
A 85 dB (A)

OPGELET ATTENTION
GEVAAR VOOR OORBESCHADIGING BIJ NORMALE BEDIENING; RISQUE DE DÉTÉRIORATION AUDITIVE
DEZE MACHINE KAN DE BEDIENER BLOOTSTELLEN AAN DANS LES CONDITIONS NORMALES D’UTILISATION, CETTE MACHINE PEUT COMPORTER POUR
85 dB (A) OF MEER L’OPÉRATEUR, UN NIVEAU D’EXPOSITION SONORE ÉGALE OU SUPÉRIEUR À 85 dB (A)

WARNING ATENCION
HEARING HAZARD
RIESGO DE DAÑO AUDITIVO
DURING NORMAL USE OF THIS MACHINE, OPERATOR MAY BE
EN CONDICIONES NORMALES DE UTILIZACIÓN, EL OPERADOR DE ESTA MÁQUINA PUEDE ESTAR
EXPOSED TO A NOISE LEVEL EQUAL OR SUPERIOR TO
EXPUESTO A UN NIVEL DE RUIDO IGUAL O
85 dB (A)
SUPERIOR A 85 dB (A)

AVISO ¶ƒ√∂π¢√¶√π∏™∏
PERIGO PARA A AUDIÇÃO ∫π¡¢À¡√™ ∞∫√∏™ ∫∞∆∞ ∆∏¡ ∫∞¡√¡π∫∏ Ã∏™∏ ∞À∆∏™ ∆∏™ ª∏Ã∞¡∏™,
DURANTE O USO NORMAL DESTA MÁQUINA. O OPERADOR PODERÁ √ Ã∂πƒπ™∆∏™ ª¶√ƒ∂π ¡∞ ∂π¡∞π ∂∫∆∂£∂πª∂¡√™ ™∂ ∂¶π¶∂¢√ £√ƒÀµ√À π™√
FICAR EXPOSTO A UM NÍVEL DE RUÍDO IGUAL ◊ ª∂°∞§À∆∂ƒ√ ∞¶√ 85dB (A)
OU SUPERIOR A 85dB(A)

MODELLO LIVELLO PRESSIONE LIVELLO POTENZA LIVELLO VIBRAZIONI

MODEL PRESSURE LEVEL POWER LEVEL VIBRATION LEVEL
AUSFÜHRUNG SCHALLDRUCK SCHALLEISTUNG SCHWINGUNGSPEGEL
MODEL GELUIDSDRUK NIVEAU GELUIDS-NIVEAU VIBRATIE NIVEAU
MODELE NIVEAU DE PRESSION NIVEAU DE PUISSANCE NIVEAU DE VIBRATION
MODELO PRESIÓN ACÚSTICA NIVEL SONORO NIVEL DE VIBRACIÓN
MODELO NÍVEL DE PRESSÃO NÍVEL DE FORÇA NÍVEL DE VIBRAÇÃO
ª√¡∆∂§√ ∂¶π¶∂¢√ ¶π∂™∏™ ∂¶π¶∂¢√ π™ÃÀ√™ ∂¶π¶∂¢√ ∫ƒ∞¢∞™ªø¡
LpA eq LwA eq
EN 1454 - EN 28662-1
EN 1454 - EN ISO 11201 EN 1454 - EN ISO 3744
9.5 (SX) - 11.4 (DX) m/s2 (Idling)
963TT-A - TT163 (12”-14”) 101 dB(A)* 109 dB(A)* 9.2 (SX) - 10.9 (DX) m/s2 (Rated spindle speed)
10.1 (SX) - 12.0 (DX) m/s2 (Idling)
963TT-A - TT163 (12”-14”) 102 dB(A)* 111 dB(A)* 11.0 (SX) - 11.7 (DX) m/s2 (Rated spindle speed)
8.9 (SX) - 4.9 (DX) m/s2 (Idling)
983TT-A - TT183 (16”) 102 dB(A)* 111 dB(A)*
10.9 (SX) - 11.5 (DX) m/s2 (Rated spindle speed)
*I - Valori medi ponderati (1/2 minimo, 1/2 velocità max a vuoto). E - Valores medios ponderados (1/2 minimo, 1/2 velocidad máxima en vacío).
GB - Weighted average values (1/2 minimum rpm, 1/2 racing). NL - Gewogen gemiddelde waarden (1/2 minimum, 1/2 max. snelheid leeg).
F - Valeurs moyennes poundérés (1/2 au ralenti, 1/2 vitesse en pointe dans le vide). P - Valores médios ponderados (1/2 minimo, 1/2 velocidade máx. em vazio).
D - Mittelwerte (1/2 Leerlauf, 1/2 max. Geschwindigkeit unbeladen). GR - M¤Û̃ ˙˘ÁÈṲ̂Ó̃ ÙÈ̤̃ (1/2 Ï¿ˉÈÛÙÔ, 1/2 ̤Á. Ù∙ˉ‡ÙËÙ∙ ˉ̂Ú›̃ ÊÔÚÙ›Ô).

8
 ETICHETTE ADESIVE DECALS
WARNSCHILDER CALCOMANIAS
PLAKPLAATJES DECALQUES
AUTOCOLLANTS ¶π¡∞∫π¢ø¡
Avvertenza: Controllare che tutte le avvertenze di sicurezza
e le etichette recanti le istruzioni di funzionamento siano
affisse correttamente alla macchina e chiaramente
visibili. Sostituire le etichette che appaiono danneggiate
o scollate.
R.P.M.
War nung: Prüfen, ob alle Sicherheitswar n- und
Bedienungsschilder ordnungsgemäß an der Maschine
befestigt und deutlich lesbar sind. Alle Schilder, die
5100 KIT 1 ÷ 6

beschädigt oder entfernt würden, wieder ersetzen.

Wa a r s c h u w i n g : C o n t ro l e e r o f a l l e l a b e l s m e t R.P.M.
waarschuwingen i.v.m. veiligheid en bediening goed op
de eenheid bevestigd en goed leesbaar zijn. Vervang alle
beschadigde of ontbrekende labels.
- Collocazione: coperchio filtro
- Lokalization: Luftfilter Deckel
- Lokaliteit: luchtfilter deksel
- Positionnement: couvercle filtre à aire
4700 KIT 7 ÷ 9

Mise en garde : Vérifier que tous les autocollants de

sécurité, mises en garde et utilisation sont correctement - Location: filter cover - Collocazione: protezione disco
fixés sur la machine et parfaitement lisibles. Remplacer - Colocación: tapa filtro de aria - Lokalization: Trennscheiben-Schutzhaube
ceux qui sont endommagés ou perdus. - Colocação: tampa filtro de aria - Lokaliteit: schijfbeschermong
- ºÈÚÙÂÚ ‰ÈÛÎÔÓ - Positionnement: protection du disque
Warning: Verify that all safety warning and operation - Location: disk guard
labels are properly affixed to the unit and are clearly - Colocación: protección del disco
legible. Replace any labels that have become damaged - Colocação: protecção do disco
or removed. KIT 1 ÷ 9 - ∫∙ÚÙÂÚ ‰ÈÛÎÔÓ
Advertencia: Verifique que todas las etiquetas de operación
y de advertencia de seguridad están debidamente
adheridas a la máquina y claramente legibles. Reemplace
las etiquetas que se han dañado o desprendido.

Aviso: Assegure-se de que todos os avisos de segurança

e rótulos de operação estejam devidamente afixados
Collocazione: coperchio filtro
na unidade e estejam perfeitamente legíveis. Substitua
Lokalization: Luftfilter Deckel
qualquer rótulo que esteja danificado ou tenha sido Lokaliteit: luchtfilter deksel
removido. Positionnement: couvercle filtre à aire
Location: filter cover
¶ÚÔÂȉÔÔ›ËÛË: ∂Ȃ‚∙ÈÒÛÙ fiÙÈ fiÏẪ ÔÈ ÂÈÁÚ∙ʤ̃ Colocación: tapa filtro de aria
ÚÔÂȉÔÔÈ‹ÛÂ̂Ó ∙ÛÊ∙Ï›∙̃ Î∙È ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›∙̃ ‚Ú›ÛÎÔÓÙ∙È Colocação: tampa filtro de aria
Î∙Ù¿ÏÏËÏ∙ ÙÔÔıÂÙË̤ÓẪ ÛÙË ÌÔÓ¿‰∙ Î∙È Â›Ó∙È ºÈÚÙÂÚ ‰ÈÛÎÔÓ
¢∙Ó¿ÁÓ̂ÛÙẪ. ∞ÓÙÈÎ∙Ù∙ÛÙ‹ÛÙ οı ÂÙÈΤÙ∙ Ô˘ ¤ˉÂÈ
Î∙Ù∙ÛÙÚ∙Ê› ‹ ∙Ê∙ÈÚÂı›.

KIT 1 ÷ 9

9
 1 1
4 4
7 983 TT-A 963 TT-A

2
5 2
8 TT 183 TT 163
5
3
6
9 983 TT-A 963 TT-A
3
6
- Collocazione: convogliatore / carter copricinghia
- Lokalization: Seitlichdeckel
- Lokaliteit: zijdeksel - Collocazione: coperchio filtro
- Positionnement: couvercle latéral - Lokalization: Luftfilter Deckel
- Location: side cover - Lokaliteit: luchtfilter deksel
- Colocación: tapa lateral - Positionnement: couvercle filtre à air
- Colocação: tampa lateral - Location: filter cover
- AÂÚỖ - Colocación: tapa filtro de aria
- Colocação: tampa filtro do ar
- ºÈÏÙÚÔ aÂÚỖ

16” 12” - 14”

cod./p.n. 52012101 KIT ➆ 983 TT-A Oleo-Mac cod./p.n. 52012098 KIT ➀ KIT ➃ 963 TT-A Oleo-Mac cod./p.n. 52022064
cod./p.n. 52012102 KIT ➇ TT 183 Efco cod./p.n. 52012099 KIT ➁ KIT ➄ TT 163 Efco cod./p.n. 52022065
cod./p.n. 52012103 KIT ➈ 983 TT-A Efco cod./p.n. 52012100 KIT ➂ KIT ➅ 963 TT-A Efco cod./p.n. 52022066
10
 Italiano

Norme di Sicurezza

COSA DA FARE Accertarsi che il disco di taglio non entri in contatto con alcun oggetto prima di avviare il motore.
LA SICUREZZA È IMPORTANTE! COSA DA FARE Usare cautela durante il sollevamento e il trasporto della macchina.
COSA DA FARE Controllare sempre che non vi siano cavi elettrici sotterrati prima di accingersi ad usare il troncatore. In
caso di dubbio, contattare le autorità competenti locali.

 
AVVERTENZE COSA DA FARE Fare eseguire ogni intervento di manutenzione – tranne quelli descritti nel presente manuale – da personale
competente.
COSE DA FARE e DA NON FARE COSA DA FARE
COSA DA FARE
Legare sempre la macchina durante il trasporto.
Usare cautela e seguire le istruzioni durante la messa a punto e il trasporto della macchina.
COSA DA FARE Pulire la macchina ogni giorno dopo l’uso.
IL MANCATO RISPETTO DELLE SEGUENTI AVVERTENZE E ISTRUZIONI DI FUNZIONAMENTO PUÒ COSA DA FARE Fornire una copia del presente manuale all’utente della macchina. Per richiedere copie, contattare il
RISULTARE IN INCIDENTI MORTALI O GRAVI LESIONI PERSONALI rivenditore locale.
NON utilizzare la macchina prima di aver letto attentamente il presente manuale per l’operatore
NON utilizzare la macchina se il carter del disco di taglio e gli altri carter non sono installati.
COSA DA FARE Leggere l’intero manuale dell’operatore prima di azionare la macchina. Leggere attentamente tutte le NON sostare davanti o dietro il percorso del disco di taglio quando il motore è in funzione.
avvertenze, istruzioni e familiarizzarsi con il funzionamento dei comandi. NON lasciare la macchina incustodita quando il motore è in funzione.
COSA DA FARE Mantenere tutti i carter in posizione e in buone condizioni. NON utilizzare la macchina quando si è stanchi o affaticati.
COSA DA FARE Indossare protezioni di sicurezza di tipo approvato per l’udito, gli occhi, la testa e la respirazione. NON usare dischi abrasivi di spessore inferiore a 3,17 mm (1/8”).
COSA DA FARE Leggere attentamente tutte le avvertenze e istruzioni presenti sul troncatore. NON usare dischi raffreddati ad acqua senza un rifornimento di acqua adeguato per il disco.
COSA DA FARE Leggere attentamente tutte le definizioni dei simboli contenute nel presente manuale. NON superare la velocità massima del disco indicata per la misura di disco usata. La velocità eccessiva potrebbe provocare
COSA DA FARE Tenere tutte le parti del corpo lontano dal disco di taglio e da tutte le parti mobili. la rottura del disco
COSA DA FARE Imparare come spegnere rapidamente il troncatore in caso di emergenza. NON usare attrezzature o dischi danneggiati.
COSA DA FARE Ricordarsi di spegnere il motore e lasciarlo raffreddare prima di effettuare il rifornimento di carburante. NON tentare di fermare con le mani dischi in movimento.
COSA DA FARE Controllare che il disco di taglio, le flange e gli alberi non siano danneggiati prima di installare il disco di NON utilizzare alcun disco abrasivo che sia caduto a terra.
taglio. NON usare dischi con punte al carburo o dentati.
COSA DA FARE Utilizzare esclusivamente dischi abrasivi rinforzati ad alta velocità di spessore minimo pari a 3,17 mm (1/8”), NON utilizzare dischi diamantati segmentati tranne che non siano fabbricati appositamente per troncatori manuali ad alta
o dischi diamantati ad alta velocità con una velocità nominale massima di almeno 5400 giri/min. per dischi velocità.
da 350 mm o di almeno 6200 giri/min. per dischi da 300 mm. NON inserire dischi con fori per albero portadisco da 25,4 mm (1”) su flange da 20 mm.
COSA DA FARE Usare esclusivamente dischi abrasivi rinforzati ad alta velocità, o dischi diamantati ad alta velocità con foro NON molare usando il lato da taglio.
da 25,4mm (1”) per flangia da 25,4 mm (1”), o con foro da 20 mm per flangia da 20 mm. NON forzare lateralmente, inceppare o incuneare il disco nella linea di taglio.
COSA DA FARE Usare esclusivamente dischi abrasivi o dischi diamantati ad alta velocità fabbricati appositamente per NON utilizzare la macchina se il disco non smette di ruotare quando viene rilasciato il grilletto dell’acceleratore.
seghe per calcestruzzo portatili, manuali, a benzina. NON iniziare a tagliare prima di aver approntato e sgombrato l’area di lavoro.
COSA DA FARE Verificare la configurazione della della trasmissione troncatore controllando i giri/min. dell’albero portadisco, NON permettere ad altre persone di sostare in prossimità della macchina quando si avvia, si rifornisce o si utilizza il
i diametri delle pulegge e della flangia del disco. troncatore.
COSA DA FARE Leggere tutte le informazioni di sicurezza dei materiali e le istruzioni allegati ai dischi utilizzati con il NON utilizzare la macchina in prossimità di prodotti infiammabili, poiché le scintille potrebbero provocare un incendio o
troncatore. un’esplosione.
COSA DA FARE Ispezionare attentamente ogni disco prima di utilizzarlo. Qualora si notino segni di danneggiamento o NON consentire agli astanti o ad animali di sostare nell’area di lavoro durante l’uso della macchina.
logorio, NON USARE IL DISCO. NON utilizzare il troncatore sotto l’influenza di sostanze stupefacenti o alcool.
COSA DA FARE Verificare che il foro dell’albero portadisco corrisponda alle dimensioni del mandrino della macchina prima NON toccare alcun disco diamantato asciutto dopo l’uso. Sono necessari alcuni minuti affinché il disco si raffreddi dopo
di installare il disco. ogni taglio.
COSA DA FARE Installare il disco correttamente e serrare con una chiave inglese il dado dell’albero. NON utilizzare flange danneggiate o logorate.
COSA DA FARE Assicurarsi che il disco e le flange siano puliti e privi di sporcizia o detriti prima di installare il disco sul NON utilizzare la macchina in ambienti chiusi che non siano ben ventilati.
troncatore. NON lasciare che il disco rimanga esposto di oltre 180 gradi rispetto al carter.
COSA DA FARE Utilizzare il disco giusto per ogni tipo di lavoro. In caso di dubbio circa il tipo di disco da utilizzare, contattare NON utilizzare il troncatore con entrambe le mani sulle impugnature.
la casa fabbricante del disco.
COSA DA FARE Reggere sempre il troncatore con entrambe le mani quando il motore è in funzione. Usare una salda presa *****************
afferrando le impugnature con tutte le dita della mano. Questo troncatore deve essere utilizzato soltanto per determinate applicazioni. NON modificare il
COSA DA FARE Tenere tutte le parti del corpo lontano dai dischi di taglio quando il motore è in funzione troncatore, né usarlo per scopi diversi da quelli per cui è stato progettato. In caso di dubbio in merito
COSA DA FARE Mantenere le impugnature asciutte, pulite e prive di olio o carburante.
alle applicazioni di questo troncatore, NON utilizzarlo prima di rivolgersi ed aver ricevuto istruzioni
COSA DA FARE Trasportare sempre il troncatore a motore spento e con il silenziatore lontano dal corpo.
COSA DA FARE Usare cautela e seguire le istruzioni durante il caricamento e lo scaricamento del troncatore. specifiche.
COSA DA FARE Utilizzare la macchina soltanto in aree ben ventilate.
COSA DA FARE Impartire istruzioni agli astanti circa l’area in cui devono sostare durante il funzionamento del troncatore.
COSA DA FARE Organizzare un programma di addestramento per tutti gli operatori della macchina.
COSA DA FARE Far sgombrare i non addetti dall’area di lavoro. Non lasciare mai sostare nessuno davanti o dietro il disco
di taglio quando il motore è in funzione. Usare cautela durante il maneggio del carburante.
COSA DA FARE Spostare la macchina almeno 3 metri dal punto di rifornimento di carburante prima di avviare il motore ed
assicurarsi che i tappi della benzina sul troncatore e sulla tanica di carburante siano ben chiusi.

11
 Deutsch

Sicherheitshinweise

IMMER vor dem Sägen erst prüfen, ob unterirdische elektrische Kabel vorhanden sind. Im Zweifelsfall bei den örtlichen
SICHERHEIT ZUERST! Elektrizitätswerken nachfragen.
IMMER alle Wartung, abgesehen von den in diesem Heft beschriebenen Handlungen, vom zuständigen Wartungspersonal verrichten
lassen.

 
WARNUNGEN IMMER
IMMER
bei Transport die Maschine fest anbinden.
beim Aufstellen oder Transport der Maschine vorsichtig vorgehen und die Anleitungen befolgen.
IMMER die Maschine nach dem täglichen Gebrauch säubern.
IMMER und NIEMALS IMMER dem Benutzer eine Ausgabe dieses Heftes aushändigen.

NIEMALS diese Maschine benutzen, wenn Sie nicht dieses Heft gelesen und verstanden haben.
WARNUNG:DAS NICHTBEACHTEN DIESER WARNUNGEN UND NIEMALS diese Maschine benutzen, wenn nicht der Scheibenschutz oder die andere Schutzbleche ordnungsgemäß angebracht
GEBRAUCHSANLEITUNGEN KANN LEBENSGEFAHR ODER ERNSTHAFTE sind.
KÖRPERVERLETZUNGEN ZUR FOLGE HABEN NIEMALS direkt hinter oder in der Sägerichtung stehen, solange der Motor läuft.
NIEMALS diese Maschine unbeaufsichtigt lassen, solange der Motor läuft.
NIEMALS diese Maschine benutzen, wenn Sie müde oder erochöpft sind.
IMMER vor Gebrauch dieser Maschine dieses ganze Bedienungsheft durchlesen. Alle Warnungen, Anleitungen und Kontrollen
NIEMALS abschleifende Sägescheiben, die weniger als 1/8” (3,175 mm) dick sind, benutzen.
verstehen.
NIEMALS die für jede Scheibengröße angegebene Höchstgeschwindigkeit überschreiten. Eine zu hohe Geschwindigkeit kann zu einem
IMMER alle Schutzbleche ordnungsgemäß anbringen und in gutem Zustand-er halten.
Zerbrechen der Sägescheibe führen.
IMMER den Sicherheitsbestimmungen entsprechenden Gehör-, Augen-, Kopf-, und Atemschutz tragen.
NIEMALS beschädigtes Zubehör oder beschädigle Sägescheiben benutzen.
IMMER alle Warnungen und Anleitungen für diese Maschine lesen und verstehen.
NIEMALS eine drehende Sägescheibe mit der Hand anhalten.
IMMER die Definitionen der Symbole in diesem Heft lesen und verstehen.
NIEMALS eine abschleifende Sägescheibe wiederverwenden, wenn sie hingefallen ist.
IMMER dafür sorgen, daß keine Körperfeile an die Sägescheibe und alle anderen beweglichen Teilen kommen können.
NIEMALS Sägescheiben mit Karbidspitzen oder Zähne jeder Art verwenden.
IMMER wissen, wie die Maschine im Notfall schnell abgeschaltet werden kann.
NIEMALS segmentierte Diamantsägescheiben verwenden, wenn sie nicht speziell für Handsägen mit hoher Geschwindigkeit bestimmt
IMMER vor dem Tanken den Motor abstellen und abkühlen lassen.
sind.
IMMER vor Einbau der Sägescheibe erst die Sägescheibe, Flansche und Antriebswellen auf Schaden überprüfen.
NIEMALS Sägescheiben mit einem 1 inch (25,4mm) Dornloch mit 20 mm Flanschen verwenden.
IMMER verstärkte, abschleifende Sägescheiben für hohe Geschwindigkeiten — mindestens 1/8” (3,175 mm) dick — oder
NIEMALS an der Seite einer Schnittsägescheibe abschleifen.
Diamantsägescheiben für hohe Geschwindigkeiten, die auf eine höchstzulässige Geschwindigkeit von mindestens 5400
NIEMALS die Sägescheibe in einen Schnitt querführen, mit Gewalt einschieben oder verkanten.
U/m bei 14” (350 mm) oder 6200 U/m bei 12” (300 mm) genormt sind, verwenden.
NIEMALS eine Schneidmaschine verwenden, wenn nicht die Sägescheibe arretiert sobald der Drosselschieber losgelassen wird.
IMMER verstärkte, abschleifende Sägescheiben für hohe Geschwindigkeiten oder Diamantsägescheiben für hohe Geschwindigkeiten,
NIEMALS anfangen zu sägen, wenn Sie nicht eine klare Arbeitsfläche und einen guten Stand haben.
die für ein 1” Loch (25,4mm) für einen 1” (25,4mm) Flansch oder ein 20 mm Loch für einen 20 mm Flansch gekennzeichnet
NIEMALS erlauben, daß anderenan die Maschine kommen, solange sie angelassen oder aufgetankt wird oder wenn die Säge läuft.
sind, verwenden.
NIEMALS die Maschine in der Nähe eines entflammbaren Gegenstandes laufen lassen. Funken könnten ein Feuer oder eine Explosion
IMMER verstärkte, abschleifende Sägescheiben für hohe Geschwindigkeiten oder Diamantsägescheiben für hohe Geschwindigkeiten,
verursachen.
die zum Gebrauch im Benzinmotor, handgehaltenen, tragbaren, und abschleifenden Schnittsägen gekennzeichnet sind,
NIEMALS erlauben, daß sich Zuschauer oder Tiere auf der Arbeitsfläche aufhalten, wenn eine Schnittsäge läuft.
verwenden.
NIEMALS die Säge unter Alkohol- oder Drogeneinfluß benutzen.
IMMER alle Sicherheitsbestimmungen und Anleitungen, die mit jeder in dieser Säge benutzten Sägescheibe geliefert werden,
NIEMALS eine trockensägende Diamantsägescheibe sofort nach dem Gebrauch anfassen. Diese Scheiben brauchen einige Minuten
durchlesen.
Zeit, um nach dem Schnitt abzukühlen.
IMMER jede Sägescheibe vor Gebrauch sorgfältig prüfen. Sollten irgendwelche Anzeichen von Schäden oder ungewöhnlicher
NIEMALS beschädigte oder abgenutzte flanschen wiederverwenden.
Abnutzung zu sehen sein, DIESE SÄGESCHEIBE NICHT VERWENDEN.
NIEMALS diese Maschine in einem geschlossenen Raum laufen lassen, wenn er nicht richtig gelüftet ist.
IMMER vor Einbau der Sägescheibe erst prüfen, ob das Dornloch der Scheibe auf dem Dornschaft paßt.
NIEMALS erlauben, daß mehr als 180 Grad der Sägescheibe unter dem Schutzblech zu sehen ist.
IMMER die Sägescheibe fest und stramm anschrauben. Die Fräsdornmutter mit dem Schraubenschlüssel festschrauben.
NIEMALS diese Säge verwenden, wenn nicht mit beiden Händen an den Griffen festgehalten wird.
IMMER vor Einbau der Sägescheibe an der Säge erst dafür sorgen, daß die Sägescheibe und Flansche sauber und schmutz- und
abfallfrei sind.
IMMER die zu der Größe der Sägescheibe passende Flanschgrößse benutzen. Niemals beschädigte oder abgenutzte Scheibenflanschen *****************
benutzen. Diese Maschine ist nur für bestimmte Anwendungen zugelassen. AUF KEINEN FALL diese Maschine
IMMER die zu der Anwendung passende Sägescheibengrößse benutzen. Von dem Hersteller im Zweifelsfall erkunden, ob die
umändern oder zu Zwecken benutzen, die nicht zugelassen sind. Falls Sie Fragen über eine Anwendung
Sägescheibe passend ist.
IMMER die Maschine in beiden Händen halten, solange der Motor läuft. Die Maschine festhalten, wobei die Daumen und Finger die haben, Inc. gewandt haben und wir Sie beraten haben.
Griffe umschließen.
IMMER dafür sorgen, daß keine Körperteile an die Schnittsägescheiben kommen können, solange der Motor läuft.
IMMER dafür sorgen, daß die Griffe trocken, sauber und Öl- oder Treibstofffrei sind.
IMMER beim Tragen der Maschine den Motor abstellen und den Auspuff nicht den Körper berühren lassen.
IMMER beim Ein- und Ausladen der Maschine vorsichtig vorgeheu und die Anleitungen befolgen.
IMMER diese Maschine nur in gut gelüfteten Räumen benutzen.
IMMER Zuschauer Anweisungen geben, wo sie stehen dürfen, solange die Säge läuft.
IMMER für alle Bedicuer dieser Maschine einen Ausbildungskurs einrichten.
IMMER Unbefugte aus dem Arbeitsbereich fernhalten. Niemals erlauben, daß jemand vor oder hinter der Sägescheibe steht, wenn
der Motor läuft. Bei der Verwendung von Treibstoff vorsichlig vorgehen.
IMMER dafür sorgen, daß die Maschine 3 m vom Treibstofftank entfernt ist, ehe der Motor angelassarstellt wird und, daß die
Tankkappen an der Säge und am Treibstofftank fest zugeschraubt sind.
IMMER dafür sorgen, daß die Sägescheibe nichts berührt, ehe der Motor angelasseu wird.
IMMER Vorsichtig vorgehen, wenn diese Maschine hochgehoben und transportiert wird.

12
 Nederlands

Veiligheidsvoorschriften

WAT MOET De machine steeds verankeren voor het vervoer.

VEILIGHEID EERST! WAT MOET Wees voorzichtig en volg de instructies bij het opstellen en het vervoeren van de machine.
WAT MOET Reinig de machine elke dag na gebruik.
WAT MOET Geef steeds een kopie van deze handleiding aan de bediener van de zaagmachine.

 
WAARSCHUWINGEN WAT NIET MAG Bedien deze machine niet alvorens deze handleiding te hebben gelezen en begrepen.
WAT NIET MAG Bedien nooit deze machine zonder dat de beschermkap van het zaagblad of de andere beschermstukken op
WAT MOET en WAT NIET MAG hun plaats zijn.
WAT NIET MAG Sta nooit achter of voor het zaagblad terwijl de motor draait.
WAARSCHUWING: HET NIET IN ACHT NEMEN VAN DEZE WAARSCHUWINGEN EN WAT NIET MAG Laat nooit deze machine zonder toezicht terwijl de motor draait.
WAT NIET MAG Bedien nooit deze machine wanneer u vermoeid of uitgeput bent.
GEBRUIKSVOORSCHRIFTEN KAN DE DOOD OF ERNSTIGE LETSELS TOT GEVOLG HEBBEN. WAT NIET MAG Gebruik nooit zaagbladen van minder dan 3,17 mm (1/8 inch) dikte.
WAT NIET MAG Werk nooit boven de maximum bedrijfssnelheid die voor elke grootte van zaagblad is aangegeven. Overmatige
snelheid kan het zaagblad doen breken.
WAT MOET Lees de gehele handleiding voordat u de machine in bedrijf stelt. Begrijp alle waarschuwingen, instructies en de WAT NIET MAG Gebruik nooit beschadigde werktuigen of zaagbladen.
bediening. WAT NIET MAG Probeer nooit een bewegend zaagblad met uw hand te stoppen.
WAT MOET Hou alle beschermstukken op hun plaats en in goede staat. WAT NIET MAG Gebruik nooit een (carborundum) abrasief zaagblad dat gevallen is.
WAT MOET Draag steeds goedgekeurde oor-, oog, hoofd- en ademhalingsbescherming. WAT NIET MAG Gebruik nooit een hardmetalen of getand zaagblad.
WAT MOET Lees en begrijp alle waarschuwingen en instructies op de machine. WAT NIET MAG Gebruik nooit gesegmenteerde diamantbladen behalve indien ze specifiek voor snellopende, draagbare
WAT MOET Lees en begrijp de definities van de tekens die in deze handleiding voorkomen. zaagmachines ontworpen zijn.
WAT MOET Hou alle lichaamsdelen buiten het bereik van het zaagblad en van alle andere bewegende onderdelen. WAT NIET MAG Plaats nooit een zaagblad met een asgat van 1 inch (25,4mm) op een flens van 20 mm.
WAT MOET Weet hoe de machine in geval van nood snel kan worden gestopt. WAT NIET MAG Gebruik nooit op de zaagschijf als slijpschijf.
WAT MOET Zet de motor af en laat deze afkoelen alvorens brandstof toe te voegen. WAT NIET MAG Het zaagblad nooit in de snede buigen, vastklemmen, knellen of wringen.
WAT MOET Controleer het zaagblad, de flenzen en de assen op beschadiging alvorens het zaagblad te monteren. WAT NIET MAG Gebruik nooit een snijmachine waarvan het zaagblad niet stopt met draaien wanneer de gashendelwordt
WAT MOET Gebruik alleen snellopende, gewapende abrasieve zaagbladen van minimum 3,17 mm (1/8 inch) dikte ofwel snellopende losgelaten.
diamantzaagbladen met een maximum bedrijfssnelheid van ten minste 5.400 O/min. op 350 mm of 6.200 O/min. op WAT NIET MAG Begin nooit te snijden alvorens u een vrije werkruimte hebt en u een stabicle houding aaugenaneu hebt.
300 mm. WAT NIET MAG Laat nooit andere mensen in de buurt van de zaagmachine komen tijdens het opstarten, het bijtanken of tijdens
WAT MOET Gebruik snellopende, gewapende abrasieve zaagbladen of snellopende diamantbladen met een 1 inch (25,4mm) gat het zagen.
voor een 1 inch (25,4mm) flens of een 20 mm gat voor een 20 mm flens. WAT NIET MAG Bedien nooit deze machine in de nabijheid van brandbare stoffen. De vonken kunnen een brand of een ontploffing
WAT MOET Gebruik abrasieve of snellopende diamantzaagbladen gemarkeerd voor gebruik met benzine-aangedreven, draagbare veroorzaken.
abrasieve afsnijmachines. WAT NIET MAG Laat nooit toeschouwers of dieren in de werkruimte komen terwijl de afsnijmachine in werking is.
WAT MOET Lees alle veiligheidsinformatie en instructies, bijgesloten bij de zaagbladen die met deze machine worden gebruikt. WAT NIET MAG Bedien nooit deze machine terwijl u onder invloed van geneesmiddelen of alcohol verkeert.
WAT MOET Inspecteer elk zaagblad nauwkeurig alvorens het te gebruiken. Indien het enig teken van beschadiging of ongewone WAT NIET MAG Raak nooit een diamantzaagblad voor droog gebruik aan, nadat het pas gebruikt is. Na elk gebruik duurt het
slijtage vertoont MAG U HET ZAAGBLAD NIET GEBRUIKEN. verschillende minuten voordat deze zaagbladen afkoelen.
WAT MOET Controleer of het gat van de zaagbladspil overeenstemt met de spil van de machine alvorens het zaagblad te WAT NIET MAG Gebruik nooit beschadigde of versleten zaagbladflenzen.
monteren. WAT NIET MAG Bedien nooit deze machine in een gesloten ruimte, behalve indien er goede verluchting is.
WAT MOET Het zaagblad stevig en vast monteren. De spilmoermet een moersleutel vastdraaien. WAT NIET MAG Laat nooit het zaagblad meer dan 180 graden van de beschermkap uitsteken.
WAT MOET Vergewis u ervan dat het zaagblad en de flenzen zuiver zijn en niet met vuil of boorstof bedekt zijn, alvorens het WAT NIET MAG Bedien nooit deze zaag zonder beide handen op de handgrepen te houden.
zaagblad op de zaagmachine te monteren.
WAT MOET Gebruik het juiste soort zaagblad voor het uit te voeren werk. Vraag advies aan de fabrikant van de zaagbladen indien ***********************
u niet weet of u het correcte zaagblad hebt.
WAT MOET Hou de machine altijd met beide handen vast wanneer de motor draait. Pak de handgrepen stevig beet met uw duim Deze zaagmachine werd voor welbepaalde toepassingen ontworpen. Deze zaagmachine NIET ombouwen
en vingers er rond. of voor andere toepassingen gebruiken dan degene waarvoor zij ontworpen was. Indien u vragen hebt
WAT MOET Hou alle lichaamsdelen buiten bereik van de afsnijzaagbladen wanneer de motor draait. betreffende de toepassingen, van ons advies ontvangen hebt.
WAT MOET Hou de handgrepen droog, rein en vrij van olie en brandstof.
WAT MOET Draag de machine altijd met de motor uit en de geluiddemper van uw lichaam weggedraaid.
WAT MOET Wees voorzichtig en volg de instructies bij het laden en lossen van de zaagmachine.
WAT MOET Gebruik deze machine alleen in goed verluchte ruimten.
WAT MOET Zeg aan toeschouwers waar ze moeten staan terwijl de zaagmachine gebruikt wordt.
WAT MOET Voorzie een opleiding voor alle bedieners van deze machine.
WAT MOET Vraag aan alle onnodige toeschouwers om de werkruimte te verlaten. Laat nooit iemand voor of achter het zaagblad
staan terwijl de motor draait. Wees voorzichtig bij het hanteren van brandstof.
WAT MOET Verwijder de zaagmachine ten minste 3 meter van het brandstofaftappunt alvorens de motor te starten en verzeker
u ervan dat de brandstofdop op de zaagmachine en op de brandstoftank goed gesloten zijn.
WAT MOET Let erop dat het zaagblad niets raakt alvorens de motor te starten.
WAT MOET Wees voorzichtig bij het opheffen en het transporteren van deze machine.
WAT MOET Controleer steeds of er ßich ondergrondse elektrische kabels bevinden alvorens te zagen. Indien u twijfelt neemt u
best contact op met de plaatselijke nutsbedrijven.
WAT MOET Alle onderhoud buiten de in deze handleiding beschreven items dieut door bekwaam onderhoudspersoneel te worden
uitgevoerd.

13
 Français

Normes de Sécurite

LA SÉCURITÉ AVANT TOUT ! FAIRE Toujours s’assurer qu’il n’y a pas de câbles électriques enterrés avant de scier. En cas de doute, contacter le service
local responsable.
FAIRE Faire effectuer toutes les opérations d’entretien, autres que celles indiquées dans ce manuel, par un personnel

 
MISES EN GARDE FAIRE
d’entretien compétent.
Toujours arrimer la machine pour la transporter.
FAIRE Prendre des précautions et observer les instructions pour mettre en place et transporter la machine.
FAIRE et NE PAS FAIRE FAIRE Nettoyer la machine à la fin de chaque journée d’utilisation.
FAIRE Toujours remettre un exemplaire de ce manuel à l’utilisateur du matériel.
ATTENTION: LE NON RESPECT DE CES MISES EN GARDE ET INSTRUCTIONS D’UTILISATION PEUT NE PAS utiliser cette machine sans avoir lu et compris ce manuel d’utilisation.
ENTRAÎNER LA MORT OU DES BLESSURES CORPORELLES GRAVES. NE PAS utiliser cette machine si la protection de disque et les autres dispositifs de protection ne sont pas en place.
NE PAS se tenir derrière ni devant le disque lorsque le moteur est en marche.
NE PAS laisser cette machine sans surveillance lorsque le moteur est en marche.
FAIRE Lire le manuel d’utilisation dans sa totalité avant d’utiliser la machine. Veiller à comprendre toutes les mises en garde, NE PAS se servir de cette machine lorsque l’on se sent las ou fatigué.
instructions et commandes. NE PAS utiliser de disques abrasifs dont l’épaisseur est inférieure à 3,17 mm (1/8”).
FAIRE Maintenir toutes les protections à leur place et en bon état. NE PAS dépasser la vitesse maximum indiquée pour chaque taille de disque. Une vitesse excessive pourrait entraîner la
FAIRE Porter les protections individuelles de sécurité pour les oreilles, les yeux, la tête et le nez. rupture du disque.
FAIRE Lire et comprendre toutes les mises en garde et instructions figurant sur la machine. NE PAS utiliser de matériel ni de disques endommagés.
FAIRE Lire et comprendre les définitions des symboles figurant dans ce manuel. NE PAS essayer d’arrêter un disque en rotation avec la main.
FAIRE Rester à distance du disque et de toutes les autres pièces mobiles. NE PAS utiliser de disque abrasif qui est tombé.
FAIRE Savoir comment arrêter rapidement la machine en cas d’urgence. NE PAS utiliser de disque à pointes de carbure ni de disque denté.
FAIRE Arrêter le moteur et le laisser refroidir avant de faire le plein de carburant. NE PAS utiliser de disques en diamant segmentés, à moins qu’ils ne soient spécifiquement conçus pour les scies à grande
FAIRE Avant de mettre le disque en place, vérifier qu’il n’est pas abîmé, que les flasques et arbres ne sont pas vitesse, tenues à la main.
endommagés. NE PAS placer des disques à alésage de 1 pouce (25,4mm) sur des flasques de 20 mm.
FAIRE Utiliser des disques à grande vitesse, renforcés, abrasifs - épaisseur minimum de 3,17 mm (1/8”) ou grande vitesse, NE PAS meuler le côté d’un disque à trancher.
des disques en diamant spécifiquement conçus pour une vitesse de fonctionnement maximum d’au moins 5 400 NE PAS bloquer ni coincer le disque dans l’entaille.
tr/min sur le modèle de 350 mm (14”) ou de 6200 tr/min sur celui de 300 mm (12”). NE PAS utiliser une machine à trancher si le disque ne s’arrête pas de tourner quand la manette des gaz est relâchée.
FAIRE Utiliser des disques abrasifs à grande vitesse, renforcés ou des disques en diamant à grande vitesse, marqués d’un NE PAS commencer à trancher si la zone de travail n’est pas dégagée et si l’on ne peut se tenir en bon équilibre.
trou de 25,4 mm (1”) pour flasque de 25,4 mm (1”), ou d’un trou de 20 mm pour flasque de 20 mm. NE PAS laisser QUICONQUE s’approcher de la machine au moment de la faire démarrer, de faire le plein de carburant ni
FAIRE Utiliser des disques abrasifs ou des disques en diamant, à grande vitesse, spécifiés pour l’utilisation avec des machines pendant son fonctionnement.
à trancher portatives, à moteur à essence, maintenues manuellement, à disques abrasifs. NE PAS faire fonctionner la machine à proximité d’une substance inflammable. Des étincelles pourraient provoquer un
FAIRE Lire tous les documents et consignes de sécurité qui accompagnent les disques utilisés avec cette scie. incendie ou une explosion.
FAIRE Inspecter soigneusement chaque disque avant de l’utiliser. S’il comporte la moindre détérioration ou une usure NE PAS permettre à des spectateurs ni à des animaux de rester dans la zone de travail pendant le fonctionnement d’une
prononcée, NE PAS L’UTILISER. machine à trancher.
FAIRE Avant de monter le disque, vérifier que l’alésage de disque est du même diamètre que l’axe de la machine. NE PAS utiliser la scie lorsque l’on se trouve sous l’influence de drogues ou d’alcool.
FAIRE Monter le disque de manière solide et ferme. Serrer l’écrou avec une clé. NE PAS toucher un disque en diamant pour tranchage à sec immédiatement après son utilisation. Après un tranchage, le
FAIRE Avant de monter le disque sur la scie, s’assurer que le disque, les flasques sont propres et dépourvus de saleté et de refroidissement de ce type de disque prend plusieurs minutes.
débris. NE PAS utiliser de flasques de disque endommagés ni usés.
FAIRE Utiliser le type de disque approprié au travail à effectuer. En cas de doute sur le disque correct à utiliser, NE PAS faire fonctionner cette machine dans un endroit clos à moins qu’il n’y ait une aération suffisante.
consulter le fabricant de disques. NE PAS laisser le disque exposé hors de la protection sur plus de 180 degrés.
FAIRE Toujours tenir la machine des deux mains quand le moteur est en marche. Saisir les poignées fermement, en plaçant NE PAS utiliser cette scie sans les deux mains sur les poignées.
les pouces et les doigts autour.
FAIRE Rester à l’écart des disques tranchants quand le moteur est en marche.
FAIRE Veiller à ce que les poignées restent sèchent, propres, sans huile ni essence.
*****************
FAIRE Toujours transporter la machine avec le moteur arrêté et le silencieux dirigé à l’opposé de soi. Cette scie a été conçue pour des utilisations spécifiques. NE PAS modifier cette scie NE PAS L’EM PLOYER
FAIRE Prendre des précautions et suivre les instructions pour charger et décharger la scie. POUR toute utilisation autre que celle pour laquelle elle a été conçue. En cas de doutes concernant son
FAIRE N’utiliser cette machine que dans des endroits bien aérés.
FAIRE Montrer aux personnes qui se trouvent à proximité où se tenir durant le fonctionnement de la scie. utilisation, NE PAS utiliser la scie avant d’avoir reçu une réponse.
FAIRE Elaborer un programme de formation pour tous les opérateurs de cette machine.
FAIRE Dégager la zone de travail de toute personne qui n’est pas indispensable. Ne jamais autoriser qui que ce soit à se
tenir devant ou derrière le disque pendant que le moteur est en marche. Manipuler le carburant avec précaution.
FAIRE Avant de faire démarrer le moteur, éloigner la machine d’au moins 3 mètres du lieu où l’on a fait le plein de carburant.
Ne pas oublier de remettre en place et de serrer le bouchon du réservoir d’essence de la scie et celui du bidon
d’essence.
FAIRE Avant de faire démarrer le moteur, s’assurer que le disque ne touche rien.
FAIRE Prendre des précautions pour soulever et transporter cette machine.

14
 English

Safety Precautions

SAFETY FIRST! DO always check for buried electrical cables before sawing. If unsure, contact the local utilities.
DO have all service, other than items in this manual, performed by competent service personnel.
DO always tie down the machine when transporting.
WARNINGS
 
DO use caution and follow instructions when setting up or transporting the machine.
DO clean the machine after each day’s use.
DO always give a copy of this manual to the equipment user.
DO’s AND DO NOT’s
DO NOT operate this machine unless you have read and understand this operator’s manual.
DO NOT operate this machine without the blade guard, or other protective guards in place.
WARNING: FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THESE WARNINGS AND OPERATING DO NOT stand behind or in front of the blade path while the engine is running.
INSTRUCTIONS COULD RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS BODILY INJURY. DO NOT leave this machine unattended while the engine is running.
DO NOT operate this machine when you are tired or fatigued.
DO read this entire operator’s manual before operating this machine. Understand all warnings, instructions, and DO NOT use abrasive blades that are less the 1/8” (3.17mm) thick.
controls. DO NOT exceed maximum blade speed shown for each blade size. Excessive speed could result in blade
DO keep all guards in place and in good condition. breakage.
DO wear safety approved hearing, eye, head and respiratory protection. DO NOT use damaged equipment or blades.
DO read and understand all warnings and instructions on the machine. DO NOT try to stop a moving blade with your hand.
DO read and understand the symbol definitions contained in this manual. DO NOT use an abrasive blade that has been dropped.
DO keep all parts of your body away from the blade and all other moving parts. DO NOT use carbide-tipped or toothed type blades of any kind.
DO know how to stop the machine quickly in case of emergency. DO NOT use segmented diamond blades unless they are specifically designed for high-speed, hand-held saws.
DO shut off the engine and allow it to cool before refueling. DO NOT place 1 inch (25.4mm) arbor hole blades on 20mm flanges.
DO inspect the blade, flanges and shafts for damage before installing the blade. DO NOT grind on the side of a cutting-off blade.
DO use high-speed, reinforced, abrasive blades - 1/8” (3.17mm) thick (minimum) or high-speed, diamond blades DO NOT cock, jam or wedge the blade in the cut.
specifically rated with a maximum operating speed of at least 5400 RPM on 14” (350mm) or 6200 RPM on DO NOT operate a cutting machine if the blade does not stop rotating when the throttle trigger is released.
12” (300mm). DO NOT start cutting until you have a clear work area and secure footing.
DO use high-speed reinforced, abrasive blades or high-speed, diamond blades marked with a 1” (25.4mm) hole DO NOT allow other persons to be near the machine when starting, refueling, or when the saw is operating.
for a 1” (25.4mm) flange, or a 20mm hole for a 20mm flange. DO NOT operate the machine in the vicinity of anything that is flammable. Sparks could cause a fire or an
DO use abrasive blades or high-speed diamond blades marked for use with gasoline-powered, hand-held, portable, explosion.
abrasive cutting-off machines. DO NOT allow bystanders or animals in the work area while using a cutting-off machine.
DO read all safety materials and instructions that accompany any blade used with this saw. DO NOT operate the saw while using drugs or alcohol.
DO inspect each blade carefully before using it. If there are any signs of damage or unusual wear, DO NOT USE DO NOT touch a dry cutting diamond blade immediately after use. These blades require several minutes to cool
THE BLADE. after each cut.
DO verify the blade arbor hole matches the machine spindle before mounting the blade. DO NOT use damaged or worn blade flanges.
DO mount the blade solidly and firmly. Wrench tighten the arbor nut. DO NOT operate this machine in an enclosed area unless it is properly ventilated.
DO make sure the blade and flanges are clean and free of dirt and debris before mounting the blade on the saw. DO NOT allow blade exposure from the guard to be more than 180 degrees.
DO use the correct blade for the type of work being done. Check with blade manufacturer if you do not know if DO NOT operate this saw without both hands on the handles.
blade is correct.
DO always hold the machine with both hands when the engine is running. Use a firm grip with thumbs and fingers
encircling the handles. *****************
DO keep all parts of the body away from the cutting-off blades when the engine is running. This saw was designed for certain applications only. DO NOT modify this saw or use for any
DO keep the handles dry, clean and free of oil or fuel. application other than for which is it was designed. If you have any questions relative to its
DO always carry the machine with the engine stopped and the muffler away from the body. application, DO NOT use the saw until you advised you.
DO use caution and follow the instructions when loading and unloading the saw.
DO operate this machine only in well ventilated areas.
DO instruct bystanders on where to stand while the saw is in operation.
DO establish a training program for all operators of this machine.
DO clear the work area of unnecessary people. Never allow anyone to stand in front of or behind the blade while
the engine is running.
DO use caution when handling fuel.
DO move the machine at least 10 feet away from the fueling point before starting the engine and make sure the
gas cap on the saw and the fuel can are properly tightened.
DO make sure the blade is not contacting anything before starting the engine.
DO use cautions when lifting and transporting this machine.

15
 Español

Normas De Seguridad

¡SEGURIDAD ANTE TODO! SI Asegúrese que la hoja no esté haciendo contacto con ninguna cosa antes de arrancar el motor.
SI Tenga cuidado al levantar y transportar esta máquina.
SI Siempre verifique si hay cables eléctricos enterrados antes de cortar con la sierra. En caso de

 
ADVERTENCIAS duda,consulte con las empresas de servicios públicos locales.
SI siempre entregar un ejemplar de este manual al usuario del equipo.
HACER y NO HACER
NO haga funcionar esta máquina sin antes haber leído y entendido este manual.
NO transporte la máquina con la hoja instalada.
ADVERTENCIA: EL NO RESPETAR ESTAS ADVERTENCIAS E NO utilice esta máquina sin estar específicamente capacitado para hacerlo.
INSTRUCCIONES DE OPERACION PUEDE PROVOCAR GRAVES NO maneje esta máquina sin tener el protector de la hoja u otras protecciones instaladas en su lugar.
NO se sitúe delante o detrás del paso de la hoja mientras el motor está funcionando.
LESIONES O LA MUERTE. NO deje esta máquina desatendida mientras el motor está funcionando.
NO maneje esta máquina si está cansado o fatigado.
SI Lea todo el manual antes de manejar esta máquina. Entienda todas las advertencias, instrucciones y controles. NO utilice hojas abrasivas de menos de 1/8” (3,17mm) de grosor.
SI Mantenga siempre las protecciones en su lugar y en buenas condiciones. NO utilice una hoja de corte húmedo sin tener el suministro adecuado de agua.
SI Siempre use protecciones aprobadas para los oídos, ojos, cabeza y respiración. NO sobrepase la velocidad máxima indicada para cada tamaño de hoja. El exceso de velocidad puede causar la
SI Lea y entienda todas las advertencias e instrucciones sobre la máquina. rotura de la hoja.
SI Lea y entienda las definiciones de los símbolos que aparecen en este manual. NO utilice equipos u hojas que estén dañados.
SI Mantenga todas las partes de su cuerpo alejadas de la hoja y de todas las piezas móviles. NO trate de parar con las manos una hoja en movimiento.
SI Aprenda cómo parar la máquina rápidamente en caso de emergencia. NO utilice una hoja abrasiva que haya sufrido una caída.
SI Apague el motor y déjelo enfriar antes de cargar combustible. NO utilice hojas dentadas o con puntas de carburo de ningún tipo.
SI Verifique que la hoja, las bridas y los ejes no estén dañados antes de instalar la hoja. NO utilice hojas diamantadas segmentadas a menos que estén específicamente diseñadas para sierras manuales
SI Utilice hojas abrasivas reforzadas de alta velocidad - de 1/8” (3,17mm) de grosor (mínimo), o bien, hojas de alta velocidad.
diamantadas de alta velocidad especialmente indicadas para una velocidad máxima de operación de por lo NO coloque hojas con un agujero de 1 pulgada (25,4 mm) en bridas de 20 mm.
menos 5400 rpm para 14” (350 mm) ó de 6200 rpm para 12” (300 mm). NO esmerile con el costado de una hoja de trocear.
SI Utilice hojas abrasivas reforzadas de alta velocidad, o bien, hojas diamantadas de alta velocidad marcadas con NO incline, atasque o encaje la hoja en el corte.
agujero de 1” (25,4mm) para brida de 1” (25,4mm), ó un agujero de 20mm para brida de 20 mm. NO utilice la máquina de corte si la hoja no cesa de girar al soltar el disparador del acelerador.
SI Utilice hojas abrasivas, o bien, hojas diamantadas de alta velocidad marcadas para utilización con máquinas de NO empiece a cortar hasta que haya despejado el lugar de trabajo y esté pisando en suelo firme.
corte abrasivo, portátiles, manuales con motor de gasolina. NO permita que nadie se acerque a la máquina durante la puesta en marcha, abastecimiento de combustible
SI Lea toda la literatura e instrucciones de seguridad que acompañan a la hoja utilizada con esta sierra. omientras la sierra está funcionando.
SI Inspeccione cuidadosamente cada hoja antes de usarla. Si se observan señales de daño o desgaste poco NO maneje esta máquina cerca de ningún objeto que sea inflamable. Las chispas podrían causar un incendio o
común, NO USE LA HOJA. una explosión.
SI Instale la hoja firmemente. Apriete la tuerca del eje con un aprietatuercas. NO permita personas ni animales en el lugar de trabajo mientras está utilizando la sierra.
SI Asegúrese que la hoja y las bridas estén limpias y libres de tierra y suciedad antes de instalar la hoja en la NO maneje la sierra si está bajo la influencia de drogas o bebidas alcohólicas.
sierra. NO toque una hoja diamantada de corte en seco inmediatamente después de usarla. Estas hojas se demoran
SI Utilice el tamaño de brida indicado para cada tamaño de hoja. No use bridas que estén dañadas o varios minutos en enfriarse después de cada corte.
desgastadas. NO utilice bridas de hojas que estén dañadas o desgastadas.
SI Utilice la hoja correcta para el tipo de trabajo que se vaya a ejecutar. En caso de dudas, consultar con el NO maneje esta máquina en lugares encerrados a menos que tengan buena ventilación.
fabricante de la hoja. NO permita que la hoja sobresalga más de 180 grados del protector.
SI Siempre sujete la máquina con ambas manos cuando el motor esté funcionando. Encierre la empuñadura NO maneje esta sierra sin tener ambas manos en los mangos.
firmemente con los pulgares y dedos.
SI Mantenga todas las partes del cuerpo alejadas de las hojas de trocear cuando el motor esté funcionando. *********************
SI Mantenga las empuñaduras secas, limpias y libres de aceite o combustible. Esta sierra fue diseñada para ciertas aplicaciones solamente. NO la modifique ni utilice para ninguna otra
SI Siempre transporte la máquina con el motor apagado y el silenciador lejos del cuerpo. aplicación salvo aquéllas para las cuales fue diseñada. En caso de dudas respecto a su aplicación, NO use
SI Tenga cuidado y siga las instrucciones cuando cargue y descargue la sierra. la sierra sin antes haber recibido nuestras indicaciones.
SI Maneje esta máquina solamente en lugares bien ventilados.
SI Indique a las personas dónde situarse mientras la sierra está funcionando.
SI Establezca un programa de entrenamiento para todos los operadores de esta máquina.
SI Despeje el lugar de trabajo de personas innecesarias. No permita que nadie se sitúe delante o detrás de la hoja
mientras el motor está funcionando.
SI Maneje el combustible con cuidado.
SI Aleje la máquina por los menos 10 pies (3 m) del punto de abastecimiento de combustible antes de arrancar el
motor y asegúrese de apretar bien la tapa de la gasolina en la sierra y del bidón de combustible.

16
 Português

Normas De Segurança

SEGURANÇA EM PRIMEIRO LUGAR! SIM sempre verifique se exitem cabos elétricos soterrados antes de começar a operar a serra. Se você não tiver certeza,
entre em contato com a companhia de eletricidade local.
SIM assegure-se de que todo serviço, menos os itens que estejam neste manual, seja executado por pessoal devidamente
qualificado.
AVISOS
 
SIM sempre prenda a máquina quando for transportá-la.
SIM use precaução e siga as devidas instruções quando estiver montando ou transportando a máquina.
SIM e NÃO SIM limpe a máquina todos os dias após o uso.
SIM sempre forneça uma cópia deste manual ao usuário do equipamento.

AVISO: A FALTA DE CUMPRIMENTO COM ESTES AVISOS E ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES NÃO opere esta máquina a não ser que você tenha lido e entendido este manual do operador.
NÃO opere esta máquina sem o protetor de lâmina ou outros protetores no lugar.
DE OPERAÇÃO PODERÁ RESULTAR EM MORTE OU FERIMENTOS GRAVES. NÃO fique atrás ou na frente da lâmina enquanto o motor estiver funcionando.
NÃO deixe esta máquina sem supervisão enquanto o motor estiver funcionando.
NÃO opere esta máquina quando você estiver cansado ou fatigado.
SIM leia este manual do operador por completo antes de operar a máquina. Entenda todos os avisos, instruções e NÃO use lâminas abrasivas com menos de 1/8 pol. (3,17mm) de espessura.
controles. NÃO exceda a velocidade máxima da lâmina indicada para cada tamanho de lâmina. A velocidade excessiva poderá fazer
SIM mantenha todos os protetores no lugar e em boas condições. com que a lâmina quebre.
SIM use o protetor de segurança aprovado para os ouvidos, a vista, a cabeça e o nariz. NÃO use equipamento ou lâminas danificados.
SIM leia e entenda todos os avisos e todas as instruções na máquina. NÃO tente parar uma lâmina em movimento com a sua mão.
SIM leia e entenda as definições dos símbolos contidas neste manual. NÃO use uma lâmina abrasiva que tenha caído.
SIM mantenha todas as partes do corpo longe da lâmina e outras peças moventes, NÃO use nenhum tipo de lâmina com pontas de carboneto ou dentadas.
SIM saiba como parar a máquina rapidamente em caso de emergência. NÃO use lâminas de diamante segmentadas a não ser que tenham sido especificamente projetadas para serras manuais
SIM Desligue o motor e deixe esfriar antes de reabastecer. de alta velocidade.
SIM inspecione a lâmina, os flanges e os eixos para ver se estão danificados antes de instalar a lâmina. NÃO coloque lâminas com furos centrais de 1 polegada (25,4mm) em flanges de 20mm.
SIM use lâminas de alta velocidade e reforçadas - 1/8 pol. (3,17mm) de espessura (mínimo) ou lâminas de diamante de NÃO esmerilhe pelo lado de uma lâmina de decepar.
alta velocidade, especificamente projetadas com uma velocidade de operação máxima de pelo menos 5400 RPM em NÃO desloque, emperre ou calce a lâmina no corte.
14 pol (350mm) ou 6200 RPM em 12 pol. (300mm). NÃO opere uma máquina de cortar se a lâmina não parar de girar quando o gatilho de aceleração for liberado.
SIM use lâminas abrasivas, de alta velocidade, reforçadas ou lâminas de diamante de alta velocidade,marcadas com um NÃO comece a cortar até que a área de trabalho esteja desempedida e você esteja pisando em chão firme.
furo de 1 pol. (25,4mm) para um flange de 1 pol. (25,4mm) ou um furo de 20mm para um flange de 20mm. NÃO permita que outras pessoas fiquem perto da máquina quando ela for ligada, abastecida ou estiver funcionando.
SIM use lâminas abrasivas ou lâminas de diamante de alta velocidade marcadas para uso com máquinas de decepar NÃO opere a máquina perto de qualquer inflamável. As faíscas poderão causar um incêndio ou uma explosão.
abrasivas, portáteis, manuais e operadas a gasolina. NÃO permita que outras pessoas ou animais fiquem na área de trabalho quando a máquina estiver em uso.
SIM leia todos os materiais e instruções de segurança que acompanham as lâminas usadas com esta serra. NÃO opere a serra sob a influência de álcool ou drogas.
SIM inspecione cada lâmina com cuidado antes de usá-las. Se houver sinais de danos ou desgaste fora do comum, NÃO NÃO toque na lâmina de diamante de corte seco logo depois da lâmina ter sido usada. Essas lâminas levam vários minutos
USE A LÂMINA. para esfriar depois de serem usadas.
SIM verifique se o furo central da lâmina combina com a haste da máquina antes de montar a lâmina. NÃO use flanges de lâmina danificados ou desgastados.
SIM encaixe bem a lâmina, com firmeza. Aperte a porca do furo central com uma chave. NÃO opere esta máquina em recinto fechado a não ser que haja ventilação adequada.
SIM assegure-se de que a lâmina e os flanges estejam limpos e livres de poeira e detritos antes de montar a lâmina na NÃO permita que haja mais de 180 graus de exposição entre a lâmina e o protetor.
serra. NÃO opere esta serra sem que ambas as mãos estejam segurando os cabos.
SIM use a lâmina correta para o tipo de trabalho a ser feito. Consulte o fabricante da lâmina se você não souber qual o
tipo correto de lâmina a ser usado.
SIM sempre segure a máquina com ambas as mãos quando o motor estiver funcionando. Segure firmemente com os *****************
polegares e os dedos ao redor dos cabos.
Esta serra foi projetada apenas para certas aplicações. NÃO modifique esta serra ou use-a para qualquer outra
SIM mantenha todas as partes do corpo longe das lâminas de decepar quando o motor estiver funcionando.
aplicação que não seja para o propósito para o qual foi projetada. Se você tiver alguma dúvida quanto a aplicação da
SIM mantenha os cabos secos, limpos e sem óleo ou combustível.
serra, NÃO use a serra até que você tenha respondido às suas perguntas.
SIM sempre carregue a máquina com o motor desligado e o amortecedor longe do corpo.
SIM tenha cuidado e siga as devidas instruções quando estiver carregando ou descarregando a serra.
SIM só opere esta máquina em áreas bem ventiladas.
SIM informe às pessoas por perto onde deverão ficar enquanto a serra estiver em funcionamento.
SIM estabeleça um programa de treinamento para todos os operadores desta máquina.
SIM remova todo o pessoal desnecessário da área de trabalho. Nunca deixe ninguém ficar em frente ou atrás da lâmina
enquanto a máquina estiver funcionado. Tenha cuidado quando estiver lidando com combustível.
SIM coloque a máquina pelo menos a 10 pés de distância do ponto de abastecimento antes de ligar o motor e assegure-se
de que a tampa do combustível na máquina e na lata estejam devidamente fechadas.
SIM assegure-se de que a lâmina não esteja tocando em nada antes de ligar o motor.
SIM tenha cuidado quando estiver levantando e transportando esta máquina.

17
 EÏÏËvÈk∙

¶ƒ√¢π∞°ƒ∞º∂™ ∞™º∞§∂π∞
¶ƒø∆∞ ∞¶’ √§∞ ∏ ∞™º∞§∂π∞! ¡∞ ‚‚∙ÈÒÓÂÛÙ fiÙÈ Ë ÏÂ›‰∙ ‰ÂÓ ∙ÎÔ˘Ì¿ÂÈ Ù›ÔÙ∙ ÚÈÓ ÍÂÎÈÓ‹ÛÂÙ ÙË ÌËˉ∙Ó‹.
¡∞ ÚÔÛ¤ˉÂÙ fiÙ∙Ó ÛËÎÒÓÂÙ Î∙È ÌÂÙ∙ʤÚÂÙ ∙˘Ùfi ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙.
¡∞ ÂϤÁˉÂÙ ¶¿ÓÙ∙ ÁÈ∙ ˘fiÁÂÈ∙ ËÏÂÎÙÚÔÊfiÚ∙ Î∙ÏÒ‰È∙ ÚÈÓ Îfi„ÂÙÂ. ∂¿Ó ‰ÂÓ Â›ÛÙ ‚¤‚∙ÈỖ, ÂÈÎÔÈÓ̂Ó‹ÛÙ Ì ÙÈ̃
ÙÔÈΤ̃ ˘ËÚÂÛ›Ẫ.
¶ƒ√∂π¢√¶√π∏™∂π™
 
¡∞ οÓÂÙ fiÏË ÙË Û˘ÓÙ‹ÚËÛË, ÂÎÙfĩ ∙’ ∙˘Ù¿ Ô˘ ∙Ó∙ʤÚÔÓÙ∙È ÛÙÔ ∙ÚfiÓ ÙÔ ÂÁˉÂÈÚ›‰ÈÔ, ∙fi ∙ÚÌfi‰ÈÔ ÚÔÛ̂ÈÎfi
Û˘ÓÙ‹ÚËÛË̃.
∆π ¡∞ ∫∞¡∂∆∂ ∫∞π ∆π √Ãπ ¡∞ ÚÔÛ‰¤ÓÂÙ ¿ÓÙ∙ ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ fiÙ∙Ó ÙÔ ÌÂÙ∙ʤÚÂÙÂ.
¡∞ ÚÔÛ¤ˉÂÙ Î∙È Ó∙ ∙ÎÔÏÔ˘ı›Ù ÙÈ̃ Ô‰ËÁ›Ẫ fiÙ∙Ó ÚÔÂÙÔÈÌ¿˙ÂÙ ‹ ÌÂÙ∙ʤÚÂÙ ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙.
¡∞ Î∙ı∙Ú›˙ÂÙ ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ ÌÂÙ¿ ∙fi ÙË ˉÚ‹ÛË Î¿ı Ë̤Ú∙̃.
¶ƒ√∂π¢√¶√π∏™∏: ¶∞ƒ∞§∂πæ∏ ™∆∏ ™Àªª√ƒºø™∏ ª∂ ∞À∆∂™ ∆π™ ¡∞ ‰›ÓÂÙ ¿ÓÙ∙ ¤Ó∙ ∙ÓÙ›ÁÚ∙ÊÔ ∙˘ÙÔ‡ ÙÔ˘ ÂÁˉÂÈÚȉ›Ô˘ ÛÙÔ ˉÚ‹ÛÙË ÙÔ˘ ÌËˉ∙Ó‹Ì∙ÙỖ.
¶ƒ√∂π¢√¶√π∏™∂π™ ∫∞π √¢∏°π∂™ Ã∏™∂ø™ ª¶√ƒ∂π ¡∞ ∂Ã∂π ™∞¡ ∞¶√∆∂§∂™ª∞
¡∞ ª∏ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠∙˘Ù‹ ÙË ÌËˉ∙Ó‹ ˉ̂Ú›̃ Ó∙ ¤ˉÂÙ ‰È∙‚¿ÛÂÈ Î∙È Î∙Ù∙ÓÔ‹ÛÂÈ ∙˘Ùfi ÙÔ ÂÁˉÂÈÚ›‰ÈÔ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›∙̃.
£∞¡∞∆√ ◊ ™√µ∞ƒ√ ™øª∞∆π∫√ ∆ƒ∞Àª∞∆π™ª√. ¡∞ ª∏ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠ÙË ÌËˉ∙Ó‹ ˉ̂Ú›̃ ÙÔÓ ÚÔÊ˘Ï∙ÎÙ‹Ú∙ ÙË̃ ÏÂ›‰∙̃ ‹ ¿ÏÏ∙ ̤Û∙ ÚÔʇÏ∙ÍË̃ ÛÙË Û̂ÛÙ‹ ÙÔ˘̃ ı¤ÛË.

¡∞ ª∏ ÛÙ¤ÎÂÛÙ ›Û̂ ‹ ÌÚÔÛÙ¿ ∙fi ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ fiÙ∙Ó Ë ÌËˉ∙Ó‹ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›.

¡∞ ‰È∙‚¿ÛÂÙ ÙÔ ÔÏfiÎÏËÚÔ ÙÔ ∙ÚfiÓ ÂÁˉÂÈÚ›‰ÈÔ ˉÂÈÚÈÛÙ‹ ÚÈÓ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ‹ÛÂÙ ∙˘Ùfi ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙. ∫∙Ù∙ÓÔ‹ÛÙ ¡∞ ª∏¡ ∙Ê‹ÓÂÙ ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ ∙ʇÏ∙ÎÙÔ fiÙ∙Ó Ë ÌËˉ∙Ó‹ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›.
fiÏẪ ÙÈ̃ ÚÔÂȉÔÔÈ‹ÛÂÈ̃, Ô‰ËÁ›Ẫ Î∙È ÂϤÁˉÔ˘̃. ¡∞ ª∏ ˉÂÈÚ›˙ÂÛÙ ∙˘Ùfi ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ fiÙ∙Ó Â›ÛÙ ÎÔ˘Ú∙Ṳ̂ÓỖ.
¡∞ ‰È∙ÙËÚ›Ù fiÏÔ˘̃ ÙÔ˘̃ ÚÔÊ˘Ï∙ÎÙ‹ÚẪ ÛÙË ı¤ÛË ÙÔ˘̃ Î∙È Û Î∙Ï‹ Î∙Ù¿ÛÙ∙ÛË. ¡∞ ª∏ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠ÏÂÈ∙ÓÙÈΤ̃ ÏÂ›‰Ẫ Ô˘ ›Ó∙È ÏÂÙfiÙÂÚẪ ∙fi 1/8’’ (3,17 ÂÎ.).
¡∞ ÊÔÚ¿Ù ÂÁÎÂÎÚÈ̤Ó∙ ÁÈ∙ ÙËÓ ∙ÛÊ¿ÏÂÈ¿ ÙÔ˘̃ ∙ÎÔ˘ÛÙÈο, ∙Ó∙Ó¢ÛÙÈ΋ ÚÔÛÙ∙Û›∙ Î∙È ÚÔÛÙ∙Û›∙ ÎÂÊ∙Ï‹̃. ¡∞ ª∏ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠˘ÁÚ‹ ÏÂ›‰∙ ˉ̂Ú›̃ Â∙Ú΋ ∙ÚÔˉ‹ ÓÂÚÔ‡ ÛÙË ÏÂ›‰∙.
¡∞ ‰È∙‚¿ÛÂÙ Î∙È Ó∙ Î∙Ù∙ÓÔ‹ÛÂÙ fiÏẪ ÙÈ̃ ÚÔÂȉÔÔÈ‹ÛÂÈ̃ Î∙È Ô‰ËÁ›Ẫ Ô˘ ‚Ú›ÛÎÔÓÙ∙È ¿Ó̂ ÛÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙. ¡∞ ª∏¡ ÍÂÂÚÓ¿Ù ÙË Ì¤ÁÈÛÙË Ù∙ˉ‡ÙËÙ∙ ÏÂ›‰∙̃ Ô˘ ÂȉÂÈÎÓ‡ÂÙ∙È ÁÈ∙ οı ̤ÁÂıỖ ÏÂ›‰∙̃. ÀÂÚ‚ÔÏÈ΋ Ù∙ˉ‡ÙËÙ∙ ÌÔÚ›
¡∞ ‰È∙‚¿ÛÂÙ Î∙È Ó∙ Î∙Ù∙ÓÔ‹ÛÂÙ fiÏÔ˘̃ ÙÔ˘̃ ÔÚÈÛÌÔ‡̃ Û˘Ì‚fiÏ̂Ó Ô˘ ÂÌÂÚȤˉÔÓÙ∙È Û’ ∙˘Ùfi ÙÔ ÂÁˉÂÈÚ›‰ÈÔ. Ó∙ ¤ˉÂÈ ∙ÔÙ¤ÏÂÛÌ∙ ÙË ıÚ∙‡ÛË ÙË̃ ÏÂ›‰∙̃.
¡∞ ÎÚ∙ٿ٠fiÏ∙ Ù∙ ̤ÏË ÙÔ˘ ÛÒÌ∙Ùfĩ Û∙̃ Ì∙ÎÚÈ¿ ∙fi ÙË ÏÂ›‰∙ Î∙È fiÏ∙ Ù’ ¿ÏÏ∙ ÎÈÓÔ‡ÌÂÓ∙ ̤ÚË. ¡∞ ª∏ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠ˉ∙Ï∙Ṳ̂Ó∙ ÂÍ∙ÚÙ‹Ì∙Ù∙ ‹ ÏÂ›‰Ẫ.
¡∞ ÁÓ̂Ú›˙ÂÙ ̂̃ Ó∙ ÛÙ∙Ì∙Ù‹ÛÂÙ ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ ÁÚ‹ÁÔÚ∙ Û ÂÚ›Ù̂ÛË ¿ÌÂÛË̃ ∙Ó¿ÁÎË̃. ¡∞ ª∏¡ ÚÔÛ∙ı›Ù Ó∙ ÛÙ∙Ì∙Ù‹ÛÂÙ ÌÈ∙ ÎÈÓÔ‡ÌÂÓË ÏÂ›‰∙ Ì ÙÔ ˉ¤ÚÈ Û∙̃.
¡∞ Û‚‹ÓÂÙ ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ Î∙È Ó∙ ÙÔ ∙Ê‹ÓÂÙ Ó∙ ÎÚ˘ÒÛÂÈ ÚÈÓ ÙÔ ∙ÓÂÊԉȿÛÂÙ Ì Î∙‡ÛÈÌ∙. ¡∞ ª∏ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠ÌÈ∙ ÏÂÈ∙ÓÙÈ΋ ÏÂ›‰∙ Ô˘ ¤ˉÂÈ ¤ÛÂÈ Î¿Ù̂.
¡∞ ÂÈıÂ̂Ú›Ù ÙË ÏÂ›‰∙, ÙÈ̃ ÊÏ¿ÓÙ˙Ẫ Î∙È ÙÔ˘̃ ¿ÍÔÓẪ ÁÈ∙ ˙ËÌȤ̃ ÚÈÓ ÂÁÎ∙Ù∙ÛÙ‹ÛÂÙ ÙË ÏÂ›‰∙. ¡∞ ª∏ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠ÏÂ›‰Ẫ Ì ̇ÙË Î∙ڂȉ›Ô˘ ‹ Ô‰ÔÓÙ̂Ù¤̃ ÏÂ›‰Ẫ οı هÔ˘.
¡∞ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠˘„ËÏ‹̃-Ù∙ˉ‡ÙËÙ∙̃, ÂÓÈÛˉ˘Ì¤ÓẪ, ÏÂÈ∙ÓÙÈΤ̃ ÏÂ›‰Ẫ - 1/8’’ (3,17 ÂÎ.) Û ¿ˉỖ (Î∙Ù’ ÂÏ¿ˉÈÛÙÔ), ¡∞ ª∏ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠ÙÌËÌ∙ÙÈΤ̃ ÏÂ›‰Ẫ Ì ∙‰∙Ì¿ÓÙÈÓË ÂÈÎ¿Ï˘„Ë ÂÎÙfĩ ∙’ ∙˘Ù¤̃ Ô˘ ›Ó∙È ÂȉÈο Ûˉ‰È∙Ṳ̂ÓẪ
‹ ˘„ËÏ‹̃ Ù∙ˉ‡ÙËÙ∙̃, ÏÂ›‰Ẫ Ì ∙‰∙Ì¿ÓÙÈÓË ÂÈÎ¿Ï˘„Ë, ÂȉÈο ÂÎÙÈÌË̤ÓẪ ÁÈ∙ ÌÈ∙ ̤ÁÈÛÙË Ù∙ˉ‡ÙËÙ∙ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›∙̃ ÁÈ∙ ˘„ËÏ‹̃ Ù∙ˉ‡ÙËÙ∙̃ ÚÈfiÓÈ∙ ˉÂÚÈÔ‡.
ÙÔ˘Ï¿ˉÈÛÙÔÓ 5.400 ™∞§ Ì ÏÂ›‰∙ ‰È∙̤ÙÚÔ˘ 14’’ (35 ÂÎ.), ‹ 6.200 ™∞§ Ì ÏÂ›‰∙ ‰È∙̤ÙÚÔ˘ 12’’ (30 ÂÎ.). ¡∞ ª∏ ÙÔÔıÂÙ›Ù ÏÂ›‰Ẫ Ì ÙÚ‡∙ ¿ÍÔÓ∙ ÌÈ∙̃ ›ÓÙÛ∙̃ (2,54 ÂÎ.) Û ÊÏ¿ÓÙ˙Ẫ Ù̂Ó 20 ˉÈÏ.
¡∞ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠˘„ËÏ‹̃-Ù∙ˉ‡ÙËÙ∙̃ ÂÓÈÛˉ˘Ì¤ÓẪ ÏÂÈ∙ÓÙÈΤ̃ ÏÂ›‰Ẫ ‹ ˘„ËÏ‹̃ Ù∙ˉ‡ÙËÙ∙̃ ÏÂ›‰Ẫ Ì ∙‰∙Ì¿ÓÙÈÓË ¡∞ ª∏¡ ∙ÎÔÓ›˙ÂÙ ÛÙËÓ Â›Â‰Ë ÏÂ˘Ú¿ ÌÈ∙̃ ÏÂ›‰∙̃ ÎÔ‹̃
ÂÈÎ¿Ï˘„Ë Ì∙ÚÎ∙ÚÈṲ̂ÓẪ Ì ÌÈ∙ ÙÚ‡∙ Ì›∙̃ ›ÓÙÛ∙̃ (2,54 ÂÎ.) ÁÈ∙ ÊÏ¿ÓÙ˙∙ Ì›∙̃ ›ÓÙÛ∙̃ (2,54 ÂÎ.), ‹ Ì ̛∙ ÙÚ‡∙ ¡∞ ª∏ Ï˘Á›˙ÂÙÂ, Ó∙ ÌËÓ ÌÏÔοÚÂÙ ‹ Ó∙ ÌË ÛÊËÓÒÓÂÙ ÙË ÏÂ›‰∙ ÛÙÔ ÛËÌÂ›Ô ÎÔ‹̃.
20 ˉÈÏ. ÁÈ∙ ÌÈ∙ ÊÏ¿ÓÙ˙∙ 20 ˉÈÏ. ¡∞ ª∏ ˉÂÈÚ›˙ÂÛÙ ÙÔ ÚÈfiÓÈ Â¿Ó Ë ÏÂ›‰∙ ‰Â ÛÙ∙Ì∙Ù¿ Ó∙ Á˘Ú›˙ÂÈ fiÙ∙Ó ∙Ê‹ÓÂÙ ÂχıÂÚË ÙË ÛÎ∙Ó‰¿ÏË ÙÔ˘ ÁÎ∙˙ÈÔ‡.
¡∞ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠ÏÂÈ∙ÓÙÈΤ̃ ÏÂ›‰Ẫ ‹ ˘„ËÏ‹̃-Ù∙ˉ‡ÙËÙ∙̃ ÏÂ›‰Ẫ Ì ∙‰∙Ì¿ÓÙÈÓË ÂÈÎ¿Ï˘„Ë Ì∙ÚÎ∙ÚÈṲ̂ÓẪ ÁÈ∙ ¡∞ ª∏¡ ∙Úˉ›˙ÂÙ Ó∙ Îfi‚ÂÙ ¤̂̃ fiÙÔ˘ ¤ˉÂÙ Î∙ı∙Ú‹ ÂÚÈÔˉ‹ ÂÚÁ∙Û›∙̃ Î∙È ∙ÛÊ∙Ϥ̃ ¿ÙËÌ∙.
ˉÚ‹ÛË Ì ‚ÂÓ˙ÈÓÔΛÓËÙẪ, ˉÂÈÚÔΛÓËÙẪ, ÊÔÚËÙ¤̃ ÌËˉ∙Ó¤̃ ÎÔ‹̃. ¡∞ ª∏¡ ÂÈÙÚ¤ÂÙ Û ¿ÏÏ∙ ¿ÙÔÌ∙ Ó∙ ›Ó∙È ÎÔÓÙ¿ ÛÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ fiÙ∙Ó ÙÔ ‚¿˙ÂÙ ÂÌÚfĩ, ÙÔ ∙ÓÂÊԉȿ˙ÂÙÂ, ‹ fiÙ∙Ó ÙÔ ÚÈfiÓÈ
¡∞ ‰È∙‚¿˙ÂÙ fiÏ∙ Ù∙ ÛˉÂÙÈο Ì ÙËÓ ∙ÛÊ¿ÏÂÈ∙ Î∙È ÙÈ̃ Ô‰ËÁ›Ẫ Ô˘ Û˘ÓÔ‰Â‡Ô˘Ó Î¿ı ÏÂ›‰∙ ÁÈ∙ ˉÚ‹ÛË Ì’ ∙˘Ùfi ÙÔ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›.
ÚÈfiÓÈ. ¡∞ ª∏ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›Ù ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ ÎÔÓÙ¿ Û ÔÙȉ‹ÔÙ ›Ó∙È Â‡ÊÏÂÎÙÔ. √È ÛÈÓı‹ÚẪ ÌÔÚÔ‡Ó Ó∙ ‰ËÌÈÔ˘ÚÁ‹ÛÔ˘Ó Ê̂ÙÈ¿
¡∞ ÂÈıÂ̂Ú›Ù οı ÏÂ›‰∙ ÚÔÛÂÎÙÈο ÚÈÓ ÙË ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔÈ‹ÛÂÙÂ. ∂¿Ó ˘¿ÚˉÔ˘Ó ÛËÌ¿‰È∙ ˙ËÌÈ¿̃ ‹ ∙Û˘Ó‹ıÈÛÙË̃ ‹ ¤ÎÚËÍË.
ÊıÔÚ¿̃, ª∏ Ã∏™πª√¶√π∏™∂∆∂ ∆∏ §∂¶π¢∞. ¡∞ ª∏¡ ÂÈÙÚ¤ÂÙ ∙Ú¢ÚÈÛÎfiÌÂÓÔ˘̃ ‹ ˙Ò∙ ÛÙÔ ˉÒÚÔ ÂÚÁ∙Û›∙̃ fiÙ∙Ó ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠ÙÔ ÚÈfiÓÈ.
¡∞ ‚‚∙ÈÒÓÂÛÙ fiÙÈ Ë ÙÚ‡∙ Û‡Ó‰ÂÛË̃ ÙË̃ ÏÂ›‰∙̃ Ù∙ÈÚÈ¿˙ÂÈ ÛÙÔÓ ¿ÍÔÓ∙ ÙÔ˘ ÌËˉ∙Ó‹Ì∙ÙỖ ÚÈÓ ÂÁÎ∙Ù∙ÛÙ‹ÛÂÙ ÙË ¡∞ ª∏ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›Ù ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ fiÙ∙Ó ‚Ú›ÛÎÂÛÙ ˘fi ÙËÓ Â‹ÚÂÈ∙ Ó∙ÚÎ̂ÙÈÎÒÓ ‹ ∙ÏÎÔfiÏ.
ÏÂ›‰∙. ¡∞ ª∏¡ ∙ÎÔ˘Ì¿Ù ÙË ÏÂ›‰∙ ÍËÚ‹̃ ÎÔ‹̃ Ì ∙‰∙Ì¿ÓÙÈÓË ÂÈÎ¿Ï˘„Ë ∙̤Û̂̃ ÌÂÙ¿ ÙË ˉÚ‹ÛË. ∞˘Ù¤̃ ÔÈ ÏÂ›‰Ẫ ˉÚÂÈ¿˙ÔÓÙ∙È
¡∞ ÂÁÎ∙Ù∙ıÈÛٿ٠ÙË ÏÂ›‰∙ ÁÂÚ¿ Î∙È ÛÙ∙ıÂÚ¿. ¡∙ ‚ȉÒÓÂÙ ÛÊÈˉÙ¿ Ì ÎÏÂȉ› ÙÔ ∙ÍÈÌ¿‰È ÙË̃ Û‡Ó‰ÂÛË̃. ∙ÚÎÂÙ¿ ÏÂÙ¿ Ó∙ ÎÚ˘ÒÛÔ˘Ó ÌÂÙ¿ ∙fi οı ÎÔ‹.
¡∞ ‚‚∙ÈÒÓÂÛÙ fiÙÈ Ë ÏÂ›‰∙ Î∙È ÔÈ ÊÏ¿ÓÙ˙Ẫ ›Ó∙È Î∙ı∙Ú¤̃ Î∙È ‰ÂÓ ¤ˉÔ˘Ó ˉÒÌ∙Ù∙ Î∙È ∙Î∙ı∙ÚÛ›Ẫ ÚÈÓ ÂÁÎ∙Ù∙ÛÙ‹ÛÂÙ ¡∞ ª∏ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠ÔÙ¤ ˉ∙Ï∙Ṳ̂ÓẪ ‹ Êı∙Ṳ́ÓẪ ÊÏ¿ÓÙ˙Ẫ ÏÂ›‰∙̃.
ÙË ÏÂ›‰∙ ÛÙÔ ÚÈfiÓÈ. ¡∞ ª∏ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›Ù ∙˘Ùfi ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ Û ÎÏÂÈÛÙfi ˉÒÚÔ, ÂÎÙfĩ Â¿Ó ∙˘Ùfĩ ›Ó∙È Î∙Ù¿ÏÏËÏ∙ ∙ÂÚÈ˙fiÌÂÓỖ.
¡∞ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠ÙË Û̂ÛÙ‹ ÏÂ›‰∙ ÁÈ∙ ÙÔÓ Ù‡Ô ÙË̃ ÂÚÁ∙Û›∙̃ Ô˘ ı∙ Á›ÓÂÈ. ∂∙ÏËı‡ÛÙ Ì ÙÔÓ Î∙Ù∙Û΢∙ÛÙ‹ ÙË̃ ¡∞ ª∏¡ ∙Ê‹ÓÂÙ ÙËÓ ÂÈÊ¿ÓÂÈ∙ ÙË̃ ÏÂ›‰∙̃ Ó∙ ÂÎÙ›ıÂÙ∙È ∙fi ÙÔÓ ÚÔÊ˘Ï∙ÎÙ‹Ú∙ ¿Ó̂ ∙fi 180 ÌÔ›ÚẪ.
ÏÂ›‰∙̃, Â¿Ó ‰Â ÁÓ̂Ú›˙ÂÙÂ Â¿Ó Ë ÏÂ›‰∙ ›Ó∙È Û̂ÛÙ‹. ¡∞ ª∏ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›Ù ∙˘Ùfi ÙÔ ÚÈfiÓÈ ˉ̂Ú›̃ Ó∙ ¤ˉÂÙ Î∙È Ù∙ ‰‡Ô ˉ¤ÚÈ∙ ÛÙÈ̃ ˉÂÈÚÔÏ∙‚¤̃.
¡∞ ÎÚ∙ٿ٠ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ ¿ÓÙ∙ Ì Ù∙ ‰‡Ô ˉ¤ÚÈ∙ fiÙ∙Ó Ë ÌËˉ∙Ó‹ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›. ÃÚËÛÈÌÔÔÈ‹ÛÙ ÌÈ∙ ÛÙ∙ıÂÚ‹ Ï∙‚‹, ÌÂ
ÙÔ˘̃ ∙ÓÙ›ˉÂÈÚẪ Î∙È Ù∙ ‰¿ÎÙ˘Ï∙ Ó∙ ∙ÁÎ∙ÏÈ¿˙Ô˘Ó ÙÈ̃ ˉÂÈÚÔÏ∙‚¤̃.
¡∞ ÎÚ∙ٿ٠fiÏ∙ Ù∙ ̤ÏË ÙÔ˘ ÛÒÌ∙Ùfĩ Û∙̃ Ì∙ÎÚÈ¿ ∙fi ÙÈ̃ ÎÔÙÈΤ̃ ÏÂ›‰Ẫ fiÙ∙Ó Ë ÌËˉ∙Ó‹ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›. *****************
¡∞ ‰È∙ÙËÚ›Ù ÙÈ̃ ˉÂÈÚÔÏ∙‚¤̃ ÛÙÂÁÓ¤̃, Î∙ı∙Ú¤̃ Î∙È ˉ̂Ú›̃ Ï¿‰È∙ ‹ Î∙‡ÛÈÌ∙. ∆Ô ÚÈfiÓÈ ∙˘Ùfi Ûˉ‰ȿÛÙËΠÁÈ∙ ÔÚÈṲ̂ÓẪ ÂÊ∙ÚÌÔÁ¤̃ ÌfiÓÔ. ª∏ ÌÂÙ∙ÙÚ¤ÂÙ ÙÔ ÚÈfiÓÈ Î∙È Ó∙ ÙÔ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠ÌfiÓÔ ÁÈ∙
¡∞ ÌÂÙ∙ʤÚÂÙ ¿ÓÙ∙ ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ Ì ÙÔÓ ÎÈÓËÙ‹Ú∙ ÛÙ∙Ì∙ÙË̤ÓÔ Î∙È Ì ÙÔ ÛÈÏ∙ÓÛȤ Ì∙ÎÚÈ¿ ∙fi ÙÔ ÛÒÌ∙. ÙÈ̃ ÂÊ∙ÚÌÔÁ¤̃ Ô˘ Ûˉ‰ȿÛÙËÎÂ. ∞Ó ¤ˉÂÙ ∙ÔÚ›Ẫ ‹ ÂÚ̂Ù‹ÛÂÈ̃ ÛˉÂÙÈο Ì ÙËÓ ÂÊ∙ÚÌÔÁ‹ ÙÔ˘, ª∏ ˉÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠ÙÔ ÚÈfiÓÈ
¡∞ ÚÔÛ¤ˉÂÙ Î∙È Ó∙ ∙ÎÔÏÔ˘ı›Ù ÙÈ̃ Ô‰ËÁ›Ẫ fiÙ∙Ó ÊÔÚÙÒÓÂÙ Î∙È ÍÂÊÔÚÙÒÓÂÙ ÙÔ ÚÈfiÓÈ. ̤ˉÚÈ Ô˘ Ó∙ ∙ÏÏËÏÔÁÚ∙Ê‹ÛÂÙ Ì ÙËÓ Diamant Boart, Inc. Î∙È Û∙̃ Û˘Ì‚Ô˘Ï¤„Ô˘Ó.
¡∞ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›Ù ∙˘Ùfi ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ ÌfiÓÔ Û Î∙Ï¿ ∙ÂÚÈ˙fiÌÂÓÔ˘̃ ˉÒÚÔ˘̃.
¡∞ ÏËÚÔÊÔÚ›Ù ÙÔ˘̃ ∙Ú¢ÚÈÛÎfiÌÂÓÔ˘̃ Ô˘ ı∙ Ú¤ÂÈ Ó∙ ÛÙ¤ÎÔÓÙ∙È fiÙ∙Ó ÙÔ ÚÈfiÓÈ Â›Ó∙È Û ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›∙.
¡∞ Î∙ıÈÂÚÒÛÙ ¤Ó∙ ÚfiÁÚ∙ÌÌ∙ ÂÎ∙›‰Â˘ÛË̃ ÁÈ∙ fiÏÔ˘̃ ÙÔ˘̃ ˉÂÈÚÈÛÙ¤̃ ∙˘ÙÔ‡ ÙÔ˘ ÌËˉ∙Ó‹Ì∙ÙỖ.
¡∞ ∙ÔÌ∙ÎÚ‡ÓÂÙ fiÏÔ˘̃ ∙˘ÙÔ‡̃ Ô˘ ‰ÂÓ ¤ˉÔ˘Ó Ûˉ¤ÛË Ì ÙËÓ ÂÚÁ∙Û›∙ ∙fi ÙËÓ ÏËÛ›ÔÓ ÂÚÈÔˉ‹. ¶ÔÙ¤ ÌËÓ ÂÈÙÚ¤ÂÙÂ
Û Î∙Ó¤Ó∙Ó Ó∙ ÛÙ¤ÎÂÙ∙È ÌÚÔÛÙ¿ ‹ ›Û̂ ∙fi ÙË ÏÂ›‰∙ fiÙ∙Ó Ë ÌËˉ∙Ó‹ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›. ¡∙ ÚÔÛ¤ˉÂÙ fiÙ∙Ó ˉÂÈÚ›˙ÂÛÙÂ
Î∙‡ÛÈÌ∙.
¡∞ ÌÂÙ∙ÎÈÓ›Ù ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ ÙÔ˘Ï¿ˉÈÛÙÔÓ 10 fi‰È∙ Ì∙ÎÚÈ¿ ∙fi ÙÔ ÛËÌÂ›Ô ∙ÓÂÊÔ‰È∙ÛÌÔ‡ ÚÈÓ ÍÂÎÈÓ‹ÛÂÙ ÙË ÌËˉ∙Ó‹
Î∙È ‚‚∙È̂ı›Ù fiÙÈ ÙÔ Î∙¿ÎÈ ÙË̃ ‰ÂÍ∙ÌÂÓ‹̃ ÛÙÔ ÚÈfiÓÈ Î∙È ÙÔ Î∙¿ÎÈ ÙÔ˘ ‰Ôˉ›Ԣ Î∙˘Û›Ì̂Ó Â›Ó∙È Î∙Ù¿ÏÏËÏ∙
ÛÊÈÁ̤ÓÔ.

18
 UTILIZZO USE
Leggere le istruzioni per l’uso prima di utilizzare il troncatore per la prima volta. Please read the instructions for use prior to operating the machine for the first time.

 
Prima di essere spedita, ogni macchina è sottoposta a rigorosi collaudi in fabbrica. Before leaving our factory, every machine is thoroughly tested.
Se le istruzioni vengono osservate scrupolosamente, la macchina durerà a lungo in normali Follow our instructions strictly and your machine will give you long service in normal operating
condizioni di funzionamento. conditions.

Applicazioni: Taglio di calcestruzzo con dischi diamantati o abrasivi Applications: Sawing of concrete with diamond or abrasive blade
Taglio di metalli con dischi abrasivi Cutting of metal with abrasive blade
Utensili: Dischi diamantati raffreddati ad acqua (bagnati) e ad aria (asciutti) o dischi abrasivi Tools: Diamond blades - water cooled (wet) and air cooled (dry) or abrasive blades

PER SELEZIONARE IL DISCO GIUSTO, VEDERE “INSTALLAZIONE E RIMOZIONE DEL DISCO DI TAGLIO”. REFER TO BLADE MOUNTING AND REMOVAL FOR PROPER BLADE SELECTION.

GEBRAUCH USO
Bitte lesen Sie die Gebrauchsanweisungen für diese Maschine vor dem ersten Gebrauch SI lea todo el manual antes de manejar esta máquina.
durch.

 
Antes de salir de la fábrica, todas las máquina son probadas extensivamente.
Vor dem Verlassen unserer Fabrik wird jede Maschine gründlich geprüft.
Siga nuestras instrucciones al pie de la letra y su máquina le brindará muchos años de servicio
Wenn Sie unsere Anleitungen genau befolgen, wird Ihnen Ihre Maschine unter normalen
Bedienungsbedingungen auf lange Zeit Dienste leisten. en condiciones normales de trabajo.

Aplicaciones: Cortes en hormigón con hojas diamantadas o abrasivas

Anwendungen: Sägen von Zement mit einer Diamant- oder abschleifenden Sägescheibe Cortes en metal con hojas abrasivas
Schneiden von Metall mit einer abschleifenden Sägescheibe Herramientas: Hojas diamantadas - Hojas de corte enfriadas por agua y de corte en seco u hojas abrasivas.
Werkzeuge: Diamantsägescheiben - wassergekühlte (naß) und luftgekühlte (trocken) oder abschleifende
Sägescheiben CONSULTE LAS INSTRUCCIONES DE MONTAJE Y DESMONTAJE DE LA HOJA PARA LA SELECCION DE
SIEHE "EINBAU UND AUSBAU DER SÄGESCHEIBE" FÜR DIE RICHTIGE WAHL DER SÄGESCHEIBE. LA HOJA CORRECTA.

GEBRUIK USO
Lees de gebruiksaanwijzingen alvorens de machine voor de eerste keer te bedienen. Por favor, leia as instruções de uso antes de operar a máquina pela primeira vez.

 
Elke machine wordt grondig getest alvorens onze fabriek te verlaten. Antes de sair da fábrica, cada máquina é completamente testada.
Volg onze voorschriften nauwkeurig en uw machine zal in normale bedrijfsomstandigheden heel Siga completamente as nossas instruções e a sua máquina irá lhe oferecer serviço por muito
lang meegaan. tempo sob condições de operação normais.

Toepassingen: Zagen van beton met een diamant- of abrasief zaagblad Aplicações: Cortando concreto com uma lâmina de diamante ou abrasiva
Snijden van metaal met een carburundum abrasief blad Cortando metal com uma lâmina abrasiva
Ferramentas: Lâminas de diamante - resfriamento a água (molhada) e resfriamento a ar (seca)
Gereedschappen: Diamantbladen - watergekoeld (nat) en luchtgekoeld (droog) of abrasieve bladen ou abrasiva.
CONSULTE A SEÇÃO DE MONTAGEM E REMOÇÃO PARA FAZER A SELEÇÃO DA LÁMINA ADEQUADA.
ZIE “ZAAGBLADEN MONTEREN EN DEMONTEREN VOOR KEUZE VAN HET JUISTE ZAAGBLAD”.

UTILISATION Ã∏™∏
Avant d’utiliser la machine pour la première fois, prière de lire les instructions d’utilisation. ¶∙Ú∙Î∙Ï›ÛÙ Ó∙ ‰È∙‚¿ÛÂÙ ÙÈ̃ Ô‰ËÁ›Ẫ ˉÚ‹ÛÂ̂̃ ÚÈÓ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ‹ÛÂÙ ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ ÁÈ∙ ÚÒÙË
ÊÔÚ¿.


Avant de quitter l’usine, chaque machine subit des tests approfondis.
Observez strictement nos instructions et votre machine vous donnera une longue durée de


service, en conditions d’utilisation normale. ¶ÚÈÓ Ê‡ÁÂÈ ∙fi ÙÔ ÂÚÁÔÛÙ¿ÛÈfi Ì∙̃, οı ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ ¤ˉÂÈ ‰ÔÎÈÌ∙ÛÙ› ÂÍÔÓ˘ˉÈÛÙÈο.
∞ÎÔÏÔ˘ı‹ÛÙ ÙÈ̃ Ô‰ËÁ›Ẫ Ì∙̃ Â∙ÎÚÈ‚Ò̃ Î∙È ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ¿ Û∙̃ ı∙ Û∙̃ ÚÔÛʤÚÂÈ Ì∙ÎÚfiˉÚÔÓË
Applications : Sciage du béton avec un disque en diamant ou abrasif ˘ËÚÂÛ›∙ ˘fi Î∙ÓÔÓÈΤ̃ Û˘Óı‹ÎẪ ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›∙̃.
Découpe du métal avec un disque abrasif
Outils : Disques en diamant - refroidis à l’eau (usage humide) et refroidis à l’air (usage à sec) ou ∂Ê∙ÚÌÔÁ¤̃: ∫fi„ÈÌÔ ÙÛÈ̤ÓÙÔ˘ Ì ÌÈ∙ ‰È∙Ì∙ÓÙ¤ÓÈ∙ ‹ ÏÂÈ∙ÓÙÈ΋ ÏÂ›‰∙
disques abrasifs ∫fi„ÈÌÔ ÌÂÙ¿ÏÏÔ˘ Ì ÌÈ∙ ÏÂÈ∙ÓÙÈ΋ ÏÂ›‰∙
∂ÚÁ∙Ï›∙: §Â›‰Ẫ Ì ∙‰∙Ì¿ÓÙÈÓË ÂÈÎ¿Ï˘„Ë - ˘‰Úfi„˘ÎÙẪ (wet) ‹ ∙ÂÚfi„˘ÎÙẪ (dry) - ‹ ÏÂÈ∙ÓÙÈΤ̃
CONSULTER LA SECTION “MONTAGE ET DEMONTAGE DU DISQUE” POUR EFFECTUER LA SELECTION ÏÂ›‰Ẫ
CORRECTE DES DISQUES. ∞¡∞º∂ƒ£∂π∆∂ ™∆∏¡ ∂°∫∞∆∞™∆∞™∏ ∫∞π ∞º∞πƒ∂™∏ §∂¶π¢ø¡ °π∞ ∫∞∆∞§§∏§∏ ∂¶π§√°∏ §∂¶π¢∞™.

19
 I COMPONENTI DELLA TRONCATRICE F COMPOSANTS DE LA DÉCOUPEUSE P COMPONENTES DE MOTO CORTADOR
1 Coperchi filtri aria 12 Interruttore di massa 1 Filtre à air 12 Interrupteur de masse 1 Filtro do ar 12 Interruptor de massa
2 Marmitta 13 Protezione disco 2 Pot d’échappement 13 Protection du disque 2 Panela de escape 13 Protecção do disco
3 Pomello fermo protezione 14 Impugnatura anteriore 3 Pommeau de blocage de la protection 14 Poignée avant 3 Manipulo de paragem da protecção 14 Cabo Dianteiro
4 Foro perno di blocco 15 Pulsante di semi accelerazione 4 Trou de goupille de blocage 15 Bouton demi-accéleration 4 Orificio do Pino de Trava 15 Botão da semi-aceleração
5 Camma tendicinghia 16 Leva fermo acceleratore 5 Came de tension de la courroìe 16 Blocage du levier accélération 5 Excentrico tênsor da correa 16 Alavanca de para gem do acelerador
6 Dadi carter cinghia 17 Leva acceleratore 6 Ecrous de la protection de courroie 17 Levier accélérateur 6 Porcas da cobertura da correa 17 Alavanca do acelerador
7 Rullo / Ruote 18 Tappo serbatoio carburante 7 Rouleau / Roves 18 Bouchon réservoir carburant 7 Rôlo / Rodas 18 Tampa do depósito de combustível
8 Dadi di montaggio braccio 19 Impugnatura avviamento 8 Ecrous de montage de bras 19 Poignée de lanceur 8 Porcas de Montagem de Braço 19 Parafuso tensor da correia
9 Valvola di decompressione 20 Bullone dermo disco 9 Valve de décompression 20 Bouton de blocage du disque 9 Válvula de decompressão 20 Parafuso com porco da fixação do disco
10 Leva comando starter 21 Disco 10 Levier de commande starter 21 Disque 10 Alavanca de comando start 21 Disco
11 Impugnatura posteriore 11 Poignée arrière 11 Cabo Traseiro

D BAUTEILE DER TRENNSCHLEIFER GB POWER CUTTER COMPONENTS GR ΕΞΑΡΤΗΜΑΤΑ ΔΙΣΚΟΥ ΚΟΠΗΣ

1 Luftfilter 12 Ein-/Ausschalter 1 Air filter 12 On/Off switch 1 Φιλτρο αερος 12 Γενικος διακοπτης
2 Schalldämpfer 13 Trennscheiben-Schtzhaube 2 Muffler 13 Disk guard 2 Εξατμιση 13 Καρτερ δισκου
3 Regulierknopf f. Scheibenschutz 14 Vordere Griff 3 Guard fixing knob 14 Front handle 3 Πομολο ακινητοποιητη καρτερ 14 ∂ÌÚfiÛıÈ∙ ÃÂÈÚÔÏ∙‚‹
4 Sperrastenlock 15 Halbgasarretierung 4 Lock Pin Hole 15 Half throttle lock 4 √‹ ¶Â›ÚÔ˘ ∞ÛÊ¿ÏÈÛË̃ 15 Κουμπι ημιεπιταχυνσης
5 Riemenspannocken 16 Sicherheitsgasgriff 5 Belt adjustment cam 16 Throttle trigger lockout 5 Βιδες ρυθμιστου ιμαντα 16 Μοχλος ακινητοποιησης επιταχυντη
6 Muttem für Riemenabdeckung 17 Gashebel 6 Belt Cover Nuts 17 Throttle trigger 6 ¶∙ÍÈÌ¿‰È∙ ¶ÚÔÊ˘Ï∙ÎÙ‹Ú∙ πÌ¿ÓÙ∙ 17 Μοχλος επιταχυνσης
7 Rolle / Raden 18 Kraftstofftandkdeckel 7 Roller / Wheels 18 Fuel tank cap 7 P¿Ô˘ÏÔ / Pfi‰∙ 18 Ταπα ντεποζιτου καυσιμων
8 Muttem für Schinenhalternung 19 Startergriff 8 Arm Mounting Nuts 19 Starter handle 8 ¶∙ÍÈÌ¿‰È∙ ™Ù‹ÚÈÍË̃ BÚ∙ˉ›ÔÓ∙ 19 Λαβη εκκινησης
9 Druckreduzierventil 20 Trennscheiben-Arretierschraube 9 Decompression valve 20 Disk fixing bolt 9 B∙Ï‚›‰∙ ∙ÔÛ˘Ì›ÛË̃ 20 Μπουλονι ακινητοποιησης δισκου
10 Chokehebel 21 Trennscheibe 10 Choke lever 21 Disk 10 Τσοκ 21 Δισκος
11 Hintere Griff 11 Rear Handle 11 √›ÛıÈ∙ ÃÂÈÚÔÏ∙‚‹

NL ONDERDELEN VAN DE SNIJMACHINE E COMPONENTES DE LA CORTADORA

1 Luchtfilter 12 Brandstoftankop 1 Filtro de aria 12 Interruptor de masa
2 Uitlaat 13 Schijfbescherming 2 Silenciador 13 Protección del disco
3 Vergrendelingsknop bescherming 14 Voorste handgreep 3 Pomo sujeta protección 14 Empuñadura anterior
4 Gat voor borgpen 15 Halfgasknop 4 Agujero de la clavija de bloqueo 15 Pusante de semiaceleración
5 Riemspannerschroef 16 Gashendelblokkering 5 Leva tensor correa 16 Palanca de tope del acelerador
6 Moeren riemkap 17 Gashendel 6 Tuercas de la tapa de la correa 17 Palanca de acelerador
7 Rol / Raden 18 Brandstoftankop 7 Rodillo / Ruedas 18 Tapón depósito combustible
8 Moeren aemmontage 19 Startgreep 8 Tuercas de montaje del brazo 19 Empuñadura del arranque
9 Decompressieklep 20 Schijfsluitbout 9 Válvula de descompresión 20 Perno de fijación del disco
10 Chokehendel 21 Schijf 10 Palanca cebador 21 Disco
11 Archterste handgreep 11 Empuñadura posterior

20
 
 
   

0RGHOlo0RGHOO0RGqOH0RGHO±0RGHOR - ȂȠȞIJȑȜȠ 963 TT-A - TT 163 983

 TT-A - TT 183
0RWRUeMotor - 0RWHXUEgine - 0RWRUH7LSRGHPRWRUȀȚȞȘIJȒȡĮȢ A due tempi, cilindrosingolo, raffreddato ad aria=ZHLWDNWHU(LQ]\OLQGHUOXIWJHNKOW7ZHHWDNWPRWRUHQNHOHFLOLQGHUOXFKWJHNRHOGCylindre unique,
deux temps, refroidi à l'air - 2 stroke, Single cylinder, Air cooled 'RVWLHPSRV0RQRFLOtQGULFR(QIULDGRSRUDLUH&LOLQGUR6LPSOHVGH'RLV
3HUFXUVRVUHVIULDGRD$UǻȓȤȡȠȞȠȢȂȠȞȠțȪȜȚȞįȡȠȢǹİȡȩȥȣțIJȠȢ EMAK
Cilindrata  +XEUDXP  &\OLQGHULQKRXG  &\OLQGUpH ± Displacement  &LOLQGUDGD 
'HVORFDPHQWRȀȣȕȚıȝȩȢ 63.3FP (3.8 cu in) 80.7 cm3 (5.0 cu in)
Peso senza disco*HZLFKWRKQH6FKHLEH±*HZLFKW]RQGHUVFKLMI3RLGVVDQVGLVTXH
10.2 (12") - 10.4 (14") kg (22.5 - 22.9 lb.) 11.2 (12") - 11.4 (14") - 13.6 (16") kg (24.6 - 25.1 - 29.9 lb.) 
Weight without disk– Peso sin disco – Peso sem o disco - ǺȐȡȠȢȤȦȡȚȢįȚıțȠ
Velocità massima mandrino ± +|FKVWJHVFKZLQGLJNHLW GHV 6SLQGHOV  0D[LPXP VQHOKHLG 
spil - 9LWHVVH PD[L '¶D[H  Max. Spindle Speed  Velocidad maxima eje 5100 5100 (12” - 14”) 4700 (16”)
portaherramienta -9HORFLGDGH0i['D+DVWH ȂȑȖȉĮȤȪIJȘIJĮȐȟȠȞĮ530
Max velocità motore giri/mo  8P 0RWRUJHVFKZLQGLJNHLW 8P  7RHUHQWDO PRWRU 
2PZHQWHOLQJHQPLQXXW  WUPLQ 5pJLPH PRWHXU WUPLQ ± RPM Engine Speed 
(RPM) - USP 9HORFLGDG GHO PRWRU USP  530 9HORFLGDGH GR 0RWRU 530 ± Ȉǹȁ 10000 ± 200
ȉĮȤȪIJȘIJĮȀȚȞȘIJȒȡĮȈǹȁ
Giri/min. al minimo - /HHUODXI8P7RHUHQWDOLQYULMORRS5pJLPHGHUDOHQWLIdle RPM - 
5DOHQWLUSP0DUFKD/HQWD530±ȇİȜĮȞIJȓȈǹȁ 2400 ÷ 2800
'LPHQVLRQi  $EPHVVXQJHQ ± $IPHWLQJHQ  'LPHQVLRQV  'LPHQVLRnes  Dimensões - 
mm (in.)
ǻȚĮıIJȐıİȚȢ
/unghezza/lQJH/HQJWH/RQJXHXU±/ength/DUJR&RPSULPHQWRȂȒțȠȢ 740 mm (29.1”) 800 mm (31.5”) 870 mm (34.3”)
Altezza+|KH+RRJWH+DXWHXU±Height$OWXUD$OWXUDǶȥȠȢ 400 mm (15.8”) 400 mm (15.8”) 440 mm (17.4”)
Larghezza%UHLWH%UHHGWH/DUJHXU±Width$QFKR/DUJXUDȆȜȐIJȠȢ 210 mm (8.3”) 220 mm (8.7”) 220 mm (8.7”)
Accensione tipo=QGXQJ typ -2QWVWHNLQJ W\SH$OOXPDJH W\SHIgnition type - 7LSRde Velocità controllata elettronicamente(OHNWURQLVFKJHVWHXHUWH*HVFKZLQGLJNHLW(OHNWURQLVFKHVQHOKHLGVFRQWUROH&RQWU{OHGHYLWHVVHpOHFWURQLTXH
HQFHQGLGR,JQLomR tLSR±ȉȪʌȠȢǹȞȐijȜİȟȘȢ - Electronic Speed Controlled(OHFWUyQLFRFRQWURODGRSRU&RQWUROHGHYHORFLGDGHHOHWU{QLFRǾȜİțIJȡȠȞȚțȩȢİȜİȖțIJȒȢIJĮȤȪIJȘIJĮȢ
Intervallo6SDOWH6SOHHW(FDUWGap(QWUHKLHUUR(VSDoRǻȚȐțİȞȠ 0.35 mm (0.015”)
Candela / 0arca, tipo, intervallo interelettrodico ±=QGNHU]H+HUVWHOOHU7\S6SDOWH 
%RXJLH  Merk, soort, elektrodenspleet  Bougie  fab., type, écart - Spark plug /  NGK
Mfg., type, gap %XMtD)DEULFDQWH7LSR(QWUHKLHUUR9HOD)DEUWLSRHVSDoRȂʌȠȣȗȓ BRMR8Y

ȀĮIJĮıțİȣĮıIJȒȢIJȪʌȠȢįȚȐțİȞȠ 0,5 mm (0.02”)

&ostruttore CarburatoreH9HUJDVHU+HUVWHOOHU&DUEXUDWRU)DEULNDQW&DUEXUetor 
manufacture  Carburateur fabricant  &DUEXUDGRU fDEULFDQWH   &DUEXUDGRU Fabricação Walbro
ȀĮȡȝʌȚȡĮIJȑȡ ȀĮIJĮıțİȣĮıIJȒȢ 

0RGHOlo0RGHOO0RGqOH0RGHO±0RGHOR - ȂȠȞIJȑȜȠ +'$ :-
7ipo7\S7ypeȉȪʌȠȢ  Membrana - Membran - Diafragma - Diaphragme - Diaphragm - Diafragma - ¢È¿ÊÚ∙ÁÌ∙
  Getto semifisso - Halbstarre Düse - Semi-vaste Jet semi-fixe - Semi Fixed Jet - Chorro semifijo - Jato semi-fixio - ∏ÌÈÛÙ∙ıÂÚ¿ ∞ÎÚÔʇÛÈ∙
Miscelazione carburanterapporto7UHLEVWRIIJHPLVFK9HUKlOWQLV%UDQGVWRIPHQJVHO 
(verhouding) &DUEXUDQWPpODQJHSURSRUWLRQV± Fuel / Mix (Ratio)&RPEXVWLEOH  (25:1)*
4%
0H]FODUHODFLyQ&RPEXVWtYHO0LVWXUD5D]mRȀĮȪıȚȝĮȂİȓȖȝĮǹȞĮȜȠȖȓĮ
Capacità serbatoio  9ROXPHQ  ,QKRXG ± &DSDFLWp ± Fuel capacity ± &DSDFLGDG ± 
700 cm3 (0.18 Gallon) 880 cm3 (0.23 Gallon)
&DSDFLGDGHȋȦȡȘIJȚțȩIJȘIJĮīĮȜȁȓIJȡĮ
Braccio da taglio6FKQHLGKDOWHUXQJ6QLMDUP%UDVGHWUDQFKDJHCutting Arm%UD]R 
Reversibile - reversibel - Omkeerbaar - Réversible - Reversible - Reversível - ∞ÓÙÈÛÙÚÂÊfiÌÂÓÔ
GHFRUWH%UDoRGH&RUWHǺȡĮȤȓȠȞĮȢȀȠʌȒȢ
Dimensioni albero portadisco ± 6SLQGHOJUlJH  *URRWWH YDQ GH VSLO  'LPHQVLRQ G¶D[H  
15 mm (0.6”)
Arbor Size7DPDxRGHOHMH7DPDQKRGR0DQGULOȂȑȖİșȠȢȈȪȞįİıȘȢ
'LVFKL FRQVLJOLDWL  'LVTXHV FRQVHLOOpV  $GYLVH ZKHHO  (PSIRKOHQH %OlWWHU  'LVFRV 
12” (300 mm) 80 m/s - 12” (300 mm) 100 m/s - 14” (350 mm) 100 m/s
DFRQVHMDGRV$DQEHYROHQVFKLMYHQ±'LVFRVDFRQVHOKDGRVȈȣȞȚıIJȫȝİȞȠȚ įȓıțȠȚ ıİ 12” (300 mm) 80 m/s - 12” (300 mm) 100 m/s - 14” (350 mm) 100 m/s
ȤȚȜ 16” (400 mm) 100 m/s
Profondità massima taglio±0D[6FKQLWWWLHIH0D[LPXP]DDJGLHSWH - 3URIRQGHXUPD[L 
de VFLDJHMax. Depth of Cut±3URIXQGLGDGPi[GHFRUWH3URIXQGLGDGH0i[GR Corte 100 mm (4”) - 125 mm (5”) 100 mm (4”) - 125 mm (5”) - 140 mm (6”)
ȂȑȖǺȐșȠȢțȠʌȒȢıİȤȚȜ

8Vare esclusivamente lubrificanti di tipo approvatovedere - Rifornimento di carburante1XU]XJHODVVHQH6FKPLHUPLWWHOYHUZHQGHQVLHKH%HWULHEVVWRIIWDQNHQ*HEUXLNHQNHOJRHGJHNHXUGHVPHHUPLGGHOHQ]LH%UDQGVWRI8WLOLVHUuniquement
les lubrifiants approuvés (Voir - Plein de carburant)8VHonly approved LubricantsSee - Fueling Use apenas os lubrificantes recomendados (Veja - Abastecimento)ȋȡȘıȚȝȠʌȠȚİȓIJİȝȩȞȠİȖțİțȡȚȝȑȞĮȜȚʌĮȞIJȚțȐǺȜǹȞĮʌȜȒȡȦıȘ
ȀĮȣıȓȝȦȞ


21
1 2
Italiano
ASSEMBLAGGIO 12” - 14”
MONTAGGIO BRACCIO REVERSIBILE
– Montare il braccio (A-B, Fig. 1) nella propria sede sui prigionieri
(L) e la cinghia trapezoidale nella puleggia motrice (R, Fig. 2).
– Fissare il braccio (A-B, Fig. 1) tramite i dadi e la vite (C).
REGISTRAZIONE TENSIONE CINGHIA
Per tendere la cinghia (Fig. 3):
– svitare i tre dadi (D).
– ruotare la camme tramite il dado (E) nella direzione (F).
– serrare i tre dadi (D).
Controllare ogni 3/4 ore di lavoro la tensione della cinghia.
ATTENZIONE – Controllare la tensione della cinghia
giornalmente. Sostituire le cinghie se appaiono
logorate.
Per tagliare vicino a pareti, cordoli, ostacoli verticali è necessario
ruotare il braccio della troncatrice di 180° in modo che il disco di
taglio si trovi sul lato opposto del braccio (Fig. 3-7).
ROTAZIONE BRACCIO REVERSIBILE (Fig. 3-5)
– Togliere le tre viti (H) per smontare il carter copricinghia (G) del
braccio.
– Allentare la vite tendicinghia (E).
– Togliere le due viti (D) per disimpegnare il braccio (B) dal carter
(A) e ruotare il braccio sul carter di 180°.
– Riassemblare il carter (A) e il braccio (B) e rimontare il carter
copricinghia (G).
– Ruotare la protezione del disco di 180°:
Togliere il pomello (L, Fig. 4), ruotare e posizionare la protezione
(M), bloccare il pomello (L) avvitandolo ne foro (N). Le Fig. 6-7
illustrano la troncatrice con il braccio ruotato.
ATTENZIONE - Se si utilizza un disco diamantato,
quando si effettua la rotazione del braccio, bisogna
effettuare anche la rotazione del disco di 180°.
ATTENZIONE - La protezione del disco deve essere
posizionata in modo che le scintille e le scorie del
materiale che viene tagliato non vengano convogliate
verso l’operatore.
22
Deutsch
MONTAGE 12” - 14”
MONTAGE DES REVERSIERBAREN ARMS
- Den Arm (A - B, Abb. 1) an seiner Einbaustelle auf den
Stiftschrauben ansetzen und den Keilriemen auf der
Triebriemenscheibe montieren (R, Abb. 2).
- Den Arm (A - B, Abb. 1) mithilfe der Kontermuttern und den
Schraube (C) festspannen.
NACHSPANNEN DES RIEMENS
Um den Riemen zu spannen (Abb. 3):
- die drei Muttern (D) lösen
- den Nocken mit Hilfe der Mutter (E) in Richtung (F) drehen
- die Muttern (D) anziehen.
Alle 3-4 Betriebsstunden die Spannung des Riemens
kontrollieren.
ACHTUNG - Riemenspannung täglich kontrollieren.
Abgenutzte Riemen auswechseln.
Um möglichst nah an Wänden, Randsteinen oder senkrechten
Hindernissen arbeiten zu können, kann der Trennarm um 180°
gewendet werden. Die Scheibe befindet si ch dann auf der
gegenüberliegenden Seite des trennarms
(Abb. 3-7).
DREHUNG DES REVERSIERBAREN ARMS (Abb. 3-5)
- Die Riemenabdeckung (G) des Armes nach Abdrehen der
Schrauben (H) demontieren.
- Die Riemenspannschraube (E) lockern.
- Die beiden Schrauben (D), mit denen der Arm (B) am Gehäuse
(A) befestigt ist, abdrehen und den Arm am Gehäuse um 180’
drehen.
- Gehäuse (A) und Arm (B) wieder zusammenbauen und die
Riemenabdeckung (G) montieren.
- Scheibenschutz entsprechend um 180° wenden: den Drehknopf
(L, Abb, 4) entfernen, Scheibenschutz (M) drehen, in richtige
Stellung bringen, Drehknopf (L) in Bohrung (N) einführen und
festdrehen.
Im Abb. 6-7 Trennschleifer mit gewendetem Arm aufgezeigt.
ACHTUNG - Bei Verwendung einer Diamantscheibe ist
bei der Drehung des Armes auch die Scheibe um 180°
zu drehen.
ACHTUNG - Der Scheibenschutz ist so einzustellen
daß Funken, Splitter und Staub nicht gegen die
Bedienungsperson geleitet werden.
3 4
Nederlands
MONTAGE 12” - 14”
MONTAGE OMKEERARM
- Monteer de arm (A - B, Fig. 1) op zijn plaats op de bouten en de
V-snaar in de drijfriemschijf (R, Fig. 2).
- Bevestig de arm (A - B, Fig. 1) met behulp van de moeren en de
schroeven (C).
REGELING RIEMSPANNING
Om de riem te sparmen (Fig. 3):
- de drie moeren (D) losdraaien
- de nok met de moer (E) in de richting (F) draaien
- de moeren (D) vastdraaien.
Controleer de riemspanning om de 3-4 bedrijfsuren.
LET OP - Controleer de spanning van de riemdagelijks.
Vervang versleten riemen.
Om te kunnen snijden in de buurt van wanden, randen of
verticale obstakels moet de arm van de snijmachine 1801 worden
gedraaid, zodanig dat de snijschijf zich aan de zijde tegenover de
arm bevindt (Fig. 3-7).
ROTATIE OMKEERARM (Fig. 3-5)
- Verwijder de schroeven (H) om de riemafdekkap (G) van de arm
te demonteren.
- Haal de riemspannende schroeven (E) weg.
- Verwijder de twee schroeven (D) om de arm (B) los te maken
van de kap (A) en draai de arm op de kap met 180’.
- Monteer de kap (A) en de arm (B) weer en breng de
nemafdekkap (G) weer aan,
- Draai de schijfbeschermingen met 180°:
moet de knop (L, Fig. 4) worden verwijderd, de bescherming (M)
worden gedraaid en geplaatst, de knop (L) worden geblokkeerd
door hem in de opening (N) te schroeven. De afbeelding 6-7
laat de snijmachine zien met de arm gedraaid.
LET OP - Indien u een diamantschijf gebruikt moet ook
de schiif met 180° worden gedraaià wanneer u de arm
draait.
LET OP - De schijfbescherming moet zodanig worden
geplaatst, dat de vonken en sintels van het materlaal
dat wordt gesneden, niet In de richting van de bediener
worden geleid.
Français
ASSEMBLAGE 12” - 14”
MONTAGE DU BRAS REVERSIBLE
- Monter le bras (A-13, Fig. 1) dans son siège sur les prisonniers
et la courroie trapézoïdale sur la poulie motricer (R, Fig. 2).
- Fixer le bras (A-13, Fig. 1) à l’aide des écrous et la vis (C).
REGLAGE DE TENSION DE LA COURROIE
Pour tendre une courroie (Fig. 3):
- dévisser les trois écroux (D)
- roues les cames à travers l’écrou (E) dans la direction (F)
- serrer les écroux (D).
Contrôler la tension de la courroie, après 3-4 heures de travail.
ATTENTION - Contrôlez la tension de la courroie tous
les jours. Remplacer les courroies usées.
Pour couper près des murs, des bordures, des obstacles
verticaux, il faut tourner le bras de la découpeuse à 180° de
manière à positionner le disque de coupe de lautre côtre du bras
(Fig. 3-7).
ROTATION DU BRAS REVERSIBLE (Fig. 3-5)
- Enlever les trois vis (H), pour démonter le carter de protection
courroie (G) du bras.
- Desserrer la vis tendeur-courroie (E).
- Retirer les deux vis (D) pour dégager le bras (B) du carter (A) et
le tourner sur le carter de 180°.
- Remonter le carter (A) et le bras (B), puis le carter de protection
courroie (G).
- Pivoter la protection du disque de 180°:
ôtez le pommeau (L, Fig. 4) tournez et placez la protection (M)
bloquez le pommeau (L) en le vissant dans l’orifice (N). La Fig.
6-7 illustre la découpeuse le bras tourné.
ATTENTION - si l’on utilise un disque diamanté,
lorsqu’on effectue la rotation du bras, il faut également
faire tourner le disque de 180°.
ATTENTION - La protection du disque doit être placée
de manière à éviter la projection des étincelles et des
scories, des matériaux coupés, vers l’opérateur.
5 6
English
ASSEMBLY 12” - 14”
REVERSIBLE CUTTER ARM FITTING
- Fit the cutter arm (A - B, Fig . 1) on to the studs and drive belt
onto the drive pulley (R, Fig. 2).
- Fix the cutter arm (A-B, Fig. 1) by means of nuts and screw
DRIVE BELT TENSIONING
To stretch the belt (Fig. 3):
- unscrew the 3 nuts (D)
- turn the cams through the nut (E) towards the direction (F)
- tighten the nut (D).
Control every 3 to 4 hours of use drive belt tension.
WARNING - Check the belt tension every day. Replace
worn belts.
For cutting near walls, curbs, or vertical obstacles, it is necessary
to rotate the power cutter arm 180° so that the cutting disk is
positioned on the opposite side of the arm (Fig. 3-7).
REVERSIBLE ARM ROTATION (Fig. 3-5)
- Remove the three screws (H) in order to remove the arm belt
protective guard (G).
- Loosen the belt tightening screw (E).
- Remove the two screws (D) in order to disengage the arm (B)
from the guard (A) and rotate the arm on the guard through
180°.
- Reassemble the guard (A) and the arm (B) and reposition the
belt protective guard (G).
- Rotate the disk guard 180°: remove knob (L, Fig. 4), rotate and
position guard (M), lock knob (L) and screw it into the hole (N).
Fig. 6-7 shows the power cutter with the arm rotated.
WARNING - It using a diamond disk, when rotsting the
arm also rotate the disk through 180°.
WARNING - The disk guard must be positioned so that
sparks and particles of material being cut are carried
away from the operator.
Español
MONTAJE 12” - 14”
MONTAJE DEL BRAZO REVERSIBLE
- Instalar el brazo (A - B, Fig. 1) en su propio alojamiento sobre
los espárragos y la correa trapezoidal en la polea motriz IR, Fig.
2).
- Fijar el brazo (A - B, Fig. 1) mediante las tuercas y lo tornillo (C).
REGULACION DE LA TENSION DE LA CORREA
Para tensar la correa (Fig. 3):
- desatornille las tres tuercas (D)
- gire la leva mediante la tuerca (E) en la dirección (F)
- apretar las tuercas (D).
Cada 3-4 horas de trabajo, controlar la tensión de la correa.
ATENCION - Controlar la tensión de la correa todos los
dias. Substitua as correías desgastadas.
Para cortar cerca de parades, cordones, obstáculos verticales,
es necesario girar el brazo de la cortadora de 180° de manera
que el disco de corte se encuentre en el lado opuesto del brazo
(Fig. 3-7).
ROTACION DEL BRAZO REVERSIBLE (Fig. 3-5)
- Retirar los tres tornillos (H) para desmontar el cárter que cubre
la correa (G) del brazo.
- Aflojar el tornillo tensor de la correa (E).
- Retirar los dos tornillos (D) para desconectar el brazo (B)
respecto del cárter (A) y girar el brazo en el cárter en la medida
de 180°.
- Reensamblar el cárter (A) y el brazo (B) y reinstalar el cárter que
cubre la correa (G).
- Gire la protección del disco 180°:
quite el pomo (L, Fig. 4), gire y ponga en posición la pro
tección (M), fije el pomo (L) enroscándolo en el orificio
(N).
La Fig. 6-7 representa la cortadora con el brazo girado.
ATENCION - En caso de utilizar un disco diamantado,
al efectuar la rotación del brazo será necesario
efectuar también en 180° la rotación del disco.
ATENCION - La protección del disco tiene que ser
puesta de manera tal que las chispas y las escorias del
material que se corta no vayan hacia el operador.
7
Português
MONTAGEM 12” - 14”
MONTAGEM DO BRAÇO REVERSíVEL
- Monte o braço (A - B, Fig. 1) na própria sede nos parafusos
sem fim e a correia trapezoidal na polia motriz (R, Fig. 2).
- Fixe o braço (A - B Fig. 1) mediante as porcas e o parafuso (C).
REGISTAR A TENSÃO DA CORREIA
Para esticar a correia (Fig. 3):
- desaperte as trés porcas (D)
- rode o excêntrico mediante a porca (E) na direcção (F)
- aperte as porcas (D).
Controle cada 3-4 horas de trabalho a tensão da correia.
ATENÇÃO - Controle a tensão da correia diariamente.
Substitua as correias desgastadas.
Para cortar perto de paredes, traves, obstáculos verticais, é
preciso girar o braço do moto cortador de 180° de modo que o
disco de corte se encontre no lado contrário do braço (Fig. 3-7).
ROTAÇÃO DO BRAÇO REVERSíVEL (Fig. 3÷5)
- Retire os três parafusos (H) para desmontar o cárter (G) do
braço.
- Desaperte o parafuso que tensiona a correia (E).
- Retire os dos parafusos (D) para desengatar o braço (B) do
cárter (A) e rode o braço no cárter de 180°.
- Monte de novo o cárter (A) e o braço (B) e monte novamente o
cárter (G).
- Gire a protecção do disco de 180°:
tire o pomel (L, Fig. 4) gire e coloque a protecção (M), bloqueie
o pomel (L) apertando-o no furo (N). A Fig. 6-7 mostra o moto
cortador com o braço girado.
ATENÇÃO - Se utiliza-se um disco diamantado, quando
se efectua a rotação do braço, é preciso efectuar
também a rotação do disco de 180°.
ATENÇÃO - A protecção do disco deve ser colocada
de modo que as faíscas e as escórias do material
cortado não possam atingir o operador.
Ελληνικα
SUNARMOLOGHSH 12” - 14”
MONTARISMA ANTISTREPTOMENOU MPRATSOU
− Μονταρετε το μπρατσο (A-B, εικ. 1) στην ακριβη θεση του, επανω στα
σταθερα μπουλονια (L) και τον τραπεζοειδη ιμαντα, στον κινητηριο
τροχαλια (R, εικ. 2).
− Στερεωστε το μπρατσο (A-B, εικ. 1) διαμεσου των παξιμαδιων του
βιδα (C).
RUQMISH ENTASEWSIMANTA
Για να τντωστ των ιμαντα (εικ. 3):
− ξβιδωστ τα τρια παξιμαδια (D),
γυριστ το εκκντρο μ το παξιμαδι (Ε) προς την κατυθυνση (F)
− σφιξτ τα παξιμαδια (D).
Eλεγχετε καθε 3−4 ωρεζ εργασιας την ενταση του ιμαντα.
PROSOCH- Elegcete kaqhmerina thn entash~ tou
imanta. Antikatasthste tou~ jqarmenou~ imante~.
Για να κοψετε τοιχους και και καθετα ευποδια ειναι απαραιτητο να
περιστραφει το μπρατσο του δισκου κοπης σε 180° ουτως ωστε ο
δισκος κοπης να βρισκεται στην αντιθετη πλευρα του μπρατσου
(εικ.3−7).
PERISTROFH ANTISTREPTIKOU MPRATSOU (eik.3-5).
− Αφαιρεστε τις τρεις βιδες (Η) για να ξεμονταρετε το καρτε που
σκεπαζει τον ιμαντα (G). του μπρατσου.
− Ξεσφιξτε την βιδα του ρυθμιστη ιμαντα (Ε).
− Αφαιρεστε τις δυο βιδες (D) για να ελευθερωσετε το μπρατσο (Β) απο
το καρτερ (Α) και περιστρεψτε το μπρατσο επι του καρτερ σε 180°.
− Συναρμολογειστε εκ νεου το καρτερ (A) και το μπρατσο (B) και
ξαναμονταρετε το καρτερ που σκεπαζει τον ιμαντα (G).
− Περιστρεψτε το καρτερ του δισκου σε 180°:
αφαιρεστε το πομολο (L, εικ.4) περιστρεφοντας και τοποθετοντας το
καρτερ (Μ), μπγοκαρετε το πομολο (L) βιδωνοντασ το στην οπη (Ν).
Η εικονα 6−7 παριστανει τον δισκο κοπης με το μπρατσο γυρισμενο.
PROSOCH - Εαν χρησιμοποιειτε διαμαντενιο δισκο,
οταν πραγματοποιειται η περιστροφη του μπρατσου, ειναι
απαραιτητο να πραγματοποιειται επισης και η περιστροφη του
διοκου σε 180°.
PROSOCH - Το καρτερ του δισκου πρεπει να τοποθετηθει
με τροπο ουτως ωοτε οι σπινθηρες και τα υπολειμματα του
υλικου που κοβετε να μην πεταγοντε στο ατομο που χειριζετε
το εργαλειο.
23
9 10
Italiano
ASSEMBLAGGIO 12” - 14”
MONTAGGIO DISCO
- Inserire il perno (A, Fig. 9) in dotazione, nell’apposito foro, per
bloccare la puleggia e allentare il bullone (Fig. 10).
- Togliere il bullone (B, Fig. 11), la rondella (C), la fiangia esterna
(D) ed interna (F).
- Pulire il disco e le sue fiange prima di installarlo.
- Scegliere il lato appropriato della fiangia interna (Fig. 12) in
funzione al diametro interno dei disco (G, Fig. 11) da utilizzare
(20-25.4 mm - 13/16” - 1 in).
- Inserire la fiangia interna (F, Fig. 14) nel perno (H) sul braccio,
centrare il disco (G) sulla flangia interna (F). Inserire la fiangia
esterna (D) nel perno (H) e fissare tramite rondella (C) e bullone
(B).
- Inserire il perno in dotazione (A, Fig. 14) nell’apposito foro per
bloccare il disco e permettere il serraggio del bullone a 2.5
Kgm (25 Nm).
- NOTA: il bullone dell’albero portadisco ha filettatura destrorsa.
LASCIARE TUTTI I CARTER IN POSIZIONE.
ATTENZIONE - Arrestare sempre Il motore prima
di cambiare il disco. Rispettare sempre il senso di
rotazione, le istruzioni e le avvertenze riportate sul
disco stesso.
Prima di installare il disco occorre controllare che il
braccio, le flange e il bullone non presentino segni
di danneggiamento e/o logorio. Controllare che il
bullone dell’albero portadisco sia serrato con la giusta
tensione.
NON usare dischi con punte al carburo o dentati.
NON usare dischi per calcestruzzo/asfalto, muratura
o metallo che non siano fabbricati appositamente per
troncatori.
Notare il senso di rotazione dei dischi diamantati
indicato dalla freccia posta su ciascun disco.
Assicurarsi che i dischi e le aree di contatto delle
flange siano puliti.
ATTENZIONEI - Prima di montare li disco di taglio
assicurarsi che la massima velocità operativa dei disco
stesso (marcata sul disco) sia superiore o uguale alla
velocità del mandrino del troncatore (etichetta sulla
protezione disco).
24
Deutsch
MONTAGE 12” - 14”
MONTAGE DER TRENNSCHEIBE
- Den mitgelieferten Stift, (A, Abb. 9) in die entsprechende
Bohrung einführen, um die Riemenscheibe zu arretieren; dann
Mutter (Abb. 10) lockern.
- Mutter (B, Abb. 11), Unterlegescheibe (C) und Aussen (D) und
Innenflansch (F) entfernen.
- Vor der Montage Trennscheibe und Flansche reinigen.
- Je nach Scheibenbohrungsdurchmesser (G, Abb. 11) (20 - 25.4
mm - 13/16” - V’ in), den passenden seite Innenflansch (Abb.
12) wählen.
- Den Innenflansch (F, Abb. 14) auf den Stift (H) setzen, Scheibe
(G) auf den Innenflansch (F) zentrieren, Aussenflansch (D) auf
den Stift (H) setzen und die Baugruppe mit Unterlegscheibe (C)
und Mutter (B) arretieren.
- Den mitgelieferten Stift (A, Abb. 14) in die entsprechende
Bohrung einsetzen, um die Scheibe zu arretieren. Die Mutter
kann nun mit einem Drehmoment von 2.5 kgm (25 Nm)
angezogen werden.
- ZU BEACHTEN: Der Scheibenwellenbolzen hat
Rechtsgewinde.
ALLE SCHUTZBLECHE EINGEBAUT LASSEN.
ACHTUNG - Das Auswechseln der Scheibe darf nur
bei abgeschaltetem Motor erfolgen. Drehrichtung,
Anweisungen und Warnhinweise auf der Scheibe
beachten!
Vor Einbau der Sägescheibe: Die Halterung,
Flansche, und der Bolzen müssen auf Anzeichen der
Abnutzung undloder Schaden geprüft werden. Der
Scheibenwellenbolzen muß auf richtige Spannung
geprüft werden.
Keine Sägescheiben mit Karbidspitzen oder Zähnen
jeder Art verwenden.
Keine Mauerwerk-, Zement/Asphalt- oder
Metallschneidsägescheiben verwenden, die
nicht speziell für handgehaltene Sägen mit hoher
Geschwindigkeit genormt sind.
Die Drehrichtung der Diamantsägescheiben, die
mit einem Pfeil auf der Sägescheibe angezeigt ist,
beachten. Darauf achten, daß die Sägeschelben und
die Kontaktstellen der Flansche sauber sind.
ACHTUNGI - Vor Montage des Schneideblatts muss
sichergestellt werden, dass dessen (auf dem Blatt
angegebene) max. Arbeitsgeschwindigkeit größer oder
gleich der Geschwindigkeit der Trennmaschlnenspindel
ist (siehe Etikett am Blattschutz).
11
Nederlands
MONTAGE 12” - 14”
MONTAGE SCHIJF
- Steak de bijgeleverde pin (A, Fig. 9) in de caarvoor bestemde
opening orn de riemschijf te blokkeren en de bout losser te
draaien (Fig. 10).
- Verwijder de bout (13, Fig. 11), het schijfje (C), de buitenflens
(D) en de binnenflens.
- Maak de schiif en de flenzen schoon alvorens hen te installeren.
- Kies de kant geschikte binnenflens (Fig. 12) op grond van de
interne diameter van de schijf (G, Fig. 11) die gaat worden
gebruikt (20-25,4 mm - 13/16 - 1 in).
- Steak de binnenflens (F, Fig. 14) op de pen (H) van de arm,
centreer de schijf (G) op de binnenflens (F). Steek de buitenliens
(D) op de pin (H) en bevestig hern met behulp van een schiifring
(C) en bout (B).
- Steak de bijgeleverde pen (A, Fig. 14) in de daarvoor bestemde
opening orn de schijf te blokkeren en het spannen van de bout
op 2.5 kgm (25 Nm) mogelijk te maken.
- OPMERKING: De bout van de zaagbladas is rechtsgangig.
LAAT ALLE BESCHERMSTUKKEN OP HUN PLAATS
ZITTEN.
LET OP - Zet altijd de motor stil alvorens de schijf
te verwisselen. Houd steeds rekening met de
draairichting, de aanwijzingen en instructies die op de
schijf staan vermeld.
Alvorens het zaagblad te monteren dienen de
arm, flenzen en bout te worden geïnspecteerd op
tekenen van sliltage en/of beschadiging. De bout
van de zaagbladas moet op juiste spanning worden
geïnspecteerd.
Gebruik geen hardmetalen of getande zaagbladen.
Gebruik geen zaagblaclen bestemd voor het snijden
van metselwerk, beton, asfalt of zaagbladen voor het
snijden van metaal die niet speciflek voor snellopende
draagbare zaagmachines zijn ontworpen.
Kijk in welke richting de diamantzaagbladen draaien,
aangegeven door een pijl op het zaagblad. Vergewis
u ervan dat de zaagbladen en Raakulakken van de
flenzen zuiver zijn.
LET OP! - Alvorens de zaagscilijt te monteren client u
te controleren of de maximale bedrijfssnelheid van de
schijf zelf (die erop vermeld staat) hoger is dan of gelijk
aan de snelheid van de spindel van de snijmachine
(etiket op de schijlfbescherming).
12
Français
ASSEMBLAGE 12” - 14”
MONTAGE DU DISQUE
- Enfilez le goujon (A, Fig. 9) fourni dans son orifice pour bloquer
la poulie et desserrez le boulon (Fig. 10).
- Otez le boulon (13, Fig. 11), la rondelle (C), les flasques
extérieure (D) et intérieure (F).
- Nettoyez le disque et ses flasques avant installation.
- Choisissez le côte du la flasque intérieure adaptée (Fig. 12) en
fonction du diamètre intérieur du disque (G, Fig. 11) utilisé (20
- 25.4 mm - 13/16”-l in).
- Enfilez la flasque intérieure (IF, Fig. 14) sur le goujon (H) du
bras, centrez le disque (G) sur la flasque intérieure (F). Enfilez
la flasque extérieure (D) sur le goujon (H) et fixez la avec la
rondelle (C) et le boulon (B).
- Enfilez le goujon fourni (A, Fig. 14) dans son trou puis bloquez
le disque et serrez le boulon à 2.5 kgm (25 Nm).
- REMARQUE: Le boulon d’arbre de disque a un filetage à
droite.
MAINTENIR TOUTES LES PROTECTIONS A LEUR
PLACE.
ATTENTION - Avant de changer de disque, arrêtez
toujours le moteur. Respectez toujours le sens de
rotation, les instructions et les recommandations
reportées sur le disque même.
Avant de monter le disque: Vérifier que le bras, les
flasques et le boulon ne sont ni usés ni endommagés.
Vérifier que le boulon d’arbre de disque est serré au
couple approprié.
Ne pas utiliser de disque à pointes de carbure ni de
disque denté.
Ne pas utiliser de disques de tranchage de
maçonnerie, bétontasphalte ou métal qui ne sont pas
spécifiquement conçus pour les scies à grande vitesse,
tenues à la main.
Veiller à noter le sens de rotation des disques en
diamant indiqué par une flèche sur le disque.
Veiller à ce que les disques et surfaces de contact des
flasques soient propres.
ATTENTION! - Avant de monter le disque de coupe,
s’assurer que la vitesse de travail maximale du disque
(marquée sur le disque) est supérieure ou égale à
la vitesse de la broche de la machine à tronçonner
(étiquette sur la protection du disque).
13
English
ASSEMBLY 12” - 14”
DISK FITTING
- Insert the pin (A, Fig. 9) supplied into the appropriate hole to
lock the pulley, and loosen the bolt (Fig. 10).
- Remove the bolt (13, Fig. 11), the washer (C), and the outside
(D) and inside (F) flanges.
- Clean the disk and its flanges before installing them.
- Choose the appropriate side, inside flange according to the
internal diameter of the disk (G, Fig. 11) to be used (20 - 25.4
mm - 13/16” - 1” in).
- Fit the inside flange (F, Fig. 14) on the pin (H) on the arm; center
the disk (G) on the inside flange (F). Fit the outside flange (D) on
the pin (H) using the washer (C) and bolt (B).
- Insert the pin (A, Fig. 14) supplied into the appropriate hole to
lock the disk and allow the bolt to be tightened to 2.5 kgm (25
Nm) 1221 in Ibs (18.4 ft Ibs).
- NOTE: The blade shaft bolt is right handed.
KEEP ALL GUARDS IN PLACE
WARNING - Always stop the engine before changing
the disk. Always follow the rotation direction, the
instructions and indications given on the disk itself.
Before mounting the blade; the arm, flanges, and bolt
should be inspected for signs of wear and/or damage.
The blade shaft bolt should be inspected for proper
tension.
DO NOT use carbide tipped blades or toothed blades
of any kind.
DO NOT use masonry, concrete/asphalt or metal
cutting blades that are not specifically designed for
high-speed hand-held saws.
Note the direction of rotation of the diamond blades
which is shown by an arrow on the blade.
Make sure the blades and contact areas of the flanges
are clean.
WARNING! - Before assembling your cutting wheel
make sure that maximum wheel operating speed
(marked on the wheel) is above or equal to the spindle
speed of your cut-off machine (label on the wheel
guard).
14
Español
MONTAJE 12” - 14”
MONTAJE DEL DISCO
- Ponga el perno (A, Fig. 9) de serie, en el correspondiente
orificio para fijar la polea y afloje el bulón (Fig. 10),
- Quite el bulón (13, Fig. 1 l), la arandela (C), la brida exterior (D) y
la interior (F).
- Limpia el disco y sus bridas antes de instalarlo.
- Escoja lato de la brida interior (Fig. 12) adecuada, en función
dei diámetro interior dei disco (G, Fig. 11) que va a utilizar (20
- 25.4 mm - 13/16” - 1 in).
- Coloque la brida interior (F, Fig. 14) en el perno (H) sobre el
brazo, centre el disco (G) sobre la brida interior (F). Coloque la
brida exterior (D) en el perno (H) y fije mediante la arandela (C)
y el bulón (B).
- Ponga el perno de serie (A, Fig. 14) en el correspondiente
orificio para fijar el disco y poder apretar el bulón a 2.5 kgm (25
Nm).
- NOTA: El perno del eje de la hoja tiene rosca a la derecha.
MANTENGA TODOS LOS PROTECTORES EN SU
LUGAR.
ATENCION - Pare siempre el motor antes de cambiar
el disco. Respete siempre la dirección de rotación,
las instrucciones y las observaciones indicadas en el
disco mismo.
Antes de proceder al montaje de la hoja, se deben
inspeccionar los siguientes elementos: el brazo, las
bridas y el perno, por si hubieran indicios de desgaste
y/o daños. Se deberá inspeccionar la tension correcta
del perno del eje de la hoja.
No utilice hojas con puntas de carburo, u hojas
dentadas de ningún tipo.
No utilice hojas de corte para albañilería, hormigón/
asfalto o metal, que no hayan sido específicamente
diseñadas para sierras manuales de alta velocidad.
Observe la dirección de rotación de las hojas
díamasntadas indicada por un flecha en la hoja.
Asegúrese que las hojas y las superficies de contacto
de las bridas estén limpias.
¡ATENCIÓN! - Antes de montar el disco de corte,
asegurarse de que su velocidad máxima de
funcionamiento (marcada en el disco) sea superior
o igual a la velocidad del mandril del cortador (ver la
etiqueta aplicada en la protección del disco).
Português
MONTAGEM 12” - 14”
MONTAGEM DO DISCO
- Insira o pino (A, Fig. 9) de dotagáo, no furo apropriado, para
bloquear a polia e soltar o parafuso com porca (Fig.10).
- Tire o parafuso com porca (B, Fig. 11), a arruela (C), a flange
externa (D) e interna (F).
- Limpe o disco e suas flanges antes da instalação.
- Escolha o lado a flange interna (Fig. 12) apropriada conforme
o diámetro interno do disco (G, Fig. 11) a ser utilizado (20-25.4
mm - 13/16 - 1 in).
- Insira a flange interna (F, Fig. 14) no pino (H) do braço, coloque
o disco (G) no centro da flange interna (F). Insira a fiange
externa (D) no pino (H) e fixe através da arruela (C) e do o
parafuso com porca (B).
- Insira o pino em dotação (A, Fig.14) no furo apropriado para
bloquear o disco e para permitir o aperto do parafuso com
porca com 2.5 Kgm (25 Nm).
- NOTA: O parafuso do eixo da lámina, e para o lado direito.
MANTENHA TODOS OS PROTETORES NO LUGAR.
ATIENÇÃO - Desligue sempre o motor antes de trocar
o disco. Respeite sempre o sentido de rotaqáo, as
instruq6es e as advertências anotadas no disco.
Antes de montar a lâmina, o braços, os flanges e
parafuso deverão ser inspecionados para ver se
existem sinais de desgaste e/ou dano. O parafuso
do eixo da lâmina deverá ser inspecionado para
estabelecer a devida tensão.
Não use qualquer tipo de lâmina com pontas de
carboneto ou dentadas.
Não use lâminas de alvenaria, concreto/alfalto ou
metal que não sejam especificamente projetadas para
serras manuais de alta velocidade.
Observe a direção de rotação das lâminas de diamante
indicada com uma seta na lâmina. Assegurese de que
as lâminas e áreas de contato dos fianges estejam
limpas.
ATENÇÃO: antes de montar o disco de corte,
controle que a velocidade operativa máxima do disco
(imprimida no mesmo) seja malor ou igual à velocidada
do mandril da máquina de corte (etiqueta posta na
protecção do disco).
Ελληνικα
SUNARMOLOGHSH 12” - 14”
MONTARISMA DISKOU
− Ειοχωρειστε τον πειρο (Α, εικ. 9) παρεχομενο εκ του εργοστασειου
στην ειδικη οπη, για να μπλοκαρει τον τροχαλια και να ξεσφιξη το
μπουλονι (εικ. 10).
− Αφαιρεστε το μπουλονι (Β, εικ. 11), την ροδελα (C), την εξωτερικη
φλαντζα (D) και την εσωτερικη (F).
− Καθαριστε τον δισκο και τις φλαντζες του πριν απο την
εγκατασταση.
− Διαλεξτε την καταλληλη εσωτερικη φλαντζα (εικ. 12) των
μηχανηματων αναλογα με την εσωτεπικη διαμετρο του δισκου
(G, εικ. 11) μου χρησιμοποιειτε (20-25.4 mm - 13/16" - 1 in).
− Εισχωρειστε την εσωτερικη φλαντζα (F, εικ. 14) στον πειρο (Η)
στο μπρατσο, κεντραρετε τον δισκο, (G) στην εσωτερικη φλαντζα
(F). Εισχωρειστε την εξωτερικη φλαντζα (D) στον πειρο (Η) και
στερεωστε δια μεσου της ροδελας (C) και του μπουλοινιου (Β).
− Εισχωρειστε του πειρο εφοδιασμου (Α, εικ. 14) στην ειδικη οπη λια να
μπλοκαρετε τον δισκο και να επιτρεψετε το σφιξημο του μπουλονιου
σε 2,5 Kgm (25 Nm).
KRATHSTE OLOUS TOUS PROFULAKTHRES STH
QESH TOUS.
PROSOCH - Σβηστε το μοτερ πριν αλλαξετε τον δισκο.
Διατηρειτε παντοτε την κατευθυνση τφ περιστροφης, οι οδηλιες
και οι πληροδ αναφεροντε επανω στον ιδιο τον δισκο.
Πριν εγκαταησετε τη λεπιδα: ο ξπαχιονας, οιφφφλαντζες και το
μπουλονι πρεπει να εχου επιθεωρηθει για σημαδιας θορας η
και ζημιας. Το μπουλονι του αξονα της λεπιδας πρεπει να εχει
ελεγχθει για καταλληλη ταση.
Να μη χρησιμοποιειτε λεπιδες με μυτη καρζιδιου η οδοντωτες
λεπιδες καθε τυπου.
Μη χρησιμοποιειτε λεπιδες κοπης τουζλων, πετρινων
κατασκευων, τσιμεντου / ασφαλτου η μεταλλων που δεν ειναι
ειδικα σχεδιασμενες για πριονια χειρος υψηλης ταχυτητας.
Παρατηπηστε την κατευθυνση της περιστροφης των λεπιδων
με αδαμαντινη επικαλυψη, η οποια δειχνεται απο ενα ζελος
στη λεπιδα.
Βεζαιωθειτε οτι οι λεπιδες και οι επιφανειες επαφης τωνφλαντζων
ειναι καθαπες.
PROSOCH! - Πριν τοποθετησετε το δισκο κοπης ζεζαιωθειτε
οτι η μεγιστη ταχυτητα λειτουργιας του δισκου (αναγραφεται
πανω στο δισκο) ειναι μεγαλυτερη η ιση με την ταχυτητα του
τσοκ του κοπτικου (ετικετα στον προφυλακτηρα δισκου).
25
1 2
Italiano
ASSEMBLAGGIO BRACCIO 16” (80.7 cm3)
MONTAGGIO BRACCIO REVERSIBILE 16”
– Montare il braccio (A-B, Fig. 1) nella propria
sede sui prigionieri (L) e la cinghia trapezoidale
nella puleggia motrice (R).
– Fissare il braccio (A-B, Fig. 1) tramite i dadi (C).
REGISTRAZIONE TENSIONE CINGHIA
Allentare i dadi (D, Fig. 2) sul carter copricinghia.
Avvitare la vite (M), per caricare la molla (E),
verificando che il perno (F) fuoriesca dalla propria
sede di 6 ÷ 8 mm (Fig. 2). Bloccare i dadi (D)
fissaggio carter copricinghia e il dado (G) di fermo
vite (M).
Controllare ogni 3/4 ore di lavoro la tensione della
cinghia. La registrazione avviene automaticamente,
solamente allentando i due dadi (D) e senza
intervenire sulla vite (M).
Solamente quando il fermo (F) è rientrato nella
sua sede e la molla non ha più forza è necessario
ripristinare il caricamento automatico ripetendo
tutte le operazioni di registrazione sopradescritte.
ATTENZIONE - Controllare la tensione della
cinghia giornalmente.
ROTAZIONE BRACCIO REVERSIBILE 16” -
(Fig. 1-2)
– Togliere le tre viti (H) per smontare il carter
copricinghia (I) del braccio.
– Allentare la vite tendicinghia (M).
– Togliere le due viti (D) per disimpegnare il
braccio (B) dal carter (A) e ruotare il braccio sul
varter di 180°.
– Riassemblare il carter (A) e il braccio (B) e
rimontare il carter copricinghia (I).
– Premere la leva (N) e ruotare la protezione del
disco (P) di 180°, fino ad ottenere la corretta
posizione (Fig. 3).
26
ATTENZIONE - Se si utilizza un disco
diamantato, quando si effettua la rotazione
del braccio, bisogna effettuare anche la
rotazione del disco di 180°.
ATTENZIONE - La protezione del disco deve
essere posizionata in modo che le scintille
e le scorie del materiale che viene tagliato
non vengano convogliate verso l’operatore.
MONTAGGIO DISCO
– Inserire il perno (A, Fig. 4) in dotazione,
nell’apposito foro, per bloccare la puleggia e
allentare il bullone (Fig. 5).
– Togliere il bullone (B, Fig. 6), la rondella (C), la
flangia esterna (D) ed interna (F+I).
– Pulire il disco e le sue flange prima di installarlo.
– Inserire la flangia interna (F+I Fig. 6) nel perno
(H) sul braccio, centrare il disco (G) sulla flangia
interna (F). Inserire la flangia esterna (D) nel
perno (H) e fissare tramite rondella (C) e bullone
(B).
– inserire, in funzione al diametro interno del disco
da utilizzare, l’anello di centraggio disco (L, Fig.
6).
– Inserire il perno in dotazione (A, Fig. 7)
nell’apposito foro per bloccare il disco e
permettere il serraggio del bullone a 2,5 Kgm
(25 Nm).
ATTENZIONE - Arrestare sempre il motore
prima di cambiare il disco. Rispettare
sempre il senso di rotazione, le istruzioni e
le avvertenze riportate sul disco stesso.
3 4
Deutsch
ARMS 16” MONTAGE (80.7 cm3)
MONTAGE DES REVERSIERBAREN ARMS 16”
– Den Arm (A - B, Abb. 1) an seiner Einbaustelle
auf den Stiftschrauben ansetzen und den
Keilriemen auf der Triebriemenscheibe montieren
(R).
– Den Arm (A - B, Abb. 1) mithilfe der
Kontermuttern (C) festspannen.
NACHSPANNEN DES RIEMENS
Die Muttern (D, Abb. 2) auf der Riemenabdeckung
lockern. Die Schraube (M) zur Spannung der Feder
(E) andrehen und sich dabei vergewissern, daß
der Stift (F) 6÷8 mm aus seinem Sitz hervorsteht
(Abb. 2). Die Befestigungsmuttern (D) der
Riemenabdeckung und die Kontermutter (G) der
Schraube (M) festspannen.
Alle 3-4 Betriebsstunden die Spannung des
Riemens kontrollieren, der durch Lockern der
beiden Muttern (D), ohne Betätigen der Schraube
(M), automatisch nachgespannt wird.
Erst wenn der Arretierstift (F) vollständig eingezogen
ist und die Feder keine Spannkraft mehr besitzt,
sind die oben beschriebenen Arbeitsschritte zur
automatischen Spannung auszuführen.
ACHTUNG - Riemenspannung täglich
kontrollieren!
DREHUNG DES REVERSIERBAREN ARMS 16”
- (Abb. 1 - 2)
– Die Riemenabdeckung (I) des Armes nach
Abdrehen der Schrauben (H) demontieren.
– Die Riemenspannschraube (M) lockern.
– Die beiden Schrauben (D), mit denen der Arm
(B) am Gehäuse (A) befestigt ist, abdrehen und
den Arm am Gehäuse um 180° drehen.
– Gehäuse (A) und Arm (B) wieder
zusammenbauen und die Riemenabdeckung (I)
montieren.
– Auf den Hebel (N) drücken und den
Scheibenschutz (P) um 180° drehen, bis die
erforderte Position erreicht ist (Abb. 3).
ACHTUNG! - Bei Verwendung einer
Diamantscheibe ist bei der Drehung
des Armes auch die Scheibe um 180° zu
drehen.
ACHTUNG - Der Scheibenschutz ist so
einzustellen daß Funken, Splitter und
Staub nicht gegen die Bedienungsperson
geleitet werden.
MONTAGE DER TRENNSCHEIBE
– Den mitgelieferten Stift, (A, Abb. 4) in die
entsprechende Bohrung einführen, um die
Riemenscheibe zu arretieren; dann Mutter (Abb.
5) lockern.
– Mutter (B, Abb. 6), Unterlegescheibe (C) und
Aussen (D) - und Innenflansch entfernen (F+I).
– Vor der Montage Trennscheibe und Flansche
reinigen.
– Den Innenflansch (F+I, Abb. 6) auf den Stift (H)
setzen, Scheibe (G) auf den Innenflansch (F)
zentrieren, Aussenflansch (D) auf den Stift (H)
setzen und die Baugruppe mit Unterlegscheibe
(C) und Mutter (B) arretieren.
– Den Scheibenzentrierring (L, Abb. 6) in
Abhängigkeit der zu montierenden Scheibe
einfügen.
– Den mitgelieferten Stift (A, Abb. 7) in die
entsprechende Bohrung einsetzen, um die
Scheibe zu arretieren. Die Mutter kann nun
mit einem Drehmoment von 2,5 kgm (25 Nm)
angezogen werden.
ACHTUNG - Das Auswechseln der Scheibe
darf nur bei abgeschaltetem Motor
erfolgen. Drehrichtung, Anweisungen und
Warnhinweise auf der Scheibe beachten!
5 6
Nederlands
MONTAGE ARM 16” (80.7 cm3)
MONTAGE OMKEERARM 16”
– Monteer de arm (A - B, Fig. 1) op zijn plaats op
de bouten en de V-snaar in de drijfriemschijf (R).
– Bevestig de arm (A - B, Fig. 1) met behulp van
de moeren (C).
REGELING RIEMSPANNING
Draai de moeren (D, Fig. 2) op de riemkap los. Draai
de schroef (M) aan om de veer (E) te spannen,
terwijl moet worden gecontroleerd of de pin (F)
6÷8 mm uit zijn behuizing komt (Fig. 2) Blokkeer de
bevestigingsmoeren (D) van de riemkap en de moer
(G) die de schroef (M) vastzet.
Controleer de riemspanning om de 3-4 bedrijfsuren.
De regeling gebeurt automatisch, door slechts de
twee moeren (D) losser te draaien en zonder aan
de schroef (M) te draaien.
Slechts wanneer de stop (F) is teruggekeerd in zijn
behuizing en de veer geen kracht meer heeft, moet
de automatische spanning worden hersteld door
bovenstaande handelingen voor de spanning te
herhalen.
LET OP - Controleer de spanning van de
riem dagelijks.
ROTATIE OMKEERARM 16” - (Fig. 1 - 2)
– Verwijder de schroeven (H) om de riemafdekkap
(I) van de arm te demonteren.
– Haal de riemspannende schroeven (M) weg.
– Verwijder de twee schroeven (D) om de arm (B)
los te maken van de kap (A) en draai de arm op
de kap met 180°.
– Monteer de kap (A) en de arm (B) weer en breng
de riemafdekkap (I) weer aan.
– Druk op de hendel (N) en draai de afscherming
van de schijf (P) met 180°, totdat de juiste (Fig.
3) positie wordt bereikt.
LET OP - Indien u een diamantschijf
gebruikt, moet ook de schijf met 180°
worden gedraaid wanneer u de arm draait.
LET OP - De schijfbescherming moet
zodanig worden geplaatst, dat de vonken
en sintels van het materiaal dat wordt
gesneden, niet in de richting van de
bediener worden geleid.
MONTAGE SCHIJF
– Steek de bijgeleverde pin (A, Fig. 4) in de
daarvoor bestemde opening om de riemschijf te
blokkeren en de bout losser te draaien (Fig. 5).
– Verwijder de bout (B, Fig. 6), het schijfje (C), de
buitenflens (D) en de binnenflens (F+I).
– Maak de schijf en de flenzen schoon alvorens
hen te installeren.
– Steek de binnenflens (F+I, Fig. 6) op de pen
(H) van de arm, centreer de schijf (G) op de
binnenflens (F). Steek de buitenflens (D) op de
pin (H) en bevestig hem met behulp van een
schijfring (C) en bout (B).
– Breng de ring voor schijfcentrering aan,
afhankelijk van de interne diameter te monteren
schijf (L, Fig. 6).
– Steek de bijgeleverde pen (A, Fig. 7) in de
daarvoor bestemde opening om de schijf te
blokkeren en het spannen van de bout op 2.5
kgm (25 Nm) mogelijk te maken.
LET OP - Zet altijd de motor stil alvorens de
schijf te verwisselen. Houd steeds rekening
met de draairichting, de aanwijzingen en
instructies die op de schijf staan vermeld.
7
Français
ASSEMBLAGE BRAS 16” (80.7 cm3)
MONTAGE DU BRAS REVERSIBLE 16”
– Monter le bras (A-B, Fig.1) dans son siège sur
les prisonniers et la courroie trapézoïdale sur la
poulie motricer (R).
– Fixer le bras (A-B, Fig.1) à l’aide des écrous (C).
REGLAGE DE TENSION DE LA COURROIE
Desserrer les écrous (D, Fig. 2) placés sur le carter
protège-courroie. Serrer la vis (M) pour tendre le
ressort (E), en s'assurant que le pivot (F) sort de
son siège de 6÷8 mm (Fig. 2). Bloquer les écrous
(D) de fixation du carter protège-courroie et l'écrou
(G) d'arrêt de vis (M).
Contrôler la tension de la courroie, après 3-4 heures
de travail. Le réglage se fait automatiquement en
desserrant simplement les deux écrous (D), sans
agir sur la vis (M).
Ce n'est que lorsque l'arrêt (F) est rentré dans son
siège et que le ressort n'a plus assez de force,
qu'il est nécessaire de rétablir le tensionnement
automatique, en répétant toutes les opérations de
réglage indiquées ci-dessus.
ATTENTION - Contrôlez la tension de la
courroie tous les jours.
ROTATION DU BRAS REVERSIBLE 16” -
(Fig. 1 - 2)
– Enlever les trois vis (H), pour démonter le carter
de protection courroie (I) du bras.
– Desserrer la vis tendeur-courroie (M).
– Retirer les deux vis (D) pour dégager le bras (B)
du carter (A) et le tourner sur le carter de 180°.
– Remonter le carter (A) et le bras (B), puis le
carter de protection courroie (I).
– Appuyer sur le levier (N) et faire tourner la
protection du disque (P) de 180°, afin d'avoir la
position exacte (Fig. 3).
ATTENTION - si l'on utilise un disque
diamanté, lorsqu'on effectue la rotation
du bras, il faut également faire tourner le
disque de 180°.
ATTENTION - La protection du disque
doit être placée de manière à éviter la
projection des étincelles et des scories,
des matériaux coupés, vers l’opérateur.
MONTAGE DU DISQUE
– Enfilez le goujon (A, Fig. 4) fourni dans son
orifice pour bloquer la poulie et desserrez le
boulon (Fig. 5).
– Otez le boulon (B, Fig. 6), la rondelle (C), les
flasques extérieure (D) et intérieure (F+I).
– Nettoyez le disque et ses flasques avant
installation.
– Enfilez la flasque intérieure (F+I Fig. 6) sur le
goujon (H) du bras, centrez le disque (G) sur la
flasque intérieure (F). Enfilez la flasque extérieure
(D) sur le goujon (H) et fixez la avec la rondelle
(C) et le boulon (B).
– introduire, en fonction du diamètre intérieur du
disque utilisé, la bague de centrage du disque
(L, Fig. 6).
– Enfilez le goujon fourni (A, Fig. 7) dans son trou
puis bloquez le disque et serrez le boulon à 2,5
kgm (25 Nm).
ATTENTION - Avant de changer de
disque, arrêtez toujours le moteur.
Respectez toujours le sens de rotation,
les instructions et les recommandations
reportées sur le disque même.
27
1 2 3 4

English Español

ARM 16” ASSEMBLY (80.7 cm3)
REVERSIBLE CUTTER ARM 16” FITTING
– Fit the cutter arm (A - B, Fig. 1) on to the studs
and drive belt onto the drive pulley (R).
– Fix the cutter arm (A-B, Fig. 1) by means of nuts
(C).
DRIVE BELT TENSIONING
Loosen the nuts (D, Fig. 2) on the cutter are case.
Tighten the screw (M) to tension the spring (E)
making sure that the stud (F) comes out 6÷8 mm
from it’s seat (Fig. 2). Tighten-up the nuts (D) and
the lock nut (G) for the screw (M). Control every 3
to 4 hours of use drive belt tension. The correct
tension is automatically achivied by loosening the
two nuts (D) without having to move the screw
(M). Only when the stud (F) has returned into its’
seat and the spring is no longer compressed is it
necessary to retension the automatic tensioner,
this is done by repeating the preceding operation
as said above.
WARNING - Check the belt tension every
day.
REVERSIBLE ARM ROTATION 16” - (Fig. 1-2)
– Remove the three screws (H) in order to remove
the arm belt protective guard (I).
– Loosen the belt tightening screw (M).
– Remove the two screws (D) in order to
disengage the arm (B) from the guard (A) and
rotate the arm on the guard through 180˚.
– Reassemble the guard (A) and the arm (B) and
reposition the belt protective guard (I).
– Press lever (N) and rotate the disk (P) protection
through 180˚, until the correct position has been
obtained (Fig. 3).
WARNING - If using a diamond disk,
when rotating the arm also rotate the disk
through 180˚.
WARNING - The disk guard must be
positioned so that sparks and particles of
material being cut are carried away from
the operator.
DISK FITTING
– Insert the pin (A, Fig. 4) supplied into the
appropriate hole to lock the pulley, and slacken
the bolt (Fig. 5).
– Remove the bolt (B, Fig. 6), the washer (C), and
the outside (D) and inside flanges (F+I ).
– Clean the disk and its flanges before installing
them.
– Fit the inside flange (F+I Fig. 6) on the pin (H) on
the arm; center the disk (G) on the inside flange
(F). Fit the outside flange (D) on the pin (H) using
the washer (C) and bolt (B).
– according to the internal diameter the disk that
is to be used, insert the disk centering ring (L,
Fig. 6).
– Insert the pin (A, Fig. 7) supplied into the
appropriate hole to lock the disk and allow the
bolt to be tightened to 2.5 kgm (25 Nm).
WARNING - Always stop the engine before
changing the disk. Always follow the
rotation direction, the instructions and
indications given on the disk itself.
MONTAJE BRAZO 16” (80.7 cm3)
MONTAJE DEL BRAZO REVERSIBLE 16”
– Instalar el brazo (A - B, Fig. 1) en su propio
alojamiento sobre los espárragos y la correa
trapezoidal en la polea motriz (R).
– Fijar el brazo (A - B, Fig. 1) mediante las tuercas
(C).
REGULACION DE LA TENSION DE LA CORREA
Aflojar las tuercas (D, Fig. 2) del cárter que cubre
la correa. Enroscar el tornillo (M) para cargar el
muelle (E) controlando que el perno (F) salga unos
6÷8 mm de su sede (Fig. 2). Bloquear las tuercas
(D) del cárter que cubre la correa y la tuerca (G) de
bloqueo del tornillo (M).
Cada 3-4 horas de trabajo, controlar la tensión de la
correa. La regulación se efectúa automáticamente
aflojando, sólo, las dos tuercas (D), sin intervenir en
el tornillo (M).
Sólo cuando el perno (F) sobresale de su sede y el
muelle no tiene fuerza, es necesario restablecer la
carga automática repitiendo todas las operaciones
de regulación descritas anteriormente.
ATENCION - Controlar la tensión de la
correa todos los dias.
ROTACION DEL BRAZO REVERSIBLE 16” - (Fig.
1 - 2)
– Retirar los tres tornillos (H) para desmontar el
cárter que cubre la correa (I) del brazo.
– Aflojar el tornillo tensor de la correa (M).
– Retirar los dos tornillos (D) para desconectar el
brazo (B) respecto del cárter (A) y girar el brazo
en el cárter en la medida de 180˚.
– Reensamblar el cárter (A) y el brazo (B) y
reinstalar el cárter que cubre la correa (I).
– Oprimir la palanca (N) y girar la protección del
disco (P) en la medida de 180˚ hasta obtener la
posición adecuada (Fig. 3).
ATENCION! En caso de utilizar un disco
diamantado, al efectuar la rotación del
brazo será necesario efectuar también en
180˚ la rotación del disco.
ATENCION - La protección del disco tiene
que ser puesta de manera tal que las
chispas y las escorias del material que se
corta no vayan hacia el operador.
MONTAJE DEL DISCO
– Ponga el perno (A, Fig. 4) de serie, en el
correspondiente orificio para fijar la polea y
afloje el bulón (Fig. 5).
– Quite el bulón (B, Fig. 6), la arandela (C), la brida
exterior (D) y la interior (F+I).
– Limpie el disco y sus bridas antes de instalarlo.
– Coloque la brida interior (F+I, Fig. 6) en el perno
(H) sobre el brazo, centre el disco (G) sobre la
brida interior (F). Coloque la brida exterior (D) en
el perno (H) y fije mediante la arandela (C) y el
bulón (B).
– insertar el anillo de centrado disco (L, Fig. 6) en
función del diametro interior del disco a utilizar.
– Ponga el perno de serie (A, Fig. 7) en el
correspondiente orificio para fijar el disco y
poder apretar el bulón a 2,5 kgm (25 Nm).
ATENCION - Pare siempre el motor antes
de cambiar el disco. Respete siempre la
direcciòn de rotación, las instrucciones y
las observaciones indicadas en el disco
mismo.

28
5 6
Português
MONTAGEM BRAÇO 16” (80.7 cm3)
MONTAGEM DO BRAÇO REVERSÍVEL 16”
– Monte o braço (A - B, Fig. 1) na própria sede
nos parafusos sem fim e a correia trapezoidal
na polia motriz (R).
– Fixe o braço (A - B Fig. 1) mediante as porcas
(C).
REGISTAR A TENSÃO DA CORREIA
Solte as porcas (D, Fig. 2) no cárter que cobre a
correia. Aperte o parafuso (M), para carregar a
mola (E), verificando que o pino (F) saia da própria
sede 6÷8 mm (Fig. 2). Bloqueie as porcas (D) de
fixação do cárter que cobre a correia e a porca (G)
de fixação do parafuso (M).
Controle cada 3-4 horas de trabalho a tensão da
correia. A registação é feita automaticamente,
sendo suficiente soltar as duas porcas (D) e sem
intervir no parafuso (M).
Só quando o pino (F) tiver voltando em sua
sede e a mola não tiver mais força, será preciso
restabelecer a carga automática repetindo todas
as operações de registação acima mencionadas.
ATENÇÃO - Controle a tensão da correia
diariamente.
ROTAÇÃO DO BRAÇO REVERSÍVEL16” - (Fig.
1 -2)
– Retire os três parafusos (H) para desmontar o
cárter (I) do braço.
– Desaperte o parafuso que tensiona a correia
(M).
– Retire os dois parafusos (D) para desengatar o
braço (B) do cárter (A) e rode o braço no cárter
de 180˚.
– Monte de novo o cárter (A) e o braço (B) e
monte novamente o cárter (I).
– Aperte a alavanca (N) e rode a protecção do
disco (P) de 180˚, até a obter a posição correcta
(Fig. 3).
ATENÇÃO! - Se utiliza-se um disco
diamantado, quando se efectua a rotação
do braço, é preciso efectuar também a
rotação do disco de 180˚.
ATENÇÃO - A protecção do disco deve
ser colocada de modo que as faíscas e as
escórias do material cortado não possam
atingir o operador.
MONTAGEM DO DISCO
– Insira o pino (A, Fig. 4) de dotação, no furo
apropriado, para bloquear a polia e soltar o
parafuso com porca (Fig.5).
– Tire o parafuso com porca (B, Fig.6), a arruela
(C), a flange externa (D) e interna (F+I).
– Limpe o disco e suas flanges antes da
instalação.
– Insira a flange interna (F+I, Fig. 6) no pino (H) do
braço, coloque o disco (G) no centro da flange
interna (F). Insira a flange externa (D) no pino
(H) e fixe através da arruela (C) e do o parafuso
com porca (B).
– introduzir, na função o diâmetro interno do disco
a ser utilizado, o anel de centragem do disco (L,
Fig. 6).
– Insira o pino em dotação (A, Fig.7) no furo
apropriado para bloquear o disco e para permitir
o aperto do parafuso com porca com 2.5 Kgm
(25 Nm).
ATENÇÃO - Desligue sempre o motor
antes de trocar o disco. Respeite sempre
o sentido de rotação, as instruções e as
advertências anotadas no disco.
7
Ελληνικα
SUNARMOLOGHSH 16” (80.7 cm3)
MONTARISMA ANTISTREPTOMENOU MPRATSOU
16”
− Μονταρετε το μπρατσο (Α−Β,εικ.1) στην ακριβη
θεση του επανω στα σταθερα μπουλονια (L) και τον
τραπεζοειδη ιμαντα, στον κινητηριο τροχαλια (R).
− Στερεωστε το μπρατσο (Α−Β,εικ.1) διαμεσου των
παξιμαδιων (C).
RUQMISH ENTASEWS IMANTA
Ξεσφυξτε τα παξιμαδια (D,εικ.2) επανω στο καρτερ
του ιμαντα. Βιδωστε την βιδα (Μ) για την φορτιση του
ελατηριου (Ε) διαποιστωνοντας οτι ο πειρος (F) ειναι
εκτος εδρας 6 ÷ 8 mm (εικ. 2). Σταθεροποιειστε τα
παξιμαδια (D), Σταθεροποιειστε το καρτερ του ιμαντα
και το παξιμαδι (G) του στερεωτη της βιδας (Μ). Ελεγχετε
καθε 3−4 ωρες εργασιας την ενταση του ιμαντα. Το
ρυθμισμα γινεται αυτοματα, μονο ξεσφιγκοντας τα
παξιμαδια (D) και χωρις επεμβαση επι της βιδας (Μ).
Μονον οταν ο στερεωτης (F) επανελθει στην αρχικη
του θεση και το ελατηριο δεν εχει πια δυναμη,
ειναι απαραιτητη η αποκατασταση της αυτοματης
φορτισης, επαναλαμβανοντας ολες τις ενεργειες που
προαναφεραμε.
PROSOCH-Elegcete kaqhmerina thn
entash tou imanta.
PERISTROFH ANTISTREPTIKOU MPRATSOU
16” (eik. 1-2)
− Αφαιρεστε τις τρεις βιδες (Η) για να ξεμονταρετε το
καρτερ που σκεπαζει τον ιμαντα (Ι) του μπρατσου.
− Ξεσφιξτε την βιδα του ρυθμιστη ιμαντα (Μ).
− Αφαιρεστε τις δυο βιδες (D) για να ελευθερωσετε το
μπρατσο (Β) απο το καρτερ (Α) και περιστρεψτε το
μπρατσο επι του καρτερ σε 180°.
− Συναρμολογειστε εκ νεου το καρτερ (Α) και το
μπρατσο (Β) και ξαναμονταρετε το καρτερ που
σκεπαζει τον ιμαντα (Ι).
− Πιεστε τον μοχλο (Ν) και περιστρεψτε το καρτερ του
δισκου (Ρ) σε 180° μεχρι να εξασφαλισετε την σωστη
θεση (εικ. 3).
PROSOCH - Εαν χρησιμοποιειτε διαμαντενιο
δισκο, οταν πραγματοποιειται η περιστροφη του
μπρατσου , ειναι απαραιτητο να πραγματοποιειται
επισης και η περιστροφη του δισκου σε 180°.
PROSOCH - Το καρτερ του δισκου πρεπει να
τοποθετηθει με τροπο ουτως ωστε οι σπινθηρες
και τα υπολειμματα του υλικου που κοβετε να μην
πεταγοντε στο ατομο που χειριζετε το εργαλειο.
MONTARISMA DISKOU
− Εισχωρειστε τον πειρο (Α,εικ.4) παρεχομενο εκ του
εργοστασειου στην ειδικη οπη, για να μπλοκαρει τον
τροχαλια και να ξεσφιξη το μπουλονι (εικ.5).
− Αφαιρεστε το μπουλονι (Β,εικ.6),την ροδελα (C),την
εξωτερικη φλαντζα (D) και την εσωτερικη (F+Ι).
− Καθαριστε τον δισκο και τις φλαντζες του πριν απο
την εγκατασταση.
− Εισχωρειστε την εσωτερικη φλαντζα (F+Ι, εικ.6)
στον πειρο (H) στο μπρατσο, κεντραρετε τον δισκο,
(G) στην εσωτερικη φλαντζα (F). Εισχωρειστε την
εξωτερικη φλαντζα (D) στον πειρο (Η) και στερεωστε
δια μεσου της ροδελας (C) και του μπουλονιου (Β).
− Εισχωρειστε αναλογα με την εσωτερικη διαμετρο
του δισκου που θα χρησιμοποιεισετε το δαχτυλιδι
κεντραρισματος δισκου (L, εικ.6)
− Εισχωρειστε τον πειρο εφοδιασμου (Α, εικ.7) στην
ειδικη οπη για να μπλοκαρετε τον δισκο και να
επιτρεψετε το σφιξημο του μπουλονιου σε 2,5 Κgm
(25 Nm).
PROSOCH - Σβηστε το μοτερ πριν αλλαξετε
τον δισκο. Διατηρειτε παντοτε την κατευθυνση
της περιστροφης, οι οδηγιες και οι πληροφοριες
αναφεροντε επανω στον ιδιο τον δισκο.
29
 OLIO - HUILE - OIL - ÖL
17 BENZINA - ESSENCE
ACEITE - OLIE - OLEO - ΛΑΔΙ 18 19 20
GASOLINE - BENZIN - GASOLINA
BENZINE - BENZNH 4% - 25:1

5l 200 cm3
10 l 400 cm3
25 l 1000 cm3

US IMPERIAL
GAS OIL (FI.OZ) GAS OIL (FI.OZ)
(Gal) 4% - 25:1 (Gal) 4% - 25:1
1
2
5.2
10.4
1
2
6.4
12.8
25:1 (4%)
5 25.6 5 32

Italiano Deutsch

AVVIAMENTO
RIFORNIMENTO DI CARBURANTE (Fig. 17 - 18)
Questo motore è certificato ad operare con benzina senza
piombo.
Per risultati migliori, usare esclusivamente olio con
miscelazione 25:1 (4%); in tal modo si otterranno prestazioni
ottimali nonché lubrificazione corretta. In alternativa utilizzare
olio formulato per motori a due tempi raffreddati ad aria.
AVVERTENZA!! NON USARE OLIO PER MOTORI DI
AUTOMOBILI.
ATTENZIONE - I motori 2 tempi sono dotati di
potenza specifica elevata, consigliamo quindi l’uso di
benzine normali o super, senza piombo di marca
conosciuta, con un numero di ottani non inferiore a 90.
Nella preparazione della miscela usare solo olio specifico
per motori a 2 tempi. Agitare la tanica della miscela prima
di procedere al rifornimento (Fig. 19). Eseguire il rifornimento
carburante (Fig. 20) sempre a motore spento e lontano da
fiamme. Prima di svitare i tappi dei serbatoi posizionare
la troncatrice su di una superficie piana e solida in modo
che non possa rovesciarsi. A motore caldo svitare il tappo
serbatoio lentamente. Riempire il serbatoio miscela solo per
3/4 per permettere l’espansione della stessa. Preparare solo
la miscela necessaria all’uso, non lasciarla nel serbatoio o
tanica per molto tempo.
AVVIAMENTO MOTORE
Portare l’interruttore di massa (A, Fig. 21A) in posizione
“START”. Premendo il pulsante (B, Fig. 21B), la valvola di
decompressione viene aperta. Alla prima accensione verrà
automaticaente chiusa. Si consiglia di premere il pulsante
prima di ogni avviamento. Tirare la leva acceleratore (B, Fig.
22) e bloccarla in semi-accelerazione premendo l’apposito
pulsante (C); rilasciare la leva (B).
Tirare la leva starter (D). Appoggiare la troncatrice sul terreno
in posizione stabile. Verificare che il disco sia libero di
girare e non urti corpi estranei. Tenere con la mano sinistra
l’impugnatura anteriore ed infilare il piede destro sulla base
dell’impugnatura posteriore (Fig. 23). Tirare lentamente la
funicella d’avviamento fino ad incontrare resistenza, quindi
tirare energicamente alcune volte ed ai primi scoppi dei
motore riportare la leva starter (D, Fig. 24) nella posizione
iniziale. Ripetere la manovra di avviamento finché il motore
non parte.
A motore avviato, premere l’acceleratore (B, Fig. 24) per
sbloccarlo dalla posizione di semiaccelerazione e portare il
motore al minimo.
NOTA: miscelare accuratamente il carburante e mantenerlo
sempre pulito. Non miscelare direttamente nel serbatoio del
troncatore. Prima di rimuovere il tappo di rifornimento, pulire
l’area circostante con un panno pulito. Non lasciare entrare
sostanze contaminanti nel serbatoio del carburante.
ATTENZIONE - Quando il motore è già caldo, non
usare lo starter per l’avviamento.
ATTENZIONE - Impiegare il dispositivo di
semiaccelerazione esclusivamente nella fase di
avviamento del motore.
In determinate condizioni, la benzina è altamente
infiammabile ed esplosiva. Spegnere sempre Il
motore. NON fumare né consentire la presenza
di fiamme libere o scintille durante l’effettuazione del
rifornimento di carburante o di interventi di manutenzione
del sistema di alimentazione. Eseguire sempre la
miscelazione in un’area ben ventilata.
COSE DA FARE
• Rifornire lentamente per evitare versamenti.
• Ispezionare tutti i tubi del carburante per assicurarsi che
siano ben serrati e in buone condizioni prima di rifornire di
carburante il motore.
• Dopo il rifornimento, avvitare il tappo del serbatoio di
carburante.
• Pulire le parti esterne dei motore dopo il rifornimento.
COSE DA NON FARE
NON rifornire di carburante il motore quando è in funzione.
NON rifornire di carburante il motore quando è caldo.
NON rifornire di carburante il motore in ambienti chiusi.
È necessaria ventilazione adeguata.
NON fumare durante il rifornimento dei motore.
NON rifornire di carburante il motore in prossimità di
fiamme libere o scintille poiché potrebbero provocare
l’accensione dei vapori.
STARTVORGANG
BETRIEBSSTOFFTANKEN (Abb. 17 - 18)
Dieser Motor ist für den Betrieb mit bleifreiem Benzin
zertifiziert.
Für die beste Leistung, nur öl, gemischt 25:1 (4%),
verwenden. Das bietet die beste Leistung und sichert
das richtige Abschmieren. ODER ein 01, das für einen
luftgekühlten Zweitakt-Motor hergestellt ist.
WA R N U N G ! ! K E I N A U T O M O B I L M O T O R Ö L
VERWENDEN .
ACHTUNG - Die Zweitaktmotoren haven eine hohe
Literleistung und deshalb empfehlen wir die Benutzung
von unverbleitem Normal- oder Superbenzin
bekannter Marken mit einer Oktanzahl von mindestens
90. Bei der Zubereitung des Gemisches ist ausschließlich.
Spezialöl für Zweltaktmotoren zu verwenden. Schütteln
Sie den Kanister vor dem Einfüllen (Abb. 19). Das Einfüllen
muß bei abgeschalteter Säge erfolgen und es darf sich kein
offenes Feuer in der Nähe befinden (Abb. 20). Bevor Sie den
Benzindeckel öffnen stellen Sie die Trennschleifer auf eine
ebene und stabile Oberfläche, damit sie nicht umkippen
kann. Bei warmem Motor, den Kraftstoffankdeckel langsam
öffnen. Den Kraftstofftank jeweils nur zu 3/4 aufüllen, damit
sich der Kraftstoff ausdehnen kann. Nur die tatsächlich
benötigte Gemischmenge vorbereiten. Tank nach Gebrauch
leeren. Den Kraftstoff nicht über längere Zeit im Kanister
steckenlassen.
ANLASSEN DES MOTORS
Ein-/Ausschalter (A, Abb. 21A) in “START”-Stellung
bringen. Wenn der Knopf (B, Abb. 21 B) gedrückt wird,
öffnet sich das Druckreduzierventil. Bei der ersten Zündung
wird es automatisch geschlossen. Wir empfehlen, den
Knopfjedesmal vor dem Anlassen zu drücken, Den Gashebel
(B, Abb. 22) ziehen und in Halbgas-stellung sperren, indem
die entsprechende Taste (C) gedrückt wird, den Hebel (B)
loslassen. Starterhebel (D) ziehen. Die Trennschleifer in
stabiler Lage auf dem Boden abstellen. Überprüfen sie ob
die Scheibe frei läuft und ob sie keine Fremdkörper berührt.
Mit der linken Hand den vorderen Handgriff gut festhalten,
den rechten Fuß in das Unterteil des hinteren Handgriffes
setzen (Abb. 23) und mit der rechten Hand langsam das
Anlasserseil ziehen, bis Widerstand bemerkbar wird. Nun das
Anlasserseil mehrmals kräftig ziehen und den Chokehebel
(D, Abb. 24) den Cholkehebel sofort nach dem ersten
Anspringen in die Ausgangsstellung zurückstellen. Diesen
Vorgang wiederholen, bis der Motor anspringt. Sobald der
Motor angesprungen ist, den Gashebel kurz drücken, um ihn
aus der Halbgasarretierung zu lösen und ihn dann wieder auf
Standgas bringen.
ZU BEACHTEN: Den Brennstoff gut mischen und immer
sauber halten. Nicht direkt in den Tank der Säge mischen.
VorAbnehmen derTankkappe den Bereich um die Kappe mit
einem sauberen Tuch abwischen. Dafür sorgen, daß keine
Fremdstoffe in den Benzintank gelangen können.
ACHTUNG - Den Chokehebel nicht benutzen, wenn
der Motor bereits warm ist.
ACHTUNG - Die Halbgas-Vorrichtung ausschließlich
beim Anlassen des Motors benutzen.
Benzin ist sehr leicht entflammbar und, unter
besonderen Bestimmungen, sehrexplosiv. Immer
den Motor stoppen. Nicht rauchen oder eine offene
Flamme oder Funken an die Säge kommen lassen, wenn
aufgetankt wird oder das Brennstoffsystern gewartet
wird. Immer in einem gut ventillerten Raum mischen.
IMMER den Treibstoff langsam einfüllen, um ein
Vergießen zu vermeiden.
IMMER vor dem Auftanken erst prüfen, daß die
Treibstoffleitungen dicht und in gutem Zustand
sind.
IMMER die Tankkappe nach dem Auftanken fest
anziehen.
IMMER nach dem Auftanken den Motor sauber
abwischen.
NIEMALS einen laufenden Motor auftanken.
NIEMALS einen heißen Motor auftanken.
NIEMALS den Motor in einem Raum ohne Ventilation
a u f t a n k e n . A u s re i c h e n d e Ve n t i l a t i o n i s t
notwendig.
NIEMALS während des Tankens rauchen.
NIEMALS den Motor in einem Raum, wo eine offene Flamme
oder Funken die Benzingase entflammen könnten,
auftanken.

30
21A 21B
Nederlands
STARTEN
BRANDSTOFMENGSEL (Fig. 17 - 18)
Deze motor is gecertificeerd om te werken op loodvrije
benzine.
Om de beste resultaten te bekamen mag u alleen olie, in
een verhouding van 25:1 gemengd (4%) gebruiken. Dit
waarborgt zowel de beste prestatie als de geschikte smering.
U mag ook olie gebruiken die geschikt is voor luchtgekoelde,
tweetaktmotoren.
WAARSCHUWING: GEBRUIK GEEN
AUTOMOTOROLIE.
LET OP- 2-taktmotoren hebben een hoog specifiek
vermogen daarom raden wij het gebruik van normale
of super benzine van een bekend merk aan, al dan
niet loodvrij en met een octaangehal van minstens 90.
Bij het mengen alleen specifleke olle voor 2- taktmotoren
gebruiken. De jerrycan met het mengsel schudden alvorens
over te gaan tot het biivullen (Fig. 19). Brandstof (Fig. 20)
altijd bijvullen, als de motor uitgeschakeld is en buiten
bereik van open vuur. Alvorens de doppen van ~en viakke
en de tanks af te schroeven de snijmachine op e stevige
ondergrond plaatsen, zodat deze niet kan omvalien.
Wanneer de motor warm is, de dop van de tank langzaam
losschroeven. Vul de mengseltank voor slechts 3/4 om de
expaInsie toe te staan. Slechts zoveel mengsel klaarmaken,
als nodig is voor het gebruik; geen brandstof langere tijd in
de tank of in de jerrycan laten zitten.
STARTEN VAN DE MOTOR
Zetde aardingsschakelaar (A, Fig. 21A) in de “START”-
positie. Door het drukken op de drukknop (B, Fig. 21B)
gaat de decompressieklep open. Bij de eerste ontsteking
zal deze automatisch gesloten worden. Het is raadzaam
voor elke start eerst op de drukknop te drukken. Trek
aan de versnellingshencel (13, Fig. 22) en zet deze vast
in semiversnellingspositie door op de daarvoor bedoelde
knop (C) te drukken; laat de hendel (B) los. De chokehendel
aantrekken (D). De snjmachine stevig op de grond zetten.
Controleren, dat de schijf vrij kan draaien en geen vreemde
voorwerpen raakt. Met de linkerhand de voorste handgreep
stevig vasthouden en de rechtervoet op de basis van
de achterste handgreep zetten (Fig, 23). Langzaam aan
het startkoordje trekken tot er weerstand wordt gevoeld.
Dan enkele keren een stevige ruk geven en, als de motor
reageert, de chokehendel (D, Fig. 24). Trek vervolgens enkele
malen stevig en breng bij de eerste explosies van de motor
de starthendel (D, Fig. 24) in de uitgangsstand zetten. De
starthandelingen herhalen, totdat de motor begint te lopen.
22
Als de motor loopt, de gashendel (B, Fig. 24) indrukken om
de halfgasstand te ontgrendelen en de motor stationair te
laten lopen.
OPMERKING: Meng uw brandstof grondig en zorg
ervoor dat het altijd zuiver blijft. Meng niet rechtstreeks
in ^ brandstoftank. Wrijf de opperviakken rondom de
brandstofdop met een reine coek alvorens de dop te
verwijderen, Laat geen verontreinigingen in de brandstoftank
<omen.
LET OP - Ais de motor al warm is, de chokehendel
niet gebruiken om op te starten.
LET OP - Gebruik het semi-versnelling-sapparaatje
uitsluitend bij de startfase van de motor.
Benzine is uiterst ontvlambaar en kan onder
bepaalde omstandigheden zeer ontplofbaar zijn.
Leg altijd de motor stil. Rook nooit en laat nooit
een vlam of vonken in de buurt van de zaagmachine
komen tijdens; het bijtanken of het onderhoud van het
brandstofsysteem. Meng altijd in een goed verluchte
ruimte.
WAT MOET EN WAT NIET MAG
• Voeg de brancistof langzaam toe om morsen te vermijden.
• Voeg nooit brandstof toe terwij1 de motor draait
• Controleer en vergewis u ervan dat alle brandstofleidingen
goed vastzitten en in goede staat verkeren alvorens
brandstof toe te voegen.
• Voeg nooit brandstof toe aan een hete motor.
• Draai de dop van de brandstoftank goed aan na het
bijtanken.
• Voeg nooit brandstof toe in een gesloten ruimte. Een
goede ventilatie is een vereiste.
• Wrijf de motor schoon na het bijtanken. Rook nooit tijdens
het bijtanken.
• Voeg nooit brandstof toe in een omgeving waar een viam
of vonken de gassen zouden kurmen ontsteken.
23
Français
MISE EN ROUTE
PLEIN DE CARBURANT (Fig. 17 - 18)
Ce moteur est certifié pour fonctionner avec de l’essence
sans plomb.
Pour obtenir les résultats les meilleurs, utiliser uniquement
huile mélangé à 25:1 (4%). Cela permettra d’obtenir des
performances optimales et la lubrification appropriée, OU
BIEN une huile dont la formule est adaptée aux moteurs 2
temps, refroidis à l’air.
MISE EN GARDE !! NE PAS UTILISER D’HUILE
MOTEUR TYPE AUTOMOBILE.
ATTENTION - Les moteurs à deux temps sont dotés
d’une puissance spécifique élevée, c’est pourquoi
nous conseillons d’utiliser de l’essence normale
ou super, sans plomb, de marque connue, dont l’indice
d’octanes soit au moins de 90. Dans la préparatio du
mélange n’utilisez que de l’huile spéciale pour moteurs
à deux temps. Agitez le jerrycan de mélange avant de
procéder au ravitaillement (Fig. 19). Eteignez toujours le
moteur avant de vous ravitailler en carburant (Fig. 20) et
n’approchez pas de flammes, lorsque vous effectuez un
ravitaillement. Avant de dévisser les bouchons des réservoirs
placez la découpeuse sur une surface plane et solide pour
quelle ne puisse pas se renverser. Si le moteur est chaud
dévissez lentement le bouchon du réservoir. Remplissez
le réservoir à mélange aux trois-quarts afin de permettre
l’expansion du mélange. Ne préparez que le mélange dont
vous avez besoin et ne le laissez pas trop longtemps dans le
réservoir ou dans un jerrycan.
DEMARRAGE DU MOTEUR
Mettez l’interrupteur de masse (A, Fig. 21A) sur la position
“START”. En pressant le bouton (B, Fig, 21B), la valve de
dècompression s’ouvrit. Au premier ignition elle se fermerà
automatiquement. On conseille de pousser le bouton avant
chaque ignition.
Tirez le levier de l’accélérateur (B, Fig. 22) et appuyez sur
le bouton (C) qui le bloquera à mi-accélération; relâchez le
levier (B). Tirez le levier du starter (D). Posez la découpeuse
sur le terrain en position stable. Faites attention à ce que
le disque tourne librement et n’aille pas frapper des corps
étrangers. Serrez bien dans la main gauche l’avant de la
poignée et enfilez le pied droit sur la base de la poignée
arrière (Fig. 23). Tirez lentement le câble du démarreur
jusqu’à ce que vous sentiez une légère résistance puis
tirez énergiquement plusieurs fois et aux premiers bruits
d’allumage du moteur, remettez le levier
du starter (ID, Fig. 24) dans sa position initiale. Répétez cette
manoeuvre de démarragejusqu’à ce que le moteurparte. Une
24
fois parti, appuyez sur l’accélérateur (B, Fig. 24) afin qu’il
sorte de sa position de demi-accélération et faites tourner le
moteur au ralenti.
REMARQUE: Bien mélanger le carburant. Toujours le garder
propre. Ne pas faire le mélange directement dans le réservoir
de la scie. Avant de retirer le bouchon du réservoir de
carburant, nettoyer tout autour avec un chiffon propre.
Ne pas laisser d’impuretés pénétrer dans le réservoir de
carburant.
ATTENTION - Quand le moteur e st chaud n’utilisez
pas le starter pour le faire démarrer.
ATTENTION - N’utilisez le dispositif de mi-
accélération que dans la phase de démarrage du
moteur.
L’essence est un liquide extrêmement inflammable
et fortement explosif dans certaines conditions.
Toujours arrêter le moteur. Ne pas fumer et ne
pas approcher de flamme vive ni d’étincelle de la scie
pendant que l’on fait le plein de carburant ou l’entretien
du circuit de carburant. Toujours effectuer le mélange
dans un endroit bien aéré.
FAIRE le plein lentement pour éviter les débordements.
FAIRE Inspecter et s’assurer que toutes les conduites
de carburant sont serrées et en bon état avant de
refaire le plein.
FAIRE Bien refermer le bouchon du réservoir de carburant
après avoir fait le plein.
FAIRE Essuyer le moteur après avoir fait le plein.
NE PAS faire la plein quand le moteur est en marche.
NE PAS faire le plein quand le moteur est chaud.
NE PAS faire le plein dans un endroit clos. Une aération
appropriée est nécessaire.
NE PAS fumer en faisant le plein.
NE PAS faire le plein dans un endroit où des flammes
vives ou étincelles peuvent enflammer les vapeurs
d’essence.
31
 OLIO - HUILE - OIL - ÖL
17 BENZINA - ESSENCE
ACEITE - OLIE - OLEO - ΛΑΔΙ 18 19 20
GASOLINE - BENZIN - GASOLINA
BENZINE - BENZNH 4% - 25:1

5l 200 cm3
10 l 400 cm3
25 l 1000 cm3

US IMPERIAL
GAS OIL (FI.OZ) GAS OIL (FI.OZ)
(Gal) 4% - 25:1 (Gal) 4% - 25:1
1
2
5.2
10.4
1
2
6.4
12.8
25:1 (4%)
5 25.6 5 32

English Español

STARTING PUESTA EN MARCHA

FUEL MIXTURE (Fig. 17 - 18)
This engine is certified to operate on unleaded gasoline.
For best results use only oil, mixed 25:1 (4%). This will give
optimum performance as well as ensure proper lubrication or
use oil formulated for an air-cooled, 2-cycle engine.
DO NOT USE AUTOMOTIVE OIL
WARNING: 2-stroke engines have high specific
horsepower and we therefore Lis recommend the use
of well known, regular or super gasoline, without
lead and an octane rating of no less than 90. When
preparing the mixture, only use oil for 2-stroke engines.
Shake the fuel canister before filling (Fig. 19). Refill (Fig. 20)
when the engine is switched OFF and far away from naked
flames. Before unscrewing the fuel tank cap, position the
power cutter on a flat, solid surface to prevent fuel spills.
Unscrew the tank cap slowly with warmed up engine. Fill the
power cutter fuel tank only to 314 capacity to allow for fuel
expansion. Only prepare the quantity of mixture for each job.
DO NOT leave the mixture in the fuel tank or in a fuel canister
for prolonged periods.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Put the ignition switch (A, Fig. 21A) in the “START” position.
Pressing the push button (B, Fig. 21B), the decompression
valve opens. It will automatically close at the first start. We
suggest to press the push button before every start. Pull
the throttle lever (B, Fig. 22) and lock it on half throttle by
pressing the push-button (C); release the lever (B). Pull the
choke lever (D). Place the power cutter on the ground in a
stable position. Cheek that the disk is free to turn and will not
come into contact with any foreign objects. Hold the front
handle firmly with the left hand and put your right foot onto
the base of the rear handle (Fig. 23). Pull the starting rope
slowly until you meet resistance, then pull it hard several
times, and when the engine starts put the choke lever (1),
Fig. 24) position back into its initial position. Repeat until the
engine starts. Once the engine has started, press the throttle
trigger (13, Fig. 24) to release it from the half-throttle position
and let the engine idle.
NOTE: Mix your fuel thoroughly, and keep it clean at all
times. Do not mix directly in your saw fuel tank. Be sure to
clean the area around the fuel cap with a clean cloth before
removing the cap. Do not allow contaminants to enter the
fuel tank.
WARNING!! - Once the engine is warmed up, do
not use the choke to start up again.
WARNING!! Use the half throttle device only in the
phase of starting the engine.
Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly
explosive under certain conditions. Always stop
the engine. Do not smoke or allow an open flame
or spark near the saw when refueling or servicing the
fuel system. Always mix in a well ventilated area.
Do’s and Do Not’s
DO refuel slowly to avoid spillage.
DO inspect and make sure all fuel lines are tight and in
good condition before refueling the engine.
DO tighten the fuel tank cap after refueling.
DO wipe the engine clean after refueling.
DO NOT refuel a running engine.
DO NOT refuel a hot engine.
DO NOT refuel an engine in an enclosed area. Adequate
ventilation is required.
DO NOT smoke while refueling an engine.
DO NOT refuel the engine in an area where an open flame
or sparks could ignite vapor.
ACEITE (Fig. 17 - 18) NOTA: Mezcle cuidadosamente el combustible y manténgalo
Este motor ha sido certificado para trabajar con gasolina sin siempre limpio. No haga la mezcla directamente en el
plomo. depósito de combustible de la sierra. Asegúrese que el
Para obtener mejores resultados, utilice únicamente aceite, área alrededor de la tapa de combustible esté limpia antes
en una mezcla de 25:1 (4%). Esto proporcionará máximo de quitar la tapa. No permita que entren contaminantes al
rendimiento como asimismo asegurará la lubricación depósito de combustible.
adecuada o también se puede utilizar aceite formulado para
motores de 2 tiempos enfriados por aire. ATENCION - Cuando el motor está caliente no se
debe usar el cebador para la puesta en marcha.
NO UTILICE ACEITE PARA MOTORES DE A ATENCION - Emplear el dispositivo de semi
AUTOMOVILES. aceleración exclusivamente en la fase de puesta
en marcha dei motor.
ATENCION - los motores de 2 tiempos tienen una
potencia específica elevada, por lo tanto, se aconsej a
La gasolina es extremadamente inflamable y muy
el uso de gasolinas mormales o super sin plomo de explosiva en determinadas condiciones. Siempre
marca conocida y con un número de octanos que no sea paro el motor. No fume ni permita una llama
inferior a 90. En la preparación de la mezcla usar solamente expuesta o chispas cerca de la sierra mientras carga
aceite específico para motores de 2 tiempos. Agitar el combustible o realiza algún trabajo de mantenimiento
tanque de la mazcla antes de porceder al llenado (Fig. 19). del sistema de combustible. Mezcle siempre en un lugar
Realizar el llenado de combustible (Fig. 20) siempre con el bien ventilado.
motor apagado y lejos de llamas. Antes de desenrroscar
los tapones de los depósitos colocar la cortadora sobre una SI Llene lentamente para evitar derramar combustible.
superficie plana y sólida, de forma que no pueda darse la SI Inspeccione y asegúrese que todos los conductos de
vuelta. Llene sólo 3/4 partes dei depósito, para permitir la combustible estén en buena condiciones antes de
volver a llenar el depósito de combustible.
expansión de la mezcla. Preparez sólo la mezcla necesaria
no la deje en el depósito ni en otros recipientes por mucho SI Apriete la tapa del depósito de combustible después de
llenarlo.
tiempo.
SI Limpie bien el motor después de llenar de combustible.
NO llene de combustible con el motor en marcha.
PUESTA EN MARCHA NO llene de combustible con el motor caliente.
Ponga el interruptor de masa (A, Fig. 21A) en la posición NO llene de combustible en un lugar encerrado.
“START”. Pulsando el botón (B, Fig. 21B), la válvula de Se requiere ventilación adecuada.
descompresión se abre. Al ponerla en marcha se cerrará de
NO fume mientras llena de combustible.
forma automática. Se aconseja pulsar siempre el botón antes NO llene de combustible en un lugar donde haya llama
de ponerla en marcha. Tirar la palanca de aceleración (B, Fig. expuesta o chispas que podrían inflamar el vapor.
22) y bloquearla en posición de semi aceleración oprimiendo
el pulsante correspondiente (C); soltar la palanca (B). Tirar
dei cebador (D). Apoyar la cortadora sobre el terreno en
posición estable. Comprobar que el disco gire sin dificultad y
no choque contra cuerpos extraños. Sujetar firmemente con
la mano izquierda la empuñadura anterior y colocar el pie
derecho sobre la base de la empuñadura posterior (Fig. 23).
Tirar lentamente de la cuerda de arranque hasta encontrar
resistencia, después tirar energicamente algunas veces
y a las primeras explosiones dei motor llevar de nuevo el
cebador (D, Fig. 24) a la posición inicial. Repetir la maniobra
de puesta en marcha hasta que el motor no arranque. Con
el motor encendido, apretar el acelerador (B, Fiq. 24) para
desbloquearlo de la posición de semiaceleración y poner el
motor al mínimo.

32
21A 21B
Português
PARA DAR PARTIDA
ABASTECIMENTO (Fig. 17 - 18)
Este motor está certificado para trabalhar com gasolina sem
chumbo.
Para melhores resultados, use apenas óleo, mistura 25:1
(4%). Isso oferecerá excelente desempenho, bem como
assegurará a lubrificação adequada OU um óleo formulado
para motores de 2 ciclos, refrigerados a ar.
AVISO!! NÃO USE ÓLEO PARA CARROS
ATENÇÃO - Os motores a dois tempos sáo dotados
de uma potência especifica elevada, pelo que
aconselhamos a utilização de combustível normal
ou super, sem chumbo de marca conhecida, cujo índice
de octanes seja pelo menos 90. Na preparação da mistura
utilize só óleo especial para motores a dois tempos.
Agite o recipiente da mistura antes do abastecimento (Fig.
19). Desligue sempre o motor antes de voltar a encher o
depósito (Fig. 20), e não o aproxime a nenhuma chama.
Antes de desenroscar a tampa do depósito de combustível,
posicione a moto cortador sobre uma superficie sólida
de modo que não possa entornar. Com o motor quente,
desenrosque a tampa do tanque, devagar. Encha só 3/4
do tanque de mistura para permitir a expansão da mesma.
Prepare sempre a mistura que for necessária para o uso, não
a deixe muito tempo no depósito ou outros recipientes.
ARRANQUE DO MOTOR
Coloque o interruptor de massa (A, Fig. 21A) na posição
“START”. Ao premir o botão (B, Fig. 21B), abre-se a válvula
de descompressão. Aquando da primeira activação, será
fechada automaticamente. É aconselhável premir o botão
antes de cada activação. Puxe a alavanca do acelerador (B,
Fig. 22) e bloqueie-a em semi-aceleração premindo o próprio
botão (C); largue a alavanca (B). Puxe a alavanca start (D).
Ponha a moto cortador no chão numa posição estável.
Verifique se a disco roda livremente, e não, se choque contra
corpos estranhos. Mantendo a pega anterior firme com a
mão esquerda, enfie o pé direito na base da pega posterior
(Fig. 23). Puxe lentamente a cordão de arranque até sentir
uma certa resistência, logo, puxe energicamente várias
vezes e ás primeiras explosões do motor ponha a lavanca
start (D, Fig. 24) na posição inicial. Repita a manobra até
que o motor arranque. Logo que estiver a funcionar aperte
o acelerador (B, Fig. 24) a fim de que ele sala da posição de
semi-aceleração e deixe-o funcionar no mínimo.
NOTA: Misture o combustível completamente e mantenha-
o sempre limpo. Não mixture diretamento no tanque de
combustível da serra. Assegure-se de limpar a área ao redor
22
da tampa de combustível com um pano limpo antes de re
mover a tampa. Não deixe que contaminantes caiam no
tanque de combustível.
ATENÇÃO - Quando o motor estiver quente náo
utilize o start para o seu arranque.
ATENÇÃO - Utilize o dispositivo de semiaceleraglio
exclusivamente na fase de arranque do motor.
A gasolina é altamente inflamável e explosiva sob
determinadas condições. Sempre pare o motor.
Não fume ou permita que haja alguma chama
ou faísca próxima à serra quando estiver fazendo o
reabastecimento ou reparando o sistema de combustível.
Sempre faga a mistura em uma área bem ventilada.
O QUE SE DEVE FAZER (SIM)
SIM reabasteça devagar para evitar derramamentos.
SIM inspecione e assegure-se de que todas as linhas de
combustível estejam apertadas e em boas condições
antes de reabastecer o motor.
SIM aperte a tampa do tanque de combustível depois de
reabastecer.
SIM limpe o motor depois de reabastecer.
O QUE NÃO SE DEVE FAZER (NÃO)
NÃO reabasteça com o motor ligado
NÃO reabasteça com o motor quente
NÃO reabasteça com o motor em recinto fechado.
É necessário ter ventilagáo adequada.
NÃO fume enquanto estiver abastecendo o motor.
NÃO reabasteça o motor em uma área onde chamas ou
faíscas possam causar vapor.
23
Ελληνικα
SUNARMOLOGHSH
ANAPLHRWSH ME KAUSIMA (eik. 17-18)
Αυτος ο κινητηρας ειναι πιστοποιημενος να λειτουργει με
αμολυβδη βενζινη.
Για καλυτερα αποτελεσματα, χρησιμοποιειτε μονο λαδι, σε
αναλογια 25:1 (4%). Αυτο θα δωσει την καλυτερν αποδοση
οπως επισης θα εξασφαλσει την καταλληλη λιπανση, η λαδι
παρασκευασμενο για αεροψυκτες, διχρονες μηχανες.
PROEIDOPOIHSH!! MH CRSIMOPOIEITE LADI
MHCANHS AUTOKINHTWN
PROSOCH: Τα διχρονα μοτερ διαθετουν μια υψηλη ισχυς,
για τον λογο αυτο συνιστουμε βενζινες ρεγυλαρ η συπερ,
με η χωρις μολυβδο, γνωστης μαρκας και με αριθμο
οκτανιων ανωτερο του 90. Κατα την προετοιμασια του μιγματος,
χρησιμοποιειτε μονο λαδι ειδικο για διχρονα μοτερ.
Ανακινηστε το δοχειο με το μιγμα πριν πραγματοποιησετε τον
ανεφοδιασμο (Εικ.19).
Πραγματοποιηστε τον ανεφοδιασμο (Εικ.20) με το μοτερ σβηστο
και μακρια απο φλογες. Πριν βγαλετε τις ταπες των τεποζιτων
τοποθετηστε τον δισκο κοπης πανω σε μια επιπεδη και σταθερη
επιφανεια, ετσι ωστε να μην αναποδογυριστει. Με το μοτερ ζεστο,
ξεβιδωστε την ταπα του ντεποζιτου αργα αργα, εφοδιαστε το
ντεποζιτο με μιγμα καυσιμου μονο στα 3/4 για να επιτρεψει την
διαστολη αυτου. Προετοιμαστε μονο το απαραιτητο μιγμα για
την χρηση, μην το αφηνετε στο τεποζιτο η σε μπετονια για πολυ
καιρο.
EKKINHSH MOTER
Μεταφερατε τον διακοπτη (Α,Εικ.21/Α) εις θεσιν. Πατωντας το
κουμπι (Β, Εικ.21/Β), η βαλβιδα αποσυηπιεσης ανοιγει. Κατα το
πρωτο αναμμα θα κλεισει αυτοματα. Συνισταται να πατατε το
κουμπι πριν απο καθε εκκινηση. Τραβηξτε του λεβιε επιταχυνσης
(Β, Εικ. 22) και μποκαρετε τον στην θεση ημι−επιταχυνσης
πιεζοντας το κουμπι (C) και αφηστε τον λεβιε (Β).
Τραβηξτε το τσοκ (D). Ελεγξτε εαν ο δισκος ειναι ελευθερος
να γυρισει, διχως να ακουμπα αλλα αντικειμενα. Κρατηστε με
το αριστερο χερι την προσθια λαβη και εισχωρειστε το δεξι
ποδι στην βαση της πισω λαβης (Εικ.23). Τραβηξτε ελαφρα την
κορδονιερα εκκινησης εως να συναντησετε αντισταση και εν
συνεχεια τραβηξτε πιο δυνατα ορισμενες φορες. Στις πρωτες
αναφλεξεις επαναφερετε το τσοκ (D Εικ. 24) στην αρχικη του
θεση. Επαναλαβετε την διαδικασια εκκινησης εως οτου αναψει το
μοτερ. Με το μοτερ σε κινηση, πιεστε τον επιταχυντη (Β, Εικ. 24)
για να τον αφαιρεσετε απο την θεση ημι−επιταχυνσης και φερτε
το μοτερ στο ρελαντι.
24
SHMEIWSH: Αναμειξτε καλα τα καυσιμα και να τα διατηρειτε
παντα καθαρα. Μην αναμιγνυετε απ ευθειας στη δεξαμενη
καυσιμων του πριονιου. Να καθαριζετε την περιοχη γυρω απο
το καπακι της δεξαμενης καυσιμων με ενα καθαρο πανι πριν
αφαιρεσετε το καπακι. Μην αφηνετε ακαθαρσιες να μπαινουν στη
δεξαμενη καυσιμων.
PROSOCH: Οταν το μοτερ ειναι ειδη ζεστο, μην
χρησιμοποιητε το σταρτερ για την εκκινηση.
PROSOCH: Χρησιμοποιειτε το εξαρτημα ημιεκκινησης
μονο κατα την φαση εκκινησης του μοτερ.
Η Φενζινη ειναι εξαιρετικα ευφλεκτη και πολυ εκρηκτικη
κατω απο ορισμενες συνθηκες. Παντα να σταματατε τη
μηχανη. Να μην καπνιζετε η να αφηνετε μια ανοικτη
φλογα η σπιθα κοντα στο πριονι οταν το γεμιζετε η συντηρειτε το
συστημα τροφοδοσιας. Παντοτε να λειτουργειτε τον κινητηρα σε
καλα αεριζομρενη περιοχη.
TI NA KANETE
NA γεμιζετε αργα για να μη χυθουν τα καυσιμα.
NA επιθεωρειτε και βεβαιωνστε οτι ολες οι γραμμες (σωληνες)
καυσιμου ειναι σφιχτες και σε καλη κατασταση πριν γεμισετε τη
μηχανη.
NA σφιγγετε το καπακι του δοχειου καυσιμων μετα την
τροφοδοτηση
NA καθαριζετε τη μηχανη μετα το γεμισμα.
TI NA MHN KANETE
NA MH γεμιζετε τη μηχανη οταν λειτουργει.
NA MH γεμιζετε τη μηχανη ενω ειναι ζεστη.
NA MH γεμιζετε τη μηχανη σε κλειοτο χωρο.
Απαιτειται επαρκης αερισμος.
NA MHN καπνιζετε οταν γεμιζετε τη μηχανη.
NA MH γεμιζετε τη μηχανη σε ενα χωρο στον οποιο μια φλογα
η σπιθες θα μπορουσαν να αναφλεξουν τους ατμους
του καυσιμου.
33
25
Italiano
ARRESTO MOTORE
ARRESTO MOTORE
• Rilascire la leva acceleratore portando il
motore al minimo. Spegnere il motore,
riportando l’interruttore di massa (A, Fig. 25)
nella posizione di “STOP”.
AVVISO IMPORTANTE
• Serrare sempre tutti i dispositivi di fissaggio.
• Controllare la tensione delle cinghie e
aumentarla attenendosi alle istruzioni, se
necessario. Sostituire immediatamente le
cinghie trapezoidali se appaiono logorate.
• Avvitare il disco strettamente.
• Assicurarsi che le superfici di contatto delle
flange siano pulite.
• Per il rimessaggio della macchina, si
raccomanda di rimuovere il disco e di
custodirlo in modo sicuro.
ATTENZIONE: Tutte le operazioni di
manutenzione non riportate sul presente
manuale devono essere effettuate da
un'officina autorizzata. Per garantire un
costante e regolare funzionamento dei
troncatore, ricordate che le eventuali
sostituzioni delle parti di ricambio dovranno
essere effettuate esclusivamente con
RICAMBI ORIGINALI.
34
Deutsch
MOTOR ABSTALLEN
MOTOR ABSTELLEN
• Den Gashebel loslassen und die Motorleistung
auf das Minimum reduzieren. Den Motor
abstellen, indem der Ein/Aus-Schalter (A,
Abb. 25) in “STOP”- Stellung gebracht wird.
WICHTIGE RATSCHLÄGE
• Alle Verbindungen regelmäßig fest anziehen.
• Die Spannung der Riemen prüfen. Wie
angegeben fest anziehen. Den Keilriemen
sofort auswechseln, wenn er abgenutzt
aussieht.
• Die Sägescheibe fest anziehen.
• Dafür sorgen, daß die Kontaktstellen der
Flansche sauber sind.
• Bei längerer Lagerung der Maschine wird
empfohlen, die Sägescheibe auszubauen und
sorgfältig aufzubewahren.
ACHTUNG: Alle Wartungsarbeiten, die
nicht in dieser Bedienungsanleitung
aufgeführt sind, müssen bei einer
Vertragswerkstatt durchgeführt werden.
Zum Gewährleistung eines konstanten
und ordnungsgemässen Betriebs dü rfen
nur ORIGINALERSATZTEILE verwendet
werden.
Nederlands
STOPPEN VAN DE MOTOR
STOPPEN VAN DE MOTOR
• De gashendel loslaten en de motor stationair
laten lopen. De motor uitschakelen door
de aan/uitschakalaar (A, Fig. 25) weer op
“STOP” te zetten.
BELANGRIJK ADVIES
• Draai alle bevestigingsmiddelen regelmatig
vast.
• Controleer de spanning van de rierrien. Span
ze aan, volgens de aanwijzingen. Vervang de
V-riem onmiddellijk indien deze versleten lijkt.
Bevestig het zaagblad stevig.
• Zorg dat de contact vlakken van de fienzen
zuiverziln.
• Wanneer u de machine wegbergt, wordt
aangeraden het zaagblad te verwijderen en
met zorg op te bergen.
LET OP: Alle niet in deze handleiding
beschreven onderhoudshandelingen
moeten door een geautoriseerde
werkplaats uitgevoerd worden. Om een
constant en regelmatig functioneren van
de snijmachine te garanderen, denk eraan,
dat eventuele vervanging van onderdelen
alleen moet gebeuren met ORIGINELE
RESERVEONDERDELEN.
Français
ARRET DU MOTEUR
ARRET DU MOTEUR
• Lâchez le levier de l’accélérateur et laissez le
moteur tourner au ralenti. Arretez le moteur
en replaçant l’’interrupteur de masse (A, Fig.
25) en position “STOP”.
CONSEIL IMPORTANT
• Serrer régulièrement toutes les fixations.
• Vérifier la tension des courroies. Les tendre
conformément aux instructions, Dès qu'elle
paraît usée, remplacer immédiatement la
courroie trapézoïdale.
• Serrer fermement le disque.
• S'assurer que les surfaces de contact des
flasques sont propres.
• Lors du remisage de la machine, il est
recommandé de retirer le disque et de le
ranger avec soin.
ATTENTION: Toutes le opérations
d'entretien qui ne figurent pas dans ce
manuel doivent être effectuées dans un
atelier autorisé.
Pour garantir un fonctionnement constant
er régulier de la découpeuse, ne pas
oublier que dans le cas de remplacement
de pièces il faut utiliser exclusivement des
PIECES D'ORIGINE.
 English
STOPPING THE ENGINE
STOPPING THE ENGINE
• Release the Throttle Lever and the engine
return to idle. Turn off the engine, putting
the ON/OFF Swicth (A, Fig. 25) in the
“STOP” position.
IMPORTANT ADVICE
• Tighten all the fasteners regularly.
• Check the tension of the belts.
• Tighten them, as instructed. Replace the V-
Belt immediately when appean rig worn.
• Tighten the blade firmly
• Make sure the contact faces of the flanges
are clean.
• When storing the machine, it is recommended
to remove the blade and store it carefully.
ATTENTION: All maintenance operations
not reported in this manual must be
carried out by an authorized Service
Center. To ensure steady and regular
power cutter operation, remember
that parts must only be replaced with
ORIGINAL SPARES.
Español
PARADA DEL MOTOR
PARADA DEL MOTOR
• Lievar la palenca del acelerador al
mínimo. Apagar el motor lievando el
interruptor de masa (A, Fig. 25) a la
posición STOP.
CONSEJO IMPORTANTE
• Apriete regularmente las fijaciones.
• Revise la tensión de las correas. Apriételas
de acuerdo con las instrucciones. Cambie
inmediatamente la correa trapezoidal cuando
muestre indicios de desgaste.
• Apriete la hoja firmemente.
• Asegúrese que las superficies de contacto de
las bridas estén limpias.
• Cuando guarde la máquina, se recomienda
retirar la hoja y guardada cuidadosamente.
ATENCION: Todas las operaciones
de mantenimiento no indicadas en el
presente manual deben ser efectuadas
en un taller autorizado.
Para garantizar un constante y regular
funcionamiento de la cortadora, recuerde
que las eventuales sustituciones de
sus piezas deben ser efectuadas
exclusivamente con REPUESTOS
ORIGINALES.
Português
PARAGEM DO MOTOR
PARAGEM DO MOTOR
• Largue a alavanca do acelerador levando
o motor para a posicao de ralenti. Pare o
motor e ponha o intterruptor de massa
(A, Fig. 25) na posicao STOP.
RECOMENDAÇÃO IMPORTANTE
• Aperte todos os prendedores regularmente
• Verifique a tensão das correias. Aperte-as
conforme recomendado. Substitua a Correia-
V imediatamente quando aparentar estar
desgastada.
• Aperte a lâmina com firmeza.
• Assegure-se de que as faces de cantata dos
fianges estejam limpas.
• Ao guardara máquina, recomenda-se que
a lâmina seja removida e guardada com
cuidado.
ATENÇÃO: Todas as operações de
manuteção que não figuram neste
manual devem ser efectuadas numa
oficina autorizada.
Para garantir um constante e regular
funcionamento do moto cortador, não
esquecer que no caso de substituição cas
peças necessário utilizar exclusivamente
PEÇAS DE ORIGEM.
Ελληνικα
STAMATHMA TOU MOTER
STAMATHMA TOU MOTER
• AÊ‹ÛÙ ÙÔ Ï‚Ȥ ÂÈÙ¿ˉ˘ÓÛË̃ ʤÚÓÔÓÙ∙̃
ÙÔ ÌÔÙ¤Ú ÛÙÔ ÚÂÏ∙ÓÙ›. ™‚‹ÛÙÂ ÙÔ ÌÔÙ¤Ú
ʤÚÓÔÓÙ∙̃ ÙÔ ÁÂÓÈÎfi ‰È∙ÎfiÙË (A, EÈÎ.
25) ÔÙË ı¤ÛË STOP.
SHMANTIKH SUMBOULH
• Σφιξτε ολους τους σφιγκτηρες κανονικα.
• Εξετασετε την τανυση σε ολους τους ιμαντες.
Σφιξτε τους, οπως δειχνουν οι οδηγιες.
Αντικαταστηστε τον μαντα−V αμεσωςοταν
παρουσιαστει φθορα.
• Σφιξτε τη λεπιδα καλα.
• Σιγουρευτειτε οτι οι επιφανειες επαφης των
φλαντζων ειναι καθαρες.
• Οταν αποθηκευετε το μηχανημα, συνισταται να
αφαιρειτε τη λεπιδα και να την αποθηκευετε
προσεκτικα.
PROSOCH - Ολες οι εργασιες συντηρησης,
που δεν περιεχονται στο παρον εγχειριδιο,
θα πρεπει να πραγματοποιουνται απο
εξουσιοδοτημενο συνεργειο. Για να εγγυηθει
η μονιμη και σωστη λειτουργια της δισκος
κοπης, θυμηθητε οτι οι ενδεχομενες
αντικαταστασεις των ανταλλακτικων θα
πρεπει να πραγματοποιουνται με GNHSIA
ANTALLAKTIKA
35
26
Italiano
MANUTENZIONE
CARBURATORE
• Prima di effettuare la regolazione del
carburatore, pulire il convogliatore
avviamento (Fig. 26), il filtro dell’aria (Fig.
27 - 28) e riscaldare il motore.
• Questo motore è progettato e costriuito in
conformità all’applicazione delle direttive
97/68/EC e 2002/88/EC e dell’Exhaust
Emission Standard. L’Exhaust Emission
Control System comprende il sistema
d’alimentazione, il sistema d’aspirazione
e maggiormente, il carburatore; in
questo motore, il carburatore (Fig.
29) è progettato per permettere solo
regolazioni delle viti L e H in un campo
di mezzo giro.Il campo di regolazione
possibile, delle viti L e H, di mezzo giro
è predeterminato dal costruttore e non è
possibile modificarlo.
ATTENZIONE: Non forzare le viti
fuori dal campo di regolazione
possibile!
• La vite del regime minimo T è regolata
in modo che vi sia un buon margine di
sicurezza fra il regime del minimo e il
regime d’innesto della frizione.
• La vite L deve essere regolata in modo
che il motore risponda prontamente alle
brusche accelerazioni e abbia un buon
funzionamento al minimo.
• La vite H deve essere regolata in modo
da avvertire un leggero pendolamento
con il motore al max regime.
• Le troncatrici sono dotate di dispositivi che
impediscono al motore e di coseguenza
36
27
al disco di taglio, di andare oltre un
determinato nr. di giri. Tali dispositivi
sono in funzione, quando si avvertono
variazioni di giro con motore al max
regime e disco senza carico
ATTENZIONE — Con motore al
minimo (2400 ÷ 2800 g/min) il disco
non deve girare. Vi consigliamo
di fare effettuare le regolazioni di
carburazione al Vostro Rivenditore
o Officina autorizzata.
ATTENZIONE — Variazioni climatiche
ed altimetriche possono provocare
alterazioni alla carburazione e
perdita di potenza.
Non permettere ad altre persone
di restare vicino alla troncatrice
durante il lavoro ed alla fase di
registrazione della carburazione.
AVVERTENZA!! NON far funzionare
il motore ad alta velocità senza
carico.
28
Deutsch
WARTUNG
VERGASER
• Vor der Vergasereinstellung die
anlasserseil-Aufwicklung (Abb. 24) und
den Luftfilter (Abb. 27 - 28) reinigen und
den Motor warmlaufen lassen.
• Dieser Motor wurde entwickelt und
gebaut in Konformität mit der Anwendung
der Richtlinie 97/68/EG und 2002/88/EG
und den Exhaust Emission Standards.
Das Exhaust Emission Control System
unfaßt das Versorgungssystem, das
Ansaugsytem uns vor allem den Vergaser.
Bei diesem Motor ist der Vergaser (Abb.
29) so aufgebaut, daß lediglich ein
Verstellen der Schrauben L und H
um eine halbe Umdrehung möglicht
ist. Der Einstellbereich der Schrauben
L und H von einer halben Umdrehung
ist konstruktionsmäßig vorgegeben und
kann nicht veränder werden.
ACHTUNG: Dei schrauben nicht
gewaltsam über den zulässigen
Einstellbereich hinaus verstellen!
• Die Leerlaufschraube T ist so eingestelt,
daß zwischen Leerlaufschraube
und Einkuppeldrehzal ein guter
Sicherheitsspielraum besteht.
• Die L- Düse ist so einzustellen, daß der
Motor auf plotzliches Gasgeben sofort
reagiert und im Leerlauf sauber läuft.
• Schraube (H) ist so einzustellen, daß
bei max. Motordrehzahl eine leichte
Drehzahlschwankung feststellbar ist.
• Die Trennschleifer sind mit Vorrichtungen
versehen, der den Motor und dadurch
auch die Trennscheibe innerhalb eines
29
bestimmten Drehzahlbereiches hält.
• Diese Vorrichtungen sind in Betrieb,
wenn bei Motor auf max. Drehzahl
und unbelasteter Trennscheibe
Drehzahlschwankungen spürbar
werden.
ACHTUNG – Bei Motor in
Leerlaufdrehzahl (2400 ÷ 2800 U/
min), darf die Trennscheibe nicht
drehen. Den vergaser lasseb Sei
vorzugsweise bei lhrem Händler
oder bei einer Vertragswerkstatt
einstellen.
ACHTUNG – Klimaveränderungen
und unterschiedliche Höhenlagen
Können Veränderungen an der
Vergasereinstellung bewirken und
Leistungsverluste verursachen.
Erlauben Sie anderen Personen
nicht sich während der Arbeit oder
während der Vergaserinstellung
in der Nähe der Trennschleifer
ausfzuhalten.
WARNUNG!! Den motor nicht ohne
Last mit hooher Geschwindgkeit
laufen lassen.
 H – Vite registro massimo
L – Vite registro minimo
T – Regime minimo
H – Vis de réglage
L – Pointeau de réglage du gicleur
de ralenti
T – Vis de réglage du régime de ralenti
Nederlands
ONDERHOUD
CARBURATOR
• Alvorens de carburator af te stellen de
startgeleider (Fig. 26) en het luchtfilter
(Fig. 27 - 28) schoonmaken en de motor
op bedrijfstemperatuur brengen.
• Deze motor is ontworpen en gebouwd
overeenkomstig de toepassing van
de richtlijnen 97/68/EG en 2002/88/
EG en van de de Exhaust Emission
Standards. Het Exhaust Emission Control
System omvat het toevoersysteem, het
aanzuigsysteem en de carburator van
deze motor; de carburator (Fig. 29) is
zodnig ontworpen dat de schroeven
L en H uitsluitend kunnen afgesteld in
een afstelbereik van een halve slag.
Hel afstelbereik van een halve slag van
de schroven L en H is door de fabrikant
ingesteld, en het is niet mogelijk het te
wijzigen
LET OP: forceer de schroeven niet
buiten het mogelijke afstelbereik!
• De stationairschroef T is zo afgesteld,
dat er een goed veiligheidsmarge bestaat
tussen het stationaire toerental en het
toerental, dat de koppeling inschakelt.
• Schroef L moet zo afgesteld worden, dat
de motor direct reageert op plotseling
gasgeven en een goed stationair toerental
heeft.
• De schroef H moet zodanig worden
gesteld dat men een lichte schmmeling
van de motor waarneemt als die in
maximaal bedrijf is.
• D snijmachines zijn utgerust met
H – Hight speed adjustment screw
L – Low speed needle
T – Idle adjustment screw
H – Stellschraube der Vollgasdüse
L – Leerlauf-Nadel
T – Einstellschraube für Leerlauf
mechanismen die het de motor, en
daardoor de snijschijf, onmogelijk maken
een bepaald aantal toeren to boven te
gaan. Deze mechanismen zijn in werking
wanneer men variaties in het toerental
waarneemt, met de motoren op hun
maximum en de schijf zonder belasting.
LET OP - Wanneer de motor op
zijn laagst loopt (2400 ÷ 2800
omwentelingen/min mag de schijf
niet draaien. Wij raden U aan de
regeling van de carburator uit te
laten voeren door Uw Dealer of
Erkende Werkplaats.
LET OP - Klimaatschommelingen en
gewijzigde weersomstandigheden
kunnen de carburatie beïnvloeden.
Niet toedtaan aan andere personen
in de buurt van de snijmachine
to blijven tijdens het werk en de
afstelfase van de carburatie.
WAARSCHUWING!! Laat de motor
nooit zonder belasting op hoge
snelheid draaien.
Français
ENTRETIEN
CARBURATEUR
• Avant d’effectuer le léglage du carburateur
nettoyez le couvercle du starter (Fig.
26) et le filtre à air (Fig. 27-28) et faites
chauffer le moteur.
• Ce moteur a été conçu et réalisé
conformément à l’application aux
directives 97/68/EC et 2002/88/EC et
de l’Exhaust Emission Control System
comprend le systéme d’alimentation,
le systéme d’aspiration ainsi que le
carburateur; pour ce moteur, le
carburateur (Fig. 29) est conçu de
sorte à permettre uniquement le
réglage des vis L et H sur un demi-
tour. Cette prédispositio est déterminée
par le constrcteur et ne peut en aucun
cas être modifiée.
ATTENTION: Ne pas fprcer sur les
vis audelà du demi-tour de réglge
possible!
• La vis de ralenti T est réglée de façon
à laisser une bonne marge de sécurité
entre le régime de ralenti et le régime
d’embrayage.
• La vis L doit être réglée de façon à ce
que le moteur réponde promptemente
aux acceélérations brasques et qu’elle
permette un bon fonctionnemente au
ralenti.
• La vis H doit être réglée de maniére à
sentir une légére oscillation quand le
moteur tourne à plein régime .
• Les découpeuses sont équipées de
dispositifs qui empêchent le moteur et
par conséquent le disque de coupe, de
dépasser un certain nombre de tours.
Quand vous sentez une variation de
tours, avec le moteur à plein régime et
le disque sans charge, c’est que ces
dispositif sont entrés en fonction.
ATTENTION - Si le moteur est au
relanti (2400 ÷ 2800 tours/min) le
disque ne doit pas tourner. Nous
vous conseillons de faire effectuer
les réglages de carburation par
votre reveneur ou dans un atelier
agréé.
ATTENTION - Les variations
climatiques et altérer la carburation
et créer une perte de puissance
aussi.
Personne ne doit rester prés de la
découpeuse pendeant la phase de
réglage de la carburation
MISE EN GARDE!Ne pa laisser le
moteur tourner à régime élevé, à
vide.
37
26 27
English
MAINTENANCE
CARBURETOR
• Before adjusting the carburetor, clear the
starter Cover (Fig. 26), the Air Filter (Fig.
27-28) and warm up the engine.
• This engine is designed and manufactured
in order to comply with the applicable
97/68/EC and 2002/88/EC and Exhaust
Emission Control System includes
ignitions system, Air inlet system and,
mainly, carburetor; in this engine,the
carburator, the carburetor (Fig. 29) is
designed to permit only the adjustment
of L and H screws in a range of half a
round; the half round range admissible
forL and H screws is determined by the
manafactured and you can not modify it.
WARNING: Don’t try to force the
screws outside the range!
• Idle screw T is adjusted in order to
ensure a good safety margin between
idle running and clutch engagement.
• Screw L must be adjusted so that the
engine promptly responds to sharp
accelerations and gives good idle
operation.
• Screw H must be adjusted so that there
is a slight haunting with the engine at
maximum speed.
• The Quickie is fitted with mechanisms that
prevents the engine, and consequently
the blade, from exceeding a certain
number of revolutions. these mechanisms
are functions, when variations in revolutios
occur, with the engine at maximum speed
and the blade without load.
38
WARNING!! With the engines idling
(2400 ÷ 2800 rpm), the blade should
not rotate. We recommend that you
have the dealer or an authorised
mechanic carry out any carburetor
adjustments.
WARNING!! Weather conditions and
altitude may affect carburation and
cause power loss
Do not allow anyone to stay close to
the Quickie while working or while
adjusting the carburetor
Do not run the enigine at high speed,
no load!
28 29
Español
MANTENIMIENTO
CARBURADOR determinado número de revoluciones.
• Antes de regular el carburador, limpiar • Dichos dispositivos funcionan, cuando
el transportador de encendido (Fig. 26), funcionando cuando se notan variaciones
el filtro del aire (Fig. 27-28) y calentar el de revoluciones, con el motor a maximo
motor. régime y con el disco sincarga
• Este motor ha sido proyectado y
construido aplicando la norma de 97/68/ ATENCION - Con el motor en
EC y 2002/88/EC y “Exhaust Emission ralenti(2400 ÷ 2800 rpm) el disco no
Standards”. El”Exhaust Emission Control tiene que girar. Le aconsejamos hacer
System” comprende el sistema de la regulación de la carburacion con
alimentación, el sistema de aspiración y su Revendedor o Taller Autorizado.
sobre todo el carburador. El carburador
(Fig. 29) ha sido proyectado para ATENCION- Las variaciones
permitir Únicamente regulaciones de climáticas y altrimétricas pueden
tornillos L y H no mayores de media causar alteraciones en la carburación
vuelta. Este valor ha sido establecido y pérdidas de potencia.
por el constructor y no puede ser
modificado. No permitir que otras personas esten
cerca de la cortadora mientras está
ATENCIÓN: No forzar los tornillos trabajando ni durante la fase de
fuera de los límite de regulación registro de la carburación
permitidos!
No huga funcionar el motor a alta
• El tornillo del régimen minimo T ha sido velocidad sin carga.
regulado para que haya un buen margen
de seguridad entre el régimen del mínìmo
y el régimen del embrague.
• El tornillo L se debe regular de manera
tal que el motor responda on rapidez a
las aceleraciones bruscas y tenga un
buen funcionamiento al mínìmo.
• El tornilla H se debe regular de manera
que se advierta un ligero penduleo con el
motor a máximmo régime.
• Las cortadora poseen unos dispositivos
que impide que impide que el motor, y por
consiguiente el disco de corte, pase un
 H – Volgas mengsel stelschroef
L – Minimun mengsel Stelschroef
T – Minimun toeren stelschroet
H – Tornillo reg. máximo
L – Tornillo reg. mínimo
T – Regimen mínimo
Português
MANUTENÇÃO
CARBURADOR
• Antes de regular o carburador, limpe
o transportador de arranque (Fig. 26),
o filtro de ar (Fig. 27-28) e aqueça o
motor.
• Este motor está projectado e construido
em conformidade à aplicação das
directivas 97/68/CEE e 2002/88/CEE e
da “Exhaust Emission Standards”. O
“Exhaust Emission Control System” inclui
o sistema de alimentação o sistema de
aspiraçã e ainda mais, o carburador;
neste motor, o carburador (Fig. 29) está
projectado para permitir só ajustes dos
parafuso L e H num campo de meia
rotação. O campo de ajuste possível,
dos parafusos L e H, de meia rotação é
predeterminado pelo fabricante e não é
possível modificá-lo.
ATENÇÃO: Não esforce os parafusos
para fora do campo de ajuste
possível!
• O parafusos do sistema ralenti T é
regulado de maneira a deixar uma boa
margem entre o sistema de ralenti e o
sistema de engate da embraiagem.
• O parafusos L deve ser regulado de
modo que o motor possa responder
prontamente às aceleraçõ bruscas e que
funcione bem no ralenti.
• O parafusos H deve ser regulado de
modo a perceber uma leve oscilaçã com
o motor ao máximo dos giros.
• Os moto cartadores são provistos de
dispositivos que impedem que o moto
H – Parafuso de reg. máxima
L – Parafuso de reg. ralenti
T – Sistema ralenti
Η − Βιδα ρυθμισης μεγιστου
L − Βιδα ρυθμισης ρελαντι
Τ − Ρελαντι
e conseqüentamente o disco de corte,
supere um determinado número de giros.
Estes dispositivos funcionam quando
percebem variações de giros, com
motores ao máximo dos giros e disco
sem carga.
ATENÇÃO - Com o motor no minimo
(2400 ÷ 2800 voltas/min) o disco
não deve girar. Aconselhamos
fazer a regulação da carburação no
seu revendedor ou numa oficina
autorizada.
ATENÇÃO - As variações climáticas
e atmosféricas podem provocar
variações de carburação.
Não permita que outras pessoas
fiquem perto da moto cortador
durante o trabalho e a fase de
reulagem da carburação.
AVISO!! Não opere o motor a alta
velocidade, sem carga.
Ελληνικα
SUNTHRHSH
KAPM¶IPATEP
• Πριν ρυθμισετε το καρμπυρατερ, καθαριστε
το τσοκ (Εικ.26) , το φιλτρο του αερα
(Εικ.27−28) και ζεστανετε την μηχανη.
• ∞˘Ùfĩ o ÎÈÓËÙ‹Ú∙̃ ¤ˉÂÈ Ûˉ‰È∙ÛÙ›
Î∙È Î∙Ù∙Û΢∙ÛÙ› Û‡ÌÊ̂Ó∙ Ì ÙËÓ
ÂÊ∙ÚÌÔÁ‹ ÙÔ˘ 97/98/EK Î∙È 2002/88/
EK Î∙È Exhaust Emission Standards.
∆Ô Exhaust Emission Control System
ÂÚÈÏ∙Ì‚¿ÓÂÈ ÙÔ Û‡ÛÙËÌ∙ ÙÚÔÊÔ‰ÔÛ›∙̃,
ÙÔ Û‡ÛÙËÌ∙ ∙Ó∙ÚÚfiÊËÛË̃ Î∙È Î∙Ù¿ ·ÚÈÔ
ÏfiÁÔ, ÙÔ Î∙ÚÌÈÚ∙Ù¤Ú.
∆Ô Î∙ÚÌ˘Ú∙Ù¤Ú (Εικ.29) ¤ˉÈ ÌÏÙËı›
ÁÈ∙ Ó∙ ÈÙÚ¤È ÌfiÓÔ Ú˘ıÌ›ÛÈ̃ Ì ÙÈ̃
‚›‰̃ L Î∙È H Û ‰›Ô ÌÈÛ‹̃ ÛÙÚÔÊ‹̃.
∆Ô ‰›Ô Ú‡ıÌÈÛË̃ ÙË̃ ÌÈÛ‹̃ ÛÙÚÔÊ‹̃
Ô˘ ÈÙÚ¤Ô˘Ó ÔÈ ‚›‰̃ L Î∙È H ›Ó∙È
ÚÔÎ∙ıÔÚÈṲ̂ÓÔ ∙fi ÙÔÓ Î∙Ù∙Û΢∙ÛÙ‹
Î∙È ‰Ó ÌÔÚ› Ó∙ ÙÚÔÔÔÈËı›.
¶ƒ√™√Ã∏! - ªËÓ ÈˉÈÚ›Ù Ó∙ Á˘Ú›ÛÙ
ÙÈ̃ ‚›‰̃ ¤Í̂ ∙fi ÙÔ ÈÙÚÙfi ‰›Ô
Ú‡ıÌÈÛË̃!
• Η βιδα του ρελαντι Τ ειναι ρυθμισμενη
ετσι ωστε να υπαρχει ενα επαρκες οριο
ασφαλειας, μεταξυ του ρελαντι και της
λειτουργιας του συμπλεκτη.
• Η βιδα L θα πρεπει να ειναι ρυθμισμενη
ετσι ωστε το μοτερ να αντιδρα αμεσως στις
αποτομες επιταχυνσεις και να εχει μια σωστη
λειτουργια στο ρελαντι.
• Η βιδα Η θα πρεπει να ρυθμιζετεαι ετσι ωστε
να επιτυνχανετε η ανωτατη ισχυ κατα την
διαρκεια του κοψιματος.
• Το καρμπυρατερ διαθετει εναν αυτοματο
περιοριοτη οτροφων, πον επεμβαινει για
να μην επιτρεψει στο μοτερ να υπερβει
το ανωτατο (max) οριο στροφων. A˘fi
¿ÓÙ̂̃ ‰ÂÓ ÂÈʤÚÂÈ ÌÈ∙ ÙÒÛË ÈÛˉ‡Ỗ,
οÙ̂ ∙fi ÊÔÚÙ›Ô, ÙÔ˘ ‰ÈÛÎÔÚ›ÔÓÔ.
PROSOCH: Με το μοτερ στο ρελαντι
(2400 ÷ 2800 στρσφες/λεπτο) ο δισκος δεν
θα πρεπει να γυρναει. Σας συνιστουμε
να πραγματοποιησετε τις ρυθμιοεις του
καρμπυρατερ με του Πωλητη Σας η το
Εξουσιοιοδοτημευο Συνεργειο.
PROSOCH: Κλιματικες και υψομετρικες
μεταβολες, μπορουν να προκαλεσουν
αλλοιωσεις στην λειτουργια του
καρμπυρατερ.
Μην επιρεπετε σε αλλα ατομα να
παραμενουν κοντα στο αλυσοπριονο
κατα την διαρκεια της εργασιας και της
φασης ρυθμισης του καρμπυρατερ.
PROEIDOPOIHSH!!:
Μη λειτουργειτε το μηχανημα σε υψηλες
ταχυτητες χωρις φορτιο.
39
31
Italiano
MANUTENZIONE - RIMESSAGGIO
MANUTENZIONE
FILTRO ARIA - Ogni 8 ore di lavoro, togliere il
coperchio (A, Fig. 31), e il prefiltro (B). Quindi
togliere il coperchio (E, Fig. 32), il filtro principale
(C) ed il filtro supplementare (D). Se necessario
effettuare le sostituzioni, opure effettuare la
manutenzione come descritto.
Il prefiltro (B) va lavato in un fluido detergente
pulito, non infliammabile (es. acqua saponata
calda) e bene asciugato. Successivamente va
oliato con olio 2T (12 g/o. 42 oz) distribuendo bene
l’olio sulla superficie del prefiltro strofinandolo con
le mani.
Il filtro principale (C) ed il filtro supplementare (D)
vanno puliti scuotendoli bene e con un pennello
morbido. Non utilizzare l’aria compressa per pulire
questi filtri.
Un filtro intasato causa un funzionamento irregolare
del motore; usura dei componenti interni del
motore, aumento del consumo e diminuzione
della potenza.
ATTENZIONE - per un funzionamento
ottimale del troncatore, in fase di rimontaggio,
serrare bene il filtro principale (C) con la
chiave esagonale da 19 mm.
In condizioni di lavoro gravoso, ogni tre prefiltri
(B) sostituiti, sostituire il filtro principale (C).
FILTRO CARBURANTE - Verificare periodicamente
le condizioni del filtro carburante. In caso di
sporcizia eccessiva, sostituirlo (Fig. 33).
GRUPPO AVVIAMENTO - Tenere libere e
pulite le feritoie di raffreddamento del carter
gruppo avviamento (Fig. 34) con pennello o aria
compressa.
MOTORE - Pulire periodicamente le alette del
cilindro con pennello o aria compressa (Fig. 36).
L’accumulo di impurità sul cilindro può provocare
surriscadamento dannosi per il funzionamento del
motore.
40
32
Controllare e pulire eventuali impurità alla base
della valvola di decompressione; potrebbe
rimanere aperta.
CANDELA - Periodicamente si raccomanda la
pulizia della candela e il controllo della distanza
degli elettrodi (Fig. 35). Utilizzare candela NGK
BRMR8Y o di altra marca di grado termico
equivalente.
CINGHIA - Giornalmente, verificare la tensione
della cinghia (vedi pag. 23) e sostituirla se
necessario.
RIMESSAGGIO
Seguire tutte le norme di manutenzione
precedentemente descritte. Pulire perfettamente
la troncatrice e ingrassare le parti metalliche.
Togliere il disco ed immagazzinarlo in posizione
orizzontale su una superficie piana e lontana da
fonti di colore o di umidità. Togliere il carburante
dal serbatoio e rimontare il tappo. Togliere la
candela; versare un poco di olio nel cilindro (Fig.
37). Ruotare l’albero motore alcune volte tramite
la funicella avviamento per distribuire l’olio (Fig.
38). Rimontare la candela. Avvolgere il motore con
tela di plastica. Conservare in ambiente secco,
possibilmente non a diretto contatto con il suolo.
33
Deutsch
WARTUNG - LAGERUNG
WARTUNG
LUFTFILTER – Alle 8 Betriebsstunden den Deckel
(A, Abb. 37) und den Vorfilter (B) abnehmen. Dann
den Deckel (E, Abb. 32), den Hauptfilter (C) und
den Zusatzfilter (D) abnehmen. Gegebenenfalls die
Teile erstzen, bzw. die Wartung wie beschrieben
durchführen.
Die Vorfilter (B) werden in einer sauberen, nicht
entzündbaren Reinigungsflüssigkeit (z.B. warmes
Seifenwasser) gewaschen und gut getrocknet.
Danach werden sie mit Öl 2T (12 g/0.42 oz.)
eingeölt; das Öl muss gut auf der Oberfläche des
Vorfilters verteilt, und mit den Händen eingerieben
werden.
Der Hauptfilter (C) und derZusatzfilter (D) werden
gut ausgeschüttelt und mit einem weichen pinsel
gereingt. Benutzen Sie zum Reinigen dieser Filter
keine Druckluft.
Bitte beachten Sie, daß ein verstopfer Filter einen
ungleichmässigen Motorlauf, den Verschleiß
der lnnenteile des Motors, eine erhöhten
Kraftstoffverbrauch und eine Leistungsminderung
zur Folge hat.
ACHTUNG – Für einen optimalen Betrieb der
Trennmaschine muss der Vorfilter (C) beim
darauffolgenden Einbau mit dem 19 mm-
Sechskantschlüssel gut angezogen werden.
Im Falle besonders schwieriger
Betriebsbedingungen muss bei jedem dritten
Ersatz des Vorfilters (B) auch der Hauptfilter
(C) ersetzl werden.
KRAFTSTOFF-FILTER – Der kraftstoff-filter
muß regelmäßig überprüft und bei zu starler
Verschmutzung ersetzt werden (Abb.33).
STARTERGRUPPE – Luftschlitze des
Anlasserdeckels freihalten und regelmäßig mit
einem Pinsel oder Druckluff reinigen (Abb. 34).
MOTOR – In regelmässigen Zeitabständen die
34
Kühlrippen des Zylinders mit einem Pinsel reinigen
oder mit Druckluft abblasen (Abb. 36). Starke
Schmutzablagerungen am Motor Können zu
schädilchen Überhitzungen führen.
Prüfen, ob sich unter dem Dekompressionsventil
evtl. Schmutz angesammelt hat, der das Ventil in
Offenstellung blockiert.
ZÜNUDKERZE – Die Zündkerze regelmäßig
reinigen sowie den Elektrodenabstand einstellen
(Abb. 35).
Eine Zündkerze NGK BRMR8Y bzw. einer
anderen Marke mit gleichwertigem Wärmewert
verwenden.
KEILRIEMEN – Riemenspannung Täglich
überprüfen (s. Seite 22) und bei Bedarf den
Riemen auswechseln.
LANGERUNG
Alle vorangehenden Wartungsvorschiften befolgen.
Den Trennschleifer gründlich reinigen und dessen
Metalteile einfetten. Trennscheibe abmontieren
und horizonatl, auf eine ebene Fläche, fern von
Hitzequellen und trocken aufbewahren. Den
Kraftstootank entleeren und den Tankdeckel wieder
aufsetzen. Die zündkerze abnehmen, ein werning
Öl in den Zylinder giessen (Abb. 37). Um das Öl zu
verteilen, einige Male den Startergriff ziehen (Abb.
38) . Danach kerze weider einsezen . Den Motor
inKunststoffolie einwicken. Das Gerät trocken
lagern. Nach Möglichkeit sollte die maschine nicht
am Boden.
35
BRMR8Y
Nederlands
ONDERHOUD - OPSLAG
ONDERHOUD
LUNCHTFILTER – Na 8 uren bedrijf moet u het
deksel (A, Fig. 31) en de voorfilter (B) wegnemen.
Verwijder dus het deksel (E, Fig. 32), de hoofdfilter
(C) en de bijkomende filter (D). vervand wat nodig
is of voer het onderhoud uit zoals dat hoger is
beschreven.
De voorfilter (B) moeten met een propere en
niet ontvlambare ontvettende vloeistof (detergent)
worden schoongemaakt (bij voorbeeld met
warm zeepwater), en goed worden afgedroogd.
Vervolgens dient u de beide voorfilter in te oliën
met olie 2T (12 g/0.42 oz)waarbij u de olie over het
hele oppervlak van de voorfilter moet verspreiden,
door die met de hand uiten te wrijven.
De hoofdfilter (C) en de bijkomende filter (D) moet
u schoonmaken door ze goed uit to schudden
en met een zqcht borsteltjie af te borstelen.
Gebruik GREEN perslucht om deze filters schoon
te maken. Een verstopt filter veroorzaakt een
onregelmatige werking van de motor; slijtage van
de interne onderdelen van de motor, toename van
het verbruik en vermindering van de kracht.
LET OP – Schroef de hoofdfilter (C) goed
vast met een zeshoekige sleutel van 19 mm
wanneer u alles weer in elkaar zet, om te
zorgen dat de afkortmachine goed werkt.
Bij zwaar werk vervangt u - wanneer u al drie
voorfilters (B) hebt vervangen- de hoofdfilter
(C)
BRANDSTOFFILTER – Periodiek de staat van het
brandstoffilter controleren. Dit in geval van teveel
vuil vervangen (Fig. 33)
STARTGROEP – De koelgaten van de
startgroepcarter met een penseel of hogedruklucht
vrij en schoon houden (Fig. 34).
MOTOR – Periodiek de cylindervleugels met een
penseel of hogedruklucht schoonmaken (Fig. 36).
Het opeenhopen van vuil op de cylinder kan voor
36 36A
de werking van de motor schadelijke oververhitting
veroorzaken.
Wanneer na controle blijkt dat er zich oneffenheden
bevinden op het onderstuk van de drukregelaar
dient u deze te reinigen; in tegenovergesteld geval
zou hij open kunnen blijven staan.
BOUGIE – Men raadt aan de bougie periodiek
schoon te maken en de electrodenafstand te
controleren (Fig. 35) .
Gebruik een NGK BRMR8Y bougie of een bougie
van een ander merk met een equivalent thermisch
bereik.
RIEM
De spanning van de riem moet dagelijks worden
nagegaan (zie pag. 22) en moet worden vervangen
wanneer dat nodig is .
OPSLAG
Volg alle voorheen beschreven onderhoudsregels.
Maak de snijmachine perfect schoon en vet de
metalen delen in. Verwijder de schijf en sla hem in
horizontale positie op op een vlakke ondergrond,
uit de buurt van warmtebronnen of vocht. Verwijder
de brandstof uit de tank en breng de dop weer
aan. Haal de bugie weg, giet een beetje olie in
de cilinder (Fig. 37). Draai de motoras enkele
keren met behulp van het startkoord om de olie te
verdelen (Fig. 38).
Monteer de bougie weer. Omwikkel de motor met
een stuk plastic. Bewaar de machine in een droge
omgeving, zo mogelijk niet rechtstreeks in contact
met de vloer.
37
Français
ENTRETIEN - STOCKAGE
ENTRETIEN
FILTRE A AIR – Toutes les 8 heures de traveil,
enlever le couvercle (A, Fig. 31) et le prefiltre
(B). Puis enlever le couvercle (E, Fig. 32), le
filtre principal (C) et le filtre supplémentaire (D).
Si nécessaire, effectuer les remplacements ou
procéder aux opérations d’entretien en suviant les
indications fournies.
Laver le prefiltre (B) dans un liquide détergente
propre, non inflammable (ex. eau savonneuse
chaude) et bien les sécher. Ensuite, les graisser
avec une huile 2T (12 g/0.42 oz) en répartissant
bien l’’huile sur la surface du préfiltre et en frottant
avec les mains.
Nettoyer le filtre pincipal (C) et le filtre
supplémentaire (D) en les secouant bien et en
utilisante un pinceau souple. Ne pas nettoyer ces
filtres à l’air comprimé.
Un filtre encrassé empêche le moteur de fonctioner
régulièrement et les éléments à l’intérieur du
moteur s’abîment, la consommation augmente et
la puissance diminue.
ATTENTION – Pour un fonctionnement
optimal de la tronçonneuse, lors des
operations de remontage, bein serrer le
filtre principal (C) avec la clé hexagonale de
19 mm.
Dans des conditions de travail difficile,
tous les tois remplacements du préfiltre (B),
remplacer le filtre principal (C).
FILTRE CARBURANT – Vérifiez périodiquement
les conditions du filtre carburant; s’il est trop sale,
mieux vaut le changer. (Fig. 33).
GROUPE DEMARREUR– Véillez à ce que les
fentes de refroidissement du carter du groupe
démarreur soient toujours dégagées (Fig. 34).
Utilisez un pinceau ou de l’air comprimé.
MOTEUR – Nettoyez réguliérement les ailettes du
cylindre avec un pinceau ou à l’air comprimé (Fig.
36). L’accumulation d’impuretés sur le cylindre
38
peut provoquer des surchauffes nuisibles au bon
fonctionnement du moteur.
Contrôler et nettoyer les impuretés éventuelles
qui se seraient déposées à la base de la vanne de
décompressione; celle-ci pourrait rester ouverte.
BOUGIE– Il est recommandé de nettoyer
périodiquement la bougie et de contrôler la
distance entre les électodes (Fig. 35). Utiliser
une bougie NGK BRMR8Y ou autre marque avec
degré thermique équivalent.
COURROIE– Toutes les jours vérifiez la tension
de la courroie (voir page 22). changez la si
nécessaire.
STOCKAGE
Suivez toutes les régles d’entretien décrites plus
haut. Nettoyez soigneusement la découpeuse
et grassez les parties métalliques. Otez le
disque et rangez-le dans le magasin en position
horizontale, bien à plat, loin de sources de chaleur
ou d’humidité. Vidangez le carburant du réservoir
et revissez le bouchon. Otez la bougie et versez
un peu d’huile dans le cylindre (Fig. 37). A l’aide
du cordon de lanceur, faites faire quelques tours
au vilebrequin pour bein distribuer l’huile (Fig. 38)
Remontez la bougie. Enveloppez le moteur dans
une toile cirée. Conservez votre machine dans un
endroit sec, si possible espacé di sol.
41
31
English
MAINTENANCE - STORAGE
MAINTENANCE
AIR FILTER – After every 8 hours operation,
remove the cover (A, fig. 31) and the prefilter (B).
Now remove the cover (E, fig. 32) the main filter
(C), and the supplementary filter (D). Replace if
necessary, or proceed with servicing as follows.
Wash the prefilter (B) in non-flammable fresh
cleaning fluid (e.g. warm soapy water) and dry
thoroughly. When dry, coat the element with 2T oil
(12 g/0.42 oz), spreading evenly over the surface
by hand.
Clean the main filter element (C) and auxiliary
element (D) by shaking out and dusting off with
a soft brush. Do not blast these elements with
compressed air.
A blocked filter can cause irregular engine
funtioning, wearing out of internal engine
components, increased consumption and
decreased power.
WARNING – To ensure optimum operation
of the machine, tighten the main filter (C)
securely with the 19 mm hex wrench when
reassembling.
In punishing or hostile operating conditions,
the main filter (C) should be replaced at
every third replacement of the first prefilter
(B).
FEUL FILTER – Check the fuel filter periodically.
Replace it if too dirty (Fig. 33)
STARING UNIT– Use a brush or compressed air to
keep the cooling louvers of the starter assembly
free and clean (Fig. 34).
ENGINE–The cylider fins should be cleaned pe
riodically using a brush or compressed air (Fig.
36). Accumulation of impurities on the cylider can
cause dangerous engine overheating.
Check the base of the decompression valve; clean
away any residues, which could cause the valve
to stay open.
42
32
SPARK PLUG – Clean the spark plug and check
the electrode gap periodically (Fig. 35). Use NGK
BRMR8Y or of other brand with the same thermal
grade.
BELT– Check the belt tension daily (see page 22)
and replace the belt if necessary.
STORAGE
Follow all the maintenance regulations described
previously. Clean the power cutter thoroughly and
lubricate metal parts. Remove the disk and store
it in a horizontal position on a flat surface away
from heat or humidity. Empty the fuel tank and
put the cap back on. Remove the spark plug and
pour a small amount of oil into the cylinder (Fig.
37). Rotate the crankshaft several times using
the starting rope in order to distribute the oil (Fig.
38). Remount the spark plug. Wrap the engine
in plastic. Store in a dry place, preferably not in
direct contact with the floor.
33
Español
MANTENIMIENTO - ALMACENAJE
MANTENIMIENTO
FILTRO DEL AIRE - Cada 8 horas de trabajo,
quite la tapa (A, Fig. 31) y el prefiltro (B). Luego,
saque la tapa (E, Fig. 32), el filtro principal (C) y el
filtro suplementario (D). Efectuar las sustituciones
necesarias o el mantenimiento descrito.
Lavar lo prefiltro (B) con un líquido detergente
limpio que no sea inflamable (ej., agua jabonosa
caliente) y secado bien. A continuación,
lubricados con aceite 2T (12 g/0.42 oz). Repartir
bien el aceite en la superficie dei prefiltro, frotando
con las manos.
Para limpiar el filtro principal (C) y el filtro
suplementario (D), sacudidos bien y pasarles un
pincel suave. No utilizar aire comprimido para
limpiar estos filtros.
El filtro obstruido causa el funcionamiento irregular
dei motor, el desgaste de los componentes
internos dei motor, el aumento dei consumo y
pérdidas de potencia.
ATENCIÓN - Para que el cortador funcione
correctamente, durante el nuevo montaje,
acordarse de apretar bien el filtro principal
(C) con la llave hexagonal de 19 mm.
En condiciones de trabajo pesadas, cada
tres sustituciones dei prefiltro (B) se deben
cambiar también el filtro principal (C).
F I LT R O C O M B U S T I B L E - C o n t r o l a r
periódicamente las condiciones dei filtro, en caso
de excesiva suciedad, cambiado (Fig. 33).
GRUPO DE ARRANQUE - Mantener libres y
limpios los orificios de refrigeración dei carter del
conjunto de arranque (Fig. 34) con pincel o aire
comprimido.
MOTOR - Limpie periódicamente las aletas del
cilindro con un pincel o aire comprimido (Fig. 36).
La acumulación de impurezas en el cilindro puede
34
causar sobrecalentamiento, dañinos para el
funcionamiento del motor.
Controlar y eliminar eventuales impurezas
p re s e n t e s e n l a b a s e d e l a v á l v u l a d e
descompresión ya que pueden provocar que la
misma permanezca.
BUJIA - Se recomienda a limpieza periódica de la
bujía y el control de la distancia de los electrodos
(Fig. 35). Utilizar bujía NGK BRMR8Y o de otra
marca con grado térmico equivalente.
CORREA - Diariamente controle la tensión de la
correa (ver pág. 23) y cámbiela si fuera necesario.
ALMACENAJE
Siga todás las normas para el mantenimiento
antes descriptas. Limpie muy bien la cortadora
y engrase las partes metálicas. Quite el disco
y almacénelo en posición horizontal encima de
una superficie plana y lejos de fuentes de calor
o humedad. Quite el combustible del deposito y
ponga nuevamente el tapón . Quite la bujía, vierta
un poco de aceite en el cilindro (Fig. 37). Gire el
cigüeñal del motor algunas vueltas por medio de
la cuerda de arranque para distribuir el aceite (Fig.
38). Coloque de nueva la bujía. Envuelva el motor
en tela de plàstico. Conservelo en un ambiente
seco, mejor a un si no está en contacto directo
con el suelo.
35
BRMR8Y
Português
MANUTENÇÃO - ARMAZENAGEM
MANUTENÇÃO
FILTRO DE AR - A cada 8 horas de trabalho retire
a tampa (A, Fig. 31) e o pré-filtro (B). De seguida
retire a tampa (E, Fig. 32), o filtro principal (C) e
o filtro suplementar (D). Se necessãrio troque ou
efectue as operações de manutenção descritas.
O pré-filtro (B) devem ser lavado em urrí fluido
detergente limpo não inflamãvel (por exemplo:
uma solução de água quente e sabão) e secado.
De seguida devem ser oleados com óleo 2T (12
g/0.42 oz) distribuindo uniformemente o óleo na
superfície do pré-filtro com as mãos.
Para limpar o filtro principal (C) e o filtro suplementar
(D) sacuda-os e de seguida passe um pincel
macio. Não utilize ar comprimido para limpar estes
filtros.
Um filtro obstruído provoca um funcionamento
irregular do motor; desgaste dos componentes
internos do mesmo, aumento do consumo e
diminuição da potência.
ATENÇÃO- para obter a condição ideal de
A funcionamento, ao tomar a montar aperte
firmemente o filtro principal (C) com a chave
hexagonal de 19 mm.
Em situaçõs de trabalho pesadas, para cada
três pré-filtros (B) substituidos, substitua o
filtro principal (C).
FILTRO COMBUSTÍVEL - Verifique regularmente
as condições do filtro de combustível, no caso de
rnuita sujeira, substitua-o (Fig. 33).
GRUPO DE ARRANQUE - Mantenha livre e
limpos os orificios de arrefecimento do carter
do grupo de arranque (Fig. 34) com pincel ou ar
comprimido.
36 36A
MOTOR - Limpe regularmente as alhetas do
cilindro com pincel ou ar comprimido (Fig. 36). A
acumulação de impurezas sobre o cilindro pode
provocar aquecimento anormal prejudicial ao bom
funcionamento do motor.
Controle e limpe eventuais impurezas na base da
válvula de descompressão; poderia ficar aberta.
VELA - Recomenda-se a limpeza regular da vela
e o controle a distância dos elétrodos (Fig. 35).
Utilize vela NGK BRMR8Y ou de outra marca de
grau térmico equivalente.
CORREIA
Diariamente, verifique a tensão da correia (vide
pag. 23) e substitua-a se for preciso.
ARMAZENAGEM
Siga todas as normas de manutenção
precedentemente descritas. Limpe perfeitamente
o moto cortador e engraxe as partes metálicas.
Tire o disco e guarde-o em posição horizontal
numa superfície plana e longe de fontes de calor
cu humidade. Tire o combustível do tanque e
coloque a tampa. Tire a vela, coloque um pouco
de óleo no cilindro (Fig. 37). Gire o eixo do motor
algumas vezes através da corda de arranque para
distribuir o óleo (Fig. 38). Monte outra vez a vela.
Envolva o motor numa lona. Guarde em ambiente
seco, possivelmente não em contacto directo com
o solo.
37
Ελληνικα
SUNTHRHSH - FULAXH
FILTRO AERA
Καθε 8 ωρες λειτουργιας, αφαιρειτε το καπακι (Α, Εικ.
31) και το προφιλτρο (Β). Στη συνεχεια αφαιρεστε το
καπακι (Ε, Εικ. 32), το κυριως φιλτρο (C) και το επιπλεον
φιλτρο (D). Εαν ειναι αναγκαιο, αντικαταστηστε τα η
συντηρηστε τα συμφωνα με τις οδηγιες.
Τα προφιλτρα (Β) πρεπει να πλενονται με καθαρο,
μη ευφλεκτο απορρυπαντικο (π.χ. ζεστο νερο και
σαπουνι) και να στεγνωνουν καλα. Στη συνεχεια πρεπει
να λαδωνονται με λαδι 2T (12 gr/0.42 oz) απλωνοντας
καλα το λαδι σε ολη την επιφαϖεια του προφιλτρου
και τριβοντας με τα χερια.
Το κυριως φιλτρο (C) και το συμπληρωματικο
φιλτρο (D) καθαριζονται ανακινωντας τα καλα και
στη συνεχεια με μαλακο πινελο. Μη χρησιμοποιειτε
πεπιεσμενο αερα για τον καθαρισμο των φιλτρων.
Ενα βουλωμενο φιλτρο προκαλει την ανωμαλη
λειτουργια του μοτερ, φθορα των εσωτερικων
εξαρτηματων του μοτερ, αυξηση καταναλωσης και
μειωση ισχυος.
PROSOCH - Για την καλη λειτουργια του
κοπτικου, κατα την επανατοποθετηση, σφιξτε
καλα το κυριως φιλτρο (C) με το εξαγωνικο
κλειδι των 19 mm.
Σε βεβαρημενες συνθηκες λειτουργιας σε καθε
αντικατασταση τριων προφιλτρων (Β), πρεπει να
αντικαθισταται το κυριως φιλτρο (C).
FILTRO TOU KARMPURATER
Ελεγχετε περιοδικα την κατασταση του φιλτρου του
καρμπυρατερ. Σε περιπτωση εντονης ακαθαρσιας
αντικαταστηστε το, (Εικ.33).
MPLOK EKKINHSHS
Διατηρηητε παντα ελευθερες και καθαρες τις σχισμες
ψυξης του καρτερ μπλοκ εκκινησης (Εικ.34) με ενα
πινελο η πεπιεσμενο αερα.
38
MOTER
Καθαριζετε περιοδικα τα πτερυγια του κυλινδρου με
ενα πινελο η με πεπιεσμενο αερα (Εικ.36).
Η συγκεντρωση ακαθαρσιας στον κυλινδρο μπορει
να προκαλεσει υπερθερμανση, βλαβερη για την
λειτουργια του μοτερ.
Ελεγχετε και καθαριζετε τυχον ακαθαρσιες στη βαση
της βαλβιδας αποσυμπιεσης. Μπορει να παραμεινει
ανοιχτη.
MPOUZI
Συνισταται ο περιοδικος καθαρισμος του μπουζι και ο
ελεγχος της αποστασης ηλεκτροδιων (Εικ.35).
ÃÚËÛÈÌÔÔț٠ÌÔ˘˙› NGK BRMR8Y ‹ ¿ÏÏË̃
Ì¿ÚÎ∙̃ ÌÂ ∙ÚfiÌÔÈÔ ıÂÚÌÈÎfi ‚∙ıÌfi.
IMANTAS - Ελεγξατε καθημερινως την ταση του
ιμαντα (βλεπε σελιδα 10) και εν αναγκη αντικαταστηστε
τον.
APOQHKEUSH
Ακολουθειτε ολους τους κανονες συντηρησης
που προαναφεραμε. Καθαριστε τελεια τον δισκο
κοπης και λιπανετε τα μεταλλικα μερη. Βγαλτε τον
δισκο και αποθηκευστε τον οριζοντιως σε επιπεδη
επιφανεια και μακρυα απο πηγες θερμοτητας και
υγρασιας. Αφαιρεστε τα καυσημα απο το ντεποζιτο
και ξαναμονταρετε την ταπα. Αφαιρεστε το μπουζι και
ριξτε λιγο λαδι στον κυλινδρο (εικ.37). Περιστρεψτε
τον αξονα μερικες φορες δια μεσου του σχοινιου
εκκινησης για την διανεμηση του λαδιου (εικ.38).
Ξαναμονταρετε το μπουζι. Τυλιξτε το μηχανημα με
πλαστικο και φυλαξτε το σε στεγνο περιβαλλον και αν
ειναι δυνατον, σε υπερυψωμενη θεση, οχι σε επαφη
με το δαπεδο.
43
 39 40

Italiano Deutsch Nederlands Français

KIT ACQUA NASSEINHEIT KIT VOOR NAT ZAGEN KIT POUR USAGE HUMIDE

Viene fornito un kit acqua cod. 52012062 (Fig.
39).
• Il kit per raffreddamento ad acqua consente
di mantenere bagnato il disco di taglio in
modo conveniente.
• Per il taglio bagnato, collegarlo ad un
rifornimento d'acqua appropriato.
PROCEDURA DI MONTAGGIO DEL KIT
ACQUA
Componenti (Fig.39)
A. Morsetto
B. Vite e rondella
C. Attacco rapido
D. Tubo flessibile
E. Fascette
Procedura di montaggio (Fig.40)
1. Collegare l’attacco rapido (C) alla fine del
tubo flessibile.
2. Collegare i due (2) tubi flessibili ai fori della
protezione disco. Orientare i tubi flessibili
della protezione disco in modo che siano
allineati con il morsetto (A).
3. Infilare il tubo flessibile (D) nel morsetto
(A) e serrarlo al supporto del rullo / ruote,
utilizzando la vite e la rondella (B).
4. Utilizzare le fascette (E) come preferite,
per ulteriore sicurezza del fissaggio del
tubo flessibile (D) alla giusta misura, sulla
macchina.
Ein Kühlwasser-Set Art.Nr. 52012062 (Abb. 39)
mitgeliefert.
• Die Nasseinheit bietet eine zweckmäßige
Methode, um Wasser an die Sägescheibe
zu leiten.
• Zum Nazschneiden Schneiden an eine
passende Wasserleitung anschliessen.
EINBAUANLEITUNG DES
WASSER-BAUSATZES
Komponenten (Abb.39)
A. Schelle
B. Schraube und Scheibe
C. Schnellanschluss
D. Schlauch
E. Binder
Einbauanleitung (Abb.40)
1. Stecken Sie den Schnellanschluss (C) auf
das Schlauchende.
2. Verbinden Sie die zwei (2) Schläuche mit
den Bohrungen am Tellerschutz. Richten
Sie die Schläuche am Tellerschutz mit der
Schelle (A) aus.
3. Führen Sie den Schlauch (D) in die Schelle
(A) ein und befestigen Sie ihn am Rollen-
/Radlager, mit der Schraube und Scheibe
(B).
4. Verwenden Sie die Binder (E) nach
Belieben, als zusätzliche Fixiersicherung
des Schlauchs (D) an der Maschine.
Een waterkit art. nr. 52012062 (Fig. 39)
geleverd.
• De kit voor he nat zagen biedt de mogely
le heid om water op het zaagblad aan te
brengen.
• Voor nat zagen dient u de machine op een
geschikle watertoevoer aa e sluiten.
MONTAGEPROCEDURE VOOR DE
WATERKIT
Onderdelen (Fig.39)
A. Aansluitklem
B. Schroef en sluitring
C. Snelkoppeling
D. Flexibele slang
E. Kabelbinders
Montageprocedure (Fig.40)
1. Verbind de snelkoppeling (C) met het
uiteinde van de flexibele slang.
2. Sluit de twee (2) flexibele slangen aan op
de gaten van de schijfbescherming. Richt
de flexibele slangen op de gaten van de
schijfbescherming zo, dat ze uitgelijnd zijn
met de aansluitklem (A).
3. Schuif de flexibele slang (D) in de aansluitklem
(A) en span die met behulp van de schroef
en sluitring (B) aan op de houder van de rol
/ wielen.
4. Gebruik de kabelbinders (E) naar believen,
om de flexibele slang (D) stevig aan de
machine te bevestigen.
Le kit eau code 52012062 (Fig. 39) est fourni.
• Le kit pour usage humide permet d'alimenter
le disque en eau.
• Pour letranchage humide, effectuer
le raccordement à une source d’eau
appropriée.
PROCÉDURE DE MONTAGE DU KIT EAU
Composants (Fig.39)
A. Serre-câble
B. Vis et rondelle
C. Raccord rapide
D. Tuyau flexible
E. Colliers
Procédure de montage (Fig.40)
1. Poser le raccord rapide (C) à l’extrémité du
tuyau flexible.
2. Raccorder les deux (2) tuyaux flexibles aux
orifices de la protection du disque. Orienter
les tuyaux flexibles de la protection du
disque de sorte qu’ilssoient alignés avec le
serre-câble (A).
3. Enfiler le tuyau flexible (D) dans le serre-
câble (A) et le serrer sur le support du
rouleau / roues à l’aide de la vis et de la
rondelle (B).
4. Utiliser les colliers (E) et les poser là où
cela semble nécessaire pour garantir une
meilleure tenue du tuyau flexible (D).

44
 English
WET KIT
Kit p.n. 52012062 (Fig. 39) is supplied.
• The wet kit provides a convenient way to
apply water to the blade.
• For wet cutting, connect to an appropriate
water supply.
WATER KIT ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES
Components (Fig.39)
A. Hose clamp
B. Screw and washer
C. Quick disconnect fitting
D. Water hose
E. Plastic tie straps
Assembly procedure (Fig.40)
1. Connect the quick disconnect fitting (C) to
the water hose end.
2. Snap fit the two (2) water hose outlets to the
holes in the blade guard. Orient the water
hose about the handle guard to aid in the
alignment of the hose clamp (A).
3. Loop the hose clamp (A) around the water
hose (D) and fasten to the roller wheel bar
support arm using the screw and washer
(B).
4. Use the plastic ties (E) as preferred to further
secure the hose fittings and water hose to
the machine.
Español
JUEGO DE ASPERSION
Se abastecer un Kit de refrigeración por agua
cód. 52012062 (Fig. 39).
• El juego de aspersión proporciona una
manera correcta de aplicar agua a la hoja
de la sierra.
• Para cortes en húmedo conéctelo a un
suministro de agua adecuado.
PROCEDIMIENTO DE MONTAJE DEL KIT
AGUA
Componentes (Fig.39)
A. Abrazadera
B. Tornillo y arandela
C. Empalme rápido
D. Tubo flexible
E. Bandas
Procedimiento de montaje (Fig.40)
1. Conectar el empalme rápido (C) al final del
tubo flexible.
2. Conectar los dos (2) tubos flexibles a los
orificios de la protección del disco. Orientar
los tubos flexibles de la protección del
disco de modo que queden alineados con
la abrazadera (A).
3. Introducir el tubo flexible (D) en la abrazadera
(A) y apretarlo al soporte del rodillo / ruedas,
utilizando el tornillo y la arandela (B).
4. Utilizar las bandas (E) como se prefiera,
para mayor seguridad de fijación del tubo
flexible (D) a la medida justa, enla máquina.
Português
ESTOJO HOLHADO E TANQUE
É fomecido um Kit água, cód.52012062 (Fig.
39).
• O estojo molhado oferece uma maneira
conveniente para suprir água para a
lámina.
• Para o corte molhado, faça a conexão com
o suprimento de água apropriado.
PROCEDIMENTO DE MONTAGEM DO KIT
DE ÁGUA
Componentes (Fig.39)
A. Terminal
B. Parafuso e anilha
C. Ligação rápida
D. Tubo flexível
E. Braçadeiras
Procedimento de montagem (Fig.40)
1. Fixe a ligação rápida (C) à extremidade do
tubo flexível.
2. Ligue os dois (2) tubos flexíveis aos orifícios
da protecção do disco. Oriente os tubos
flexíveis da protecção do disco de modo
que fiquem alinhados com o terminal (A).
3. Insira o tubo flexível (D) no terminal (A) e
fixe-o ao suporte do rolo / rodas, utilizando
o parafuso e a anilha (B).
4. Utilize as braçadeiras (E) como preferir, para
maior segurança da fixação do tubo flexível
(D) à medida correcta na máquina.
Ελληνικα
SET UGRHS LEITOURGIAS
Παρεχεται ενα Κιτ νερου κωδ. 52012062 (Εικ. 39).
• Το σετ υγρης λειτουργιας παρεχει εναν ευκολο
τροπο για να απλωνετε νερο στη λεπιδα.
• Για υγρο κοψιμο, συνδεστε σε μια καταλληλη
παροχη νερου.
¢π∞¢π∫∞™π∞ ∆√¶√£∂∆∏™∏™ ∫π∆ ¡∂ƒ√À
∂Í∙ÚÙ‹Ì∙Ù∙ (∂ÈÎ.39)
A. ™ÊÈÁÎÙ‹Ú∙̃
B. µ›‰∙ Î∙È ÚÔ‰¤Ï∙
C. ∆∙ˉ˘Û‡Ó‰ÂÛÌỖ
D. ∂‡Î∙ÌÙỖ Û̂Ï‹Ó∙̃
E. ¢ÂÙÈο
¢È∙‰ÈÎ∙Û›∙ ÙÔÔı¤ÙËÛË̃ (∂ÈÎ.40)
1. ™˘Ó‰¤ÛÙ ÙÔÓ Ù∙ˉ˘Û‡Ó‰ÂÛÌÔ (C) ÛÙÔ ¿ÎÚÔ
ÙÔ˘ ‡Î∙ÌÙÔ˘ Û̂Ï‹Ó∙.
2. ™˘Ó‰¤ÛÙ ÙÔ˘̃ ‰‡Ô ‡Î∙ÌÙÔ˘̃ Û̂Ï‹ÓẪ
(2) ÛÙÈ̃ Ô¤̃ ÚÔÛÙ∙Û›∙̃ ‰›ÛÎÔ˘. °˘Ú›ÛÙÂ
ÙÔ˘̃ ‡Î∙ÌÙÔ˘̃ Û̂Ï‹ÓẪ ÙË̃ ÚÔÛÙ∙Û›∙̃
‰›ÛÎÔ˘ ¤ÙÛÈ ÒÛÙ Ó∙ ¢ı˘ÁÚ∙ÌÌÈÛÙÔ‡Ó ÌÂ
ÙÔ ÛÊÈÁÎÙ‹Ú∙ (A).
3. ¶ÂÚ¿ÛÙ ÙÔÓ Â‡Î∙ÌÙÔ Û̂Ï‹Ó∙ (D) ÛÙÔ
ÛÊÈÁÎÙ‹Ú∙ (A) Î∙È ÛÊ›ÍÙ ÙÔÓ ÛÙÔ ÛÙ‹ÚÈÁÌ∙
ÙÔ˘ Ú¿Ô˘ÏÔ˘ / ÙÚÔˉÒÓ Ì ÙË ‚›‰∙ Î∙È ÙË
ÚÔ‰¤Ï∙ (B).
4. ÃÚËÛÈÌÔÔÈ‹ÛÙ Ù∙ ‰ÂÙÈο (E) ÛÙ∙ ÛËÌ›∙
Ô˘ ÚÔÙÈÌ¿Ù ÁÈ∙ Ó∙ ∙ÛÊ∙Ï›ÛÂÙ ∙ÎfiÌË
Î∙χÙÂÚ∙ ÙË ÛÙÂÚ¤̂ÛË ÙÔ˘ ‡Î∙ÌÙÔ˘
Û̂Ï‹Ó∙ (D) ÌÂ ÙÔ Û̂ÛÙfi Ì‹ÎỖ ÛÙÔ
ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙.
45
 Italiano
CERTIFICATO DI GARANZIA
Questa macchina è stata concepita e realizzata attraverso le più
moderne tecniche produttive. La Ditta costruttrice garantisce i propri
prodotti per un periodo di 24 mesi dalla data di acquisto per utilizzo
privato e hobbistico. La garanzia è limitata a 12 mesi in caso di uso
professionale.
Condizioni generali di garanzia
1) La garanzia viene riconosciuta a partire dalla data d'acquisto. La
Ditta costruttrice tramite la rete di vendita ed assistenza tecnica
sostituisce gratuitamente le parti difettose dovute a materiale,
lavorazioni e produzione. La garanzia non toglie all'acquirente i
diritti legali previsti dal codice civile contro le conseguenze dei
difetti o vizi causati dalla cosa venduta.
2) Il personale tecnico interverrà il più presto possibile nei limiti di
tempo concessi da esigenze organizzative.
3) Per richiedere l'assistenza in garanzia è necessario esibire
al personale autorizzato il sotto riportato certificato di
garanzia timbrato dal rivenditore, compilato in tutte le sue
parti e corredato di fattura d'acquisto o scontrino fiscalmente
obbligatorio comprovante la data d'acquisto.
4) La garanzia decade in caso di:
- Assenza palese di manutenzione,
- Utilizzo non corretto del prodotto o manomissioni,
- Utilizzo di lubrificanti o combustibili non adatti,
- Utilizzo di parti di ricambio o accessori non originali,
- Interventi effettuati da personale non autorizzato.
5) La Ditta costruttrice esclude dalla garanzia i materiali di consumo e
le parti soggette ad un normale logorio di funzionamento.
6) La garanzia esclude gli interventi di aggiornamento e miglioramento
del prodotto.
7) La garanzia non copre la messa a punto e gli interventi di
manutenzione che dovessero occorrere durante il periodo di
garanzia.
8) Eventuali danni causati durante il trasporto devono essere
immediatamente segnalati al trasportatore pena il decadere della
garanzia.
9) Per i motori di altre marche (Briggs & Stratton, Tecumseh,
Kawasaki, Honda, ecc.) montati sulle nostre macchine, vale la
garanzia concessa dai costruttori del motore.
10) La garanzia non copre eventuali danni, diretti o indiretti, causati a
persone o cose da guasti della macchina o conseguenti alla forzata
sospensione prolungata nell'uso della stessa.
✂ MODELLO - MODELLE
SERIAL No
ACQUISTATO DAL SIG. - GEKAUFT VON Hrn.
Non spedire! Allegare solo all’eventuale richiesta di garanzia tecnica.
Nicht einsenden! Der Garantieschein muss nur bei einer eventuellen Anforderung eines Garantieeingriffs vorgelegt werden.
46
Deutsch
GARANTIE-ZERTIFICAT
Diese Maschine wurde mit den modernsten Produktionstechniken
konzipiert und gebaut. Der Hersteller garantiert seine Produkte für
einen Zeitraum von 24 Monaten ab dem Kaufdatum bei Privat- und
Heimwerkereinsatz. Bei professionellem Gebrauch ist die Laufzeit der
Garantie auf 12 Monate beschränkt.
Allgemeine Garantiebedingungen
1) Die Garantie gilt ab Kaufdatum. Die Herstellerfirma sorgt
über ihr Verkaufs- und Kundendienstnetz für den kostenlosen
Ersatz der Teile, die sich infolge Material-, Bearbeitungs- und
Fabrikationsfehler als defekt erweisen. Durch die Garantie verliert
der Käufer nicht die vom Bürgerlichen Gesetzbuch vorgesehenen
gesetzlichen Rechte gegen die Folgen der von der der verkauften
Sache verursachten Defekte oder Mängel.
2) Soweit organisatorisch machbar greift das technische Personal so
schnell wie möglich ein.
3) Bei Anforderung eines Garantieeingriffs muss dem befugten
Personal der untenstehende, vom Verkäufer abgestempelte
und vollständig ausgefüllte Garantieschein zusammen mit
der Rechnung bzw. dem Kassenzettel zum Nachweis des
Kaufdatums vorgelegt werden.
4) In folgenden Fällen verfällt jeder Garantieanspruch:
- Bei offensichtlicher Unterlassung der Wartung,
- Bei nicht korrekter Verwendung oder Veränderungen des
Produkts,
- Bei Benutzung von ungeeigneten Schmiermitteln oder
Treibmitteln,
- Bei Benutzung von nicht originalen Zubehör- und Ersatzteilen
- Nach Eingriffen, die von unbefugtem Personal durchgeführt
wurden.
5) Verbrauchsmaterial und die Teile, die einem normalen Verschleiß
durch Betrieb ausgesetzt sind, werden vom Hersteller von der
Garantie ausgeschlossen.
6) Von der Garantie ausgeschlossen sind Eingriffe zur Überholung und
Verbesserung des Produkts.
7) Die Garantie deckt nicht die während der Garantielaufzeit
erforderlichen Einstellungen und Wartungseingriffe.
8) Eventuelle Transportschäden müssen dem Spediteur unverzüglich
gemeldet werden, ansonsten verfällt der Garantieanspruch.
9) Für die Motoren anderer Marken (Briggs & Stratton, Tecumseh,
Kawasaki, Honda, usw.), die an unseren Maschinen installiert
werden, gilt die vom Hersteller des Motors gewährte Garantie.
10) Die Garantie deckt keine eventuellen direkten oder indirekten
Personen- oder Sachschäden, die durch Defekte der Maschine
oder deren anhaltender Nichtbenutzung verursacht wurden.
DATA - DATUM
CONCESSIONARIO - VERKAUFER
✂
Nederlands
GARANTIEBEWIJS
Deze machine is ontworpen en vervaardigd volgens de modernste
productietechnieken. De fabrikant geeft een garantie van 24
maanden vanaf de aankoopdatum op de eigen producten voor
privé-/hobbygebruik. De garantie is beperkt tot 12 maanden bij
professioneel gebruik.
Algemene garantievoorwaarden
1) De garantie wordt toegekend vanaf de aankoopdatum. De fabrikant
vervangt gratis de defecte onderdelen die te wijten zijn aan
fouten van het materiaal, bewerkingen en productie middels het
distributienet en de technische service. De garantie ontneemt
de gebruiker niet de wettelijke rechten uit het burgerlijk wetboek
tegen de gevolgen van defecten of onvolkomenheden die door het
verkochte product veroorzaakt worden.
2) Het technisch personeel grijpt zo snel mogelijk in binnen de
tijdslimieten die uit organisatorisch oogpunt mogelijk zijn.
3) Voor het aanvragen van servicewerkzaamheden die onder
de garantie vallen dient u het hieronder weergegeven
garantiebewijs aan het bevoegde personeel te tonen. Het
garantiebewijs moet een stempel van de verkoper dragen,
geheel ingevuld zijn en begeleid worden door de factuur of de
fiscaal verplichte kassabon met de aankoopdatum.
4) De garantie vervalt bij:
- Overduidelijk gebrek aan onderhoud,
- Onjuist gebruik van het product of sabotage,
- Gebruik van ongeschikte smeermiddelen of brandstoffen,
- Gebruik van niet originele vervangingsonderdelen of accessoires,
- Werkzaamheden die verricht zijn door onbevoegd personeel.
5) De verbruiksmaterialen en de onderdelen die onderhevig zijn aan
normale slijtage vallen niet onder de garantie.
6) Bijwerkingen en verbeteringen van het product vallen niet onder de
garantie.
7) De garantie dekt geen afstel- en onderhoudswerkzaamheden die
tijdens de garantieperiode nodig mochten zijn.
8) Eventuele beschadigingen die tijdens het transport zijn veroorzaakt
moeten onmiddellijk aan de transporteur worden gemeld op straffe
van verval van de garantie.
9) Voor de motoren van andere merken (Briggs & Stratton, Tecumseh,
Kawasaki, Honda, enz.) die op onze machines zijn gemonteerd
geldt de garantie die door de fabrikant van de motor is gegeven.
10) De garantie dekt geen eventuele directe of indirecte beschadigingen
die aan personen of voorwerpen worden aangericht als gevolg van
defecten of langdurige inactiviteit van de machine.
MODEL - MODELE
SERIAL No
GEKOCHT DOOR - ACHETE PAR MONSIEUR
Niet verzenden! Voeg dit bewijs uitsluitend bij het aanvraagformulier om technische garantiewerkzaamheden.
Ne pas expédier ! Ne joindre qu'en cas de demande d'assistance technique sous garantie.
Français
CERTIFICAT DE GARANTIE
Cette machine a été conçue et réalisée avec les techniques de
production les plus modernes. Le fabricant garantit ses produits
pendant une période de 24 mois à compter de la date d’achat,
en cas d’usage privé ou d’activités de bricolage. En cas d’usage
professionnel, la garantie est limitée à 12 mois.
Conditions générales de garantie
1) La garantie est reconnue à compter de la date d'achat. Par le biais
de son réseau de vente et d'assistance technique, le fabricant
remplace gratuitement les pièces défectueuses dues au matériel,
aux usinages et à la production. La garantie n'élimine pas, pour
l'acquéreur, les droits légaux prévus par le Code Civil contre les
conséquences des défauts ou des anomalies dus à l'objet vendu.
2) Le personnel technique interviendra le plus vite possible dans les
délais liés aux exigences organisationnelles.
3) Pour demander l'assistance sous garantie, il est nécessaire
de présenter au personnel agréé le certificat de garantie joint
ci-dessous, qui devra être timbré par le revendeur, rempli
intégralement et accompagné de la facture ou du reçu de
caisse qui doit obligatoirement être remis pour prouver la date
d'achat.
4) La garantie perd toute valeur en cas de :
- Manque évident d'entretien.
- Utilisation incorrecte ou transformations non autorisées du
produit.
- Utilisation de lubrifiants ou de combustibles inappropriés.
- Utilisation de pièces de rechange ou d'accessoires non d'origine.
- Interventions effectuées par du personnel non autorisé à ce faire.
5) Le fabricant exclut de la garantie les pièces consommables et celles
qui sont soumises à une usure normale due au fonctionnement.
6) La garantie exclut les interventions de mise à jour et d'amélioration
du produit.
7) La garantie ne couvre pas la mise au point et les interventions
susceptibles de s'avérer nécessaires au cours de la période de
garantie.
8) Tout dommage éventuellement subi au cours du transport doit être
signalé sans retard au transporteur sous peine d'annulation de la
garantie.
9) Pour les moteurs d'autres marques (Briggs & Stratton, Tecumseh,
Kawasaki, Honda, etc.) montés sur nos machines, la garantie
appliquée sera celle qui est accordée par le fabricant du moteur en
question.
10) La garantie ne couvre pas les éventuels dommages directs ou
indirects subis par les personnes ou par les biens matériels à
la suite de pannes de la machine ou dépendant d'une longue
suspension forcée de l'emploi de cette dernière.
✂
DATUM - DATE
VERKOPER - REVENDEUR
 English
WARRANTY CERTIFICATE
This machine has been designed and manufactured using the most
modern techniques. The manufacturer guarantees its products for 24
months from the date of purchase, for private and hobby use. The
warranty is limited to 12 months in case of professional use.
Limited warranty
1) The warranty period starts on the date of sale. The manufacturer,
acting through the sales and technical assistance network, shall
replace free of charge any parts proven defective in material,
machining or manufacturing. The warranty does not affect the
purchaser's rights as established under legislation governing the
consequences of defects in the machine.
2) Technical personnel will undertake the necessary repairs in the
minimum time possible, compatible with organisational needs.
3) To make any claim under the warranty, this certificate of
warranty, fully compiled, bearing the dealer's stamp, and
accompanied by the invoice or receipt showing the date of
purchase, must be displayed to the personnel authorised to
approve work.
4) The warranty shall be null and void if:
- the machine has evidently not been serviced correctly,
- the machine has been used for improper purposes or has been
modified in any way,
- unsuitable lubricants and fuels have been used,
- non-original spare parts and accessories have been fitted,
- work has been done on the machine by unauthorised personnel.
5) The warranty does not cover consumables or parts subject to
normal wear.
6) The warranty does not cover work to update or improve the
machine.
7) The warranty does not cover any preparation or servicing work
required during the warranty period.
8) Damage incurred during transport must be immediately brought
to the attention of the carrier: failure to do so shall render null and
void the warranty.
9) Engines of other manufacturers (Briggs & Stratton, Tecumseh,
Kawasaki, Honda, etc.) fitted to our machines are covered by the
warranties of the engine manufacturer.
10) The warranty does not cover injury or damage caused directly
or indirectly to persons or things by defects in the machine or by
periods of extended disuse of the machine resulting from the said
defects.
✂ MODEL - MODELO
SERIAL No
BOUGHT BY Mr. - COMPRADOR
Do not send! Only attach to requests for technical warranties.
¡No enviar! Adjuntar sólo a la eventual solicitud de garantía técnica.
Español
CERTIFICADO DE GARANTÍA
Esta máquina ha sido proyectada y fabricada con las técnicas más
modernas. El fabricante garantiza sus productos durante 24 meses
desde la fecha de compra, siempre que el uso sea privado/aficionado.
La garantía se limita a 12 meses en caso de uso profesional.
Condiciones generales de garantía
1) La garantía es válida a partir de la fecha de compra. El Fabricante
cambiará gratuitamente las piezas que presenten defectos en el
material, el trabajo o la producción, mediante su red de venta y
asistencia técnica. La garantía no anula los derechos legales del
comprador, previstos por el código civil, contra las consecuencias
de defectos o vicios provocados por el producto vendido.
2) El personal técnico efectuará las intervenciones lo antes posible y
dentro de los plazos impuestos por exigencias de organización.
3) Para solicitar la asistencia en garantía, es necesario mostrar
el certificado de garantía ilustrado a continuación, junto a
la factura o el tique que demuestren la fecha de compra, al
personal autorizado; asimismo, para que el certificado sea
válido, se han de completar todas sus partes y ha de estar
debidamente timbrado por el vendedor.
4) La garantía pierde su validez en los siguientes casos:
- Falta evidente de mantenimiento.
- Uso incorrecto o manipulación del producto.
- Uso de lubricantes o combustibles inadecuados.
- Uso de piezas de recambio o accesorios no originales.
- Intervenciones efectuadas por parte de personal no autorizado.
5) La garantía no incluye ni los materiales consumibles ni las piezas
sujetas a un desgaste normal de funcionamiento.
6) La garantía tampoco incluye las intervenciones de actualización o
mejora del producto.
7) La puesta a punto o las intervenciones de mantenimiento
eventualmente necesarias durante el periodo de garantía no están
cubiertas por la garantía.
8) Cualquier daño provocado durante el transporte tiene que ser
señalado de inmediato al transportista bajo pena de anulación de
la garantía.
9) Para los motores de otras marcas (Briggs & Stratton, Tecumseh,
Kawasaki, Honda, etc.) montados en nuestras máquinas, será
válida la garantía de los Fabricantes del motor.
10) La garantía no cubre los eventuales daños materiales o personales,
directos o indirectos, provocados por averías de la máquina o
por la interrupción forzada y prolongada del funcionamiento de la
misma.
DATE - DATUM
DEALER - DISTRIBUIDOR
✂
Português
CERTIFICADO DE GARANTIA
Este aparelho foi projectado e fabricado em conformidade com os
critérios mais avançados da tecnologia actual. A empresa fabricante
oferece uma garantia sobre os seus produtos de 24 meses, a partir
da data de aquisição para utilização privada e actividades de tempos
livres. A garantia é limitada a 12 meses no caso de uso profissional.
Condições gerais de garantia
1) A garantia inicia a partir do momento de compra. O fabricante,
mediante a rede de assistência técnica, substituirá gratuitamente
os defeitos causados pela não conformidade do material, processo
de fabrico e produção. A garantia não anula os direitos legais
previstos pelo Código civil contra as consequências derivadas de
defeitos ou vícios do aparelho.
2) O pessoal técnico intervirá o mais rápido possível compativelmente
com as próprias exigências de organização.
3) Para requerer a assistência durante o período de garantia, é
preciso exibir ao pessoal autorizado o certificado de garantia
abaixo ilustrado preenchido plenamente, carimbado pelo
revendedor e a respectiva factura ou recibo, qual comprovante
da data de compra.
4) A garantia decai nos seguintes casos:
- Falta evidente de manutenção;
- Utilização imprópria do produto ou alterações do mesmo;
- Utilização de lubrificantes ou combustíveis impróprios;
- Utilização de sobresselentes ou acessórios não originais;
- Intervenções efectuadas por pessoal não autorizado;
5) O fabricante exclui do período de garantia os materiais de consumo
e os órgãos sujeitos ao desgaste normal derivado da utilização do
aparelho.
6) A garantia exclui as intervenções de actualização e de melhorias
do aparelho.
7) A garantia não inclui pôr em ponto o aparelho bem como as
intervenções de manutenção eventualmente necessárias durante o
período de garantia.
8) Eventuais danos derivados do transporte devem ser assinalados
imediatamente ao transportador; a inobservância, acarreta no
decaimento da garantia.
9) Para os motores de outras marcas (Briggs & Stratton, Tecumseh,
Kawasaki, Honda, etc.) montados nos nossos aparelhos, vale a
garantia conferida pelos respectivos fabricantes.
10) A garantia não inclui eventuais danos, directos ou indirectos
causados a pessoas ou bens materiais derivados da inutilização da
máquina por ruptura ou da suspensão obrigada da sua utilização.
MODELO - MONTE§O
SERIAL No
¢IA¢OXIKO™
API£MO™
COMPRADOR - A°OPA™MENO A¶O TON KYPIO
Não enviar! Anexe apenas em caso de pedido de assistência técnica.
ªËÓ ÙÔ ÛÙ›ÏÂÙÂ! ∂ÈÛ˘Ó¿ÙÂÙ∙È ÌfiÓÔ Û ÂÚ›Ù̂ÛË ∙›ÙËÛË̃ ÙÂˉÓÈ΋̃ ÂÁÁ‡ËÛË̃.
Ελληνικα
¶π™∆√¶√π∏∆π∫√ ∂°°À∏™∏™
∞˘Ùfi ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ ¤ˉÂÈ Ûˉ‰È∙ÛÙ› Î∙È Î∙Ù∙Û΢∙ÛÙ› Ì ÙÈ̃ ÈÔ
ÌÔÓÙ¤ÚÓẪ ÙÂˉÓÈΤ̃ ∙Ú∙Á̂Á‹̃. Η κατασκευάστρια Εταιρία εγγυάται για
τα προϊόντα της για μια περίοδο 24 μηνών από την ημερομηνία αγοράς, για
ιδιωτική και ερασιτεχνική χρήση. Η εγγύηση περιορίζεται στους 12 μήνες
στην περίπτωση επαγγελματικής χρήσης.
°ÂÓÈÎÔ› fiÚÔÈ ÙË̃ ÂÁÁ‡ËÛË̃
1) ∏ ÈÛˉ‡̃ ÙË̃ ÂÁÁ‡ËÛË̃ ∙Úˉ›˙ÂÈ ∙fi ÙËÓ ËÌÂÚÔÌËÓ›∙ ∙ÁÔÚ¿̃.
√ ∫∙Ù∙Û΢∙ÛÙ‹̃ ̤Û̂ ÙÔ˘ ‰ÈÎÙ‡Ô˘ ÒÏËÛË̃ Î∙È ÙÂˉÓÈ΋̃
Â͢ËÚ¤ÙËÛË̃ ∙ÓÙÈÎ∙ıÈÛÙ¿ ‰̂ÚÂ¿Ó Ù∙ ÂÏ∙ÙÙ̂Ì∙ÙÈο ÂÍ∙ÚÙ‹Ì∙Ù∙
Ô˘ ÔÊ›ÏÔÓÙ∙È Û ˘ÏÈÎfi, ÂÂÍÂÚÁ∙Û›∙ Î∙È ∙Ú∙Á̂Á‹. ∏
ÂÁÁ‡ËÛË ‰ÂÓ ÛÙÂÚ› ÛÙÔÓ ∙ÁÔÚ∙ÛÙ‹ Ù∙ ÓÔÌÈο ‰ÈÎ∙ÈÒÌ∙Ù∙ Ô˘
ÚԂϤÔÓÙ∙È ∙fi ÙÔÓ ∙ÛÙÈÎfi ÎÒ‰ÈÎ∙ fiÛÔÓ ∙ÊÔÚ¿ ÙÈ̃ ÂÈÙÒÛÂÈ̃
Ù̂Ó ∙ÙÂÏÂÈÒÓ ‹ Ù̂Ó ÂÏ∙ÙÙ̂Ì¿Ù̂Ó Ô˘ ÚÔÎÏ‹ıËÎ∙Ó ∙fi ÙÔ
∙ÁÔÚ∙Ṳ̂ÓÔ ÚÔ˚fiÓ.
2) ∆Ô ÙÂˉÓÈÎfi ÚÔÛ̂ÈÎfi ı∙ Â¤Ì‚ÂÈ ÙÔ Û˘ÓÙÔÌfiÙÂÚÔ ‰˘Ó∙Ùfi ̤Û∙
ÛÙ∙ ˉÚÔÓÈο fiÚÈ∙ Ô˘ ÂÈÙÚ¤Ô˘Ó ÔÈ ÔÚÁ∙Ó̂ÙÈΤ̃ ∙∙ÈÙ‹ÛÂÈ̃.
3) °È∙ ÙÂˉÓÈ΋ ˘ÔÛÙ‹ÚÈÍË Î∙Ù¿ ÙËÓ ÂÚ›Ô‰Ô ÂÁÁ‡ËÛË̃ ›Ó∙È
∙∙Ú∙›ÙËÙÔ Ó∙ Âȉ›ÍÂÙ ÛÙÔ ÂÍÔ˘ÛÈÔ‰ÔÙË̤ÓÔ ÚÔÛ̂ÈÎfi
ÙÔ ∙Ú∙οÙ̂ ÈÛÙÔÔÈËÙÈÎfi ÂÁÁ‡ËÛË̃ ÛÊÚ∙ÁÈṲ̂ÓÔ ∙fi ÙÔ
Î∙Ù¿ÛÙËÌ∙ ÒÏËÛË̃, Ï‹Ú̂̃ Û˘ÌÏËṲ́̂ÓÔ Î∙È Ô˘
Û˘Óԉ‡ÂÙ∙È ∙fi ÙÈÌÔÏfiÁÈÔ ∙ÁÔÚ¿̃ ‹ ÓfiÌÈÌË ∙fi‰ÂÈÍË Ô˘ Ó∙
∙Ô‰ÂÈÎÓ‡ÂÈ ÙËÓ ËÌÂÚÔÌËÓ›∙ ∙ÁÔÚ¿̃.
4) ∏ ÂÁÁ‡ËÛË ∙‡ÂÈ Ó∙ ÈÛˉ‡ÂÈ Û ÂÚ›Ù̂ÛË:
- ∂ÌÊ∙ÓÔ‡̃ ∙Ô˘Û›∙̃ Û˘ÓÙ‹ÚËÛË̃,
- §∙Óı∙Ṳ̂ÓË̃ ˉÚ‹ÛË̃ ÙÔ˘ ÚÔ˚fiÓÙỖ ‹ ÂÂÌ‚¿ÛÂ̂Ó,
- ∞Î∙Ù¿ÏÏËÏ̂Ó ÏÈ∙ÓÙÈÎÒÓ ‹ Î∙˘Û›ÌÔ˘,
- ÃÚ‹ÛË̃ ÌË ÁÓ‹ÛÈ̂Ó ∙ÓÙ∙ÏÏ∙ÎÙÈÎÒÓ ‹ ∙ÍÂÛÔ˘¿Ú,
- ∂ÂÌ‚¿ÛÂ̂Ó Ô˘ ¤ÁÈÓ∙Ó ∙fi ÌË ÂÍÔ˘ÛÈÔ‰ÔÙË̤ÓÔ ÚÔÛ̂ÈÎfi.
5) √ ∫∙Ù∙Û΢∙ÛÙ‹̃ ‰ÂÓ Î∙χÙÂÈ Ì ÙËÓ ÂÁÁ‡ËÛË Ù∙ ∙Ó∙ÏÒÛÈÌ∙
˘ÏÈο Î∙È Ù∙ ÂÍ∙ÚÙ‹Ì∙Ù∙ Ô˘ ˘fiÎÂÈÓÙ∙È Ê˘ÛÈÔÏÔÁÈ΋ ÊıÔÚ¿ Î∙Ù¿
ÙË ÏÂÈÙÔ˘ÚÁ›∙.
6) ∏ ÂÁÁ‡ËÛË ∙ÔÎÏ›ÂÈ ÙÈ̃ ÂÂÌ‚¿ÛÂÈ̃ ÂÓË̤Ú̂ÛË̃ Î∙È ‚ÂÏÙ›̂ÛË̃
ÙÔ˘ ÚÔ˚fiÓÙỖ.
7) ∏ ÂÁÁ‡ËÛË ‰ÂÓ Î∙χÙÂÈ ÙË Ú‡ıÌÈÛË Î∙È ÙÈ̃ ÂÂÌ‚¿ÛÂÈ̃
Û˘ÓÙ‹ÚËÛË̃ Ô˘ ÌÔÚ› Ó∙ Ï¿‚Ô˘Ó ˉÒÚ∙ Î∙Ù¿ ÙËÓ ÂÚ›Ô‰Ô
ÂÁÁ‡ËÛË̃.
8) ∂Ó‰ÂˉfiÌÂÓẪ ˙ËÌȤ̃ Ô˘ ÚÔÎÏ‹ıËÎ∙Ó Î∙Ù¿ ÙË ÌÂÙ∙ÊÔÚ¿ Ú¤ÂÈ
Ó∙ ∙Ó∙ÊÂÚıÔ‡Ó ∙̤Û̂̃ ÛÙÔ ÌÂÙ∙ÊÔÚ¤∙ ‰È∙ÊÔÚÂÙÈο ∙‡ÂÈ Ë
ÈÛˉ‡̃ ÙË̃ ÂÁÁ‡ËÛË̃.
9) °È∙ ÙÔ˘̃ ÎÈÓËÙ‹ÚẪ ¿ÏÏ̂Ó Î∙Ù∙Û΢∙ÛÙÒÓ (Briggs & Stratton,
Tecumseh, Kawasaki, Honda, ÎÏ.) Ô˘ ›Ó∙È ÂÁÎ∙ÙÂÛÙË̤ÓÔÈ
ÛÙ∙ ÌËˉ∙Ó‹Ì∙Ù¿ Ì∙̃, ÈÛˉ‡ÂÈ Ë ÂÁÁ‡ËÛË Ô˘ ˉÔÚËÁ›Ù∙È ∙fi ÙÔÓ
Î∙Ù∙Û΢∙ÛÙ‹ ÙÔ˘ ÎÈÓËÙ‹Ú∙.
10) ∏ ÂÁÁ‡ËÛË ‰ÂÓ Î∙χÙÂÈ ÂÓ‰ÂˉfiÌÂÓẪ ˙ËÌȤ̃, ¿ÌÂÛẪ ‹ ¤ÌÌÂÛẪ,
Ô˘ ı∙ ÚÔÎÏËıÔ‡Ó Û ¿ÙÔÌ∙ ‹ ∙ÓÙÈΛÌÂÓ∙ ∙fi ‚Ï¿‚Ẫ ÙÔ˘
ÌËˉ∙Ó‹Ì∙ÙỖ ‹ ∙Ú∙ÙÂÙ∙̤ÓË ÂÍ∙Ó∙ÁÎ∙Ṳ̂ÓË ‰È∙ÎÔ‹ ÛÙË ˉÚ‹ÛË
∙˘ÙÔ‡.
✂
DATA - HMEPOMHNIA
DISTRIBUIDOR - KATA™THMA ¶ø§H™H™
47
 I ATTENZIONE! – Questo manuale deve accompagnare la macchina durante tutta la sua vita.
D ACHTUNG! - Dieses Anweisungsheft muß das Gerät während seiner gesamten Lebensdauer begleiten.
NL LET OP! - Dit handboek moet voor de gehele levensduur bij de machine blijven.
F ATTENTION! – Le manuel doit accompagner la machine pour toute sa vie.
GB WARNING! – This owner’s manual must stay with the machine for all its life.
E ¡ATENCIÓN! - Este manual debe acompañar a la máquina durante toda su vida útil.
P ATENÇÃO! - Este manual deve acompanhar a máquina durante toda a sua vida útil.
GR ¶ƒ√™√Ã∏! - ∆Ô ∙ÚfiÓ ÂÁˉÂÈÚ›‰ÈÔ Ú¤ÂÈ Ó∙ Û˘Óԉ‡ÂÈ ÙÔ ÌËˉ¿ÓËÌ∙ Î∙ı'fiÏË ÙË ‰È¿ÚÎÂÈ∙ ˙̂‹̃ ÙÔ˘.
RUS ВНИМAНИЕ! – Нaстoящaя инструкция дoлжнa сoпрoвoждaть издeлиe вo врeмя всeгo срoкa eгo службы.
PL UWAGA! - Niniejsza instrukcja powinna towarzyszyć urządzeniu przez cały okres jego eksploatacji.
中文 警告! - 此手册在机器使用寿命期间必须始终伴随此机器。
SLO POZOR! – Ta lastnikov priročnik se mora hraniti ob stroju celotno obdobje njegove uporabe.

EMAK s.p.a. - Member of the YAMA group

42011 BAGNOLO IN PIANO (REGGIO EMILIA) ITALY
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series

INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS

&

PRODUCT INFORMATION

for

World Series SINGLE PRESSURE PUMPS

Hale Products Europe LTD

Charles Street
Warwick
CV34 5LR

Tel: +44 (0)1926 623600

Fax: +44 (0)1926 623666
Admin_haleuk@idexcorp.com
www.haleeurope.com

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
1
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
INDEX

SECTION PAGE

Introduction and Installation Drawing 3

Features of the World Series SINGLE PRESSURE pump range 4
Specification Numbering System 5
Conventions 6
Options Manual 6
Pump Performance Curves 6

Installation Recommendations & Product Information: -

1. Thermal Relief Valve 7

2. Priming 8
3. Pump Draining 10
4. Suction Connections 10
5. Suction Sideline Connection 11
6. Low Pressure Discharge Connections 11
7. Pressure Gauge Connections 12
8. Filter 12
9. Mounting 12
10. Noise & Vibration 12
11. Instrument Panel 12
12. Anti-Clockwise Rotation 13
13. Pump Speed Sensor 13
14. Bearing Housing Oil Level 13
15. Drive Flange 14
16. Seal Gland Assembly 14
17. Round-the-Pump Foam System 14
18.Proportional Foam System Option 15
19.Compressed Air Foam System (CAFS) Option 15
20.Vehicle Design Considerations for CAFS 50 Installations 18
21.Gearbox Option 20
22.Engine Mounted Close Coupled Version 20
23.Pump Drives Lines 20
24.Heated Pump Option 21
25.Special Tools 21
26.Servicing 21
27 Primer Disengaging Arrangements for Pumps 23
- without Manifolds and gearboxes
- without Manifolds but with gearboxes

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
2
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
Introduction
The World Series range of single pressure pumps is a wholly new pump
using the specialist knowledge and experience of the GODIVA Fire Pump
design department. It combines the practical aspects of the previous GV
range with innovative features that offer greatly enhanced levels of
performance and serviceability.

World Series is the result of an extensive survey of customers. Wherever

possible features have been included which reflect customers’ requirements.
To this extent our customers have helped to design the new range of twin
pressure pumps which will eventually completely supersede the older GV
range.

The new pump range has been designed with anticipated CEN regulations in
mind and as such a new pump designation system has been devised. This is
explained on page 5.

AMENDMENT RECORD
Model: World Series Single Pressure Pump
Mod Date Page/s Amendment New Issue
No. No.
1 June 21 Delete reference to piston Issue June 2008
2008 primers located in gearbox

Safety
Training
It is essential that Godiva pumps are operated ONLY by trained personnel.

Maintenance
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the equipment is maintained
in a safe operational condition, as per regulation 5 in the Provision and Use
of Work Equipment Regulations 1998.

Pump
• Rotating components must be adequately guarded against accidental contact.
• Under no circumstances must any item or hand be inserted into the suction tube whilst
the unit is running.
• Discharge hoses must not be disconnected whilst they are pressurised.
• No component must be unfastened whilst the unit is running.
• When installing or removing the pump from the chassis, suitable lifting equipment must
be used.

Noise
When the unit is running, noise will be generated and suitable ear protection should be worn.

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
3
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
Installation Drawing
Installation Drawing 60293 shows a typical World Series assembly for a
2000l/min pump fitted with 2 valves and a 4” round thread suction.
It is the responsibility of the installer to request HALE drawings that more
accurately relate to the model required.

The options manual from HALE shows many of the configurations available
and defines the position in space of each feature. This manual is updated
periodically as new variants become available.

Features of the new World Series SINGLE PRESSURE pump

range

• Reverse rotation version of single pressure pumps available for

the first time.
• Shorter and more compact pump assembly.
• Thermal relief valve fitted as an option.
• New high-lift automatic piston primers as standard.
• Automatic friction drive Water Ring Primer available as an option.
• Automatic V-belt driven Water Ring Primer available with Electro-
magnetic Clutch as an option.
• Simpler construction with fewer components than GV units.
• Removal of sealing gland without removing volute or discharge
pipework.
• Electronic speed sensor as standard.
• Simpler shaft and bearing assembly.
• Large size angular contact bearings to control axial shaft
movement.
• More discharge options available.
• Majority of sealing by ‘O’ rings instead of gaskets.
• New improved sealing gland assembly of carbon and silicon
carbide.
• Increased dry running capability.
• Fitted instrument panel option available in year 2000.
• Fitted gearbox with various ratios and drive input positions
available
• SAE2 close-coupled engine mounted version complete with
gearbox & E-mag clutch, for airfield crash tenders.

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
4
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series

Specification Numbering System

Standard Pump Range

Example:

WSA2010/3xx
Numerical Variant

Priming System: -
0 - No Priming System
1 - Friction Drive WRP
2 - E-Magnetic Clutch WRP
3 - Piston Primers (Standard)

Nominal Pressure in Bars

Nominal Flow in l/min/100

Pump Material
A - Aluminium
B - Bronze

Pump Type: -
T - Twin Pressure
S - Single Pressure

World Series

Special Versions

Example:
©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
5
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
WSA2010CG/3xx
Gearbox (if fitted)

Counter Clockwise Rotation (if applicable)

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
6
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
Conventions

Rotation - When viewed from the drive flange end of the pump and
refers to the direction of rotation of the drive flange only.
From the point of view of specifying rotation it is
irrelevant which way round the impeller rotates.
NB! When a gearbox is fitted the pump rotates in the
opposite direction to the drive flange.

Front - Suction end of the pump.

Rear - Drive flange end of the pump.

LH or RH - When viewed from the front or suction end of the pump.

Options Manual

An Options Manual is available from Hale Products Europe, which provides

details of all commonly available options for the World Series pump, including
dimensional details which allow each option to be located in space for
installation purposes.

The Options Manual will be periodically updated as necessary when new

options become available and supplied free of charge to OEMs in CD format.
The Options Manual is also available in ring binder format at a charge of £50
per copy.

Please contact the Marketing Department of Hale Products Europe to obtain

a copy.

Pump Performance Curves

Performance curves for all the World Series pumps are available upon
request from the Marketing Department of Hale Products Europe.

The models of single pressure pump currently available and for which curves
are available are: -
WS2010, WS3010, WS4010, WS6010

A separate report ‘Understanding Pump Performance Curves’, which

explains how to interpret the pump performance curves, is also available
upon request.

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
7
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS & INFORMATION
1. Thermal Relief Valve

Every World Series WS pump is available with an optional Thermal Relief

Valve (TRV), which is located on top of the optional central manifold above
the volute discharge point. It is very important that the discharge from this
valve is piped away from the pump correctly.

The TRV is designed to protect the pump and pump operators in

circumstances when the pump is running and the pump discharges have
been closed down. In this situation energy put into the pump is converted
into heat causing the pump contents to heat up rapidly. When the pump
water reaches a temperature of 42°C the TRV will start to open and will begin
to discharge water at about 48°C. The discharge of hot water from the pump
will allow cold water to enter, via the suction tube, thereby stabilising the
overall temperature of the pump water.

There is an alternative version of TRV available rated at 74°C, which will start
to discharge water at about 60oC. This version should only be used when
there is a good operational reason since the water being discharged, and the
pump, will be at a temperature capable of causing injury. However since
temperature difference between the water entering the pump and that being
discharged is higher, the volume of water discharged will be correspondingly
less. The higher temperature TRV may be necessary when the pump is to be
used in very high ambient temperature countries. Here the static pump itself
may be at a temperature higher than 48°C that may result in the TRV being
permanently open, causing priming problems.

Water discharged from the TRV should ideally be piped back to the top of the
vehicle tank and the line fitted with a drain valve to prevent the line freezing
in winter. However, this can only be done if no foam passes through the
pump. When a foam system is fitted, discharge must not be to tank and could
be piped directly to ground. An alternative that could be considered is to pipe
the discharge to a holding tank for later disposal at base.

The TRV terminates with an elbow to accept a 12mm (1/2in) bore flexible
hose. The discharge from the flexible hose should be led to a safe position
away from any operator. The TRV must not be fitted with a plug and must
not be operated without a discharge line. Discharge from the TRV must not
be returned to the pump suction since the purpose of the TRV is to remove
heat from the whole pump. The TRV will discharge approximately 40 l/min
when fitted with a 10mm bore discharge line. In some circumstances a lower
discharge rate will be adequate to keep the unit cool and the discharge
connector, fitted by the installer, may then be used as a restrictor. The bore
and length of the discharge line will determine the flow rate and the installer
must determine an installation that will produce an adequate flow rate to
prevent the unit from overheating in his application. It is recommended that a
discharge line of not less than 3/8” diameter is used.
©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
8
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
2. Priming

The World Series pump can provide a variety of priming options namely:

A. The pump can be supplied with no priming system if required. The

piston primer mounting holes are then blanked off but it still would be
possible to retrofit a priming system at a later date if required.

B. Piston Primers

Piston primers are fitted as standard on the World Series pumps and
discharge from the primers must be piped safely away. There are
several ways that the primer discharge can be treated: -

1. The simplest method is to connect a 1” (25mm) bore flexible

hose to each primer outlet and allow the discharge to go to
ground, under the vehicle and safely away from any personnel.

2. If a foam system is NOT connected to the pump the primer

discharge may be returned to the top of the vehicle tank.
However, the discharge lines of 1” (25mm) minimum bore
should then be fitted with drain valves at the lowest point to
prevent freezing in winter.

3. The primer discharge may be piped to a holding tank for later

disposal at base or re-circulated back to the pump suction
through an appropriate valve system.

Each primer will discharge approximately 1 litre every time the pump is
required to prime.

During priming the piston primers will emit a characteristic ‘popping’

noise which may be unfamiliar to some operators. However, this is
entirely normal.

Unlike a water ring primer system the piston primers will operate
satisfactorily at engine idling speed – it just takes slightly longer to
prime. The piston primers should not be run at speeds in excess of
2500RPM.

Please note that the piston primer system is fully automatic in

operation, requires no maintenance and that a manually operated
version is not available.

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
9
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
IMPORTANT
When piston primers are fitted the minimum idle speed of the pump
should be at least 1200RPM. This speed will allow the pump, when
primed with valves closed, to generate sufficient pressure to disengage
the primers. Idle speeds lower than this will cause the primers to work
continuously resulting in excessive load and wear on the piston primer
components. Failures due to insufficient idle speed may not be
covered by warranty.

When pumping with valves open, the operating pressure, should not be
allowed to fall below 2 bar which is the minimum pressure required to keep
the primers disengaged. Pumping at a pressure below 2 bar will result in
excessive load and wear on the primers.

A correctly installed pump should have sufficient free space around each
piston primer to allow the primer assemblies to be removed in situ without
dismantling the tank to suction line or any other equipment. Recommended
clearances for primer removal are shown in the World Series WS Option
Manual, which is available upon request from Hale Products Europe in
Warwick.

Failure to allow insufficient operating space to remove the primers may

significantly increase service/repair time.

Pumps supplied after Nov 2002 (from serial number 9000) will be fitted with
one-piece pistons in the primers. If the primers need to be removed for any
reason it is strongly recommended that the pistons be upgraded to the new
design at the same time.

Primer disengaging - for WS pumps supplied without factory-fitted manifolds

follow the instructions given on page 23 (ref DS599, DS600) to install the
correct disengaging mechanism.

C. Water Ring Primer

A water ring primer, which is fully automatic in operation, can be

supplied as an option. This is mounted over the bearing housing and
is driven by a friction pulley. A header tank is normally supplied by the
installer and installation recommendations can be provided if required.
In cold climates it is important that the header tank is periodically
checked and that the correct anti-freeze concentration is maintained
since the header tank water will become slightly diluted every time the
pump primes.

A fully manually operated version of the friction drive water ring primer
is not currently available.

Currently this option is only available with clockwise rotating pumps.

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
10
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
D. Water Ring Primer with Electro-Magnetic Clutch

A water ring primer fitted with an electo-magnetic clutch can be

supplied which may be particularly useful to those customers who
require the equivalent of a manually operated primer.

This priming system can be operated either automatically through a

pressure switch mounted on the pump or manually by means of a
switch on the instrument panel.

Currently this option is only available with anti-clockwise rotating

pumps.

3. Pump Draining

The pump volute is fitted with a screwed plug and it is highly recommended
that this is removed and the volute fitted with a drain valve system
terminating with a ball valve at a convenient location on the vehicle.

Only one pump drain point is required.

In order to completely drain the piston priming system the pump should be
idled for a few seconds after use with no water in the volute and the drain
valve open. This ‘dry prime’ will then evacuate all residual water from the
priming system.

It is not recommended that the pump be retained full of water since this could
result in freezing in cold climates.

4. Suction Connections

Various suction connections can be supplied including 4” & 5½” Round

Thread, BSP, Butterfly Valve, Storz, DIN flange, DIN flange & Ball Valve etc.
When a suction tube is not required to be supplied then any required gauge,
priming, foam or sideline connection etc. must be provided by the installer.

Suction tubes manufactured by the installer must have the priming

connection at the highest point of the suction tube, as near to the impeller as
practicable. The priming pipe should rise gradually from the suction tube to
primer connection to aid drainage, or be provisioned with a drain to prevent
damage through freezing. The shape and size of the suction tube can have a
considerable effect on pumping performance, and Hale Products Europe
technical department would be pleased to advise on any proposed designs.

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
11
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
5. Suction Sideline Connection

When a tank to suction line is fitted, normally Ø100mm, it is very important

that this line contains a flexible connection such as a Victaulic coupling. If
the pump is hard connected to the tank any inevitable flexing of the vehicle
chassis will put unnecessary strain on the pump and tank, possibly resulting
in failure of pump or tank. Damage caused to the pump due to faulty
installation is not covered by the normal pump warranty.

When designing a tank to pump connection line, adequate space must be

allowed for removal of the piston primer components during service. The
World Series WS Options Manual will specify the minimum removal space
envelope that must be allowed for by the vehicle builder, particularly for the
piston primers, and this space should remain clear of all fixed components.

6. Low Pressure Discharge Connections

The World Series pump is fitted with a manifold normally having six outlet
flanges, two forwards facing, two rear facing and two side facing. When four
valves are required the side facing outlets are fitted with suitable outrigger
elbows. It is possible to purchase a World Series single pressure pump
without a flanged outlet manifold.

A variety of discharge connections are available, which are generally shown

in the World Series WS Options Manual. Other variations may be available
upon request. Two rear facing flanges are supplied as standard (except
when a Water Ring Primer is specified) and may be used for monitor
connections or for connecting remote valves etc.

Two, three or four valves may be fitted as standard and these valves may be
UK style, continental style, ball valve, or dual flow type. When three valves
are fitted the customer should specify whether the third valve is to be fitted on
RHS or LHS of the unit. It is not an option, with the World Series WS range
of pumps, to have a central third valve. The pump can also be supplied
without valves if required.

An option not available on previous units is two side-facing continental

valves, that are mounted horizontally one above the other, on each side of
the pump. This arrangement has been designed to suit vehicles with
discharge connections at the side of the vehicle.

Most valves can be supplied with quick opening crank handles instead of
hand-wheels.

Ball valves can be supplied with handles located on either side dependent on
the installation requirements. Details can be found in the World Series WS
Options Manual.
©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
12
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
7. Pressure Gauge Connections

Gauge connections and tubing to suction tube and the LP connection on the
central manifold must have a minimum working pressure rating of 19 bar.

8. Filter

The World Series single pressure pump is fitted with one filter and access,
from the front of the unit, must be provided at all times for cleaning.

The filter provides filtered water to the inside of the piston primers to lift them
out of engagement when the pump is primed. This filter should also be
removed at regular intervals for cleaning.

9. Mounting

The pump must be securely fastened onto an adequate cross-member using

four M16 high-tensile bolts. Since the pump is naturally front heavy it must
be adequately supported whilst the bolts are being fastened or unfastened.
All mounting fasteners should be fitted with locking devices.

10. Noise & Vibration

Since all pumps generate noise it is highly desirable, if possible, to provide

some flexibility between pump and chassis. This will help prevent noise and
vibration passing to the vehicle structure which, in some installations, can
then act as a loudspeaker.

Anything that can be done by the vehicle builder to suppress the noise level,
such as flexible mounting, enclosing the pump, using sound deadening
panelling etc will improve the overall acceptability to the end user.

N.B. If anti-vibration mounts are inserted between the pump and its
supporting structure, the mounts MUST NOT rely on an adhesive bond for
their integrity, but should have a through-bolt fastening. If the A-V mount fails,
the through-bolt fastening will ensure that the pump cannot become detached
from its supporting structure. The mounting arrangement should be
sufficiently strong to resist the maximum torque applied to the pump through
the drive shaft.

11. Instrument Panel

The multi-way manifold option on top of the pump has been designed so that
an instrument panel can be sandwiched between the manifold and valves.
©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
13
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
Both manifold and valves have provision for ‘O’ ring type sealing against a
panel.

The World Series WS single pressure pump can be supplied complete with
instrument panel with all gauges connected to the pump. The usual pump
gauges, low pressure and suction compound pressure are provided complete
with combined tachometer/hours gauge engine warning lights and blanked
holes are provided for customer use.

With agreement, bespoke versions of this panel may also be available. The
Hale Products Europe sales team is able to advise on this.

12. Anti-Clockwise Rotation

The World Series WS pump has been designed from the beginning to
provide an optional anti-clockwise version. The overall design is such that
both directions of rotation make use of the maximum number of common
components in order to keep inventory low.

The positions of the discharge valves, suction tube and high-pressure

selector valve are identical for both directions of rotation.

Kits of parts are available which will allow the customer to reverse the
direction of rotation from the standard clockwise rotation to anti-clockwise
rotation.

NB! Direction of rotation is always defined as the direction of rotation of the

pump drive flange when viewed from the drive line end.

13. Pump Speed Sensor

Each World Series WS pump is fitted with an electronic speed sensor. This
sensor is mounted close to the pump drive flange and senses interruptions to
a magnetic field caused by two holes drilled into the drive flange. Hence any
tachometer fitted must be able to interpret a signal frequency of 2 x Pump
Speed. A suitable tachometer with integrated hours run counter is available
from Hale Products Europe (Part No. 60305).

There is no mechanical tachometer drive connection provided with any World

Series WS pumps.

14. Bearing Housing Oil Level

The bearing housing is provided with a combined oil filler/breather/level

indicator and a rear facing drain plug.
©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
14
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
When a gearbox is fitted the oil drain is directly underneath the bearing
housing and a suitable extension, dependent on vehicle installation may
need to be provided to allow suitable access for the customer.

Oil levels should only be checked when the vehicle is stationary and level.
After use the unit should be allowed to stand for a few minutes to allow oil to
drain back into the sump before checking the level.

Oil grade 10W/40 or 15W/40 is recommended for the bearing housing. The
oil should be changed every 12 months.

15. Drive Flange

The World Series WS pump can be supplied fitted with any of the standard
drive flanges available on previous pumps i.e. SAE1410, 1510 Etc & Din100,
120/8 Etc.

Special versions of these drive flanges are available where there is need to
drive a Water Ring Primer either by friction drive or by belt through an
electro-magnetic clutch.

16. Seal Gland Assembly

A completely new design of seal gland assembly has been produced for the
World Series range of pumps.

The rotating portion of the seal is made from silicon carbide in a viton cup
supported in the rear of the impeller.

The stationary portion of the seal is carbon supported in a ‘floating’ stainless

steel housing, with the whole stationary assembly being retained as a
cartridge. The energising spring is on the dry side of the seal and so is not
subject to being contaminated by water borne deposits.

The combination of carbon and silicon carbide has been chosen to give a
combination of reliability, long life, abrasion resistance and excellent dry-
running capability.

17. Round-the-Pump Foam System

The World Series WS pumps can be supplied with a ‘Round-the-Pump’

(RTP) system, which is capable of inducing up to 120 l/min of foam
compound into the pump suction tube.

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
15
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
The RTP system is suitable for all commercially available Protein,
Fluorocarbon and Aqueous Film-Forming Foam (AFFF) compounds.

An infinitely variable control knob controls the induction rate with calibrated
incremental markings from 0 to 120 l/min. This is a purely manual system,
which allows the operator full control of the water/foam mix ratio.

The RTP system is bolted to the pump suction tube and driving water is
piped from the low-pressure manifold system through a venturi, thereby
creating a vacuum, which draws the foam compound from its tank. The foam
can be supplied directly from the vehicle onboard foam tank or from a free
standing tank.

18. Proportional Foam System Option

Every World Series pump can now be fitted with a proportional foam
induction system for low pressure water. This system will allow a fixed
percentage of foam to be inducted at a rate dependent on the volume of
water being discharged, up to 4000l/min.

There are two separate foam input feeds to the system each supplying 3%
and both can be used together to provide a 6% solution. An optional third
feed can also be supplied to provide a 1% class A foam solution.

The three foam feed lines to the system will be provided by the vehicle
builder complete with control valves and a flushing connection for each foam
feed. It is envisaged that the control valves and flushing system will be
electrically operated from the control panel. Non-return valves are fitted to
the foam inlets, which prevent the possibility of water being back feed into the
foam tanks when there is a pressurised suction. The 3% feeds are each 1”
BSP and the 1% line is ¾” BSP. The lines from foam tank to proportioner
should not be restricted since this will have an adverse effect on the
metering.

The three (or two) foam outlet lines from the proportioning system are
connected to a new RTP induction system on the pump suction tube via hard
piping.

The foam proportioning system can be supplied on both clockwise and anti-
clockwise rotating pumps. It can also be fitted to pumps together with CAFS.

19. Compressed Air Foam System (CAFS) Option

Every standard clockwise rotating World Series WS pump can now be fitted
with the new integrated compressed air foam system (CAFS). This option is
not available with any counter clockwise rotating pump version and is only
available with a piston priming system; i.e. a water ring priming system option
is not available.

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
16
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
When CAFS is fitted, the pump will automatically be supplied with a gearbox.
This reverses the direction of rotation of the pump to give a suitable direction
of rotation of the compressor. The various options regarding gearbox ratios
and available orientations are discussed in section 21.

Water is diverted from the low-pressure manifold and fed, via a non-return
valve, into a venturi assembly where a measured amount of foam is injected
dependent on water flow though the venturi. This foam compound is then fed
to an air control valve at which dry or wet foam can be selected.
Compressed air, provided by a pump-mounted compressor, is then injected
and the resulting foam/water/air combination is thoroughly mixed before
being fed to a discharge flange.

Various safety interlocks are provided:

1. Air cannot be injected if there is no foam being injected. This

prevents ‘slugging’ in the discharge line caused by the air and
water, which cannot mix.

2. Air cannot be injected if there is no water flowing. This avoids the

possibility of having the discharge line filled with only compressed
air.

3. Even if, for some reason, there is no foam or compressed air

available it is still possible to use water alone in the foam discharge
line.

4. A low level switch in the foam tank will stop air injection when the
tank is empty to prevent ‘slugging’.

5. If the compressor lubricating oil reaches 100°C, a warning light will

illuminate on the control panel, and if it should reach 105°C the
electromagnetic clutch will disengage the compressor drive.

The air compressor is belt driven and switched on and off by means of an
electromagnetic clutch mounted on the end of the pump shaft and is fitted
with an automotive style air cleaner. The compressor is a screw type with
the oil cooled by means of a ‘shell & tube’ type oil cooler from water diverted
from the main pump.

A pneumatically operated ball valve, operated by a manual switch, controls

the foam quality i.e. wet or dry. A measured amount of water is allowed to
by-pass the ball valve for the dry foam condition with the ball valve being fully
open for the wet condition.

A warning light is provided for ‘hot compressor oil’ and a foam tank level
gauge can be fitted to the instrument panel (if fitted). The appropriate foam
level sender is supplied with the gauge. The foam tank must be fitted with a
low level switch to provide a signal for the interlock control. The foam tank to

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
17
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
pump line must be fitted with an isolating valve (½” full bore) to allow the
foam filter to be serviced.

Isolating valves on the foam discharge lines are to be provided by the vehicle
builder. Any valves connected to the CAFS discharge line must have a clear
through bore i.e. ball valves. Gate valves and/or fog guns etc will destroy the
quality of foam produced.

Experience has shown that a 38mm bore hose connected to a 25mm plain
bore nozzle will give the best quality of foam.

The integral pump/CAFS 50 unit is capable of delivering wet foam to 3

discharge lines. However, quality dry foam can only be delivered through
one line.

When the unit is stationary and CAFS is switched off the system should be
left in the ‘wet’ condition. This will allow the manifold system to drain and
help prevent freezing.

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
18
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
20. Vehicle Design Considerations for Integrated CAFS 50 Installations

In order for the integrated World Series pump & CAFS 50 to be successfully
installed into a vehicle certain criteria should be followed: -

1. The compartment containing the pump & CAFS 50 assembly

must be adequately shielded from the ingress of road
spray/debris and surplus grease from universal joints etc.
Ingress of dirt, water and grease etc will have a detrimental
effect to the working life of the drive belt, electromagnetic
clutch, pneumatics and electronics etc.

2. Access to all the various drain and fill points must be catered
for. This is an especially important consideration in vehicles
where the fuel tank location makes access to drain points
difficult. To this end the assembly can be supplied complete
with a partial chassis member into which all water & oil drain
points are factory pre-connected and designed to be accessible
from the pump bay. This partial chassis member is supplied
complete with rubber mounts to flexibly isolate the pump from
the chassis.

3. To allow access for routine maintenance and repair the side

locker walls adjacent to the pump assembly must be fitted with
large removable/hinged panels. Equipment and racks in the
side lockers must be easily removable for pump maintenance
access.

4. When fitted with CAFS 50 the unit is usually supplied complete

with an instrument panel. This will be of white plastic coated
stainless steel and will contain all the necessary controls and
gauges for operating the unit. There is scope for providing
additional switches where necessary and this should be
discussed with the Hale Sales Team.

5. The CAFS system will terminate at a flanged discharge face

with a 50mm bore. The casting itself can be rotated to one of
three positions dependent on the direction of discharge
required. One or two discharge lines of 38mm can then be
fitted as required.

6. It is presumed that the CAFS discharge will be through one or

both of the side lockers and that the pipe work and isolating ball
valves are the responsibility of the vehicle builder. Sealed
blank caps must not be fitted. Any pipe work or valves fitted
should have a clear through bore of 38mm as far as the nozzle.

7. The best quality of foam, especially dry foam, is achieved with a

single parallel pipe nozzle of up to 38mm diameter or two
nozzles of 22mm diameter. However these cannot be used for
©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
19
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
interior attack since the fireman will always be using a fogging
gun inside a building. Ø38 – 45mm lay flat hose is
recommended. The optimal solution for interior attack is to use
a nozzle that has a smooth through bore and which can then be
converted to fog as required. Foam outlets should be colour
coded.

8. The foam tank should be of plastic or stainless steel with a

volume of main tank volume x 0.005. Alternatively, a volume of
at least 25l may be preferred to allow an entire drum of foam
agent to be emptied. Ideally the foam tank should be situated
above the level of the foam pump inlet so that the pump does
not need to be primed again. The foam tank must have a low
foam level switch fitted and must be vented. The low foam
level switch is essential since it forms part of the safety interlock
system.

9. If both class A and class B foams are required to be used in the

same CAFS system there must be a foolproof method of
flushing the system before changing over from one foam to the
other since the two foams are not compatible. Failure to do this
will result in the foams mixing which could result in a costly strip
down to clean the system out or replace parts.

10. The foam feed line should have a ½” bore and be fitted with an
isolating tap for maintenance purposes. The isolating tap
should be located as close to the tank as possible with the
flushing point close to it. This will ensure that the maximum
length of hose line can be flushed out. The flushing line should
also be fitted with an isolating valve.

11. Provision must be made for a ½” bore foam return line from the
foam pump to the foam tank.

12. CAFS can only be used when working from open water or from
a tank feed. It must not be used with a pressurized suction
(hydrant) since this will interfere with the water/air pressure
ratio.

13. It is highly recommended that the system be flushed after

CAFS has been used, particularly if the system is used
infrequently. This will help to prevent the foam concentrate
from solidifying within the close confines of the metering
system.

14. The foam feed line is fitted with a small filter located in the
lower instrument panel valve plate, next to the left hand
discharge valve. This should be regularly checked and cleaned
after first closing the foam isolating ball valve.

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
20
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
21. Gearbox Option

All pump versions can now be supplied fitted with a mounted gearbox. There
are three input drive positions available, left, down and right. There are also
seven available ratios: -

1.24: 1
1.40: 1
1.59: 1
1.80: 1
1.97: 1
2.16: 1
2.37: 1

The gearbox is cooled by filtered water from the main pump and will be
delivered with the cooling system connected. However it may be necessary
for the vehicle builder to provide adequate drainage to prevent freezing.
The gearbox is provided with an independent oil lubrication system.

The water ring priming option is not available with a gearbox.

22. Engine Mounted Close Coupled Version

Close-coupled versions of the World Series WT & WS pumps are now

available complete with a built in water cooled gearbox, which can be fitted to
any suitably powered diesel engine with an SAE 2 flywheel housing.

An electro magnetic clutch can be fitted between the engine and pump so
that the engine can be run with the pump disengaged when required.

The gear ratios available are: -

1.24: 1
1.40: 1
1.59: 1
1.80: 1

The water ring priming option is not available when a gearbox is fitted.

23. Pump Drive Lines

When installing pump drive lines it is essential that correct alignment criteria
be observed. In addition to choosing adequate drive flanges and prop shafts,
the single equivalent drive line angle should be no more than about 7º. It
should be remembered that there are two accelerations and decelerations for
every revolution. The higher the single equivalent drive line angle then the
©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
21
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
higher will be the magnitude of the forces generated by the accelerations.
High drive line angles have been known to cause premature failure of both

pumps and gearbox power takeoffs. The situation is made more acute when
high speeds are also involved.

Similarly, drive lines into the pump should not be absolutely straight since the
needle bearings in the universal joints will then not be working satisfactorily
and may also fail prematurely.

24. Heated Pump Version

Components are available for the World Series range of pumps that allow the
pump to be heated in cold environments to help prevent freezing of the
pump. To achieve this engine water would be permanently piped to the
pump and circulated through special pump and primer cavities before being
returned to the engine cooling system.

The engine water pump circulation could be controlled by means of a valve

so that the water can be isolated at warmer times of the year.

25. Special Tools

In order to make repair and maintenance of the World Series WS pump

easier and more convenient a range of special tools have been designed and
are available for purchase. Details of these can be obtained through the
Hale Products Europe sales team.

26. Servicing

The World Series WS range of pumps have been designed from the outset to
make servicing and repair of the pump as easy and convenient as possible.

The design allows the pump to be progressively stripped down as far as

sealing gland replacement without the need to remove the volute or
pressure-side pipework. Even the discharge valves can be left undisturbed.

The bearing housing oil seals run on individual wear rings so that
replacement costs of worn components are kept as low as possible.

Wherever possible seals are of the ‘O’ ring type so that problems of scraping
off old gasket material and fitting new gaskets is avoided.

The low-pressure impeller is designed so that positive sealing is provided

between impeller and pump shaft. In this way water borne deposits are
©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
22
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
prevented from penetrating into the small clearances between shaft and
impeller, which over time would otherwise accumulate and solidify making
removal of impeller difficult.

Components that may be otherwise difficult to access for removal are

provided with threaded holes, which can be used for jacking purposes.
Usually the screws holding on the component are the same as required for
jacking and can be used as such.

A correctly installed pump should have sufficient free space around each
piston primer to allow the primer assemblies to be removed in situ without
dismantling the tank to suction line. Recommended clearances for primer
removal are shown in the World Series WS Options Manual, which is
available upon request from Hale Products Europe in Warwick.

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
23
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
Primer Disengaging for Pumps without Manifolds with Gearboxes

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
25
 INSTALLATION MANUAL
GP/158/00 June 2008
World Series
27. Primer Disengaging for Pumps without Manifolds and Gearboxes

©2000 Hale Products Europe. Our policy is one of continuous development. We therefore reserve the right to
amend specifications without notice or obligation.
24
 World
Series

SPARES MANUAL
World Series - WS Single Pressure Pump

GP/158/00 Issue 7. February 2006

For revisions and new sections see

Amendment Record on page 2-3

1
AMENDMENT RECORD for WS Single-Pressure Pump Spares Manual
Number Date Page/s Amendment Instruction Publication issue
1 March 38-41 Addition of section on Water Ring Primer 4 pages added to end of Parts List Issue 1, March
2002 2002

2 August 16-21 Modified Piston Primer components New pages inserted into Parts List to Issue 1, August
2002 introduced, cover both versions of Piston Primer 2002
Two piece piston assembly fitted up to serial
number 8999 listed on pages 16-17
New One piece piston assembly fitted from
serial number 9000 listed on pages 20-21
3 April 2003 17 P17 Item 17. Cover and priming valve housing 55551/12 is now use 55551/14 Issue 1, April 2003
21 P21 Item 17. Cover and priming valve housing 55551/12 is now use 55551/14
4 July 2003 23 Item 32 Twin elbow 50847 is now use 60861 Issue 2, October
52322 is now use 60860 2003
UFP2303/13 is now use 60862
5 July 2003 8-9 Priming Pipe Filter added Illustration amended and part numbers Issue 2, October
added 2003
6 August 2-3 Inclusion of Amendment Record page at front Issue 2, October
2003 of manual 2003
7 November 12-13 Items 8, 9, Manifold fasteners change Part numbers changed and added Issue 3 November
2003 Item 15, new thermal relief valve 2003
8 February 5 Item 1 Bearing Housing, Item 14 Seal Housing Part numbers changed from S/n 8163 Issue 4 February
2004 2004
9 May 2004 14-15 Item 9, 10 now upgraded to stainless steel bolt Illustration amended and part numbers Issue 5 May 2004
and bonded seal. Spring washer deleted. changed
10 November 8-9 Suction Pressure Relief Valve Removed – Illustration amended and part numbers Issue 6. November
2004 NOT FITTED to WS. Priming pipe upgrade changed 2004
included.
11 November 8-9 Items 19, 20 added. Shoulder plug and washer Illustration amended and part numbers Issue 6. November
2004 on suction tube. changed 2004
12 February Various Addition of WS6010 part numbers Various part numbers added Issue 7. February
2006 2006
13 February 26-27 Revised RTP filter assembly 2 pages added to manual Issue 7. February
2006 2006
14 February 32-37 Addition of ball valve, continental type valve, 6 pages added to manual Issue 7. February
2006 dual flow valve 2006

2
AMENDMENT RECORD for WS Single-Pressure Pump Spares Manual
Number Date Page/s Amendment Instruction Publication issue
15 February 42-47 Addition of gearbox 6 pages added to manual Issue 7. February
2006 2006

3
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump

26 25 24 21 20 19 18 17 16 10

37 35 36 43 40 41 44

23

39

38
Bearing Housing Group

42
1
40
44

10A
27 28 29 31 32
11 9 6 8 7 6 5 22 4 2 33

34 3 12 13 14 15

4
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item Description No./ Light Alloy Gunmetal
Number Unit All models All models
1 Bearing Housing 1 60000 60000 From S/n 8163 use 60000/02
2 Pump Shaft 1 60001/01 60001/01
3 Bearing Angular Contact 2 60002 60002
4 Key Rect. Par’l 1 MS80/16 MS80/16
5 Spacer Washer 1 60010 60010
6 Bearing Location Plate 2 60003/01 60003/01
7 Eccentric 1 60004 60004
8 Bearing – Needle 1 60005 60005
9 Balance Weight 1 60006 60006
10 & 10A Bearing – Roller 1 60007 60007
11 ‘O’ Ring 1 53384/01 53384/01
12 ‘O’ Ring 1 55831 55831
13 Oil Seal 1 60012 60012
14 Seal Housing 1 60011 60011 From S/n 8163 use 60011/01
15 Screw 6 MS164/20 MS164/20
16 Gasket Seal Housing 1 60182 60182
Bearing Housing Group

17 Wear Ring – Oil Seal 1 60008 60008

18 Oil Seal 1 50682/02 50682/02
19 Seal Housing 1 60009 60009
20 Washer, Spring 4 MS29/7 MS29/7
21 Screw, 4 MS06/25 MS06/25
22 Key Rect. 1 MS80/15 MS80/15
23 Tacho Sender Unit 1 60015 60015
Drive Flange Options
24 Drive Flange 1 See Options See Options
25 Lock Washer Pair 1 60072/06 60072/06 a Drive Flange SAE 1410 1 60073
26 Nut 1 MS35/16 MS35/16 b Drive Flange SAE 1510 1 60073/01
27 ‘O’ Ring 1 51355 51355 c Drive Flange DIN 100 1 60073/02
28 Seal Wear Ring 1 60141 60141 d Drive Flange DIN 120/8 1 60073/03
29 Flinger 1 60014 60014
31 Lock Washer Pair 1 60072/06 60072/06
32 Nut 1 60210 60210
33 Key, Rect. 1 MS180/28 MS180/28
34 ‘O’ Ring 1 57044 57044
35 Washer, Sealing 1 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10
36 Plug Shoulder 1 S64/6 S64/6
37 Oil Filler/Level Unit 1 60016 60016
38 Washer, Sealing 1 UFP2303/7 UFP2303/7
39 Plug Shoulder 1 S64/3 S64/3
40 ‘O’ Ring 2 53384 53384
41 Feed Tube R.H. 1 60053 60053
42 Feed Tube L.H. 1 60053/01 60053/01
43 Stud 8 56944 56944
44 ‘O’ Ring 2 FWP8217 FWP8217

5
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump

6 5 4 3 1 7 11 12 14 15 11

Items 33, 39, 39A, 40 -

• 2010/3010 pump
Pump Group

requires 6 off

• 4010 requires 8 off

27 26 25

28
13 30 31
9
10

41

42

39/39A

40

Item 8
All these items included in
the Seal Assembly Service
Kit 60022/01.

19 20 32 33 34 35 36 37 36A
34A

6
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item Description No./ Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal
Number Unit 2010/3010 2010/3010 4010 4010 6010 6010
1 Pump Body, Clockwise and anti-clockwise 1 60140 60140/100 4010, 6010 part numbers as per 2010/3010 unless stated below -
2 ‘O’ Ring 2 UMP9700 UMP9700
3 Stud 6 MS49/30 MS49/30
4 Washer 6 MS25/10 MS25/10
5 Washer, Spring 6 MS29/7 MS29/7 Item 28 Impeller – Anti-clockwise Rotation
6 Nut 6 MS35/9 MS35/9 2010/3010 Alum 60306
7 Stud 2 MS147/12 MS147/12
2010/3010 Gunmetal 60306/100
8 Mechanical Seal Assembly Service Kit 1 60022/01 60022/01
Pump Group

4010 Alum 60371

9 Washer, Seal Retaining 2 60211 60211
10 Nut 2 MS141/4 MS141/4 4010 Gunmetal 60371/100
11 ‘O’ Ring 2 60298 60298 6010 Alum 60848
12 Stud 9 MS50/35 MS50/35 6010 Gunmetal 69848/100
13 Screw 3 MS66/25 MS66/25
14 ‘O’ Ring 1 THM11034 THM11034 55831 55831 55831 55831
15 Volute 1 60024 60024/100 60193 60193/100 60193 60193/100
19 Wear Ring – L.P. Rear 1 60142 60142 60142/01 60142/01 60836/01 60838/01
20 Screw 6 MS163/25 MS163/25
25 Washer 12 MS25/11 MS25/11
26 Washer 12 MS29/8 MS29/8
27 Nut 12 MS35/10 MS35/10
28 Impeller 1 60230 60230/100 60342 60342/100 60842 60842/100
30 Lock Washer Pair 1 60072/06 60072/06
31 Nut 1 60210 60210
32 Cover Plate – Suction 1 60026 60026/100 60194 60194/100 60838 60838/100
33 Stud (2010/3010 – 6 off, 4010 – 8 off) 6 or 8 MS49/40 MS49/40
34 Washer 12 MS25/11 MS25/11
34A Spring Washer 12 MS29/8 MS29/8
35 Bolt 12 MS19/45 MS19/45
36 ‘O’ Ring 1 52068/01 52068/01 51177 51177 52068/07 52068/07
36A ‘O’ Ring 1 52068/01 52068/01 51177 51177 60840 60840
37 Wear Ring, Low Pressure, Front 1 60206/100 60206/100 60344/100 60344/100 60839/01 60839/01
39 Washer (2010/3010 – 6 off, 4010 – 8 off) 6 or 8 MS25/10 MS25/10
39A Spring Washer 6 or 8 MS29/7 MS29/7
(2010/3010 – 6 off, 4010 – 8 off)
40 Nut (2010/3010 – 6 off, 4010 – 8 off) 6 or 8 MS35/9 MS35/9
41 Washer, Sealing 1 UFP2303/7 UFP2303/7
42 Plug Shoulder 1 S64/3 S64/3

7
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump

Priming pipe filter fitted as standard from Mid-2003 From mid-2004 priming pipe item 10 changed
Item Description No. Part number Item Description No. Part number
21 Strainer 1 60524 10 Priming pipe - now use 1 60773/01
22 Connector 1 59182/04 8, 9 Not used, replaced by
23 Sealing washer 1 UMP2303/10 item 24
24 Elbow 90° 1 60769

19

20
Suction Tube Group

15

18

Priming pipe from mid-2004

10

24
3 4 5
10/03

8
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item Description No./ 2010 4” RT 2010 4” RT 2010 4” BSP 2010 4” BSP 2010 Twin 4” 3010 5 ½” RT 3010 5 ½” RT
Number Unit Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal BSP Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal
1 Suction Tube 1 60188 60188/100 60188/01 60188/101 60440 60174 60174/100
2 Gasket 1 12284 12284 12284 12284 12284 12284 12284
3 Washer, Sealing 1 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5
4 Union 1 56403 56403 56403 56403 56403 56403 56403
5 Suction Strainer 1 52125/01 52125/01 N/A N/A N/A 52125/02 52125/02
6 Cap, Suction Tube 1 FWP2004 UFP7362 N/A N/A N/A 2112 2112/1
7 Chain, Suction Tube Cap 1 FWP1062/1 FWP1062/1 N/A N/A N/A FWP1062/1 FWP1062/1
8 Sealing Washer ¾ “ BSP 2 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10
9 Stud Coupling 1 55308 55308 55308 55308 55308 55308 55308
10 Priming Pipe, Suct. Connect. 1 60523/03 60523/03 60523/03 60523/03 60523/03 60523/03 60523/03
11 90° Elbow 1 55309 55309 55309 55309 55309 55309 55309
12 Priming Pipe – Transverse 1 60170 60170 60170 60170 60170 60170 60170
13 ‘O’ Ring 1 60166 60166 60166 60166 60166 60166 60166
14 Seal Plate 1 60168 60168 60168 60168 60168 60168 60168
Suction Tube Group

15 Screw 4 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25

16 Washer 4 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6
17 Shoulder Plug ¾”BSP 1 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6
18 Sealing washer ¾”BSP 1 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10
19 Shoulder plug ½”BSP 1 S64/4 S64/4 S64/4 S64/4 S64/4 S64/4 S64/4
20 Sealing washer ½”BSP 1 UFP2302/8 UFP2302/8 UFP2302/8 UFP2302/8 UFP2302/8 UFP2302/8 UFP2302/8

Item Description No./ 3010 3010 4010 4010 4010 4010

Number Unit 5½” BSP Alloy 5½” BSPGunmetal 5½” RT Alloy 5½” RT Gunmetal 5½” BSP Alloy 5½” BSP Gunmetal
1 Suction Tube 1 60174/01 60174/101 60205 60205/100 60205/01 60205/101
2 Gasket 1 12284 12284 12284 12284 12284 12284
3 Washer, Sealing 1 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5
4 Union 1 56403 56403 56403 56403 56403 56403
5 Suction Strainer 1 52125/01 52125/01 N/A N/A 52125/02 52125/02
6 Cap, Suction Tube 1 No Cap No Cap 2112 2112/1 No Cap No Cap
7 Chain, Suction Tube Cap 1 FWP1062/1 FWP1062/1 N/A N/A FWP1062/1 FWP1062/1
8 Sealing Washer ¾”BSP 2 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10
9 Stud Coupling 1 55308 55308 55308 55308 55308 55308
10 Priming Pipe, Suct. Connect 1 60172 60172 60172 60172 60172 60172
11 90º Elbow 1 55309 55309 55309 55309 55309 55309
12 Priming Pipe - Transverse 1 60523/03 60523/03 60523/03 60523/03 60523/03 60523/03
13 ‘O’ Ring 1 60166 60166 60166 60166 60166 60166
14 Seal Plate 1 60168 60168 60168 60168 60168 60168
15 Screw 4 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25
16 Washer 4 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6
17 Shoulder Plug ¾”BSP 1 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6
18 Sealing washer ¾”BSP 1 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10
19 Shoulder plug ½”BSP 1 S64/4 S64/4 S64/4 S64/4 S64/4 S64/4
20 Sealing washer ½”BSP 1 UFP2302/8 UFP2302/8 UFP2302/8 UFP2302/8 UFP2302/8 UFP2302/8
9
 Item Description No./ 6010 6010
Number Unit 8inch flange, 8inch flange,
12 hole 12 hole
Light Alloy Gunmetal
1 Suction Tube 1 51348/06 51348/01 For other suction tube specifications,
2 - Not used on 6010 Not used on 6010 please quote pump model and serial
3 Washer, Sealing, ¼ in 1 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5 number when ordering
4 Union, ¼ in 1 56403 56403
5 - 1 Not used on 6010 Not used on 6010
6 - 1 Not used on 6010 Not used on 6010
7 - 1 Not used on 6010 Not used on 6010
8 Washer, Sealing 1
9 Stud Coupling 1 Items 8 -12 and 21-24
10 Priming Pipe, Suct. Connect 1 See illustration on previous page for further details on the primer pipe and filter parts fitted to different specifications
11 90º Elbow 1
12 Priming Pipe - Transverse 1
13 ‘O’ Ring 1 60166 60166
14 Seal Plate 1 60168 60168
15 Screw 4 MS05/25 MS05/25
16 Washer, spring 4 MS29/6 MS29/6
- Washer 4 MS25/9 MS25/9
- Joint, suction tube to volute 1 51370 51370
- Plug, ¼ in 1 S64/2 S64/2
- Washer, sealing, ¼ in 1 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5
- Plug, ½ in 1 S64/4 S64/4
- Washer, sealing, ½ in 1 UFP2303/8 UFP2303/8

10
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK

11
 10 18 15 16 9 World Series - WS
11
35
29 8
31
32 30
33
6
7
13

14
Manifold Group

2
3
25 4
24
26
27 5
28
19 12

17

34
28
27 Additional Central Manifolds available -
Item Description 2010/3010 2010/3010 4010/6010 4010/6010
Number For pumps with - Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal
alternatives 1 Water Ring Primer with 60032/03 60032/103 60032/05 60032/105
Friction drive (clockwise)
21 1 Water Ring Primer with 60032/04 60032/104 60032/06 60032/106
¾”BSP 22
23 clutch drive (anti-clockwise)
20 1 Pump with integrated CAFS 60032/07 60032/107 60032/12 60032/112

12
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump

Item Description No. per Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal
Number Unit 2010 2010 3010 3010 4010/6010 4010/6010
1 Manifold – Central 1 60032 60032/100 60032 60032/100 60032/01 60032/101
2 Stud 8 MS49/25 MS49/25 MS49/25 MS49/25 MS49/25 MS49/25
3 Washer 8 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10
4 Washer, Spring 8 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7
5 Nut 8 MS35/9 MS35/9 MS35/9 MS35/9 MS35/9 MS35/9
6 Washer 4 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10
7 Spring Washer 4 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7
8 Bolt 2 MS18/110 MS18/110 MS18/110 MS18/110 MS18/110 MS18/110
9 Bolt 2 MS18/100 MS18/100 MS18/100 MS18/100 MS18/100 MS18/100
10 Sealing Washer 2 MS133/10 MS133/10 MS133/10 MS133/10 MS133/10 MS133/10
Manifold Group

11 Screw 2 MS165/35 MS165/35 MS165/35 MS165/35 MS165/35 MS165/35

12 ‘O’ Ring 4 10701 10701 10701 10701 10701 10701
13 Union 1 56403 56403 56403 56403 56403 56403
14 Washer, Sealing 1 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5
15* Thermal Relief Valve Assembly - 42°C Setting 1 60809 60809 60809 60809 60809 60809
Thermal Relief Valve Assembly - 74°C Setting 1 60809/01 60809/01 60809/01 60809/01 60809/01 60809/01
16 Washer, Sealing – now supplied with item 15 1 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10
17 ‘O’ Ring 2 50092 50092 50092 50092 50092 50092
18 Gasket – Filter Body 1 60035 60035 60035 60035 60035 60035
19∗ Manifold –Outrigger 2 60033 60033/100 60033 60033/100 60033 60033/100
20 Stud 8 MS49/25 MS49/25 MS49/25 MS49/25 MS49/25 MS49/25
21 Washer 8 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10
22 Spring Washer 1 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7
23 Nut, Domed 8 MS42/5 MS42/5 MS42/5 MS42/5 MS42/5 MS42/5
24 Washer 8 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10
25 Spring Washer 8 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7
26 Screw 8 MS65/30 MS65/30 MS65/30 MS65/30 MS65/30 MS65/30
27 Plug Shoulder 1 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6
28 Washer, Sealing 1 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10
29 Blanking Plate 2 51281/09 51281/09 51281/09 51281/09 51281/09 51281/09
30 Washer 8 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10
31 Spring Washer 8 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7
32 Screw 6 MS06/25 MS06/25 MS06/25 MS06/25 MS06/25 MS06/25
33 Screw 2 MS06/30 MS06/30 MS06/30 MS06/30 MS06/30 MS06/30
34 Blank Plate 2 60023 60023/100 60023 60023/100 60023 60023/100
35 Shim Plate – Not used from 14 / 01 / 2002 2 60300 60300 60300 60300 60300 60300
Item 1 – Please quote pump serial number and specification when ordering to obtain correct manifold
Item 8, 9 – Manifolds to mid-2003 use 2 off item 8, 2 off item 9. Manifolds from mid-2003 use 4 off item 8 only.
Item 15 – Please quote pump serial number and specification when ordering to obtain correct thermal relief valve

∗
Where no Manifold Outrigger is fitted, Item 19 is replaced by Item 34
13
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Filter Housing

9
8

11

10

1
7

3
6

14
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item Description No./ Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal
Number Unit 2010 2010 3010 3010 4010/6010 4010/6010
1 Primer Filter Housing 1 60292 60292/100 60292 60292/100 60292 60292/100
2 Sealing Washer 2 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10
3 Strainer Assembly 1 57456 57456 57456 57456 57456 57456
4 Barrel nipple, ½ in BSPT 1 60528 60528 60528 60528 60528 60528
5 T Piece 1 60527 60527 60527 60527 60527 60527
6 Blank plug, in item 4 1 60531 60531 60531 60531 60531 60531
7 Primer Disengage Pipe 1 60283 60283 60283 60283 60283/01 60283/01
8 Straight Coupler 1 55873 55873 55873 55873 55873 55873
9 Screw, M8 8 MS117/40 MS117/40 MS117/40 MS117/40 MS117/40 MS117/40
Filter Housing

10 Seal, bonded M8 8 MS33/8 MS33/8 MS33/8 MS33/8 MS33/8 MS9

11 Sealing Washer 1 UFP2303/8 UFP2303/8 UFP2303/8 UFP2303/8 UFP2303/8 UFP2303/8

15
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump

16
For pumps up to S/N 8999
Complete Assembly, New – 56960/05

Repair kit – SP014

15

14

13
12
11
34 10
33 9
8
35 7
30 16
29
28 6
27
26
17 5
25 4
22 3
23
24
2
31
32 1
36
37
38

21
20
19

18 For all pumps -

Complete Assembly,
42 New – 55556/16
Piston Primer – fitted to pumps up to serial number 8999

39 Repair kit – SP013

40
41
16
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item Description No./ Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal
Number Unit 2010 2010 3010 3010 4010/6010 4010/6010
1 Piston Rod Assy 2 57532/01 57532/01 57532/01 57532/01 57532/01 57532/01
2 Spring Seat 2 PDP12382/1 PDP12382/1 PDP12382/1 PDP12382/1 PDP12382/1 PDP12382/1
3 Spring 2 57117/02 57117/02 57117/02 57117/02 57117/02 57117/02
4 DU Bearing 4 56949 56949 56949 56949 56949 56949
5 ‘O’ Ring 2 52634 52634 52634 52634 52634 52634
6 Cylinder – Bronze 2 56957/02 56957/02 56957/02 56957/02 56957/02 56957/02
7 Variseal 2 56954 56954 56954 56954 56954 56954
8 Sleeve 2 56958 56958 56958 56958 56958 56958
9 Glydring 2 56955 56955 56955 56955 56955 56955
10 ‘O’ Ring 2 52816 52816 52816 52816 52816 52816
11 Clamp Washer 2 56959 56959 56959 56959 56959 56959
12 Screw 8 MS161/10 MS161/10 MS161/10 MS161/10 MS161/10 MS161/10
13 Piston Ring 2 52650/01 52650/01 52650/01 52650/01 52650/01 52650/01
14 Piston 2 57435/02 57435/02 57435/02 57435/02 57435/02 57435/02
15 Screw 2 MS164L/20 MS164L/20 MS164L/20 MS164L/20 MS164L/20 MS164L/20
16 Special Nut 4 57414 57414 57414 57414 57414 57414
17 Cover & Priming Valve Housing 2 55551/14 55551/14 55551/14 55551/14 55551/14 55551/14
18 Seal – Discharge 2 56961 56961 56961 56961 56961 56961
19 Orifice Plate 2 56963 56963 56963 56963 56963 56963
20 Seal – Inlet 2 56962 56962 56962 56962 56962 56962
21 Screw 2 MS164/16 MS164/16 MS164/16 MS164/16 MS164/16 MS164/16
22 Spacer – Priming Valve 2 55665 55665 55665 55665 55665 55665
23 Thrust Pad – Priming Valve 2 55666 55666 55666 55666 55666 55666
24 Screw 2 MS163/50 MS163/50 MS163/50 MS163/50 MS163/50 MS163/50
25 Spring – Priming Valve 2 UFP6488 UFP6488 UFP6488 UFP6488 UFP6488 UFP6488
26 Seal Retaining Washer – Priming Valve 2 55668 55668 55668 55668 55668 55668
27 Seal Washer – Priming Valve 2 55669 55669 55669 55669 55669 55669
28 Seal Support Washer – Priming Valve 2 55670 55670 55670 55670 55670 55670
29 Washer 2 MS125/7 MS125/7 MS125/7 MS125/7 MS125/7 MS125/7
30 Nut 2 MS141/4 MS141/4 MS141/4 MS141/4 MS141/4 MS141/4
31 Diaphragm – Priming Valve 2 56123 56123 56123 56123 56123 56123
32 Cover – Priming Valve 2 56120 56120 56120 56120 56120 56120
33 Inlet – Priming Valve 2 57229/04 57229/05 57229/04 57229/05 57229/04 57229/05
34 ‘O’ Ring 2 55562 55562 55562 55562 55562 55562
35 ‘O’ Ring 2 57204 57204 57204 57204 57204 57204
36 Washer 8 MS25/7 MS25/7 MS25/7 MS25/7 MS25/7 MS25/7
37 Washer, Spring 8 MS29/5 MS29/5 MS29/5 MS29/5 MS29/5 MS29/5
38 Bolt 8 MS16/60 MS16/60 MS16/60 MS16/60 MS16/60 MS16/60
39 Washer 8 MS125/10 MS125/10 MS125/10 MS125/10 MS125/10 MS125/10
Piston Primer - fitted to pumps up to serial number 8999

40 Washer, Spring 8 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7

41 Nut 8 MS35/9 MS35/9 MS35/9 MS35/9 MS35/9 MS35/9
42 ‘O’ Ring 2 60351 60351 60351 60351 60351 60351
17
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item Description No./ Part number
Number Unit for all models
on P12
Piston Primer Cover Kit – for all WS Pumps, SP013
all Serial Numbers, comprises of -
18 Seal, discharge 1 56961
20 Seal, inlet 1 56962
21 Screw, stainless steel 1 MS164/16
27 Seal washer, priming 1 55669
31 Diaphragm, priming 1 56123
34 O ring 1 55562
35 O ring 1 57204
42 O ring 1 60351

Piston Primer Cylinder Kit – for all WS SP014

Pumps, up to S/N 8999, comprises of -
4 DU Bearing 2 56949
5 O ring I/D 34.5 1 52634
7 Variseal 1 56954
9 Glydring 1 56955/01
10 O ring I/D 25.1 1 52816
13 Piston ring 1 52650/01
15 Screw, Stainless steel 1 MS164L/20
Piston Primer - fitted to pumps up to serial number 8999

18
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK

19
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump

For pumps from S/N 9000 -

Complete Assembly, New – 56960/06

Repair kit – SP015.

For all pumps -

Complete Assembly, New –
Piston Primer - fitted to pumps from serial number 9000

55556/16

Repair kit – SP013

20
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item No./ Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal
Description
Number Unit 2010 2010 3010 3010 4010/6010 4010/6010
1 Supplied as part of item 15 2 - - - - - -
2 Split Collet 2 60650 60650 60650 60650 60650 60650
3 Spring Retainer 2 60649 60649 60649 60649 60649 60649
4 Spring 2 57117/02 57117/02 57117/02 57117/02 57117/02 57117/02
5 DU Bearing 4 56949 56949 56949 56949 56949 56949
6 ‘O’ Ring 2 52634 52634 52634 52634 52634 52634
7 Cylinder - Bronze 2 56957/02 56957/02 56957/02 56957/02 56957/02 56957/02
8 Variseal 2 56954 56954 56954 56954 56954 56954
9 Sleeve 2 56958 56958 56958 56958 56958 56958
10 Glydring 2 56955 56955 56955 56955 56955 56955
11 ‘O’ Ring 2 52816 52816 52816 52816 52816 52816
12 Clamp Washer 2 56959 56959 56959 56959 56959 56959
13 Screw 8 MS161/10 MS161/10 MS161/10 MS161/10 MS161/10 MS161/10
14 Piston Ring 2 60652 60652 60652 60652 60652 60652
15 Piston Rod Assy 2 60835 60835 60835 60835 60835 60835
17 Cover & Priming Valve Housing 2 55551/14 55551/14 55551/14 55551/14 55551/14 55551/14
18 Seal - Discharge 2 56961 56961 56961 56961 56961 56961
19 Orifice Plate 2 56963 56963 56963 56963 56963 56963
20 Seal - Inlet 2 56962 56962 56962 56962 56962 56962
21 Screw 2 MS164/16 MS164/16 MS164/16 MS164/16 MS164/16 MS164/16
22 Spacer - Priming Valve 2 55665 55665 55665 55665 55665 55665
23 Thrust Pad - Priming Valve 2 55666 55666 55666 55666 55666 55666
24 Screw 2 MS163/50 MS163/50 MS163/50 MS163/50 MS163/50 MS163/50
25 Spring - Priming Valve 2 57555 57555 57555 57555 57555 57555
26 Seal Retaining Washer - Priming Valve 2 55668 55668 55668 55668 55668 55668
27 Seal Washer - Priming Valve 2 55669 55669 55669 55669 55669 55669
28 Seal Support Washer - Priming Valve 2 55670 55670 55670 55670 55670 55670
29 Washer 2 MS125/7 MS125/7 MS125/7 MS125/7 MS125/7 MS125/7
30 Nut 2 MS141/4 MS141/4 MS141/4 MS141/4 MS141/4 MS141/4
30 Diaphragm - Priming Valve 2 56123 56123 56123 56123 56123 56123
32 Cover - Priming Valve 2 56120 56120 56120 56120 56120 56120
33 Inlet - Priming Valve 2 57229/05 57229/05 57229/05 57229/05 57229/05 57229/05
34 ‘O’ Ring 2 55562 55562 55562 55562 55562 55562
35 ‘O’ Ring 2 57204 57204 57204 57204 57204 57204
36 Washer 8 MS25/7 MS25/7 MS25/7 MS25/7 MS25/7 MS25/7
37 Washer, Spring 8 MS29/5 MS29/5 MS29/5 MS29/5 MS29/5 MS29/5
38 Bolt 8 MS16/60 MS16/60 MS16/60 MS16/60 MS16/60 MS16/60
39 Washer 8 MS125/10 MS125/10 MS125/10 MS125/10 MS125/10 MS125/10
40 Washer, Spring 8 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7
41 Nut 8 MS35/9 MS35/9 MS35/9 MS35/9 MS35/9 MS35/9
42 ‘O’ Ring 2 60351 60351 60351 60351 60351 60351
Piston Primer - fitted to pumps from serial number 9000

21
 32

33
31

26
18 30
25
14
15 16
13 17 18

12
7

29
28
RTP Foam Inductor Assembly

8 27

20
21
6 1 19
22
5 2 23
24
3

9
4
10
11

8
22
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item Description No./ Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal
Number Unit 2010 2010 3010 3010 4010/6010 4010/6010
1 Body – Inductor 1 51890/06 51890/07 51890/06 51890/07 51890/06 51890/07
2 Spirol Pin 1 MS177/54 MS177/54 MS177/54 MS177/54 MS177/54 MS177/54
3 Orifice Plate 1 51902/03 51902/03 51902/03 51902/03 51902/03 51902/03
4 ‘O’ Ring 1 GPL10556 GPL10556 GPL10556 GPL10556 GPL10556 GPL10556
5 Washer, Sealing 1 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10
6 Plug Shoulder 1 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6 S64/6
7 Nozzle 1 50733/01 50733/01 50733/01 50733/01 50733/01 50733/01
8 Gasket 2 60234 60234 60234 60234 60234 60234
9 Screw 4 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25
10 Spring Washer 4 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6
11 Washer 4 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9
12 Housing – Valve 1 51892 51892 51892 51892 51892 51892
13 ‘O’ Ring 1 51894 51894 51894 51894 51894 51894
14 Spindle – Valve 1 51893 51893 51893 51893 51893 51893
15 Detent Tube 1 51896 51896 51896 51896 51896 51896
16 Compression Spring 1 51949 51949 51949 51949 51949 51949
17 Friction Plug 1 51950 51950 51950 51950 51950 51950
18 Special Washer 2 60274 60274 60274 60274 60274 60274
19 Knob 1 51978/01 51978/01 51978/01 51978/01 51978/01 51978/01
20 Stop 2 51905 51905 51905 51905 51905 51905
21 Calibration Label 1 52324/01 52324/01 52324/01 52324/01 52324/01 52324/01
RTP Foam Inductor Assembly

22 Washer 1 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9

23 Nut 1 MS41/5 MS41/5 MS41/5 MS41/5 MS41/5 MS41/5
24 Insert 1 50747/01 50747/01 50747/01 50747/01 50747/01 50747/01
25 Compression Spring 1 51900 51900 51900 51900 51900 51900
26 Control Plate – Valve 1 51901 51901 51901 51901 51901 51901
27 Bolt 4 MS17/50 MS17/50 MS17/50 MS17/50 MS17/50 MS17/50
28 Washer 4 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9
29 Washer 4 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6
30 Male/female equal elbow 1 60860 60860 60860 60860 60860 60860
31 1” BSP parallel nipple 1 60862 60862 60862 60862 60862 60862
32 Female equal tee 1 60861 60861 60861 60861 60861 60861
33 Socket Pipe Plug 1 GPD8292/1 GPD8292/1 GPD8292/1 GPD8292/1 GPD8292/1 GPD8292/1

07/98
23
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
10
9
8

5
3
9 8
11 2
16 4

15

12
RTP Shut-Off Assembly

3
2

7 1

12

13
14
13 12

24
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item Description No./ Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal
Number Unit 2010 2010 3010 3010 4010/6010 4010/6010
1 Elbow 1 60055 60055/100 60055 60055/100 60055 60055/100
2 Washer 4 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9
3 Spring Washer 4 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6
4 Screw 2 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25
5 Bolt 2 MS17/60 MS17/60 MS17/60 MS17/60 MS17/60 MS17/60
6 Ball Valve 1 60038/01 60038/01 60038/01 60038/01 60038/01 60038/01
7 Elbow 1 60056 60056/100 60056 60056/100 60056 60056/100
8 Washer 4 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9
9 Spring Washer 4 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6
10 Screw 2 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25
11 Bolt 2 MS17/50 MS17/50 MS17/50 MS17/50 MS17/50 MS17/50
12 Washer, Sealing 2 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10
13 Stud Coupling 1 55308 55308 55308 55308 55308 55308
13 Stud Coupling 2 valve version
1 55308 55308 55308 55308 55308 55308
14 Connecting Pipe RTP 1 60279 60279 60279 60279 60279/01 60279/01
15 Stud Coupling 4 valve version
1 55308/02 55308/02 55308/02 55308/02 55308/02 55308/02
RTP Shut-Off Assembly

16 Connecting Pipe 1 60052 60052 60052 60052 60052/01 60052/01

RTP Filter Retro fit kit p/n 60817/01 RTP Filter Retro fit kit p/n 60817
for 2 valve manifolds. Contains all parts for 4 valve manifolds. Contains all parts
listed below listed below

25
World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
RTP Shut-Off Assembly

26
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item Description No./ Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal
Number Unit 2010 2010 3010 3010 4010/6010 4010/6010
1 Elbow 1 60055 60055/100 60055 60055/100 60055 60055/100
2 Washer 4 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9
3 Spring Washer 4 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6
4 Screw 2 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25 MS05/25
5 Bolt 2 MS17/60 MS17/60 MS17/60 MS17/60 MS17/60 MS17/60
6 Ball Valve 1 60038/01 60038/01 60038/01 60038/01 60038/01 60038/01
7 Clamp plate 1 60756 60756 60756 60756 60756 60756
8 Washer 4 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9 MS25/9
9 Spring Washer 4 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6 MS29/6
10 Bolt 4 MS17/65 MS17/65 MS17/65 MS17/65 MS17/65 MS17/65
11 Washer, Sealing 2 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10
12 Adaptor, male 1 59182/04 59182/04 59182/04 59182/04 59182/04 59182/04
13 Y Strainer 1 60524 60524 60524 60524 60524 60524
14 Filter tube 1 60711 60711 60711 60711 60711 60711
15 Stud coupling 1 55308 55308 55308 55308 55308 55308
16 Copper tube 1 60741/02 60741/02 60741/02 60741/02 60741/02 60741/02
RTP Shut-Off Assembly

17 Elbow 1 55309 55309 55309 55309 55309 55309

18 Copper tube 1 60741/03 60741/03 60741/03 60741/03 60741/03 60741/03
19 Elbow 1 55309 55309 55309 55309 55309 55309
20* Copper tube 1 60741/05 60741/05 60741/05 60741/05 60741/05 60741/05
21* Elbow 1 55309 55309 55309 55309 55309 55309
22* Copper tube 1 60741/01 60741/01 60741/01 60741/01 60741/01 60741/01
23 Stud coupling 1 55308 55308 55308 55308 55308 55308
24 Washer, sealing 1 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10
*Note: Items 20, 21, 22 now replaced by pipe 60523/04, one off

27
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
1 2 3 2 1

9 8 7

4
Priming System Blank Assembly

8 9 10
6 5
7
28
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item Description No. per Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal
Number Unit 2010 2010 3010 3010 4010/6010 4010/6010
1 Cover Plate 2 60204 60204 60204 60204 60204 60204
2 Closing Bung 2 60091 60091 60091 60091 60091 60091
3 ‘O’ Ring 2 52634 52634 52634 52634 52634 52634
4 Seal Screw Assembly 2 60184 60184 60184 60184 60184 60184
5 Washer – Sealing 1 UFP2303/7 UFP2303/7 UFP2303/7 UFP2303/7 UFP2303/7 UFP2303/7
6 Plug 1 S64/3 S64/3 S64/3 S64/3 S64/3 S64/3
7 Screw Hex Head 12 MS06/12 MS06/12 MS06/12 MS06/12 MS06/12 MS06/12
8 Washer – Spring 12 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7 MS29/7
9 Washer – Plain 12 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10 MS25/10
10 Cover Plate 1 60299 60299 60299 60299 60299 60299
Priming System Blank Assembly

29
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
6

10 7

11 24

5 27
4 23

3 14

4 15
28
Delivery Valve 2.5” I/C BS

5 13
29

20
12
21

17
22

2 18

16
19
25

26

30
 World Series – WS Multi-Pressure Pump
Item Description No. per Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal Light Alloy Gunmetal
Number Valve 2010 2010 3010 3010 4010/6010 4010/6010
N/A Assembly TBA 56544/01 56545/01 56544/01 56545/01 56544/01 56545/01
1 Main Body N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
2 2.5” I/C Body 1 56979/28 56979/23 56979/28 56979/23 56979/28 56979/23
3 Pivot Pin 1 56979/03 56979/03 56979/03 56979/03 56979/03 56979/03
4 ‘O’ Ring 2 56979/02 56979/02 56979/02 56979/02 56979/02 56979/02
5 Circlip 2 56979/01 56979/01 56979/01 56979/01 56979/01 56979/01
6 Screw Down Handle 1 56979/22 56979/22 56979/22 56979/22 56979/22 56979/22
7 Domed Nut 1 56979/09 56979/09 56979/09 56979/09 56979/09 56979/09
8 Spring Washer 1 56979/08 56979/08 56979/08 56979/08 56979/08 56979/08
9 ‘O’ Ring 1 56979/10 56979/10 56979/10 56979/10 56979/10 56979/10
10 Screw Down Spindle – See item 27 below 1 - - - - - -
11 Roll pin – see item 28 below - - - - - -
12 Non Return Flap 1 56979/18 56979/19 56979/18 56979/19 56979/18 56979/19
13 Non Return Flap Washer 1 56979/07 56979/07 56979/07 56979/07 56979/07 56979/07
14 Retaining Washer 1 56979/06 56979/20 56979/06 56979/20 56979/06 56979/20
15 Washer Insert 2 56979/05 56979/05 56979/05 56979/05 56979/05 56979/05
16 Instantaneous Seal 1 FWP1003/A FWP1003/A FWP1003/A FWP1003/A FWP1003/A FWP1003/A
17 Twist Release Knob 1 56979/26 56979/27 56979/26 56979/27 56979/26 56979/27
Delivery Valve 2.5” I/C BS

18 Release Spring 1 56979/14 56979/14 56979/14 56979/14 56979/14 56979/14

19 Release Plunger 1 56979/13 56979/21 56979/13 56979/21 56979/13 56979/21
20 Knob Closure bung, also see info. below 1 56979/31 56979/25 56979/31 56979/25 56979/31 56979/25
21 Nyloc Nut 1 56979/32 MS141/5 56979/32 MS141/5 56979/32 MS141/5
22 ‘O’ Ring 1 56979/15 56979/15 56979/15 56979/15 56979/15 56979/15
23 C’sunk Screw 2 56979/04 56979/04 56979/04 56979/04 56979/04 56979/04
24 Plain Washer 1 MS125/9 MS125/9 MS125/9 MS125/9 MS125/9 MS125/9
25 Blank Cap 1 2415 2415 2415 2415 2415 2415
26 Chain 1 TH4749 TH4749 TH4749 TH4749 TH4749 TH4749

From 2005 - Modified Valve Spindle Arrangement, now use these parts, interchangeable with existing valves
27 Screw down spindle 1 56979/16 56979/17 56979/16 56979/17 56979/16 56979/17
28 Washer 1 56979/30 56979/30 56979/30 56979/30 56979/30 56979/30
29 Nyloc nut 1 56979/29 56979/29 56979/29 56979/29 56979/29 56979/29

For valves made before 2001 use this part

20 Knob Closure, metal disc 1 56979/24 56979/25 56979/24 56979/25 56979/24 56979/25

31
World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump

22

23
21
24

25

26

29

28 30

27 31
Delivery Valve – Ball Type with Instantaneous connector

32
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item Description No. per Light Alloy Gunmetal
Number Valve All models All models
Ball valve, LH, 2.5” instantaneous connector, complete valve TH137 TH153/100
Ball valve, RH, 2.5” instantaneous connector, complete valve TH138 TH154/100

1 Body, delivery valve, LH 1 TH4200/A TH4200/B

- Body, delivery valve, RH 1 TH4201/A TH4201/B
2 Nut, 5/16in UNF 1 S214/4 S214/4
3 Spring, ball valve Kit part 1 1 TH11205 TH11205
4 Pivot ball 1 TH11194 TH11194
5 Stud, 3/8in., valve cap to body 4 S165/8 S165/8
6 Valve cap 1 TH3331/1A TH3331/1B
7 Washer 3/8in. 4 S21/5 S21/5
8 Spring washer 3/8in. 4 S20/5 S20/5
9 Nut 3/8in UNF 4 S214/5 S214/5
10 O ring, valve seating Kit part 1 1 THG3419 THG3419
11 Gasket, 0.010in. thick Kit part 1 1 TH11197 TH11197
12 Gasket, 0.003in. thick Kit part 1 1 TH11197/1 TH11197/1
13 Ball valve 1 TH2258 TH2255
14 Valve stem 1 THG3469/1 THG3469/1
15 O ring, valve stem Kit part 1 1 THG4086 THG4086
16 Handle boss, LH 1 TH5372/3A TH5372/3B
- Handle boss, RH 1 TH5372/1A TH5372/1B
17 Handle 1 TH5370/2 TH5370/2
18 Knob, handle 1 TH1835/1A TH1835/1A
19 Collar, valve to stem (pair of half collars) Kit part 1 1 TH11190 TH11190
20 O ring, body to delivery manifold Kit part 1 1 TH1511/A TH1511/A
21 Shim pack 1 SATHM10722 SATHM10722
22 Instantaneous connector, complete assembly, includes items 22-29 1 56559 56559/01
23 Knob closure disc 1 56979/24 56979/25
24 Nyloc nut 1 56979/11 MS141/5
25 Twist release knob kit part 2 1 56979/26 56979/27
26 Release spring kit part 2 1 56979/14 56979/14
27 Release plunger 1 56979/13 56979/21
28 2.5in Instantaneous connector body 1 56979/28 56979/23
29 Seal kit part 2 1 FWP1003/A FWP1003/A
30 Blank cap, rubber 1 2415 2415
31 Chain, 9in long 1 TH4749 TH4749
Items 30, 31 supplied as Blank cap assembly 1 THL119/6 TH119/6
Delivery Valve – Ball Type with Instantaneous connector

Kit part 1 = Part also supplied in Seal kit for valve body 1 56940/05 56940/05
Kit part 2 = Part also supplied in Seal kit for Instant. connector 1 56940/03 56940/03

33
World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump

17
18

19
20
23

24

22

21
25
Delivery Valve – Continental Type Instantaneous connector

34
 Item Description No. per Light Alloy Gunmetal
Number Valve All models All models
Continental type valve, 2.5in instantaneous connector, complete valve 55662 55920

1 Valve body 1 56469/01 56469/14

2 Hand wheel 1 56469/11 56469/11
3 Washer M10 1 56469/12 56469/12
4 Nut, domed M10 1 56469/13 56469/13
5 Lock Kit part 1 1 56469/10 56469/10
6 Spindle 1 56469/02 56469/02
7 Spindle sleeve, c/w seals Kit part 1 1 56469/03 56469/16
8 Spring Kit part 1 1 56469/09 56469/09
9 Safety lock 1 56469/06 56469/06
10 Stem assembly 1 56469/05 56469/05
11 Safety lock Kit part 1 1 56469/08 56469/08
12 Plate Kit part 1 1 56469/07 56469/15
13 O ring Kit part 1 1 61142 61142
14 Anchor, blank cap chain Only fitted for Storz type connectors 1 GPR11759 GPR11759
15 Shim pack Kit part 2 1 SATHM10722 SATHM10722
16 Instantaneous connector, complete assembly 1 56559 56559/01
17 Knob closure disc 1 56979/24 56979/25
18 Nyloc nut 1 56979/11 MS141/5
19 Twist release knob 1 56979/26 56879/27
20 Release spring Kit part 2 1 56979/14 56979/14
21 Release plunger Kit part 2 1 56979/13 56979/21
22 2.5in Instantaneous connector body 1 56979/28 56979/23
23 Seal Kit part 2 1 FWP1003/A FWP1003/A
24 Blank cap, rubber 1 2415 2415
25 Chain, 9in long 1 TH4749 TH4749
Items 30, 31 supplied as Blank cap assembly 1 THL119/6 TH119/6

Kit part 1 = Part also supplied in seal kit for valve body 1 56940/01 56940/02
Kit part 2 = Part also supplied in seal kit for instant. connector 1 56940/03 56940/03

35
 Delivery Valve – Dual Flow Type Instantaneous connector
World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump

36
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item Description Part No. Allloy Part No. Gunmetal Qty
1 Valve body THM10721/A THM10721/B 1
2 Joint washer TH2772 TH2772 1
3 Screws, countersunk MS172/61 MS172/61 2
4 Plate THM10580 THM10580 1
5 Sealing washer THM10453 THM10453 1
6 Valve flap THM10578 THM10578/B 1
7 Valve seat THM10726/A THM10726/B 1
8 Hinge pin TH2748 TH2748 1
9 Dowty seal UFP2303/11 UFP2303/11 1
10 Valve rod THM10451/1 THM10451/1 1
11 Valve stem FWP1000/1 THM10717/B 1
12 Bush THM10718 THM10718 1
13 O ring FWP8217 FWP8217 1
14 Lock nut, seal THM10528/1 THM10528/1 1
15 Sealing washer THM10597 THM10597 1
16 Grease nipple THM10596 THM10596 1
17 Instruction plate THM10600/A THM10600/A 1
18 Handwheel FWP2009 FWP2009 1
19 Instantaneous seal FWP1003/A FWP1003/A 1
20 Twist release knob 56979/26 56979/26 1
21 Closure disc 56979/24 56979/24 1
22 Nyloc nut 56979/11 56979/11 1
23 Release spring 56979/14 56979/14 1
24 Release plunger 56979/13 56979/13 1
25 Blank cap 2415 2415 1
26 2.5” Instantaneous connector body 56979/28 56979/28 1
27 Shim pack, contains items listed below - SATHM10722 SATHM10722 1
- Shim .002” thick polyester THM10722 THM10722 1
- Shim .005” thick polyester THM10722/1 THM10722/1 1
- Shim .010” thick polyester THM10722/2 THM10722/2 1
- Shim .030” thick polyester THM10722/3 THM10722/3 1
- Shim .060” thick polyester THM10722/4 THM10722/4 1
28 Chain, blank cap to valve TH4749 TH4749 1
Delivery Valve – Dual Flow Type Instantaneous connector

37
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Water Ring Primer

61

38
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item Description No./ Light Alloy Gunmetal Item Description No./ Light Alloy Gunmetal
No. Unit All Models All Models No. Unit All Models All Models
Water Ring Primer, complete WRP7994/21 WRP7995/16 31 5/8 inch BSP Sealing Washer 1 UFP2303/9 UFP2303/9
assembly 32 Water trap housing 1 WRP7934/8 WRP7934/9
1 Special nut M10 x 1.5 1 WRP7939/1 WRP7939/1 33 Priming valve inlet, L.H. 1 57229/01 57229/101
2 Nut M6 x 1.0 4 MS35/7 MS35/7 34 Washer, M6 1 MS125/7 MS125/7
3 Spring washer M6 4 MS29/5 MS29/5 35 Nut, M6 1 MS141/4 MS141/4
4 Tab washer, primer 1 WRP7938/1 WRP7938/1 36 Washer, seal support 1 55670 55670
5 Pulley centre piece 1 WRP7937/1 WRP7937/1 37 Seal 1 55669 55669
6 Pulley 1 UMP7915 UMP7915 38 Washer, seal retaining 1 55668 55668
7 Bolt M6 x 30, pulley to centre 4 MS16/30 MS16/30 39 O ring 1 60406 60406
piece 40 Priming valve body 1 60097 60097/100
8 Circlip 1 MS79/28 MS79/28 41 Stud, M8 2 MS48/30 MS48/30
Water Ring Primer

9 Ball bearing 20mm, large 1 WRP7087 WRP7087 42 Washer, M8 2 MS25/9 MS25/9

10 Bearing locating ring 1 WRP7944 WRP7944 43 Spring washer, M6 2 MS29/6 MS29/6
11 Bearing spacer 1 WRP7943 WRP7943 44 Nut, M8 2 MS35/8 MS35/8
12 Ball bearing 20mm, small 1 WRP7986 WRP7986 45 Screw, M5 1 MS103/12 MS103/12
13 Woodruff key, impeller shaft 1 WRP9707 WRP9707 46 Washer, M5 1 MS125/6 MS125/6
14 Key 1 MS179/35 MS179/35 47 Diaphragm 1 53173 53173
15 Primer shaft 1 WRP7940/1 WRP7940/1 48 Spring, priming valve 1 57555 57555
16 Bolt 2 MS17/85 MS1785 49 Spacer, priming valve 1 55665 55665
Bolt 1 MS17/80 MS17/80 50 Thrust pad, priming valve 1 55666 55666
Bolt 6 MS17/60 MS17/60 51 Screw, M6 1 MS163/50 MS163/50
Bolt 1 MS17/90 MS17/90 52 Diaphragm 1 56123 56123
17 Primer bearing housing 1 WRP7941/8 WRP7941/9 53 Cover, priming valve 1 56120 56120
18 Lift-off pad 1 WRP7978/1 WRP7978/1 54 Washer, M6 4 MS25/7 MS25/7
19 Impeller 1 WRP7931/2 WRP7931/3 55 Bolt, M6 4 MS16/60 MS16/60
20 Sealing backing washer 1 WRP7982 WRP7982 56 Connector 1 WRP7945 WRP7945
21 Seal 1 WRP7985 WRP7985 57 Sealing washer 2 UFP2303/5 UFP2303/5
22 Washer 1 WRP7971 WRP7971 58 Hose – suction to primer 1 54737/06 54737/06
23 Self locking bolt 1 10021 10021 59 Hose clip, priming valve end 1 MS82/3 MS82/3
24 Gasket 1 WRP7954 WRP7954 60 Spring, hose support 3 57149/02 57149/02
25 Suction and delivery cover 1 WRP7952/2 WRP7952/2 61 O ring 1 50887 50887
26 Washer 5 MS125/7 MS125/7
27 M6 x 1.0 socket head cap 5 MS163/16 MS163/16
screw
28 Gasket – primer 1 WRP7953 WRP7953
29 Cover plate 1 WRP7936 WRP7936
30 Water hose connection, 1 inch 1 WRP7977/3 WRP7977/2

39
World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Water Ring Primer – Lift-off Section

40
 World Series – WS Single Pressure Pump
Item Description No./ Light Alloy Gunmetal Item Description No./ Light Alloy Gunmetal
No. Unit All Models All Models No. Unit All Models All Models
Water Ring Primer – Lift-off 36 Circlip, external 1 S80/6 S80/6
Section 37 Special washer 1 60090 60090
1 Nut, domed M8 6 MS42/4 MS42/4 38 Bush, primer fulcrum pin 1 UFP2277 UFP2277
2 Washer, M8 6 MS26/9 MS26/9 39 Support, water ring primer 1 60071 60071
3 Stud, M8 6 MS48/25 MS48/25 40 Bush, primer fulcrum pin 1 UFP2277 UFP2277
4 Body, lift-off, outer 1 60084 60084/100 41 Special washer 1 60090 60090
5 Diaphragm, lift-off 1 60087 60087 42 Hinge pin, primer 1 60089 60089
6 Piston 1 60085 60085 43 Circlip, external 1 S80/6 S80/6
7 Body, lift-off, inner 1 60083 60083/100 44 Hose clip 1 53708/02 53708/02
8 Nut, M10 4 MS35/9 MS35/9 45 Spring anchor 1 GPR11759/1 GPR11759/1
9 Spring washer 4 MS29/7 MS29/7 46 Washer 2 MS25/6 MS25/6
10 Washer, M10 4 MS25/10 MS25/10 47 Nut 1 MS41/3 MS41/3
11 Stud, M10 4 MS49/55 MS49/55 48 Screw 1 MS03/12 MS03/12
12 Closing bung 1 60091 60091 49 Hose clip 1 MS82/3 MS82/3
13 O ring 1 52634 52634 50 Hose union 1 60233 60233
14 Lift-off rod 1 60086 60086 51 Washer 1 UFP2303/10 UFP2303/10
15 Nut, M10 1 MS35/9 MS35/9
16 Nut, M10 1 MS35/9 MS35/9
17 Circlip, external 1 S80/9 S80/9
18 Pivot bar 1 60088 60088
19 Nut, M10 1 MS35/9 MS35/9
20 Nut, M10 1 MS35/9 MS35/9
21 Lift-off rod 1 60086 60086
22 Circlip, external 1 S80/9 S80/9
23 Spring 1 UFP5962/1 UFP5962/1
24 Screw, M8 1 MS64/16 MS64/16
Water Ring Primer – Lift-off Section

25 Spring anchor 1 60350 60350

26 Spring washer 2 MS29/7 MS29/7
27 Screw 2 MS06/25 MS06/25
28 Lift-off pad 1 60094 60094
29 Pump Pulley 1 60092 60092
30 O ring 1 52634 52634
31 Closing bung 1 60091 60091
32 Stud, M10 4 MS49/25 MS49/25
33 Washer, M10 4 MS25/10 MS25/10
34 Spring washer 4 MS29/7 MS29/7
35 Nut, M10 4 MS35/9 MS35/9

41
 W orld series

1 OIL FILL 19
T HE G E ARBO X M AY BE M OUNT E D
I N T HE THR EE P OS I TI ON S S HO WN
20 I N T HI S DR AWI NG

LEFT OPTION
18 O IL F IL L
21

17
22
16
O IL L E VE L
2 15 O IL DR AIN
23

OIL LEVEL OIL LEVEL RIGHT OPTION

14 24 O IL F IL L
3
Gearbox for WT/ WS Models

13 25

4 11 12
5 O IL L E VE L
10
OIL DRAIN
9 O IL DR AIN

7
6
8
DOWN OPTION

42
 World Series

Item Description No./

Number Unit All models
1 Plug, ½ inch NPT 5 217-0401-00-0
2 Bushing 2 082-0614-00-0
Gearbox

3 Seal plug 1 60644

4 O ring 1 UFP2290
5 Magnetic plug, ½ inch, oil drain 1 217-0401-08-0
6 Washer, 5/16inch 12 097-0810-01-0
7 Cover 1 044-0840-00-0
8 Hex. Head screw, 5/16-18 x ½ inch 12 018-1404-02-0
9 Gasket 1 046-5270-01-0
for WT and WS models

10 Cooling pipe 1 60474/01

11 Compression tube fitting, 1/2inch 1 082-0453-00-0
12 Retaining ring 1 077-3540-00-0
13 Key 1 017-0300-02-0
14 Washer 1 097-0890-03-0
15 Hex. Head screw, 5/8-18 x 1¼ 1 018-2412-07-0
16 Oil seal 1 296-2810-00-0
17 Bearing 5210W 1 250-5210-20-0
18 Bearing 308J 1 250-0308-32-0
19 Gearbox 1 004-0581-00-0
20 Pinion gear - see table on right - 1 - Available drive gear and pinion gear combinations
21 Drive gear - see table on right - 1 - Item 16. Item 17. Ratio Drive unit
22 Drive shaft 1 037-2221-00-0 Pinion Gear Drive Gear assembly
23 Knock out plug 1 217-3360-00-0 031-1520-00-0 (45T) 031-1510-00-0 (56T) 1.24 504-0640-12-0
24 Key 1 017-0300-00-0 031-5160-00-0 (42T) 031-1500-00-0 (59T) 1.40 509-0640-14-0
25 Bearing 308J 1 250-0308-32-0 031-5180-00-0 (39T) 031-1490-00-0 (62T) 1.59 504-0640-16-0
031-5200-00-0 (36T) 031-1480-00-0 (65T) 1.80 504-0640-18-0
031-1440-00-0 (34T) 031-1470-00-0 (67T) 1.97 504-0640-20-0
031-5220-00-0 (32T) 031-1610-00-0 (69T) 2.16 504-0640-22-0
031-5240-00-0 (30T) 031-1460-00-0 (71T) 2.37 504-0640-24-0

43
 World series

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 33
34
35
36
37

38
39
40
41
42
53
43

52 45

51 48 47 46 44

WS pump shown
50
49
Bearing Housing Group for WT/WS models with Gearbox

44
 World Series
Item Description No./
Number Unit All models Notes
1 Key 1 MS80/9
2 O ring 1 60357
3 Screw 4 S227/H8
4 Spacer 1 60356
5 Locking washer 1 60048
6 Lock nut 1 60049
7 Cover, end shaft 1 60352
8 Oil seal 1 60332
9 Spacer 1 60354
10 Bolt 4 MS18/60
11 Spring washer 4 MS29/7
12 O ring 1 54052
13 Oil seal 1 50682/06
14 Oil seal 1 50682/02
15 Gasket 1 60182 From 5/11/01, use 60182/01
16 Adaptor ring 1 60353
17 Spring washer 6 S20/7
18 Nut 6 S263/7
19 Stud 6 S167/10
20 Key 1 MS80/16
21 Bearing location plate 1 60003/01
22 Eccentric 1 60004
23 Bearing needle 1 60005
24 Bearing location plate 1 60003/01
25 Washer 1 UFP2302/10
26 Plug 1 S64/6
27 Tachometer sender unit 1 60015
28 Oil filler / level unit 1 60016
29 Bearing, angular contact 2 60002
30 O ring 1 55831
31 Flexible cooling hose (gearbox, left, right 1 60538/01
and down position)
31 Elbow connector 1 60481
31 Olive 1 DFP7593/7
31 Tubing nut 1 DFP7594/7
31 Straight adaptor 1 53492/02
31 Restrictor 1 60529
Bearing Housing Group for WT/WS Models with Gearbox

32 Flexible cooling hose (gearbox, down 1 60538 For Gearbox in Left and Right position use Hose 60538/03
position)
32 Olive 1 DFP7593/7
32 Tubing nut 1 DFP7594/7

45
 World series

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 33
34
35
36
37

38
39
40
41
42
53
43

52 45

51 48 47 46 44

WS pump shown
50
49
Bearing Housing Group for WT/WS models with Gearbox

46
 World Series

Item Description No./

Number Unit All models Notes
32 Sealing washer 1 UFP2303/7
32 Straight male adaptor 1 60484
33 Screw, socket head 6 MS164/20
34 Seal housing 1 60011 From 5/11/01, use 60011/01
35 Key 1 MS180/31
36 Nut 1 60210
37 Pump shaft, gearbox – WT Models 1 60001/02
- Pump shaft, gearbox – WS models 1 60001/03
38 O ring 1 57044
39 Lock washer pair 1 60072/06
40 Flinger 1 60014
41 O ring 1 51355
42 Seal wear ring 1 60141
43 Oil seal 1 60012
44 Balance weight 1 60006
45 Spacer washer 1 60010
46 Bearing housing 1 60000/01 From 5/11/01, use 60000/03
47 Plug 1 S64/3
48 Washer 1 UFP2303/7
49 Tee connector 1 53882/01
49 Tubing plug 1 60482
49 Olive 1 DFP7593/7 Drive Flange Options
49 Tubing nut 1 DFP7594/7 a Drive Flange SAE 1410 1 60438
50 Drive flange 1 See options b Drive Flange SAE 1510 1 60438/01
51 Washer 1 097-0890-03-0 c Drive Flange DIN 100 1 60438/02
52 Hex. Head screw, 5/8-18 x 11/4 1 018-2412-07-0 d Drive Flange DIN 120/8 1 60438/03
53 Key 1 017-0300-02-0 e Drive Flange DIN 120/6 1 60438/04
Not drawn Studs, to secure piston primer to Brg 8 56944
Housing
Not drawn Feed tube R.H., to piston primer 1 60053
Not drawn Feed tube L.H., to piston primer 1 60053/01
Not drawn O ring, feed tube, piston primer end 2 53384
Not drawn O ring, feed tube, pump head end 2 FWP8217
Bearing Housing Group for WT/WS models with Gearbox

47
 World
Series
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

+ WORKSHOP MANUAL
for
WS - Single Pressure Pump

©Godiva, Warwick 1
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
©Godiva, Warwick 2
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
AMENDMENT RECORD for WS single pressure Pump Maintenance Manual
Number Date Page Amendment Instruction Pub/. Issue
1 October 21 Filter in piston primer tube Issue 3,
2005 October 2005
2 October 10, 11, 12 Revision of impeller, front Issue 3,
2005 and rear wear dimensions October 2005
3 May 2008 26 Revision of tightening Issue 4, May
torque for drive flange 2008
nut, was 400 Nm,
reduced to 300 Nm.
4 June 2008 28-29 Addition of section on Issue 5, June
Gearbox 2008

©Godiva, Warwick 3
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 NOMINAL PERFORMANCE

Model WSA2010 Aluminium

Nominal output 2000 l/min at 10 Bar & 3m lift
Model WSB2010 Bronze

Model WSA3010 Aluminium

Nominal output 3000 l/min at 10 Bar & 3m lift
Model WSB3010 Bronze

Model WSA4010 Aluminium

Nominal output 4000 l/min at 10 Bar & 3m lift
Model WSB4010 Bronze

Model WSA6010 Aluminium

Nominal output 6000 l/min at 10 Bar & 3m lift
Model WSB6010 Bronze

RECOMMENDED SPARES
Thank you for choosing the GODIVA Fire Pump – designed and built to provide
many years of trouble-free service.

Whilst we consider that it is the best fire pump available today, we also recognise
that any ‘rotating machinery’ is subject to wear and therefore recommend that you
request our 2 years’ Recommended Spares Listing.

This stock holding will enable you to maintain the pump in cases where minor
defects occur and minimise any possibility of your pump being ‘off-the-run’ for
extended periods.

©Godiva, Warwick 4
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

SAFETY-RELEVANT DATA 6

GENERAL DESCRIPTION 7

LUBRICATION 8

PROTECTION AGAINST FROST 9

SECTION: 1 SUCTION TUBE & FRONT WEARING RING 10

2 WEARING RING MAINTENANCE 10

3 LOW PRESSURE IMPELLER & 11

REAR WEAR RING

4 CARBON SEAL & SEATING ASSEMBLY 13

5 VOLUTE BODY 15

6 LOW PRESSURE MANIFOLD 16

7 PRIMING SYSTEM 17

8 PUMP BODY 24

9 FRONT END OIL SEAL & WEAR RING 24

10 REAR END OIL SEAL & WEAR RING 26

11 BEARING HOUSING 27

12 GEARBOX (Optional) 28

13 PUMP TESTS 30

14 DELIVERY VALVES 31
©Godiva, Warwick 5
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 SAFETY-RELEVANT DATA
for VEHICLE BUILDER/INSTALLER

Thank you for purchasing a Godiva Pump.

Vehicle Manufacturers will find full details regarding installation in the

relevant section of this manual.

A risk assessment of the Vehicle Pump Range has been conducted in line with the
Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC, with the following results:

INSTALLATION
The pump MUST BE SECURELY INSTALLED to the vehicle chassis.

MAINTENANCE
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the equipment is maintained in a safe
operational condition, as per regulation 5 in the Provision and Use of Work
Equipment Regulations 1998.

PUMP DRIVE AND PRIMING SYSTEMS

A guard is available to enclose the priming system drive if this is deemed necessary.
The vehicle-mounted pump is NOT a machine (see Declaration of Incorporation) and
the guarding of this area together with the drive system of the pump MUST BE
CONSIDERED by the Vehicle Builder when incorporating the pump into HIS
machine.

NOISE
The manufacturer of the machine into which the pump is incorporated MUST
INDICATE any protective equipment that may be required. Test data may be
sourced from Godiva where required.

THERMAL RELIEF VALVE

The WS Series single pressure pump can be fitted with an optional THERMAL
RELIEF VALVE which is fitted to assist in the prevention of over heating which could
occur through incorrect operation of the pump, ie running the pump at high speed
with all the discharge valves closed.

OPERATION
When installed into a fire-fighting appliance, TRAINED PERSONNEL must operate
these pumps ONLY.

©Godiva, Warwick 6
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The Godiva WS series single stge pump is a single pressure pump. It delivers
high volume, low pressure (LP) output water.

The pump is generally driven in a clockwise direction viewed from the drive end. The
pump may also be specified configured to rotate in a counter-clockwise direction.
The pump drive shaft, which runs on angular contact and roller bearings in an oil
bath, is of stainless steel. Shaft sealing of the pump is by a special Godiva
mechanical seal face, which ensures efficiency and long life without adjustment. The
electronic tachometer sender is mounted adjacent to the drive flange.

Priming of the pump is achieved automatically by means of a pair of positive

displacement piston primers mounted on either side of the bearing housing. These
primers begin to operate as soon as the pump drive shaft begins to rotate, driven by
an eccentric bearing on the pump shaft. Air within the pump will be expelled and as
long as the suction connections have been made and the hose end submerged, the
pump will prime and the pistons will disengage when 1.5 bar is maintained in the
pump. The pump should be primed at any speed between 1000-2500 rpm. The
pump speed should not be increased further until the primers have disengaged and
the pump is primed.

An optional alternative priming system – the Godiva water ring primer – is available
in place of the piston primer system. With the water ring primer, when the pump is
started, the primer shaft is driven by its fibre driving wheel which contacts the pulley
on the pump drive shaft and is lifted off by a disengaging cylinder as the pump is
primed and pressure builds up in the pump. An alternative to friction pulley drive is
belt-drive through an electro-magnetic clutch. When the pump is primed and
pressure builds up, a pressure switch turns off the clutch drive.

Non-return valves are built into both the piston and water ring priming systems to
prevent air flowing back through the primers, thus “breaking the prime”.

As the pump is reduced to idling and the pressure within the pump decreases, the
pistons will once again reengage to act as a pump and discharge any water
remaining in the pump.

A World Series Options Manual is available which shows many of the standard
specifications currently available together with an indication of their positions relative
to datum points on the pump.

©Godiva, Warwick 7
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 LUBRICATION

The oil bath provided for the pump drive shaft bearings has a capacity of 0.75 litres
(1.3 pints) and should be topped up when necessary with 10w/40-15w/40 multigrade
engine oil. It is recommended that the oil bath is drained and refilled with fresh oil
about every twelve months.

To check the oil level, remove the filler/dipstick, which is situated on the bearing
housing immediately behind the pump body. Add fresh oil through the oil filler
aperture until it reaches the dipstick level. Refit the oil filler plug securely. Run the
pump for a short period and then re-check the oil level. The oil level should be
checked with the dipstick screwed down into its fixed position.

The oil drain plug is situated at the rear of the bearing housing below the pump drive
flange as shown on Fig 1-1.

Fig 1-1 Bearing housing oil filler, level and drain plug

©Godiva, Warwick 8
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 PROTECTION AGAINST FROST

As a precautionary measure, when frost is anticipated, drain all water from the pump
and its ancillaries.

Removing the drain plug from the base of the volute drains the pump. If the primer
exhaust is piped away to above the primer outlets, these must be provided with drain
valves.

If the water ring primer is fitted, removing the drain plug at the base of the water trap
housing drains it.

IMPORTANT: It is essential to carry out the pump tests detailed in Section 13

whenever any part of the pump or priming system is dismantled.
This will ensure that reassembly has been carried out correctly
and that there are no leaks.

©Godiva, Warwick 9
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Section 1

SUCTION TUBE AND FRONT WEARING RING

To Remove

To remove the suction tube, remove priming pipe and foam inductor (if fitted) from
RH side, and Tank Fill line (if fitted) from LH side of suction tube. Remove the M10
nuts, spring washers and plain washers to allow the withdrawal of suction tube and
front wearing ring if necessary. The front wearing ring has two identical O rings, one
of which is face mounted towards suction tube and the second being in a groove
behind its flange.

To Refit

Clean all flange faces and lightly grease new O rings before refitting.

Section 2

WEARING RING MAINTENANCE

Check the large internal diameter of the wearing ring in several places (see Fig 2-1).
If dimension ‘A’ exceeds 140.6 mm for WS 2010/WS 3010 model pumps, or 171.1
mm for WS 4010 models and 187.6mm for WS6010, at any point, the wearing ring
must be renewed.

Fig. 2-1 A

To Refit

Refitting is a reversal of the removal instructions. Use new O rings lightly greased
before refitting and should be fitted with diameter A towards the impeller.

©Godiva, Warwick 10
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 SECTION 3

LOW PRESSURE IMPELLER AND REAR WEAR RING

To Remove

In order to access the low pressure impeller, it is only necessary to disconnect

pipework as described in Section 1, then remove the 12 off M12 bolts from the volute
cover plate which may then be withdrawn together with suction tube etc giving direct
access to the low pressure impeller leaving the volute body in situ. Remove the
tacho sender and fit shaft locking screw (Tool No 60275/11) locating the spigot into
one of the drive flange holes. Remove the impeller nut and the pair of lock washers
and withdraw the impeller from the keyed pump shaft. It may be necessary to use
special tool 60275/04 to remove the impeller from the pump shaft.

Maintenance

Check the wearing diameter on the impeller in several places (see Fig 3-1). If the
diameter is less than stated in the table below, a new impeller should be fitted.

Fig 3-1 Checking the wearing diameters of the low pressure impeller

Pump Type Front Diameter (A) Rear Diameter (B)

WS2010 and 139.3 mm 146.1
WS 3010
WS4010 169.5 mm 170.8

WS6010 188.6mm 184.2

©Godiva, Warwick 11
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
To Refit

Refitting is a reversal of the removal instructions. It is recommended that new O

rings are fitted to impeller end face and shaft and a new pair of lockwashers are
fitted before refitting the impeller nut which should be tightened to 400Nm (295 lbs ft)
torque. To refit front cover plate, a new O ring should be fitted to the cover plate
spigot before assembly.

Rear Wear Ring

The rear wear ring (accessible after the removal of the low pressure impeller) is
retained by 4 off M8 socket head screws. After removal of these screws, the rear
wear ring may be jacked out by means of two screws inserted into the adjacent
tappings.

Checking the wearing diameters of rear wear ring

2010/3010 X 4010 X

Pump Type Dia X

WS2010 and 144.9mm
WS 3010
WS4010 169.5mm

WS6010 183mm

To Refit

Clean all surfaces before re-assembly. Apply Loctite 242 to screw threads before
refitting and tightening.

©Godiva, Warwick 12
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Section 4

CARBON SEAL AND SEATING ASSEMBLY

When the impeller is removed, the mechanical carbon face seal is accessible for
examination. In the event of excessive leakage past the carbon seal and out of the
drain hole in the pump head, remove impeller per Sections 3. Examine the carbon
seal. If the face of the carbon seal-seating ring is scored, it is essential to replace it
and to fit a new seating ring, which is mounted within the rear face of the impeller.
To remove the carbon seal seating ring, remove two M6 nyloc nuts and washers and
gently remove it, taking care not to lose the wave spring. The stationary carrier may
be left in place if only the wearing faces are being replaced.
The silicon carbide ring fitted in the rear side of the low pressure impeller may be
levered out, by means of a small instrument screwdriver inserted between the ring
and its rubber cup.

Re-assembly of the seal is completed as described below. Please note: Mechanical

Seals are precision-engineered devices and extreme care must be taken to ensure
that no damage occurs to the lapped faces.

Read the fitting instructions before installation of the seal.

Ensure that the lapped faces are absolutely clean throughout the entire installation.
Soiled faces must to be cleaned with appropriate degreasing cleaner and soft tissue.

©Godiva, Warwick 13
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 B

A
G

E
C

1. Ensure that the Pump Body (A) and Impeller (B) bores are clean and free from
burrs and sharp edges.
2. Lubricate the O Ring (C) with a suitable lubricant and carefully assemble the
Seal Head Assembly (D) into the Pump Body (A), lining up the cut-outs in the
Seal Head Assembly (D) with the threaded Studs (E).
3. Fit Washer (F) to each of the Studs (E) followed by the Lock Nuts (G). The lock
nuts should be tightened half a turn at a time so that the Seal Head Assembly
(D) is pulled squarely into the Pump Body. Ensure that the Lock Nuts are fully
secured.
4. Ensure Carbon Face (H) is clean and free from grease, if not use a degreasing
cleaner and soft tissue. Apply clean water to the carbon face.
5. Take Impeller (B) and carefully push the Mating Ring Assembly (I) into the bore
using Fitting Tool Number 60275/08. Ensure that the Face of the Mating Ring
Assembly is fitted squarely in the impeller housing within 0.1mm.
6. Carefully fit the Low Pressure Impeller onto the shaft and continue with pump
build.

©Godiva, Warwick 14
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Section 5

VOLUTE BODY
It is extremely unlikely in normal servicing that the volute body will require to be
removed, but in the event of removal the front cover plate should be removed as in
Section 3. The volute is mounted on to the pump body by means of twelve studs,
nuts and washers. The seal at both front and rear faces of the volute is by O ring
seals, which should be replaced if the joint face is disturbed. This volute may be
mounted on either standard rotation pumps or reverse rotation pumps, and must be
fitted the correct way round (see the cast on arrow near to the manifold connecting
face, normally on the right hand side). The 12-mounting studs should always face
the rear of the pump.

©Godiva, Warwick 15
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Section 6

LOW PRESSURE MANIFOLD AND FILTER HOUSING

To Remove

Assuming that the gauge, thermal relief and foam connections have been
disconnected, it is necessary to remove the primer discharge pipe from the filter
housing to the pump body. Remove 8 off M8 bolts to remove the filter body. The
low pressure manifold is connected to the volute body by means of 4 off M10 bolts
surrounding the thermal relief valve and 2 M10 stainless steel socket head cap
screws inside the manifold casing (these 2 screws are fitted with bonded seals to
prevent leakage). The manifold may now be removed. The gasket between the
manifold and the filter housing will require renewal at this stage. The seal between
the volute body and manifold is an O ring.

The main outlets to the manifold (6 off) are sealed by means of O rings, seated in
grooves in the manifold faces.

Reassembly

When reassembling the manifold, all O rings should be replaced and Loctite 242
should be applied to all threads before refitting.

Filter Housing

The housing contains the primer disengagement filter, accessible from the front
panel area. This filter however, must not be removed whilst the pump is in
operation.

The flow across the filter is from outside to inside the cylindrical profile. The filter is
intended to restrict particle size in water entering the primer disengaging circuit.

©Godiva, Warwick 16
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Section 7

PRIMING SYSTEMS

POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PISTON PRIMERS

To Remove End Covers

Access to each identical primer, mounted on each side of the bearing housing, is as
follows:

The primer end cover contains a priming valve and inlet and outlet valves and is
removed by the removal of 4 nuts and washers (see Fig 8-1).
Servicing of this cover is as follows

Priming valve

Inlet seal,
Orifice plate
Outlet seal

Primer end cover

Cylinder
assembly

Fig 8-1 Piston Primer

After removal of a single central M8 socket cap screw, the inlet seal, orifice plate and
outlet seal may be removed. Replacement or reassembly may follow after applying
Loctite 262 to the screw thread. Note this screw must be tightened to ensure that
the rubber seal is compressed until metal to metal resistance is achieved.

The priming valve mounted above may be stripped as follows – remove the 4 M6
bolts (and washers) which pass through the end cover into the inlet casting (which
contains an O ring in the bore) and an O ring face seal to the end cover.

The outer end cap clamps on to a rubber diaphragm against the main cover. The
priming valve now revealed has a single socket screw and Nyloc nut to constrain its
components.
©Godiva, Warwick 17
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 On re-assembly, a new diaphragm, seal washer and
O rings should be fitted without exception and care
should be taken to ensure that the vent hole in the
end cap is clear and towards the base of the unit.

All components must be clean and dry before

reassembly.
Priming valve
diaphragm To remove primer cylinders, these are retained by 2
special nuts mounted diagonally on cylinder
assembly and may then be withdrawn (care should
be taken to prevent bearing housing oil leakage or
contamination, if the cylinders are withdrawn).

Extreme care is required if the primer cylinder

assembly is to be stripped, because of the strong
return spring. It is strongly recommended that Tool
No PSK2956 and 57437 are used for disassembly
and reassembly of the cylinder assembly.

Fig 8-2 Priming End Cap

Assembly
Cylinder disassembly (see Fig 8-2)

Locate and clamp flats on piston rod end. Depress and hold cylinder at least on mid
stroke, remove centre socket head screw and carefully release spring pressure
acting on underside of cylinder. Remove piston rod and spring. To remove piston
from cylinder bore, fit seal spreader Tool No 57437 to piston rod and reengage
piston rod (less spring) to push piston from cylinder bore. If piston rings are worn or
scored, both the piston ring and its O rings must be replaced before reassembly.

Piston

Spring

Piston rod seal

components

Fig 8-3 Primer piston cylinder

©Godiva, Warwick 18
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
Beneath the piston in the cylinder bore are 4 socket head screws retaining an end
cap which in turn retains an O ring, a metal sleeve with an internal 2 piece glyd ring
and a variseal in the bottom of the bore. If these components are withdrawn, the
seals should be renewed before assembly.

Careful examination of the cylinder bore and piston rod should be carried out and if
any serious scoring or wear has taken place, should be replaced. The thrust face on
the end of the piston rod is not serviced separately. The piston rod slides in
composition bearings mounted in the cylinder stem and it is extremely unlikely that
these bearings will need to be replaced.

Reassembly

Assuming all components have been cleaned, carefully insert the variseal, using
special Tool No PSK2880 into the cylinder (grooved side down) into the inner recess,
followed by the metal sleeve (cross hole must align with the drain hole in the
cylinder), plain end towards the variseal. This sleeve has a recess to accept the 2-
piece glyde ring, the inner component being a PTFE sleeve. Around the outside
diameter of the metal sleeve is fitted an O ring. The whole internal assembly should
be approximately flush with the seating for the end cap, which is retained by 4 small
socket head screws, which should be retained using Loctite 262 on the screw
threads. Piston seals, if replaced, should be fitted with the O ring first followed by
the PTFE sleeve, which must be gently stretched over the piston and into the groove
progressively. It is recommended that Tool No PSK2956 and 57437 should be used
for reassembly of the piston to cylinder, and all parts must be cleaned. Apply a
smear of engine oil to the piston rod. Locate the flats of the piston rod, fit the spring
carrier and spring. Place Tool 57437 on to the rod spigot and offer the cylinder
assembly over the piston rod.

Using tool PSK2956, compress the spring with the cylinder assembly, carefully
passing the piston rod through the cylinder seals until the shoulder on the rod is well
clear of the clamp plate in the bottom of the cylinder clamp (and remove the seal
spreading Tool 57437) to hold the cylinder in this position whilst the piston is inserted
into the cylinder bore and seats on to the piston rod spigot. Before inserting the
centre retaining screw, apply Loctite 601 to the screw threads and Loctite 510 under
the screw head. Insert and tighten the screw into the piston rod. The piston and
cylinder assembly may now be safely removed from the assembly fixture.

An O ring oil seal is fitted to the location diameter on the cylinder which should also
be renewed before installation to the bearing housing, together with an O ring in the
face of the feed tube which contacts the lower rear face of the cylinder.

©Godiva, Warwick 19
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Supplement for World Series Pump Maintenance – WT and WS Models

Mk 3 Piston Primer (One piece piston) fitted to -

WT Models from Serial number 2000
WS Models from Serial number 9000

Disassembly/Assembly instructions for the piston assembly, part number 56960/06.

1. The piston assembly fitted to these models is a one-piece unit which is held in position by the
return spring. A spring retainer and a pair of split collets retain the spring against the end of
the piston rod.

2. To release the piston from the cylinder it is necessary to depress the spring retainer and the
spring below, but not the piston rod, this will then release the pair of split collets securing the
spring retainer.
A special tool is available from Hale Products Europe to assist with this procedure.

Press on the spring retainer to release the split collets and the
spring below. When the spring is removed the piston can be
pushed from the cylinder

Spring retainer

Split collets

Spring

One-piece piston

Reassembly of the piston to the cylinder is a reversal of the disassembly procedure.

Maintenance of the piston rod seal components is the same for both types of the piston primer.

©Godiva, Warwick 20
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
PRIMING SYSTEMS Continued

FILTER in PISTON PRIMER TUBE

From WS models produced from mid-2003, the pump is fitted with a filter in the tube
that connects the suction tube to the piston primers. This is designed to protect the
piston primers from the ingress of debris, particles as small as a grain of sand, that
can hold the priming valve open and allow water and debris into the bore and piston
of the primers. The debris causes scoring and can lead to premature seal failure.

It is recommended that the filter be checked every 3 months or after each use from a
source that may be heavily contaminated.
The filter element can be removed by unscrewing the hexagonal head of the housing
with a suitable spanner (27mm). Thoroughly clean the filter in water before returning
to the housing and tightening.

The filter is available as a retrofit kit for pumps supplied before mid-2003. The kit
includes the filter, all the necessary connectors and a new length of priming pipe that
may have to be shortened to fit different variations of pump. Part number 60526/01
refers for the retrofit kit.
To Piston
Primers

To suction tube

For part numbers numbers, please refer to Primer filter

Parts Manual, Suction Tube Group Unscrew this hexagonal cap to
remove and clean filter element
(27mm spanner).

©Godiva, Warwick 21
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
PRIMING SYSTEMS Continued

WATER RING PRIMER

The Water Ring Primer is available as an alternative to the Piston Primer system. It
is mounted above the bearing housing and driven by a fibre wheel in contact with a
pulley at the end of the main pump shaft. Operation of the Water Ring Primer is fully
automatic, when the pump is started the primer is driven by the pulley wheel turning
the fibre wheel, air is evacuated from the pump allowing water to enter and build
water pressure inside the volute. The water pressure inside the pump is then used,
via the redundant piston primer housing, to act on a lever which pivots, and through
a second lever, lifts the Water Ring Primer clear of the drive pulley on the pump
shaft. When the primer disengages from the pulley it stops operating, if the pump
pressure falls e.g. when the pump is turned off, the primer fibre wheel will re-engage
with the pulley ready for priming operation when the pump is started again.

To Remove
To remove the entire Water Ring Primer unit, slacken the hose clip retaining the
3/4inch hose to the top of the primer. Disconnect the hose and secure the hose end
away from the primer. Disconnect and remove the primer return spring from the
lower part of the primer. If connected, remove the air outlet connection from the top
and the water inlet connection from the bottom of the primer. Slacken the two grub
screws securing the primer to the hinge pin. Carefully ease the primer unit off the
primer hinge pin.

Maintenance
To dismantle the primer for internal inspection, remove the 10 bolts and washers
securing the primer bearing housing to the primer body. Remove the primer bearing
housing complete with shaft, bearings, impeller and pulley. Examine the inner
diameter of the impeller and the corresponding surface of the suction and delivery
cover for excessive scoring, renewing these parts if necessary.

To fit a new suction and delivery cover, remove the self-locking screws which secure
the cover plate to the suction and delivery cover. Fit this cover plate to the new part,
noting that no gasket is used but jointing compound should be used on the
contacting faces.

To fit a new impeller, undo the impeller retaining screw and pull off the impeller.
Note: if the impeller binds on the shaft it will be necessary to remove the primer shaft
as follows -
At the pulley end of the shaft, knock back the tabwasher and remove the nut
securing the pulley to the shaft. Remove the pulley and extract the woodruff key and
the circlip. Tap out the shaft from the impeller end. The shaft will bring the bearing
with it and these can now be replaced if necessary. The shaft seal will remain in
position and if this requires renewing it should be drifted out, together with its
backing washer, towards the impeller end. When fitting a new seal ensure that the
lip on the backing washer and the open end of the seal face is towards the impeller.

©Godiva, Warwick 22
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 To fit a new friction drive pulley, remove the pulley from the shaft as detailed above,
undo the four nuts, bolts and washers securing the pulley to the centre piece. Fit the
new pulley. Refitting of the pulley assembly is a reversal of the dismantling
instructions. Ensure that a new tab washer is always used on re-assembly.

To examine the non-return valve on top of the primer, undo the four bolts and
washers retaining the priming valve inlet to the valve body and cover. Examine the
seals, spring and diaphragm for wear, if necessary replace these parts.

To Refit
When refitting the water ring primer, rotate the primer hinge pin from its original
position so that the two grubscrews will bear on a different part of the shaft. Move the
whole primer forwards or backwards until both sides of the primer fibre wheel bear
equally on the sides of the driving pulley on the pump shaft. Tighten the grubscrews
and the associated locknuts. Reconnect the hoses to the relevant points and refit the
primer return spring.
When the primer is in position it is important to set a 3m gap between the bottom of
the lift-off pad attached to the primer and the lift-off rod which is used to lift the primer
away from the drive pulley. The gap is to make allowances for a new fibre drive
wheel to “bed-in” through initial wear, but still maintain sufficient distance to allow the
lift-off mechanism to work correctly. The lift-off pad can be turned to move it up or
down as required.

Primer non-return
valve Air outlet

Fibre drive wheel

Primer hinge pin

Pulley on pump
shaft Grubscrews to
secure primer to
hinge pin
Water inlet
connection

Primer return
Primer disengaging spring
mechanism

3mm gap between

Piston primer blank cap primer lift-off pad and
primer disengaging
lever

©Godiva, Warwick 23
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Section 8

PUMP BODY
To Remove

Remove the low-pressure manifold, volute body and impeller (Sections 3,5 and 6)
and remove the carbon seal assembly (Section 5). Unscrew the six nuts and spring
washers securing the pump body to the bearing housing. Using a hide faced
hammer, progressively tap around the pump body until it is separated from the
bearing housing, taking care to withdraw the pump body from the two primer feed
tubes at approximately the 4 and 8 o’clock positions.

Normally, the only reason to remove the pump head would be to gain access to the
front oil seal mount on the bearing housing.

To Refit

When refitting, clean the mating faces of the bearing housing assembly and pump
head, ensuring that they are not damaged. Fit new O rings in the two primer feed
tube bores (one or both of these bores may be sealed with special screws if no
priming or other types of primer are used).

Carefully offer up the pump body to align with the feed connections and the six
threaded studs, refit spring washers and nuts to secure. Replacement of the
remainder of components is covered in the sections mentioned above.

Section 9

FRONT END OIL SEAL AND WEAR RING

To gain access to the front-end oil seal, it is necessary to remove pump head
(Section 9) and other relevant sections. Drain bearing housing oil by removing the
drain plug (rear end, centre bottom) catching oil in a suitable receptacle. Remove
water flinger followed by 6 socket head cap screws securing the oil seal housing.

Remove housing and the oil seal may be pressed out and a new one fitted. Fill seal
lip with LM grease. Examine the oil seal wear ring mounted on the pump shaft. If
wear is detected, replacement is required.

©Godiva, Warwick 24
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
Refitting

All components must be clean and free from blemishes.

Place a new O ring over the protruding main bearing and into the chamfer in the
bearing housing.

With a new oil seal mounted in the seal housing, fill seal lip with LM grease. Locate
the assembly on to the main bearing, engage 6 socket head cap screws finger tight
to ensure the seal housing sits flat on the face of the bearing. Tighten 6 screws
progressively until the tightening torque is 28Nm (21 lbs. ft).

Insert a new O ring into the seal wear ring and push on to pump shaft (the outside
lead chamfer leading through the oil seal), followed by the water flinger. Refit pump
head per Section 8. The bearing housing must be refilled to the correct level with the
recommended oil.

©Godiva, Warwick 25
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Section 10

REAR END OIL SEAL AND WEAR RING

For access to the rear end shaft and oil seal, it is necessary to disconnect propeller
shaft from pump drive flange and drain oil from the bearing housing by removing the
drain plug (rear end, centre bottom) catching the oil in a suitable receptacle.

Remove the tacho sender and fit shaft locking screw (Tool No 60275/11) locating the
spigot in to one of the drive flange holes. Remove the drive flange nut and
lockwashers. Remove the shaft locking screw and withdraw the drive flange.

Remove 4 oil seal mounting flange bolts and washers to remove mounting flange – a
new oil seal may be fitted at this stage. If the rear oil seal wear ring shows signs of
wear, it must be replaced by firstly removing drive shaft key to allow withdrawal of
wear ring.

Refitting

All components must be clean and free from blemishes.

After replacing the shaft O ring and oil seal wear ring, the shaft key must be refitted
and the oil seal housing refitted, together with its mounted oil seal, the tapped boss
for the tacho sender towards the top of the bearing housing as viewed from the drive
end. Clamp in position with the 4 bolts and washers. Refit the drive flange and lock
its rotational position by means of Tool No 60275/11. Fit a new pair of lockwashers
followed by the shaft nut, which should be tightened to 300Nm (220 lbs. ft). Remove
the locking tool and refit the tacho sender unit. Refill the bearing housing to the
correct level using the recommended oil.

©Godiva, Warwick 26
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Section 11

BEARING HOUSING
The following section should only be necessary if worn or damaged bearings are
suspected.

To Remove

It is necessary to strip the pump assembly in accordance with all the foregoing
sections and drain the bearing housing of oil. After the removal of front and rear oil
seal mounts (Sections 10 and 11), the shaft assembly should be supported and
pressed or lightly tapped with a hide faced hammer forwards from the rear end until
the two front bearings are free and carefully withdrawn from the bearing housing. To
disassemble the drive shaft components, support the oil flinger nearest to the main
bearings on 2 parallel bearers and gently press the shaft from the rear end until the
inner race of the rear bearing is clear of its location diameter. The remaining
components are slide fitted to the shaft.

To remove the front-matched angular contact bearings, support the inner race
adjacent to the largest shaft diameter on 2 parallel bearers and press the shaft from
the front end of the shaft until both bearings are free of the drive shaft. The rear end
outer roller bearing assembly is a slide fit in the housing.

To Rebuild

All components should be clean and free from defects. The matched angular
contact bearing pair should be assembled with the inner race largest faces furthest
apart. Lightly oil or grease the shaft bearing diameter and fit the bearings by means
of a press to ensure squareness during assembly.

The bearings must be pressed fully home to the clamping face on the shaft. The
rear end components may be assembled by hand with exception of the rear bearing
inner race, which has to be assembled by press fit, to clamp all other components.

Finally, insert the shaft assembly into the bearing housing and clamp into position
using to front oil seal housing and O ring as described in Section 10. Complete the
shaft assembly by following Section 11.

©Godiva, Warwick 27
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Section 12

GEARBOX (Optional)

The gearbox incorporates a cooling system, which utilises cold water diverted
from the main pump body to flow around the gearbox outer housing and then
return to the pump. The water is always flowing around the gearbox whenever
the pump is operating and pumping water. This section describes the gearbox
when it is in a vertical position in relation to the pump body, other positions are
possible.

The gearbox incorporates an oil filling point , an oil level check point and an oil
drain point for the routine maintenance of the unit. These points are duplicated on
both sides of the gearbox to allow for different installation arrangements.

The oil capacity of the gearbox is approximately 1.5 litres. The photograph below
shows the left side of the gearbox as viewed from the PTO end

Gearbox cooling system

pipework

Gearbox

World Series Pump

Oil filling point

Oil level check point

Oil drain point

The gearbox must be filled with approximately 1.5 litres of the recommended oil
before any operation commences. The recommended oil is BP Energol GR XP
68. If this is not available, the following may be used – Elf Reductelf SP 68, Shell
Omala 68 or equivalent.

Undo the oil filling and level check plugs with a suitable spanner. Ensure no dust
or debris enters the gearbox when the plug is removed. Using a funnel, pour the
oil into the gearbox housing until it overflows from the check level plug. Before
replacing the plugs, apply Loctite 572 to the plug threads to ensure a good seal,
replace and hand tighten with a suitable spanner.

©Godiva, Warwick 28
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 The oil level can be checked by removing one of the oil level check point plugs,
located on both sides of the gearbox, see the photograph above. The oil should
be just up to the lower rim of the hole, which indicates the capacity is 1.5 litres.
Before replacing the plug, apply Loctite 572 to the plug thread to ensure a good
seal, replace and hand tighten with a suitable spanner.

The gearbox oil should be changed completely every 250 running hours or
annually, whichever is sooner.

The gearbox cooling system requires no regular maintenance. If the pump needs
to be drained for any reason, there is a drain located at the lowest point in the
cooling system. To drain the system, either remove the plug, or, if connected to a
remote drain, open the remote drain cock. Allow all water to completely drain
away before replacing the plug or closing the remote drain cock.
Before replacing the drain plug, apply Loctite 572 to the plug thread to ensure a
good seal, replace and hand tighten with a suitable spanner.

Cooling system drain point

If the oil needs to be drained from the gearbox, remove the appropriate oil drain
plug and allow the oil to drain completely. Before replacing the drain plug, apply
Loctite 572 to the plug thread to ensure a good seal, replace and hand tighten
with a suitable spanner.

Note: Certain maintenance access points will vary according to installation

configuration.

©Godiva, Warwick 29
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Section 13

Pump Tests
Vacuum Test
Place the blanking cap(s) in position on the inlet(s) of the pump and close the
delivery valves. Run the pump at 1000 - 2000 rpm and observe the compound
needle. When a vacuum of .7bar is obtained, stop the pump. This vacuum should be
maintained for at least 15 sec.

If the pump will not hold the vacuum with the blanking caps in position, a leak is
present in the pump, and the pressure test detailed below must be carried out to
trace it.

Should the pump not reach a vacuum of .7bar but will hold a lower pressure, a fault
in the priming system is indicated.

Check as follows:
Check each primer drain hole for water leakage. If leakage is found, replace the
shaft glyde ring as described in section 8.

If the pump will not achieve .7bar vacuum, and will not hold what it does achieve,
there is a leak, and possibly also a fault, in the priming system.

Pressure Test
This test needs only to be carried out if the pump will not hold vacuum with blanking
cap(s) in position, and is intended to trace the leaks responsible for the loss of
vacuum.

Apply a water pressure of 3.5 - 7.0 bar to the pump and check for leaks. The area
causing the leak should be visible, and can be dismantled and rectified. If no leaks
are apparent, the leakage must lie between the priming valve and the primer. Points
to be checked are:
1. The inlet seal in the primer end cap
2. The priming valve diaphragm

TRV Test
With the pump primed, close all discharges. Run the pump at approximately
2800rpm to permit it to heat up. The TRV should open and discharge water when the
pump temperature is in the order of 45 - 55°C with the low temperature option and
70-75oC with the high temperature option. Observe the discharge, if it open to
atmosphere, or feel the discharge pipe become warm if it returns to the vehicle tank.
Open a pump discharge valve to permit cool water to enter the pump. The flow from
the TRV should now cease.

©Godiva, Warwick 30
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Section 14

Delivery Valve Maintenance

1. Ball Valves

2. UK Type with Instantaneous Connector

3. Continental Type with Instantaneous Connector

©Godiva, Warwick 31
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Section 14

Delivery Valves

Ball Valve Type

The ball valve should not be dismantled unless it is functioning unsatisfactorily.
There are two possible faults and the method of correcting them is as follows:

1. Water leaking round the ball

This is due to the O Ring not pressing tightly enough against the ball. Remove the
bolts and spring washers and separate the coupling end tube from the ball valve
housing. Turn the O Ring over so that it presents a new face to the Ball Valve, or fit a
new O Ring. Rub a little Molybdenum Disulphide Powder into the surface of the ball
where it contacts the O Ring. Leave the original washers or the same thickness of
new washers, between the faces of the coupling end tube and the valve housing.

In the case of old valves which have seen extremely arduous service, it may be
necessary to fit a new ball, pivot or valve stem. To do this, remove the screw
securing the valve stem cap to the ball valve housing and lift off the handle
assembly.

Remove the nut on the underside of the valve housing and push the ball pivot pin
towards the centre of the ball. Remove the spring and take out the two half-rings
securing the valve stem. Push out the valve stem and withdraw the ball. Fit the new
part required and reassemble, reversing the above procedure. Use a right angled
screwdriver to hold the pivot pin when tightening the pivot pin nut. Ensure that the
handle is fitted in the correct position. Fit the stem O Ring and ensure that the two
half rings are correctly positioned.

2. Water leaking up the valve stem

If this occurs, remove the handle and stem as in "1" above and fit a new valve stem
O Ring, rubbing a little molybdenum Disulphide Powder into the bore of the valve
stem cap.

1 Valve Stem 9 Spring

2 Valve Stem Seal 10 Coupling Release Cap
3 Valve Housing 11 Release Cam
4 Ball Valve 12 Closure Disc
5 Ball pivot and Spring 13 Operating Handle
6 O Ring 14 Circlip
7 Coupling End Tube 15 Joint Washers
8 Coupling Release Bolt

Part Nos Light Alloy I/C Gunmetal I/C

LH TH137 TH153/100
RH TH138 TH154/100

©Godiva, Warwick 32
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Screw-down Type
Godiva Part Number 56544/01 Light Alloy and 56544/05 Gunmetal (Instantaneous
Connector Versions)

Pump Delivery Valve 2 1/2" Female

Instantaneous (single twist) to BS336

Dia. A

Item Description Item Description

1 Main Body 15 Retaining Washer
2 Inlet 16 Washer Insert
3 Outlet 17 Instantaneous washer
4 Pivot Pin 18 Twist Release Knob
5 O Ring 19 Release Cam
6 Circlip 20 Release Spring
7 Screw Down Handle 21 Release Plunger
8 Domed Nut 22 Knob Closure Disc
9 Spring Washer 23 Nyloc Nut
10 O Ring 24 O Ring
11 Screw Down Spindle 25 Countersunk Screw
12 Roll Pin 26 Plain Washer
13 Non Return Flap 27 Moly Grease
14 Non Return Flap Washer

Twice Yearly Servicing Procedure, Full Assembly:

A. Check that Screw Down Spindle "11" rotates freely. Regrease with B.F.L. Moly
Grease.
B. Check that Non-Return Flap "13" is free to articulate and that Washer "14" is
undamaged. Regrease Pivot Pin "4".
C. Check O Rings "10", "5" and "24". Replace where necessary.

©Godiva, Warwick 33
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
Instantaneous Outlet Servicing Procedure:

1 Knob Closure Disc

2 Twist Release Knob
3 Twist Release Cam
4 Twist Release Bolt
5 2 1/2" Inst Seal
6 2 1/2" Twist Release Body
7 Nut
8 Coil Spring
9 Sel-Lock Pin

Dia.B
Inspection
A. Flush out equipment with clean water after use
B. Inspect equipment monthly and follow maintenance procedures at least once
every year
C. Inspect release mechanism for free movement
D. Inspect the rubber seal

Maintenance
If signs of wear or breakdown of the mechanism occur, strip down and replace parts
as follows:
1. Remove Knob Closure Disc "1". If the disc is of plastic type, insert pointed tool
into hole in disc and prise out. If the disc is metal, use an Ajax ladder key locating
in the 2 holes in the disc and unscrew anti-clockwise.
2. Unscrew nut "7" using a socket spanner and Knob "2" can then be removed.
3. Withdraw Bolt "4" and Spring "8" from the inside of the female instantaneous
body.
4. Check for signs of dirt, wear or corrosion of the Spring, clean the parts and
reassemble. If wear has occurred replace the affected parts with spares.
5. Reassemble the mechanism by reversing the foregoing instructions using a
lubricating grease on the Spring and the Bolt.
6. When tightening Nut "7" the tension on the spring is correct when the leading
edge of the curved face of Bolt "4" is level with the bolt hole edge as shown in
Dia. B above.
7. Check Seal "5" for dirt, cuts or damage to seal lip after cleaning. If damaged,
replace with spare seal.

Special Notes
♦ The recommended lubricant for the bolt and spring is Molybdenum Disulphide
Grease (Lithium Grease)
♦ Always use a new locknut when reassembling the mechanism.
©Godiva, Warwick 34
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 Servicing Procedures - Continental Delivery Valves

Item Description
1 Body, incl. Nipple
3 Spindle
4 Guide Sleeve
4.1 O-Ring
5 X-Ring
6 Guide Axle Complete
7 Tap Washer
8 Valve Plate Complete
9 Tap Washer
10 Compression Spring
11 Release Knob Assembly
12 Handwheel
13 Washer
14 Cap Nut

Function
The valve opens and closes by turning the
handwheel anti-clockwise and clockwise
respectively and has an integrated, automatic
non-return device. The handwheel should be
opened until the spindle travels against the
stop and then twisted half a turn in the
opposite direction.

When the pump is temporarily stopped, the

non-return valve keeps the delivery hose filled
and prevents the water in the hoses from
draining via the pump inlet.

To drain filled delivery hoses, especially when

hoses are connected to a dry riser at buildings,
pull Release Knob (11). The handwheel may
now be turned further in the opening direction
and water is allowed to drain via the pump.
Maintenance
The spindle should be greased (lubricated) on a quarterly basis, using a proprietary waterproof grease
such as Shell Retinex A or equivalent.

Caution
When opening the valve do not force the handwheel against its stop. NB. Max. working pressure is
16bar.

©Godiva, Warwick 35
June 2008
WS Main Man Iss5 June 2008
 World
Series
WS - Single Pressure Pump
- OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS -

Godiva, Warwick
Issue 3 April 2010
GP/158/00
Company policy is one of continuous improvement. We therefore reserve the right to amend specifications without
notice or obligation
-1-
 INDEX
1. General Page

1.1 Amendment record 3

1.1 Conventions 3
1.2 Pump Specification Number System 4
1.3 Safety 5
1.4 Speed and Output Limits 6

2. Detailed Features 7

2.1 Filter 7
2.2 Primers 7
2.3 Oil Level 7
2.4 Pump Draining 7

3. Pump Operation Principle 8

4. Performance Curves 9

4.1 Low Pressure Curve WS 2010

4.2 Low Pressure Curve WS 3010
4.3 Low Pressure Curve WS 4010
4.4 Low Pressure Curve WS 6010

Godiva, Warwick
Issue 3 April 2010
GP/158/00
Company policy is one of continuous improvement. We therefore reserve the right to amend specifications without
notice or obligation
-2-
1.1 Amendment Record

Model: World Series Single Pressure Pump

Mod Date Page/ Amendment New
s Issue No.
1 April 10 Addition of performance curve WS4010 Issue 3,
2010 ref.DS570

1.2 Conventions

Rotation - When viewed from drive flange end of

pump, and refers to the direction of rotation
of the drive flange.

Handedness - When viewed from the suction end of pump.

Front - Suction end of pump.

Rear - Drive flange end of pump.

N.B. When a Godiva close-coupled gearbox is fitted the pump rotates in the
opposite direction to the drive flange.

Godiva, Warwick
Issue 3 April 2010
GP/158/00
Company policy is one of continuous improvement. We therefore reserve the right to amend specifications without
notice or obligation
-3-
1.3 Pump Specification Number System

WSA3010CG/1xx

Numerical Variant

Priming system
0 - No Priming
1 - Friction Drive WRP
2 - E/Mag Clutch WRP
3 - Piston Primers

G - Gearbox (if fitted)

C - Counter clockwise rotation

Blank – standard clockwise
rotation

Nominal Pressure in Bars

Nominal Flow in l/min / 100

A - Aluminium Pump Material

B - Bronze Pump Material

T - Twin Pressure Pump

S - Single Pressure Pump

World Series

In addition to the above there will be additional designation letters to signify

reverse rotation or gearbox option etc.

Godiva, Warwick
Issue 3 April 2010
GP/158/00
Company policy is one of continuous improvement. We therefore reserve the right to amend specifications without
notice or obligation
-4-
1.4 Safety
Training

It is essential that Godiva pumps are operated ONLY by trained personnel.

Maintenance

It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the equipment is maintained

in a safe operational condition, as per regulation 5 in the Provision and Use of
Work Equipment Regulations 1998.

Pump

All rotating components must be adequately guarded against accidental

contact.
Under no circumstances must any item or hand be inserted into the suction
tube whilst the unit is running.
Discharge hoses must not be disconnected whilst they are pressurised.
No component must be unfastened whilst the unit is running.
When installing or removing the pump from the chassis, suitable lifting
equipment must be used.

Noise

When the unit is running, noise will be generated and suitable ear protection
should be worn.

Godiva, Warwick
Issue 3 April 2010
GP/158/00
Company policy is one of continuous improvement. We therefore reserve the right to amend specifications without
notice or obligation
-5-
1.5 Speed and Output Limits

The pump speed should be limited so that the maximum low pressure
attainable is limited to 20 bar.

The Priming speed should be limited to 2500 RPM pump speed. However, if
piston primers are fitted the pump can be primed at idle speed – however, this
will take longer.

Godiva, Warwick
Issue 3 April 2010
GP/158/00
Company policy is one of continuous improvement. We therefore reserve the right to amend specifications without
notice or obligation
-6-
2. 0 Detailed Features

2.1 Filter

The filter provides filtered water to the primer lift-off feed. This should be
occasionally removed and flushed.

2.2 Primers

The piston primers require no regular maintenance. However, if the primer

discharge does not continually fall (e.g. discharging into the vehicle tank) a
means must be provided to drain the discharge hoses to prevent freezing.

It should be remembered that each time a water ring primer operates a small
amount of pump water is carried over into the header tank and will gradually
dilute the anti-freeze concentration.

Therefore anti-freeze concentration should be regularly checked and topped

up when necessary.

2.3 Oil Level

The oil level is checked by means of a combined oil level dipstick and filler.
It is essential that the oil level be checked before the unit is run.

2.4 Draining the Pump

a) Open the volute drain valve until all flow stops.

b) Open the primer drain system, if fitted, until all flow stops.
In order to completely drain the piston priming system the pump should
be idled for a few seconds after use with no water in the volute and the
drain valve open. This ‘dry prime’ will then evacuate all residual water
from the priming system.

It is not recommended that the pump be retained full of water since this
could result in freezing in cold climates.

Remember to close all drains before trying to re-prime the pump.

Godiva, Warwick
Issue 3 April 2010
GP/158/00
Company policy is one of continuous improvement. We therefore reserve the right to amend specifications without
notice or obligation
-7-
3. Pump Operation Principle
The Godiva WS single stage pump will deliver high volumes at low pressure.

The suction connection must always be connected to a water source, whilst

the pump is operating.

When the pump is first started, if there is no pressure developed, the priming
device will automatically operate to prime the pump. When the prime is
established, the primer will disengage automatically.
The pressure developed by the centrifugal impeller will be related to the
speed of the pump shaft, and the quantity of water being discharged. Varying
pump speed and delivery valve setting will control the pressure and flowrate.

Overheat Protection

If the pump is left running at high speed, with reduced or no discharge,

overheating may occur. As the pump temperature increases to 45-50ºC the
optional thermal relief valve opens to divert pump water to one of three
locations:

a) To ground, which is the easiest and lowest cost option.

b) Into the vehicle tank (but not if a foam system is fitted)
c) Into a holding tank for draining later.

This allows fresh water circulation to cool the pump.

Godiva, Warwick
Issue 3 April 2010
GP/158/00
Company policy is one of continuous improvement. We therefore reserve the right to amend specifications without
notice or obligation
-8-
4. Performance Curves

Godiva, Warwick
Issue 3 April 2010
GP/158/00
Company policy is one of continuous improvement. We therefore reserve the right to amend specifications without
notice or obligation
-9-
 Godiva, Warwick
Issue 3 April 2010
GP/158/00
Company policy is one of continuous improvement. We therefore reserve the right to amend specifications without
notice or obligation
- 10 -
 Godiva, Warwick
Issue 3 April 2010
GP/158/00
Company policy is one of continuous improvement. We therefore reserve the right to amend specifications without
notice or obligation
- 11 -
 FSA100 Rev1206
Document Number:
XE-FSA0PM-R0A

AUTOMATIC
AROUND-THE-PUMP
FOAM SYSTEM
MODELS: FSA015, FSA030, FSA060, FSA120

FIRE RESEARCH CORPORATION

www.fireresearch.com
26 Southern Blvd., Nesconset, NY11767
TEL ( 631 ) 724-8888 FAX ( 631 ) 360-9727 TOLL FREE 1-800-645-0074
1
FSA100 Rev1206

CONTENTS
Table of Contents

CONTENTS ............................................................................................................... 2
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................... 3
Overview ................................................................................................................ 3
Features.................................................................................................................. 4
Specifications......................................................................................................... 4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION....................................................................................... 6
Components .......................................................................................................... 6
Controls and Indicators ......................................................................................... 8
INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................... 10
Install Control Module ......................................................................................... 10
Install Metering Valve Assembly and Eductor ..................................................... 10
Install Flow Sensor(s) .......................................................................................... 12
Install Summing Device........................................................................................ 18
Install Cables ........................................................................................................ 18
Figure 8. Cables ....................................................................................................... 19
THEORY OF OPERATION .................................................................................... 20
OPERATION ............................................................................................................ 22
Static Operational Check ..................................................................................... 22
Pump Intake and Discharge Pressure Requirements ........................................... 23
Operational Check ............................................................................................... 24
CALIBRATION ........................................................................................................ 28
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS ................................................................................. 30
MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................... 31
Flushing the System ............................................................................................. 31
Cleaning the Paddlewheel Sensors ....................................................................... 31
DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................. 32

List of Figures/Tables
Figure 1. Plumbing Schematic ................................................................................... 7
Figure 2. Controls and Indicators .............................................................................. 9
Figure 3. Control Module Dimensions ..................................................................... 11
Figure 4. Metering Valve Assembly and Eductor Installation ................................... 11
Figure 5. Flow Sensor Location Guidelines............................................................. 13
Figure 6. Saddle Clamp Installation ......................................................................... 15
Figure 7. Weldment Installation ................................................................................ 17
Figure 8. Cables ....................................................................................................... 19
Table 1. Pump Pressure Requirements .................................................................. 23
Figure 9. Sample Displays ....................................................................................... 25
Figure 10. Summing Device ...................................................................................... 29
Figure 11. Eductor Drawing ...................................................................................... 32
2
 FSA100 Rev1206

INTRODUCTION
Overview
The AutoFoam is an around-the-pump foam proportioning metering system. It
will automatically maintain a selected foam percent mixture regardless of water flow
fluctuations. The AutoFoam is microprocessor controlled and is automatic in operation.
The AutoFoam has easy to use controls and indicators. It becomes operational at
the push of a single button. Push buttons select the foam proportioning percent. An
upper multifunction display shows the selected foam %, foam flow, and the total gallons
of foam used. A lower multifunction display shows the discharge flow rate and the
total gallons of water used. The operator can override automatic control by using the
manual override buttons to open or close the foam metering valve.
Around-the-pump proportioning systems operate with an eductor installed
between the water pump intake and pump discharge. A small flow of water from the
pump discharge passes through the eductor and creates a vacuum that draws foam
concentrate into the eductor.
The principle behind the AutoFoam system is straight forward. The flow rate on
the discharge side of the pump is measured. A metering valve is opened to allow foam
concentrate to flow and this flow rate is measured. The program compares the flow
rates and adjusts the metering valve to provide the correct amount of foam concentrate.
The foam concentrate is injected into the intake side of the pump by a venturi eductor
and mixed with water. This produces the correct foam proportioning percent at the
pump discharge. The AutoFoam constantly monitors foam and water flow and adjusts
the metering valve to ensure proper foam proportioning.

Features
Complete Automatic Foam Proportioning
Push Button Control
Flow Totaling for Both Foam and Water
Powers-Up at the Previous Proportioning Percent
Manual Override
Multiple Discharge Sensors (Optional)

3
FSA100 Rev1206

Specifications
Power
Supply Voltage: 12 VDC Nominal (24 VDC System Available)
Supply Current: 1.5 Amp Maximum
Foam Concentrate Induction
FSA120: 2 - 120 GPM
FSA060: 1.5 - 60 GPM
FSA030: 0.5 - 30 GPM
FSA015: 0.5 - 15 GPM
Maximum Discharge Flow Rate
All Systems: 3000 GPM (Dependent on % Foam Solution)
Proportioning Ratio
FSA120: 1 - 10 %
FSA060: 0.5 - 6 %
FSA030: 0.5 - 6 %
FSA015: 0.5 - 6 %
Control Module
Power: 12 VDC Nominal
Logic: 8-BIT Microcontroller
Housing: Painted Aluminum
Weight: 2 LBS
Environmental: Totally Sealed Enclosure with O-Rings
Connectors: Deutsch, Industrially Sealed
Discharge Flow Sensors
Type: Paddlewheel Type (Optional Moounts)
Sensor Material: Acetal (Delrin) with Stainless Steel (316) Shaft

4
 FSA100 Rev1206
Metering Valve Assembly
Valve: Variable Orifice Linear Flow, With Position Sensing
Flow Sensors: Paddlewheel Type
Weight: 24 LBS
Overall Length: 16.25"
Overall Height: 10"
Couplings
FSA120: 2.0"
FSA060: 1.5"
FSA030 1.5"
FSA015: 1.5"
Eductor
Material: Stainless Steel (304)
Weight: 4.2 LBS (FSA120)
Length
FSA120: 20"
FSA060: 12.5"
FSA030 12.5"
FSA015: 12.5"
Water Flow Rate Through Eductor @ 150 PSI
FSA120: 205 GPM
FSA060: 130 GPM
FSA030: 130 PM
FSA015: 50 GPM
Couplings: Victaulic (Grooved Type)
FSA120: Water Inlet 2.0", Foam Inlet 2.0", Discharge 2.0"
FSA060: Water Inlet 1.5", Foam Inlet 1.5", Discharge 1.5"
FSA030: Water Inlet 1.5", Foam Inlet 1.5", Discharge 1.5"
FSA015: Water Inlet 1.5", Foam Inlet 1.5", Discharge 1.5"

5
FSA100 Rev1206

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Components
The AutoFoam system consist of the following components (Refer to Figure 1):
Control Module
Metering Valve Assembly
Eductor
Discharge Flow Sensor(s) and Sensor Housing(s)
Summing Device
Cables
Control Module
The control module is panel mounted and has a front bezel measuring 4.25 by 4.25
inches. All controls and indicators are located on the front of the control module.
(Refer to Controls and Indicators.)
Metering Valve Assembly
The metering valve assembly includes a foam metering valve, two paddlewheel
type flow sensors, and mounting flanges. The metering valve has a position transducer
and it is internally calibrated for flow. The meter valve housing is brass. The flow
sensors are in stainless steel mounts.
Eductor
The eductor is located in a water by-pass loop and foam is sucked through it into
the suction side of the pump. It is made of stainless steel or brass.
Discharge Flow Sensor(s)
The discharge flow sensor is mounted on the pump discharge manifold. It provides
an input signal to the summing device that is proportional to the discharge flow. If the
multiple discharge flow sensor option is installed discharge flow sensors will be
mounted at each discharge.
Summing Device
The summing device is connected between the control module and the flow sensors.
It contains the potentiometers used in flow calibration and provides flow datd to the
control module.
Cables
Interconnecting cables are provided. (Refer to Install Cables.)

6
 Foam Tank
CONTROL
MODULE

Power
12 VDC
Foam
Isolating
Valve
SUMMING DISCHARGE
DEVICE FLOW SENSOR

Check
Valve

7
EDUCTOR

Pump
Discharge

METERING VALVE
with DUAL FOAM

Figure 1. Plumbing Schematic

Check FLOW SENSORS Pump
Valve

Pump
Emergency Manual Suction
Bypass Valve

Flush Valve
FSA100 Rev1206
FSA100 Rev1206

Controls and Indicators

All controls and indicators are located on the front of the control module. It contains
the push button electronic controls and digital displays. (Refer to Figure 2.)
OFF Button
Press this button to turn the AutoFoam system off. The metering valve will go to
the closed position.
FOAM ON Button
Press this button to put the AutoFoam system in the automatic mode. It is used at
start up, to exit the manual override mode, or to show the selected foam percent in the
upper display.
Upper Display
An upper multifunction display shows foam concentrate flow, selected foam
percent, or the total gallons of foam concentrate used. The display will show OFF
when the system is off. When the system is turned on the selected foam percent is
displayed for three seconds then foam flow is displayed. When the FOAM % buttons
are pressed the display will show the selected foam percent for three seconds then go
back to show foam flow.
FOAM % Buttons
Press these buttons to raise or lower the percent of foam that is inducted. When
the increase or decrease button is pressed the upper display will show the selected
percent.
Lower Display
A lower multifunction display shows the discharge flow rate and the total gallons
of water used. If there is water flow on the discharge side of the pump, flow rate will
be displayed even if the AutoFoam system is off.
TOTAL Button
Press and hold the TOTAL button to display the total gallons of foam (upper
display x 1) and water (lower display x 100) that has been discharged.
Manual OVERRIDE Buttons
Press and hold the OPEN or CLOSE button for three seconds to set the system in
manual mode. The upper and lower displays will flash to indicate the system is in
manual mode and they will continue to show correct foam and water flow rates. In the
manual mode the operator is in control of opening or closing the foam metering valve
to set how much foam concentrate flows. To exit the manual mode the FOAM ON
button is pressed to start the automatic mode or the OFF button is pressed to turn the
system off.
8
 FSA100 Rev1206

FOAM
OFF ON Upper
Button Button Display Increase
Foam
Percent
Button
FOAM
ON
OFF

M ANUAL
FOAM FLOW

0PEN P% FOAM %

CLOSE WATER FLOW

OVERRIDE
Decrease
Foam
Percent
TOTAL Button

Manual TOTAL Lower

OVERRIDE Button Display
Buttons

Figure 2. Controls and Indicators

9
FSA100 Rev1206

INSTALLATION
Note: Plumbing systems are always unique and may cause small deviations
in the factory calibration. It is recommended that the calibration procedure
be performed after installation.

Install Control Module

1. Measure and mark mounting location for control module panel cutout and
mounting screw holes. Make sure there is clearance behind the panel before
cutting holes. Refer to Figure 3 for layout and dimensions.
2. Cut out a 3.75-inch diameter hole and drill four holes for 10-32 mounting
screws.
3. Place the control module in position and secure with four screws.

Install Metering Valve Assembly and Eductor

Four (4) piping connections must be made. (Refer to Figure 4.) Recommended
interconnecting pipe diameters for FSA120 are 2.0" and for FSA015/030/060 use 1.5".
Note: It is important that the metering valve assembly and the eductor be
mounted below the bottom of the foam tank.
Note: The metering valve assembly must be mounted so that the motor
assembly is on top.
1. Connect the pump discharge to the eductor inlet (A). Reinforced hose may
be used. If the water flow to the eductor needs to be shut off, a valve may be
placed in this line. This valve should have a 2.0" (1.5" for FSA015/030/060 )
throat and should be at least six (6) inches away from the eductor.
2. Connect the metering valve assembly outlet to the eductor foam inlet (B).
Piping must have groove couplings.
3. Connect the pump suction to the eductor discharge (C). Reinforced hose
may be used.
4. Connect the foam tank to the metering valve assembly foam inlet (D).
Reinforced hose may be used. (The metering valve assembly inlet is the side
where the two foam flow sensors are located). The piping into the metering
valve assembly inlet must have a straight run of at least eight (8) inches. A
check valve must be placed in this line at least one (1) foot away from the
metering valve assembly inlet. A swing-check valve is preferred.

10
 FSA100 Rev1206

4.25" 1"
3.5" 4.5"

4.25" 3.75"
3.5"

10-32
Hardware

Figure 3. Control Module Dimensions

From
Foam Tank Valve motor assembly Pump
must be on top. Discharge

Eductor A
D

B
Metering Valve
Assembly

C
Bypass and
Flush Valves

Pump
Suction
Interconnecting pipe diameters:
FSA120 system 2.0"
FSA015/030/060 system 1.5"

Figure 4. Metering Valve Assembly and Eductor Installation

11
FSA100 Rev1206

Install Flow Sensor(s)

There are several ways to install FRC paddlewheel type flow sensors. Mounting
options include saddle clamps, weldments, pipe tees, and special adapters. Each mount
will meet particular plumbing requirements.
The maximum pressure for a flow sensor installation is 600 PSI.
Note: Plumbing systems are always unique and may cause small deviations
in the factory calibration. It is recommended that the calibration procedure
be performed after installatoin .
Flow Sensor Location
The location of the flow sensor in the plumbing system is critical. The flow of
water at and around the sensor must be laminar, or smooth, to ensure accurate flow
measurements. There must be enough straight pipe run before the flow sensor location
to allow the water stream to stabilize into a uniform flow. Guidelines for selecting
flow sensor locations are outlined in Figure 5.
When the sensor is mounted after an area in the plumbing that tends to increase
water stream turbulence (a valve, increase in pipe diameter, etc.), it is critical that
steps are taken to stabilize the flow.
• When a pipe is reduced in diameter the water stream tends to be squeezed
into a more uniform flow. This can be used to help stabilize flow when
there is not a sufficient pipe run up stream.
• FRC offers an optional flow conditioner that replaces the standard sensor
housing. It protrudes into the water stream at the sensor location and is
specially shaped to reduce local turbulence.

12
 FSA100 Rev1206

The preferred location for the mounting

of a flow sensor is on the top half of the
pipe. The best orientation is vertical. If
the sensor is mounted on the bottom of
the pipe, it may be susceptible to the
accumulation of dirt. Best Orientation

When mounting the sensor after the pipe

diameter is reduced the length L must be After Reduction
at least 2 times the pipe diameter. L > 2 X PIPE DIA.

When mounting the sensor after a valve

the length L must be at least 14 times the After Valve
pipe diameter. L > 14 X PIPE DIA.

When mounting the sensor after an elbow

the length L must be at least 6 times the After Elbow
pipe diameter. L > 6 X PIPE DIA.

When mounting the sensor before a valve

or an elbow the length L must be at least Before Valve or Elbow
equal to the pipe diameter. L > 1 X PIPE DIA.

Figure 5. Flow Sensor Location Guidelines

13
FSA100 Rev1206
Saddle Clamp Installation
Note: Ensure that the mounting location meets the requirements for uniform
water flow. (Refer to Flow Sensor Location.)
Note: Ensure that there is enough room for the saddle clamp, sensor, and
connector to fit. (Refer to Figure 6.)
1. Drill and deburr a 1-11/16" to 1-3/4" diameter hole at mounting location.
2. Clean pipe surface in area where saddle clamp gasket will seal.
Note: The sensor housing is epoxied in the saddle clamp with the alignment
tab in the correct position and is not meant to be removed.
3. Place saddle clamp over hole with sensor housing centered.
4. Tighten saddle clamp nuts until gasket makes a good tight seal.
5. Insert flow sensor into sensor housing. Align flat spot on sensor rim with
alignment tab and make sure o-ring is in the groove.
Note: The retainer cap only needs to be hand tightened. There is an inside
lip that will stop the cap from turning when it makes contact with the
alignment tab. This provides the correct pressure to make the seal at the
o-ring. Make sure the flow sensor does not disengage from the alignment
tab and rotate.
6. Install retainer cap and hand tighten.
7. Connect flow sensor cable. (Refer to Install Cables.)

14
 FSA100 Rev1206

Retainer Cap
Pipe Size Dimensions
(Sch 40) A B C
O-Ring 2 5.5 3.9 2.9
2.5 5.5 3.9 2.8
Paddlewheel 3 5.9 3.9 2.8
Flow Sensor 3.5 6.8 4.3 2.8
4 6.8 4.3 2.8
Alignment 5 8 4.3 2.8
Tab Measurements are in inches.

Sensor
Housing

Saddle
Clamp

A
Note: Allow a minimum of 2
inches clearence at the sensor
top for removal/installation of
the connector.

Note: When the retainer cap is

tightened make sure the sensor
rim flat spot does not disengage
from the alignment tab and
allow the flow sensor to rotate.

Note: These dimensions are typical

and are given to be used as an aid
in determining mounting locations
for flow sensors.

Figure 6. Saddle Clamp Installation

15
FSA100 Rev1206
Weldment Installation
Note: Ensure that the mounting location meets the requirements for uniform
water flow. (Refer to Flow Sensor Location.)
Note: Ensure that there is enough room for the weldment, sensor, and
connector to fit. (Refer to Figure 7.)
1. Drill and deburr a 1-11/16" to 1-3/4" diameter hole at mounting location.
2. Center weldment mount over hole and weld it to pipe. The weld must be
continuous around the fitting with no gaps or voids.
3. Screw sensor housing into weldment. Run it down far enough to make sure it
will go through the pipe freely then back it out.
Note: The paddlewheel sensor must be correctly aligned in the water stream.
The alignment tab is used to set the position of the sensor. Make sure that
the alignment tab is centered on the pipe centerline. (Refer to Figure 7.)
4. Set sensor housing to dimension A in Figure 7. Make sure the alignment tab is
centered on the pipe as shown (it can be on upstream or downstream side).
5. Screw on tru-seal locknut and tighten with a 2" wrench using light to medium
torque. Make sure that housing does not rotate causing dimension A to change
and the sensor housing alignment tab remains centered.
6. Insert flow sensor into sensor housing. Align flat spot on sensor rim with the
alignment tab and make sure o-ring is in groove.
Note: The retainer cap only needs to be hand tightened. There is an inside
lip that will stop the cap from turning when it makes contact with the
alignment tab. This provides the correct pressure to make the seal at the
o-ring. Make sure the flow sensor does not disengage from the alignment
tab and rotate.
7. Install retainer cap and hand tighten.
8. Connect flow sensor cable. (Refer to Install Cables.)

16
 FSA100 Rev1206

Retainer Cap Pipe Size Dimension

(Sch 40) A
O-Ring 1.5 1.95 to 1.80
2 1.95 to 1.80
Paddlewheel 2.5 1.90 to 1.75
Flow Sensor 3 1.88 to 1.73
3.5 1.88 to 1.73
4 1.85 to 1.70
Tru-Seal Measurements are in inches.
Locknut
Alignment
Tab Make sure that the alignment tab is
centered on the pipe centerline.
Sensor
Housing

Pipe
Centerline

Weldment
Alignment
Tab

Note: Allow a minimum of 2 inches

clearence at the sensor top for removal/
installation of the connector.

Note: When the retainer cap is

tightened make sure the sensor 2.8"
rim flat spot does not disengage
from the alignment tab and
allow the flow sensor to rotate.
2.5"
Note: These dimensions are
typical and are given to be
used as an aid in determining
mounting locations for flow
sensors.
Figure 7. Weldment Installation
17
FSA100 Rev1206

Install Summing Device

The summing device mounts with two screws. Make sure there is room to connect
the cables and adjust the potentiometers.

Install Cables
Cables need to be connected from the control module to power, to the metering
valve, and to the summing device. The standard AutoFoam has three cables connected
from the summing device to the flow sensors. (Refer to Figure 8.)
1. Connect the control module power cable. A 5' power extension cable is
provided. Connect the extension cable red wire to the truck 12/24 VDC
(positive). Connect the black wire to ground.
2. Connect two (2) foam flow sensors to the summing device with the extension
cables supplied .
3. Connect the discharge flow sensor to the summing device with the extension
cable supplied.
For the multiple discharge flow sensor option, connect all discharge flow
sensors to the discharge flow summing device. The output of the discharge
flow summing device is then connected to the AutoFoam summing device. (If
a flow display is needed, a Y-cable can be used to connect the flow sensor to
both the summing device and a flow display.)
4. Connect the summing device to the control module.
5. Connect the metering valve to the control module.
Perform the Static Operational Check at this time to verify manual operation of
the metering valve. (Refer to Operation section.)

18
 FSA100 Rev1206

AUTOFOAM

Summing Box

Metering
Power

Valve
Red Wire
12/24
VDC

Black Wire
GND

Metering Valve and

Dual Flow Sensors
AutoFoam
Summing Device
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Multiple Discharge Discharge Flow

Flow Sensor Option Sensor
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Discharge Flow
Summing Device
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

○ ○ ○

○ ○

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Y-Cable

Flow Discharge Flow

Display Sensor
Figure 8. Cables
19
FSA100 Rev1206

THEORY OF OPERATION
The operation of the AutoFoam system is controlled by a microprocessor housed
in the control module. The programming enables the AutoFoam system to operate in
three different modes.
Automatic Mode
This is the normal mode of operation. In this mode of operation the flow rate of
foam concentrate is determined by the percent selected on the control module and
inputs from the flow sensors. The microprocessor controls the opening or closing of
the metering valve to provide the correct foam solution at the pump discharge.
When in the automatic mode the flow sensors provide constant feedback of flow
rate information. Dual flow sensors mounted on the metering valve assembly monitor
foam concentrate flow rate. The discharge flow sensor measures the solution (foam
concentrate and water mixture) flow rate at the discharge side of the pump. This flow
rate information allows the system to maintain the selected foam proportioning regardless
of discharge fluctuations.
The metering valve controls the amount of foam concentrate that flows into the
eductor. The eductor injects the foam concentrate into the suction side of the pump.
The flow rates of the foam concentrate and the foam solution is processed. The flow
rates are displayed and the metering valve is adjusted to produce the selected foam
proportion.
If input data from one of the dual foam concentrate flow sensors is lost the program
will automatically use the information from the one that is operating properly. There is
no loss in performance or accuracy of the system. If input data from both foam flow
sensors is lost, the AutoFoam system will switch over to the fixed program mode.
Fixed Program Mode
The system will enter this mode when there is no input data from both foam
concentrate flow sensors. In this mode of operation the flow rate of foam concentrate
is determined by information stored in the AutoFoam program. When the system is in
this mode an F will be shown in the upper display. The AutoFoam system will exit the
fixed program mode automatically when input data from a foam concentrate flow
sensor is detected.
The foam concentrate flow rate is determined by the percent selected on the control
module and water flow at the discharge. It is an important factor in determining if there
is a failure in the AutoFoam system when there is no input data from the foam concentrate
flow sensors.
When in the fixed program mode stored precalibrated valve position data is used
to adjust the metering valve. There is a transducer in the valve assembly that provides
feedback on the valve position. The valve position is directly related to how much
foam concentrate flows. The program uses the selected foam proportion percent and
the discharge water flow rate to position the valve for the correct foam concentrate rate
of flow. 20
 FSA100 Rev1206
Foam concentrate flow rate less than 9 GPM: At flow rates of 9 GPM or less
there is no output from the flow sensors. This low flow rate is below the minimum that
the flow sensors can detect and they will not provided flow rate data. This condition
does not indicate a failure in the AutoFoam system and will exist if the proportioning
percent and the water flow at the discharge sensor are low.
Foam concentrate flow rate greater than 9 GPM: If there is no output from
the flow sensors a failure in the AutoFoam system is indicated. The upper display will
show an E 2 code when the system is turned off to alert the operator that a failure
occurred. This condition would exist if both foam flow sensors are inoperable because
of some mechanical failure. This could include clogged foam lines or sensors,
disconnected sensor or metering valve cables, open wiring, or no foam in the tank.
When in the fixed program mode stored precalibrated valve position data is used
to adjust the metering valve. There is a transducer in the valve assembly that provides
feedback on the valve position. The valve position is directly related to how much
foam concentrate flows. The program uses the selected foam proportion percent and
the discharge water flow rate to position the valve for the correct foam concentrate rate
of flow.
Manual Mode
When the Manual OVERRIDE OPEN or CLOSE button is pressed and held for
three seconds the system will switch to manual mode. The upper and lower displays
will flash to indicate the system is in the manual mode. The displays will continue to
show correct foam and water flow rates.
When in the manual mode the operator is in control of the amount of foam
concentrate that goes into solution. The OPEN and CLOSE push buttons are used to
control the opening and closing of the metering valve. As the metering valve is opened
or closed the rate of flow of foam concentrate that is injected into solution is changed.
It is up to the operator to monitor the amount of foam in solution at the discharge
and make adjustments manually. The OPEN button will increase the amount foam in
the solution, the CLOSE button will decrease the amount of foam in the solution.
To exit the manual mode the FOAM ON button is pressed to start the automatic
mode or the OFF button is pressed to turn the system off.

21
FSA100 Rev1206

OPERATION
Static Operational Check
This check should be performed after installation, maintenance, or repairs. It is a
valuable tool if troubleshooting is necessary. It test the power and control module to
metering valve wiring, and the manual operation of the metering valve.
Note: Do not flow water or foam for this test.
1. Ensure that the polarity of the control module 12 VDC power connection is
correct. (The red wire is +12 VDC, the black wire is ground.)
2. Turn on power.
Result: Upper display shows OFF.
3. Press FOAM ON button.
Result: Upper display shows a P on left and the last selected percent on right.
After 3 seconds the display shows 0.
4. Press and hold increase Foam % button.
Result: Upper display shows P on left and increasing number on right.
5. Release increase Foam % button.
Result: After 3 seconds the display shows 0.
6. Press and hold decrease Foam % button.
Result: Upper display shows P on left and decreasing number on right.
7. Release decrease Foam % button.
Result: After 3 seconds the display shows 0.
8. Press and hold Manual OVERRIDE OPEN (or CLOSE) button for at least 3
seconds.
Result: Both displays flash to indicate the system is in manual mode.
Note: A brass nut on the metering valve assembly will rotate indicating the
physical movement of the valve. Between the closed and open positions
the nut will rotate approxitmatly 12 turns.
9. Press and hold OPEN button to run the metering valve to fully open position.
Make sure it moves freely without any physical obstructions. (The valve will
stop turning when it reaches the fully opened position.)
10.Press and hold CLOSE button to run the metering valve to fully closed position.
Make sure it moves freely without any physical obstructions. (The valve will
stop turning when it reaches the fully closed position.)

22
 FSA100 Rev1206

Pump Intake and Discharge Pressure Requirements

WARNING: If the recommended minimum pump discharge pressures
are not adhered to, the foam system may operate at partial capacity
or fail to inject foam.

Note: It is recommended that standard operating procedure be to gate the

pump input pressure at less than 20 PSI and adjust the discharge pressure
to more than 140 PSI when foam is used.
For efficient operation around-the-pump foam proportioning systems require a
pump intake to discharge pressure differential. It is recommended that the pump intake
pressure be less than 20 PSI. If operation at a higher intake pressure is necessary the
pressure differential shown in Table 1 has to be adhered to.

Table 1. Pump Pressure Requirements

Pump Intake Pressure Minimum Pump Discharge Pressure
0* 85
20 140
40 200
50 240
70 300
*Note: When pumping in draft consider the intake pressure to be 0 PSI.

23
FSA100 Rev1206

Operational Check
It is very expensive to use foam to test the system. As an alternative a die (e.g. red)
can be used to color water in the foam tank. The color of the discharge allows the
change in foam concentration to be observed. A lighter color indicates less foam in
proportion to water while a darker color indicates more foam in proportion to water.
(Refer to Figure 9 for control module sample displays.)
1. Ensure that the pump intake and discharge pressures will be within minimum
requirements. (Refer to Table 1.)
2. Ensure that the bypass valve and flush valve are closed. Ensure there is enough
foam (colored water) in the foam tank to run this check.
3. Open the foam isolating valve (and the eductor water valve if installed).
4. Pump water. The lower display shows the discharge flow.
5. Press FOAM ON button. The system will be in automatic mode. The upper
display shows the last used proportion percent selected.
6. Press FOAM % increase and decrease buttons to change the foam proportion.
(Foam concentrate (or colored water) will start to be injected if water is flowing
through the pump.) Set the desired foam proportion percent. When the FOAM
% button is pressed the upper display will show the selected percent for 3
seconds then show foam concentrate flow in GPM.
Note: This system can be operated in the manual mode. The metering valve
is opened or closed manually using the Manual OVERRIDE buttons to
change the foam proportioning percent. The operator has to monitor the
discharge flow and make corrections for foam proportioning.
7. Press and hold Manual OVERRIDE OPEN or CLOSE button for 3 seconds.
The system will go into manual operation and the upper and lower displays
will flash. The operator is in control of the metering valve position. The valve
position is adjusted by pressing the OPEN or CLOSE push buttons. The
position of the valve determines the foam concentrate rate of flow.
8. Press FOAM ON button to revert to automatic mode.
9. Press and hold TOTAL button to display the total gallons of foam and water
discharged. The upper display (x 1) shows the amount of foam concentrate
discharge and the lower display ( x 100) shows the amount of water discharged.
10.Press OFF button to turn off the AutoFoam.
Note: The foam system should be flushed after each use. (Refer to
Maintenance section.)

24
 FSA100 Rev1206

AutoFoam system is off.

Upper display shows OFF.
FOAM
ON Lower display is blank or
OFF if pump is running shows
water flow at discharge
M ANUAL
FOAM FLOW
sensor.

0PEN P% FOAM %

CLOSE WATER FLOW

OVERRIDE

TOTAL

AutoFoam system is on.

Upper display shows %
FOAM selected (P on left side
ON indicates % selected is
OFF displayed) after 3 seconds
shows foam flow.
M ANUAL
FOAM FLOW
Lower display shows
0PEN P% FOAM % discharge flow.

CLOSE WATER FLOW

OVERRIDE

TOTAL

Figure 9. Sample Displays

(Sheet 1 of 3)
25
FSA100 Rev1206

AutoFoam system is on.

System is in Fixed
Program mode. FOAM
ON
Upper display flashes OFF
showing –F– alternating
with programmed foam M ANUAL
FOAM FLOW
flow rate.
0PEN P% FOAM %
Lower display shows
discharge flow.
Note: This condition
would exist if there is no CLOSE WATER FLOW
input from the foam
concentrate flow sensors OVERRIDE

TOTAL

AutoFoam system is on.

System is in Automatic
mode. FOAM
ON
Upper display shows OFF
foam concentrate flow.
M ANUAL
FOAM FLOW
Lower display shows
discharge flow. 0PEN P% FOAM %

CLOSE WATER FLOW

OVERRIDE

TOTAL

Figure 9. Sample Displays

(Sheet 2 of 3)
26
 FSA100 Rev1206

AutoFoam system is on.

System is in Manual mode
FOAM both upper and lower
ON displays are flashing.
OFF
Upper display shows
M ANUAL
FOAM FLOW foam concentrate flow.

0PEN P% FOAM % Lower display shows

discharge flow.

CLOSE WATER FLOW

OVERRIDE

TOTAL

AutoFoam system is on.

TOTAL button is pressed
FOAM and held.
ON
OFF Upper display (x 1) shows
the total gallons of foam
M ANUAL
FOAM FLOW concentrate used.

0PEN P% FOAM % Lower display (x 100)

shows the total gallons of
water used.
Note: The number in
CLOSE WATER FLOW lower display indicates
1800 gallons of water has
OVERRIDE flowed.

TOTAL

Figure 9. Sample Displays

(Sheet 3 of 3)
27
FSA100 Rev1206

CALIBRATION
The flow calibration potentiometers are located on the summing device. (Refer to
Figure 10.)
Note: Plumbing systems are always unique and may cause small deviations
in the factory calibration. It is recommended that the calibration procedure
be performed after installation.
Calibrating Discharge Sensor(s)
Note: For multiple discharge flow sensors calibrate each sensor separately.
1. Flow water through the discharge. Ensure a constant pressure is maintained
to obtain a steady flow. Use a precalibrated pitot gauge as a reference.
2. Locate the calibration potentiometer on the flow summing box for the sensor
being tested (Refer to Figure 10).
3. Loosen the locknut on the discharge flow calibration potentiometer (pot.) Use
a small screwdriver to adjust the pot. so that the reading in the lower display
on the control module matches the reference flow. Rotating the pot. clockwise
will increase the flow rate and counter clockwise will decrease the flow rate.
Turn the pot. a little bit at a time to allow the computer averaging to catch up
to the new setting (wait for two seconds between adjustments).
4. Select a second reference flow rate to verify the calibration.
Calibrating Foam Concentrate Flow Sensors
The foam concentrate flow sensors are calibrated precisely at the factory as a part
of the metering valve assembly and should only require calibration for the following
reasons:
Calibration of the discharge sensor(s) is complete and correct, but the foam
mixture at the discharge is not correct.
The locked potentiometers for Foam 1 or Foam 2 are accidently moved.
A foam flow sensor or the summing device is replaced.
Note: Calibrate each foam flow sensor separately with the other foam flow sensor
cable disconnected.
1. Close the foam isolating valve and fill the foam tank with water.
2. Flow water at a rate of 600 GPM through any discharge.
3. Turn the foam system ON. Press and hold the OPEN button to fully open the
metering valve. Both displays will be flashing.
4. Open the foam isolating valve.

28
 FSA100 Rev1206
5. Time how long it takes for the foam tank to empty. Record the time (in seconds)
and the displayed foam flow rate shown on the control module upper display.
6. Calculate the actual foam flow rate: Take the size of the foam tank (total gallon
volume) divide it by the time it took to empty the tank. For best accuracy
repeat the procedure 2 to 3 times. Ensure there is consistentcy in the result.
(Do not average results that vary greatly from one another.)
Example: (100 gallons/100 seconds) x 60 seconds/minute = 60 GPM
This gives the actual foam flow rate.
7. Compare the displayed flow rate to the actual flow rate. If they differ, go to
step 8 and proceed to calibrate.
8. Locate the calibration potentiometer on the flow summing box for the sensor
being tested (Refer to Figure 10).
9. Loosen the locknut on the correct foam flow calibration potentiometer (pot.)
Use a small screwdriver to adjust the pot. so that the reading in the upper
display on the control module matches the reference flow. Rotating the pot.
clockwise will increase the flow rate and counter clockwise will decrease the
flow rate. Turn the pot. a little bit at a time to allow the computer averaging to
catch up to the new setting (wait for two seconds between adjustments).
10.Repeat steps 1 through 4 and adjust the pot. until the display shows the correct
(actual) foam flow (as determined by the calculation).
11.Unplug the first sensor and plug in the second sensor. Repeat steps 1 through
4 and step 7 for the second sensor.

Calibration Potentiometers for

Foam and Discharge Flow
Foam 1 Foam 2 Discharge
12
12
12
12
12
12
Note: For multiple discharge
12 12 12 flow sensors refer to the label
on the summing device for
potentiometer identification.

Interconnecting Cables

To Control To Foam To Foam To Discharge

Module Flow Flow Flow Sensor
Sensor 1 Sensor 2

Figure 10. Summing Device

29
FSA100 Rev1206

TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
Perform the Static Operational Check
1. If this check fails before step 8 the possible problems are:
Power to the system
Bad control module
2. If this check fails after step 8 the possible problems are:
Wiring between the control module and the metering valve
Bad control module
Bad metering valve.
Check Input Cables
1. Check the cables between the flow sensors and the summing device.
2. Check the cable between the summing device and the control module.
Perform the Operational Check
1. If this check fails step 4 (with discharge flow) the possible problems are:
Wiring to the discharge flow sensor
Wiring between the control module and the summing device
Bad discharge flow sensor
Bad summing device
Bad control module
2. If this check fails step 6 but passes step 7 the possible problems are:
Wiring to the foam flow sensors
Wiring between the control module and the summing device
Clogged flow sensors
Bad foam flow sensors
Bad summing device
Bad control module
3. If this check fails step 6 and fails step 7 the possible problems are:
Clogged flow sensors, metering valve, or plumbing
Bad metering valve

30
 FSA100 Rev1206

MAINTENANCE
Flushing the System
It is recommended that the system should be flushed after each use to remove the
foam from the flow sensors, metering valve, and plumbing. Make sure that the valve
to the foam tank is closed when flushing the metering valve so that no water gets into
the foam tank.
The metering valve must be flushed periodically to prevent clogging and to ensure
sufficient lubrication for the foam flow sensors.
1. Ensure that the pump intake and discharge pressures will be within minimum
requirements. (Refer to Table 1.)
2. Ensure that the bypass and foam isolating valves are closed. Open the flush
valve and the eductor water valve if installed.
3. Press FOAM ON button.
4. Open discharge and pump water.
5. Press and hold Manual OVERRIDE OPEN button. Run the metering valve to
the fully open position.
6. Press the OFF button when the system is flushed out.

Cleaning the Paddlewheel Sensors

The paddlewheel type flow sensors need to spin freely to generate flow data.
Should they ever get clogged and stuck, they can be removed for cleaning. Remove
the retainer cap which holds the paddlewheel sensor in the housing.
Use plain water to clean the paddlewheel sensors. Do not use solvents.
Be careful when reinstalling the paddlewheel sensor. The paddlewheel will only
seat properly when in the correct orientation. (Refer to Install Flow Sensor.)

31
 FSA015/030/060 FSA120
10.4
8.650
FSA100 Rev1206

F
1.9 2.375
DRAWINGS

1.5 2.0

Dimensions in Inches
Linear Dimensions are ±0.040

32
Figure 11A. Eductor Drawing
F

FSA015, FSA030,
FSA060, FSA120
 16.25" to 17.25"

6.15" 8.43"

33
6.72" A A

Figure 11B. Metering Valve Drawing

A = Grooved Type Coupling
FSA015 1.9" [1.5" pipe]
FSA060 1.9" [1.5" pipe]
FSA030 1.9" [1.5" pipe]
FSA120 2.375" [2.0" pipe]
FSA100 Rev1206
 SERVICE & OPERATING MANUAL
AIR OPERATED DOUBLE DIAPHRAGM PUMP

B25 & X25

05 Metallic Series

This pump is Atex approved for use

in potentially explosive atmospheres
Group II category 2

Table of Contents

Service / Maintenance Log, Recycling 2

Dimensions 3
Performance Curve 3
Technical Data & Temperature limitations 4
Explanation of Pump Nomenclature 4
Principle of Pump Operation 5
Installation guide 5
Important Warnings & Safety Information 6
Troubleshooting 7
Grounding the Pump 7
Warranty 8
Service 8
Air Valve Overhaul 8
Wet-side Overhaul 8
Exhaust Safety 9
High Temperature Inst. 9
Parts List 10
Assembly Drawing 11
Declaration of Conformity 12
II 2 GD c
HG-CF-1184 Rev. B, 15/02/10 Page 1
 Service / Maintenance Log
Date Details Completed

RECYCLING

Many components of BLAGDON air operated double diaphragm pumps are made of recyclable materials. We encourage pump
users to recycle worn out parts and pumps whenever possible, after any hazardous pumped fluids are thoroughly flushed.

Contact Information
Contact Phone / Fax No.

HG-CF-1184 Rev. B, 15/02/10 Page 2

 GA Drawing & Performance Curve

General Assembly :- B25 & X2505 Metallic pump, All dimensions +/- 2mm

B2505 Metallic Pump performance curve, based on water at ambient temperature

HG-CF-1184 Rev. B, 15/02/10 Page 3

 TECHNICAL DATA

FLUID CONNECTIONS CAPACITY MAX SOLIDS MAX DISCHARGE HEAD DISPLACEMENT/STROKE

1” BSP (F) 0 - 180 Litres/Minute 3 MM 88 Meters 0.475 Litres
(0 - 40 Gallons/Minute) (1/8”) (289 ft) (0.1 UK Gallons)

MAX. WORKING PRESSURE AIR INLET TEMPERATURE LIMITS PUMP WEIGHTS :-

8.6 Bar (125 psi) 3/8” BSP (F) Determined by Elastomers AA :- 13.5 Kg

Caution - Operating temperature limitations are as follows: Operating Temperatures

Materials Maximum Minimum Optimum

o o
Buna-n - General purpose, oil resistant. Shows good solvent, oil, water and hydraulic fluid resistance. Should not 176 F -18 F 50o to 140oF
be used with highly polar solvents like acetone and MEK, ozone, chlorinated hydrocarbons and nitro hydrocarbons. 80oC -28oC 10o to 60oC
EPDM - Shows very good water and chemical resistance. Has poor resistance to oils and solvents, but is fair on 212oF -11oF 50o to 212oF
ketones and alcohols. 100oC -24oC 10o to 100oC
Neoprene - All purpose. Resistant to vegetable oil. Generally not affected by moderate chemicals, fats greases 212oF -4oF 50o to 130oF
and many oils and solvents. Generally attacked by strong oxidising acids, ketones, esters, nitro hydro carbons and 100oC -20oC 10o to 54oC
chlorinated aromatic hydrocarbons.

Santoprene® - Injection moulded thermoplastic elastomer with no fabric layer. Long mechanical flex life. 212oF -10oF 50o to 212oF
Excellent abrasion resistance. 100oC -23oC 10o to 100oC
Virgin PTFE - Chemically inert, virtually impervious. Very few chemicals are known to react chemically with 356oF 32oF 50o to 212oF
PTFE : molten alkali metals, turbulent liquid or gaseous fluorine and a few fluoro-chemicals such as chlorine 180oC 0oC 10o to 100oC
trifluoride or oxygen difluoride which readily liberate free fluorine at elevated temperatures.

Viton® - Shows good resistance to a wide range of oils and solvents : especially all alphatic, aromatic and 356oF 0oF 75o to 212oF
halogenated hydrocarbons, acids, animal and vegetable oils. 180oC -18oC 24o to 100oC
Polypropylene - High strength, light weight, corrosion resistant polyolefin which easily withstands most 158oF 32oF 50o to 140oF
chemicals, with no known solvent at room temperature. 70oC 0oC 10o to 60oC

TYPICAL CODE = B25.05. A A. B B. N N S

MODEL
B25 : STANDARD
X25 : ATEX CAT. 2

DESIGN LEVEL
VALVE SEATS
S : 316L STAINLESS STEEL
WETTED COMPONENTS
A : ALUMINIUM
S : 316L STAINLESS STEEL
C : CAST IRON

VALVE BALLS
NON - WETTED COMPONENTS T : PTFE E : EPDM
N : NEOPRENE V : VITON
A : ALUMINIUM B : BUNA-N S : ST. STEEL
D : ACETAL

VALVE TYPE
B : BALL
W : WEIGHTED BALL DIAPHRAGMS
N : NEOPRENE V : VITON
H : POLYESTER (HYTREL) B : BUNA-N
SUCTION ORIENTATION R : SANTOPRENE® T : PTFE
P : POLYURETHANE E : EPDM
B : BOTTOM O : ONE-PIECE PTFE

IMPORTANT
This pump should be used in accordance with the requirements of the Safety, Health & Welfare at Work Act 2005.
All business conducted subject to IDEX Pump Technologies, Ireland. Terms and Conditions of Sale, available on request.

IDEX Pump Technologies (Ireland) Ltd.,

A Unit of IDEX Corporation,
R79, Shannon, Co Clare, IRELAND.
TEL. : +353 61 471933 FAX. : +353 61 475046
Web Site : www.blagdonpump.com
E-Mail : sales@blagdonpump.com

HG-CF-1184 Rev. B, 15/02/10 Page 4

 the chambers is reversed. This alternating
PRINCIPLE OF PUMP movement of the spool inside the valve body is
OPERATION controlled by a pilot air pressure signal held
against the diaphragm shaft, between seals in the
pressure at the discharge outlet as the air
pressure applied at the air inlet (unless pump is
configured as a 2:1 ratio model).

This ball valve type diaphragm pump is
powered by compressed air and is a 1:1 ratio
design. The inner side of one diaphragm
chamber is alternately pressurised while
simultaneously exhausting the other inner
chamber. This causes the diaphragms, which are
connected by a common shaft secured by plates
to the centres of the diaphragms, to move in a
reciprocating action. (As one diaphragm
performs a discharge stroke the other diaphragm
is pulled to perform the suction stroke in the
opposite chamber.) Air pressure is applied over
the entire inner surface of the diaphragm while
liquid is discharged from the opposite side of
the diaphragm. The diaphragm operates in a
balanced condition during the discharge stroke
which allows the pump to be operated at
discharge heads of over 200 feet (61 meters) of
water.
For maximum diaphragm life, keep the pump as
close to the liquid being pumped as possible.
Positive suction head in excess of 10 feet of
liquid (3.048 meters) may require a back
pressure regulating device to maximize
diaphragm life.
Alternate pressurising and exhausting of the
diaphragm chamber is performed by an
externally mounted, pilot operated, 2 way type
distribution valve. When the spool shifts to one
end of the valve block body, inlet pressure is
applied to one chamber and the other diaphragm
chamber exhausts. When the spool shifts to the
opposite end of the valve body, the pressure to
diaphragm shaft bushes. This signal is released,
triggering the movement of the spool, when pilot
holes in the diaphragm shaft align with the held
pilot signal, sending the signal to exhaust, which
in-turn causes a pressure imbalance around the
spool, sending it to the opposite end of the valve
body. This simultaneously sends inlet pressure
to the opposite chamber.
The chambers are connected by manifolds with a
suction and discharge ball valve for each
chamber, maintaining flow in one direction
through the pump.
INSTALLATION
The typical installation shown in FIG. 1 is only a
guide to selecting and installing system
components. Your installation will depend on
the type of fluid being pumped and your
application needs. To reduce the risk of serious
bodily injury and damage to property, never use
fluids in this pump which are not compatible
with the wetted components. Contact your local
distributor or the manufacturer for system design
assistance & compatibility if necessary.
Mount the pump in an upright position. Failure
to ensure an upright position may result in loss
of or poor priming characteristics. Ensure the
pump is securely mounted to avoid movement
and possible risk of bodily injury.
PRESSURE The pump delivers the same
NOTE: Pressure Regulator (H) should be
installed where air supply could exceed 125
psi.
SAFETY
Your BLAGDON PUMP is a high
performance unit capable of achieving
high outputs at high efficiencies. However, as
is common with pneumatic equipment, the
pump efficiencies is reliant upon the air being
clean, dry and filtered. Failure to comply with
these requirements may lead to loss of
performance and reduced component life and in
extreme cases, permanent damage to the pump.
To avoid leaks, ensure that all fluid connections
are tight. The use of PTFE thread tape correctly
applied should be used to ensure 100% leak
proof connections. Failure to ensure 100%
sealability of the suction connection could
adversely affect suction performance.
If you are pumping hazardous fluids, or
operating the pump in an enclosed area, it is
essential that the exhaust from the pump is
piped away to a safe location. When pumping
hazardous fluids the above instructions must be
adhered to in order to ensure safe operating
procedures. (Under certain operating
conditions the failure of internal components
can lead to the pumped fluid being exhausted
via the pump exhaust outlet).
WARNING

NEVER place your hands over or near the

pump suction inlet. Powerful suction could
Available from Air Exhaust CAUTION ! cause serious bodily injury.
The air exhaust should be piped
Blagdon Pump :- Air Inlet to an area for safe disposition of FLUSH THE PUMP This pump was tested
1. Pulsation Dampener 1
the product being pumped, in the
event of diaphragm failure.
with water containing an oil-based rust
2. Filter/Regulator inhibitor. If this solution could contaminate or
3. Lubricator react with the fluid you are pumping, flush the
4. Air Dryer pump thoroughly with a solvent/detergent to
Pulsation Pipe Connection clean internal components. The solvent/
Dampener (Style Optional)
detergent must be compatible with the pump
Gauge Shut-off
materials of construction. Care should be taken
Valve to flush the pump each time it is disassembled
Flexible
Connection for maintenance or repair.

CAUTION All BLAGDON PUMPS are built

DISCHARGE lubricated with grease during assembly and
need no further lubrication. If the use of oil
cannot be avoided, this will not present any
Installation Guide Drain Port problems. A light No. 2 class lithium grease is
Fig. 1 recommended. Other grades may cause the Air
Logic System to operate intermittently, thereby
Air Shut-Off causing a loss of output and failure to operate.
Filter Valve Other seals are available for “clean room”
Regulator/Lubricator conditions.
Pipe Connection
Air Dryer
(Style Optional)
If the pump accelerates or is running too fast
Gauge Air
Exhaust due to a lack of fluid, then stop it immediately
Shut-off
Valve AIR by shutting off the air supply. A dry pump will
INLET accelerate to a high speed causing wear to
Flexible elastomers.
Connection
SUCTION 4 If the fluid you are pumping tends to dry up or
set when it is not moving, then flush the pump
2 as often as necessary to prevent the fluid from
3 drying in the pump. Drain the pump thoroughly
Drain Port
before storing.

If feasible, invert pump to allow any fluid to

drain from the non-return valves.

HG-CF-1184 Rev. B, 15/02/10 Page 5

 Important Warnings and Safety Information

IMPORTANT

Read these safety warnings and instructions in this manual completely, before installation and start-up of the pump. It
is the responsibility of the purchaser to retain this manual for reference. This manual must be kept with, and supplied
with the pump at all times. Failure to comply with the recommendations stated in this manual will damage the pump,
and void factory warranty. These instructions are available if required, in the language or languages of the country or
countries in which the equipment is used. Please refer to the manufacturer for details.

IMPORTANT!

This pump is pressurized internally with air pressure during operation. Always make certain that all bolting is in good condition and that
all of the correct bolting is reinstalled during assembly. End-user must ensure correct fitting of Inlet / Outlet connections. Crossed
threads or over tightening of connections will result in leaks. Quick action/release connections are not recommended. If their use is
unavoidable, the levers must be locked to avoid them being forced apart in a hazardous manner.

WARNING!

Before maintenance or repair, shut off the compressed air line, bleed the pressure, and disconnect the air line from the pump. The dis-
charge line may be pressurized and must be bled of its pressure. End-user must ensure correct regulation of air supply pressure, as any
increase in air pressure results in a similar increase in product pressure if stalled-out.

WARNING!

Before doing any maintenance on the pump, be certain all pressure is completely vented from the pump, suction, discharge, piping, and
all other openings and connections. Be certain the air supply is locked out or made non-operational, so that it cannot be started while
work is being done on the pump. Be certain that approved eye protection and protective clothing are worn at all times in the vicinity of
the pump. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in serious injury or death.

WARNING!

Airborne particles and loud noise hazards. Wear ear and eye protection.

WARNING!

Take action to prevent static sparking. Fire or explosion can result, especially when handling flammable liquids. The pump, piping,
valves, containers or other miscellaneous equipment must be grounded. Refer to exhaust safety instructions on page 9.

WARNING!

When used for toxic or aggressive fluids, the pump should always be flushed clean prior to disassembly. User must ensure chemical
compatibility, and any pressure / temperature limits are not exceeded. These instructions include all the information for relevant
diaphragm temperature limits. Pump temperature range can also be found on data-plate attached to the pump.
If pump is not used for more than 5 days, care must be taken when restarting. If in any doubt, remove pump from line and flush with a
suitable cleaner. Solidified deposits within the pump may cause damage to the diaphragms.

CAUTION!

Before pump operation, inspect all gasketed fasteners for looseness caused by gasket creep. Re-torque loose fasteners to prevent
leakage. Follow recommended torques stated in this manual. In cases of excess vibration, Blagdon recommend fitting a Pulsation
Dampener to remove effects of pulse actions from pump operation. Flexible connections can be used, but must be kept to a minimum
length necessary to avoid sharp flexing or straining movements.

HG-CF-1184 Rev. B, 15/02/10 Page 6

TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE
NOTE :- Check all solutions before dismantling the pump.

PROBLEM CAUSE SOLUTION

Pump will not start Air valve assembly malfunction/Siezure Check carrier for freedom of movement. -
Clean, re-grease & replace.
Obstructed fluid line. Clean line or increase line size.
Obstructed diaphragm chamber. Remove obstruction.
Diaphragm failure causing fluid & excessive air to be Replace diaphragm.
expelled through the exhaust.
Diaphragm seal failure. Replace shaft seals.
Air valve system malfunction. Check all seals in valve chest assembly.
Air connected to exhaust. Re-connect to air inlet.

Erratic flow Diaphragm failure on one side. Replace diaphragm.

Valve ball not seating. Check and remove obstruction.
Suction leakage. Check and correct.
Diaphragm failure causing fluid & excessive air to be Replace diaphragm.
expelled through the exhaust.
Diaphragm seal failure. Replace shaft seals.
Air valve system malfunction. Check all seals in valve chest assembly.

Pump strokes but will not Excessive suction lift. Shorten suction line.
discharge Suction line leakage. Check and correct.
Valve ball not seating correctly or damaged. Check and remove obstruction / replace.
Suction line or strainer clogged. Clear.
Diaphragm failure. Replace diaphragm.

Fluid discharged from air Diaphragm Failure. Replace diaphragm.

exhaust Loose frontplate. Re-Torque to manual specifications.

Intermittent stroke rate
Over lubrication Shut-down pump. Remove air connection
into pump & introduce a small quantity of de-
greasing agent into air valve and replace
line. Run pump until clear.
Diaphragm shaft seal failure. Replace seals.
Air valve system malfunction. Check all seals in valve chest assembly.
Valve ball not seating / partially obstructed. Clear obstruction.

ATEX Certified units :- X2505AA.. These models are certified to :- II 2 GD c

Non-electrical equipment for potentially explosive atmospheres : EN13463-1 : 2001, „c‟ - Internal control of production.

Grounding the pump :-

WARNING!

Take action to prevent static sparking. Fire or

explosion can result, especially when handling
flammable liquids. The pump, piping, valves,
containers or other miscellaneous equipment
must be grounded.

The Atex approved units are supplied with a natural earth ground
cable. This cable is 2 meters in length and permanently connected
through a nut and bolt at the inner cover casting. The other end is free
to connect to the nearest available suitable point to provide a natural
earth ground. This must be done to reduce the risk of electro-static
sparking.

ADDITIONAL PARTS FOR ATEX CAT. 2 PUMPS

REF PART DESCRIPTION QTY

No. NUMBER
38 SA10288 GROUNDING LEAD 1

39 SP467 ATEX I/D TAG 1

40 SP473 TIE-LOK TIE 1

HG-CF-1184 Rev. B, 15/02/10 Page 7

 IMPORTANT!
Read these instructions
completely, before
installation and start-up. It
is the responsibility of the purchaser to
retain this manual for reference.
Failure to comply with the
recommendations stated in this
manual will damage the pump, and
void factory warranty.
SERVICE
The following sections give a general
overview on how to service all
models of BLAGDON Diaphragm
Pumps. For details on individual part
numbers, quantities, materials, etc.,
please consult the parts list supplied
with the pump.
NOTE : Before commencing
any service or maintenance work
on the pump, ensure that the air
supply has been disconnected or
isolated.
AIR VALVE SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC TYPE Remove the 4
screws securing the valve block to
the valve chest, together with any
associated gaskets or seals.
Remove slide valve plate & slide
valve from the valve block assembly.
Clean all parts thoroughly and
inspect for excessive wear, replacing
where necessary.
The slide valve and valve plate
contact faces should be flat and free
from scratches. A light polishing on a
flat surface with a fine abrasive paper
will remove most scratches.
If excessive wear is suspected in the
valve block bore or valve carrier,
remove the valve block plugs and
withdraw the valve carrier. Check
valve block plug o-rings for wear or
attack & replace where required.
Clean the valve carrier & valve block
bore with white spirits to remove any
oil films.
NOTE : The nominal
diametrical clearance between the
valve carrier and the valve block
block bore should be 0.05 -
0.09mm. A clearance in excess of
this will cause the valve system to
run erratically.
Apply a light grease to the valve
block plug O-rings when re-
assembling into the valve block bore.
Any damage to the O-ring may cause
HG-CF-1184 Rev. B, 15/02/10
the valve system to malfunction.
Re-assemble the valve block
assembly & re-torque in accordance
to the settings shown in the parts list.
In the event of a complete air-side
overhaul, the pump should be dis-
assembled down to the centre
section assembly as described later
in the “Wet-Side Overhaul” section.
With the valve block assembly
dismantled, remove the inner covers
where appropriate.
A careful note of the position of all
related seals and gaskets should be
made to facilitate re-assembly.
Remove diaphragm shaft bushes,
where appropriate, and check all
seals and „O‟ rings for wear or
damage. If worn, replace
immediately.
NOTE:- The integrity of the
diaphragm shaft seals is essential
for the correct functioning of all
pneumatically actuated valve
systems.
Check the diaphragm shaft for
excessive wear as this will result in
premature seal failure. Replace as
required. Lubricate all components
and re-assemble as detailed above,
in reverse order. Ensure the correct
position of all components detailed in
all sectional assembly drawings.
WET-SIDE OVERHAUL
REPLACING BALL VALVES
Remove discharge manifold from
pump assembly together with
associated valve balls, seats and „O‟
rings.
NOTE :- The orientation of the
valve seat relative to the valve ball
should be noted as incorrect
positioning may result in a
performance loss.
Turn pump through 180o and remove
the suction manifold. Clean and
inspect the components. Check for
any wear or damage and replace as
required.
NOTE :- Ball or valve seat wear
may result in loss of performance
and suction lift.
Re-assemble the valve balls/seats
and ensure manifolds are adequately
torqued to the settings shown in the
parts list.
REPLACING DIAPHRAGMS
Remove both suction and discharge
manifolds as detailed in the previous
section, removing all ball valves,
seats and „O‟ rings.
Loosen and remove both outer
covers from the pump assembly.
The orientation of the covers should
be noted so as to facilitate re-
assembly.
Holding one of the frontplates in a
vice, („soft jaws‟ should be fitted), or
with an adjustable spanner, loosen
and remove the frontplate from the
opposite end. Remove the
diaphragm, backplate and bumpstop
from diaphragm shaft.
Carefully withdraw the diaphragm
shaft from the centre section and
hold the free end in a vice, holding
between the flats machined on the
end. Loosen and remove the
frontplate and remove the diaphragm
together with backplate and
bumpstop (where fitted).
NOTE :- Care should be taken with
all plastic, coated and hygienic
pumps, so that the surface of the
frontplate is not damaged.
Thoroughly clean all parts and check
for wear, damage, swelling, cracking,
delamination and chemical attack.
Replace components where required.
NOTE :- Rubber diaphragms
should be replaced if they are
worn to such an extent that the
fabric re-enforcing is evident on
the surface of the diaphragm.
For pumps fitted with PTFE
diaphragms, a light coating of grease
should be applied to the back-up
diaphragm prior to re-assembly.
Before re-assembly, it is advisable to
check the condition of the diaphragm
shaft seal/‟O‟ rings for wear or attack.
If either is evident, it is recommended
that they be replaced.
Assemble the diaphragms onto the
shaft in a reverse sequence to their
removal. Care should be taken as to
the orientation of the diaphragm
relative to the front and back plates.
All diaphragms have “AIR SIDE”
moulded onto one side. The
backplate must be fitted adjacent to
the AIR SIDE of the diaphragm.
Page 8
 EXHAUST SAFETY WHEN PUMPING HAZARDOUS LIQUIDS
WARNING!

In the event of diaphragm rupture, pumped material may enter the air end of the pump, and be discharged into the atmosphere. If pumping
a product which is hazardous or toxic, the air exhaust must be piped to an appropriate area for safe disposition.

Flooded Suction Installation

Submerged Installation

Suction Lift Installation

Exhaust Safety :-
When a diaphragm fails during operation, pumped liquid can enter and contaminate the air side of the pump. If diaphragm failure is not
severe, i.e. a small split or hole, then the pump can continue to run, with air being forced into the product being pumped. If however the
failure is more serious, then the pump may stop, with fluid or fumes being expelled through the exhaust. Under these conditions it is
recommended that the exhaust is piped away to a safe area. In standard suction lift conditions this can simply be done by piping from the
exhaust connection to a safe area. Multiple installations can be piped to a common connection, then to a safe area. In flooded suction
conditions the exhaust must be taken to a point higher than the fluid level to prevent any siphoning away. In submerged conditions ensure
exhaust is piped away above fluid level.
In all conditions ensure exhaust outlet is not expelling across a non-conductive surface. The exhaust must not be placed less than 100mm
from any non-conductive surface, as this may generate a propagating brush discharge resulting in a possible ignition source.

HIGH TEMPERATURE INSTRUCTIONS

In situations where the temperature of the fluid to be pumped is likely to exceed 100°C, a high temperature pump
code must be specified. This is signified using an „X‟ in the last part of the pump code as shown.

“XTS” in place of “TTS”.

This indicates the following specification amendments :-

All seals and o-rings will be changed from Buna-N to Viton and back-up diaphragms and any bump-stops will be
changed to Viton.
See table below for parts effected :- (refer to main table for quantities / pump)

These items are available in recommended spares kit :- ASK2505HT

HIGH TEMPERATURE SPECIFICATION

REF. NO 23 24 25 26 27 31

DESCRIPTION DIA. SHAFT DIAPHRAGM O-RING O-RING O-RING SUPPORT

SEAL SHAFT BUSH DIAPHRAGM
MATERIAL

VITON G536 40-194 G508 G533 G509 1A039

HG-CF-1184 Rev. B, 15/02/10 Page 9

 PARTS LIST
PARTS LIST - cont.
PART NUMBER
HG-CF-1184 Rev. B, 15/02/10

WETTED COMPONENTS PUMPS FITTED WITH PTFE DIAPHRAGMS

Ref Cast Iron Stainless Aluminium Atex Description Qty REF PART DESCRIPTION QTY
No. Steel / Common Cat. 2 No. NUMBER
1 A040 A005 BOLT - M8 x 35 8
30 1A071 DIAPHRAGM - (PTFE)  2
2 C044 C013 WASHER - M8 8
31 1A089 DIAPHRAGM - (BACK-UP)  2
3 25-138 25-140 25-121 DISCHARGE MANIFOLD 1

4 SEE TABLE O-RING  8

ELASTOMER TABLE
5 40-047 40-240 SILENCER 1

6 HEAVY DUTY OPTION - 1A205 1A004 VALVE SEAT 4 REF DESCRIPTION BUNA-N EPDM VITON NEOPRENE ONE-PIECE ST. QTY
7 1A075 1A035 1A005 OUTER COVER 2
No. PTFE STEEL

8 A035 A006 BOLT - M8 x 40 16 4 O-RING - (VALVE SEAT) G057 G060 G061 G059 - - 8

9 B506 B505 FLANGED NUT - M8 24 10 VALVE BALL 1A049 1A080 1A081 1A079 - 1A197 4

10 SEE TABLE VALVE BALL  4 10 VALVE BALL - (WEIGHTED) 1A072 1A092 1A093 1A091 - - 4

11 25-137 25-139 25-120 SUCTION MANIFOLD 1 31 DIAPHRAGM 1A006 1A040 1A039 1A057 1A348 - 2

12 - - 40-259 VALVE CHEST 1

13 40-204 GASKET   1 ELASTOMER TABLE - cont.

14 40-005 VALVE PLATE  1
REF DESCRIPTION PTFE POLYESTER SANTOPRENE® DELRIN POLYURE- QTY
15 40-004 SLIDE VALVE  1 No. (ACETAL) THANE
16 40-264 VALVE BLOCK  1
4 O-RING - (VALVE SEAT) G058 - - - - 8
17 D391 SKT. CAP SCREW - M5 x 14  4 10 VALVE BALL 1A002 - - 1A050 - 4
18 40-266 VALVE BLOCK PLUG  2 10 VALVE BALL - (WEIGHTED) - - - - - 4
19 G512 O-RING   2 31 DIAPHRAGM SEE TABLE 1A061 1A358 - 1A070 2
20 40-192 VALVE CARRIER  1

21 D267 D337 SKT. CAP SCREW - M8 x 40 4

22 C173 C165 SPRING WASHER - M8 4  - These items are available in a recommended wet side spares kit. Please refer to your local stockist / distributor for details.

23 25-091 DIA. SHAFT SEAL (SEE NOTE )  6  - These items are available in a recommended spares kit - ASK2505 - Air side Kit - (All models)

24 25-089 DIAPHRAGM SHAFT BUSH 2  - All models are Lube Free as standard, - LF options are only required for very dry air, or “clean room” applications.

25 G189 O-RING  2  - These items are available as a sub-assembly spare - SA10585 - Valve Block Assembly.
26 G245 O-RING  2 Santoprene is a registered tradename of Monsanto Corp.
27 G367 O-RING  2
NOTE! For additional Atex parts see page 7
28 25-160 DIAPHRAGM SHAFT 1

29 SA10104 SA10104 SA10502 FRONTPLATE ASSEMBLY 2

30 SEE PUMPS FITTED WITH PTFE ABOVE !

31 SEE TABLE DIAPHRAGM  2

NOTES :

32 1A007 1A259 1A007 BACKPLATE 2

33 D310 D028 SKT. CAP SCREW - M8 x 25 8

34 - - 25-182 INNER COVER 2

Page 10

35 G242 O-RING  2

36 G243 O-RING  2

37 G339 O-RING  8
HG-CF-1184 Rev. B, 15/02/10

Lip Seal Positions

24

23

TORQUE SETTINGS

Outer Seal - Lips face outwards A - 42 - 47 Nm (30 - 35 lbs/ft)

Page 11

B - 13.5 - 16 Nm (10 - 12 lbs/ft)

Inner Seals - Lips face in towards holes.
C - 27 Nm (20 lbs/ft) Exploded Assembly :- B2505 Metallic Pump
D - 14.5 - 15 Nm (10 - 11 lbs/ft)
Refer to page 10 Parts List table for item Ref. Nos.
 IDEX Pump Technologies (Ireland) Ltd.,
A Unit of IDEX Corporation,
R79, Shannon, Co Clare,
IRELAND.
TEL. : +353 61 471933
FAX. : +353 61 475046
Web Site : www.blagdonpump.com
E-Mail : sales@blagdonpump.com

Date : December 01 2009

Des Monaghan,
Production & Technical Manager

HG-CF-223 (REV 6)

HG-CF-1184 Rev. B, 15/02/10 Page 12

 SERVICE & OPERATING MANUAL
AIR OPERATED DOUBLE DIAPHRAGM PUMP

B15 & X15

All Stainless Steel Models
Inc. Lube Free

This pump is Atex approved for use

in potentially explosive atmospheres
Group II category 2

Table of Contents

Service / Maintenance Log, Recycling 2

Dimensions 3
Performance Curve 3
Technical Data & Temperature limitations 4
Explanation of Pump Nomenclature 4
Principle of Pump Operation 5
Installation guide 5
Important Warnings & Safety Information 6
Troubleshooting 7
Grounding the Pump 7
Warranty 8
Service 8
Air Valve Overhaul 8
Wet-side Overhaul 8
Exhaust Safety 9
High Temperature Inst. 9
Parts List 10
Assembly Drawing 11
Declaration of Conformity 12
II 2 GD c
HG-CF-910 Rev. P - 15.02.10 Page 1
 Service / Maintenance Log
Date Details Completed

RECYCLING

Many components of BLAGDON air operated double diaphragm pumps are made of recyclable materials. We encourage pump
users to recycle worn out parts and pumps whenever possible, after any hazardous pumped fluids are thoroughly flushed.

Contact Information
Contact Phone / Fax No.

HG-CF-910 Rev. P - 15.02.10 Page 2

 GA Drawing & Performance Curve

General Assembly :- B15 All Stainless Steel pump, all dimensions +/- 1mm

B15 & X15 Metallic Pump Performance Curve, performance based on water at ambient temperature

HG-CF-910 Rev. P - 15.02.10 Page 3

 TECHNICAL DATA
FLUID CONNECTIONS CAPACITY MAX SOLIDS MAX DISCHARGE HEAD DISPLACEMENT/STROKE
1/2” BSP 0 - 58 Litres/Minute 2 MM 88 Meters 0.075 Litres
(0 - 12.7 Gallons/Minute) (5/64”) (289 ft) (0.02 UK Gallons)

MAX. WORKING PRESSURE AIR INLET TEMPERATURE LIMITS PUMP WEIGHTS :-

8.6 Bar (125 psi) 1/4” BSP (F) Determined by Elastomers SS :- 12.2 Kg

Caution - Operating temperature limitations are as follows: Operating Temperatures

Materials Maximum Minimum Optimum

o o
Buna-n - General purpose, oil resistant. Shows good solvent, oil, water and hydraulic fluid resistance. Should not 176 F -18 F 50o to 140oF
be used with highly polar solvents like acetone and MEK, ozone, chlorinated hydrocarbons and nitro hydrocarbons. 80oC -28oC 10o to 60oC
EPDM - Shows very good water and chemical resistance. Has poor resistance to oils and solvents, but is fair on 212oF -11oF 50o to 212oF
ketones and alcohols. 100oC -24oC 10o to 100oC
Neoprene - All purpose. Resistant to vegetable oil. Generally not affected by moderate chemicals, fats greases 212oF -4oF 50o to 130oF
and many oils and solvents. Generally attacked by strong oxidising acids, ketones, esters, nitro hydro carbons and 100oC -20oC 10o to 54oC
chlorinated aromatic hydrocarbons.

Santoprene® - Injection moulded thermoplastic elastomer with no fabric layer. Long mechanical flex life. 212oF -10oF 50o to 212oF
Excellent abrasion resistance. 100oC -23oC 10o to 100oC
Virgin PTFE - Chemically inert, virtually impervious. Very few chemicals are known to react chemically with 356oF 32oF 50o to 212oF
PTFE : molten alkali metals, turbulent liquid or gaseous fluorine and a few fluoro-chemicals such as chlorine 180oC 0oC 10o to 100oC
trifluoride or oxygen difluoride which readily liberate free fluorine at elevated temperatures.

Viton® - Shows good resistance to a wide range of oils and solvents : especially all alphatic, aromatic and 356oF 0oF 75o to 212oF
halogenated hydrocarbons, acids, animal and vegetable oils. 180oC -18oC 24o to 100oC
Polypropylene - High strength, light weight, corrosion resistant polyolefin which easily withstands most chemi- 158oF 32oF 50o to 140oF
cals, with no known solvent at room temperature. 70oC 0oC 10o to 60oC

TYPICAL CODE = B15.S S. B B. E T S - L F

LUBE FREE
MODEL
B15 : STANDARD
X15 : ATEX CAT. 2 VALVE SEATS
S : 316L STAINLESS STEEL

WETTED COMPONENTS
S : 316L STAINLESS STEEL

VALVE BALLS
B : BUNA-N S : 316 ST. STEEL
NON - WETTED COMPONENTS D : DELRIN (ACETAL) T : PTFE
E : EPDM V : VITON
S : 316 STAINLESS STEEL N : NEOPRENE

VALVE TYPE DIAPHRAGMS

B : BALL B : BUNA-N P : POLYURETHANE
E : EPDM R : SANTOPRENE
H : POLYESTER T : PTFE
N : NEOPRENE V : VITON
SUCTION ORIENTATION O : ONE PIECE PTFE
B : BOTTOM

IMPORTANT
This pump should be used in accordance with the requirements of the Safety, Health & Welfare at Work Act 2005.
All business conducted subject to IDEX Pump Technologies, Ireland. Terms and Conditions of Sale, available on request.

IDEX Pump Technologies (Ireland) Ltd.,

A Unit of IDEX Corporation,
R79, Shannon, Co Clare, IRELAND.
TEL. : +353 61 471933 FAX. : +353 61 475046
Web Site : www.blagdonpump.com
E-Mail : sales@blagdonpump.com

HG-CF-910 Rev. P - 15.02.10 Page 4


PRINCIPLE OF PUMP
OPERATION
This ball valve type diaphragm pump is
powered by compressed air and is a 1:1 ratio
design. The inner side of one diaphragm
chamber is alternately pressurised while
simultaneously exhausting the other inner
chamber. This causes the diaphragms, which are
connected by a common shaft secured by plates
to the centres of the diaphragms, to move in a
reciprocating action. (As one diaphragm
performs a discharge stroke the other diaphragm
is pulled to perform the suction stroke in the
opposite chamber.) Air pressure is applied over
the entire inner surface of the diaphragm while
liquid is discharged from the opposite side of
the diaphragm. The diaphragm operates in a
balanced condition during the discharge stroke
which allows the pump to be operated at
discharge heads of over 200 feet (61 meters) of
water.
For maximum diaphragm life, keep the pump as
close to the liquid being pumped as possible.
Positive suction head in excess of 10 feet of
liquid (3.048 meters) may require a back
pressure regulating device to maximize
diaphragm life.
Alternate pressurising and exhausting of the
diaphragm chamber is performed by an
externally mounted, pilot operated, 2 way type
distribution valve. When the spool shifts to one
end of the valve block body, inlet pressure is
applied to one chamber and the other diaphragm
chamber exhausts. When the spool shifts to the
opposite end of the valve body, the pressure to
the chambers is reversed. This alternating
Available from
Blagdon Pump :-
Air Inlet
1. Pulsation Dampener
2. Filter/Regulator
3. Lubricator
4. Air Dryer
Installation Guide
Fig. 1
Pipe Connection
(Style Optional)
Gauge Air
Exhaust
Shut-off
Valve
Flexible
Connection
SUCTION
Drain Port
HG-CF-910 Rev. P - 15.02.10
movement of the spool inside the valve body is
controlled by a pilot air pressure signal held
against the diaphragm shaft, between seals in the
diaphragm shaft bushes. This signal is released,
triggering the movement of the spool, when pilot
holes in the diaphragm shaft align with the held
pilot signal, sending the signal to exhaust, which
in-turn causes a pressure imbalance around the
spool, sending it to the opposite end of the valve
body. This simultaneously sends inlet pressure
to the opposite chamber.
The chambers are connected by manifolds with a
suction and discharge ball valve for each
chamber, maintaining flow in one direction
through the pump.
INSTALLATION
The typical installation shown in FIG. 1 is only a
guide to selecting and installing system
components. Your installation will depend on
the type of fluid being pumped and your
application needs. To reduce the risk of serious
bodily injury and damage to property, never use
fluids in this pump which are not compatible
with the wetted components. Contact your local
distributor or the manufacturer for system design
assistance & compatibility if necessary.
Mount the pump in an upright position. Failure
to ensure an upright position may result in loss
of or poor priming characteristics. Ensure the
pump is securely mounted to avoid movement
and possible risk of bodily injury.
PRESSURE The pump delivers the same
pressure at the discharge outlet as the air
pressure applied at the air inlet (unless pump is
Air Exhaust CAUTION !
The air exhaust should be piped
to an area for safe disposition of
the product being pumped, in the
1 event of diaphragm failure.
Pulsation Pipe Connection
Dampener (Style Optional)
Gauge Shut-off
Valve
Flexible
Connection
DISCHARGE
Drain Port
Air Shut-Off
Filter Valve
Regulator/Lubricator
Air Dryer
AIR
INLET
4 as often as necessary to prevent the fluid from
2 before storing.
3
configured as a 2:1 ratio model).
NOTE: Pressure Regulator (H) should be
installed where air supply could exceed 125
psi.
SAFETY
Your BLAGDON PUMP is a high
performance unit capable of achieving
high outputs at high efficiencies. However, as
is common with pneumatic equipment, the
pump efficiencies is reliant upon the air being
clean, dry and filtered. Failure to comply with
these requirements may lead to loss of
performance and reduced component life and in
extreme cases, permanent damage to the pump.
To avoid leaks, ensure that all fluid connections
are tight. The use of PTFE thread tape correctly
applied should be used to ensure 100% leak
proof connections. Failure to ensure 100%
sealability of the suction connection could
adversely affect suction performance.
If you are pumping hazardous fluids, or
operating the pump in an enclosed area, it is
essential that the exhaust from the pump is
piped away to a safe location. When pumping
hazardous fluids the above instructions must be
adhered to in order to ensure safe operating
procedures. (Under certain operating
conditions the failure of internal components
can lead to the pumped fluid being exhausted
via the pump exhaust outlet).
WARNING
NEVER place your hands over or near the
pump suction inlet. Powerful suction could
cause serious bodily injury.
FLUSH THE PUMP This pump was tested
with water containing an oil-based rust
inhibitor. If this solution could contaminate or
react with the fluid you are pumping, flush the
pump thoroughly with a solvent/detergent to
clean internal components. The solvent/
detergent must be compatible with the pump
materials of construction. Care should be taken
to flush the pump each time it is disassembled
for maintenance or repair.
CAUTION
All BLAGDON PUMPS are built lubricated
with grease during assembly and need no
further lubrication. If the use of oil cannot be
avoided, this will not present any problems. A
light No. 2 class lithium grease is
recommended. Other grades may cause the Air
Logic System to operate intermittently, thereby
causing a loss of output and failure to operate.
Other seals are available for “clean room”
conditions
If the pump accelerates or is running too fast
due to a lack of fluid, then stop it immediately
by shutting off the air supply. A dry pump will
accelerate to a high speed causing wear to
elastomers.
If the fluid you are pumping tends to dry up or
set when it is not moving, then flush the pump
drying in the pump. Drain the pump thoroughly
If feasible, invert pump to allow any fluid to
drain from the non-return valves.
Page 5
 Important Warnings and Safety Information

IMPORTANT

Read these safety warnings and instructions in this manual completely, before installation and start-up of the pump. It
is the responsibility of the purchaser to retain this manual for reference. This manual must be kept with, and supplied
with the pump at all times. Failure to comply with the recommendations stated in this manual will damage the pump,
and void factory warranty. These instructions are available if required, in the language or languages of the country or
countries in which the equipment is used. Please refer to the manufacturer for details.

IMPORTANT!

This pump is pressurized internally with air pressure during operation. Always make certain that all bolting is in good condition and that
all of the correct bolting is reinstalled during assembly. End-user must ensure correct fitting of Inlet / Outlet connections. Crossed
threads or over tightening of connections will result in leaks. Quick action/release connections are not recommended. If their use is
unavoidable, the levers must be locked to avoid them being forced apart in a hazardous manner.

WARNING!

Before maintenance or repair, shut off the compressed air line, bleed the pressure, and disconnect the air line from the pump. The dis-
charge line may be pressurized and must be bled of its pressure. End-user must ensure correct regulation of air supply pressure, as any
increase in air pressure results in a similar increase in product pressure if stalled-out.

WARNING!

Before doing any maintenance on the pump, be certain all pressure is completely vented from the pump, suction, discharge, piping, and
all other openings and connections. Be certain the air supply is locked out or made non-operational, so that it cannot be started while
work is being done on the pump. Be certain that approved eye protection and protective clothing are worn at all times in the vicinity of
the pump. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in serious injury or death.

WARNING!

Airborne particles and loud noise hazards. Wear ear and eye protection.

WARNING!

Take action to prevent static sparking. Fire or explosion can result, especially when handling flammable liquids. The pump, piping,
valves, containers or other miscellaneous equipment must be grounded. Refer to exhaust safety instructions on page 9.

WARNING!

When used for toxic or aggressive fluids, the pump should always be flushed clean prior to disassembly. User must ensure chemical
compatibility, and any pressure / temperature limits are not exceeded. These instructions include all the information for relevant
diaphragm temperature limits. Pump temperature range can also be found on data-plate attached to the pump.
If pump is not used for more than 5 days, care must be taken when restarting. If in any doubt, remove pump from line and flush with a
suitable cleaner. Solidified deposits within the pump may cause damage to the diaphragms.

CAUTION!

Before pump operation, inspect all gasketed fasteners for looseness caused by gasket creep. Re-torque loose fasteners to prevent
leakage. Follow recommended torques stated in this manual. In cases of excess vibration, Blagdon recommend fitting a Pulsation
Dampener to remove effects of pulse actions from pump operation. Flexible connections can be used, but must be kept to a minimum
length necessary to avoid sharp flexing or straining movements.

HG-CF-910 Rev. P - 15.02.10 Page 6

 NOTE :- Check all solutions before dismantling the pump.
TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES SOLUTION

Pump will not start Air valve assembly malfunction/Seizure Check carrier for freedom of movement. -
Clean, oil & replace.
Obstructed fluid line. Clean line or increase line size.
Obstructed diaphragm chamber. Remove obstruction.
Diaphragm failure causing fluid & excessive air to be Replace diaphragm.
expelled through the exhaust.
Diaphragm seal failure. Replace shaft seals.
Air valve system malfunction. Check all seals in valve chest assembly.
Air connected to exhaust. Re-connect to air inlet.

Erratic flow Diaphragm failure on one side. Replace diaphragm.

Valve ball not seating. Check and remove obstruction.
Suction leakage. Check and correct.
Diaphragm failure causing fluid & excessive air to be Replace diaphragm.
expelled through the exhaust.
Diaphragm seal failure. Replace shaft seals.
Air valve system malfunction. Check all seals in valve chest assembly.
Air connected to exhaust. Re-connect to air inlet.

Pump strokes but will not Excessive suction lift. Shorten suction line.
discharge Suction line leakage. Check and correct.
Valve ball not seating correctly or damaged. Check and remove obstruction / replace.
Suction line or strainer clogged. Clear.
Diaphragm failure. Replace diaphragm.

Fluid discharged from air Diaphragm Failure. Replace diaphragm.

exhaust Loose frontplate. Re-Torque to manual specifications.

Intermittent stroke rate
Over lubrication Shut-down pump. Remove air connection
into pump & introduce a small quantity of de-
greasing agent into air valve and replace
line. Run pump until clear.
Diaphragm shaft seal failure. Replace seals.
Air valve system malfunction. Check all seals in valve chest assembly.
Valve ball not seating / partially obstructed. Clear obstruction.
Air connected to exhaust. Re-connect to air inlet.

ATEX Certified units :- X15SS.. These models are certified to :- II 2 GD c

Non-electrical equipment for potentially explosive atmospheres : EN13463-1 : 2001, „c‟ - Internal control of production.

Grounding the pump :-

WARNING!

Take action to prevent static sparking. Fire or

explosion can result, especially when handling
flammable liquids. The pump, piping, valves,
containers or other miscellaneous equipment
must be grounded.

The Atex approved units are supplied with a natural earth ground
cable. This cable is 2 meters in length and permanently connected
through a nut and bolt at the inner cover casting. The other end is free
to connect to the nearest available suitable point to provide a natural
earth ground. This must be done to reduce the risk of electro-static
sparking.

ADDITIONAL PARTS FOR ATEX CAT. 2 PUMPS (see also page 10)

REF PART DESCRIPTION QTY

No. NUMBER
37 SA10289 GROUNDING LEAD 1

38 SP467 ATEX I/D TAG 1

39 SP472 TIE-LOK TIE 1

HG-CF-910 Rev. P - 15.02.10 Page 7

 IMPORTANT!
Read these instructions
completely, before
installation and start-up. It
is the responsibility of the purchaser to
retain this manual for reference.
Failure to comply with the
recommendations stated in this
manual will damage the pump, and
void factory warranty.
SERVICE
The following sections give a general
overview on how to service all
models of BLAGDON Diaphragm
Pumps. For details on individual part
numbers, quantities, materials, etc.,
please consult the parts list supplied
with the pump.
NOTE : Before commencing
any service or maintenance work
on the pump, ensure that the air
supply has been disconnected or
isolated.
AIR VALVE SYSTEMS
PNEUMATIC TYPE Remove the 4
screws securing the valve block to
the valve chest, together with any
associated gaskets or seals.
Remove slide valve plate & slide
valve from the valve block assembly.
Clean all parts thoroughly and
inspect for excessive wear, replacing
where necessary.
The slide valve and valve plate
contact faces should be flat and free
from scratches. A light polishing on a
flat surface with a fine abrasive paper
will remove most scratches.
If excessive wear is suspected in the
valve block bore or valve carrier,
remove the valve block plugs and
withdraw the valve carrier. Check
valve block plug o-rings for wear or
attack & replace where required.
Clean the valve carrier & valve block
bore with white spirits to remove any
oil films.
NOTE : The nominal
diametrical clearance between the
valve carrier and the valve block
bore should be 0.05 - 0.09mm. A
clearance in excess of this will
cause the valve system to run
erratically.
Apply a light grease to the valve
block plug O-rings when re-
assembling into the valve block bore.
Any damage to the O-ring may cause
HG-CF-910 Rev. P - 15.02.10
the valve system to malfunction.
Re-assemble the valve block
assembly & re-torque in accordance
to the settings shown in the parts list.
In the event of a complete air-side
overhaul, the pump should be dis-
assembled down to the centre
section assembly as described later
in the “Wet-Side Overhaul” section.
With the valve block assembly
dismantled, remove the inner covers
where appropriate.
A careful note of the position of all
related seals and gaskets should be
made to facilitate re-assembly.
Remove diaphragm shaft bushes,
where appropriate, and check all
seals and „O‟ rings for wear or
damage. If worn, replace
immediately.
NOTE:- The integrity of the
diaphragm shaft seals is essential
for the correct functioning of all
pneumatically actuated valve
systems.
Check the diaphragm shaft for
excessive wear as this will result in
premature seal failure. Replace as
required. Lubricate all components
and re-assemble as detailed above,
in reverse order. Ensure the correct
position of all components detailed in
all sectional assembly drawings.
WET-SIDE OVERHAUL
REPLACING BALL VALVES
Remove discharge manifold from
pump assembly together with
associated valve balls, seats and „O‟
rings.
NOTE :- The orientation of the
valve seat relative to the valve ball
should be noted as incorrect
positioning may result in a
performance loss.
Turn pump through 180o and remove
the suction manifold. Clean and
inspect the components. Check for
any wear or damage and replace as
required.
NOTE :- Ball or valve seat wear
may result in loss of performance
and suction lift.
Re-assemble the valve balls/seats
and ensure manifolds are adequately
torqued to the settings shown in the
parts list.
REPLACING DIAPHRAGMS
Remove both suction and discharge
manifolds as detailed in the previous
section, removing all ball valves,
seats and „O‟ rings.
Loosen and remove both outer
covers from the pump assembly.
The orientation of the covers should
be noted so as to facilitate re-
assembly.
Holding one of the frontplates in a
vice, („soft jaws‟ should be fitted), or
with an adjustable spanner, loosen
and remove the frontplate from the
opposite end. Remove the
diaphragm, backplate and bumpstop
from diaphragm shaft.
Carefully withdraw the diaphragm
shaft from the centre section and
hold the free end in a vice, holding
between the flats machined on the
end. Loosen and remove the
frontplate and remove the diaphragm
together with backplate and
bumpstop (where fitted).
NOTE :- Care should be taken with
all plastic, coated and hygienic
pumps, so that the surface of the
frontplate is not damaged.
Thoroughly clean all parts and check
for wear, damage, swelling, cracking,
delamination and chemical attack.
Replace components where required.
NOTE :- Rubber diaphragms
should be replaced if they are
worn to such an extent that the
fabric re-enforcing is evident on
the surface of the diaphragm.
For pumps fitted with PTFE
diaphragms, a light coating of grease
should be applied to the back-up
diaphragm prior to re-assembly.
Before re-assembly, it is advisable to
check the condition of the diaphragm
shaft seal/‟O‟ rings for wear or attack.
If either is evident, it is recommended
that they be replaced.
Assemble the diaphragms onto the
shaft in a reverse sequence to their
removal. Care should be taken as to
the orientation of the diaphragm
relative to the front and back plates.
All diaphragms have “AIR SIDE”
moulded onto one side. The
backplate must be fitted adjacent to
the AIR SIDE of the diaphragm.
Page 8
 EXHAUST SAFETY WHEN PUMPING HAZARDOUS LIQUIDS
WARNING!

In the event of diaphragm rupture, pumped material may enter the air end of the pump, and be discharged into the atmosphere. If pumping
a product which is hazardous or toxic, the air exhaust must be piped to an appropriate area for safe disposition.

Flooded Suction Installation

Submerged Installation

Suction Lift Installation

Exhaust Safety :-
When a diaphragm fails during operation, pumped liquid can enter and contaminate the air side of the pump. If diaphragm failure is not
severe, i.e. a small split or hole, then the pump can continue to run, with air being forced into the product being pumped. If however the
failure is more serious, then the pump may stop, with fluid or fumes being expelled through the exhaust. Under these conditions it is
recommended that the exhaust is piped away to a safe area. In standard suction lift conditions this can simply be done by piping from the
exhaust connection to a safe area. Multiple installations can be piped to a common connection, then to a safe area. In flooded suction
conditions the exhaust must be taken to a point higher than the fluid level to prevent any siphoning away. In submerged conditions ensure
exhaust is piped away above fluid level.
In all conditions ensure exhaust outlet is not expelling across a non-conductive surface. The exhaust must not be placed less than 100mm
from any non-conductive surface, as this may generate a propagating brush discharge resulting in a possible ignition source.

HIGH TEMPERATURE INSTALLATIONS

In situations where the temperature of the fluid to be pumped is likely to exceed 100°C, a high temperature pump
code must be specified. This is signified using an „X‟ in the last part of the pump code as shown.

“XTS” in place of “TTS”.

This indicates the following specification amendments :-

Diaphragm Shaft Seals will be changed from Polyurethane to Viton. Back-up diaphragms and any bumpstops will
be changed to Viton. In extreme cases only, any gaskets could be changed to a higher temperature spec., and the
diaphragm shaft bushes could be changed from plastic to metal.
See table below for parts effected :- (refer to main table for quantities / pump)

HIGH TEMPERATURE SPECIFICATION

REF. NO 12 20

DESCRIPTION O-RING SUPPORT

DIAPHRAGM
MATERIAL

VITON G500 1H051

HG-CF-910 Rev. P - 15.02.10 Page 9

HG-CF-910 Rev. P - 15.02.10

PARTS LIST PARTS LIST - cont.

REF PART DESCRIPTION QTY REF PART DESCRIPTION QTY
No. NUMBER No. NUMBER
1 D215 SOCKET CAP SCREW M6 x 20 4
THE FOLLOWING PARTS ARE USED ON ATEX CERTIFIED PUMPS (see page 7)
2 C048 WASHER M6 16
37 SA10289 GROUNDING LEAD ASSY. M6 1
3 15-154 MANIFOLD 2
38 SP467 ATEX I/D TAG 1
4 SEE TABLE O-RING  4
39 SP472 TIE-LOK TIE 1
5 1H221 BALL CAGE 2
9 15-258 SILENCER (REPLACES 06-034) 1
6 SEE TABLE VALVE BALL  4

7 1H160 VALVE SEAT - DISCHARGE 2

ELASTOMER TABLE

8 SEE TABLE O-RING  2 REF DESCRIPTION BUNA-N NEOPRENE EPDM VITON SANTOPRENE® QTY
No.
9 06-034 SILENCER 1
4 O-RING G227 G240 G234 G238 - 4
10 15-288 CENTRE SECTION 1
6 VALVE BALL 15-017 15-014 15-015 15-016 - 4
11 SA10036 DIAPHRAGM SHAFT 1
8 O-RING G228 G241 G235 G239 - 2
12 15-295 DIA. SHAFT SEAL (SEE BELOW FOR LUBE FREE OPTION)  4
19 DIAPHRAGM 1H011 1H049 1H206 1H051 15-219 2
15-018 LUBE FREE SEAL (FOR “DRY AIR” APPLICATIONS)  4

13 15-182 DIAPHRAGM SHAFT BUSH 2 ELASTOMER TABLE - cont

14 G189 O-RING  4 REF DESCRIPTION PTFE ONE-PIECE POLY- POLYURE DELRIN ST. QTY
- No. PTFE ESTER -THANE STEEL
16 H125 CIRCLIP 2 4 O-RING G236 - - - - - 4

17 15-153 OUTER COVER 2 6 VALVE BALL 1H017 - - - 1H072 1H087 4

18 SA10034 FRONTPLATE ASSEMBLY 2
8 O-RING G237 - - - - - 2
19 SEE TABLE DIAPHRAGM  2
19 DIAPHRAGM 15-033 15-195 1H022 1H050 - - 2
20 15-219 DIAPHRAGM - BACK-UP  2 & ITEM 20

21 1H114 BACKPLATE 2

22 D250 SOCKET CAP SCREW M6 x 12 4

MANIFOLD OPTIONS - MULTI PORTING
23 C305 SPRING WASHER M6 8 REF DESCRIPTION STANDARD CENTRE VERTICAL QTY
24 1H009 VALVE CARRIER 1
No. END PORTED PORTED PORTED
25 G020 O-RING  2 3 MANIFOLD 15-154 15-298 15-299 2 PER OR MIX AS REQ‟D

26 D276 SOCKET C‟SUNK SCREW M4 x 12 4

 - These items are available in a recommended spares kit. Please refer to your local stockist / distributor for details.
27 15-011 VALVE BLOCK PLUG 2
 - These items are available in a recommended spares kit - ASK15SS - Air side Kit
28 15-013 VALVE BLOCK 1 Lube Free Air Side Kit - ASK15SS-LF
29 1A025 SLIDE VALVE 1
Santoprene is a registered tradename of Monsanto Corp.
30 15-001 VALVE PLATE 1

31 1H020 GASKET  1 NOTES

32 15-157 BASE LEG 2

33 D349 SOCKET CAP SCREW M6 x 25 16

34 1H159 VALVE SEAT - SUCTION 2

Page 10
HG-CF-910 Rev. P - 15.02.10

Shaft Bush, item 13.

Bi-directional Lip Seals, item 12,

can be fitted either way round in grooves.

TORQUE SETTINGS

A - 20 - 25 Nm (14.8 - 18.4 lbs/ft

B - 10 - 11 Nm (90 - 100 lbs/in)

Page 11

C - 9 - 10 Nm (80 - 90 lbs/in)
Exploded General Assembly :- B15 & X15 All Stainless Pump,
D - 3.4 - 4.5 Nm (30 - 40 lbs/in)
refer to page 10, Parts List table for Item Ref. Nos.
 IDEX Pump Technologies (Ireland) Ltd.,
A Unit of IDEX Corporation,
R79, Shannon, Co Clare,
IRELAND.
TEL. : +353 61 471933
FAX. : +353 61 475046
Web Site : www.blagdonpump.com
E-Mail : sales@blagdonpump.com

Date : December 01 2009

Des Monaghan,
Production & Technical Manager

HG-CF-223 (REV 6)

HG-CF-910 Rev. P - 15.02.10 Page 12

Perren Engineering Limited
Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way, Malvern
Worcestershire WR14 1GZ
Tel +44 (0)1684 567050
Fax +44 (0)1684 567055
Email sales@perreneng.com

Operating Instruction
&
Parts Manual
for a Perren
250kg ABC dry powder system

Applicable for systems with the following serial numbers

33975
33976
33977
33978
33979
33980
33981
33982
33983
33984

Date of Manufacture July/August 2010

Page 1 of 14 Issue 1 August 2010

Perren Engineering Limited
Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way, Malvern
Worcestershire WR14 1GZ
Tel +44 (0)1684 567050
Fax +44 (0)1684 567055
Email sales@perreneng.com

Table of Contents

Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................... 2

Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 3

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 4

Dry Powder System – 250kg BC System .................................................................................................. 6

Dry Powder Schematic ........................................................................................................................ 6

Pre Operational Procedure.................................................................................................................. 7

Operating Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 7

Post Operational Procedure. ............................................................................................................... 8

Warning. .............................................................................................................................................. 9

Parts Listing ........................................................................................................................................... 10

Container ........................................................................................................................................... 10

Pressurisation System ....................................................................................................................... 11

Discharge System .............................................................................................................................. 12

Purge System ..................................................................................................................................... 13

Container Pressure ............................................................................................................................ 14

Control System .................................................................................................................................. 14

Page 2 of 14 Issue 1 August 2010

Perren Engineering Limited
Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way, Malvern
Worcestershire WR14 1GZ
Tel +44 (0)1684 567050
Fax +44 (0)1684 567055
Email sales@perreneng.com

Introduction
Please read the handbook carefully before operating the equipment. It is important
that all safety and maintenance checks are carried out regularly to ensure “trouble
free” operation of the equipment.

This manual describes the options and levels available throughout this model range
and, therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your equipment. If you
have any doubt of the applicability of this operator’s manual to your particular system,
we will be only too pleased to assist you.

If you require information regarding service and spares please contact:

sales@perreneng.com

Perren Engineering Limited

Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way
Malvern
Worcs
WR14 1GZ

Tel: 01684 567050

Fax: 08709 128299
www.perreneng.com

Hours of business from 08:30 to 17:00 hrs Monday to Friday

Out of hours Contact: 07740 611526

For spares orders wherever possible please state:

System serial No. (found on vessel data plate)

Part number and description. (if unsure please send digital image)
Quantity required
Destination
Method of despatch.

Important Note:
Whilst every effort is made to keep this book accurate and up to date the company
does not accept responsibility for errors therein.

Page 3 of 14 Issue 1 August 2010

Perren Engineering Limited
Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way, Malvern
Worcestershire WR14 1GZ
Tel +44 (0)1684 567050
Fax +44 (0)1684 567055
Email sales@perreneng.com

Glossary

Explanation of symbols

Where a potentially dangerous occurrence

Warning – Danger that could cause serious injury or even
death.

Where a potentially dangerous occurrence

Warning – Caution that could cause damage to the equipment
and or surrounding area.

Caution – Manual
Items weigh in excess of 25 kgs
handling regulation

Warning – Pressurised
Cylinders may be pressurised.
gas.

Warning - Frost Freezing of equipment may take place.

Warning – Substances Substances may be dangerous to health.

Caution Eye protection must be worn

Caution Protective gloves must be worn.

Page 4 of 14 Issue 1 August 2010

Perren Engineering Limited
Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way, Malvern
Worcestershire WR14 1GZ
Tel +44 (0)1684 567050
Fax +44 (0)1684 567055
Email sales@perreneng.com

Caution Protective footwear must be worn.

Caution Dust mask must be worn.

Important

The Dry powder system should only be operated by personnel who have
been trained and are familiar with the operations.

Warning

High pressure air / nitrogen.

The systems use high pressure cylinders – the correct PPE must be used
when carrying out any maintenance on the systems.

Manual handling

The nitrogen cylinders weigh in excess of 40 kgs, so the appropriate lifting

equipment must be used when removing and installing the cylinders.

Page 5 of 14 Issue 1 August 2010

Perren Engineering Limited
Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way, Malvern
Worcestershire WR14 1GZ
Tel +44 (0)1684 567050
Fax +44 (0)1684 567055
Email sales@perreneng.com

Dry Powder System – 250kg BC System

The Perren 250kg BC Dry Powder system comprising of a dry powder container
designed and manufactured to PD5500, and fitted with a large diameter filler port,
nitrogen inlet, pressure relief valve, pressure release valve and pneumatically
operated powder delivery valve.

High pressure nitrogen is used to pressurise the system and is supplied in one off 30
litre nitrogen cylinder mounted in a frame. The high-pressure nitrogen passes
through a regulator, which reduces it down to the systems operating pressure of 12
bar.

Discharge is via a single 30 metre x 25 mm bore delivery hose, mounted on a hose

reel, and terminates with a powder applicator rates at 2.0 kgs per second.

All controls are pneumatic and a control panel is provided adjacent to the hose reel in
the locker.

Dry Powder Schematic

Pressure
Regulator System
Pressure
Purge
Line
B

Air feed from

vehicle

Page 6 of 14 Issue 1 August 2010

Perren Engineering Limited
Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way, Malvern
Worcestershire WR14 1GZ
Tel +44 (0)1684 567050
Fax +44 (0)1684 567055
Email sales@perreneng.com

Pre Operational Procedure

1. Ensure that the pressure in the nitrogen cylinders is between 180 and 200 bar.
If less than 180 bar, the cylinder should be removed and recharged.

2. Ensure that the applicator valve is in the closed position.

3. Ensure that the filler cap is on tight.

Operating Procedure

Using the controls on the Dry Powder sector of the

1
control panel, carry out the following

1. Open pressuring valve on the control panel,

which will allow the powder container to be
pressurised.

2. Remove applicator from its stowage. 3

3. Open delivery valve.

4. Unlock hose reel and deploy required amount

of hose.

5. Open applicator valve which will allow powder

to discharge.

6. Control discharge with the powder

applicator.

7. Close the applicator after use.

Page 7 of 14 Issue 1 August 2010

Perren Engineering Limited
Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way, Malvern
Worcestershire WR14 1GZ
Tel +44 (0)1684 567050
Fax +44 (0)1684 567055
Email sales@perreneng.com

Post Operational Procedure.

5
1. Close the powder delivery valve.

2. Open purge valve on control panel.

3. Open and close the applicator slowly, allowing

the pressure to build up in the hose, which will 1
allow the powder in the hoses to be blown out.
Carry out this operation a number of times,
until no more powder is discharged.

4. Close applicator valve 2

5. Close pressurising valve.

6. Rewind hose onto reel and stow applicator.

7. Release pressure from powder vessel and expellant cylinder pipework (see
warning below).

8. Remove and recharge the nitrogen cylinder

9. Recharge the dry powder container with the correct amount of powder.
Important - never mix different types of powder.

Page 8 of 14 Issue 1 August 2010

Perren Engineering Limited
Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way, Malvern
Worcestershire WR14 1GZ
Tel +44 (0)1684 567050
Fax +44 (0)1684 567055
Email sales@perreneng.com

Warning.

Pressurised containers – Ensure that there is no pressure in the dry powder

container before trying to remove the filler cap. Any residual pressure should be
released by pressing and holding down the red knob position near the centre of the
filler cap.

High pressure nitrogen – Ensure nitrogen cylinder valve is closed before

disconnecting the nitrogen cylinder adaptor to enable the cylinder to be removed.

Further information and technical assistance can be obtained from the manufacturer.

Page 9 of 14 Issue 1 August 2010

 Perren Engineering Limited
Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way, Malvern
Worcestershire WR14 1GZ
Tel +44 (0)1684 567050
Fax +44 (0)1684 567055
Email sales@perreneng.com

Parts Listing
Container
Item Part Number Description Quantity
001 1472 250kg powder container 1
002 0056 Filler cap with pressure relief and pressure 1
release
003 1512 Expellant cylinder stowage bracket 1
004 1504 Strap 25mm blue 1

001 002 003

004

Page 10 of 14 Issue 1 August 2010

Perren Engineering Limited
Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way, Malvern
Worcestershire WR14 1GZ
Tel +44 (0)1684 567050
Fax +44 (0)1684 567055
Email sales@perreneng.com

Pressurisation System
Item Part Number Description Quantity
005 0334 Nitrogen cylinder 1
006 0068 Pressure gauge 1
007 0069 Actuated high pressure valve 1
008 1499 Hose high pressure 1
009 0100 Regulator 1
010 0106 Non return valve 1
011 1152 Hose 1

007

006
008

005

008

010 009

Page 11 of 14 Issue 1 August 2010

Perren Engineering Limited
Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way, Malvern
Worcestershire WR14 1GZ
Tel +44 (0)1684 567050
Fax +44 (0)1684 567055
Email sales@perreneng.com

010

011

Discharge System
Item Part Number Description Quantity
012 1511 Actuated valve 1
013 1517 Hose (system to reel) 1
014 0083 Delivery hose 30m 1
015 0503 Applicator sealing washer 1
016 0402 Powder applicator 1

012

013

Page 12 of 14 Issue 1 August 2010

Perren Engineering Limited
Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way, Malvern
Worcestershire WR14 1GZ
Tel +44 (0)1684 567050
Fax +44 (0)1684 567055
Email sales@perreneng.com

016 015 014

Purge System
Item Part Number Description Quantity
017 1452 Hose 1
018 1500 Actuated valve LP 1

017

018

017

Page 13 of 14 Issue 1 August 2010

Perren Engineering Limited
Unit 4 Britannia Business Centre
Britannia Way, Malvern
Worcestershire WR14 1GZ
Tel +44 (0)1684 567050
Fax +44 (0)1684 567055
Email sales@perreneng.com

Container Pressure
Item Part Number Description Quantity
019 0421 Gauge 0-360psi 1
020 1506 Gauge panel label 1
1518 Hose 1

019

020

Control System
Item Part Number Description Quantity
021 1475 Control panel - 3 valve 1
022 1505 Control panel label - 3 valve 1

022

021

Page 14 of 14 Issue 1 August 2010

 style 3356
Roof Turret
ITEM PART ITEM PART
DESCRIPTION QUANTITY DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
NO. NUMBER NO. NUMBER

074 NAIL GRIP AMTAK FAST CAT # 3326 3/16 736052 4 107 SHAFT ROTATION FEEDBACK STSTL 769846 1
DIA COMP

075 PLATE IDENTIFICATION BT & RT ALUM 744414 1 108 SHAFT GEAR COMP BOSTON GEAR G254 718270 1

076 RING RETAINING TRUARC N5000-75STSTL 756171 2 109 GEAR POT UNS C36000 COMP 718271 1

077 STOP 9/16 - 18 UNF STSTL COMP 769755 2 110 COVER FEEDBACK POT STSTL MCH 707563 1
COMP
078 PLUG BLACK CELCON MCH COMP 745187 2
111 SENSOR ROTARY WABASH 1036-0001 769844 2
079 SHAFT SPROCKET 12L 14STL COMP 3356 768395 2
112 SHAFT ELEV FEEDBACK STSTL COMP 769845 1
080 CARRIER OUTPUT 7:1 STEEL COMP 707564 2
113 CLAMP CABLE STSTL NEWARK # 34C1948 707548 2
081 GEAR PLANET 7:1 RATIO STL XT 718262 6
STRMMSTR 114 SCREW SLT’D PN HD #10-24 X 3/8 ST STL 766049 2

083 MOTOR S/A 12V OWOSSO REPAIR 33560002 1 116 PKG LIST/INST RT, 12V, 3356 121598 1

083 MOTOR S/A 24V OWOSSO REPAIR 33560003 1 117 SCREW SOC HD SET LOC WELL1/4 765083 2
-20X1/4”
085 CLAMP WORM DRIVE 11/16 TO1 706017 1
1/4”MURRAY G

091 SCREW SOC HD CAP (18-8)3/8 -16X1 1/4” 765154 2

092 O-RING PARKER 2-157 BUNA-70 757360 1

093 HANDWHEEL SMOOTH W/FOLDING HDL 721493 2

PLASTIC

094 KEY WOODRUFF 3/32 X 1/2 #304 ST STL 727026 2

096 RIVET SHORT C1018 STEEL 754052 14

097 WASHER FLAT 3/4ODX13/64IDX.040 STSTL 784168 2

099 SCREW SOC HD CAP PATCH 10-24 X 3/8” 767029 2

SS

100 PIN ROLL ESNA SS 18-8 #79-028-125-1000 744056 1

101 SCREW SOC HD SET CUP PT5/16-18 X 765268 1

1/2” SS

102 PIN ROLL ESN ST STL 18-879-022-094- 744078 2

0750

103 PIN ROLL 5/64 X 3/8 LG STSTL 3356 744449 1

104 PIN ROLL ESNA SSTL 18-879-022-094- 744075 1

0625

105 WASHER #8 SS NARROW 3/8 X .188 X .04 784123 4

106 SHAFT GEAR FEEDBACK STSTL COMP 768392 1

PHONE: 330.264.5678 or 800.228.1161 I FAX: 330.264.2944 or 800.531.7335 I www.akronbrass.com

revised: 4/09
WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER: We warrant Akron Brass products for a period of five (5) years after purchase against defects in materials or workmanship. Akron Brass will repair or replace
product which fails to satisfy this warranty. Repair or replacement shall be at the discretion of Akron Brass. Products must be promptly returned to Akron Brass for warranty service.

We will not be responsible for: wear and tear; any improper installation, use, maintenance or storage; negligence of the owner or user; repair or modification after delivery; damage; failure to
follow our instructions or recommendations; or anything else beyond our control. WE MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OTHER THAN THOSE INCLUDED IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT, AND WE DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Further, we will not be responsible for any consequential,
incidental or indirect damages (including, but not limited to, any loss of profits) from any cause whatsoever. No person has authority to change this warranty.
ISO 9001 REGISTERED COMPANY
© Premier Farnell Corporation. 2000 All rights reserved. No portion of this can be
reproduced without the express written consent of Premier Farnell Corporation.
 style 3356
Roof Turret

technical service parts

105 34
110 11113
SEE SHEET 6 FOR 108
DRIVE DETAILS 7 106 105 34
46 BALLS 8 3 1
103
78
7 11 2 19 104 110 76111
11 13
1 46 BALLS
SEE SHEET86 FOR
3
DRIVE DETAILS 109 106 72 108
3 01 114 2 16
1 10
9 46 BALLS4 8 3 6 1 7
103
70 71 104 70 3 18
113 7 11 7
2 19 72 76 11
76 69 12 78 78 46 BALLS 8 107 12 69
11 1 3
109 72 57 9
3 01 114 2 16 9 4 6 1
58 9
70 1 10 71 70 18
7
69 12 113 78 107 69 72 3
67
76 113 12
57
9
11
102 9
34 1 68 58
9 9

67
85
102 113 9
9

105 34 111 72 114 1 68

112 102
9
13
71 59
7 1 9 85
28 9

105 72 114 1
11113 112 102
71 7 10112 59 9
60 9
18 28 27 100 9
7
15 58 9
7
7 11 1

101
61 92 62609 9
187 29 1
28 27 100 9
7
15 63 58
91 1 7
7 11 9 9 1

3 62
7 29 28 TYP(2) 61 9
9
1
92 7
63 9
91 1
3
2 TYP(2)
SEE SHEET 6 FOR
DRIVE DETAILS 92 7

2
SEE SHEET 6 FOR
DRIVE DETAILS
6

1 7
6 7 12
13 3
1 USE PERMABOND LM113 OR LOCTITE 222 AT ASSEMBLY
19 7
2
1 10 1
12 2 USE
1 PERMABOND HH120 OR LOCTITE 277 AT ASSEMBLY
7
3
13 3 USE PERMABOND LM113 OR LOCTITE 222 AT ASSEMBLY
19 8 46 BALLS
2
10 3
1
USE
2 LUBRIPLATE LOW-TEMPHH120
USE PERMABOND GREASE
OR AT ASSEMBLY
LOCTITE 277 AT ASSEMBLY
3 9 NO TIMING
8 46 REQUURED
BALLS
3 4 3 SIKAFLEX-1A
USE SEALANT
USE LUBRIPLATE AT ASSEMBLY
LOW-TEMP GREASE AT ASSEMBLY
8 46 BALLS 9 NO TIMING
73 REQUURED
4 5 DIMPLE
4 AT
USEASSEMBLY
SIKAFLEX-1A SEALANT AT ASSEMBLY
7 23 3

11 8 46 BALLS
73 7
77 4 6 USE
5 LOCTITE 680ATATASSEMBLY
DIMPLE ASSEMBLY
7 23 77
14 5 11
8 77 7
7
7 USE
6 PARKER
USE O-LUBE
LOCTITEAT
680ASSEMBLY
AT ASSEMBLY
77
14 8 STOP/PLUG LOCATIONS SHOWN FOR 270°
1 8 14 75 14 5 7 8 7
ROTATION TRAVEL
USE ONLY.
PARKER SEEAT
O-LUBE CHART
ASSEMBLY
14 BELOW FOR STOP/PLUG
STOP/PLUG LOCATIONS
LOCATIONS FORFOR 270°
SHOWN
74 TYP(4) 8

1 75 14 ROTATIONAL
8 TRAVEL OTHER THAN
ROTATION TRAVEL ONLY. SEE270°.
CHART
BELOW FOR STOP/PLUG LOCATIONS FOR
74 TYP(4)
9 ROTATIONAL
USED WITH TRAVEL
GAS SPRING OTHER
OPTION THAN 270°.
ONLY

9 USED WITH GAS SPRING OPTION ONLY

ASSEMBLE WITH ROUNDED EDGES OF
11
RETAINING RING TOWARDS WATERWAY
ASSEMBLE WITH ROUNDED EDGES OF
11
12 ASSEMBLERETAINING RING TOWARDS
WITH ROUNDED EDGES WATERWAY
OF
RETAINING RING AWAY FROM WATERWAY
ASSEMBLE WITH ROUNDED EDGES OF
12 TIMING
ALIGN DIMPLE
RETAINING RINGON BOTH
AWAY JOINTS
FROM PRIOR TO
WATERWAY
13
INSTALLING POSITION SENSORS. ADJUST OUTPUT
TO 2.5 VOLTS
ALIGN±.01V ONDIMPLE
TIMING EACH SENSOR.
ON BOTH JOINTS PRIOR TO
13
INSTALLING POSITION SENSORS. ADJUST OUTPUT
14 CENTER TO 2.5 VOLTS BETWEEN
NAMEPLATE ±.01V ON EACH SENSOR.
ROTATION STOP HOLES AS SHOWN;
CENTERVOLTAGE
14 MOTOR
STAMP NAMEPLATE BETWEEN
AT ASSEMBLY
ROTATION STOP HOLES AS SHOWN;
STAMP MOTOR VOLTAGE AT ASSEMBLY
® Registered Trademark of Premier Farnell Corp.
121596
 style 3356
Roof Turret
technical service parts

97 99
94

93

3 41 17 7
79 3 52
20 46
43 42 46
3 20 44
45 51 50 SIKAFLEX BETWEEN
20 ITEMS #48 & #50
42
48

26 43 3
96
20

3 21 25
7 33 80
33 7
24 81
22

20 21 3
35 82 3
7 53
37 32
25
96 34 1
36
3
6 INSIDE GEAR
37 31

30 7
37 49
3 39
In Motor S/A
36 6
3

37

35

83 Motor S/A
40

65
47 64 66
3 SECTION B-B
SCALE 1.125
 style 3356
Roof Turret
technical service parts

ITEM PART ITEM PART

DESCRIPTION QUANTITY DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
NO. NUMBER NO. NUMBER

001 BASE INLET MCH HC 2.25SF PY 121594 1 039 GEAR WORM HARDENED BOSTON 718273 2
GEAR#HL1056
002 JOINT ROTATION MCH/HC 2.52SF 121590 1
040 BEARING 3/8”ID 3578 #SCE65 704393 2
003 ELBOW INLET MCH/HC 1.93SF 121591 1
041 SHAFT HANDWHEEL STSTL COMP 768394 2
004 RING BALL RETAINER MCH 3588 HC .57SF 120095 2
042 KEY WOODRUFF 1/8 X 1/2 #404 ST STL 727025 4
005 O-RING 6 3/4 X 6 1/2 2-260 BUNA-N70 757386 2
043 SPROCKET 10 TEETH X 1/2 BORE X # 35 769499 4
006 KEEPER 6061T6 HC .016SF 3588 120137 2
044 CHAIN ROLLER#35 ST STL 3340 OCM see 706923 24
007 SCREW SOC HD CAP 6-32 X 3/8”ST STL 765175 2 note
008 BALL BRONZE 1/2” (+/ - .001 TOLERANCE) 703383 184 045 LINK MASTER #35 ST STL,MORSE SPRING 729092 2
CLIP
009 GEAR ELEVATION 6061T6 HC 1.29SF 121593 2
046 SPACER ACETAL .246THICK 3578 769495 4
010 SCREW SOC HD CAP 1/4 -20 X 3/4”ST STL 765030 24
047 SHAFT WORM STSTL MCH COMP 3356 768393 2
011 O-RING 3/32 X 8”ID 2-171 BUNA N 70 757435 2
048 HOUSING GEARBOX MCH/HC .56SF 121588 2
012 O-RING 4 3/4 X 4 3/8 2-348 BUNA N 70 757376 1
049 KEY SPECIAL 1018 STEEL 3440 727044 2
013 SLIDER HC .03SF 6061T6 3588 120143 1
050 COVER GEARBOX MCH HC .21SF 121586 2
014 PLUG BLACK CELCON 3588 COMP 744432 2
051 SCREW SOC HD CAP 1/4 - 20 X 2 1/2 765276 4
015 O-RING 5 1/8”X 5”2-249 BUNA N70 757075 1
STSTL
016 STOP 9/16 - 12 UNC STSTL COMP 769843 1
052 SCREW SOC HD CAP 1/4 - 20 X 1 1/4 765277 6
017 O-RING 2-112 BUNA N70 DURO 757313 2 STSTL

018 ELBOW MIDDLE W/JOINT MCH/HC 4.95SF 121592 1 053 O-RING 5/8”X 1/2”2-014 BUNA N70 757041 2

019 SCREW SOC HD SET CUP PT 10-24 X 765040 2 054 HARNESS WIRING 8’ 3356 ROOF TURRET 721492 1
5/16”
055 SCREW SOC HD CAP 10-24 X 1 3/4”LG SS 767126 2
020 BEARING ROLLER NEEDLE 1/2ID #INA- 704395 10
056 ELBOW OUTLET MCH/HC 3.4SF 121595 1
SCE86
057 END CLEVIS MCH COMP STSTL 710145 1
021 GEAR INTERNAL STEEL 0627 718192 4
058 CLIP HAIRPIN ST STL #RUE-16 3436 744222 2
022 PIN ROLL 1/8 X 1/2 ST STL 744288 8
059 PIN GAS SPRING STSTL COMP 742175 1
023 O-RING 2-355 BUNA-N 70 DUROMETER 757453 1
060 CYLINDER GAS SUSPA TYPE 16-4 1000 707515 1
024 CARRIER SQ DR 4:1 RATIO STEEL COMP 707476 2
N 3527
025 PIN ROLL ESNA 18-879-028-156-0750 744118 4
061 CAM ADJUSTOR 316 ST STL 3436 707154 1
026 GEAR PLANET STEEL 16 TOOTH TEK 718136 8
062 CLEVIS END 316 ST STL 707155 1
GEAR
063 WASHER FLAT 18-8 ST STL 5/8 X 3/8 X 784064 1
027 O-RING 3/16 X 4 1/4 ID 2-347 BUNA N 70 757446 1
1/16
028 SCREW SOC HD CAP 7/16-14X1-1/4 ST 765207 4
064 O-RING 9/16OD X 3/8 ID PARKER 2-110 757295 2
STL
BUNA
029 O-RING 4-3/8”X4 5/8X.1392-245 BUNA N70 757225 1
065 O-RING 1 3/8”X 1 3/16”2-123 BUNA N70 757054 2
030 O-RING 1 5/8”X 1 1/2”2-029 BUNA N70 757056 2
066 CAP BEARING 6061T6 HC .09SF 121607 2
031 SCREW SOC HD CAP W/PATCH 6-32X1/2” 765052 8
067 CLAMP 7/32-5/8 316 ST STL 5/16” WIDTH 707524 1
SS
068 BELLOWS GAS SPRING BLK URETHANE 704951 1
032 GEARBOX PLANETARY MCH/HC .25SF 121589 2
COMP
033 O-RING 2-036 BUNA N 757312 4
069 RING TRUARC 5100-37 ST STL 758247 2
034 SCREW SOC HD CAP 8-32 X 1 3/8 STSTL 765278 10
070 CELCON SHIM .75OD X .500ID X .015THK 769351 4
035 SPRING BELLEVILLE STSTL AS# B1000- 769276 8
071 O-RING 3/8” X 1 1/4” BUNA N70 2-010 757005 2
050S
072 WASHER COMP STSTL 3356 RT 784170 4
036 BEARING NEEDLE TORRINGTON NTA-815 703453 4
1/2ID 073 STOP PERMANENT STSTL COMP 769752 1
037 WASHER THRUST .094 TRC-815 3571 784121 8
 STYLE 4815, 4820
Assault Nozzles TM

Manufactured after May 2005

TECHNICAL SERVICE PARTS LIST

23
45
2
16
17

13
34 35
2

6 18
32
4
7 27

37 5
15 30 1
31 2
19
14 14
2 15 2

22
26 1
3
20
25 46
38 22
44 1
39
10 21 42
33
9 2 2 47
52 2
36 2 3
40
43
41
1

1 (BIM)

ASSEMBLY NOTES 1 (Storz)

1 Use Loctite 222 or 113 Permabond

2 Use Parker O-Ring Lubricant or
equivalent petroleum based lubricant
3 Use Loctite 277 or Permabond HH120

® Registered Trademark of Premier Farnell Corp.

119923
 STYLE 4815, 4820
Assault Nozzles TM

TECHNICAL SERVICE PARTS LIST

QUANTITY
ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER 4815 4820
1 Swivel Assembly (1 1/2" NH) ** 45290002 1 1
1 Swivel Assembly (1 1/2" NPSH) ** 45290003 1 1
1 Swivel Assembly (1 1/2" BSP) ** 45290005 1 1
1 Swivel Assembly (BIM) 45290009 1 1
1 Swivel Assembly (52mm Storz) 17630014 1 1
2 Throat Retainer Pins 7-44-178 3 3
3 Throat 119883 1 1
4 Turbine Retaining Ring 7-58-241 1 1
5 Socket Head Cap Screw 7-67-094 2 2
6 O-Ring 7-57-309 1 1
7 Tubine Teeth 7-72-153 1 1
9 Socket Head Button Screw 7-65-182 1 1
10 O-Ring 7-57-066 1 1
13 Pattern Indicator Band 7-04-797 1
13 Pattern Indicator Band 7-04-794 1
14 O-Ring 7-57-422 2 2
15 Seat 7-69-243 2 2
16 Trunnion 107860 2 2
17 O-Ring 7-57-269 2 2
18 Roll Pin 7-44-080 2 2
19 Ball 7-04-029 1 1
20 Spider 7-68-296 1 1
21 O-Ring 7-57-232 1 1
22 Socket Head Set Screw 7-65-002 2 2
23 Handle (Black) 7-21-427 1 1
25 Washer 7-84-094 1 1
26 Socket Head Button Screw 7-65-149 1 1
27 Shutoff Body 119890 1
27 Shutoff Body 119889 1
30 O-Ring 7-57-265 1 1
31 Socket Head Screw 7-67-088 1 1
32 Pattern Sleeve *** 119887 1 1
33 Nozzle Body 119885 1 1
34 Cam Insert 7-23-033 1 1
35 Pattern Sleeve Ring 119886 1 1
36 Baffle Stem 119888 1 1
37 Bumper *** 7-04-789 1 1
38 Spider Retainer 116903 1 1
39 Baffle Head 107967 1 1
40 Flow Spacer * 1 1
41 Flow Label * 1 1
42 Lock Washer 7-84-090 1
43 Socket Head Cap Screw 7-63-064 1
44 Spring 7-69-629 1 1
45 Swivel Gasket 7-17-042 1 1
46 Pistol Grip (Black) 7-18-233 1
47 Washer 7-84-093 1
52 O-Ring 7-57-268 1 1
*To replace flow spacers or labels, contact customer service.
** For other threads, order by description and thread size (ODM and TPI) or by Akron tread code.
*** The bumper is pressed on and timed with the pattern sleeve. It may need to be returned to the factory for proper assembly.

PHONE: 330.264.5678 or 800.228.1161 I FAX: 330.264.2944 or 800.531.7335 I www.akronbrass.com

Available in Canada through AKRON MANUFACTURING COMPANY
PHONE: 519.773.8431 I FAX: 519.773.3794 REVISED 6/07

WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER: We warrant Akron Brass products for a period of five (5) years after purchase against defects in materials or workmanship. Akron Brass will repair or replace
product which fails to satisfy this warranty. Repair or replacement shall be at the discretion of Akron Brass. Products must be promptly returned to Akron Brass for warranty service.

ISO 9001 REGISTERED COMPANY We will not be responsible for: wear and tear; any improper installation, use, maintenance or storage; negligence of the owner or user; repair or modification after delivery; damage; failure to
follow our instructions or recommendations; or anything else beyond our control. WE MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OTHER THAN THOSE INCLUDED IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT, AND WE DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Further, we will not be responsible for any consequential,
incidental or indirect damages (including, but not limited to, any loss of profits) from any cause whatsoever. No person has authority to change this warranty.

© Premier Farnell Corporation. 2000 All rights reserved. No portion of this can be
reproduced without the express written consent of Premier Farnell Corporation.
 PHONE: 330.264.5678 or 800.228.1161 FAX:330.264.2944 or 800.531.7335 www.akronbrass.com
WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER: We warrant Akron Brass products for a period of five (5) years after purchase against defects in materials or workmanship. Akron Brass will repair or replace product
which fails to satisfy this warranty. Repair or replacement shall be at the discretion of Akron Brass. Products must be promptly returned to Akron Brass for warranty service.

We will not be responsible for: wear and tear; any improper installation, use, maintenance or storage; negligence of the owner or user; repair or modification after delivery; damage; failure to follow our
instructions or recommendations; or anything else beyond our control. WE MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OTHER THAN THOS INCLUDED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT, AND
WE DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Further, we will not be responsible for any consequential, incidental or indirect
damage (included, but not limited to, any loss or profits) from any cause whatsoever. No person has authority to change this warranty.

Don't Be Afraid Of The Dark... A Premier Farnell Company

Electric/Manual Rewind Booster Reel

Mounting and Safety Instructions
1- Unpack the shipping pallet. Inside you will find an Akron Brass Electric or Manual Rewind Booster Reel that is ready to be
installed.

2- Inspect the box and all items inside for damage. Report any damage to the delivering carrier immediately. If there is any
damage, save the pallet and all packing materials.

3- Properly orient the frame.

4- Holes have been predrilled along the bottom and side of the frame. Mount the Booster Reel level.

5- Follow the supplied wirng instructions to wire the Booster Reel

6- Attach a flexible connector between the swivel joint and inlet piping. Check for any leaks prior to use. Inlet piping and
flexible conduit needs to be at 1"ID or maximum flow efficiency.

7- Attach the booster hose, charge the line with fluid, then wind the hose on to the Booster Reel.
8- Electrical diagram is only needed for the electric version.

CAUTION: BE CAREFUL, READ AND UNDERSTAND ALL USER

INFORMATION OR DO NOT USE THIS PRODUCT.

DO NO USE POWER REWIND UNTIL MANUAL CRANK HANDLE IS REMOVED!

USE CAUTION WHEN GUIDING HOSE ON HOSE REEL! KEEP FINGERS SEVERAL
INCHES AWAY FROM DRUM SO THERE IS NO POSSIBILITY OF TRAPPING OR PINCH-
ING FINGERS!

NEVER EXCEED THE MAXIMUM PRESSURE OF THE REEL OR THE HOSE!

NEVER PERFORM MAINTENANCE OR REMOVE FITTINGS WITHOUT RELEASING THE

PRESSURE IN THE HOSE!

Page 38
 FIREFIGHTING EQUIPMENT
STYLE 3463 FIREFOX™
INSTALLATION, OPERATING and MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
( Version Available)
The following is intended to provide the basic instructions for installation, operating and maintenance of
the FireFox.

TOOLS REQUIRED
• Utility knife • Medium flat screwdriver
• Medium Phillips screwdriver • Small flat screwdriver
• Small Phillips screwdriver • 1/2 inch hex head wrench
• Electrician’s pliers (multipurpose, stripping and crimping)

PRODUCT RATINGS
Maximum motor current draw:
12 volt versions 14.0 amps each for elevation and rotation motors
3.0 amps for nozzle pattern motor
24 volt versions 7.5 amps each for elevation and rotation motors
1.5 amps for nozzle pattern motor
Normal operating current (depending on operating conditions - pressure, flow, etc.):
12 volt versions 3 - 10 amps each for elevation and rotation motors
0.7 amps for nozzle pattern motor
24 volt versions 2 - 5 amps each for elevation and rotation motors
0.4 amps for nozzle pattern motor
Minimum Voltage: (Truck engine must be operating for proper voltage requirement.)
All 12 volt motors: 11.5 volts while operating
All 24 volt motors: 23 volts while operating
Mass: 39 lbs. (17.7 kg)
Maximum Flow: 375 GPM (1420 lpm)
Maximum Pressure: 200 PSI (14 bar)
Noise Emission: 91 Db @1m with maximum flow

PRODUCT WARNINGS
▲
! WARNING: The maximum flow of the FireFox is 375 GPM. The center of the waterway outlet is
10.75 inches from the bottom of the inlet. Ensure these values and an appropriate
safety factor is used to determine a proper support structure.
▲
! WARNING: Aim the FireFox in a safe direction before pumping water through it.

▲
! WARNING: Although the logic box includes a water resistant coating it is important to keep water
out of the control and logic boxes. Prolonged exposure to water will cause damage.
When the cover of the control or logic box is removed check that the O-Ring under the
118210
▲
! WARNING: cover is intact and free of dirt and debris.
▲
! WARNING: The FireFox uses current limiting for both the monitor and nozzle stops. Use only
appropriate Akron Brass nozzles.
▲
! WARNING: Do not use the electric controls when the override cranks are being used or are in
position for use.
▲
! WARNING: Make the connection of the vehicle and auxiliary battery the final step.

▲
! WARNING: If any tags or bands are worn or damaged and cannot be easily read, they should be
replaced.
▲
! WARNING: Disconnect power and disable flow before maintenance.

▲
! WARNING: Keep all personnel out of the Danger Zone (Figure 4), in front of the outlet of the
monitor when the water source is attached. Dangerous flow velocities can cause
serious injury. ▲ WARNING !

▲
! WARNING: The FireFox monitor contains moving parts. Keep hand, finger and
objects away from pinch points.
▲
! WARNING: Not designed for explosive environments.

▲
! WARNING: Exceeding the maximum pressure and flow of the monitor or nozzle may cause
damage.
▲
! WARNING: Do not disconnect monitor from base while flowing.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
• Review the instructions, wiring diagram, component layout and rotational stops diagram before
installing this unit. This unit operates on 12 volt DC or 24 volt DC depending on the unit chosen. All
electrical current flows through the wires. The monitor does not act as a ground. The wires from the

FIGURE 1 DIMENSIONAL LAYOUT

1-1/2" NH OUTLET

R 9 11/32
11 3/4
9 13/32

2 3/8 5 17/32
15 15/32

8 3 17/32
10 21/32
2" NPT

2" NPT
Top View Side View

Page 2
 control boxes can be cut to the length for the application plus 10 inches (See STEP 2). Do not extend
the wires from the logic box to the monitor.
• The optional auxiliary battery is used for power failures and to ensure that the proper voltage and current
are maintained at the logic box when using a smaller gauge wire (12 Awg) for the power leads (vehicle
battery). If the optional auxiliary battery is used, do not extend the auxiliary battery wires. This will ensure
that the proper voltage and current are maintained at the monitor for it to operate properly. The optional
battery is automatically recharged by the truck electrical system through the positive (auxiliary battery)
and ground connections on the circuit board. The vehicle battery connections must have power turned on
whenever the truck is running so that the battery can be recharged properly. If possible, connect the
positive (vehicle battery) wire directly to the main vehicle battery or main master switch. A diode in the
logic box will prevent the optional battery from feeding current back into the main truck system.
• Not recommended for use in salt water applications.
• For firefighting by trained firefighters only.
• For use with water or standard fire fighting foams only. After use with foam, flush with fresh water.
• Do not use the FireFox nozzle as a forcible entry tool.
• Drain the FireFox monitor and nozzle after use to prevent “freeze damage”.
• Ensure that the thread in the nozzle swivel matches the thread on the FireFox outlet. Do not
overtighten the nozzle onto the FireFox.
• The FireFox monitor, nozzle, logic box, control boxes, optional battery, and field adjustable rotation
stops are made for optimal performance, Do not alter in any manner.
• Do not install shutoffs on the outlet of the FireFox.
• Mount the logic box, control boxes and optional battery out of Danger Zone (Figure 4).

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

A. CONTROL BOXES AND JOYSTICK WIRING ATTACHMENT
The following steps will prepare either the joystick or control box for attachment to the logic box.
STEP 1 If the control box includes an attached cable skip to STEP 5.
STEP 2 Determine the length of #20-7 cable needed, add 10 inches, then cut. For example, if a
five foot length of cable is needed, add 10 inches and cut the cable 5 foot 10 inches long.
STEP 3 Remove the cable grip nut and washer from the control box and put it on the cable with
the threads facing the box. On the same end of the cable remove 4 inches of the outer
casing of the cable and strip back 3/8 inch from each of the 7 wires.
STRAIGHT RIGHT RAISE
STEP 4 Take the 7 ring terminals from the plastic bag and crimp them on
the 7 wires. Remove the four control box cover screws and set WHITE
BL
BR

WH

UE
N

the control box cover aside. Thread the 7 wires through the cable
ITE

WHT WHT
grip attached to the control box and attach them to the proper
terminals. Reattach control box cover and secure with the four
OW

EN
K
AC

E
LL

GR
RE
BL

screws. Tighten the cable grip nut and washer on the cable to
YE

the cable grip on the control box to secure the cable. FOG LEFT LOWER

STEP 5 Remove the cable grip nut from the plastic bag and put it on the other end of the cable
with the threads facing out. Remove 6 inches of the outer cover and strip back 3/8 inch
from each of the 7 wires.
STEP 6 Remove the 6 logic box cover screws and set the logic box cover aside. Thread the 7
wires through the hole in the logic box (see component layout, Figure 2). Thread the cable
grip washer and cable grip nut with the threads facing the box on the cable. Pull enough

Page 3
 cable through the cable grip to ensure a good fit. Tighten the cable grip nut and attach
the individual wires to the proper terminals (see wiring schematic Figure 5). Reattach the
logic box cover and secure with the 6 screws.

B. MONITOR WIRING HARNESS ATTACHMENT

These instructions are to attach the monitor wiring harness to the logic box.
STEP 7 Remove the cable grip nut from the logic box for the wiring harness cable. DO NOT
REMOVE THE CABLE GRIP. Put the cable grip nut on the wiring harness cable with the
threads facing out. Put the cable through the correct logic box cable grip (see
component layout, Figure 2 ) so the cable grip nut will grab the outer cover of the cable.
Tighten the cable grip nut and attach the individual wires to the proper terminals (see
wiring schematic Figure 5).

C. BATTERY ATTACHMENT
The battery connections should be the last connection made.
STEP 8 AUXILIARY BATTERY - Remove the logic box cable grip nut for the auxiliary battery and
place it on the battery (#16-2) cable with the threads facing out. Thread the cable through
the cable grip nut until the cable grip will grab the cable. Tighten the cable grip and
attach the individual wires to the proper terminals.
NOTE: Auxiliary Battery is not intended to operate the monitor.
STEP 9 VEHICLE BATTERY - Remove the logic box cable grip nut for the vehicle battery and
place it on to the battery cable (#10-2 or #12-2 depending on length) with the threads facing
out. Thread the cable through the cable grip until the cable grip nut will grab the cable.
Tighten the cable grip nut and attach the individual wires to the proper terminals (see wiring
schematic Figure 5). Reattach the logic box cover and secure with the 6 screws.
NOTE: To supply enough current to operate the monitor properly, adequate wire size is critical.

D. MECHANICAL MONITOR ATTACHMENT

The Monitor is to be mounted on the waterway with a 2" OR 21⁄2" NPT thread. The front of the
monitor is shown in Figure 4. The 21⁄2" NPT inlet will have a Logo etched on the front.
THE ROTATIONAL AND ELEVATION STOPS SET THE BOUNDARIES FOR THE AREA IN WHICH
THE MONITOR IS ALLOWED TO TRAVEL. The monitor is shipped with rotation stops at 90˚ right,
and at 90˚ left. All other positions are achieved by switching the factory set stop and the plug in the
desired stop location. Both the stops and the plugs have a 1/2 inch hex head. Refer to Figure 4 to
determine which stop location is needed for the desired rotation. The elevation stop sets the upper
limit of the elevation. The monitor is shipped with elevation stops at 90° above horizontal and 45˚
below horizontal to meet NFPA. All other vertical positions are achieved by switching plugs and
stops to the desired locations as indicated in Figure 4.

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. CONTROL BOX CONTROL OPERATION
To change the nozzle pattern toward the straight stream or fog position press the proper toggle
switch toward straight or fog respectively. To change the horizontal monitor position toward the
right or left press the proper toggle switch toward right or left respectively. To change the vertical
monitor position upward or downward press the proper toggle switch toward raise or lower
respectively.

B. JOYSTICK
To change the nozzle pattern toward the straight stream or fog press the corresponding button on
top of the Joystick. To change the horizontal position right or left move the Joystick towards the
Page 4
 FIGURE 2

WIRING HARNESS
(ATTACHED TO MONITOR)

VEHICLE BATTERY CABLE ENTRANCE

PROVIDED BY CUSTOMER
(10-2 OR 12-2 CABLE) 16-6 CABLE

LOGIC BOX
8 3/4 8.312

Page 5
4.625
JOYSTICK
5 3/4 (OPTION)
2 11/32
20-7 CABLE Akron Brass
SS RIGHT RAISE

FOG LEFT LOWER

MOUNTING HOLE FOR #8 READ OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USE

SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW

CONTROL BOX

Controller Symbols
— Straight Stream
< Fog
 Left  Right
LAYOUT

 Up  Down
STANDARD
ELECTRICAL
COMPONENT
 FIGURE 2A

VEHICLE BATTERY CABLE, PROVIDED BY CUSTOMER

(10-2 or 12-2 CABLE)
14-2 CABLE VALVE WIRING HARNESS
SUPPLIED WITH VALVE

LOGIC BOX

WIRING HARNESS (ATTACHED TO MONITOR)

8 3/4 8.312
16-10 CABLE

Page 6
4.625

5 3/4
2 11/32

JOYSTICK (OPTION)
MOUNTING HOLE FOR #8
SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW
VALVE

OPEN SS RIGHT RAISE

CLOSE FOG LEFT LOWER

READ OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USE

Controller Symbols 20-10 CABLE

CONTROL BOX FOR VALVE
— Straight Stream
< Fog
 Left  Right
 Up  Down
LAYOUT
ELECTRICAL

(WITH VALVE)
COMPONENT
 FIGURE 2B

VEHICLE BATTERY CABLE, PROVIDED BY CUSTOMER

(10-2 or 12-2 CABLE)
14-2 CABLE VALVE WIRING HARNESS
SUPPLIED WITH VALVE

LOGIC BOX
8.312
16-10 CABLE WIRING HARNESS (ATTACHED TO MONITOR)
8 3/4

Page 7
18-4 CABLE

4.625

5 3/4
2 11/32

MOUNTING HOLE FOR #8

SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW
20-10 CABLE JOYSTICK

Controller Symbols
— Straight Stream
< Fog
LAYOUT

 Left  Right
 Up  Down
AND STOW)
ELECTRICAL
COMPONENT

OSCILLATION
(WITH VALVE, AUTO
FIGURE 4

+90°

+45°

-20° Elevation Stop

-45° to +90° Elevation Stops

AKRON BRASS COMPANY, WOOSTER, OH

MANUFACTURING COMPANY, AYLMER, O

D OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE

MUM PRESSURE 200 PSI/1400 KPA/1
(Factory Set)

OR SERVICING
0° FRONT

STYLE 3463
SERIAL
(Danger Zone)

1
-20°
180° Rotation
Factory Set

+45° Elevation Stop

-45°

320° Rotation

Roll Pin Guide Pins

FRONT

Quick Disconnect Base

Page 8
 appropriate direction. To change the vertical position up or down move the Joystick forward for
down and backwards for up.

C. JOYSTICK WITH TRIGGER FOR VALVE

To change the nozzle pattern toward the straight stream or fog press the corresponding button on
top of the Joystick. To change the horizontal position right or left move the Joystick towards the
appropriate direction. To change the vertical position up or down move the Joystick forward for
down and backwards for up. To open and close the valve, press the trigger to open the valve and
release the trigger to close the valve. The valve can be maintained open by pressing the valve
switch towards open. Note: When valve is maintained open, the trigger will not operate the valve.

D. JOYSTICK WITH TRIGGER FOR VALVE, STOW AND AUTO OSCILLATION

To change the nozzle pattern toward the straight stream or fog press the corresponding button on
top of the Joystick. To change the horizontal position right or left move the Joystick towards the
appropriate direction. To change the vertical position up or down move the Joystick forward for
down and backwards for up. To open and close the valve, press the trigger to open the valve and
release the trigger to close the valve. The valve can be maintained open by pressing the valve
switch towards open. Note: When valve is maintained open, the trigger will not operate the valve.

To stow the monitor, press and release the Stow button. The stow LED light will turn off when
stowed. The stow position can learn a new position (see Section E). The monitor is shipped with
the stow position set at 0° rotation and 0° elevation. For auto oscillation, press the Auto Oscillation
button. To stop the oscillation, press the Auto Oscillation button again or use the joystick and operate
in the left or right direction. The monitor is shipped with the auto oscillation at ± 20°. To change the
auto oscillation range, flip the DIP switch on. For wide auto oscillation range ± 45° (see Figure 5).

E. LEARN MODE
The stow position can learn a new position by pressing and holding the Stow button. When the
monitor reaches the default stowed position (Straight Out), continue to hold the Stow button while
operating the up or down button until the desired position. Let go of just the up or down button
and that will be the new elevated stow position. While continuing to hold the stow button operating
the left or right button untiil the desired position. Release both buttons. This will be the new
stowed position. If the stowed button is released at any time during the process, stop and restart
the sequence.

F. QUICK DISCONNECT
The FireFox is designed for a quick disconnect inlet. If equipped with a quick disconnect
inlet, first mount the inlet on the 2" NPT piping. Make sure the pull pin on the inlet is
facing towards the front (see figure 4). Place the monitor into the inlet so the two guide
pins line up with the groove. Slide the monitor all the way in and rotate 15° clockwise
until the pull pin locks in place. To remove the monitor, pull the pull pin, rotate the
monitor 15° counterclockwise, and lift the monitor out of the inlet.

▲
! Warning: Make sure the monitor is in locked in place before flowing water. The pull pin
must be flush with the housing.

G. MANUAL OVERRIDE CONTROLS

THE MANUAL OVERRIDE CONTROL IS TO BE USED WHEN THE POWER TO THE MONITOR IS
OFF. An override crank is attached. A 1/4 inch Allen wrench will also actuate the overrides. To use
the manual override pull the key pin which holds the override crank in place and insert the hex head
end of the override crank in the hexagon shaped hole beside the crank storage bracket. Then rotate

Page 9
 or spin the override crank either clockwise or counterclockwise to aim the monitor in the desired
direction.

WHEN THE OVERRIDE CRANKS ARE NO LONGER IN USE PUT THEM BACK IN THE STORAGE
POSITION. DO NOT USE THE ELECTRIC CONTROLS WHEN THE OVERRIDE CRANKS ARE BEING
USED OR ARE IN POSITION FOR USE.

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Your FireFox monitor and nozzle should be inspected prior to and after each use, to ensure it is in good
operating condition. Periodically, an unanticipated incident occurs where the FireFox is misused in a
manner that is inconsistent with standard operating practices and those listed in IFSTA. A partial list of
potential misuse includes:
• Operating above maximum rated pressure and flow.
• Not draining, and allowing water to freeze inside.
• Prolonged exposure to temperatures above 130°F, or below -25°F.
• Operating in a corrosive environment.
• Having the FireFox nozzle hit a fixed object during operating or transportation.
• Other misuse that might be unique to your specific environment.
Also there are many “tell tale” signs that indicate repair is in order, such as:
• Controls that are either inoperable or difficult to operate.
• Excessive wear.
• Poor discharge performance.
• Water leaks.
If any of the above situations are encountered, the FireFox should be taken out of service, repaired, and
tested by a qualified technician before placing it back in service.
MOTOR REPLACEMENT
To replace either the horizontal or vertical rotational motors:
1. Disconnect Power from the unit.
2. Loosen and remove the four socket screws (Item 49 on the Parts List) from the gearbox housing (19).
3. Slowly remove the motor assembly (15) and gearbox housing (19) from the unit.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the internal gear, (Item 25 on the Parts List), remains in place, (hold
with a screwdriver), to avoid gear alignment problems.

4. Loosen and remove the four socket head capscrews (21) from the inside of the gearbox housing
that hold the housing and the motor assembly together.
5. Remove gearbox housing (19) from the motor assembly (15).
6. Replace o-ring seal (18) on the gearbox housing (19).
7. Attach the new motor assembly (15) to the gearbox housing (19) making sure all four screws (21) are tight.
8. Install the motor and gearbox housing assembly to the unit making sure all four socket screws (49)
are tight. It may be necessary to rotate the motor slightly to get the motor gear to line up with the
gears inside the gearbox.
9. Restore power to the unit.
10. Test the operation of the unit.

Call Akron Brass Customer Service Department if any problems are encountered.

Page 10
 CABLE HARNESS TO

JOYSTICK CONTROL
20-7 OR 20-10 CABLE

BOX (WITH STOW &

TO WATER VALVE

TO CONTROL BOX/
(FIGURE 2A & 2B)

FIGURE 2, 2A & 2B)

18-4 CABLE TO

OSCILLATION)
16-6 OR 16-10
14-2 CABLE

(FIGURE 2B)
JOYSTICKS
MONITOR

4
3
DIP FUNCTIONS
UP = ON 1
Water ON only if deployed UP
2

Factory Settings
RIGHT/LEFT cancels Auto-osc UP
DOWN
DOWN
1 Return to SS During Stow DOWN
PUR VALVE-PANEL
4 Wide auto-oscillation range DOWN
TB2 ORG VALVE-JYSTK 5
24
COMMON WHT Use the Learned Positions UP
(JOYSTCK OPTION ONLY) 6
TB3 TB1 23
22
VALVE LED GRY Enable LEARN Mode UP
VEHICLE GROUND (-)

8
7
15 28 14 21
8 STOW WHT
VEHICLE BATTERY (+)

1 20
9 RIGHT BLK
** LEFT MOTOR 19
LEFT RED
10
RIGHT MOTOR

Page 11
** 11
18
DOWN BLU
BLK UP MOTOR 17
12 UP GRN
RED DOWN MOTOR 16
13 STREAM YEL
GRN FOG MOTOR 15
14 FOG BRN
WHT SS MOTOR
15
13
16-10 16-6 16
** HARNESS HARNESS 12
17
11
LEFT ORG BLU 18
10
19
RIGHT BLU ORG 20
9
OSC LED RED
8
21 1 OSC OFF BRN
28 15 7
OSC ON BLK
22 14

LOGIC BOX
6
23
RED VALVE MOTOR 5
24
BLK VALVE MOTOR 4
25
3
26
RED/BLK HOR. LIM. SW. 2
27
GRN/BLK ELEV. LIM. SW. 1
28
WHT/BLK COMMON
CABLE, PROVIDED
VEHICLE BATTERY

BY CUSTOMER
FIGURE 5

10-2 OR 12-2
CABLE
NOTES

PHONE: 330.264.5678 or 800.228.1161 I FAX: 330.264.2944 or 800.531.7335 I www.akronbrass.com

Available in Canada through AKRON MANUFACTURING COMPANY
PHONE: 519.773.8431 I FAX: 519.773.3794 REVISED 06/02

WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER: We warrant Akron Brass products for a period of five (5) years after purchase against defects in materials or workmanship. Akron Brass will repair or replace product
which fails to satisfy this warranty. Repair or replacement shall be at the discretion of Akron Brass. Products must be promptly returned to Akron Brass for warranty service.

ISO 9001 REGISTERED COMPANY We will not be responsible for: wear and tear; any improper installation, use, maintenance or storage; negligence of the owner or user; repair or modification after delivery; damage; failure to
follow our instructions or recommendations; or anything else beyond our control. WE MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OTHER THAN THOSE INCLUDED IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT, AND WE DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Further, we will not be responsible for any consequential,
incidental or indirect damages (including, but not limited to, any loss of profits) from any cause whatsoever. No person has authority to change this warranty.

© Premier Farnell Corporation. 2001 All rights reserved. No portion of this can be
reproduced without the express written consent of Premier Farnell Corporation.
 STYLE 3578 STREAMMASTER™
INSTALLATION, OPERATING, AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
( Version Available)
The following is intended to provide the basic instructions for installation, operation and maintenance of the
StreamMaster electric monitor, and to assist in attaining the best possible performance from the unit. Read
and understand these operating instructions before use.

TOOLS REQUIRED
• Utility Knife • Medium flat screwdriver
• Medium Phillips screwdriver • Small flat screwdriver
• Small Phillips screwdriver • 1/2 inch hex head wrench
• Electrician’s pliers (multipurpose, stripping and crimping)

PRODUCT RATINGS
Maximum Motor Current Draw:
12 volt versions 14.0 amps each for elevation and rotation motors
3.0 amps for nozzle pattern motor
24 volt versions 7.5 amps each for elevation and rotation motors
1.5 amps for nozzle pattern motor
Normal Operating Current: (Depending on operating conditions–pressure, flow, etc.)
12 volt versions 3.0 to 10.0 amps each for elevation and rotation
0.7 amps for nozzle pattern motor
24 volt versions 2 - 5 amps each for elevation and rotation motors
0.4 amps for nozzle pattern motor
Minimum Voltage: (Truck engine must be operating for proper voltage requirement.)
All 12 volt motors: 11.5 volts while operating
All 24 volt motors: 23 volts while operating
Mass: 39 lbs. (17.7 kg)
Maximum Flow: 2000 gpm (7600 lpm)
Maximum Pressure: 200 psi (14 bar)
Noise Emission: 95 DL @ 1m with maximum flow

PRODUCT WARNINGS
▲
! WARNING: Charge the unit slowly. Rapid charging may cause a pressure surge that has the potential to
cause an injury, or damage the monitor.
▲
! WARNING: DO NOT stow or deploy the StreamMaster monitor while flowing. Pressing the stow or
deploy buttons causes the nozzle to move automatically and the water stream may cause
damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
▲! WARNING: Aim the unit in a safe direction before pumping water through it. (i.e. Away from power lines)

118026
▲
! WARNING: Although the circuit board includes a water-resistant coating, it is important to keep water out
of the control box and logic box. Prolonged exposure to water will cause damage.
▲
! WARNING: When the cover of the control box or logic box is removed, check that the O-ring under the
cover is intact and free of dirt and debris.
▲
! WARNING: The StreamMaster monitor uses current limiting for both the monitor and nozzle. Use only
appropriate Akron Brass Company nozzles.
▲
! WARNING: Do not use the electric controls when the override cranks are being used or are in position for use.
▲
! WARNING: Make the connection of the vehicle and auxiliary battery the final step.
▲
! WARNING: Replace the identification tags if they should become worn or damaged.
▲! WARNING: DO NOT exceed the maximum pressure or flow ratings of the monitor. Exceeding these
ratings may lead to an injury or may cause damage to the monitor.
▲
! WARNING: DO NOT install shutoffs on the outlet of the monitor. Shutoffs increase the potential for
pressure surges due to water hammer, which have the potential to cause an injury or damage
to the monitor.
▲
! WARNING: The StreamMaster monitor, nozzle, logic box, control box, tether controller, and field
adjustable stops are made for optimal performance. Do not alter in any manner.
▲
! WARNING: The StreamMaster monitor was designed for use with the Akromatic nozzle. Use of any other
nozzle could affect the speed or operation of the unit and should be tested before being put
into service. ▲ WARNING
!

▲
! WARNING: The StreamMaster monitor contains moving parts. Keep hand, finger and objects away
from pinch points (Figure 1).
▲! WARNING: Disconnect power and disable flow before maintenance.
▲! WARNING: Keep all personnel out of the Danger Zone (Figure 2), in front of the outlet of the monitor when
the water source is attached. Dangerous flow velocities can cause serious injury.
▲! WARNING: Not designed for explosive environments.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
• Review the instructions, wiring diagram, component layout and rotational stops diagram before
installing this unit. This unit operates on 12 volt DC or 24 volt DC depending on the unit chosen. All
electrical current flows through the wires. The monitor does not act as a ground. The wires from the
control boxes can be cut to the length for the application plus 10 inches (See STEP 2). Do not extend
the wires from the logic box to the monitor.
• The optional auxiliary battery is used for power failures and to ensure that the proper voltage and current
are maintained at the logic box when using a smaller gauge wire (12 Awg) for the power leads (vehicle
battery). If the optional auxiliary battery is used, do not extend the auxiliary battery wires. This will ensure
that the proper voltage and current are maintained at the monitor for it to operate properly. The optional
battery is automatically recharged by the truck electrical system through the positive (auxiliary battery) and
ground connections on the circuit board (Figure 6). The vehicle battery connections must have power
turned on whenever the truck is running so that the battery can be recharged properly. If possible,
connect the positive (vehicle battery) wire directly to the main vehicle battery or main master switch. A
diode in the logic box will prevent the optional auxiliary battery from feeding current back into the main
truck system.
• Not recommended for use in salt water applications.
• For firefighting by trained firefighters only.
• For use with water or standard fire fighting foams only. After use with foam, flush with fresh water.
• Do not use the StreamMaster nozzle as a forcible entry tool.
• Drain the StreamMaster monitor and nozzle after use to prevent “freeze damage”.
• Ensure that the thread in the nozzle swivel matches the thread on the StreamMaster outlet. Do not
overtighten the nozzle onto the StreamMaster.

Page 2
MECHANICAL MONITOR ATTACHMENT
The Monitor is to be mounted on the waterway with eight 5/8 inch bolts and nuts of grade five minimum
and suitable washers with a minimum of six threads engagement. The front of the monitor in Figure 2 is
considered to be point 4 and is above the identification tag. The bolts must be tightened in a criss
cross pattern progressively increasing tightening torque to a maximum of 100 foot pound dry.
NOTE: Not recommended to mount on a raised flange or have a butterfly valve between the flanges.
This may cause damage to the monitor’s flange when tightening the bolts.

THE ROTATIONAL AND ELEVATION STOPS SET THE BOUNDARIES FOR THE AREA IN WHICH THE
MONITOR IS ALLOWED TO TRAVEL AND MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NFPA. The upper row
controls the right travel, and the lower row controls the left travel. The angles for the rotational stops are
with respect to the “reference direction” illustrated in Figure 2. The monitor is shipped with the upper
row stop at point 3 which stops the monitor at 90˚ right, clockwise and the lower row stop at point 5
which stops the monitor at 90˚ left, counterclockwise. All other positions are achieved by switching the
factory set stops and the plugs in the desired stop location. Both the stops and the plugs have a 1/2
inch hex head. Refer to Figure 2 to determine which stop location is needed for the desired right,
clockwise or left, counterclockwise rotation. The elevation stop sets the upper and lower limits of the
elevation. The monitor is shipped with the upper limit at 45° or 90° above horizontal (mounted vertically)
and the lower limit at 45° below horizontal to meet NFPA. All other vertical positions are achieved by
switching plugs and stops to the desired locations as indicated in Figure 4.

MECHANICAL ATTACHMENT OF CONTROLLER AND LOGIC BOX

A. CONTROLLER AND TETHER CONNECTOR ATTACHMENT
Pump panel cut out and mounting hole dimensions are given in Figure 3. The controller and tether
connector should be installed in the pump panel prior to electrical connection to the logic box.

B. LOGIC BOX ATTACHMENT

The StreamMaster logic box must be mounted close enough to the monitor to allow the 8 ft. monitor
wiring harness sufficient slack to allow the monitor to travel through its full range. The logic box overall
dimensions and mounting hole dimensions are given in Figure 5.
WARNING: Do not extend the monitor wiring harness.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

A. CONTROLLER, JOYSTICK OR TETHER CONNECTOR ELECTRICAL ATTACHMENT
These instructions are for attaching the controller, joystick or the tether connector to the logic box. The
controller, joystick and tether connector are supplied with 8 ft. of cable.
STEP 1 If the control box includes an attached cable skip to STEP 6.
STEP 2 Determine the length of #20-7 cable needed, add 10 inches, then cut. For example, if a
five foot length of cable is needed, add 10 inches and cut the cable 5 foot 10 inches long.
STEP 3 Remove the cable grip nut and washer from the control box and put it on the cable with
the threads facing the box. On the same end of the cable remove 4 inches of the outer
casing of the cable and strip back 3/8 inch from each of the 7 wires.
STEP 4 Take the 7 ring terminals from the plastic bag and crimp them on STRAIGHT RIGHT RAISE

the 7 wires. Remove the four control box cover screws and set WHITE
BL
BR

WH

UE

the control box cover aside. Thread the 7 wires through the
N

ITE

cable grip attached to the control box and attach them to the WHT WHT

proper terminals. Tighten the cable grip nut and washer on the
OW

N
K

EE
AC

D
LL

GR
RE

cable to the cable grip on the control box to secure the cable.
BL
YE

Reattach control box cover and secure with the four screws. FOG LEFT LOWER

Page 3
 STEP 5 Remove the cable grip nut from the plastic bag and put it on the other end of the cable
with the threads facing out. Remove 6 inches of the outer cover and strip back 3/8 inch
from each of the 7 wires.
STEP 6 Remove the 6 logic box cover screws and set the logic box cover aside. Thread the 7
wires through the upper or lower control hole in the logic box (see component layout,
Figure 5). Thread the cable grip washer and cable grip nut with the threads facing the box
on the cable. Pull enough cable through the cable grip to ensure a good fit. Tighten the
cable grip nut and attach the individual wires to the proper terminals (see wiring diagram
Figure 6). Reattach the logic box cover and secure with the 6 screws.
NOTE: The lower control and upper control wires must be attached to the correct
terminals for the lower control to override the upper control. The one attached to the
Master terminal will have the overriding capabilities.
Adjust the DIP switch settings as needed. (Refer to the description below.)

B. DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

The DIP switches are located in the logic box on the circuit board.

The switches are factory set at:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
On • • •
Off • • • • •
Switch 1 - Allows the ability to use a 6-conductor controller for the Stow controller instead of 10-
conductor.
ON - Enables the 6-wire Stow controller
OFF - Disable the 6-wire Stow controller
Switch 2 - Allows the Stow and Deploy switch to be a momentary or a maintain switch.
ON - Requires JOG (maintain) to Stow or Deploy (No Learn mode if DIP 2 is ON)
OFF - Momentary switch to start the Stow or Deploy sequence (factory set)
Switch 3 - Lowers the monitor during the Deploy sequence for 2.5 seconds.
ON - Deploys for 2.5 seconds (factory set)
OFF - Will not Deploy the 2.5 seconds
Switch 4 - Lowers the monitor during the Deploy sequence for 3.75 seconds.
ON - Deploys for 3.75 seconds
OFF - Will not Deploy 3.75 seconds (factory set)
Note: If Switch 3 and 4 are both ON the monitor will lower for 5 seconds during the Deploy
sequence.
Switch 5 - Allows the nozzle to return to straight stream during the Stow sequence.
ON - Returns the nozzle to straight stream during the Stow sequence
OFF - Leaves nozzle pattern set where last used (factory set)
Switch 6 - Reserved for Factory
Switch 7 - Allows the user to choose between the Learned positions or the Default positions.
ON - Stow at the Learned position (factory set)
OFF - Stow in the default position only
Switch 8 - Allows the user to turn the Learn mode ON or OFF
On - Enables Learn mode programming (factory set)
OFF - Disable the Learn mode, the user cannot reprogram a new setting

Page 4
C. MONITOR WIRING HARNESS ATTACHMENT
These instructions are to attach the monitor wiring harness to the logic box.
STEP 7 Remove the cable grip nut from the logic box for the wiring harness cable. DO NOT
REMOVE THE CABLE GRIP. Put the cable grip nut on the wiring harness cable with the
threads facing out. Put the cable through the correct logic box cable grip (see component
layout, Figure 5) so the cable grip nut will grab the outer cover of the cable. Tighten the
cable grip nut and attach the individual wires to the proper terminals (see wiring
schematic Figure 6).

D. BATTERY ATTACHMENT
The battery connections should be the last connection made.
STEP 8 AUXILIARY BATTERY - Remove the logic box cable grip nut for the auxiliary battery and
place it on the battery (#16-3) cable with the threads facing out. Thread the cable through
the cable grip nut until the cable grip will grab the cable. Tighten the cable grip and
attach the individual wires to the proper terminals (see wiring schematic Figure 6).
NOTE: Auxiliary Battery is not intended to operate the monitor.
STEP 9 VEHICLE BATTERY - Remove the logic box cable grip nut for the vehicle battery and
place it on the battery cable (#10-2 or #12-2 depending on length) with the threads facing
out. Thread the cable through the cable grip until the cable grip nut will grab the cable.
Tighten the cable grip nut and attach the individual wires to the proper terminals (see wiring
schematic Figure 6). Reattach the logic box cover and secure with the 6 screws.
NOTE: To supply enough current to operate the monitor properly, adequate wire size is critical.

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. CONTROLLER OPERATION
The controller is used to control the monitor and nozzle.
1. To deploy the monitor for use:
Lift the safety cover on the STOW/DEPLOY switch and push the toggle switch up and release.
Note: Some models may not be equipped with a deploy switch. The Deploy Function will only lower
the monitor. See DIP Switch 3 and 4.
2. To stow the monitor after use:
Lift the safety cover on the STOW/DEPLOY switch and push the toggle switch down and release.
Note: Some models may not be equipped with a deploy switch.
3. To change the horizontal monitor position toward the right or left:
Press the proper toggle switch toward “RIGHT” or “LEFT” respectively, as labeled on the controller,
until the desired position is reached.
4. To change the vertical monitor nozzle position upward or downward:
Press the proper toggle switch toward “RAISE” or “LOWER” respectively, as labeled on the controller,
until the desired position is reached.
5. To change the nozzle pattern toward the straight stream or fog position:
Press the proper toggle switch toward “STRAIGHT” or “FOG” respectively, as labeled on the
controller, until the desired nozzle position is reached.

THE LOWER CONTROL BOX FUNCTIONS WILL OVERRIDE THE UPPER CONTROL BOX
FUNCTIONS IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NFPA STANDARD. NOTE: THE
LOWER CONTROL AND UPPER CONTROL WIRES MUST BE ATTACHED TO THE CORRECT
TERMINALS FOR THE LOWER CONTROL (MASTER) TO OVERRIDE THE UPPER CONTROL
(SLAVE). NONE OF THE FUNCTIONS CAN BE CONTROLLED FROM THE UPPER CONTROL BOX
WHEN ANY OF THE SWITCHES ON THE LOWER CONTROL BOX ARE ACTIVATED.

Page 5
B. EMERGENCY STOP DURING DEPLOY OR STOW
If it is necessary to immediately stop the StreamMaster monitor during the deploy or stow sequence,
activate any switch on the control panel and the unit will stop moving (E-Stop). To continue operation after
an emergency stop, operate any switch or press the Stow or Deploy switch to continue the sequence.

C. MANUAL OVERRIDE CONTROLS

The manual override control is to be used only when the power to the monitor is off. A override crank
with a 1/4" hex drive is provided and attached to the monitor for use on both the horizontal and vertical
override controls. To use the manual override, insert the hex drive end of the override crank into the
hexagon shaped hole on the shaft end opposite the motor. Rotate the override crank in the desired
direction to aim the monitor.

▲
! WARNING: When the override crank is no longer in use, put it back in the storage position. Do
not use the electric controls when the override crank is being used or is in position for use.

D. LEARN MODE
The learn mode allows the operator to teach the monitor a new final position for the nozzle in the stowed position.
To learn a new stowed position:
1. Start with the monitor in a deployed position.
2. Press and hold the Stow button. The monitor will stow into the default stowed position. If at any
point you release the Stow button, you must start over.
3. When the monitor comes to a stop, continue holding the stow button and operate the up or down button
to the desired elevated position, then operate the left or right button to the desired rotation position.
4. Release the Stow button, this will be the new stowed position.
Note: There is no learn mode for the Deploy Function. See DIP Switch 3 and 4.

USING SIX WIRING STOW CONTROLLER

a) The Six Wire Controller was developed to reduce wires and hence reduce slip rings on the
turntable for an Aerial. The premise of this is to reduce the lower controller wires for a Stow Controller from 10
wires to 7 or 6 wires (6 wires if the supply voltage come from a different source.) This was done by removing
the LED (1 wire) and using multiple signals to replace the Stow and Deploy signal (2 wires). When the Stow
button is activated, three signals are sent to the Logic Box, Fog, Stream and Right. When the Deploy button is
activated, Fog Stream, and Left are sent to the Logic Box. The program in the Logic Box will recognize these
signals as Stow or Deploy when DIP Switch 1 is On.
b) Programming a new Stow position. When using a Six Wire Controller (Dip Switch 1 is On), only the
Lower & Raise can be used to learn a new Stow position. Left and Right cannot be used because the Stow
switch uses the Right function to indicate Stow (program will not allow it.) Therefore, to learn a new Stow
position in the left or right direction, a jumper wire must be used to act like a single Stow switch. The jumper
wire must be placed from TB1 #24 (supply voltage) to #21 (Stow). When the monitor finishes the stow
sequence and stops at the default stow location, continue hold the jumper wire in place and use the Left,
Right, Lower or Raise button to move that monitor to the new desired stow position. Release the buttons and
remove the jumper wire and the new learned stow position will be programmed.
28
27
26
25
24
+12/24 VOLT
TB1 23
22
LED1 Jumper Wire
14
DEPLOY
28 21
STOW
20
RIGHT
19
LEFT
18
DOWN
17
UP
16
STREAM
15
FOG

14
13
12
11
10
+12/24 VOLT
9
LED2
8
1 DEPLOY
15 7
STOW
6
RIGHT
MASTER

5
LEFT
SLAVE

4
DOWN
3
UP
2
STREAM
1
FOG

Page 6
E. FAULT CODES
Your StreamMaster monitor comes with built in diagnostic tools. On the controller for stow is a small
LED indicator. The primary function of the LED indicator is to indicate whether the monitor is stowed or
deployed. The LED indicator also functions as a Fault Indicator.
Deployed: The light will repeatedly flash twice as the unit is deploying. When the fully deployed
position is reached the light will stop flashing and remain on.
NOTE: As soon as the deploy sequence begins, the light in the cab will turn on.
Stowed: When the fully stowed position is reached the LED indicator will go out.
NOTE: The light in the cab will also go out when fully stowed.
Fault Code 1: Fault code 1 is represented when the light flashes continually. If the EEPROM on the
circuit board is faulty, Fault 1 will occur.
Correction: The circuit board must be replaced
Fault Code 2: Fault code 2 is normal during the deploy sequence and is represented when the light
repeatedly flashes twice. Code 2 is not a fault, but occurs when the deploy button is
pressed and automatically ends when the fully deployed position is reached.
Operation of any switch while flashing twice will cause the monitor to go into E-stop
mode. (See Fault Code 3)
Fault Code 3: Fault code 3 is represented when the light repeatedly flashes 3 times. This fault code
indicates an emergency stop (E-stops) occurred during stow or deploy. If any switch is
pushed during the stow or deploy sequence all movement will stop and Fault 3 will flash.
Correction: Operate any switch or press the Stow or Deploy switch to continue the sequence.
Fault Code 4: Fault code 4 is represented when the light repeatedly flashes 4 times. If the Deploy or
Stow switch is pushed and the monitor is prevented from rotating. Fault 4 will occur.
Correction: Check for an obstruction by the monitor. Remove the obstruction. Operate any switch
or press the Stow or Deploy switch to continue the sequence.
Fault Code 5: Fault code 5 is represented when the light repeatedly flashes 5 times. If the Stow or
Deploy switch is pushed and the monitor is prevented from elevating, Fault 5 will occur.
Correction: Check for an obstruction by the monitor. Remove the obstruction and operate any
switch or press the Stow or Deploy switch to continue the sequence.

Figure 1
3 29⁄32 Range +90° To -45°
2 3⁄4 3 1⁄2" NH Thread 6 1⁄8

90°
▲
! WARNING
Elevation
Sensor 8 1⁄16

21 3⁄16 45°

16 1⁄4 15 1⁄2

▲
! WARNING 12 3⁄4

4" 150° Flange 5 7⁄8 5 17⁄32 3

⁄4 5 3⁄4 9 7⁄32
Dimensional Specifications Rotation Sensor

Page 7
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Your StreamMaster monitor and nozzle should be inspected prior to and after each use to ensure it is in
good operating condition. Periodically, an unanticipated incident occurs where the unit is misused in a
manner that is inconsistent with standard operating practices. A partial list of potential misuses includes:
• Operating above the maximum rated pressure or flow.
• Prolonged exposure to temperatures above 130°F, or below -25°F.
• Operating in a corrosive environment.
• Having the StreamMaster nozzle hit a fixed object during operation or transportation.
• Any other misuse that might be unique to your specific environment.
Also, there are many “tell tale” signs that indicate repair is in order, such as:
• Controls that are either inoperable or difficult to operate.
• Excessive wear
• Poor discharge performance
• Water leaks.
If any of the above situations are encountered, the StreamMaster monitor should be taken out of service,
repaired, and tested by a qualified technician before placing back in service.

MOTOR REPLACEMENT
To replace either the horizontal or vertical rotational motors:
1. Disconnect Power from the unit.
2. Loosen and remove the four socket screws (Item 4 on the Parts List) from the gearbox housing (52).
3. Slowly remove the motor assembly (59) and gearbox housing (52) from the unit.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the internal gear, (Item 47 on the Parts List), remains in place, (hold
with a screwdriver), to avoid gear alignment problems.
4. Loosen and remove the four socket head capscrews (51) from the inside of the gearbox housing that
hold the housing and the motor assembly together.
5. Remove gearbox housing (52) from the motor assembly (59).
6. Replace both o-ring seals (50 & 53) on the gearbox housing (52).
7. Attach the new motor assembly (59) to the gearbox housing (52) making sure all four screws (51) are tight.
8. Install the motor and gearbox housing assembly to the unit making sure all four socket screws are
tight. It may be necessary to rotate the motor slightly to get the motor gear to line up with the gears
inside the gearbox.
9. Restore power to the unit.
10. Test the operation of the unit.

Call Akron Brass Customer Service Department if any problems are encountered.

Page 8
Figure 2

PT 8 DANGER ZONE

PT 7 DANGER ZONE

STREAMMASTER
ROTATION FOR EACH STOP COMBINATION

Upper Row
CW / CCW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NO STOP
1 78 / 168 78 / 213 78 / 258 45 / 270 0 / 270 78 / 33 67.5 / 270 22.5 / 270 78 / 270
3 180 / 0 135 / 0 90 / 0 45 / 0 0/0 315 / 0 67.5 / 0 22.5 / 0 348 / 0
Lower Row

4 180 / 45 135 / 45 90 / 45 45 / 45 0 / 45 303 / 33 67.5 / 45 22.5 / 45 303 / 45

5 180 / 90 135 / 90 90 / 90 45 / 90 0 / 90 258 / 33 67.5 / 90 22.5 / 90 258 / 90
6 180 / 135 135 / 135 90 / 135 45 / 135 0 /135 213 / 33 67.5 / 135 22.5 / 135 213 / 135
7 180 / 22.5 135 / 22.5 90 / 22.5 45 / 22.5 0 / 22.5 315 / 22.5 67.5 / 22.5 22.5 / 22.5 325.5 / 22.5
8 180 / 67.5 135 / 67.5 90 / 67.5 45 / 67.5 0 / 67.5 280.5 / 33 67.5 / 67.5 22.5 / 67.5 280.5 / 67.5
NO STOP 180 / 168 135 / 213 90 / 258 45 / 303 0 / 348 315 / 33 67.5 / 280.5 22.5 / 325.5 N/A

Factory Set Stops

NOTE: There is no lower row for point 2 due to the location of the wiring harness.

Each possible combination is listed and a maximum of 348 degrees can be achieved for total rotation. The
factory will set the stops at Lower Row point 5 and Upper Row point 3. This will give a rotation of 90 degrees
clockwise (CW) and 90 degrees counterclockwise (CCW) for a total rotation of 180 degrees.

Page 9
Figure 3

PANEL MOUNT CONTROLLER

BRASS COMPANY

SS RIGHT RAISE

FOG LEFT LOWER

READ OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USE

5.500

5.000
R 1/4 MAX AT CORNERS
4 1/4

ROUGH OPENING
3.250 IN TRUCK PANEL 3.750

#10-24 UNC TAPPED HOLE (TYP 4)

TRUCK PANEL CUT OUT DIMENSIONS

Page 10
Figure 3A

PANEL MOUNT CONTROLLER FOR STOW

96"

2 1/2

6"

STRIP BACK 3/8 " (TYP 10)

DEPLOY

DeckMaster
SS RIGHT RAISE

FOG LEFT LOWER

STOW READ OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USE

DO NOT DEPRESS STOW OR DEPLOY

WARNING WHILE FLOWING WATER

1/4 RAD MAX AT CORNERS

3 3/4 7 4 1/4

3 1/4

7 1/2
ROUGH OPENING IN TRUCK PANEL
#10-24 UNC TAPPED HOLE (TYP 4)
CLEARANCE FOR FACEPLATE

TRUCK PANEL CUTOUT DIMENSIONS

Page 11
Figure 3B
(RIGHT)

JOYSTICK

(DOWN) (UP) 5.500 SQUARE

(LEFT)
FOG

5.275

8.338

TETHER CONNECTOR

96 INCHES

CLEARANCE FOR CONNECTOR FLANGE

`1 HOLE #4-40 UNC TAPPED HOLE
TYP 4

1 9/32 .969

1 9/32
.969

PANEL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

Page 12
Figure 4
ELEVATION STOPS
The elevation stop position and their corresponding stop/plug configurations are shown in the
table below. The hole location for the plug/stop is referred to by an angle from the horizontal.
The outlet angle is the angle trajectory (from horizontal) the water will flow from the
StreamMaster unit.
HOLE LOCATION LOWER UPPER
OUTLET OUTLET
ANGLE ANGLE
15˚ 0˚ -45˚ -60˚
P PS S P -45˚ 45˚
P PS P S -45˚ 30˚
S PS P P -30˚ 90˚
P PS P P -45˚ 90˚
S PS P S -30˚ 30˚
S PS S P -30˚ 45˚

P=PLUG S=STOP PS=PERMANENT STOP

Factory Set Stops
Note that the permanent stop must remain installed. If this stop is removed, the outlet will go past vertical and the gear will run out
of travel.
There are six options for the customer to use. This is achieved with 3 plugs, 1 permanent stop, and 2 stops provided (the unit
will be assembled with the permanent stop in 0˚ location, 1 stop in the -45˚, and plugs in the remaining 15˚ and -60˚ locations).
The parts kit will contain 1 stop and 1 plug.

PS 15°

-45°
S

-60°

Page 13
 Figure 5

Pattern Motor
8 3/4 Lower Control Box
Aux. Battery Cable
Surface or Panel Mount
16-2 Cable (Option)
DEPLOY

DeckMaster
SS RIGHT RAISE Wiring Harness
FOG LEFT LOWER
(Attached to Monitor)
STOW READ OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USE

DO NOT DEPRESS STOW OR DEPLOY

WARNING WHILE FLOWING WATER

16-6 or 16-10 Cable Elevation

Motor Cable
Rotation
2 11/32
Logic box Motor Cable
8.312
Vehicle Battery
Cable Entrance
(10-2 or 12-2)

Page 14
Akron Brass
SS RIGHT RAISE

FOG LEFT LOWER

READ OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USE

4.625 Joystick and Harness (not sealed)

5 3/4 (Option)
Optional
Configuration 20-7 or 20-10 Cable Akron Brass
SS RIGHT RAISE

FOG LEFT LOWER

READ OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USE

Upper Control Box

(Option)

Controller Symbols
— Straight Stream
< Fog
LAYOUT

 Right Left
Up Down
ELECTRICAL
COMPONENT
 Figure 6

Note: IND LITE is a set of SPDT

AUX GROUND contacts rated 1 amp at 24 vdc max. DIP FUNCTIONS
UP = ON 1
– VEHICLE GROUND Six Wire Stow DOWN
TO VEHICLE BATTERY Jog To Stow DOWN
+12/24 VOLT VEHICLE BATTERY Stow Deployed Deploy Timer 2 secs UP

Black
6 7 8 6 7 8 Deploy Timer 4 secs DOWN
+12/24 VOLT AUX BATTERY (OPTIONAL) Go to SS during Stow DOWN
DOWN
Factory Settings

4
Not Used
Customer must supply power to Use the Learned Positions UP
Enable LEARN Mode UP
CABLE TO CAB LIGHT CIRCUIT the IND LITE
8

Green
28
1

White
27
2
26
3
+12/24 VOLT 25
4
24
1 5 +12/24 VOLT WHT
23
6 TB3 TB1 LED1 GRY
22
TB2 7 14
DEPLOY PUR
IND LIGHT 15 28 21
8 STOW ORG
IND LIGHT 1 20
9 RIGHT BLK
ORG LEFT MOTOR 19
10 LEFT RED
BLU RIGHT MOTOR 18
11 DOWN BLU
BLK UP MOTOR 17
12 UP GRN
RED DOWN MOTOR 16
13 STREAM YEL
GRN FOG MOTOR 15
14 FOG TAN
WHT SS MOTOR

Page 15
14
15
GROUND 13
16
GROUND 12
17
11
18
10
19 +12/24 VOLT WHT
9
20 LED2 GRY
8
21 1 DEPLOY PUR
28 15 7
22 14 STOW ORG
6
23 RIGHT BLK
5
24 LEFT RED
4
25 DOWN BLU
3
MASTER
SLAVE

26 UP GRN
RED/BLK LIM ROT 2
27 STREAM YEL
GRN/BLK LIM ELEV 1
28 FOG TAN
WHT/BLK +12/24 VOLT
SLAVE
20-7 OR 20-10 CABLE
TO CONTROL BOX OR JOYSTICK
16-6 OR 16-10 CABLE
TO MONITOR MASTER
20-7 OR 20-10 CABLE
TO CONTROL BOX OR JOYSTICK
NOTES

PHONE: 330.264.5678 or 800.228.1161 I FAX: 330.264.2944 or 800.531.7335 I www.akronbrass.com

Available in Canada through AKRON MANUFACTURING COMPANY
PHONE: 519.773.8431 I FAX: 519.773.3794 REVISED 6/06

WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER: We warrant Akron Brass products for a period of five (5) years after purchase against defects in materials or workmanship. Akron Brass will repair or replace product
which fails to satisfy this warranty. Repair or replacement shall be at the discretion of Akron Brass. Products must be promptly returned to Akron Brass for warranty service.

ISO 9001 REGISTERED COMPANY We will not be responsible for: wear and tear; any improper installation, use, maintenance or storage; negligence of the owner or user; repair or modification after delivery; damage; failure to
follow our instructions or recommendations; or anything else beyond our control. WE MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OTHER THAN THOSE INCLUDED IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT, AND WE DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Further, we will not be responsible for any consequential,
incidental or indirect damages (including, but not limited to, any loss of profits) from any cause whatsoever. No person has authority to change this warranty.

© Premier Farnell Corporation. 2000 All rights reserved. No portion of this can be
reproduced without the express written consent of Premier Farnell Corporation.
STYLE 3356 TRIDENT HFRT-10 Monitor

INSTALLATION, OPERATING, AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION:

The following is intended to provide the basic instructions for installation, operation and maintenance of the Trident
HFRT-10 and assist in attaining the best possible performance from the unit. Read and understand these operating
instructions before use.

TOOLS REQUIRED
• Utility Knife
• Medium Phillips screwdriver
• Electricians pliers (multipurpose, stripping and crimping)
• 5/8 inch hex head wrench
• Allen wrench set (1/8, 9/64, 3/16, 5/16, 3/8)

PRODUCT RATINGS
Maximum Motor Current Draw:
12 volt versions 15.0 amps each for elevation and rotation motors
3.0 amps for nozzle pattern and for dual gal. motors
24 volt versions 7.5 amps each for elevation and rotation motors
1.5 amps for nozzle pattern and for dual gal. motors

Normal Operating Current: (Depending on operating conditions-pressure, flow, etc.)

12 volt versions 3.0 to 10.0 amps each for elevation and rotation motors
0.7 amps for nozzle pattern and for dual gal. motors
24 volt versions 2.0-5.0 amps each for elevation and rotation motors
0.4 amps for nozzle pattern and for dual gal. motors

Minimum Voltage: (Truck engine must be operating for proper voltage requirement.)
All 12 volt motors: 11.5 volts while operating
All 24 volt motors: 23 volts while operating

Mass: 70lbs. (31.75 kg) (less nozzle)

Maximum Flow: 2000 gpm (7600lpm)

Maximum Inlet Pressure: 250psi (17.25 bar)

121597
PRODUCT WARNINGS:

! WARNING: Charge the unit slowly. Rapid charging may cause a pressure surge that has the
potential to cause an injury, or damage to the turret.
! WARNING: DO NOT stow or deploy the Trident while flowing. Pressing the stow or deploy
buttons causes the nozzle to move automatically and the water stream may
cause damage to equipment or injury to personnel.
! WARNING: Aim the unit in a safe direction before pumping water through it.
(i.e. Away from power lines)
! WARNING: Although the circuit board includes a water-resistant coating, it is important to
keep water out of the control box and logic box. Prolonged exposure to water will
cause damage.
! WARNING: Use only appropriate Akron Brass Company nozzles.
! WARNING: Make the connection of the vehicle and auxiliary battery the final step.
! WARNING: Replace the identification tags if they should become worn or damaged.
! WARNING: DO NOT exceed the maximum pressure or flow ratings of the turret. Exceeding
these ratings may lead to an injury or may cause damage to the turret.
! WARNING: DO NOT install shutoffs on the outlet of the turret. Shutoffs increase the
potential for pressure surges due to water hammer, which have the potential to
cause an injury or damage to the turret.
! WARNING: The Trident HFRT-10, nozzle, logic box, joystick/control box, and field adjustable
stops are made for optimal performance. Do not alter in any manner.
! WARNING: The Trident HFRT-10 was designed for use with specific Akron Brass nozzles. Use
of any other nozzles could affect the speed or operation of the unit and should be
tested before being put into service.
! WARNING: The Trident HFRT-10 contains moving parts. Keep hands, fingers and objects away
from pinch points.
! WARNING: Disconnect power and disable flow before maintenance.
! WARNING: Keep all personnel out of the Danger Zone in front of the outlet of the nozzle when
the water source is attached. Dangerous flow velocities can cause serious injury.
! WARNING: Not designed for explosive environments.

2
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

• Review the instructions, wiring diagram, component layout and rotational stops diagram before installing this unit.
This unit operates on 12 or 24 volt DC depending on the unit chosen. All electrical current flows through the wires. The
turret does not act as a ground. Do not extend the wires from the logic box to the turret.

• The optional auxiliary battery is used for power failures and to ensure that the proper voltage and current are main-
tained at the logic box when using a smaller gauge wire (12 awg) for the power leads (vehicle battery). If the optional
auxiliary battery is used, do not extend the auxiliary battery wires. This will ensure that the proper voltage and current are
maintained at the turret for it to operate properly. The optional battery is automatically recharged by the truck electrical
system. The vehicle battery connections must have power turned on whenever the truck is running so that the battery
can be recharged properly. If possible, connect the positive (vehicle battery) wire directly to the main vehicle battery or
main master switch. A diode in the logic Box will prevent the optional auxiliary battery from feeding current back into the
main truck system.

• Not recommended for use in salt water applications.

• For firefighting by trained firefighters only.
• For use with water or standard fire fighting foams only. After use with foam, flush with fresh water.
• Do not use the nozzle as a forcible entry tool.
• Drain the Trident after use to prevent “freeze damage”.
• Ensure that the thread in the nozzle swivel, if applicable, matches the thread on the monitor outlet.
Do not over tighten the nozzle onto the monitor.

MECHANICAL MONITOR ATTACHMENT

The Trident is to be mounted on either a 4”150# Inlet Flange or the optional Rear Inlet Elbow with eight 5/8 inch bolts and
nuts used on the 150# inlet flange and four 5/8 inch bolts and nuts used on the optional inlet elbow, all are of grade five
minimum with suitable washers and a minimum of six threads engagement. The bolts must be tightened in a criss cross
pattern progressively increasing tightening torque to a maximum of 100 foot pound dry. The optional Rear Inlet Elbow
has three versions available, a 4” 150# flange inlet, 4” Victaulic inlet, and 5” Victaulic inlet.

The angles for the hard rotational stops are with respect to the “reference direction” illustrated in fig.2. The turret is
shipped with the stop points 2, and 5 on rotation which stop the monitor at 135° right, clockwise and at 135° left, coun-
terclockwise. All other positions are achieved by switching the factory set stops and plugs in the desired stop location,
the horizontal rotation can move up to 380°. Both the stops and plugs have a 5/8 inch hex head. Refer to fig.3 to de-
termine which stop location is needed for the desired right, clockwise or left, counterclockwise rotation. The elevation
stop sets the upper and lower limits of the elevation. The monitor is shipped with the upper limit at 70° above horizontal
and the lower limit at -30° below horizontal. All other vertical positions are achieved by switching plugs and stops to the
desired locations as indicated in fig.1.

3
 Elevation Travel Fig.1.
70°

17-21/32

30°

8-1/2 10-19/32

3 1/2" NH OUTLET

4" 150# FLANGE

7-7/8 15

Rotation Travel Fig.2.

135° left, counter clockwise

Reference (Front)
permanent stop
(do not remove)

Fig.3.
135° right, clockwise

Rotation Pt1 Pt2 Pt3 Pt4 Pt5

limit

270° stop stop plug plug stop View looking down

180° stop plug stop stop plug from top of monitor
380° stop plug plug plug plug

4
MECHANICAL ATTACHMENT OF CONTROL PACKAGE AND LOGIC BOX

• LOGIC BOX ATTACHMENT

The Trident logic box must be mounted close enough to the turret to allow the 8ft. wiring harness sufficient slack to allow
the monitor full range of motion. The logic box overall dimensions and mounting holes are given in fig. 4.

5
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

• CONTROL PACKAGE ELECTRICAL ATTACHMENT

These instructions are for attaching the joystick/controller to the logic box. The joystick/controller is supplied with 8 foot
of cable. Attach the Deutsch IPD connectors from the joystick and monitor.

6
 Standard Harness for Trident Monitor

TO TO
LOGIC
BOX PATTERN
VIEW FROM NON-POTTING SIDE MOTOR

TO
ROTATION TO
POT ELEVATION
MOTOR

TO
ROTATION
MOTOR

TO
ELEVATION
POT

BLK 10" ~ 1/4 "

RED/BLK WHT/BLK
GRN/BLK BLU 2"

ORG/BLK ORG
WHT RED (POTTING SIDE UP)
3" ~ 1/4 "
BLU/BLK GRN 2"
BLK/WHT
VIEW Y-Y LOOKING 3/4 1.500
AT CABLE END ~.005 2"

14" ~ 1/4 "

X 7" ~ 1/4 "

2" X
5"~ 1/4 27" ~ 1/4 "
4"

Y BLK
WHT/BLK RED/BLK
BLU GRN/BLK

Y ORG ORG/BLK
96" ~ 1 " RED WHT

GRN BLU/BLK
BLK/WHT
VIEW X-X LOOKING
AT CABLE END
7
 Harness for Optional Dual Gallonage Fog Nozzle or Foam Tube

TO
ELEVATION
POT

TO
ROTATION
MOTOR

TO
ELEVATION
TO MOTOR
ROTATION
POT

VIEW FROM POTTING SIDE

TO
GALLONAGE
MOTOR

TO
PATTERN
MOTOR

TO
LOGIC
BOX

10" ~ 1/4 "

2"
TO
ELEVATION
POT

3" ~ 1/4 "

2"
TO
ROTATION
MOTOR (POTTING SIDE UP)

2"
14" ~ 1/4 "
2" TO
TO ELEVATION
ROTATION 7" ~ 1/4 " MOTOR
POT
14"
~ 1/
4"

10"~ 1/4 1" 2"

4" 6" ~ 1/4 "
TO
WHT/BLK GALLONAGE
RED 2" MOTOR
Y BLU
TO RED/BLK
LOGIC ORG 3 1/2 TO
GRN/BLK " ~ 1/ PATTERN
BOX 4" MOTOR
Y WHT
GRN
GRN/WHT
ORG/BLK
96" ~ 1 " RED/WHT
BLK BLU/BLK
BLK/WHT

VIEW Y-Y LOOKING

AT CABLE END

8
Optional 6036 CAN Direction Indicator

Functional Description

General Description: – This device can be used to provide an operator with monitor direction indication to second
generation controls such as the Mini Universal and Universal II.

Packaging: – The control will be housed in a Polyester/Fiberglass NEMA 4X enclosure whose outside dimensions are
roughly 110 X 75 X 55 millimeters. Various flange kits will be available to facilitate flush or backpanel surface mounting.
The flush mount bezel will be polished aluminum, and the back plate black hardcoat.

Electrical Specifications:
 12 or 24 volt DC operation
 Internally fused with self-resetting fuse
 AB CAN interface

Environmental Specifications:
 -40 to +85 ºC operation and storage
 0 to 100% RH operation
 Vibration to MIL-STD-810 Rev. F Method 514.5 Category 24
 Shock to MIL-STD-810 Rev. F Method 515.5 Procedure 1 20g Sawtooth

Features:
 Bi-Color LEDs
 Rotation position – full 360° in 15° increments
 Elevation position - +135° to -45° in 15° increments
 Configurable to mount in “Landscape” or “Portrait” orientation
 Simple four wire interface
 Multiple mounting options

Operation:
The Direction Indicator is fed absolute position information from the Universal II in 0.1° increments via broadcast CAN
messages. Position is then indicated by a Red LED. A field of Green LED’s will indicate the range of travel and their
values are sent from the Universal II during operation. At all times, a single combined Red and Green LED will indicate
the “straight ahead” position. If “straight ahead” (defined as 0.0°) is the current position, the combined Red and Green
LED will flash. A range of Green LED’s will indicate an oscillation range with a flashing Red LED indicating the live posi-
tion of the axis during oscillation.

At power-up, the Direction Indicator will scan through each LED sequentially, then light all Red LED’s momentarily, and
finally light all Green LED’s momentarily before resuming normal operation.

9
 #1

Once in config. mode,

sequence through
orientation modes
Hold for one second to enter
config. mode

#2

Save configuration and exit

#3

Direction Indicator Functional Description

Use of the Hall programming switches will allow the Direction Indicator’s display orientation to be set and subse-
quently stored in EEPROM. These Hall programming switches are located behind the black dots on the display label.
They can be activated by placing a small magnet near them. There are four possible orientations, and each is indi-
cated by the placement of the “straight ahead” LED’s. Appropriate labels are available for each of the orientations.
Set-up mode is entered by touching the magnet to switch #1 for one second. Zero position on each axis is indicated
with both red and green LED’s (orange) flashing. No other LED’s are lit.
Touching the magnet to switch #2 rotates the box orientation 90 degrees and the zero positions are displayed again.
This is repeated until the desired orientation is displayed.
Touching the magnet to switch #3 sets the orientation as currently displayed and returns to normal operation.

10
 STYLE 6032 UNIVERSAL CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM

TO MONITOR

REFER TO MONITOR OR
TURRET WIRING
J2 HARNESS SCHEMATIC NOTE #1
J1939 CAN REQUIRES 120 OHM
TERMINATING RESISTORS AT EACH
END OF NETWORK.
NOTE #2
USE J1939/11 OR /15 COMPLIANT
CABLE. FOR DETAILED INFORMATION
ON J1939 NETWORK WIRING.
(PIN GAUGE) J1
VEHICLE BATTERY (+) 12AWG. 1 1 TO VEHICLE BATTERY (+) (+12V OR +24V)
VEHICLE BATTERY (-) 12AWG. 2 2
AUXILIARY BATTERY (+) 12AWG. 3 3
AUXILIARY BATTERY (-) 12AWG. 4 4
MOTOR #5 OUTPUT 16AWG. 5 5
6 6 ACTUATOR MOTOR
MOTOR #5 OUTPUT 16AWG. (FOR INSTANCE, DISCHARGE VALVE)
SOURCE OUTPUT #1 16AWG. 7 7 RELAY COIL OR PILOT LIGHT
SOURCE OUTPUT #2 16AWG. 8 8
6032 UNIVERSAL II

SOURCE OUTPUT #3 16AWG. 9 9

RELAY FLOATING CONTACT (COM) 16AWG. 10 10 TO VEHICLE
16AWG. 11 11 BATTERY RELAY COIL OR PILOT LIGHT
RELAY FLOATING CONTACT (N.O.) TO VEHICLE BATTERY
RELAY FLOATING CONTACT (N.C.) 16AWG. 12 12
SWITCH INPUT #1 16AWG. 13 13
SWITCH INPUT #2 16AWG. 14 14
SWITCH INPUT #3 16AWG. 15 15 TO VEHICLE BATTERY
16 16 TYPICAL SWITCH
SWITCH INPUT #4 16AWG. CENTER OFF TOGGLE SW.
SWITCH INPUT #5 16AWG. 17 17
SWITCH INPUT #6 20AWG. 18 18
SWITCH INPUT #7 16AWG. 19 19 TO VEHICLE BATTERY
SWITCH INPUT #8 20AWG. 20 20
SWITCH INPUT #9 16AWG. 21 21 1 VEHICLE BATT. (+)

CAN JOYSTICK
22 22

6035 OR 6040
AUX. POWER OUT (1 AMP) 16AWG. USE AS OPTIONAL POWER TO JOYSTICK 2 VEHICLE BATT. (-)
VEHICLE CAN HI 20AWG. 23 23 3 CAN HI
24 24 NOTE #1 NOTE #1
VEHICLE CAN LO 20AWG. 4 CAN LO
COMMON (GROUND) 16AWG. 25 25
AKRON BRASS CAN HI 16AWG. 26 26 OTHER CAN DEVICES SUCH AS
AKRON BRASS CAN LO 20AWG. 27 27 6036 DIRECTION INDICATOR CUSTOMER WIRING USES
28 28 DEUTSCH #DT06-4S
WELDON V-MUX COM A 16AWG.
WELDON V-MUX COM B 20AWG. 29 29
NOTE #2

CUSTOMER WIRING USES DEUTSCH #HDP26-24-29SE

11
STYLE 6032 UNIVERSAL CONTROL WIRING EXAMPLE:

Pin 1 - Positive Vehicle Power: +12VDC or +24VDC Pin A - Analog Ground

Pin 2 - Negative Vehicle Power: Chassis / Ground Pin B - Multi-Function Input # 1 (Analog, Switch, In #1)
Pin 3 - Auxiliary Battery Box: Positive Pin C - Multi-Function Input # 2 (Analog, Switch, In #2)
Pin 4 - Auxiliary Battery Box: Negative Pin D - Multi-Function Input # 3 (Analog, Switch, In #3)
Pin 5 - Motor # 5 Output (Open) (Discharge On) Pin E - Analog Excitation (+5VDC)
Pin 6 - Motor # 5 Output (Close) (Discharge Off) Pin F - LIN Bus, Appliance Loop
Pin 7 - Solid State Relay Output # 1 (Sourcing Output, 2A Max.) Pin G - Motor # 1 Output (Right)
Pin 8 - Solid State Relay Output # 2 (Sourcing Output, 2A Max.) Pin H - Motor # 1 Output (Left)
Pin 9 - Solid State Relay Output # 3 (Sourcing Output, 2A Max.) Pin J - Motor # 2 Output (Up)
Pin 10 - Bi-Stable Relay Contact - Common (1A Max.) Pin K - Motor # 2 Output (Down)
Pin 11 - Bi-Stable Relay Contact - N.O. Contact (1A Max.) Pin L - Motor # 3 Output (Stream)
Pin 12 - Bi-Stable Relay Contact - N.C. Contact (1A Max.) Pin M - Motor # 3 Output (Fog)
Pin 13 - Switch Input # 1 (Enable) Pin N - Motor # 4 Output (Deploy) (Gallonage Low)
Pin 14 - Switch Input # 2 (Master Right / Master Left) Pin P - Motor # 4 Output (Stow) (Gallonage High)
Pin 15 - Switch Input # 3 (Master Up / Master Down)
Pin 16 - Switch Input # 4 (Master Stream / Master Fog)
Pin 17 - Switch Input # 5 (Deploy / Stow) (Discharge On / Off)
Pin 18 - Switch Input # 6 (Slave Right / Slave Left) (Gallonage High / Gallonage Low)
Pin 19 - Switch Input # 7 (Slave Up / Slave Down) (Oscillate On / Oscillate Off)
Pin 20 - Switch Input # 8 (Slave Stream / Slave Fog) (Unpark / Park)
Pin 21 - Switch Input # 9 (Open / Close)
Pin 22 - Battery + Out (Communications Power) (Aux Power - 1Amp) J2
Pin 23 - Data + (CAN 1) Vehicle CAN
Pin 24 - Data - (CAN 1)
Pin 25 - Battery - Out (Communications Power) (Common - Ground)
Pin 26 - Data + (CAN 2) Proprietary CAN
Pin 27 - Data - (CAN 2)
Pin 28 - EIA/TIA-485 DATA B (+) or VMUX "COMM-A"
Pin 29 - EIA/TIA-485 DATA A (-) or VMUX "COMM-B" Mating Connector: Deutsch HDP26-18-14SN

J1

Mating Connector: Deutsch HDP26-24-29SE

12
Trident Monitor Setup Procedure:

Note: To assure proper system operation, you *must* assign the settings in this order when configuring a monitor.

Assigning Settings

1) Monitor mounting orientation (optional, only needed if monitor is mounted upside down or on its side)
2) Rotate and elevate zero positions (optional, only needed when a direction indicator or other device that receives
position information on the Can bus is used)
3) Soft limits, unpark / park positions

Monitor Set-Up:

1) Press and hold stream switch, then turn on power to logic box.
(hold for several seconds after power up to assure power up complete)

2) Release Stream switch

3) The next switch actuated will select the setting to configure

A) Right - set right soft limit position (go to step 4)
B) Left - set left soft limit position (go to step 4)
C) Up - set up soft limit position (go to step 4)
D) Down - set down soft limit position (go to step 4)
E) Unpark - set unpark position (go to step 6)
F) Park - set park position (go to step 6) note the park position can be set outside of the operational soft limits.
G) Stream - set monitor mounting orientation (go to step 8)

4) Move monitor to desired position (example: if you touch the right switch first then move to far and use the left switch
to get back to the desired position, when you actuate the fog switch, the right soft limit will still be saved)

5) Actuate Fog switch to save setting (go to step 3)

6) Move monitor to desired position

7) Select pattern configuration for unpark / park

A) Stream - move pattern to stream during unpark / park, save setting (go to step 3)
B) Fog - move pattern to fog during unpark / park, save setting (go to step 3)

8) Release Stream switch

9) Select monitor mounting orientation

A) Right, Left, Up, Down will move the respective axis so you can visually determine which should be considered ‘up’
The *last* one you move will be the one selected and assigned to ‘up’, and the others mapped accordingly, when
you actuate the Fog switch. (go to step 3)
B) Stream - set rotate and elevate zero positions (go to step 10)

10) Release Stream switch

11) Set rotate and elevate zero positions

A) Use Right, Left, Up, Down to move the monitor to the desired position, then actuate the Fog switch to save
setting. (go to step 3)
B) Stream - return monitor to factory defaults (go to step 12)

13
12) Release Stream switch.

13) Actuate the Fog switch to return monitor to factory default settings (go to step3).

***** WARNING - ANY AND ALL USER-CONFIGURED SETTINGS WILL BE OVERWRITTEN ! *****

Note: When desired configuration options have been set, and you are back at step 3,
cycle power on the monitor to return to normal operation mode.14

14
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

• CONTROLLER / JOYSTICK OPERATION

The joystick/controller is used to control the functions of the monitor and nozzle.

To deploy the monitor for use:

Push the momentary toggle switch up, hold for approximetly two seconds and release. The two second time delay is a
safety feature to eliminate accidental deployment when not in use.

To stow the monitor after use:

Push the momentary toggle switch down, hold for approximetly two seconds and release. The two second time delay is
a safety feature to eliminate accidental stowing during normal operation mode. When stowed the joystick will not move
the monitor. You must use the deploy switch to enter normal operation mode.

To position the rotation of the monitor toward the right or left:

Direct the joystick pistol grip toward the desired direction.

To position the elevation of the monitor in the up or down direction:

Direct the joystick pistol grip back to raise the nozzle or forward to lower the nozzle.

To change the nozzle pattern toward the straight stream or fog position:
Move the thumb rocker switch located on the top of the joystick pistol grip to the right, toward the straight stream sym-
bol or to the left toward the fog symbol as shown in Fig.5.

Fig.5.

STYLE
6035

Stream Fog

TYP(4) OPTIONAL FLUSH

MOUNTING SHOWN 1/4

TYP(4)

.190
15
OPTIONAL BOTTOM
MOUNTING SHOWN
MANUAL OVERRIDE OPERATION (Rotation and Elevation)

Choose the desired axis hand wheel.

Push in and rotate the hand wheel to engage override shaft into the drive socket and rotate the wheel to move the
appropriate direction.
Release hand wheel and the spring pressure will disengage the drive mechanism to use monitor in normal mode.

ENGAGED

DIS-ENGAGED

Note the shaft position

16
MANUAL OVERRIDE OPERATION (Pattern/Flow)
(For optional dual flow nozzle)

To alter your pattern: Engage manual adjustment by pulling out on the knurled adjustment knob and turn clockwise
(viewing from back of actuator) to move toward the fog position and counter clockwise to move into straight stream. To
disengage the manual adjustment, push the adjustment knob in and turn at the same time to engage motor drive assem-
bly for automatic use. *The pattern will not operate in automatic mode unless adjustment knob is completely engaged.

To adjust flow: Engage manual adjustment by pulling out on the knurled adjustment knob and turn clockwise (viewing
from back of actuator looking at adjustment knob) to increase flow, and counter clockwise to decrease flow. To disen-
gage the manual adjustment push the adjustment knob in and turn at the same time to engage motor drive assembly for
automatic use. *The flow will not operate in automatic mode unless adjustment knob is completely engaged.

Both adjustments shown below:

Pattern Control:

Manual Engagement Automatic Engagement

Flow Control:

Manual Engagement Automatic Engagement

17
 MANUAL OVERRIDE POSITION ON TURRET (Pattern/Flow)

Flow Pattern

Nozzle and Foam Tube Options:

Note: An additional gas cylinder is needed for foam tubes with a center of gravity 8” or more out from the
swivel and fog nozzles that weigh more than 30lbs.

! WARNING: Do not exceed the maximum weight of 30lbs. with

a center of gravity 17” out from the swivel on a foam tube.

Dual Gallonage Foam tubes available: Style 3624

• 750/1500gpm (3000/6000lpm)
• 600/1200gpm (2250/4500lpm)

Dual Gallonage Fog Nozzle available:

• 750/1500gpm (3000/6000lpm)
• 600/1200gpm (2250/4500lpm)

Note: Different flow rates on high flow fog nozzles attained by baffle spacers and adjustment of gallonage
actuator.

18
 Foam Tube Reach with water @ 32º elevation
Calm Wind Conditions

*Note: Monitor inlet pressure 190psi for foam tubes, 150psi for fog nozzles.

Foam Actual Flow Straight Straight Jaw opening Dispersed Dispersed
Tube GPM (LPM) Stream Stream in Dispersed Pattern Pattern
Overall Effective Reach Width
750/1500 789 gpm 255 ft 240 ft 1-1/8” 140 ft 40 ft wide
(2986 lpm) @ 44 ft
from Nozzle
1578 gpm 320 ft 300 ft 1-1/8” 160 ft 53 ft wide
(5973 lpm) @ 58 ft
from Nozzle
600/1200 604 gpm 232 ft 203 ft 7/8” 125 ft 36 ft wide
(2286 lpm) @ 39 ft
from Nozzle
1230 gpm 305 ft 285 ft 7/8” 150 ft 53 ft wide
(4656 lpm) @ 53 ft
from Nozzle
NFPA 414 230 ft n/a n/a 70 ft 35 ft
Requirement minimum minimum minimum

Foam Tube/Fog Nozzle Reach with foam @ 32º elevation

Calm Wind Conditions

*Note: Monitor inlet pressure 190psi for foam tubes, 150psi for fog nozzles.

Foam Actual Flow Effective Effective Jaw opening Expansion Quarter Drain Expansion Quarter Drain
Tube GPM (LPM) Straight Straight in Dispersed FFFP Time FFFP AFFF Time AFFF
Stream Stream
Fog Reach Reach
Nozzle 3% FFFP 3% AFFF

1500 gpm 1585 gpm 307 ft 295 ft 1-1/8” 5.8:1 4.21 min. 8.2:1 3.07 min.
Foam Tube (6000lpm)
Foam Tube
1200 gpm 1200 gpm 279 ft 262 ft 1-1/8” 6.25:1 3.13 min. 10.2:1 3.03 min.
Foam Tube (4542lpm)
Foam Tube
1500 gpm 1585 gpm
Fog Nozzle (6000lpm) * 295 ft 7/8”
* * 18.2:1 1.72 min.

Fog Nozzle
1200 gpm 1200 gpm
Fog Nozzle (4542lpm) * 269 ft 7/8”
* * 18.5:1 2.49 min.

Fog Nozzle

* Not Recommended, does not meet NFPA 412 recommended foam quality.

19
 Optional FFFP Foam Tube Dimensional Layout:

20
 Optional Upgrade Features Include:

• Cowling with Lights (Available with dual gallonage nozzle option only.)
• Proportional Joystick
• Wireless Remote Control
• Gas Spring for Foam Tubes and Heavier Nozzles
• Inside The Cab Manual Overrides (For elevation and horizontal rotation.)
• Dry Chemical Nozzle (Not available with cowling option.)

Turret Friction Loss: (Turret Only)

3356 Turret Friction Loss:

(Turret only)
PSI
Flow
(bar)
750 GPM 4
(3000 LPM) (.28)
1000 GPM 6
(3800 LPM) (.41)
1500 GPM 17
(6000 LPM) (1.2)
2000 GPM 29
(7600 LPM) (2)

Notes:

PHONE: 330.264.5678 or 800.228.1161 I FAX: 330.264.2944 or 800.531.7335 I www.akronbrass.com

revised: 4/09
WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER: We warrant Akron Brass products for a period of five (5) years after purchase against defects in materials or workmanship. Akron Brass will repair or replace
product which fails to satisfy this warranty. Repair or replacement shall be at the discretion of Akron Brass. Products must be promptly returned to Akron Brass for warranty service.

We will not be responsible for: wear and tear; any improper installation, use, maintenance or storage; negligence of the owner or user; repair or modification after delivery; damage; failure to
follow our instructions or recommendations; or anything else beyond our control. WE MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OTHER THAN THOSE INCLUDED IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT, AND WE DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Further, we will not be responsible for any consequential,
incidental or indirect damages (including, but not limited to, any loss of profits) from any cause whatsoever. No person has authority to change this warranty.
ISO 9001 REGISTERED COMPANY
© Premier Farnell Corporation. 2000 All rights reserved. No portion of this can be
reproduced without the express written consent of Premier Farnell Corporation.
 STYLE 3463
FireFox w/Position Feedback
& Manual Overide
TECHNICAL SERVICE PARTS LIST

ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER QUANTITY ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER QUANTITY
1 Base 2” NPT 117898 1 42 Nail Grip 736045 4
1 Base 2.5” 500 gpm 118124 1 43 Stop 769498 4
2 Elbow Inlet 118207 1 44 Plug 744337 3
3 Gooseneck 118208 1 45 O-Ring 757205 1
4 Elbow Outlet 118209 1 46 O-Ring 757126 1
5 Brass Balls 703017 149 47 Wiring Harness w/pos. fdbk 721443 1
6 Swivel Plug 742023 8 48 Socket Head Cap Screw 763077 2
7 Grease Fitting 713191 2 49 Socket Head Cap Screw 767132 8
8 O-Ring 757065 3 62 Socket Head Cap Screw 765071 3
9 O-Ring 757110 1 77 Pan Head Screw 767147 1
10 Socket Head Screw 767048 4 78 Clip Speed Connector 707219 1
15 Motor 12 volt 35780011 2 92 Magnet 731081 2
15 Motor 24 volt 35780095 1 96 Cable Clamp 707189 2
18 O-Ring 757056 2 97 Override Handle 721291 1
19 Housing Gearbox 109320 2 98 Cotter Hairpin Clip 744339 1
20 O-Ring 757312 4 100 Socket Head Screw 765164 1
21 Socket Head Cap Screw 765052 8 201 Spacer 500 gpm 118949 1
22 Short Rivet 754052 12 203 Screw 500 gpm 765222 4
23 Gear 718165 12 204 Shaft Pot Hex 769641 2
24 Carrier Output 707325 2 205 Worm Actuator 785021 2
25 Elevation Gear 718164 2 206 Roll Pin 744341 2
26 Carrier Plate 742119 2 207 Washer 784072 2
27 Pin 741056 2 210 Sensor 33520003 2
28 O-Ring 757295 2 211 O-Ring 757042 2
29 Bearing Cap 119820 2 212 Socket Head Screw 765042 4
30 O-Ring 757329 2 301 Override Housing 118598 2
31 Bearing 3⁄8” 704393 2 302 Socket Head Cap Screw 765138 8
32 Spring 769276 4 303 Key Woodruff 727025 2
33 Bearing Needle 703453 4 304 Boston Miter Gear 718185 4
34 Washer 784121 8 305 Collar 707433 2
35 Shaft 769745 2 306 Stub Shaft 769744 2
36 Key 727044 2 309 O-Ring Parker 757311 2
37 Worm Gear 718166 2 312 Gearbox Adapter 120026 2
38 Roll Pin 744288 4 313 O-Ring 757313 2
39 O-Ring 757041 2 315 2” Quick Disconnect 34630001 1
40 Bearing Roller 704395 6 Not Shown Logic Box 34630213 1
41 24 volt ID Plate 745126 1

PHONE: 330.264.5678 or 800.228.1161 I FAX: 330.264.2944 or 800.531.7335 I www.akronbrass.com

Available in Canada through AKRON MANUFACTURING COMPANY
PHONE: 519.773.8431 I FAX: 519.773.3794 REV. 11/05

WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER: We warrant Akron Brass products for a period of five (5) years after purchase against defects in materials or workmanship. Akron Brass will repair or replace prod-
uct which fails to satisfy this warranty. Repair or replacement shall be at the discretion of Akron Brass. Products must be promptly returned to Akron Brass for warranty service.

ISO 9001 REGISTERED COMPANY We will not be responsible for: wear and tear; any improper installation, use, maintenance or storage; negligence of the owner or user; repair or modification after delivery; damage; failure to fol-
low our instructions or recommendations; or anything else beyond our control. WE MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OTHER THAN THOSE INCLUDED IN THIS WARRANTY STATE-
MENT, AND WE DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Further, we will not be responsible for any consequential, incidental
or indirect damages (including, but not limited to, any loss of profits) from any cause whatsoever. No person has authority to change this warranty.

© Premier Farnell Corporation. 2000 All rights reserved. No portion of this can be
reproduced without the express written consent of Premier Farnell Corporation.
 STYLE 3463

Feedback & Manual

FireFox w/Position

Overide

44

47

97

62 ▲
1
5
43 ▲
1

10
96

98

78

41
TECHNICAL SERVICE PARTS LIST

120187
▲
77
1
STYLE 3463
SERIAL
D OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE
OR SERVICING
MUM PRESSURE 200 PSI/1400 KPA/1 READ OPERATIN
AKRON BRASS COMPANY, WOOSTER, OH
▲

315
MANUFACTURING COMPANY, AYLMER, O 1 MAXIMUM PRESS
AKRON BRASS
AKRON MANUFACTUR
▲
62
1

42
▲
3
7

48
1 302

1 49
44

▲
▲
1 100
2 92

▲
▲

3
45
5

3 7
▲

6
5
1 43

46

44
▲

36 Balls Each
 201 203
500 GPM VERSION

210 205
206
204
207
1
212 ▲
211 3
29 ▲
30
3
31 ▲
32 34
2 9
3
33 ▲
34
35
36
3
37 ▲
8 34
9
3
33 ▲
5
32 34
39
3 40
▲
20
2 92
▲
301
3 304
▲
40 303 306 313 312
305 3
309 ▲
38 304
5
3 40
▲
8

1
 3
▲
19 22
21
▲3
20
23

24

18
15 26
27
ASSEMBLY NOTES: 25

1 Use Parker O-Lube on all O-Rings

▲
@ Assembly

2 Use Loctite 290 @ Assembly

▲

3 Use Lubriplate Low-Temp Grease

▲
@ Assembly
 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
11⁄2” & 2 1/2” ASSAULT NOZZLES & TIPS

The following is intended to provide the basic instructions for operating an Assault nozzle. Read and understand these
operating instructions before use.

PRODUCT RATINGS
Maximum Pressure: 230 psi/16 bar

PRODUCT WARNINGS
WARNING: Charge all lines slowly to facilitate a controlled water pressure build-up during start-up. Open and close
slowly. Rapid opening will produce a sudden thrust. Rapid opening or closing can cause water hammer.
Have enough firefighters on the line to safely control the reaction force created by the stream.
WARNING: At pressures below that indicated on the label, the nozzle will have reduced flow and reach. Be sure you
have enough flow and pressure for the situation (See IFSTA and NFPA manuals for guidelines).
WARNING: Not for use on electrical fires. May cause electrocution.
WARNING: Do not use the Assault nozzle in portable hose holders.
WARNING: Ensure the Assault is aimed in a direction that is safe, prior to opening the shutoff bale.
WARNING: Do not use the Assault as a forcible entry tool. Doing so may damage it or make it inoperable.
WARNING: Ensure the thread on the nozzle swivel is matched to the thread on the hose connection.
WARNING: Do not use as Assault tip as a shut-off when testing hose.
WARNING: When operating at lower pressures the hose can kink more easily. A kink in the hose chokes off the flow,
which may result in inadequate flow for the situation.

PRODUCT CAUTIONS
CAUTION: If any tags or bands on the nozzle are worn or damaged and cannot be easily read, they should be
replaced.
CAUTION: For use with fresh water or standard fire fighting foams only. Not recommended for use with salt water. After
use with foam or salt water, flush with fresh water.
CAUTION: For fire fighting use only.
CAUTION: When using with an eductor, make sure the nozzle is properly matched to the eductor. If they are not, the
nozzle flow, pressure, and reach may be reduced or the eductor may shut down.
Do not throttle your Assault with an eductor in the line. This can cause the eductor to shut down.
CAUTION: Do not over tighten the nozzle onto the hose connection.
CAUTION: The nozzle is configured for optimum performance. Do not alter in any manner.
CAUTION: Do not expose the pistol grip or shutoff handle to Trichloretyhylene or Trichlorethane. These chemicals can
weaken the parts and make the nozzle inoperable over time.
CAUTION: Your nozzle should be inspected prior and after each use, to ensure it is in good operating condition.
Periodically, an unanticipated incident may occur where the nozzle is used in a manner that is inconsistent
with standard operating practices and those listed in IFSTA. A partial list of potential misuses follows:
• Operating above maximum rated pressure and flow.
• Not draining, and allowing water to freeze inside the nozzle.
• Dropping the nozzle from a height where damage is incurred.
•  Prolonged exposure to temperatures above +130 degrees F, or below -25 degrees F.
• Operating in a corrosive environment.
• Other misuse that might be unique to your specific fire fighting environment.

107964
 There are many “tell tale” signs that indicate nozzle repair is in order, such as:
• Controls that are either inoperable or difficult to operate.
• Excessive wear.
• Poor discharge performance.
• Water leaks.
If any of the above situations are encountered, the nozzle should be taken out of service and repaired, plus
tested by qualified nozzle technicians, prior to placing it back in service.

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SHUTOFF
• Open and close slowly.
• Nozzles with a built-in Shutoff.
To Open: Pull the handle toward the inlet.
To Close: Push the handle toward the outlet.
• Tips with a twist Shutoff.
To Open: Rotate the pattern sleeve/bumper counterclockwise.
To Close: Rotate the pattern sleeve/bumper clockwise.

NOZZLE
• To change the spray angle rotate the pattern sleeve/bumper. Rotate it clockwise for straight stream and
counterclockwise for wide fog.
• To flush the nozzle, rotate the pattern sleeve/bumper counterclockwise to the FLUSH setting. Rotate it
slowly back to the required setting when obstruction is flushed.
• To determine the required engine pressures to achieve the flow setting, use the following formula: Engine
pressure (EP) = Friction Loss (FL) + Nozzle Pressure (NP) + pressure loss or gain due to elevation (1/2 psi
per foot of height difference).

MAINTENANCE
• Under normal conditions, periodically flushing the nozzle with clean water, cleaning grit and dirt from
around exterior moving parts will allow the nozzle to operate as designed. We recommend
low-temprature lubriplate as the lubricant.
• Over time the seals and turbine teeth may need to be replaced. This can be accomplished by purchasing
the appropriate Akron repair kit. Use qualified maintenance mechanics or return the nozzle to Akron
Brass for repair.
• Regularly check the baffle screw to be sure it is tight.
• Use Low-temp Lubriplate on metal parts and Parker O-Ring lubricant on O-Rings

PHONE: 330.264.5678 or 800.228.1161 I FAX: 330.264.2944 or 800.531.7335 I www.akronbrass.com

revised: 7/09
WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER: We warrant Akron Brass products for a period of five (5) years after purchase against defects in materials or workmanship. Akron Brass will repair or replace
product which fails to satisfy this warranty. Repair or replacement shall be at the discretion of Akron Brass. Products must be promptly returned to Akron Brass for warranty service.

We will not be responsible for: wear and tear; any improper installation, use, maintenance or storage; negligence of the owner or user; repair or modification after delivery; damage; failure to
follow our instructions or recommendations; or anything else beyond our control. WE MAKE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OTHER THAN THOSE INCLUDED IN THIS WARRANTY
STATEMENT, AND WE DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Further, we will not be responsible for any consequential,
incidental or indirect damages (including, but not limited to, any loss of profits) from any cause whatsoever. No person has authority to change this warranty.
ISO 9001 REGISTERED COMPANY
© Premier Farnell Corporation. 2000 All rights reserved. No portion of this can be
reproduced without the express written consent of Premier Farnell Corporation.
FIRE PROTECTION PRODUCTS – OPEN NOZZLES 40.96
V12 SEE VICTAULIC PUBLICATION 10.01 FOR DETAILS

Open Spray Nozzles

STYLE V12

Model Numbers

Nominal K-Factor Available Deflector Angles

1.2 V1201 V1202 V1203 V1204 V1205 V1206 V1207 V1208 65° 80° 95°
(1.7 metric) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)
1.8 V1211 V1212 V1213 V1214 V1215 V1216 V1217 V1218
(2.6 metric) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)
2.3 V1221 V1222 V1223 V1224 V1225 V1226 V1227 V1228
(3.3 metric) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)
3.2 V1231 V1232 V1233 V1234 V1235 V1236 V1237 V1238
(4.6 metric) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)
4.1 V1241 V1242 V1243 V1244 V1245 V1246 V1247 V1248
(5.9 metric) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)
4.9 V1251 V1252 V1253 V1254 V1255 V1256 V1257 V1258 110° 125° 140°
(7.1 metric) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)
5.6 V1261 V1262 V1263 V1264 V1265 V1266 V1267 V1268
(8.1 metric) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)
7.2 V1271 V1272 V1273 V1274 V1275 V1276 V1277 V1278
(10.4 metric*) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)

Victaulic V12 Spray Nozzles are open type spray nozzles designed for directional spray applications
in fixed fire protection systems. They have an open design only (non-automatic) with a deflector
that discharges a solid uniform cone spray of low- to medium- velocity water droplets. Victaulic
V12 Spray Nozzles are available in multiple orifice sizes and spray angles to meet various design 160° 180°
application requirements.
For nozzles having nominal U.S. K-Factors of 1.2, 1.8, 2.3, and 3.2, a bushing is used, whereas Nozzles are shown in the upright position for clarity.
nozzles with K-Factors of 4.1, 4.9, 5.6, and 7.2 are machined orifices. May be installed in any position to meet design
requirements. K5.6 versions shown.

NOZZLE APPLICATIONS: Victaulic V12 Spray Nozzles are designed to apply cooling water to exposed vertical, horizontal, curved,
and irregular shaped surfaces to allow cooling of objects externally when exposed to an adjacent fire.
Cooling is done to prevent objects from absorbing heat that could cause structural damage and possible
spread of fire to the protected object. In some applications, Victaulic V12 Spray Nozzles may be applied
to control or extinguish fire of the protected area (depending on water design application density).

JOB/OWNER CONTRACTOR ENGINEER

System No._______________________________ Submitted By_____________________________ Spec Sect________________ Para____________
Location_ ________________________________ Date ____________________________________ Approved_ _______________________________
Date ____________________________________

www.victaulic.com
VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2009 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

REV_B 40.96_1
FIRE PROTECTION PRODUCTS – OPEN NOZZLES 40.96
V12
Open Spray Nozzles
STYLE V12

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Specifications:

Minimum Operating Pressure: Pendent Position
1¾"/44 mm
(vertically downward) 10 psi/0.7 bar. All other
positions 20 psi/1.4 bar
Maximum Working Pressure: 175 psi/12 bar
Thread size: 1/2"/15 mm NPT

Nominal K-Factor Available Deflector Angles

1.2 V1201 V1202 V1203 V1204 V1205 V1206 V1207 V1208
(1.7 metric) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)
1.8 V1211 V1212 V1213 V1214 V1215 V1216 V1217 V1218
2 /"/61 mm (2.6 metric) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)
2.3 V1221 V1222 V1223 V1224 V1225 V1226 V1227 V1228
(3.3 metric) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)
3.2 V1231 V1232 V1233 V1234 V1235 V1236 V1237 V1238
(4.6 metric) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)
4.1 V1241 V1242 V1243 V1244 V1245 V1246 V1247 V1248
(5.9 metric) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)
4.9 V1251 V1252 V1253 V1254 V1255 V1256 V1257 V1258
½"/15 mm (7.1 metric) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)
/"/11.1 mm NPT 5.6 V1261 V1262 V1263 V1264 V1265 V1266 V1267 V1268
Nominal Pipe (8.1 metric) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)
Engagement 7.2 V1271 V1272 V1273 V1274 V1275 V1276 V1277 V1278
Screw (10.4 metric*) (180°) (160°) (140°) (125°) (110°) (95°) (80°) (65°)

  Orifice sizes are indicated by the K-Factor, which Deflector: Brass UNS-C51000

is marked on the deflector. Refer to the Nominal Screw: Stainless Steel UNS-S30400
Discharge Curves on pages 5 and 7 for each
Deflector nozzle at various operating residual pressures. Accessories:
*  Metric K-Factor measurement shown is when Sprinkler Wrenches:
pressure is measured in kPa. When pressure A. Standard Wrench: V27 Open End
Splitter
is measured in Bar, multiply the metric
K-Factor shown by 10.0. FINISHES:
Frame Plain Brass
Overall Length: 2 7⁄16"/61 mm Proprietary Nickel Teflon* coating
Bushing
Material SPECIFICATIONS * Teflon is a registered trademark of Dupont Co.
Frame Casting: Dezincification resistant die
cast brass
Splitter: Brass UNS-C36000
Bushing (for nozzles with 1.2, 1.8, 2.3, and
3.2 K-Factors): Brass UNS-C36000

APPROVALS/LISTINGS cULus Listed: Category VGYZ

WARNING
WARNING
Victaulic V12 Spray Nozzles are manufactured and tested to meet the rigid requirements of the
approving agency.
The nozzles are designed to be installed in accordance with recognized installation standards.
Deviation from the standards or any alteration to the nozzle after it leaves the factory including,
but not limited to: painting, plating, coating, or modification, may render the unit inoperative
and will automatically nullify the approval and any guarantee made by Victaulic.
The Approval Chart shows listings and approvals of Victaulic V12 Spray Nozzles for use on
water spray systems and water based deluge systems. The chart shows listings and approvals
available at the time of printing. Other approvals may be in process.
Check with the manufacturer for any additional approvals.

VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2009 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

40.96_2 REV_B
FIRE PROTECTION PRODUCTS – OPEN NOZZLES 40.96
V12
Open Spray Nozzles
STYLE V12

INSTALLATION A. Victaulic V12 Spray nozzles are to be installed in accordance with the latest edition of Victaulic
technical data, the latest published standards of NFPA or other similar organizations, and also with
the provisions of governmental codes, ordinances, and standards whenever applicable. The use of
Victaulic V12 Spray Nozzles may be limited due to occupancy and hazard. Refer to the Authority
Having Jurisdiction prior to installation.
B. Spray nozzles are installed on fixed fire protection systems, such as deluge systems, where total
flooding is required.
C. See Victaulic publication I-40 for installation and maintenance instructions.
Note: A system strainer is needed if orifice diameter is less than 3⁄8"/9.4 mm, which includes V12
spray nozzles of K-Factors 3.2, 2.3, 1.8 and 1.2.
D. Spray nozzles must be inspected on a regular basis for corrosion, mechanical damage, obstructions,
paint, etc. Where open spray nozzles are installed, verify that foreign materials (such as dust, dirt,
etc.) do not restrict or plug the water spray. The frequency of inspections may vary due to corrosive
atmospheres, water supplies, and activity around the device.

www.victaulic.com
VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2009 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

REV_B 40.96_3
FIRE PROTECTION PRODUCTS – OPEN NOZZLES 40.96
V12
Open Spray Nozzles
STYLE V12

INSTALLATION TECHNICAL DATA FIGURE 1 – K Factor Discharge Curves

60

55

PRESSURE IN POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH (PSI)

50

45

l K=1.2

1.8

.3

.2

.1

4.9

.6
2

K=4

.2
inal K=

=5
al K=

al K=

l K=

=7
40

lK

lK
US Nomina

l
ina

na
omin

omin

ina
min

mi
m

Nom

m
US No

No

No

No
US N

US N
35

US
US
US

US
30

25

20

15

10
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
DISCHARGE IN US GALLONS PER MINUTE (GPM)

K-factors have tolerances of +/- 0.2 GPM/√PSI (0.2 LPM/√kPA) from nominal.

VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2009 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

40.96_4 REV_B
FIRE PROTECTION PRODUCTS – OPEN NOZZLES 40.96
V12
Open Spray Nozzles
STYLE V12

INSTALLATION TECHNICAL DATA FIGURE 2 – Design Spray Profiles (All K Factors)

RADIAL DISTANCE FROM NOZZLE CENTERLINE (FEET)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0

1
180
°
2
16
0°
3
14
0°
AXIAL DISTANCE FROM NOZZLE (FEET) 4

12
5°
5

11
0°
7

95°
10

11

12 80°

13

14

15
65°

16

Notes:

1) The design spray profile is the included angle of discharge for each nozzle.
2) Figure 2 illustrates the radial distance at various heights based upon testing in the pendent position
at 10 psi, 20 psi, and 60 psi / 69 kPa, 138 kPa, and 414 kPa discharge pressure (see Figure 3,
Variable C).
3) For FM only installations, use a recommended tolerance of +/- 2 ft [0.6 m] from nominal for the
radial distances shown (x-axis) in Figure 2 for all fixed angle orientations. Use a recommended spray
profile angle tolerance of +/- 5° in the pendent position (vertically downward) and +/-10° in all other
fixed angle orientations.
4) For UL/NFPA only installations, use a recommended tolerance of +/-15% from nominal for the
radial distances shown (x-axis) in Figure 2 for all fixed angle orientations.
5) Spray profiles will tend to decrease (or pull inward) with an increase in pressure. All test data was
obtained in a stagnant air environment.

See Exposure Protection Tables for fixed angle orientation and maximum axial distance from the plane
of protection for each model.

www.victaulic.com
VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2009 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

REV_B 40.96_5
FIRE PROTECTION PRODUCTS – OPEN NOZZLES 40.96
V12
Open Spray Nozzles
STYLE V12

INSTALLATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 65° SPRAY ANGLE MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 125° SPRAY ANGLE
Exposure Protection Tables IN FEET AND INCHES IN FEET AND INCHES
(IMPERIAL) Fixed K FACTOR Fixed K FACTOR
Angle 1.2 1.8 2.3 3.2 4.1 4.9 5.6 7.2 Angle 1.2 1.8 2.3 3.2 4.1 4.9 5.6 7.2
0° 14-9 15-0 15-0 15-3 15-3 15-6 15-9 16-0 0° 7-9 7-9 7-9 8-0 8-3 8-3 8-6 8-9
CL
30° 9-9 9-9 10-0 10-3 10-6 10-9 11-0 11-6 30° 5-0 5-3 5-6 5-9 6-9 7-3 7-9 7-9
Nozzle 45° 8-0 8-0 8-6 9-0 9-3 9-6 9-9 10-3 45° 4-3 4-6 4-9 5-0 6-0 6-3 6-6 7-0
60° 7-0 7-3 7-9 8-3 8-6 8-6 8-9 9-6 60° 3-6 3-9 4-0 4-3 5-3 5-6 5-9 6-3
90° 6-6 6-9 7-0 7-6 7-9 8-0 8-0 8-6 90° 3-0 3-3 3-6 3-6 4-3 4-6 4-9 5-3
A
120° 6-3 6-6 6-9 7-3 7-3 7-6 7-6 7-9 120° 2-0 2-0 2-6 3-3 3-9 3-9 3-9 4-3
135° 5-9 6-0 6-3 6-6 6-9 6-9 7-0 7-6 135° 1-9 1-9 2-3 3-0 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-9
Spray
Profile 150° 5-6 5-9 6-0 6-0 6-6 6-9 6-9 7-3 150° 1-6 1-9 2-3 2-6 3-0 3-3 3-3 3-6
180° 5-0 5-0 5-3 5-6 6-0 6-3 6-6 6-9 180° 1-3 1-6 2-0 2-6 2-9 2-9 3-0 3-3
N
C TIO
FPROTE MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 80° SPRAY ANGLE MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 140° SPRAY ANGLE
PLANE O IN FEET AND INCHES IN FEET AND INCHES
C Fixed K FACTOR Fixed K FACTOR
B Angle 1.2 1.8 2.3 3.2 4.1 4.9 5.6 7.2 Angle 1.2 1.8 2.3 3.2 4.1 4.9 5.6 7.2
Gravity
0° 14-9 15-0 15-0 15-3 15-3 15-6 15-9 16-0 0° 6-3 6-3 6-3 6-6 6-6 6-6 6-9 6-9
30° 9-6 9-9 10-3 10-6 10-9 10-9 11-0 11-3 30° 3-9 3-9 4-3 4-9 5-3 5-3 5-6 5-9
A – Axial Distance 45° 7-6 7-9 8-3 8-6 8-9 9-0 9-3 9-9 45° 3-0 3-3 3-6 4-3 4-9 5-0 5-0 5-3
B – Fixed Angle (Orientation) 60° 6-3 6-6 6-9 7-0 7-3 7-6 8-3 8-9 60° 2-3 2-6 2-9 3-9 4-3 4-3 4-6 4-9
C – Radial Distance 90° 5-9 6-3 6-6 6-9 7-0 7-3 7-6 7-9 90° 2-0 2-0 2-6 3-0 3-6 3-9 3-9 4-0
Figure 3 – Spray Coverage Variables 120° 5-3 5-6 5-9 6-0 6-3 6-3 6-6 7-0 120° 1-9 1-9 2-3 2-6 2-9 2-9 3-0 3-6
135° 4-9 5-3 5-6 5-9 6-0 6-0 6-3 6-6 135° 1-6 1-6 1-9 2-3 2-6 2-6 2-9 3-0
150° 4-3 4-6 4-9 5-6 5-9 5-9 6-0 6-0 150° 1-3 1-3 1-6 1-9 2-0 2-0 2-3 2-6
180° 4-0 4-3 4-6 5-3 5-6 5-6 5-9 5-9 180° 1-0 1-0 1-3 1-6 1-9 1-9 2-0 2-3

MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 95° SPRAY ANGLE MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 160° SPRAY ANGLE
IN FEET AND INCHES IN FEET AND INCHES
Fixed K FACTOR Fixed K FACTOR
Angle 1.2 1.8 2.3 3.2 4.1 4.9 5.6 7.2 Angle 1.2 1.8 2.3 3.2 4.1 4.9 5.6 7.2
0° 14-9 15-0 15-0 15-3 15-3 15-6 15-9 16-0 0° 4-9 4-9 4-9 5 5 5 5-3 5-3
30° 8-3 8-6 9-3 9-6 10-3 10-6 10-6 11-3 30° 3-9 3-9 4-0 4-0 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-9
45° 7-0 7-0 7-3 7-6 8-6 8-9 9-0 9-9 45° 3-0 3-0 3-6 3-9 4-0 4-0 4-0 4-3
60° 5-3 5-6 5-9 6-6 6-9 7-0 7-6 8-6 60° 2-0 2-0 2-3 2-6 3-3 3-3 3-6 3-6
90° 4-6 4-9 5-6 5-9 6-0 6-0 6-3 6-9 90° 1-0 1-3 1-9 2-0 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-9
120° 4-0 4-3 4-6 5-0 5-3 5-6 5-6 5-9 120° NR 1-0 1-6 1-9 2-0 2-3 2-3 2-6
135° 3-9 3-9 4-3 4-9 5-0 5-3 5-3 5-6 135° NR NR 1-0 1-6 1-9 1-9 1-9 2-0
150° 3-3 3-6 3-6 4-6 4-9 4-9 5-0 5-3 150° NR NR NR 1-0 1-3 1-3 1-6 1-9
180° 3-0 3-3 3-3 4-0 4-3 4-3 4-6 4-9 180° NR NR NR 1-0 1-0 1-0 1-3 1-6

MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 110° SPRAY ANGLE MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 180° SPRAY ANGLE
IN FEET AND INCHES IN FEET AND INCHES
Fixed K FACTOR Fixed K FACTOR
Angle 1.2 1.8 2.3 3.2 4.1 4.9 5.6 7.2 Angle 1.2 1.8 2.3 3.2 4.1 4.9 5.6 7.2
0° 9-6 9-9 9-9 10-0 10-3 10-6 10-9 11-0 0° 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-6 3-6 3-9 3-9 3-9
30° 6-6 6-9 7-3 8-0 8-6 8-9 9-0 9-6 30° 2-3 2-3 2-6 2-9 3-0 3-3 3-3 3-3
45° 5-6 6-0 6-9 7-0 7-6 7-9 8-3 8-6 45° 2-0 2-0 2-3 2-6 2-9 3-0 3-0 3-0
60° 4-9 5-0 5-6 5-9 6-3 6-9 7-3 7-9 60° 1-6 1-6 1-9 2-0 2-3 2-3 2-6 2-6
90° 3-9 4-0 4-6 4-9 5-3 5-6 5-9 6-3 90° NR NR 1-0 1-0 1-6 1-9 2-0 2-3
120° 3-3 3-6 4-0 4-3 4-6 4-6 4-9 5-3 120° NR NR 1-0 1-0 1-3 1-6 1-6 1-9
135° 2-9 3-0 3-6 4-0 4-3 4-3 4-6 4-9 135° NR NR NR 1-0 1-0 1-3 1-3 1-6
150° 2-6 2-9 3-3 3-6 4-0 4-3 4-3 4-6 150° NR NR NR NR 1-0 1-0 1-3 1-3
180° 2-3 2-6 3-0 3-3 3-6 3-9 4-0 4-3 180° NR NR NR NR NR 1-0 1-0 1-0

VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2009 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

40.96_6 REV_B
FIRE PROTECTION PRODUCTS – OPEN NOZZLES 40.96
V12
Open Spray Nozzles
STYLE V12

INSTALLATION TECHNICAL DATA FIGURE 4 – K Factor Discharge Curves (Metric)

450

425

400

375

PRESSURE IN KILOPASCALS (kPa)

350

325

.7

2.6

=3.3

.6

.9
Factor=1

7.1
r=4

.1

4
r=5
actor=

0.
8
300

=
tor

r=

=1
tor
cto

cto

cto

or
-Fac

ac

ct
a

Fa
ic K-F

K-F

K-F

K-F

Fa
275

Metric K-

K-
ric K

K-
tric
tric

ric
c

ric
tri
Metr

et

et
Met

Me
Me
Me
250

M
225

200

175

150

125

100

75

50
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200

DISCHARGE IN LITERS PER MINUTE (LPM)

K-factors have tolerances of +/- 0.2 GPM/√PSI (0.2 LPM/√kPA) from nominal.

www.victaulic.com
VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2009 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

REV_B 40.96_7
FIRE PROTECTION PRODUCTS – OPEN NOZZLES 40.96
V12
Open Spray Nozzles
STYLE V12

INSTALLATION TECHNICAL DATA FIGURE 5 – Design Spray Profiles (Metric, ALL K FACTORS)

RADIAL DISTANCE FROM NOZZLE CENTERLINE (METERS)

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5
0

0.5 180
°
16
0°

AXIAL DISTANCE FROM NOZZLE (METERS) 1 14

0°

12
1.5

5°
11
2

0°
2.5

95°
3

3.5

4
80°

4.5
65°

Notes:

1) The design spray profile is the included angle of discharge for each nozzle.
2) Figure 2 illustrates the radial distance at various heights based upon testing in the pendent position
at 10 psi, 20 psi, and 60 psi / 69 kPa, 138 kPa, and 414 kPa discharge pressure (see Figure 3,
Variable C).
3) For FM only installations, use a recommended tolerance of +/- 2 ft [0.6 m] from nominal for the
radial distances shown (x-axis) in Figure 2 for all fixed angle orientations. Use a recommended spray
profile angle tolerance of +/- 5° in the pendent position (vertically downward) and +/-10° in all other
fixed angle orientations.
4) For UL/NFPA only installations, use a recommended tolerance of +/-15% from nominal for the
radial distances shown (x-axis) in Figure 2 for all fixed angle orientations.
5) Spray profiles will tend to decrease (or pull inward) with an increase in pressure. All test data was
obtained in a stagnant air environment.

See Exposure Protection Tables for fixed angle orientation and maximum axial distance from the plane
of protection for each model.

VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2009 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

40.96_8 REV_B
FIRE PROTECTION PRODUCTS – OPEN NOZZLES 40.96
V12
Open Spray Nozzles
STYLE V12

INSTALLATION TECHNICAL DATA MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 65° SPRAY ANGLE MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 125° SPRAY ANGLE
Exposure Protection Tables IN METERS IN METERS
(Metric) Fixed K FACTOR Fixed K FACTOR
Angle 1,7 2,6 3,3 4,6 5,9 7,1 8,1 10,4 Angle 1,7 2,6 3,3 4,6 5,9 7,1 8,1 10,4
0° 4.5 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 0° 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.7
CL
30° 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.4 3.4 3.5 30° 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 2.1 2.2 2.4 2.4
Nozzle 45° 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.7 2.8 3.0 3.0 3.1 45° 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1
60° 2.1 2.2 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.7 2.9 60° 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9
90° 2.0 2.1 2.1 2.3 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.6 90° 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.6
A
120° 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.2 2.3 2.3 2.4 120° 0.6 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.3
135° 1.8 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.3 135° 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
Spray
Profile 150° 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.1 2.1 2.2 150° 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.1
180° 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 2.0 2.0 2.1 180° 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0
N
C TIO
FPROTE MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 80° SPRAY ANGLE MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 140° SPRAY ANGLE
PLANE O IN METERS IN METERS
C Fixed K FACTOR Fixed K FACTOR
B Angle 1,7 2,6 3,3 4,6 5,9 7,1 8,1 10,4 Angle 1,7 2,6 3,3 4,6 5,9 7,1 8,1 10,4
Gravity
0° 4.5 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.8 4.8 4.9 0° 1.9 1.9 1.9 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.1 2.1
30° 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.4 3.4 30° 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.6 1.6 1.7 1.8
A – Axial Distance 45° 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.7 2.8 3.0 45° 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.6
B – Fixed Angle (Orientation) 60° 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.5 2.7 60° 0.7 0.8 0.8 1.1 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4
C – Radial Distance 90° 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 90° 0.6 0.6 0.8 0.9 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2
Figure 6 – Spray Coverage Variables 120° 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.9 1.9 2.0 2.1 120° 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.1
135° 1.4 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.9 2.0 135° 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.9
150° 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 150° 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8
180° 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.6 1.7 1.7 1.8 1.8 180° 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7

MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 95° SPRAY ANGLE MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 160° SPRAY ANGLE
IN METERS IN METERS
Fixed K FACTOR Fixed K FACTOR
Angle 1,7 2,6 3,3 4,6 5,9 7,1 8,1 10,4 Angle 1,7 2,6 3,3 4,6 5,9 7,1 8,1 10,4
0° 4.5 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 0° 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.6
30° 2.5 2.6 2.8 2.9 3.1 3.2 3.2 3.4 30° 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4
45° 2.1 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.6 2.7 2.7 3.0 45° 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.3
60° 1.6 1.7 1.8 2.0 2.1 2.1 2.3 2.6 60° 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1
90° 1.4 1.4 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.9 2.1 90° 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
120° 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.7 1.8 120° NR 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.8
135° 1.1 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.6 1.7 135° NR NR 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6
150° 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.6 150° NR NR NR 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5
180° 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4 180° NR NR NR 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5

MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 110° SPRAY ANGLE MAXIMUM AXIAL DISTANCE FOR 180° SPRAY ANGLE
IN METERS IN METERS
Fixed K FACTOR Fixed K FACTOR
Angle 1,7 2,6 3,3 4,6 5,9 7,1 8,1 10,4 Angle 1,7 2,6 3,3 4,6 5,9 7,1 8,1 10,4
0° 2.9 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.2 3.3 3.4 0° 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1
30° 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.7 2.7 2.9 30° 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0
45° 1.7 1.8 2.1 2.1 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 45° 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.9
60° 1.4 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.1 2.2 2.4 60° 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.8
90° 1.1 1.2 1.4 1.4 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 90° NR NR 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.7
120° 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.6 120° NR NR 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5
135° 0.8 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.4 135° NR NR NR 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.5
150° 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.3 1.4 150° NR NR NR NR 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4
180° 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.3 180° NR NR NR NR NR 0.3 0.3 0.3

www.victaulic.com
VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2009 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

REV_B 40.96_9
FIRE PROTECTION PRODUCTS – OPEN NOZZLES 40.96
V12
Open Spray Nozzles
STYLE V12

WARRANTY Refer to the Warranty section of the current Price List or contact Victaulic for details.

NOTE This product shall be manufactured by Victaulic or to Victaulic specifications. All products to be
installed in accordance with current Victaulic installation/assembly instructions. Victaulic reserves the
right to change product specifications, designs and standard equipment without notice and without
incurring obligations.

ORDERING INFORMATION Please specify the following when ordering:

• Sprinkler Model Number
• K Factor
• Spray Angle
• Nozzle Finish
• Wrench Model Number

For complete contact information, visit www.victaulic.com

40.96 5033 REV B UPDATED 05/2009
VICTAULIC IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF VICTAULIC COMPANY. © 2009 VICTAULIC COMPANY. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

40.96
 091-182 SUPER 16 AUTO-EJECT
INSTALLATION GUIDE AND MANUAL

THE NEW
SUPER 16
AUTO EJECT
AUTOMATIC SHORE LINE DISCONNECT

2 YEAR WARRANTY
Assembled and Distributed in Europe by
LUDO McGURK TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT LTD
WILMSLOW - U.K.

A Product of
KUSSMAUL ELECTRONICS CO., INC. USA

LUDO McGURK TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT LTD

UNIT 3 CROSSFIELD ROAD,
HANDFORTH, CHESHIRE, SK9 3LN.
TEL: +44 1625 527 673 FAX: +44 1625 549 929
WEB: www.ludomcgurk.co.uk EMAIL: sales@ludomcgurk.co.uk
-1-
 091-182 SUPER 16 AUTO-EJECT

CAUTION
The Auto Eject must be connected to
the starter circuit so that the solenoid
is energised only while the engine is
cranking. If the solenoid is energised
continuously it will OVERHEAT and
BURN OUT.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS CAUTION

NOTE WILL VOID THE
WARRANTY

Figure 1: AC Wire Preparation

LUDO McGURK TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT LTD

UNIT 3 CROSSFIELD ROAD,
HANDFORTH, CHESHIRE, SK9 3LN.
TEL: +44 1625 527 673 FAX: +44 1625 549 929
WEB: www.ludomcgurk.co.uk EMAIL: sales@ludomcgurk.co.uk
-2-
 091-182 SUPER 16 AUTO-EJECT

INSTALLATION
1. Locate a convenient place on the vehicle to mount the AUTO EJECT. A minimum clearance
of 115mm behind the mounting panel is required. Position unit at or above average chest
height for best visibility when connecting.

2. Place the template in position and center punch as shown in 6 places (Figure 4).

3. Connect the DC wiring. Install the DC cable, use the 2 white connectors as shown in
Figures 2 & 3. The black wire is connected to the vehicle's ground and the red wire to the
vehicle's starter. USE #16 GAUGE WIRE OR HEAVIER.

4. Connect the AC wiring. Prepare the AC cable as shown in Figure 1. Then install the AC
cable as shown in Figure 3. You must incorporate an RCD device within the vehicle such as
RCBO-XX from Ludo McGurk Transport Equipment Ltd.

5. Test installation by pushing mating connector into the AUTO EJECT. Energising the starter
should power the solenoid and eject the connector.

6. Keep connector pins and contacts of the AUTO EJECT clean. Clean and sparingly lubricate
contacts monthly with a "vaseline" type lubricant to ensure free operation.

7. For increased electrical safety, connect to mains supply only through an AUTO-SAFE unit,
see rear of this manual.

Figure 2: Mounting
LUDO McGURK TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT LTD
UNIT 3 CROSSFIELD ROAD,
HANDFORTH, CHESHIRE, SK9 3LN.
TEL: +44 1625 527 673 FAX: +44 1625 549 929
WEB: www.ludomcgurk.co.uk EMAIL: sales@ludomcgurk.co.uk
-3-
 091-182 SUPER 16 AUTO-EJECT

Figure 3: Wiring
LUDO McGURK TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT LTD
UNIT 3 CROSSFIELD ROAD,
HANDFORTH, CHESHIRE, SK9 3LN.
TEL: +44 1625 527 673 FAX: +44 1625 549 929
WEB: www.ludomcgurk.co.uk EMAIL: sales@ludomcgurk.co.uk
-4-
 091-182 SUPER 16 AUTO-EJECT

Figure 4: Hole Template

WARRANTY
All Auto Ejects manufactured by Ludo McGurk Transport Equipment Ltd & Kussmaul Electronics
Company Inc are warranted to be free of defects of material or workmanship. Liability is limited to
repairing or replacing at our factory, without charge, any material or defects which become
apparent in normal use within 2 years from the date the equipment was shipped. Equipment is to
be returned; shipping charges prepaid and will be returned, after repair, shipping charges paid.
This warranty does not include normal wear and tear, pitting of the electrical contacts, malfunction
due to contamination of the mechanism, or solenoid overheating due to improper installation.
Ludo McGurk Transport Equipment Ltd & Kussmaul Electronics Company, Inc. shall have no
liability for damages of any kind to associated equipment arising from the installation and /or use of
the Ludo McGurk Transport Equipment Ltd & Kussmaul Electronics Company, Inc. products. The
purchaser, by the acceptance of the equipment, assumes all liability for any damages, which may
result from its installation, use or misuse, by the purchaser, his or its employees or others.

LUDO McGURK TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT LTD

UNIT 3 CROSSFIELD ROAD,
HANDFORTH, CHESHIRE, SK9 3LN.
TEL: +44 1625 527 673 FAX: +44 1625 549 929
WEB: www.ludomcgurk.co.uk EMAIL: sales@ludomcgurk.co.uk
-5-
 091-182 SUPER 16 AUTO-EJECT
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
SUPER 16 AUTO-EJECT ALL MODELS
To be supplied to the vehicle operator.

As with all electrical connectors and equipment the Auto-Eject should be used with care and
respect; it is carrying high voltage which is always potentially hazardous.

The shore line should always be auto-ejected, thus removing the need for handling a live cable.
Ideally it is used in conjunction with the wall-mounted Auto-Safe switch. This ensures that the
shore line is dead at all times when being handled.

To connect to the Auto-Eject, lift the weather flap and insert the shore-line connector, taking note
that the index pip is at the top.

Push the connector firmly into the Auto-Eject receptacle until the eject pin latches, and there is no
outward force remaining. The shore line is now connected.

The use of spring reels for shore lines should be avoided if possible. THE SHORE-LINE MUST
NEVER BE UNDER TENSION WHILST CONNECTED; SEE DIAGRAM ON NEXT PAGE.

If you are connecting a shore-line that is attached to a spring reel, pull the shore line towards you
by the line itself. Do not pull by the connector on the end; this only serves to damage the wire
connections inside it and will eventually pull the connector off the cable.

When the vehicle ignition key is turned to the engine cranking position, the Auto-Eject is energised
and the connector is ejected.

The connector is not ejected with any great force, but it is wise to keep your face and other
sensitive parts of your body clear.

DO’S & DON’TS

·Don’t twist the connector when pushing it in – look at what you are doing.

·Don’t pressure-wash the Auto-Eject – the cover is designed to keep the weather out, not
hydraulic pressure.

·Don’t push the connector in with undue force.

·Do lubricate the cover hinge and the receptacle pins periodically with Vaseline.

·Do check the connections in the line connector periodically. Isolate from mains supply before
doing this.

LUDO McGURK TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT LTD

UNIT 3 CROSSFIELD ROAD,
HANDFORTH, CHESHIRE, SK9 3LN.
TEL: +44 1625 527 673 FAX: +44 1625 549 929
WEB: www.ludomcgurk.co.uk EMAIL: sales@ludomcgurk.co.uk
-6-
 091-182 SUPER 16 AUTO-EJECT

LUDO McGURK TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT LTD

UNIT 3 CROSSFIELD ROAD,
HANDFORTH, CHESHIRE, SK9 3LN.
TEL: +44 1625 527 673 FAX: +44 1625 549 929
WEB: www.ludomcgurk.co.uk EMAIL: sales@ludomcgurk.co.uk
-7-
 091-182 SUPER 16 AUTO-EJECT

AUTO SAFE
THE ESTABLISHED HEALTH & SAFETY STANDARD FOR SHORE LINES TO STANDBY AND EMERGENCY VEHICLES
SAFE UNATTENDED MAINS CHARGING LINES -
CANNOT RE-LATCH UNLESS CONNECTED TO
VEHICLE
VERY EASY TO INSTALL
OPERATES OVER WIDE AMPERAGE SCALE
FULLY AUTOMATIC POWER DROP-OUT
INTEGRAL RCD & CIRCUIT BREAKER
RUGGED IP67 CASING
DUAL VOLTAGE 110V - 230V
32 AMP VERSION FOR "NEW DIMENSION"
TRAILERS.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

OUTLET SOCKET
The shore line to the vehicle is
MODEL 091-129B3 DUAL usually wired into the Auto Safe. In
VOLTAGE
applications where the shoreline
needs to be detached from the
The Model 091-129B3 No-Load Dropout Switch is a Auto Safe (i.e. marine
safety device designed to protect against electric shock applications), this outlet socket
from 110 volt and 230-volt mains shore lines when not can be added to the unit.
in use.
ELECTRICITY METER
Intended for use with the Auto-Eject and Eurochargers, An electricity meter can be built
the Auto-Safe makes the mains line go dead immediately into the Auto Safe, to measure the
upon ejection/disconnection from the vehicle. units used by each vehicle. This
meter is also available as a
The Auto-Safe cannot be re-set until the mains line is standalone unit
re-connected to the vehicle.
TEST TOOLS
It has been developed particularly for standby vehicle and LATCH TESTER
marine situations where mains shore lines may be left This product gives quick and
unattended. positive testing of the Auto-Safe's
latching function by skilled or
091-129B3 with integral RCD & Circuit Breaker unskilled personnel.
removes the necessity to install these extra items
separately. SOCKET AND WIRING TESTER
MODEL # 091-129B3-XX Checks for correct wiring of mains
VOLTAGE IN 115V 230V shore lines. Easy to use & speeds
CURRENT IN 10 OR 16 OR 25 OR 32 AMPS up installation. Also verifies
VOLTAGE OUT AS INPUT continuity through Auto-Safe
CURRENT OUT AS INPUT safety switch unit.
WEIGHT 1.72KG Available in 110V & 230V
OUTLINE -

LUDO McGURK TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT LTD

UNIT 3 CROSSFIELD ROAD,
HANDFORTH, CHESHIRE, SK9 3LN.
TEL: +44 1625 527 673 FAX: +44 1625 549 929
WEB: www.ludomcgurk.co.uk EMAIL: sales@ludomcgurk.co.uk
-8-
 091-138T EUROCHARGER II 24/12
INSTALLATION GUIDE AND MANUAL

EURO CHARGER II
24/12
AUTOMATIC BATTERY CHARGER

3 YEAR WARRANTY

NOTE :
This charger is designed for vehicles with dual electrical systems,
one 24 volt and another 12 volt, common negative ground.

Made in U.S.A. by
KUSSMAUL ELECTRONICS CO., INC.
Distributed in Europe by
LUDO McGURK TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT LTD
WILMSLOW - U.K.

LUDO McGURK TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT LTD

UNIT 3 CROSSFIELD ROAD, HANDFORTH, CHESHIRE, SK9 3LN.
TEL: +44 1625 527 673 FAX: +44 1625 549 929
WEB: www.ludomcgurk.co.uk EMAIL: sales@ludomcgurk.co.uk
-1-
 091-138T EUROCHARGER II 24/12
INTRODUCTION

The Euro Charger II 24/12 Battery Charger is a compact completely automatic charger designed for
installation on vehicles with a 24 volt main system and a 12 volt auxiliary battery. Two separate
chargers are provided to charge the two sets of batteries separately. Voltage is sensed for each
battery so that each battery is charged according to its requirements. The total output to the two
sets of batteries is 15 amperes. An ammeter provides continuous indication of the charger output.

Construction of the Euro Charger II 24/12 is extremely rugged to withstand the shock and vibration
normally encountered by vehicle mounted equipment. The unit operates completely automatically
and stops charging the batteries when they are fully charged. There is no trickle charge and
therefore no danger of overcharging and water boil-off. Any parasitic loads on the battery such as
radio, lights, etc., are automatically supplied with current by the charger.

INSTALLATION
The Euro Charger II 24/12 Automatic Battery Charger should be installed in an area with adequate
ventilation.

1. Mount the charger using the four holes provided for this.

2. Connect the wiring from the batteries to the Output Terminal Strip.

3. Connect the wiring to the batteries. Ring lugs that have been securely crimped, or
soldered, should be used.

4. Double check all wiring before proceeding.

5, Caution: Verify that the dual voltage switch (DV switch) and the fuse on the front panel
corresponds to the applied voltage. For fuse size, see chart on page three or four.

6. Wire the A.C. power to power input terminal strip.

7. Pilot light will light to show that the charger has power.

LUDO McGURK TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT LTD

UNIT 3 CROSSFIELD ROAD, HANDFORTH, CHESHIRE, SK9 3LN.
TEL: +44 1625 527 673 FAX: +44 1625 549 929
WEB: www.ludomcgurk.co.uk EMAIL: sales@ludomcgurk.co.uk
-2-
 091-138T EUROCHARGER II 24/12
INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAM

POWER

FUSE

OUTPUT
24v 12v
230 INPUT + +
L N

A.C. Input Power

Line

Neutral
Chassis
Ground Ground

Chassis
Ground

Chassis
Ground

CAUTION
Be certain that DV switch and
fuse correspond to input voltage.
Input Voltage Fuse
230VAC 6 Amp
115VAC 12 Amp
IMPORTANT: Charger output wire size is 4mm². Wire size is for a maximum length of 3 metres. If
wiring is to be longer, larger wiring is required. Additional information is available on request.

LUDO McGURK TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT LTD

UNIT 3 CROSSFIELD ROAD, HANDFORTH, CHESHIRE, SK9 3LN.
TEL: +44 1625 527 673 FAX: +44 1625 549 929
WEB: www.ludomcgurk.co.uk EMAIL: sales@ludomcgurk.co.uk
-3-
 091-138T EUROCHARGER II 24/12
SPECIFICATION & OUTLINE
Input Fuse: see chart
Output Voltage: 24V/12V
Output Current: 15 Amps
Charge Indicator: 0-15 amps 5%
Weight: 7.5 kgs

Input Voltage Input Current Fuse

230VAC 50/60 hz 2.7 Amps 6 Amp
115VAC 50/60hz 5.3 Amps 12 Amp

WARRANTY
All products of Kussmaul Electronics Company Inc. & Ludo McGurk Transport Equipment Ltd. are
warranted to be free of defects of material or workmanship. Liability is limited to repairing or
replacing at our factory, without charge, any material or defects which become apparent in normal
use within 3 years from the date the equipment was shipped. Equipment is to be returned; shipping
charges prepaid and will be returned, after repair, shipping charges paid.

Kussmaul Electronics Company, Inc. & Ludo McGurk Transport Equipment Ltd shall have no
liability for damages of any kind to associated equipment arising from the installation and /or use of
the Kussmaul Electronics Company, Inc. & Ludo McGurk Transport Equipment Ltd products. The
purchaser, by the acceptance of the equipment, assumes all liability for any damages, which may
result from its installation, use or misuse, by the purchaser, his or its employees or others.

LUDO McGURK TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT LTD

UNIT 3 CROSSFIELD ROAD, HANDFORTH, CHESHIRE, SK9 3LN.
TEL: +44 1625 527 673 FAX: +44 1625 549 929
WEB: www.ludomcgurk.co.uk EMAIL: sales@ludomcgurk.co.uk
-4-
 PART NO. 70 - 2100 G441PL (REV-K)

OIL-LESS PISTON
VACUUM PUMPS & COMPRESSORS
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Model 1HAB Shown Model 3HBB Shown Model 3HEB Shown Model PCD Shown

Thank you for purchasing this Gast product. It is manufactured to the highest standards
using quality materials. Please follow all recommended maintenance, operational
and safety instructions and you will receive years of trouble free service.

IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS MANUAL AND SAVE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.

Product Use Criteria:

• Pump only clean, dry air.

• Operate at 32ºF - 104ºF (0ºC - 40ºC).
• Protect unit from dirt & moisture.
• Do not pump flammable or explosive gases or
use in an atmosphere that contains such gases.
• Protect all surrounding items from exhaust air. This
exhaust air can become very hot.
• Corrosive gases and particulate material will damage unit.
Water vapor, oil-based contaminants or other liquids must be filtered out.
• Consult your Gast Distributor/Representative before using at high altitudes.
• These pumps are oil-less and require NO lubrication.
The Teflon-filled rings are self-lubricating and require no oil.
• The motor bearings are grease-packed for the lifetime of the bearings.

ISO 9001 & 14001 CERTIFIED www.gastmfg.com

®Registered Trademark/™Trademark of Gast Manufacturing Inc., Copyright © 2002 Gast Manufacturing Inc. All Rights Reserved.
 Your safety and the safety of others
is extremely important.
We have provided many important safety messages
in this manual and on your product. Always read
and obey all safety messages.
This is the safety alert symbol. This symbol
alerts you to hazards that can kill or hurt you and
others. The safety alert symbol and the words
“DANGER” and “WARNING” will precede all safety
messages. These words mean:
DANGER
You will be killed or seriously injured if you don’t
follow instructions.
WARNING
You can be killed or seriously injured if you don’t
follow instructions.
All safety messages will identify the hazard, tell you
how to reduce the chance of injury, and tell you
what can happen if the safety instructions are not
followed.
INSTALLATION
WARNING
c
Electrical Shock Hazard
Disconnect electrical power at the circuit breaker
or fuse box before installing this product.
Install this product where it will not come into
contact with water or other liquids.
Install this product where it will be weather
protected.
Electrically ground this product.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in
death, fire or electrical shock.
Correct installation is your responsibility. Make sure
you have the proper installation conditions and that
installation clearances do not block air flow.
Lift the unit by the motor shell, motor foot or
flywheel (depending upon model design). Do Not lift
unit by shroud, filters or mufflers. These parts are
not designed to support the weight of the unit.
Blocking air flow over the product in any way can
cause the product to overheat.
Install safety guards as required to prevent potential
injury hazards or damage to surrounding objects.
Mounting
This product can be installed in any orientation.
Mounting the product to a stable, rigid operation surface
and using shock mounts will reduce noise and vibration.
Plumbing
Remove plugs from the IN and OUT ports. Connect
with pipe and fittings that are the same size or larger
than the product’s threaded ports. Be sure to connect
the intake and exhaust plumbing to the correct inlet and
outlet ports. Ports will not support plumbing.
Accessories
If unit will be used in a system where it will be required to
start against any system of back pressure, a positive
sealing, one-way check valve should be installed in the
air line between system and unit. This check valve is
included with all tank mounted compressor units.
The product’s intake and exhaust filters will provide
adequate filtration in most applications. Check filters
periodically and replace when necessary. Please consult
your Gast Distributor/Representative for additional filter
recommendations.
Install relief valves and gauges at inlet or outlet, or both,
to monitor performance. Check valves may be required
to prevent back streaming through the unit.
Motor Control
It is your responsibility to contact a qualified
electrician and assure that the electrical installation
is adequate and in conformance with all national
and local codes and ordinances. Grounding
is required.
Determine the correct overload setting required to
protect the motor (see motor starter manufacturer’s
recommendations). Select fuses, motor protective
switches or thermal protective switches to provide
protection. Fuses act as short circuit protection for the
motor, not as protection against overload. Incoming line
fuses must be able to withstand the motor’s starting
current. Motor starters with thermal magnetic overload
or circuit breakers protect motor from overload or
reduced voltage conditions.
The wiring diagram supplied with the product provides
required electrical information. Check that power
source is correct to properly operate the dual-voltage
motors.
Electrical Connection Model that is permanently wired:
This product must be connected to a grounded,
metallic, permanent wiring system, or an equipment
WARNING grounding terminal or lead on the product.

c
Power supply wiring must conform to all required safety
codes and be installed by a qualified person. Check
that supply voltage agrees with that listed on product
nameplate.

Electrical Shock Hazard
This product must be properly grounded.
Do not modify the plug provided. If it will not
fit the outlet, have the proper outlet installed
by a qualified electrician.
If repair or replacement of the cord or plug is
necessary, do not connect the grounding wire
to either flat blade terminal. The wire with
insulation that is green or green with yellow
stripes is the grounding wire.
Check the condition of the power supply wiring.
Do not permanently connect this product to
wiring that is not in good condition or is
inadequate for the requirements of this product.
Extension cords:
Use only a 3-wire extension cord that has a 3-blade
grounding plug. Connect extension cord plug to a
matching 3-slot receptacle. Do not use an adapter.
Make sure your extension cord is in good condition.
Check that the gage wire of the extension cord is the
correct size wire to carry the current this product will
draw.
An undersized cord is a potential fire hazard, and will
cause a drop in line voltage resulting in loss of power
causing the product to overheat. The following table
indicates the correct size cord for length required and
the ampere rating listed on the product nameplate. If in
doubt, use the next heavier gage cord. The smaller
the gage number, the heavier the wire gage.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in Minimum gage for extension cords
death, fire or electrical shock.
Amps Volts Length of cord in feet
120v 25 50 100 150 200 250 300 400 500
Model with a power supply cord: 240v 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000
This product must be grounded. For either 120-volt or
220/240-volt circuits connect power supply cord 0-2 18 18 18 16 16 14 14 12 12
2-3 18 18 16 14 14 12 12 10 10
grounding plug to a matching grounded outlet. Do not 3-4 18 18 16 14 12 12 10 10 8
use an adapter. (See diagram.) 4-5 18 18 14 12 12 10 10 8 8
5-6 18 16 14 12 10 10 8 8 8
6-8 18 16 12 10 10 8 6 6 6
In the event of an electrical short circuit, grounding 8-10 18 14 12 10 8 8 6 6 4
reduces the risk of electric shock by providing an 10-12 16 14 10 8 8 6 6 4 4
escape wire for the electric current. This product may 12-14 16 12 10 8 6 6 6 4 2
be equipped with a power supply cord having a 14-16 16 12 10 8 6 6 4 4 2
16-18 14 12 8 8 6 4 4 2 2
grounding wire with an appropriate grounding plug. 18-20 14 12 8 6 6 4 4 2 2
The plug must be plugged into an outlet that is properly
installed and grounded in accordance with all local
codes and ordinances.
OPERATION
Check with a qualified electrician or serviceman if
the grounding instructions are not completely
understood, or if you are not sure whether the
product is properly grounded. Do not modify the
WARNING
plug provided. If it will not fit the outlet, have the
proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. Injury Hazard
Install proper safety guards as needed.
Keep fingers and objects away from openings and
rotating parts.
When provided, motor terminal covers must be in
place for safe operation.
Product surfaces become very hot during operation,
allow product surfaces to cool before handling.
Air stream from product may contain solid or liquid
Grounded Plug material that can result in eye or skin damage,
Grounding Pin wear proper eye protection.
120-volt grounded connectors
Wear hearing protection. Sound level from motor
shown. 220/240-volt grounded may exceed 70 dBA.
connectors will differ in shape. Grounded Outlet
Failure to follow these instructions can result in
burns, eye injury or other serious injury.
It is your responsibility to operate this product at
recommended pressures or vacuum duties and
room ambient temperatures. Do not start against a
vacuum or pressure load. Do not remove relief
valve head while unit is operating.
Start Up
If motor fail to start or slows down significantly under
load, shut off and disconnect from power supply. Check
that voltage is correct for motor and that motor is
turning in the proper direction. If the motor is turning in
the wrong direction, it will overheat.
MAINTENANCE
WARNING
c
Electrical Shock Hazard
Disconnect electrical power supply cord before
performing maintenance on this product.
If product is hard wired into system, disconnect
electrical power at the circuit breaker or fuse box
before performing maintenance on this product.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in
death, fire or electrical shock.
WARNING
Injury Hazard
Product surfaces become very hot during operation,
allow product surfaces to cool before handling.
Air stream from product may contain solid or liquid
material that can result in eye or skin damage,
wear proper eye protection.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in
burns, eye injury or other serious injury.
It is your responsibility to:
• Regularly inspect and make necessary repairs to
product in order to maintain proper operation.
• Make sure that pressure and vacuum is released
from product before starting maintenance.
If unit is operated at maximum duties in a fairly clean,
65ºF - 75ºF (18ºC - 24ºC) ambient environment with
35% relative humidity, complete first inspection and
maintenance after 4000 hours of operation. Earlier
maintenance may be required depending upon the
environment.
Check intake and exhaust filters after first 500 hours of
operation. Clean filters and determine how frequently
filters should be checked during future operation. This
one procedure will help assure the product’s
performance and service life.
Check the thickness of the rider ring. It should measure
greater than .055”. Change all rings if thickness
measures .055” or less.
1. Disconnect electrical power supply to unit.
2. Vent all air lines.
3. Remove filter cover.
4. Check filter felt. Replace felt if it is covered with
contamination or shows signs of increasing
differential pressure.
5. Reinstall felt and filter cover.
Check that all external accessories such as relief
valves and gauges are attached and are not
damaged before re-operating product.
Pressure or Vacuum Tank Systems
Check the air filter cartridge. A dirty filter restricts air
flow and causes unit to run hotter resulting in longer
operating cycles.
Check the air receiver for moisture regularly. The
humidity in the environment will determine how quickly
moisture will accumulate and need to be drained.
Clean the pump and motor regularly. Dirt and film
buildup on the outer shell affects the unit’s ability to
dissipate heat.
SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES
It is your responsibility to follow proper shutdown
procedures to prevent product damage.
NEVER ADD OIL TO THIS OIL-LESS PUMP.
Proper shutdown procedures must be followed to
prevent pump damage. Failure to do so may result in
premature pump failure. Gast Manufacturing Oil-Less
Piston Vacuum Pumps and Compressors are
constructed of ferrous metals or aluminum which are
subject to rust and corrosion when pumping
condensable vapors such as water. Follow the steps
below to assure correct storage and shutdown between
operating periods.
1. Disconnect plumbing.
2. Operate product for at least 5 minutes without
plumbing.
3. Run at maximum vacuum for 10 - 15 minutes.
4. Repeat step 2.
5. Disconnect power supply.
6. Plug open ports to prevent dirt or other
contaminants from entering product.

SERVICE KIT INSTALLATION
WARNING
c
Electrical Shock Hazard
Disconnect electrical power supply cord before
installing Service Kit.
If product is hard wired into system, disconnect
electrical power at the circuit breaker or fuse box
before installing Service Kit.
Vent all air lines to release pressure or vacuum.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in
death, fire or electrical shock.
Gast will NOT guarantee field-rebuilt product
performance. For performance guarantee, the
product must be returned to a Gast Authorized
Service Facility.
Service Kit contents vary. Most contain head and
cylinder gaskets, valves, piston rings and seals, rider
rings and felt filters.
1. Disconnect electrical power to pump.
2. Disconnect air supply and vent all air lines to
release pressure or vacuum.
3. Remove shroud, cylinder head and valve
components.
4. Remove cylinder and rings.
5. Clean all parts with water or non-petroleum based
solvent such as Gast AH255B Solvent. Do Not use
kerosene or ANY other combustible solvents.
6. Install piston seals, piston rings and rider rings on
piston. Locate ring joints approximately opposite
each other.
7. Use cylinder screws with washers to attach cylinder
to bracket. Tighten screws only until they are finger
tight.
8. Move pistons to top dead center position. Adjust
each cylinder flush with top of piston.
9. Torque cylinder screws to 150-160 in. lbs.
10. Replace valve components in original order.
11. Install cylinder head and head screws. The exhaust
ports have been marked on the cylinder heads by
omitting the ends of two of the fins. Do not
tighten screws at this time.
12 Install manifold nuts and seals on manifold. Insert
into cylinder head and manifold.
13. Torque head screws to 150-160 in. lbs.
14. Turn fan by hand to check that rod assembly is not
hitting head. If rod hits head, loosen cylinders and
adjust.
15. Install manifold and tighten manifold nut one-quarter
to one-half turn beyond finger tight.
16. Operate unit for 10 minutes. Tighten screws again.
17. Install fan shroud.
Check that all external accessories such as relief
valves and gauges are attached to cover and are
not damaged before re-operating product.
If pump still does not produce proper vacuum or
pressure, send unit to a Gast Authorized Service Facility
for repair.
SPECIFIC PROBLEMS AND REMEDIES
Unit stalls after vacuum or pressure starts building
up in receiver:
1. Disconnect electrical power supply from unit.
2. Check that voltage from power source matches that
listed on nameplate.
3. Check wiring connections against diagram on
nameplate. Single voltage motors will operate only
at designated voltage.
Motor will not start:
1. Disconnect electrical power supply from unit.
2. Check that voltage from power source matches that
listed on nameplate.
3. Check wiring connections against diagram on
nameplate. Single voltage motors will operate only
at designated voltage.
4. Reconnect electrical supply to unit. Check that
power is on. If extension cord is used, check that it
is the correct size and length to adequately supply
power to the unit.
5. If unit will still not operate, contact your Gast
Distributor/Representative or a Gast Authorized
Service Facility.
Motor starts at 0 PSI but will not start under
pressure:
1. Replace the check valve.
2. Wait for the thermal overload switch to reset before
attempting to operate.
3. If unit will not restart, the thermal overload switch
may need to be replaced. If there isn’t a thermal
overload switch, the motor may be damaged and
requires service.
Motor starts intermittently:
1. Disconnect electrical power supply from unit.
2. Check points in the pressure or vacuum switch for
wear or dirt.
3. Check for dirt buildup or uneven wear.
4. Replace parts as required.
Unit cycles On-Off more often than when first
installed:
1. Check air receiver and drain water that has
accumulated.
Unit or motor is running more often than when first
installed:
1. Check system for air leaks. If new or different
pneumatic equipment has been added, the air
requirements may have changed.
2. Check and clean filters.
3. Check for buildup of foreign material on head.
4. Check valves and rings for wear and damage.
Air receiver loses pressure:
1. Check for system leaks through pipes, fittings and
seals.
2. Inspect the check valve to see if it is allowing air
pressure to leak back into unit.
3. Pressure pumps will have bubbles around head
assembly during operation. Stop operating the
pump for a few minutes and check for air leaks at
pump.
4. Vacuum systems should have the check valve
removed and inspected for dirt buildup. It may be
necessary to need an AV460 filter installed prior to
tank to eliminate contaminants.

A leak is located at the unit:

1. Vent all pressure from inside the air receiver until
gauge reads 0 PSI.
2. Inspect check valve for dirt buildup, wear and proper
operation.
3. Replace check valve if necessary.

PARTS & ORDERING INFORMATION

Please reference the exploded view on the opposite page for the following model and parts table.

1HAA / 1HAB SERIES

REF DESCRIPTION QTY 1HAA 1HAB 1HAE 1LAA 1VAF 2HAH 2LAF 3HEB 3HEE 3LEM

1 INLET FILTER ASSEMBLY 1 B300A B300A B300A B300A B300A B300A B300F B300F B300F B300F
2∆ FELT 1 B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A
3 SAFETY VALVE 1 AT517F AT517 AT517 AT517D – AT517 AT517D AT517 AT517 AT517D
4 CYLINDER HEAD 1 AF508 AF508 AF508 AF508 AF508 AF508 AF508 AH691 AH691 AH691
5∆ HEAD GASKET 1 AF518 AF518 AF518 AF518 AF518 AF518 AF518 AF520A AF520A AF520A
6∆ OUTLET VALVE 1 AF531 AF531 AF531 AF531 AF531 AF531 AF531 AF545 AF545 AF545
7 PLATE VALVE 1 AF529 AF529 AF529 AF529 AF529 AF529 AF529 AK779 AK779 AK779
8∆ INLET VALVE 1 AF530 AF530 AF530 AF530 AF530 AF530 AF530 AF544 AF544 AF544
9∆ CYLINDER GASKET 1 AF519A AF519A AF519A AF519A AF519A AF519A AF519A AF521 AF521 AF521
10 CYLINDER 1 AF510 AF510 AF510 AF510 AF510 AF510 AF510 AF509 AF509 AF509
11 ∆ PISTON RING 2 AF527 AF527 AF527 AF527 AF527 AF527 AF527 AF541 AF541 AF541
12 ∆ PISTON SEAL 2 AF526 AF526 AF526 AF526 AF526 AF526 AF526 AF540 AF540 AF540
13 ∆ RIDER RING 1 AF594 AF594 AF594 AF594 AF594 AF594 AF594 AF595 AF595 AF595
14 PISTON ROD ASSEMBLY 1 AF560A AF560B AF560E AF560A AF560F AF560H AF560F AK893B AK893E AK893M
15 COUNTER WEIGHT 1 AF517A AF517B AF517E AF517A AF517D AF517C AF517D AT780B AK780E AK780A
16 FLAT KEY 1 AF524 AF524 AF524 AF524 AF524 AF524 AF524 AB136 AB136 AB136
17 FAN 1 AF533 AF533 AF533 AF533 AF533 AF547 AF547 AF547 AF547 AF547
18 SHROUD 1 AF534 AF534 AF534 AF534 AF534 AF534 AF534 AT343 AT343 AT343
*** TANK ASSEMBLY 1 – AF599-1 – AK329-1 – AF599-1 – – – –
*** SERVICE KIT 1 K264 K264 K264 K264 K264 K264 K264 K514A K514A K514A

Model 1HAB shown.

*** Item not shown.
∆ Denotes parts included in the Service Kit.
Parts listed are for stock models. For specific OEM models, please consult the factory.
When corresponding or ordering parts, please give complete model and serial numbers.
EXPLODED PRODUCT VIEW – MODEL 1HAB
PARTS & ORDERING INFORMATION

Please reference the exploded view on the opposite page for the following model and parts tables.

1VBF – 3LBD SERIES

REF DESCRIPTION QTY 1VBF 1VSF 2LBB 2HBB 2HBC 3HBB 3HBE 3LBA 3LBD

1 INLET FILTER ASSEMBLY 1 B300A

2 B300A B300A B300A B300A B300A B300A B300A B300A
2∆ FELT 2 B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A
3 SAFETY VALVE 1 – – AT517D AT517 AT517 AT517 AT517 AT517D AT517D
4 CYLINDER HEAD 2 AF508 AF508 AF508 AF508 AF508 AF508 AF508 AF508 AF508
5∆ HEAD GASKET 2 AF518 AF518 AF518 AF518 AF518 AF518 AF518 AF518 AF518
6∆ OUTLET VALVE 2 AF531 AF531 AF531 AF531 AF531 AF531 AF531 AF531 AF531
7 PLATE VALVE 2 AF529 AF529 AF529 AF529 AF529 AF529 AF529 AF529 AF529
8∆ INLET VALVE 2 AF530 AF530 AF530 AF530 AF530 AF530 AF530 AF530 AF530
9∆ CYLINDER GASKET 2 AF519A AF519A AF519A AF519A AF519A AF519A AF519A AF519A AF519A
10 CYLINDER 2 AF510 AF510 AF510 AF510 AF510 AF510 AF510 AF510 AF510
11 ∆ PISTON RING 4 AF527 AF527 AF527 AF527 AF527 AF527 AF527 AF527 AF527
12 ∆ PISTON SEAL 4 AF526 AF526 AF526 AF526 AF526 AF526 AF526 AF526 AF526
13 PISTON ROD ASSEMBLY 2 AF560F AF560F AF560B AF560B AF560C AF560B AF560E AF560A AF560D
14 ∆ RIDER RING 2 AF594 AF594 AF594 AF594 AF594 AF594 AF594 AF594 AF594
15 FLAT KEY 1 AF524 AF524 AF524 AF524 AF524 AF524 AH984 AF524 AH984
16 FAN/FAN ASSEMBLY 1 AF533 AF533 AF533 AF533 AF533 AF533 AF547 AF533 AF547
17 SHROUD 1 AF535 AF535 AF535 AF535 AF535 AF535 AF535 AF535 AF535
18 ∆ MANIFOLD SLEEVE 2 AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A
*** SERVICE KIT 1 K260 K260 K260 K260 K260 K260 K260 K260 K260

4VCF – 6HCA SERIES

REF DESCRIPTION QTY 4VCF 4VSF 4HCJ 4LCB 4HCC 5LCA 5HCD 5HCE 6HCN 6HCA

1 INLET FILTER ASSEMBLY 1 B300F

2 B300F B300A B300A B300A B300F B300A B300A B300F B300F
2∆ FELT 2 B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A
3 SAFETY VALVE 1 – – AT517A AT517E AT517A AT517F AT517B AT517B AT517C AT517C
4 CYLINDER HEAD 2 AF507 AF507 AF507 AF507 AF507 AF507 AF507 AF507 AF507 AF507
5∆ HEAD GASKET 2 AF520A AF520A AF520A AF520A AF520A AF520A AF520A AF520A AF520A AF520A
6∆ OUTLET VALVE 2 AF545 AF545 AF545 AF545 AF545 AF545 AF545 AF545 AF545 AF545
7 PLATE VALVE 2 AF543 AF543 AF543 AF543 AF543 AF543 AF543 AF543 AF543 AF543
8∆ INLET VALVE 2 AF544 AF544 AF544 AF544 AF544 AF544 AF544 AF544 AF544 AF544
9∆ CYLINDER GASKET 2 AF521 AF521 AF521 AF521 AF521 AF521 AF521 AF521 AF521 AF521
10 CYLINDER 2 AF509 AF509 AF509 AF509 AF509 AF509 AF509 AF509 AF509 AF509
11 ∆ PISTON RING 4 AF541 AF541 AF541 AF541 AF541 AF541 AF541 AF541 AF541 AF541
12 ∆ PISTON SEAL 4 AF540 AF540 AF540 AF540 AF540 AF540 AF540 AF540 AF540 AF540
13 PISTON ROD ASSEMBLY 2 AF561F AF561F AF561J AF561B AF561C AF561A AF561D AF561E AF561N AF561A
14 ∆ RIDER RING 2 AF595 AF595 AF595 AF595 AF595 AF595 AF595 AF595 AF595 AF595
15 KEY 1 AB136D AB136D AB136D AB136D AB136D AB136D AB136D AB136D AB136F AB136F
16 FAN/FAN ASSEMBLY 1 AF547 AF547 AF547 AF547 AF547 AF547 AF547 AF547 AF747 AF747
17 SHROUD 1 AF549 AF549 AF549 AF549 AF549 AF549 AF549 AF549 AF656 AF656
18 ∆ MANIFOLD SLEEVE 2 AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A
*** SERVICE KIT 1 K263 K263 K263 K263 K263 K263 K263 K263 K263 K263

Model 1VBF shown.

*** Item not shown.
∆ Denotes parts included in the Service Kit.
Parts listed are for stock models. For specific OEM models, please consult the factory.
When corresponding or ordering parts, please give complete model and serial numbers.
EXPLODED PRODUCT VIEW – MODEL 1VBF
PARTS & ORDERING INFORMATION

Please reference the exploded views on the next page for the following model and parts tables.

PAB – VAB SERIES

REF DESCRIPTION QTY PAB VAB

1 FILTER ASSEMBLY 1 B300A B300A

2∆ FELT 1 B344A B344A
3 SAFETY VALVE 1 AT517 –
4 CYLINDER HEAD 1 AF508 AF508
5∆ HEAD GASKET 1 AF518 AF518
6∆ OUTLET VALVE 1 AF531 AF531
7 PLATE VALVE 1 AF529 AF529
8∆ INLET VALVE 1 AF530 AF530
9∆ CYLINDER GASKET 1 AF519A AF519A
10 CYLINDER 1 AF510 AF510
11 ∆ PISTON RING 2 AF527 AF527
12 ∆ PISTON SEAL 2 AF526 AF526
13 ∆ RIDER RING 1 AF594 AF594
14 PISTON ROD ASSEMBLY 1 AF560B AF560B
15 PULLEY 1 AB140C AB140C
15A COUNTER WEIGHT 1 AF517B AF517B
16 FLAT KEY 1 AF524 AF524
17 FAN 1 AF533 AF533
18 SHROUD 1 AF534 AF534
*** SERVICE KIT 1 K264 K264

VBB – PCA-10 SERIES

REF DESCRIPTION QTY VBB VCD PBB PCA-10

1 FILTER ASSEMBLY 1 B300A B300A B300A B300F

2∆ FELT 2 B344A B344A B344A B344A
3 SAFETY VALVE 1 – – AT517 AT517C
4 CYLINDER HEAD 1 AF508 AF507 AF508 AF507
5∆ HEAD GASKET 1 AF518 AF520A AF518 AF520A
6∆ OUTLET VALVE 1 AF531 AF545 AF531 AF545
7 PLATE VALVE 1 AF529 AF543 AF529 AF543
8∆ INLET VALVE 1 AF530 AF544 AF530 AF544
9∆ CYLINDER GASKET 1 AF519A AF521 AF519A AF521
10 CYLINDER 1 AF510 AF509 AF510 AF509
11 ∆ PISTON RING 2 AF527 AF541 AF527 AF541
12 ∆ PISTON SEAL 2 AF526 AF540 AF526 AF540
13 PISTON ROD ASSEMBLY 1 AF560B AF561D AF560B AF561A
14 ∆ RIDER RING 1 AF594 AF595 AF594 AF595
15 PULLEY 1 AB140C AK670 AB140C AK670
16 FLAT KEY 1 AF524 AB136 AF524 AB136
17 FAN 1 AF533 AF547 AF533 AF661
18 SHROUD 1 AF535 AF549 AF535 AF656
19 MANIFOLD SLEEVE 2 AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A
*** SERVICE KIT 1 K260 K263 K260 K263

Models PAB and PBB shown.

** Item not shown.
∆ Denotes parts included in the Service Kit.
Parts listed are for stock models. For specific OEM models, please consult the factory.
When corresponding or ordering parts, please give complete model and serial numbers.
EXPLODED PRODUCT VIEWS – MODEL PAB (TOP) & MODEL PBB (BOTTOM)
PARTS & ORDERING INFORMATION

Please reference the exploded view on the next page for the following model and parts table.

5VDF – 8LDF SERIES

REF DESCRIPTION QTY 5VDF 5VSF 6LCF ** 6HDK 7LDE 7HDD 7HDE 8HDM 8HDN 8LDF

1 INLET FILTER ASSEMBLY2 B300F B300F

4 B300F B300A B300F B300A B300A B300F B300F B300F
2∆ FELT 2 B344A B344A
4 B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A B344A
3 SAFETY VALVE 1 – – AF720 AF720A AF720 AF720A AF720A AF720A AF720A AF720
4 CYLINDER HEAD 4/2 ** AF507 AF507 AF507 AF507 AF507 AF507 AF507 AF507 AF507 AF507
5∆ HEAD GASKET 4/2 ** AF520A AF520A AF520A AF520A AF520A AF520A AF520A AF520A AF520A AF520A
6∆ OUTLET VALVE 4/2 ** AF545 AF545 AF545 AF545 AF545 AF545 AF545 AF545 AF545 AF545
7 PLATE VALVE 4/2 ** AF543 AF543 AF543 AF543 AF543 AF543 AF543 AF543 AF543 AF543
8∆ INLET VALVE 4/2 ** AF544 AF544 AF544 AF544 AF544 AF544 AF544 AF544 AF544 AF544
9∆ CYLINDER GASKET 4/2 ** AF521 AF521 AF521 AF521 AF521 AF521 AF521 AF521 AF521 AF521
10 CYLINDER 4/2 ** AF509 AF509 AF509 AF509 AF509 AF509 AF509 AF509 AF509 AF509
11 ∆ PISTON RING 8/4 ** AF541 AF541 AF541 AF541 AF541 AF541 AF541 AF541 AF541 AF541
12 ∆ PISTON SEAL 8/4 ** AF540 AF540 AF540 AF540 AF540 AF540 AF540 AF540 AF540 AF540
13 PISTON ROD ASSEMBLY 4/2 ** AF561F AF561F AF561F AF561K AF561E AF561D AF561E AF561M AF561N AF561F
14 ∆ RIDER RING 4/2 ** AF595 AF595 AF595 AF595 AF595 AF595 AF595 AF595 AF595 AF595
15 MANIFOLD 1 AF659 AF659 – AF659 AF659 AF659 AF659 AF659 AF659 AF659
16 SQUARE KEY 2/1 ** AB136F AB136F AB136F AB136F AB136F AB136F AB136F AB136F AB136F AB136F
17 FAN/FAN ASSEMBLY-CCW 1 AF748 AF748 AF748 AF748 AF748 AF748 AF748 AF748 AF748 AF748
18 FAN ASSEMBLY-CW 1 AF747 AF747 AF747 AF747 AF747 AF747 AF747 AF747 AF747 AF747
19 SHROUD 2/1 ** AF656 AF656 AF656 AF656 AF656 AF656 AF656 AF656 AF656 AF656
20 MANIFOLD SLEEVE 2 – – AF567A – – – – – – –
20 MANIFOLD SLEEVE 5 AF567A AF567A – AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A AF567A
21 TANK ASSEMBLY 1 – – AF606-1 AF606-1 AF606-1 AF606-1 – AF606-1 AF606-1 –
22 MANIFOLD 2/1 ** AF550E AF550E AF550E AF550C AF550D AF550B AF550D AF550A AF550A AF550E
*** SERVICE KIT 1 K303 K303 K263 K303 K303 K303 K303 K303 K303 K303

Model 5VDF shown.

** 6LCF is a two-cylinder unit. Other models are four-cylinder units.
*** Item not shown.
∆ Denotes parts included in the Service Kit.
Parts listed are for stock models. For specific OEM models, please consult the factory.
When corresponding or ordering parts, please give complete model and serial numbers.
EXPLODED PRODUCT VIEW – MODEL 5VDF
WARRANTY

Gast finished products, when properly installed and operated under normal conditions of use, are warranted by Gast to
be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of purchase from
Gast or an authorized Gast Representative or Distributor. In order to obtain performance under this warranty, the buyer
must promptly (in no event later than thirty (30) days after discovery of the defect) give written notice of the defect to
Gast Manufacturing Incorporated, PO Box 97, Benton Harbor Michigan USA 49023-0097 or an authorized Service
Center (unless specifically agreed upon in writing signed by both parties or specified in writing as part of a Gast OEM
Quotation). Buyer is responsible for freight charges both to and from Gast in all cases.

This warranty does not apply to electric motors, electrical controls, and gasoline engines not supplied by Gast. Gast’s
warranties also do not extend to any goods or parts which have been subjected to misuse, lack of maintenance,
neglect, damage by accident or transit damage.

THIS EXPRESS WARRANTY EXCLUDES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS EXPRESSED OR

IMPLIED BY ANY LITERATURE, DATA, OR PERSON. GAST’S MAXIMUM LIABILITY UNDER THIS EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY SHALL NEVER EXCEED THE COST OF THE SUBJECT PRODUCT AND GAST RESERVES THE RIGHT,
AT ITS SOLE DISCRETION, TO REFUND THE PURCHASE PRICE IN LIEU OF REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT.

GAST WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND,
however arising, including but not limited to those for use of any products, loss of time, inconvenience, lost profit, labor
charges, or other incidental or consequential damages with respect to persons, business, or property, whether as a
result of breach of warranty, negligence or otherwise. Notwithstanding any other provision of this warranty, BUYER’S
REMEDY AGAINST GAST FOR GOODS SUPPLIED OR FOR NON-DELIVERED GOODS OR FAILURE TO FURNISH
GOODS, WHETHER OR NOT BASED ON NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR BREACH OF EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTY IS LIMITED SOLELY, AT GAST’S OPTION, TO REPLACEMENT OF OR CURE OF SUCH
NONCONFORMING OR NON-DELIVERED GOODS OR RETURN OF THE PURCHASE PRICE FOR SUCH GOODS
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL EXCEED THE PRICE OR CHARGE FOR SUCH GOODS. GAST EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE OR PURPOSE WITH
RESPECT TO THE GOODS SOLD. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTIONS
SET FORTH IN THIS WARRANTY, notwithstanding any knowledge of Gast regarding the use or uses intended to be
made of goods, proposed changes or additions to goods, or any assistance or suggestions that may have been made
by Gast personnel.

Unauthorized extensions of warranties by the customer shall remain the customer’s responsibility.

CUSTOMER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR DETERMINING THE SUITABILITY OF GAST PRODUCTS FOR CUSTOMER’S
USE OR RESALE, OR FOR INCORPORATING THEM INTO OBJECTS OR APPLICATIONS WHICH CUSTOMER
DESIGNS, ASSEMBLES, CONSTRUCTS OR MANUFACTURES.

This warranty can be modified only by authorized Gast personnel by signing a specific, written description of any
modifications.

MAINTENANCE RECORD

DATE PROCEDURE PERFORMED

MAINTENANCE RECORD

DATE PROCEDURE PERFORMED

PART NO. 70 - 2100 G441PL (REV-K)

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

Low High Pump Motor Excess Reason and remedy

Vacuum Pressure Vacuum Pressure Overheat Overload Noise for problem.

• • • • Filter dirty. Clean or replace.

• At pump • • • Muffler dirty. Clean or replace.

• • • Valves dirty or valves bent.

Clean or replace.

• • • Damaged or worn piston rings.

Repair or replace.

• • • Leaky relief valve.

Inspect and adjust.

• • • Damaged valves.
Replace.

• At pump • • • • Plugged vacuum/pressure line.

Inspect and repair.

• • • • Low voltage, won’t start.

Check power source.

• • • Worn rings/piston hitting cylinder.

Replace.

• • • • Cylinder misadjustment.
Realign.

• • • Leaky hose or check valve.

Replace.

• • • • • Dirt or liquid on top of piston.

Inspect and clean.

• • • Blown head gasket.

Replace.

inc.

ISO 9001 & 14001 CERTIFIED www.gastmfg.com

 TF 320 Cat. No. 25678
TF 335 Cat. No. 25680
TF 300XE/4 TF 340
TF 346
Cat. No. 25681
Cat. No. 25679

Mast Series TF 350

TF 355
Cat. No. 25682
Cat. No. 25683

INSTALLER : Please pass this handbook to User.

INSTALLATEUR : Gelieve dit handboek aan de gebruiker te overhandigen.
INSTALLATEUR : Ce manuel doit être donné à l'utilisateur.
MONTEUR : Bitte überreichen Sie diese Bedienungsanleitung dem Anwender.

INSTRUCTION BOOK
HANDLEIDING
MANUEL D'INSTRUCTIONS
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
Damage to the equipment resulting from inadequate packing for the return journey is not covered by this Guarantee.
Schade aangebracht aan het materiaal tijdens de terugzending omwille van slechte verpakking is niet in deze Garantie inbegrepen.
Si le matériel est endommagé pendant le transport au retour à la fabrique Teklite à cause d'un emballage mauvais fait, cette Garantie ne reste plus valable.
Material, das wegen ungenügender Verpackung auf dem Rücktransport zu uns ins Werk beschädigt wurde, ist durch die Garantie nicht gedeckt.

GUARANTEE
All Teklite equipment is unquestionably guaranteed to be free from defects in
materials, workmanship and function as defined by us when supplied.
We therefore undertake to replace, or repair as necessary, any equipment
which proves to be faulty in any of these respects provided that no modifica-
tions or repairs have been made without our knowledge and written consent
and that installation has been carried out in a manner approved by us. The
period of this guarantee is 2 year from supply. However, because it is Teklite
Policy to maintain a sincere interest in all its equipment, for an indefinite
period after purchase, our customers are assured of sympathetic attention to
all problems and complaints, no matter when they occur.
In the event of a claim under this Guarantee being made, we will carry out
the work at our Works and will redespatch at our expense and by our choice
of means, to any part of the world. We cannot accept responsibility for the
cost of any labour expended, return transport or any consequential loss
incurred by the customer due to the defect, real or alleged. Damage to the
equipment resulting from inadequate packing for the return journey is not
covered by this Guarantee.
We regret that the terms of this Guarantee can only be modified or extended
by our agreement in writing before the goods concerned leave our Works.
In brief it is our desire to be of assistance and provide a prompt and cheerful
service at all times so that our relationship with our customers shall be happy
and mutually advantageous.
Inspection of equipment ordered
All inspection in our works is to the standards ISO 9001:2000. Certificates
of Conformity may normally be issued whenever requested.
In all cases where a customer wishes to personally inspect equipment before
acceptance, inspection must be carried out at our works of manufacture by
the customer or his representative. Packing standards may also be inspected
at the same time.
In the event of a claim under guarantee, please inform Clark Masts Teksam NV :
1. Serial No. of equipment. 2. Date of Supply.
3. Name and address of supplier.
WAARBORG
Alle Teklite producten zijn bij levering gegarandeerd vrij van materiaaldefecten
en fabricagefouten en werken volgens onze specificaties.
Daarom verbinden wij ons, indien nodig, tot het vervangen of herstellen van
de hierboven vermelde gebreken en dit gedurende een garantietermijn van
2 jaar na levering, op voorwaarde dat geen wijzigingen of herstellingen zonder
ons medeweten en schriftelijke goedkeuring werden uitgevoerd en dat de
uitgevoerde installatie door ons goedgekeurd werd. Door onze blijvende
interesse in de dienst na verkoop zijn alle klanten steeds verzekerd van een
goede klachtenbehandeling voor ieder probleem.
In geval van een klacht onder garantie wordt de herstelling in onze werk-
plaatsen uitgevoerd en terug verzonden volgens onze keuze van transport en
dit geheel kosteloos. Wij zijn echter niet verantwoordelijk voor ontstane
kosten, zoals werkuren, transport naar onze werkplaatsen of andere kosten,
die de klant zou hebben geleden omwille van het defect. Schade die werd
opgelopen tijdens het transport naar onze werkplaatsen omwille van een
slechte verpakking is niet vervat in onze garantie.
Tot onze spijt kunnen enkel de garantievoorwaarden gewijzigd of uitgebreid
worden na ons schriftelijk akkoord en dit vóór verzending van de goederen.
Uiteindelijk wensen wij onze klanten een snelle en klantvriendelijke dienst-
verlening te verzekeren, zodat de klantenrelatie er wel bij vaart en iedere
partij er baat bij heeft.
Inspectie van bestelde goederen
De inspectie gebeurt in onze fabrieken volgens de ISO norm 9001:2000.
Gelijkvormigheidsattesten kunnen gewoon op aanvraag uitgegeven worden.
Wanneer een klant de goederen persoonlijk wenst te inspecteren vóór aan-
vaarding, gebeurt de inspectie in onze productieafdeling door de klant zelf of
zijn vertegenwoordiger. De verpakkingsnormen kunnen op hetzelfde
ogenblik geïnspecteerd worden.
In geval van een vordering onder waarborg, gelieve Clark Masts Teksam NV
te informeren :
1. Serienummer van uitrusting. 2. Datum van levering.
3. Naam en adres van leverancier.

GARANTIE
Tous les produits fabriqués par Teklite sont garantis d'être sans défauts de
fabrication, main-d'œuvre et fonction.
Teklite s'engage à remplacer ou réparer gratuitement, si nécessaire, toute
marchandise agréée d'être défectueuse sans contestation à condition
qu'aucune modification ou réparation n'a pas été faite à notre insu ou sans
notre approbation par écrite et que l'installation a été approuvée par nous.
Avec notre intérêt continu dans le service après-vente on assure tous nos
clients qu'on est tout oreilles pour quelconque problème.
La période de garantie est 2 ans à partir de la date de livraison au client.
Pour toute réclamation sous notre garantie, chaque réparation ou remplace-
ment sera fait dans nos usines et sera renvoyé selon notre choix de transport
et complètement gratuit. Pourtant nous ne sommes pas responsable pour
des frais, tels que les heures de travail, transport à nos usines ou d'autres
frais, que le client a subi à cause du défaut. Teklite n'est pas responsable si
le matériel en retour est endommagé à cause d'un mauvais emballage.
Les conditions de garantie peuvent seulement être modifiées ou étendues
après avoir reçu notre approbation par écrit et ceci avant l'envoi des
marchandises.
En tout cas nous garantissons nos clients un service après-vente rapide et
impeccable au bénéfice de toutes parties.
Inspection de produits commandés
L'inspection dans nos usines est certifiée ISO 9001:2000. Des certificats de
conformité peuvent normalement être délivrés sur demande.
Dans tous les cas, quand un client souhaite inspecter personellement les
produits avant acceptation, l'inspection doit être effectuée dans nos usines
de fabrication par le client ou son représentant. Les normes d'emballage
peuvent être inspectées en même temps.
En cas d'une réclamation sous garantie, veuillez informer
Clark Masts Teksam NV :
1. Numéro de série de l'équipement.
2. Date de livraison.
3. Nom et adresse du fournisseur.
All details given in this publication are approximate and may be subject to change without notice.
Alle gegevens in deze uitgave zijn benaderend en kunnen zonder voorafgaande verwittiging gewijzigd worden.
Les détails donnés dans cette notice sont approximatifs et peuvent être modifiés sans avis.
Alle Angaben in dieser Broschüre sind Ungefährwerte und sie können zu jeder Zeit ohne vorherige Information geändert werden.
GEWÄHRLEISTUNG
Wir garantieren, dass alle Teklite-Ausrüstungen bezüglich Material, Ausführung
und Funktion ohne Mängel sind.
Wir verpflichten uns daher, alle Teile zu ersetzen oder zu reparieren, die
einen Defekt in dieser Hinsicht aufweisen. Voraussetzung hierfür ist, dass
keine Änderungen oder Reparaturen ohne unser Wissen und schriftlichem
Einverständnis vorgenommen worden sind und dass die Installation auf eine
von uns genehmigte Weise erfolgte. Die Garantiezeit beträgt 2 Jahre ab
Lieferdatum. Schäden oder Störungen, die auf falsche Bedienung, Gewalt-
anwendung oder natürlichen Verschleiss zurückzuführen sind, werden
durch die Garantie nicht gedeckt. Unsere Kunden können versichert sein,
dass wir jederzeit ein offenes Ohr für Beanstandungen und Probleme haben,
egal nach welcher Zeit diese erscheinen sollten.
Bei Auftreten eines Fehlers während der Garantiezeit wird dieser in unserem
Werk behoben. Die Kosten des Rücktransports gehen zu Lasten des
Kunden. Material, das wegen ungenügender Verpackung auf dem Rück-
transport zu uns ins Werk beschädigt wurde, ist durch die Garantie nicht
gedeckt. Wir haften nicht für Folgeansprüche.
Die Bedingungen unserer Garantie können nur vor Auslieferung der Waren
und durch schriftliche Vereinbarung mit uns modifiziert oder ergänzt werden.
Alles in allem ist es unser Anliegen, unseren Kunden jederzeit behilflich zu
sein und unseren vollen Service zuzusichern, so dass sich eine für beide
Seiten positive Partnerschaft bilden kann.
Kontrolle von bestellten Waren
Alle Kontrollen in unserer Fabrik sind konform mit ISO Normen 9001:2000.
Die Übereinstimmungszertifikate können normalerweise auf Anfrage her-
ausgegeben werden.
Wenn Sie die Waren gerne persönlich inspizieren möchten, können Sie oder
Ihr Vertreter dies gerne in unserem Fertigungswerk vornehmen. Auch die
Einhaltung der Verpackungsnormen können Sie kontrollieren.
Im Falle einer Forderung unter Garantie, bitte informieren Sie
Clark Masts Teksam NV :
1. Serienummer des Materials. 2. Lieferdatum.
3. Name und Adresse des Lieferanten.

TEKLITE, Division of CLARK MASTS TEKSAM NV, Woudstraat 21, B-3600 Genk, Belgium
Tel : +32 (0)89 38 44 72 - Fax : +32 (0)89 38 61 41 - E-mail : info@teksam.be - Website : www.teklite.com

2
SPECIFICATION AND MAST DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIE EN AFMETINGEN VAN DE MASTEN
SPECIFICATION ET DIMENSIONS DES MATS
SPEZIFIKATION UND DIMENSIONEN DER MASTE

TYPE XE/4 TF 320 TF 335 TF 340 TF 346 TF 350 TF 355

Cat. No. 25678 25680 25681 25679 25682 25683

Internal cable
Interne kabel
Câble d'alimentation 13 x 0,5 mm2 + 2 x 0,75 mm2 + 5 x 1,5 mm2
Innenverkabelung
Max. current per 2 cores
Max. stroom per 2 aders 2,5 amp / 6 amp / 16 amp
TF 320 : 2,44 m / TF 335 : 3,74 m / TF 340 : 4,24 m / TF 346 : 4,89 m / TF 350 : 5,29 m / TF 355 : 5,75 m

Courant max. par 2 conducteurs

Max. Strom pro Doppel-Ader
Max. top load
Max. koplast 30 kg 30 kg 30 kg 30 kg 30 kg 30 kg
Charge de tête max.
Max. Kopfbelastung
Weight of mast + robot head
Gewicht van mast + D&K
Poids du mât + positionneur 21 kg 24 kg 25 kg 26 kg 27 kg 28 kg
Gewicht des Mastes + S&N
Max. operating air pressure
Max. luchtdruk 1.8 kg/cm2
Pression d'air maximum
Max. Druckluft
Max. windspeed allowable
Max. windsnelheid
Vitesse de vent maximum 120 km/h
Max. Windgeschwindigkeit

110 ROBOT HEAD / DRAAI- & KANTELEENHEID

POSITIONNEUR / SCHWENK- & NEIGEKOPF
Description / Omschrijving
330 Cat. No.
Description / Bezeichnung

25592 12 Volt Robot Head

TF 350 : 2030 mm / TF 355 : 2190 mm / /
TF 320 : 1260 mm / TF 335 : 1650 mm /
TF 340 : 1770 mm / TF 346 : 1930 mm /

25593 24 Volt Robot Head

NOTES / NOTA'S / NOTES / NOTIZEN

A. Air inlet / Luchtingang /

Entrée d'air / Lufteintritt.
B. Waterdrain and safety valve /
Overdruk- en afwateringsventiel /
Soupape de sécurité/vidange /
Sicherheits- und Wasserablassventil.
C. 5 metre multi-core cable /
5 meter meeraderige kabel /
5 mètres de câble à plusieurs conducteurs /
5 Meter mehradriges Kabel.

74 4 x ø8,5

BASE FIXATION /
ONDERSTE BEVESTIGING /
A B 90
FIXATION INFERIEURE /
5m BASIS BEFESTIGUNG
C

3
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
MONTAGE-INSTRUCTIES
INSTRUCTIONS DE MONTAGE
MONTAGEANLEITUNG

INTERNALLY MOUNTED / MONTAGE BINNENZIJDE / MONTAGE INTERIEUR / INNEN-INSTALLATION

Warning Switch / Waarschuwingsschakelaar /

Interrupteur d’avertissement / Warnschalter
Cat. No. 27623
1. Choose a position in vehicle where the roof is flat.
2. Cut hole in roof ø120 mm. Roof bearing / Dakdoorgang /
Traversée de toit / Dachlager
3. Follow instructions supplied with roof bearing
Cat. No. 27623. DIMENSIONS / AFMETINGEN /
DIMENSIONS / ABMESSUNGEN
1. Kies een plaats in het voertuig waar het dak vlak is.

TF 346 : 1000 mm min., 1470 mm max.

TF 350 : 1050 mm min., 1570 mm max.
TF 355 : 1100 mm min., 1730 mm max.
TF 335 : 850 mm min., 1190 mm max.
TF 340 : 900 mm min., 1310 mm max.
TF 320 : 650 mm min., 800 mm max.
2. Maak een opening van ø120 mm.
3. Volg de instructies die samen met dakdoorgang
Cat. Nr. 27623 verschaft worden.

1. Choisir un espace dans le véhicule où le toit est plan.

ROOF DRILLING / DAKBORING /
2. Couper un trou de ø120 mm.
PERÇAGE DE TOIT / DACHBOHRUNG
3. Suivre les instructions fournies avec la traversée de
toit Cat. No. 27623.

1. Suchen Sie einen Platz aus, wo das Fahrzeugdach

eben ist.
2. Schneiden Sie ein Loch von ø120 mm aus.
3. Folgen Sie den Instruktionen, wie bei Dachlager
Kat. Nr. 27623 angegeben.

Air Inlet /
Luchtingang / ø9.5
Entrée d'air /
Lufteintritt
105

EXTERNALLY MOUNTED / MONTAGE BUITENZIJDE / MONTAGE EXTERIEUR / AUSSEN-INSTALLATION

90
4 x ø9
1. Choose a flat vertical surface on the vehicle body.
2. Check that the place will allow the fixing of the upper
and lower mounting brackets as shown in sketch.
3. Attach brackets and fit the mast according to the
60

84

Warning Switch / Waarschuwingsschakelaar /

instructions supplied with the brackets.

Interrupteur d’avertissement / Warnschalter

1. Kies een vlakke plaats op de carrosserie van de wagen. 122

2. Controleer of deze plaats het monteren van bovenste
en onderste bevestigingen toelaat zoals aangeduid op Cat. No. 16682
de schets.
Upper Mounting Bracket /
3. Monteer de bevestigingsstukken en installeer de mast
TF 346 : 1500 mm max., 1000 mm min.
TF 350 : 1600 mm max., 1050 mm min.
TF 355 : 1770 mm max., 1100 mm min.

Bovenste bevestiging /
TF 335 : 1220 mm max., 850 mm min.
TF 340 : 1340 mm max., 900 mm min.

volgens de bijgeleverde instructies.

TF 320 : 830 mm max., 650 mm min.

Support supérieur /
Obere Befestigung mit Lager
1. Choisir une surface verticale plane sur la carrosserie
du véhicule. Cat. No. 16686
2. Contrôler si cette place permet de fixer des supports Lower Mounting Bracket /
supérieurs et inférieurs, comme indiqué sur croquis. Onderste bevestiging /
3. Monter les pièces de fixation et installer le mât Support inférieur /
suivant les instructions fournies. Untere Befestigung

116
1. Suchen Sie einen flachen vertikalen Platz an der
Karosserie des Fahrzeuges.
2. Kontrollieren Sie, ob dieser Platz die Montage der
oberen und unteren Befestigung ermöglicht, wie auf
60

85

der Skizze abgebildet.

3. Montieren Sie die Befestigungsstücke und installieren
Sie den Mast, den Instruktionen entsprechend.
90
4 x ø9 110

4
POWER AND CONTROL
VOEDING EN BEDIENING
ALIMENTATION ET CONTROLE
DRUCKLUFTVERSORGUNG UND BEDIENUNG

USING VEHICLE BATTERY / BIJ GEBRUIK VAN VOERTUIGBATTERIJ /

Qty
EN UTILISANT LA BATTERIE DU VEHICULE / VERWENDUNG DER FAHRZEUGBATTERIE
Aantal
Item Cat. Description / Omschrijving / Qté
Pos. No. Description / Bezeichnung Anzahl

1 33652 Compressor / Compressor /

(12V) Compresseur / Kompressor 1
33653
(24V)
2 B9189 Air Hose / Luchtslang / Tuyau d'air /
Druckluftschlauch ø 8 1
3 B9190 Hose Clip / Slangklemmen /
Collier de serrage / Schlauchklemmen 2
4 Mast / Mât TF 300XE 1
5 27715 Control/Junction Unit / Sturingseenheid
(12V) Unité de jonction/contrôle /
27716 Steuerungseinheit 1
(24V)

USING VEHICLE AIR PRESSURE SYSTEM / BIJ GEBRUIK VAN VOERTUIG LUCHTDRUKSYSTEEM /
EN UTILISANT LE SYSTEME D'AIR DU VEHICULE / VERWENDUNG DES FAHRZEUGDRUCKLUFTSYSTEMS
Qty
Aantal
Item Cat. Description / Omschrijving / Qté
Pos. No. Description / Bezeichnung Anzahl

1 25578 Air pressure Regulator Box /

(12V) Drukreduceerventiel en
25579 Bedieningsventiel /
(24V) Régulateur de pression et
Vanne de commande /
Druckreduzierventil und Steuerventil 1
2 B31089 Air Hose / Luchtslang / Tuyau de l'air /
Druckluftschlauch ø 8 1
3 Mast / Mât TF 300XE 1
4 27715 Control/Junction Unit / Sturingseenheid
(12V) Unité de jonction/contrôle /
27716 Steuerungseinheit 1
(24V)

Qty
Aantal
Item Cat. Description / Omschrijving / Qté
Pos. No. Description / Bezeichnung Anzahl

1 27838 Air pressure valve kit /

(12V) Luchtdruk ventiel kit /
27839 Kit de valve pression d’air /
(24V) Druckreguliererventil-Kit 1
2 B31089 Air Hose / Luchtslang / Tuyau de l'air /
Druckluftschlauch ø 8 1
3 Mast / Mât TF 300XE 1
4 27715 Control/Junction Unit / Sturingseenheid
(12V) Unité de jonction/contrôle /
27716 Steuerungseinheit 1
(24V)

• Remote Control : see “Installation and Operation Instructions”

• Afstandsbediening : zie “Installatie- en bedieningsinstructies”
• Commande à distance : voir “Instructions d’installation et d’utilisation”
• Fernbedienung : siehe “Installations- und Bedienungsanleitung”

5
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ROBOT HEAD (TOP CONNECTION BOX)
ELEKTRISCH SCHEMA DRAAI- & KANTELEENHEID
SCHEMA DES RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES DU POSITIONNEUR
DER ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLUSS DES SCHWENK- & NEIGEKOPFES

(3)

(2)
(1)
(4)
• All TF 300XE masts are equipped with 13 x 0,5 mm2 + 2 x 0,75 mm2 + 5 x 1,5 mm2 spiral cable, class II approved.
• Alle TF 300XE masten zijn met een 13 x 0,5 mm2 + 2 x 0,75 mm2 + 5 x 1,5 mm2 spiraalkabel uitgerust, klasse II goedgekeurd.
• Les mâts TF 300XE sont fournis d'un câble spiralé de 13 x 0,5 mm2 + 2 x 0,75 mm2 + 5 x 1,5 mm2, certification classe II.
• TF 300XE Masten werden mit einem 13 x 0,5 mm2 + 2 x 0,75 mm2 + 5 x 1,5 mm2 Spiralkabel geliefert, Klasse II geprüft.

6
NOTES
NOTA'S
NOTES
NOTIZEN
(1) The masts are double insulated. To maintain double insulation
in the system, double insulated lamps Class II should be
used.
(2) All masts are equipped with a 13 x 0,5 mm2 + 2 x 0,75 mm2
+ 5 x 1,5 mm2 internal spiral cable.
The black wires (1,5 mm2) numbered from 1-4 can be used
for 12/24 or 230 volt power supply, with a maximum current of
10 amps per 2 cores.
The yellow/green wire (1,5 mm2) is used for earth connection.
The red and blue wire (0,75 mm2) are foreseen for a beacon
(optional).
The black wires (0,5 mm2) numbered from 1-13 are used for
the internal wiring. zou verbinding 8 aan de
massa- aansluitpunten van 220 volt schijnwerpers aangeslot
(3) Externally mounted mast extension warning switch.
(standard)
(4) Beacon (optional)
(1) Ces mâts sont doublement isolés. Pour maintenir le système
en double isolation, il faut utiliser des lampes à double
isolation (Classe II).
(2) Tous les mâts sont équipés d'un câble spiralé interne de
13 x 0,5 mm2 + 2 x 0,75 mm2 + 5 x 1,5 mm2.
Les fils noirs (1,5 mm2) numérotés de 1-4 peuvent être utilisés
pour une alimentation de 12/24 ou 230 volts, avec un courant
maximum de 10 ampère pour 2 conducteurs.
Le fil jaune/vert (1,5 mm2) est utilisé pour la mise à la terre.
Le fil rouge et bleu (0,75 mm2) sont prévus pour un gyrophare
(optionnel).
Les fils noirs (0,5 mm2) numérotés de 1-13 sont utilisés pour
le câblage interne.
(3) Interrupteur d’avertissement externe (standard)
(4) Gyrophare (optionnel)
7
(1) Deze masten zijn dubbel geïsoleerd. Om het geheel dubbel
geïsoleerd te houden zouden er dubbel geïsoleerde
schijnwerpers (Klasse II) gebruikt moeten worden.
(2) Alle masten zijn uitgerust met een 13 x 0,5 mm2 +
2 x 0,75 mm2 + 5 x 1,5 mm2 inwendige spiraalkabel.
De zwarte draden (1,5 mm2) genummerd van 1-4 kunnen
gebruikt worden voor 12/24 of 230 volt voeding voor
verlichting, met een maximum van 10 A per 2 aders.
De geel/groene draad (1,5 mm2) is aarding.
De rode en de blauwe draad (0,75 mm2) zijn voorzien voor
een zwaailicht (optioneel).
De zwarte draden (0,5 mm2) genummerd van 1-13 worden
gebruikt voor de interne bedrading.
(3) Externe waarschuwingsschakelaar (standaard)
(4) Zwaailicht (optioneel)
(1) Die Maste sind doppelt schutzisoliert. Zur Aufrechterhaltung
der Schutzisolierung des Mastes, müssen auch schutz-
isolierte Scheinwerfer (Klasse II) installiert werden.
(2) Alle Maste sind standardmässig mit einem innenliegenden
Spiralkabel (13 x 0,5 mm2 + 2 x 0,75 mm2 + 5 x 1,5 mm2)
ausgestattet.
Die nummerierten schwarzen Adern von 1-4 können für
12/24 Volt Gleichstrom oder 230 Volt Wechselstrom
verwendet werden, mit maximum 10 Ampère für 2 Adern.
Die gelbe/grüne Ader (1,5 mm2) ist für die Erdung.
Die rote und blaue Ader (0,75 mm2) können für die
Rundumkennleuchte (optional) verwendet werden.
Die nummerierten schwarzen Adern (0,5 mm2) von 1-13
werden für die interne Verdrahtung verwendet.
(3) Am Mast angebauter Ausfahrwarnschalter (Standard)
(4) Rundumkennleuchte (optional)
INSTALLATION ADJUSTMENT NOTES TO SAVE POWER
INSTELLINGSNOTA'S VOOR BESPARING VAN STROOM OF LUCHT
NOTES DE REGLAGE POUR CONSERVER LA BATTERIE OU L'AIR
REGULIERUNGSNOTIZEN ZUM MINIMALVERBRAUCH VON STROM UND LUFT

1. When a compressor is the source of air, the pressure 2. When the source of air is the vehicle brake system,
switch in the unit should be adjusted to cut out approx. adjust the secondary air pressure regulator to approx.
5 seconds after full extension of mast with lamps.seconx- 0,2 bar higher than necessary for full extension of mast
tension with lamps.

1. Indien de bron van perslucht een compressor is,
regel de drukschakelaar zodat de compressor ongeveer
5 seconden na het volledig uitschuiven van de mast met
de schijnwerpers uitgeschakeld wordt.olleeschakeld
wordt.dig uit
2. Indien de bron van perslucht het voertuig luchtdruksysteem
is, regel de drukregelaar totdat de secundaire druk
ongeveer 0,2 bar hoger is dan de minimale druk die
vereist is om de mast met de schijnwerpers volledig uit
te schuiven.

1. Si un compresseur est la source d'air comprimée,
il faut régler l'interrupteur d’avertissement afin d'arrêter
le compresseur dans environ 5 secondes après le
déploiement complète du mât avec les lampes.en plus
haute que celle nécessaire à ériger complètavec les lam
2. Si l'air comprimé est fourni par le système d’air du
véhicule, il faut régler le régulateur de pression jusque la
pression de l'air secondaire est 0,2 bar plus haute que
celle nécessaire pour déployer complètement le mât
avec les lampes.

1. Wenn die Druckluftquelle ein Kompressor ist, 2. Wenn die Druckluftquelle das Fahrzeugsystem ist, regeln
regeln Sie den Druckschalter so, dass der Kompressor Sie das Druckreduzierventil bis der Sekundärdruck
ungefähr 5 Sekunden nachdem der Mast mit Lampen ungefähr 0,2 bar höher ist als der Druck, der benötigt
voll ausgefahren ist, ausgeschaltet wird. wird um den Mast mit Lampen voll auszufahren.

IMPORTANT SAFETY PROCEDURES - MASTS TYPE TF 300XE

BELANGRIJKE VEILIGHEIDSVOORSCHRIFTEN - MASTTYPES TF 300XE
PRESCRIPTIONS DE SECURITE IMPORTANTES - MATS TYPE TF 300XE
WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE - MASTTYP TF 300XE

WARNING
The user of the mast must be aware of the following instructions concerning the safe use of the mast.

1. The mast must be mounted in a correct manner with good workmanship throughout using only the correct Teklite mounting accessories.
2. The mast must not be used for lifting persons, animals or anything other than the apparatus for which it has been designed without the written approval of
Teklite.
3. The mast must not be extended under or in the proximity of any electricity cable or other overhead obstructions.
4. A vehicle or trailer which is fitted with a mast must not be moved if any part of the mast is extended. To prevent inadvertent extension of the mast during
travelling, the water drain valve in the mast or mast system must be open.
5. The maximum operating air pressure permitted in the mast is 1,8 bar. If the mast has not been used for a period, the water drain/safety valve should be
exercised before air pressure is introduced into the mast. When air is taken from a reservoir, an air pressure regulator must be fitted between the air
source and the mast or mast control valve, adjusted so that the outlet air pressure is limited to 1,8 bar maximum.
6. The headload applied to the mast must not exceed the maximum given in the mast handbook.
7. The maximum current specified in the handbook for the internal or external cable supplied with the mast must not be exceeded.
8. Never remove connection box covers when the mast is in use. Call a qualified electrician.
9. Repair, maintenance or adjustment may only be carried out when all electrical apparatus has been isolated, the mast retracted with no residual air pressure
and air supply disconnected.
10. The mast must not be extended in a wind speed greater than the maximum specified in the handbook.
11. The mast must not be operated by any unauthorised person.
12. The mast must not be used for any purpose other than that for which it was designed as published in the manufacturer's sales literature.

8
OPGELET
De persoon die het bedienen van de mast tot taak heeft, moet zeker op de hoogte zijn van de hierna volgende instructies betreffende
het veilige gebruik van de mast.

1. De montage van de mast moet op een correcte manier uitgevoerd worden met goed vakmanschap, d.w.z. stevige opbouw in functie van de toepassing
met de standaard aangeboden Teklite bevestigingstoebehoren.
2. De mast is enkel te gebruiken voor toepassingen waarvoor ze ontwikkeld is. In geen enkel geval mag deze gebruikt worden voor het tillen van personen,
dieren of andere vreemde voorwerpen die niet door Teklite schriftelijk aanvaard werden.
3. Gelieve altijd voor het in- en uitschuiven van de mast te kijken of er zich geen elektriciteitskabels of obstakels boven het verlichtingssysteem bevinden.
De ruimte boven het verlichtingssyteem moet altijd vrij zijn.
4. Verplaatsen van het voertuig of aanhangwagen waarin de mast is ingebouwd, mag enkel indien, na controle, de mast op een correcte manier weer
volledig ingeschoven is ; dit wil tevens zeggen dat het afwateringsventiel geopend moet worden nadat de mast volledig ingeschoven is.
5. De maximaal toegelaten werkdruk in de mast is 1,8 bar. Indien de mast een periode niet gebruikt wordt, controleer dan eerst het overdruk- en
afwateringsventiel vooraleer de mast onder druk gezet wordt. Indien de mast wordt gekoppeld aan het remluchtdruksysteem van het voertuig, dan moet
de druk gereduceerd worden tot beneden de hierboven vermelde maximale werkdruk.
6. Het maximaal toegelaten gewicht van voorwerpen op de mast mag de voorgeschreven koplast, zoals in het handboek beschreven, niet overschrijden.
7. De nominale stroom per ader door de intern of extern toegevoegde kabel mag nooit de maximale stroom, zoals beschreven in het handboek, overschrijden.
8. Open nooit de mast of de aansluitdozen ervan indien deze in gebruik is. Doe beroep op een gekwalificeerde elektricien.
9. Herstellingen of onderhoudswerkzaamheden mogen enkel gebeuren indien de stroom- en persluchtvoorzieningen losgekoppeld zijn.
10. De mast mag enkel gebruikt worden indien de windsnelheid niet de maximaal toelaatbare windsnelheid, zoals in het handboek gespecificeerd, overschrijdt.
11. De mast mag enkel in- en uitgeschoven worden door personen die hiertoe bevoegd zijn.
12. Tenslotte willen we er nogmaals op wijzen dat de mast enkel gebruikt mag worden voor de toepassingen waarvoor ze dient, zoals gepubliceerd in de
documentatie van de fabrikant.

ATTENTION
Pour des raisons de sécurité, l'utilisateur doit être au courant de toutes les instructions ci-écrites avant l’emploi du mât.

1. Le mât doit être monté d’une façon professionnelle en utilisant uniquement les accessoires corrects de Teklite.
2. Le mât ne doit jamais être employé pour soulever des personnes, des animaux ou n'importe quoi sauf les charges pour lequel il a été conçu ou qui ont
été approuvées par écrit par Teklite.
3. Avant de déployer ou rétracter le mât, vérifiez toujours qu’il n’y a pas d’obstacle ou des câbles au-dessus de l’unité de robot d’éclairage.
L’espace au-dessus du robot d’éclairage doit être libre.
4. Aucun véhicule ou remorque, équipé d'un mât ne doit être déplacé si le mât est déployé, même partiellement. La valve de sécurité doit rester ouverte
pendant les déplacements pour empêcher le déploiement involontaire.
5. La pression maximum permise dans le mât est 1,8 bar. Si le mât a été hors service pour une certaine période, il faut ouvrir et fermer la valve de sécurité
plusieurs fois avant de remettre en service. Quand la pression d'air est fournie d'un réservoir, il faut avoir un régulateur de pression entre la source et le
mât ou la vanne de commande pour limiter la pression introduite dans le mât à 1,8 bar maximum.
6. La charge de la tête du mât ne doit pas surpasser le maximum spécifié dans le manuel.
7. Le courant dans les conducteurs du câble intérieur ou extérieur ne doit pas surpasser le maximum spécifié dans le manuel.
8. Ne jamais ouvrir les boîtes de branchements quand le mât est en fonction. Appelez un électricien qualifié.
9. Les réparations, l'entretien ou le réglage peuvent seulement être effectués quand le mât soit débranché, rétracté, sans pression d’air et quand la source
de pression soit débranchée.
10. Le mât ne doit pas être déployé dans une vitesse de vent supérieure au maximum spécifié dans le manuel.
11. Le mât ne doit être employé que par des personnes qualifiées.
12. Le mât ne doit être employé que pour les applications pour lequel il a été conçu comme spécifié dans la documentation du fabricant.

WARNUNG
Das Bedienungspersonal muss mit dieser Bedienungsanleitung vertraut sein, um eine sichere Handhabung des Mastes zu
gewährleisten.

1. Der Mast muss vorschriftsmässig und von entsprechendem Fachpersonal ( KFZ-Schlosser ) mit den dafür vorgesehenen Teklite-Zubehörteilen sicher
befestigt sein.
2. Der Mast darf nur zum Anheben von Beleuchtungs- und Signaleinrichtungen verwendet werden. Jede nicht bestimmungsgemässe Verwendung,
insbesondere die Beförderung von Personen oder Tieren ist verboten, da dies unvorhersehbare Gefahren birgt. Vor einer anderweitigen Verwendung ist
der Hersteller zu konsultieren, der nach Prüfung eine gesonderte Betriebsbescheinigung ausstellen kann.
3. Bevor der Mast aus- oder eingefahren wird, überprüfen Sie unbedingt den Raum über der Beleuchtungseinheit. Dieser muss frei sein von stromführenden
Leitungen und/oder Hindernissen jeglicher Art.
4. Maste, die an beweglichen / stationären Fahrzeugen oder Geräten befestigt sind, dürfen nur im Stillstand ausgefahren werden und auch nur im Stillstand
des Fahrzeuges oder Gerätes, im ausgefahrenen Zustand sein ! Während des bewegens des Fahrzeuges oder Gerätes, an dem der Mast befestigt ist,
muss das Sicherheits- und Wasserablassventil am Mastfuss geöffnet sein.
5. Die maximale Druckluft zum Betreiben des Mastes beträgt 1,8 bar. Kam der Mast für eine gewisse Zeit nicht zum Einsatz, muss das Überdruck- /
Wasserablassventil betätigt werden, bevor der Mast ausgefahren wird. Wenn der Mast mit Druckluft aus einem Behälter eingespeist wird, muss ein
Druckminderer vorgeschaltet werden, um die Druckluft auf maximal 1,8 bar zu begrenzen.
6. Die Kopflast darf nicht die im Handbuch angegebenen Maximumwerte überschreiten.
7. Der Anschluss elektrischer Verbraucher sowie der Stromanschluss darf nur von entsprechendem Fachpersonal ( Elektriker ) durchgeführt werden !
Elektrische Verbraucher dürfen nur gemäss den in der Bedienungsanleitung genannten Angaben angeschlossen werden ! Die Leistungsaufnahme der
angeschlossenen Verbraucher sowie die zulässigen Ströme je Kabel dürfen die angegebenen Werte nicht überschreiten !
8. Die Anschlussdosen dürfen nur bei eingefahrenem und spannungsfreien Mast von ausgebildetem Fachpersonal ( Elektriker ) geöffnet werden.
9. Reparaturen, Wartungen sowie Einstellungen am Mast dürfen nur ausgeführt werden, wenn der Mast spannungsfrei, komplett eingefahren, drucklos und
von der Luftquelle getrennt ist.
10. Der Mast darf nicht ausgefahren werden, wenn die vorherrschende Windgeschwindigkeit die im Handbuch genannten maximalen Werte übersteigt.
11. Das Bedienungspersonal muss mit der Bedienungsanleitung und der Bedienung des Mastes vertraut sein !
12. Die beschriebenen Mast-Systeme dürfen nur zum Aufbau der zulässigen Kopflasten verwendet werden.

9
OPERATION
GEBRUIK
MODE D'EMPLOI
GEBRAUCH

DANGER
Before raising the mast always check that there are no power cables or overhead obstructions above the light robot unit.
The space above the light robot unit must be clear.

1. Check if the handbrake is pulled up.

2. Select 'MAST UP/RAISE' on the remote control.
3. When the mast must not be extended completely, press 'STOP' on the remote control when the mast has reached the desired
height.
4. The lamps may be switched on with mast in extended or retracted position.
5. Tilt and turn the lamps if necessary in the required position with the remote control.
6. To retract the mast : a) Select 'MAST DOWN/PARK' on the remote control.
b) Turn off the lamps.
7. Always check after operation that the mast is retracted.
8. Open, if necessary, periodically the safety/drain valve to remove condensate water from inside the mast.

GEVAAR
Gelieve altijd voor het in- en uitschuiven van de mast te kijken of er zich geen elektriciteitskabels of obstakels boven het
verlichtingssysteem bevinden. De ruimte boven het verlichtingssysteem moet altijd vrij zijn.

1. Controleer of de handrem is opgetrokken.

2. Selecteer 'MAST UP/RAISE' op de afstandsbediening.
3. Indien de mast niet volledig moet uitgeschoven worden, druk 'STOP' op de afstandsbediening als de gewenste hoogte is bereikt.
4. De schijnwerpers mogen ingeschakeld worden bij in- of uitgeschoven maststand.
5. Draai en kantel de schijnwerpers indien nodig in de gewenste positie d.m.v. de afstandsbediening.
6. Inschuiven van de mast : a) Selecteer 'MAST DOWN/PARK' d.m.v. de afstandsbediening.
b) Schakel de schijnwerpers uit.
7. Zorg dat de mast volledig is ingeschoven na gebruik.
8. Open indien nodig regelmatig het overdruk- / afwateringsventiel om de condensatievorming uit de mast te verwijderen.

10
DANGER
Avant de déployer ou rétracter le mât, vérifiez toujours qu’il n'y a pas d’obstacle ou des câbles au-dessus de l’unité de robot
d’éclairage. L’espace au-dessus du robot d’éclairage doit être libre.

1. Vérifiez que le frein à main soit serré.

2. Sélectez 'MAST UP/RAISE' sur la commande à distance.
3. Si le mât ne doit pas être complètement déployé, pressez 'STOP' sur la commande à distance quand l’hauteur désirée est
atteinte.
4. Les projecteurs peuvent être allumés avec le mât déployé ou rétracté.
5. Tourner et incliner les projecteurs, si nécessaire, dans la position desirée avec la commande à distance.
6. Pour rétracter le mât : a) Sélectionnez 'MAST DOWN/PARK' avec la commande à distance.
b) Eteignez les projecteurs.
7. Rétractez toujours le mât après l’emploi.
8. Videz, si nécessaire, périodiquement la soupape de vidange/sécurité pour faire sortir l’eau de condensation dans le mât.

GEFAHR
Bevor der Mast aus- oder eingefahren wird, uberprüfen Sie unbedingt den Raum über der Beleuchtungseinheit. Dieser muss
frei sein von stromführenden Leitungen und/oder Hindernissen jeglicher Art.

1. Überprüfen Sie dass die Handbremse angezogen ist.

2. Selektieren Sie 'MAST UP/RAISE' auf der Fernbedienung.
3. Wenn der Mast nicht voll ausgefahren werden muss, drücken Sie auf 'STOP' auf der Fernbedienung, wenn die gewünschte Höhe
erreicht ist.
4. Die Scheinwerfer dürfen bei ein- oder ausgefahrenem Maststand eingeschaltet werden.
5. Drehen oder schwenken Sie die Scheinwerfer wenn nötig auf die gewünschte Position mit der Fernbedienung.
6. Einfahren des Mastes : a) Schalten Sie 'MAST DOWN/PARK' mit der Fernbedienung.
b) Schalten Sie die Scheinwerfer aus.
7. Überprüfen Sie immer dass den Mast eingefahren ist nach dem Gebrauch.
8. Öffnen Sie, wenn nötig, regelmässig das Sicherheits- und Wasserablassventil für die Entfernung der Kondensation im Mast.

11
EXPLODED VIEW OF COMPONENTS
ZICHT VAN DE ONDERDELEN
COMPOSANTS EXPOSES
EXPLOSIONZEICHNUNG

12
13
PARTS LIST
ONDERDELENLIJST
LISTE DES COMPOSANTS
TEILELISTE

14
MAINTENANCE

1. Extend the mast regularly using the normal installed air system.

2. Clean the outside of each telescopic mast section with a clean, dry cloth without any cleaning solvent.

3. No greasing of the outside of the mast is necessary after cleaning. Never use oil, grease or other lubricant other than Teklite
B3905 Silicone grease in order to avoid damage to the mast section seals.

4. After extension, lower the mast by means of the drain valve in base of mast to remove condensed water along with any internal dirt.
NOTE ! The drain valve is also a pressure safety valve.

5. When checking the mast, check also for faults or damage to all components. Pay special attention to the 3 keys ( item 26 ) in the
mast sections. If damaged they should be replaced with new keys.

6. Check that the top of the mast is not loose. If there is play, the 8 screws ( item 75 ) should be tightened and locked.

7. The complete electrical installation of the mast/lighting system should be regularly inspected by a competent person at intervals in
accordance with local regulations.

8. For more general information or advice concerning problems or other questions, seek the help of your Supplier or direct with
Clark Masts Teksam NV (Belgium).

ONDERHOUD

1. Schuif de mast regelmatig uit m.b.v. het geïnstalleerde luchtdruksysteem.

2. Regelmatig de buitenzijde van elke telescopische mastsectie in uitgeschoven toestand schoonmaken met een zuivere, droge doek
zonder enig reinigingsmiddel.

3. Na reiniging van de mast is het niet noodzakelijk een smeermiddel te gebruiken. Gebruik geen olie, vetten of andere
smeermiddelen, behalve Teklite Silicone Vet Ref. B3905 om beschadigingen van dichtingen van de mastsecties te vermijden.

4. Schuif de mast uit en laat de mast zakken door het afwateringsventiel te openen, om vuil en condenswater uit de mast te verwijderen.
Sluit het afwateringsventiel.
OPMERKING ! Het afwateringsventiel is gelijktijdig een overdrukventiel.

5. Bij ieder onderhoud, controleer of er fouten of beschadigingen zijn aan de onderdelen van de mast. Er moet speciale aandacht aan
de 3 spie-geleidingen ( item 26 ) van de mastsecties gegeven worden. Indien er één beschadigd is, vervang deze met het juiste
nieuw onderdeel.

6. Controleer of de kop van de mast vast is. Indien speling wordt opgemerkt, vastzetten d.m.v. 8 schroeven ( item 75 ), zie tekening
(zicht van de onderdelen). Opnieuw ankeren indien nodig.

7. Een periodieke inspectie van de volledige elektrische installatie van het mast-verlichtingssysteem zou door een gekwalificeerd
persoon uitgevoerd moeten worden, waarbij de intervallen conform zijn met de geldende lokale reglementeringen.

8. Voor verdere vragen, inlichtingen of problemen neem eerst contact op met uw leverancier of rechtstreeks met
Clark Masts Teksam NV (België).

15
ENTRETIEN

1. Déployer régulièrement le mât en utilisant le système pneumatique installé à bord du véhicule.

2. Nettoyer régulièrement l’extérieur de chaque section du mât télescopique en position déployée avec un chiffon sec et propre sans
détergent.

3. Après le nettoyage il n'est pas nécessaire de regraisser les sections. N'utilisez aucune graisse, huile ou autre lubrifiant que
graisse Silicone Teklite réf. B3905. Une mauvaise lubrification peut détruire les joints.

4. Périodiquement, au moins une fois par mois, rétracter le mât en ouvrant le robinet de purge à la base du mât. Ceci permet de
vider l’eau de condensation dans le mât.
IMPORTANT ! Ce robinet de purge fait aussi effet de valve de sécurité de suppression pneumatique.

5. Contrôler tous les composants du mât. Vérifier tout spécialement les 3 clavettes ( repère 26 ). Si celles-ci se trouvent
endommagées, changez-les par des nouvelles clavettes.

6. Contrôler la fixation de la tête du mât qui doit être sans jeu dans la section supérieure. Si ce n'est pas le cas resserrez les 8 vis
( repère 75 ) et bloquez-les.

7. L'installation électrique doit être régulièrement contrôlée par une personne compétente. Cette installation doit répondre aux
normes en vigueur.

8. Pour de plus amples informations ou conseils techniques n'hésitez pas de contacter votre revendeur ou si vous le préférez
Clark Masts Teksam NV (Belgique).

WARTUNG

1. Verwenden Sie zum Ausfahren des Mastes herkömmliche Druckluft.

2. Reinigen Sie die Aussenflächen jedes Mastrohres mit einem sauberen und trockenen Tuch, ohne dabei ein Reinigungsmittel zu
verwenden.

3. Es ist keine Schmierung oder Fettung der Mastrohre nach dem Reinigen erforderlich.
WICHTIG ! Verwenden Sie kein anderes Öl oder Fett zur Schmierung, als dass Silikonfett von Teklite Kat.-Nr. B3905.
Falsche Schmiermittel zerstören die Dichtungen.

4. Fahren Sie den Mast aus und lassen diesen danach durch Öffnen des Ablassventils am Mastfuss langsam wieder einfahren.
Dadurch wird gewährleistet, dass das im Mast befindliche Kondenswasser und mögliche Verunreinigungen entweichen können.
ACHTUNG ! Das Ablassventil am Mastfuss ist zugleich ein Überdruckventil.

5. Überprüfen Sie den Mast auf mögliche Defekte oder äusserliche Beschädigungen. Achten Sie besonders auf die drei Führungskeile
( Position 26 ). Bei Beschädigung müssen diese ausgetauscht werden.

6. Überprüfen Sie, ob die Mastspitze nicht locker ist. Wenn Ja, dann müssen die 8 Schrauben ( Position 75 ) fest angezogen und
gesichert werden.

7. Alle 4 Jahre soll die komplette elektrische Anlage nach VBG 4 von einem Sachkundigen überprüft werden.

8. Wenn Sie mehr Informationen oder Hinweise zu bestimmten Problemen benötigen, fragen Sie Ihren Händler oder richten Sie
diese direkt an Clark Masts Teksam NV (Belgien).

TEKLITE, Division of CLARK MASTS TEKSAM NV, Woudstraat 21, B-3600 Genk, Belgium
Tel : +32 (0)89 38 44 72 - Fax : +32 (0)89 38 61 41 - E-mail : info@teksam.be - Website : www.teklite.com

16 PP 1437 MM 20/04/09
 INSTALLER : Please pass this handbook to the User !

Model
TF 300XE & TF 400XE
24/24 volt
LIGHT ROBOT
with APR-unit
Installation and Operation
Instructions

TEKLITE is a division of CLARK MASTS TEKSAM NV, Woudstraat 21, B-3600 Genk, Belgium
Tel : +32 (0)89 38 44 72 Fax : +32 (0)89 38 61 41 E-mail : info@teksam.be Website : www.teklite.com

MM 18.07.08 PP 1396-2-E
 Installation
Instructions
INTRODUCTION
THE LIGHT ROBOT SYSTEM CONSISTS OF :

1 LIGHT ROBOT WITH MAST & LAMPS 2 CONTROL/JUNCTION UNIT

3 CABLE REMOTE CONTROL

HANDBRAKE
4 EMERGENCY STOP 5 DASHBOARD LIGHT 6 SWITCH

- Not added to the system.

- To be supplied and
installed by the
vehicle builder/installer.

AIR PRESSURE RF REMOTE CONTROL CABIN BEACON

7 REGULATOR 8 KIT (OPTIONAL) 9 SWITCH (OPTIONAL)

- Not added to the system.

- To be supplied and
installed by the
vehicle builder/installer.
1 LIGHT ROBOT WITH MAST & LAMPS
A. FITTING OF THE LAMPS TO THE ROBOT HEAD

FIG. 1
Connection of 2 x single lamps.

A B

A B

FIG. 2
Connection of 2 x double lamps.

A C
A B D C

B D
1 LIGHT ROBOT WITH MAST & LAMPS
B. CONNECTION OF THE MAST CABLE TO THE CONTROL /JUNCTION UNIT

Connect the mast cable wires (1,5 mm2)

with the numbers 1 and 2 into the
Control /Junction Unit to terminal
block X2 :
- wire no. 1 on position X2-14
- wire no. 2 on position X2-25
Connect the earth link of the mast cable
to terminal block X2 on position X2- 6.
Connect the mast cable wires (1,5 mm2)
with the numbers 3 and 4 into the
Control /Junction Unit to terminal
block X3 :
- wire no. 3 on position X3-36
- wire no. 4 on position X3-47

Connect the mast cable wires (0,5 mm2)

with the numbers 1-10, red and blue
into the Control /Junction Unit to
terminal block X6 on the corresponding
nos. 1-10, red on RD and blue on BU.

Connect the mast cable wires (0,5 mm2)

with the numbers 11, 12 and 13 into the
Control /Junction Unit to terminal block
X12 on the corresponding nos. 11, 12
and 13.
 2
to
C

1
on 24
tro V
l/J olt
un po
ct w
io er
M n
as U sup

9
tc ni p
t a ly
C ab nd
ab le
in la
A. WIRING DIAGRAM

be m
(O a ps
pt co
io n
na sw
l) it
ch

2
Unit
H
an
CONTROL /JUNCTION UNIT

db
ra D
Control /Junction

ke as
sw hb
8

itc oa Em
h rd er Ai
lig ge rp
ht
C nc re
y ss

6
st ab ur
op le e
re re
m

5
(Optional)

ot gu
la
RF antenna

e to
co r

4
nt
ro
l

7
3
2 CONTROL /JUNCTION UNIT
B. POWER SUPPLY

24 VOLT POWER SUPPLY

FOR THE CONTROL /JUNCTION UNIT
AND LAMPS
Connect a 24 volt power supply
using a 3-core (4,0 mm2 - 40 Amp fuse)
cable to terminal block X5.

- plus (+) core on position X5 +

- minus (--) core on position X5 --
Connect the earth link to the yellow
eye-spade connector.
3 CABLE REMOTE CONTROL
A. CABLE REMOTE CONTROL-YH (YELLOW HANDSET)

Cut the remote control cable to the

required length and connect the white
wires (0,75 mm2) with the black
numbers 1-4 into the Control /Junction
Unit to terminal block X10 on the
corresponding nos. 1-4.

B. CABLE REMOTE CONTROL-LV (LIGHT VERSION)

Cut the remote control cable to

the required length and connect
the wires (0,35 mm2) into the
Control/Junction Unit to terminal
block X10 as follows :
a) the RED wire on X10-1
b) the BLACK wire on X10-2
c) the BLUE wire on X10-3
d) the WHITE wire on X10-4

IMPORTANT NOTE !
IN CASES WHERE A SECOND CABLE REMOTE CONTROL IS USED,
PLEASE CONNECT THIS SECOND CABLE REMOTE CONTROL
TO TERMINAL BLOCK X11 ON THE CORRESPONDING NOS. 1-4.
4 EMERGENCY STOP
2 BRIDGES In some countries an emergency stop
is required to fit into the control panel
of the vehicle. If this is the case,
connect the emergency stop to the
Control /Junction Unit onto terminal
block X8, after having removed ONE
BRIDGE on position X8-1 and X8-2.

Connect a 2-core (1,0 mm2) cable to

the NC switch of the emergency stop
as shown underneath. Connect the
2 wires of the emergency stop cable
into the Control /Junction Unit onto
terminal block X8 on position X8-1
and X8-2.

NOTE :
The cable to connect the emergency
stop to the Control /Junction Unit has
to be provided by the vehicle
builder/installer.

2
5 DASHBOARD LIGHT
Connect a 2-core (1,0 mm2) cable,
which has to be fitted to the dashboard
light (red LED), in the Control /Junction
Unit to terminal block X7 on position
X7-5 (+) and X7-6 (--).

NOTE :
The cable to connect the dashboard
light to the Control /Junction Unit has to
be provided by the vehicle
builder/installer.
6 HANDBRAKE SWITCH (OBLIGATORY)
The connection to the handbrake switch is obligatory otherwise the mast robot lighting
system won’t work.
WARNING !
The handbrake switch must
be independent of the vehicle
electrical system.
NEVER connect a 12/24 volt power
supply of the vehicle to terminal
block positions X7-3 and X7-4.
The handbrake switch is for safety
purposes. When the mast of the light
robot is extended, and the vehicle
drives off after releasing the hand-
brake, without having the light robot
system parked, the light robot mast will
park automatically into its vertical park
position to avoid damage.
The handbrake switch should work as
following :
Handbrake ON :
switchcontact must be closed
Handbrake OFF :
switchcontact must be open
Connect a 2-core (1,0 mm2) cable,
which has to be fitted to the handbrake
switch, in the Control /Junction Unit
to terminal block X7 on position X7-3
and X7-4.
NOTE : The handbrake switch as well
as the cable to connect this handbrake
switch to the Control/Junction Unit
have to be provided by the vehicle
builder/installer.

IMPORTANT NOTE !
THE LIGHT ROBOT SYSTEM SHOULD ALWAYS BE SWITCHED ON TO
ENABLE TO OPERATE THE BUILT-IN HANDBRAKE SWITCH SAFETY FEATURE.
POWER CONSUMPTION OF LIGHT ROBOT LIGHTING SYSTEM
IN SLEEP MODE : ± 5 MILLIAMPS.
7 AIR PRESSURE REGULATOR
1 AIR EXHAUST :
2 3 To let air escape from the mast
when it retracts (park position)
together with condensation or
1
4 moisture. If necessary, a hose can
be fitted to lead air and condensation
water under the chassis floor.
2 AIR INLET :
To connect the air hose which
comes from the vehicle air pressure
tank.
3 AIR OUTLET :
To connect the air hose which goes
to the mast.

4 Cut the cable to the required length

and connect the wires nos. 1-6 in
the Control /Junction Unit to terminal
block X9 on the corresponding
nos. 1-6 and connect the earth to
terminal block X8 on position .

VERY IMPORTANT NOTE !

The working pressure of the pressure regulator
is set at the factory at 1,2 bar.

ATTENTION !
Do not exceed this pressure.
8 RF REMOTE CONTROL KIT (OPTIONAL)
RF remote control kit contents :
- RF remote control including rechargeable battery
- RF antenna
- 110/230 Volt charger
- 12/24 Volt car charger

Screw the antenna of the RF remote

control kit into the antenna socket on
top of the Control/Junction Unit.
9 CABIN BEACON SWITCH (BEACON=OPTIONAL)
The light robot system is foreseen with
a feature to have a push button
(momentary type) in the cabin of the
fire fighting vehicle to operate the
beacon (optional) separately.

Connect a 2-core (1,0 mm2) cable,

which has to be fitted to a push button
(momentary type) mounted in the
dashboard, in the Control/Junction Unit
to terminal block X7 on position X7-1
and X7-2.

NOTE : The cabin beacon push button

as well as the cable to connect this
push button to the Control/Junction
Unit have to be provided by the vehicle
builder/installer.
 1st IMPORTANT NOTE !

BLOCKING THE “TILTING & TURNING” OF THE ROBOT HEAD.

Sometimes it is necessary to block/delay

the function “tilt & turn” of the lamps of
the robot head to avoid damaging the
lighting system. This feature is standard
foreseen on the Teklite Lighting System
based on “extended time”.

A) Setting of the “extending timer”

1) The lighting system has to be
retracted/parked and in sleep mode.
2) Push on the button “SW1” whilst
the red LED (TIMER) lights up.
3) Push on the push button
“mast up/raise” of the remote
controle.
4) Push on the push button “Stop” of
the remote control after having
reached the level where the lamps
of the robot head may freely tilt
and turn.

B) Deleting of the setting of the

“extending timer”
1) The lighting system has to be
retracted/parked and in sleep mode.
2) Push on the button “SW1” whilst
the red LED (TIMER) lights up.
3) Push a second time on the button
“SW1” until the red LED (TIMER)
goes out.
 2nd IMPORTANT NOTE !
IF NECESSARY IT IS POSSIBLE TO REPOSITION THE MAST BASE.
(90° OR 180°)

1. UNLOCK ALL THE SCREWS OF

THE MAST BASE.

2. REPOSITION THE MAST BASE

BY TURNING THE BASE 90° OR
180°.

NEVER REMOVE
THE MAST BASE FROM
THE MAST TUBE !

3. LOCK ALL THE SCREWS OF THE

MAST BASE CROSSWISE.
 Operation
Instructions
&
Maintenance
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS OF THE LIGHT ROBOT
A. USE OF THE CABLE REMOTE CONTROL-YH ( YELLOW HANDSET)

1 POWER INDICATOR
Power light is illuminated when system is in
operation.
MAST UP / RAISE 2
button
Press the button
on the remote control and
the mast sections will 3 LIGHTS 1
extend.
button
(Note : with deadman
function, please press
permanently on this
button.)

4 LIGHTS 2
button
MAST DOWN / 5
PARK button
Press the button on the
remote control and the
mast sections will lower
down. 6 BEACON button
(Optional)

7 STOP button
All functions will stop.

8 PAN AND TILT function buttons

To tilt lamps up, press button marked
To tilt lamps down, press button marked
To pan lamps to the right, press button marked
To pan lamps to the left, press button marked

WARNING !
BEFORE OPERATING THE REMOTE CONTROL,
ALWAYS CHECK THAT THERE ARE NO OVERHEAD
OBSTRUCTIONS ABOVE THE LIGHT ROBOT UNIT.
THE SPACE ABOVE THE LIGHT ROBOT MUST BE CLEAR !
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS OF THE LIGHT ROBOT
B. USE OF THE CABLE REMOTE CONTROL-LV (LIGHT VERSION)

1 POWER INDICATOR
Power light is illuminated when system is in
MAST UP / RAISE 2 operation.
button
Press the button
on the remote control and
the mast sections will 3 LIGHTS 1
extend.
button
(Note : with deadman
function, please press
permanently on this
button.)

4 LIGHTS 2
button

MAST DOWN / 5
PARK button
Press the button on the 6 BEACON button
remote control and the
mast sections will lower (Optional)
down.

7 STOP button
All functions will stop.

8 PAN AND TILT function buttons

To tilt lamps up, press button marked
To tilt lamps down, press button marked
To pan lamps to the right, press button marked
To pan lamps to the left, press button marked

WARNING !
BEFORE OPERATING THE REMOTE CONTROL,
ALWAYS CHECK THAT THERE ARE NO OVERHEAD
OBSTRUCTIONS ABOVE THE LIGHT ROBOT UNIT.
THE SPACE ABOVE THE LIGHT ROBOT MUST BE CLEAR !
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS OF THE LIGHT ROBOT
C. USE OF THE RF REMOTE CONTROL (OPTIONAL)

1 BATTERY LOAD INDICATOR

When the LED lightens up with a red colour,
please charge the battery of the RF remote
MAST UP / RAISE 2
control during 24 hours with a charger
button delivered with your RF remote control kit.
Press the button
on the remote control and
the mast sections will 3 LIGHTS 1
extend.
button
(Note : with deadman
function, please press
permanently on this
button.)

4 LIGHTS 2
button
MAST DOWN / 5
PARK button
Press the button on the
6 BEACON button
remote control and the
mast sections will lower (Optional)
down.

7 STOP button
All functions will stop.

8 PAN AND TILT function buttons

To tilt lamps up, press button marked
To tilt lamps down, press button marked
To pan lamps to the right, press button marked
To pan lamps to the left, press button marked

IMPORTANT NOTE :
The light robot is foreseen with a sleep mode feature to save energy. When you use the
RF remote control to start up the light robot system, please push ± 5 seconds on the push button
to raise/extend the mast.

WARNING !
BEFORE OPERATING THE REMOTE CONTROL,
ALWAYS CHECK THAT THERE ARE NO OVERHEAD
OBSTRUCTIONS ABOVE THE LIGHT ROBOT UNIT.
THE SPACE ABOVE THE LIGHT ROBOT MUST BE CLEAR !
MAINTENANCE OF THE LIGHT ROBOT

1. Clean regularly the outside of each

telescopic mast section in extended
position with a clean, dry cloth
without any cleaning solvent.

2. If necessary, grease very light the

mast sections using only Teklite ref.
B3905 Silicone grease.

ATTENTION !
INCORRECT LUBRICATION CAN DESTROY SEALS.
USE ONLY TEKLITE SILICONE GREASE REF. B3905.
MAINTENANCE OF THE LIGHT ROBOT

3. In case of troubleshooting please

check the fuses on the circuit board :
the LED of the broken fuse will light
up red.

F1A = Compressor (25 Amps)

F1B = Compressor +
12/24V Power Supply onto
terminal block X5 (25 Amps)
F6A = Beacon (5 Amps)
F6B = Beacon (5 Amps)
F11A = Optional function (5 Amps)
F11B = Optional function (5 Amps)

4. Fuses of the lamps (4 x 16 Amps)

 MODEL SIR 8110 24V
5 TONE REMOTE MOUNT 100W SIREN / PA C/W DASH MOUNT CONTROL

1 MICROPHONE PLUG
2 POWER / VOLUME CONTROL
3 SIREN ACTIVATION
4 TONE SELECTOR
5 RADIO REBROADCAST
6 MANUAL SIREN / AIR HORN
7 HANDS FREE TONE
INSTALLATION

Ensure that the power is isolated before installing.

Ensure connection to correct voltage & polarity.
Power and impedance of the speaker should be compatible
With the SIREN amplifier’s output.
Failure to follow the above may result in damaging the Siren Amplifier.

Cable connection
RED Positive 24v supply +
BLACK Negative / earth -
BROWN ( 2 ) Speaker feeds
PURPLE ( 2 ) Radio rebroadcast
WHITE Horn ring / hands free ( input ) you may need a relay
YELLOW Not needed

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

1 Microphone connection
2 Power on / off switch and PA volume control (when activated unit in stand by mode )
3 Activates siren
4 Siren tone selector
5 Radio rebroadcast
6 Manual Siren tone / Air horn
7 Timer for tones in hands free mode

1 PA Microphone. “Press to talk” use of the PA will over ride all other functions until released.
2 On/Off switch for power (standby) and volume control for PA
3 Will activate the sirens tones in the memorized last used tone until tone is changed.
4 Allows manual selection of siren tones by depressing the switch until desired tone.
5 Allows rebroadcast of incoming radio transmissions when siren is inactive
6 Momentary operation of SIREN or AIRHORN whilst depressed.
7 In position “A” allows siren to be activated by as ingle hit on the vehicle horn button and any
further hits of the horn button changes siren tones
In position “B” any tone change will be for a 5 seconds burst and will revert back.
A sharp double hit of the vehicle horn will terminate the siren function.
SPECIFICATIONS

WORKING VOLTAGE 24V DC

WORKING CURRENT 10 AMP
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE 11 Ohms
OUTPUT POWER 100 W
DISTORTION 5%
WORKING TEMPS -40º C + 50º C

MODEL 8 – 8110 24V

WIRING DIAGRAM

Cable connection
RED Positive 24v supply +
BLACK Negative / earth -
BROWN ( 2 ) Speaker feeds
VIOLET( 2 ) Radio rebroadcast South Wonston
WHITE Horn ring / hands free ( input ) Winchester
ORANGE Horn ring / hands free ( output ) SO21 3HN
Tel : +44 (0)1962 884444
Email : sales@ventauk.com
1, 4 CHANNEL (CF/SD)
DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER
USER GUIDE

VER 2.2.1
4th Edition

z Thank you for purchasing this Digital Video Recorder.

z Before using the Digital Video Recorder, please ensure that you
read and understand this USER GUIDE.
z Please store the USER GUIDE in an easily accessible location.
z Before connecting and installing any third party cameras, monitors,
alarms and computers, please refer to the appropriate instruction
manual for proper operation.
2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is

intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.

Power disconnection. Unit with or without ON-OFF

switches have power supplied to the unit whenever the
power cord is inserted into the power source; however, the
unit is operational only when the ON-OFF switch is in the
ON position. The power cord is the main power disconnect
for all units.

WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD, DO

NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

3
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
■ PRODUCT CONTENTS
■ INTRODUCTION
1. FRONT PANEL 9
2. REAR PANEL 10
■ POWER ON/OFF
1. TURNING ON THE POWER 12
2. TURNING OFF THE POWER 12
■ MAIN MENU
1. MENU SYSTEM 13
1.1. SELECTING THE MENU 13
1.2. POSITIONING THE YELLOW COLOR HIGHLIGHT 13
1.3. SETTING AN OPTION 13
1.4. SPECIAL BUTTON FUNCTION 13
2. ENTERING AND EXIT FROM MAIN MENU 14
2.1. ENTERING THE MAIN MENU 14
2.2. EXIT FROM THE MAIN MENU 14
3. MAIN MENU 15
3.1. DEVICE 15
3.1.1. CAMERA 15
3.1.2. ALARM 16
3.2. RECORD 17
3.2.1. GROUP 17
3.2.2. MANUAL 17
3.2.3. EVENT(MOTION, ALARM) 18
3.2.4. OVERWRITE 21
3.2.5. STORAGE 21
3.2.6. AUTO BACKUP 22
3.2.7. SCHEDULE 23
3.3 NETWORK 25
3.4. SYSTEM 26
3.4.1. SYSTEM TITLE 26
3.4.2. PASSWORD 26
3.4.3. DATE/TIME 27
3.4.4. CLEAR DATA 27
3.4.5. RESET CONFIG 27
3.4.6. SYSTEM UPGRADE 27
4
 3.5. LOG LIST 28
3.6. INFORMATION 28
3.7 SHUTDOWN 28
■ SYSTEM OPERATION
1. LIVE MODE 29
1.1. STATUS BAR ON/OFF 31
1.2. CONFIGURATION UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD 31
1.3. LOG LIST DOWNLOAD 31
1.4. EVENT DATA BACKUP WITHOUT MONITOR 31
2. RECORD MODE 32
2.1. MANUAL RECORD MODE 32
2.2. EVENT RECORD MODE 33
2.3. SCHEDULE RECORD MODE 34
3. SEARCH & PLAYBACK MODE 35
3.1. SEARCH MODE 35
3.2. PLAYBACK MODE 37
4. INSTANT BACKUP 37
■ PC CLIENT SOFTWARE
1. INSTALLING PROCEDURES 40
2. PC CLIENT OVERVIEW 43
3. LOCAL BUTTONS 43
4. PLAYBACK CONTROL BUTTONS 44
5. TIME AND DATE DISPLAY 44
6. TO CONNECT THE DVR OVER THE NETWORK 45
7. LOCAL FUNCTIONS 46
8. LIVE FUNCTIONS 47
9. LIVE MONITORING 48
10. REMOTE SETUP 49
11. REMOTE SEARCH & REMOTE BACKUP 50
12. USB BACKUP 51
13. SEARCH BACKUPED FILES FROM YOUR PC 52
14. NETWORK UPGRADE 54
■ VIDEO CONVERTER
■ LOGLIST VIEWER
■ APPENDIX

5
 PRODUCT CONTENTS

● SYSTEM UNIT
1 CHANNEL, 4 CHANNEL DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER

● ACCESSORIES
Make sure that the following accessories are included.

① User guide ② CF/SD Sticker ③ Software CD

④ Signal Ground Cable ⑤ USB Cable

In case that the product is defective or damaged, please contact your dealer.
Please keep the packaging materials for transport purposes.

WARNING
• Don’t turn off the power or unplug the power cord while hard disk drive is in
operation.
• Don’t apply vibration or shock when HDD drive is in operation. It might cause data
loss or failure.

6
● CF/SD STICKER

Use CF/SD Sticker provided for easy take out from the DVR.

NOTE: How to insert/remove the CF/SD card from DVR

• Please go to the main menu first before take in and out the CF/SD card from
DVR.

1. Go to the MAIN MENU

2. Take out the CF/SD card from DVR and insert new CF/SD card.

• Or turn off the DVR first and then insert the CF/SD card and turn on the DVR.

WARNING: Do not remove or insert the CF/SD card at Live screen mode or
Search screen mode. The CF/ SD card should be inserted at the MAIN MENU
screen mode to mount and dismount the CF/SD card correctly.

7
 INTRODUCTION

This Digital Video Recorder is powerful and cost-effective.

z User Friendly Interface

„ Easy on-screen system setup and operation.
„ Detailed on-screen display record status, storage usage, date, time, power loss,
video loss, alarm status and camera title.

z High Performance
„ Highly stable embedded Linux operating system.
„ Highly stable database management
„ Superior picture quality : more than 450 TV line recording
„ Instant backup to CF/SD card
„ Fast backup through USB 2.0 with PC client S/W.

z Multi functional network based system

„ Real time live view and playback across the network

z Environmental Stability & Reliability

„ Compact size and light weight
‹ Dimension: 210x145x43mm
‹ Weight: under 1Kg
„ Low Power Consumption: Avg. 6 ~10 Watts
„ Ventilation
„ Anti-Vibration
„ Anti-Shock
„ Wide Temperature range.

8
1. FRONT PANEL

1 2 11 12 13 14 8 6 10

3 4 5 7 9

● Buttons (1~9)
1. SEARCH Button (SER)
Press it to search the recorded image data.
2. RECORD Button (REC)
Press it to start recording, and once again to stop. A password is required to stop
recording. The orange LED is on when the recording is in progress.
3. ESCAPE Button (ESC)
Press it to cancel or exit from selected modes and menus.
4. FUNCTION Button (Fn)
Used in combination with other buttons, it allows you to access the special functions.
Refer to page 13 for detail.
5. NUMERIC Buttons (1~4)
Used to select the camera number
6~9. ARROW Buttons ( )
These are used to move the highlight or to change the option in menu.
10. MENU/ENTER Button ( )
This button brings up the menu, and then functions as “ENTER”.

● LEDs (11~14)
11. POWER: The green LED indicates power.
12. REC (RECORD): The orange LED indicates that the record is on going.
13. ALARM: The red LED indicates that the ALARM is detected or the system failed.
14. LAN: The orange LED indicates that the system is connected to the network.

9
2. REAR PANEL (1 CHANNEL)

1 2 3 4

Ground Positive Polarity 5 6 7 9 10

(Left) (Right)
8

1. POWER
Main Power ON/OFF switch
2. DC POWER IN/OUT
- IN: This 12 mm circular type jack accepts the DVR power module plug or other right
positive source of 10~30V DC at 3 amperes.
- OUT: This can supply the power of 10~30V DC at 1.0 amperes for a camera module.
3. Signal Ground Terminal (SIGNAL GND)
4. ALARM IN/OUT
- 2 pair ALARM OUTs: OUT2 is for future use. OUT 1 is related with Motion&Alarm.
- 1 pair ALARM IN
5. RS-232 connector (PTZ control)
6. VIDEO OUT
This BNC connector provides a composite video signal to the main monitor
7. VIDEO IN
This BNC connector accepts a composite video signal from a camera.
8. AUDIO INPUT/OUTPUT
9. USB
This USB 2.0 device connector is used for high speed back up of the recorded image
data to external HOST PC.
10. LAN
10/100 Base-T RJ-45 Ethernet connector for network interface and remote control

NOTE
• Check the proper connection of DC power IN polarity, before turning on the main power.
• This equipment is indoor use and all the communication wirings are limited to inside of
the building.
10
 3. REAR PANEL (4 CHANNEL)

1 3 4 5

Ground Positive Polarity

2 9 10
(Left) (Right)
6 7 8
1. POWER
Main Power ON/OFF switch
2. DC POWER IN
This 12 mm circular type jack accepts the DVR power module plug or other right
positive source of 10~30V DC at 3 amperes.
3. RS-232 Connector (PTZ control)
4. Signal Ground Terminal (SIGNAL GND)
5. ALARM IN/OUT
- 2 pair ALARM OUTs: OUT2 is for future use. OUT 1 is related with Motion&Alarm.
- 4 pair ALARM IN
6. VIDEO OUTPUT
Connect monitors to this BNC connector.
7. VIDEO INPUT (CAMERA IN 1~4)
Connect system cameras to these BNC connectors.
8. AUDIO INPUT/OUTPUT
AUDIO IN connector, for RCA pin jacks, accepts an audio signal supplied from an
external device. AUDIO OUT connector supplies audio signal to an external device.
9. USB
This USB 2.0 device connector is used for high speed back up of the recorded image
data to external HOST PC.
10. LAN
10/100 Base-T RJ-45 Ethernet connector for network interface and remote control

NOTE
• Check the proper connection of DC power IN polarity, before turning on the main power.
• This equipment is indoor use and all the communication wirings are limited to inside of
the building.
11
 POWER ON/OFF

1. TURNING ON THE POWER

① Make sure that peripherals are properly connected.
② Switch「ON」on the rear panel. The front POWER LED will light up in green. Please
wait approximately 50 seconds until it start up.
NOTE
If the covert is set to「ON」in the camera settings, no camera image is displayed.

< LIVE DISPLAY SCREEN >

2. TURNING OFF THE POWER

① In the LIVE mode, press the MENU/ENTER button, and then it goes to MAIN MENU.
② Select SHUTDOWN and press the MENU/ENTER button, and then the password
pop-up window is displayed as below. Enter administrator’s password and press
MENU/ENTER button. It allows you to turn off the system safely.

< SYSTEM SHUTDOWN POP-UP WINDOW >

④ Switch「OFF」on the rear panel.

NOTE
There is no default password at factory default. Press MENU/ENTER button again
when password pop-up window is displayed.

12
 MAIN MENU

1. MENU SYSTEM

The on-screen menus allow you to set up all the features.

All setup data is safe from power loss and stored in the hard disk.

1.1. SELECTING THE MENU

Press the MENU/ENTER ( ) Button to select a menu item.
If you press the ESC button, it returns to the previous menu.

1.2. POSITIONING THE YELLOW COLOR HIGHLIGHT

Use up and down buttons to position the menu highlight.
Press left and right buttons to move to the next value in the selected menu.

1.3. SETTING AN OPTION

Press left and right buttons to change the option if it is between < and > marks.
Press up and down buttons if there are no marks.

1.4. SPECIAL BUTTON FUNCTION

● Fn+ESC button: Returns to Live screen mode immediately from anywhere
in the menu.
● Fn+Right button: Turns ON/OFF the status bar when in the Live screen
mode.
● Fn+Left button at single channel display: Start camera sequence and
display the cameras in quad mode from single camera view in the LIVE
screen mode. (Toggle)
● Fn+Up button: Upload configuration file in the LIVE screen mode.
● Fn+Down button: Download configuration file in the LIVE screen mode.
● Fn+Up/Down button in numeric setting menus: Increase/Decrease the
number by 10.
● Fn+Enter button at live display: Event data backup without Monitor.

13
2. ENTERING AND EXIT FROM MAIN MENU

2.1. ENTERING THE MAIN MENU

< PASSWORD POP-UP WINDOW FOR ENTERING THE MAIN MENU >

① Press MENU/ENTER button. Password pop-up window is displayed.

② Press MENU/ENTER button after entering administrator’s password. Then the MAIN
MENU screen is displayed.

NOTE
There is no default password at factory default. Press MENU/ENTER
button again when password pop-up window is displayed.

< MAIN MENU SCREEN >

2.2. EXIT FROM THE MAIN MENU

Press ESC button for returning to the previous mode.
Or press Fn+ESC button together to return to LIVE screen mode immediately from
anywhere in the menu.

14
3. MAIN MENU

3.1. DEVICE
CAMERA and ALARM can be configured in this menu.

< DEVICE MENU SCREEN >

3.1.1. CAMERA

< CAMERA MENU SCREEN >

Firstly, press the NUMERIC Button (1~4) to select a desired camera.
① TITLE: The camera title can be up to 9 characters.
- Press MENU/ENTER button and press the UP/DOWN button to select the character.
② BRIGHTNESS / CONTRAST: Adjusts brightness and contrast.
- When positioned to BRIGHTNESS / CONTRAST, press MENU/ENTER button,
pop-up window is displayed. Press the left button to reduce, and right button to
increase.

< BRIGHTNESS POP-UP WINDOW > < CONTRAST POP-UP WINDOW >

15
 ③ PTZ: This is used to select the protocol of connected PTZ cameras.
④ COVERT: Hidden camera function. If the COVERT is ON, then the camera will not
be shown in the live display mode or playback mode while it’s recording.
⑤ SEQUENCE: OFF or select camera switch interval from 1sec to 10sec.
Press Fn+Right button at single channel display to start the camera
sequence.
Press the NUMERIC Button (1~4) to stop the sequence function

3.1.2. ALARM
Firstly, press the NUMERIC Button (1~4) to select a desired alarm.
Select whether the alarm contact on the alarm in is normally open or normally close.

< ALARM MENU SCREEN >

16
3.2. RECORD
Record GROUP, Manual record setup, Event record setup, HDD Overwrite, Storage, Auto
Backup and Recording Schedule can be configured in the menu.

< RECORD MENU SCREEN >

3.2.1. GROUP
This menu allows you to set 5 groups of different record configurations. Use the left
and right arrow button for selecting the GROUP.

3.2.2. MANUAL
This menu sets the configurations for the normal and schedule recording mode.

< MANUAL MENU SCREEN >

Firstly, press the NUMERIC Button (1~4) to select a desired camera. And set the image
rate, quality of each camera.
① RESOLUTION: Use the left and right arrow button for setting the option.
● NTSC: 720x240 or 320x240
● PAL: 720x288 or 320x288
② IMAGE RATE: This sets the image rate per second. Use the left and right arrow
button for setting the option. The total maximum image rate for all cameras is 30ips

17
 (NTSC) or 25IPS (PAL). If you want to set the camera 1 as 30ips, firstly set other
cameras as 0ips at Manual and Event record setting.
③ QUALITY: This sets the image quality in four steps such as SUPER, HIGH,
MEDIUM and LOW. Use the left and right arrow button for setting the option.
④ RECORD: Do not record the images, set it as OFF.
⑤ NETWORK: Do not transmit the video data over the network, set is as OFF.
⑥ VOICE IN: To record with voice, set it as ON. Only 1 channel voice record is
available.

3.2.3. EVENT
This menu sets the configurations for the event recording. To enable the event recording,
you must turn on the event sources.

< EVENT MENU SCREEN >

Press the NUMERIC Button (1~4) to select a desired camera.

[ex) EVENT<1> means the event type of camera No.1]
Ser set the IMAGE RATE, QUALITY, RECORD ON/OFF and NETWORK ON/OFF.
Press MENU/ENTER button at EVENT OFF to go in to the event type menu.

18
 3.2.3.1 MOTION (MRX 1004A only)
Set the MOTION ON/OFF, press the LEFT/RIGHT button.
Set the ALARM OUT ON/OFF, press the LEFT/RIGHT button.

< EVENT TYPE SCREEN >

To set the AREA, press the MENU/ENTER button then it will go to AREA menu as
below.

Sensitivity level

CURSOR Yellow area

(Motion detected area)

<AREA setup>
① Yellow area: Motion detected area
② To change the SENSITIVITY, press Fn + Left/Right button.
SENSITIVITY level 10 means the most sensitive
③ To disable the motion detect area, press the MENU/ENTER button.
Then partial block color change into pink color.
Press Left/Right button to change the cursor position.

19
 Blocked AREA
from Motion
detection

④ To enable the motion detect area or move the cursor only, press the MENU/ENTER
button again. To finish the area setting, press the MENU/ENTER button.

3.2.3.2 ALARM
Set the ALARM IN ON/OFF.
To set the ALARM OUT, PRE-RECORD and DURATION, press the Left/Right button.

< ALARM MENU SCREEN >

① ALARM IN: To use ALARM IN as an event, set it as ON.
② ALARM OUT: To use ALARM OUT when an alarm is occurred, set it as ON.

3.2.3.3 PRE-RECORD
Sets the recording time before the event(Motion, Alarm) occurred. Use the left and
right arrow button for setting the seconds.

20
 3.2.3.4 DURATION
Sets the recording time after the event released. Use the left and right arrow button for
setting the option. The options are 30, 60, 120,180, and 240 seconds.

3.2.4. OVERWRITE
This menu allows you to set the overwrite policy of the image data when the hard disk
is full. Press the left and right arrow button for setting the option.

- OFF: The recording stops automatically when the hard disk is full.
- ON: The image data is overwritten from the oldest when the hard disk is full.

3.2.5. STORAGE
This menu allows you to set the storage of the image data recording.
Press the left and right arrow button for setting the option.

- HDD: Record on to internal HDD.

- CF: Record on to CF card.

NOTE
The maximum recording speed will be drop to 15fps when the CF card
was selected as the main storage.

21
3.2.6. AUTO BACKUP
This menu allows you to record on the CF card as well as HDD.

The CF card should be inserted at the main menu screen mode.

And it also should be removed at the main menu screen mode.
Or turn off the DVR correctly and exchange the CF card.

Once you set AUTO BACKUP ON, 4 images per second (4 Channel DVR) or 1 image
per second (1 Channel DVR) will be record on the CF card regardless of record setting
condition when DVR start record. (each 1 image from 4 cameras)

Once you set AUTO BACKUP EVENT, 4 images per second(4 Channel DVR) or 1
image per second(1 Channel DVR) will be record on the CF card when there is a event
recording.

Once you set OVERWRITE ON, the image data’s of the CF card is automatically
overwritten from the oldest when the CF card is full.

Once you set OVERWRITE OFF, the recording stops automatically when the CF card
is full.

22
 3.2.7. SCHEDULE
This menu sets the SCHEDULE RECORD, TIME TABLE, and HOLIDAY.
To enter SCHEDULE menu, press the MENU/ENTER button. It will display the
SCHEDULE menu screen.

< SCHEDULE MENU SCREEN >

3.2.7.1. SCHEDULE: Sets ON/OFF using the left and right arrow buttons.

3.2.7.2. TIME TABLE: The table consists of (day of a week) row by (time) column. To
enter TIME TABLE menu, press the MENU/ENTER button.

A cursor box at All hour selection

all cell selection points

All day selection Cell selection

points points

< THE DEFAULT TIME TABLE MENU SCREEN >

- Selecting all days and time:

① Move a cursor box using the arrow buttons at all cell selection point.
② Press the MENU/ENTER button repeatedly until the desired GROUP number
(Record Group 1 to 5) is displayed.

23
3.2.7.3 HOLIDAY SETTING
To set holidays, press the MENU/ENTER button. Then HOLIDAY menu is
displayed.

① Select a year/month using the left and right arrow buttons and press the
MENU/ENTER button. The cursor box will be displayed on a day.
② To select a date, press the MENU/ENTER button once the cursor box is on the
desired date using the arrow buttons. Then the date is changed to red for holiday.
③ Repeat the step ② for more holidays.

< SELECTING A YEAR/MONTH SCREEN >

< SELECTING A DATE SCREEN >

24
 3.3 NETWORK
This menu sets the network configurations as either static IP or DHCP.

< NETWORK MENU SCREEN WHEN DHCP IS OFF >

To set a network address:

① Select a row using the up and down buttons.
② Press the MENU/ENTER button, and the address pop-up window will be displayed.
③ In the pop-up window, press the up and down arrow buttons to change the value.
④ Use the left and right arrow buttons to go to the next numeric character.
⑤ To finish setting the address, press the MENU/ENTER button.

< SET IP ADDRESS POP-UP WINDOW >

NOTE
• To speed up setting, you may use Fn+Up/Down button.

25
3.4. SYSTEM

< SYSTEM MENU SCREEN >

3.4.1. SYSTEM TITLE
This is for identifying the unit when managing several DVR systems by network. Press
the MENU/ENTER button to set the SYSTEM TITLE. Use only arrow buttons for the
TITLE. SYSTEM TITLE can be up to 9 characters.

3.4.2. PASSWORD
This menu sets passwords for ADMINISTRATOR and USER.
Press the MENU/ENTER button to set the each password.
Use only arrow buttons for the password.
The password can be up to 6 arrows like up(8), up(8), down(2), right(6), up(8), left(4).

NOTE
• When connecting to the DVR from PC Client, the arrow combination password should
be entered as numbers. Arrow buttons corresponds to numeric buttons on a computer
keyboard as below.
Up ( 8 )
Left ( 4 ) Right ( 6 )
Down ( 2 )

① ADMINISTRATOR: This password allows authorized users to enter and view all the
menu pages. To set the password, press MENU/ENTER button and follow pop-up
window instructions. Enter the password with the combination of the arrow buttons.
The ADMINISTRATOR password can be up to eight digits long.
② USER: This password allows authorized users to search, CF/SD backup and
playback the recorded data. To set the password, press MENU/ENTER button and
follow pop-up window instructions. Enter the password with the combination of the
arrow buttons. The USER password can be up to eight digits long.

26
 3.4.3. DATE/TIME
This menu sets the system date and time.
To set the date and time,
① Press MENU/ENTER button and then the pop-up window is displayed.
② A highlighted character can be moved using the left and right buttons, and changed
using the up and down buttons.

< SET DATE/TIME POP-UP WINDOW >

NOTE
• To accelerate setting, use Fn+Up/Down button.

3.4.4. CLEAR DATA

It performs to delete all image data stored in the hard disk, CF or SD.

< CLEAR HDD SCREEN >

NOTE
• Configuration and setting are not deleted.

3.4.5. RESET CONFIG

Set the configuration of system to the factory default.

3.4.6. SYSTEM UPGRADE

S/W upgrade using CF or SD can be done using this menu.
Please kindly contact your dealer for system upgrade.

27
 3.5. LOG LIST
Following is the list of events that are logged in the LOG LIST.
"POWER ON" "VIDEO LOSS" "VIDEO IN"
"RECORD START" "ALARM IN" "RECORD STOP" "SEARCH STOP"
"SAVE CONFIGURATION" "INFORMATION"
"INCORRECT PASSWORD" "MENU ON" "ADMIN PASSWORD CHANGED"
"USER PASSWORD CHANGED"
"SEARCH YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM"

< LOG LIST SCREEN >

3.6. INFORMATION
This informs the SYSTEM VERSION, SYSTEM TITLE, SYSTEM APPLICATION,
HDD remain/capacity, and IP address.

< INFORMATION SCREEN >

3.7. SHUTDOWN
① Press the MENU/ENTER button, and then the pop-up window is displayed. It allows
you to turn off the system safely.
② Press the switch OFF button on the rear panel.

28
 SYSTEM OPERATION

1. LIVE MODE (4 Channel)

Alarm Display
P: Power Loss V: Video Loss
CAMERA TITLE
S: AUDIO RECORD M: Motion Detection A: Alarm

Storage Usage Current Date & Time

Schedule mode ON

Recording Status Display

REC(red color): Manual Recording
REC(green color): Schedule Recording.
REC(Yellow color): Event(Alarm or Motion Detection) Recording

< 4 Channel LIVE MODE >

● Press 1, 2, 3, 4 buttons to see a single channel display

● Press Fn+Left button at single channel display: Start camera sequence and display the
cameras in quad mode from single camera view in the LIVE screen mode. (Toggle)

29
LIVE MODE (1 Channel)

Alarm Display
P: Power Loss V: Video Loss
CAMERA TITLE
A: Alarm

Storage Usage Current Date & Time

Recording progress icon

Schedule mode ON

Recording Status Display

REC(red color): Manual Recording
REC(green color): Schedule Recording.
REC(Yellow color): Event(Alarm or Motion Detection) Recording

< 1Channel IN LIVE MODE >

30
 1.1. STATUS BAR ON/OFF
● Fn+Right button: Turns ON/OFF the status bar when in the live screen mode.

1.2 CONFIGURATION UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

Go to the main menu screen first before inset the CF card or SD card.
Insert the CF or SD card at the Main menu and then exit from the main menu.

● To download the configuration file & log list file from DVR, Press Fn+Up button at the
LIVE screen mode.

● To upload the configuration file to DVR, Press Fn+Up button at the LIVE screen mode.

NOTE
• CF or SD card must be inserted at the main menu screen, before do
upload/download the configuration.
• Insert only one CF or SD card for the upload/download configuration.
• The upload/download configuration takes 3 seconds, in the mean time
do not take out the CF or SD. REC & ALARM LED will start blinking during

1.3 LOG LIST DOWNLOAD

● Refer to 1.2 CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD.

● To see the downloaded log list at your PC, use provided LoglistViewer software.

1.4 EVENT DATA BACKUP WITHOUT MONITOR

● Fn+Enter button at live display: Event data backup without Monitor.

NOTE (EVENT DATA BACKUP WITHOUT MONITOR)

• Automatically copies latest event data to CF card.
• If your DVR has MICOM version 0.9.2.14 or higher, REC LED and ALARM
LED will start blinking during the event data backup.

31
2. RECORD MODE
The recording priority is EVENT (Highest) > MANUAL > SCHEDULE (Lowest).

2.1. MANUAL RECORD MODE

This mode performs to record according to the record GROUP configuration that you
set the last.

If you exit from the menu after set the record GROUP3, the manual record will be done
according to the record GROUP3 setting.

To start record, press the REC button. Then the orange REC LED turned on.

4CH: The color of REC character in status bar is changed from white to red and the
recording progress mark will be on the screen.

4CH recording progress icon

1CH: The record icon will changed from white to red and the Recording progress mark
will moving.

1CH recording progress icon

To stop this mode, press the REC button again.

NOTE
• When the Manual mode is active, the SCHEDULE recording will not start
even if “SCHEDULE ON” is set, because recording priority of MANUAL is
higher than SCHEDULE.

32
 2.2. EVENT RECORD MODE
The orange REC LED turned on and the color of REC in status bar is changed to
yellow and the progressive mark will be on the screen.
- The alarm icon or motion icon is displayed and red ALARM LED turned on.
- Press ESC button to delete the alarm or motion icon and to turn off red ALARM LED.

The color of REC character in

M: Motion icon
status bar is changed yellow.

A: Alarm icon

< 4CH: EVENT RECORD MODE SCREENS >

A: Alarm icon

The color of REC icon

is changed yellow.

<1CH: EVENT RECORD MODE SCREEN>

NOTE
• The following describes how the record configuration is applied.
※ In the LIVE mode, the EVENT record will use the record GROUP
configuration, that you set the last with pre-recording.
※ In the MANUAL record mode, the EVENT record will use the record GROUP
configuration that you set the last without pre-recording.
※ In the SCHEDULE record mode, the EVENT record mode will use the
record GROUP configuration defined in the TIME TABLE of SCHEDULE
menu, with pre-recording.

33
 2.3. SCHEDULE RECORD MODE
The schedule recording will start, if SCHEDULE was ON at Record menu. The
SCHEDULE recording will be done according to the SCHEDULE record configuration
table.

The orange REC LED turned on. The color of REC in the status bar is changed to green
from white and the recording progress icon will be on the screen.

1CH SCHEDULE RECORD (Green color)

1CH SCHEDULE ON indicator

4CH SCHEDULE RECORD (Green color)

4CH SCHEDULE ON indicator

NOTE
• Red “REC” together with SCHEDULE ON indicator means SCHEDULE
recording is ON but MANUAL recording is going, because REC button on the
front panel was pressed.

• When DVR is performing MANUAL recording, the SCHEDULE record

configuration is ignored even if SCHEDULE recording is ON because of the
recording priority.

34
3. SEARCH & PLAYBACK MODE
Search and playback the recorded data can be done.
Press SER button at LIVE mode and input password then select drive. (HDD, CF, SD)

3.1. SEARCH MODE

- ALL: Select to search from all recorded image data in a HDD or CF/SD.
- EVENT: Select to search from only the event image data in a HDD or CF/SD.

The search sequence is:

① Select ALL or EVENT, using the up and down arrow button, and then pressing the
MENU/ENTER button. The Search calendar is displayed.
② Select a year and month, using the left and right arrow buttons, and then pressing the
MENU/ENTER button.
The date in red or yellow indicates that there is recorded data on the date.
③ To select a date, use the left and right arrow buttons to move cursor, and then press
MENU/ENTER. The time-hour search screen will be displayed.

< SEARCH CALENDAR SCREEN >

Select Month Select day

35
 ④ To select an hour, use the left and right buttons to move the search bar, and then
press MENU/ENTER.
⑤ To select a minute, use the left and right button to move the search bar, and then
press MENU/ENTER.

The date/time window The date/time window

indicates the search The search bar indicates the search
start time. start minute

< TIME-HOUR SEARCH SCREEN > < MINUTE SEARCH SCREEN >

NOTE (ESC)

• Press button to go back to the previous step.

• Press ( )+( ) at the same time to jump to the LIVE mode immediately
from anywhere in the menu.

36
 3.2. PLAYBACK MODE
You can playback the recorded image for the forward and reverse directions. Fast
forward and fast reverse is also available. The status is displayed at the top of left
corner.

Playback

Playback control

Playback, Fast Forward

Press (right) button (toggle)

Reverse, Fast REV

Press (left) button (toggle)

PAUSE
Press (enter/menu) button

STEP or
Once paused, press (left), (right) button

To cancel PAUSE
Press (enter/menu) button

4. INSTANT BACKUP
It is available to backup manually the recorded images in the backup area of the built-in
hard disk to the external recording device (CF, SD) connected to the DVR.

< INSTANT BACKUP TO CF/SD >

37
 The instant backup sequence is:
① Select backup start time at “MINUTE SEARCH SCREEN” by pressing Fn+left
arrow button.

Press Fn+left arrow

button to select
backup start time

< MINUTE SEARCH SCREEN_SELECT BACKUP START TIME >

② Select backup end time at “MINUTE SEARCH SCREEN” by pressing Fn+right
arrow button.

Press Fn+right arrow

button to select
backup end time

< MINUTE SEARCH SCREEN_SELECT BACKUP END TIME >

③ Then press Fn+MENU/ENTER button to enter backup menu.

< BACKUP MENU SCREEN >

- START TIME: Check backup start time
38
 Press MENU/ENTER button to change start time

- END TIME: Check backup end time

Press MENU/ENTER button to change end time

- TYPE: Select ALL or EVENT, using the up and down arrow button.
- STORAGE: Select CF or SD, using the up and down arrow button.

④ Select BACKUP START, and then press MENU/ENTER.

39
 PC CLIENT SOFTWARE

NOTE: Recommended PC specifications for Client SW

1) CPU: PentiumⅢ 800 MHz or higher
2) Memory (RAM): 128 MB or higher
3) Video RAM: 32 MB or higher
4) Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher
5) OS: Windows 2000／XP
6) Monitor Resolution: XGA or higher

1. INSTALLING PROCEDURES

1.1. Insert the installation CD.

1.2. Run the setup.exe file.
1.3. When the following dialog box appears, click Next.

1.4. Check I accept the agreement, and then click Next.

1.5. Click Next, if you would like to select a different folder, click Browse.

40
1.6. Click Next, if you would like to select a start menu folder, click Browse.

1.7. Select the additional tasks, and them click Next.

1.8. Click Install to continue.

41
 1.9. Click Next to install “Ext2 file system driver”. It’s necessary to use USB2.0
data download function.

1.10. Click Next to continue. No need to check “Ext2fsd source code”, if you don’t
want.

1.11. Click Next to continue. No need to check at here, if you don’t want.

1.12. Click Finish. This completes the Ext2Fsd installation.

1.13. Click Finish again. This completes the installation.

42
2. PC CLIENT OVERVIEW

Network status

PC date/time

ON/OFF button

Local / Live / Remote search

PC Client log
Local Play back or USB playbck buttons Camera/Quad screen selection

3. LOCAL BUTTONS

NETWORK CONNECTION

NETWORK UPGRADE

DETECT & MOUNT MICRO DVR AS USB HDD OF PC

INFORMATION OF PC CLIENT

43
4. PLAYBACK CONTROL BUTTONS

LOCAL PLAYBACK SPEED

LOCAL PLAYBACK STATUS BAR

LOCAL PLAYBACK FILE SEAECH Camera selection/Quad screen

LOCAL PLAYBACK CONTROL

NOTE
• PLAYBACK CONTROL buttons only can be used at the Local playback.
• Cannot use these buttons at the Remote playback.

5. TIME AND DATE DISPLAY

It shows the current time of the PC.

YYYY MM DD (YEAR MONTH DATE)

HH : MM : SS (HOUR : MINUTE : SECOND)

44
6. TO CONNECT THE DVR OVER THE NETWORK

① Press connection button

Input IP address, Port no and check the level (ADMIN or USER) and input the Password
at below window. There is no default password, before set the password at the DVR.

② The IP address can be listed or deleted using buttons.

③ Then click button to make a network connection.

45
7. LOCAL FUNTIONS

③ ④

[LOCAL]

① It means the DVR is connected over the network.

② To disconnect the connection, click it.

③ The IP address of connected DVR.
④ DVR status (REC: The recording is on going.)

To upgrade the DVR over the network

① Click (Upgrade) button. Refer to page 54 for details.

46
8. LIVE FUNCTIONS

[LIVE]

To see live monitoring

① Click (Live) button and then click (Live monitoring) button.

Refer to page for details

To access the setup of the DVR remotely

① Click (Setup) button.

To stop the recording of the DVR remotely

① Click (Recording STOP) button.

47
9. LIVE MONITORING
①

① This icon means the PC received data from the DVR.

② To disconnect the live monitoring, click (Disconnect) button.

③ Date and time of the connected DVR

To change the split of screen

Use buttons
Or click right button on the picture

To print the screen

Click right button of mouse

48
10. REMOTE SETUP

① Click (SETUP) button.

Admin password level can access the remote setup MENU.

② After changed the setup, click APPLY button. Then the changed setup information
will be applied to the DVR.

RECORDING STOP & START

① To stop the recording of the connected DVR, click button.

② Then the DVR will stop the recording and Stop button of PC Client will be changed

to (RECORD) button.

③ To start the recording of the connected DVR, click button.

49
11. REMOTE SEARCH & REMOTE BACKUP

[SEARCH]

To playback the recorded file remotely

① Click (Search) button and then click (Search) button.

To record the remote playback to the PC during playback

(Remote Backup)

① Click (Remote Backup) button. The remote backup icon color will be
changed to red.

To stop the record the remote playback (Remote Backup Stop)

① Click (Red color Remote Backup) button.

50
12. USB BACKUP

STEP1. PREPARING THE DVR FOR USB BACKUP

① In the LIVE mode, Press the MENU/ENTER button, and then it goes to MAIN
MENU mode.
② Press the down button to position the highlight to SHUTDOWN menu.
③ Press the MENU/ENTER button, and then the pop-up window is displayed.
④ Do not switch OFF the DVR.

< SYSTEM SHUTDOWN POP-UP WINDOW >

STEP2. CONNECT THE DVR TO THE PC USING PROVIDED USB CABLE.

STEP3. RUN THE PCCLIENT SOFTWARE AT THE PC.

STEP4. CLICK “Detect” BUTTON

① Click “Detect” button to detect and mount the DVR as a USB drive.
② Then you can see the file folders as below,

③ Open the folder, then files are as below,

Video Files

51
STEP5. BACKUP(COPY) DESIRED FILES INTO THE PC.
① Video files names indicate the recorded date information.
“20050223181231” = 2005(Year)12(Month)23(Day)18(Hour)12(Minute)31(Second)
② Use Windows file explorer to copy the file from the DVR to the PC.
③ Include “.fdx”, “mdx”, “tdx” files along with the video files when backing up video
files.
Example) “20050223181231”,
“20050223181231.fdx”,
“20050223181231.mdx”,
“20050223181231.tdx”
Copy all 4 files together in to your PC.

13. SEARCH BACKUPED FILES FROM YOUR PC

(1) Click “Search” button and select the video file from your PC.

(2) The video file name will be as below,

Video Files

(1) Click “Play” button for playback.

You can playback the recorded image for the forward and reverse directions.
Forward step and reverse step is also available.

52
(2) Click mouse right button at screen to call channel switching screen and print.

Click mouse right

button to call
this screen.

PLAYBACK SPEED
PLAYBACK STATUS BAR

PLAYBACK FILE SEAECH Camera selection/Quad screen

PLAYBACK CONTROL

53
14. NETWORK UPGRADE

(1) Connect the network using ADMIN password.

(2) Input IP address, port & password and press “OK” button.
(3) Then Click “Upgrade” button as below.

Upgrade
Button

(4) Open the first system upgrade image file “MRX_2.X.X.default.bin”.

(5) Wait while the system is being upgraded.
a. “File Transfer” bar shows you the status of file transfer.
b. “System Upgrade” progress bar shows you the status of system upgrade.
Please be patient while the system is being upgraded.
c. Click OK, Then the DVR will restart automatically.
(6) Connect the DVR and click “Upgrade” button again.
(7) Open the second system upgrade image file “MRX_2.X.X.bin”.
(8) Wait while the system is being upgraded.
(9) After upgrade files, the DVR will restart automatically.
(10) Connect the DVR and click “Upgrade” button again.
(11) Open the third system upgrade image file “MRX_2.X.X.lang.bin”
(12) Wait while the system is being upgraded.
(13) After upgrade files, the DVR will restart automatically.

54
 VIDEO CONVERTER

To change Micro DVR file to AVI file

1. BACKUP DESIRED FILES TO YOUR PC

① Video files names indicate the recorded date information.
“20050223181231” = 2005(Year)12(Month)23(Day)18(Hour)12(Minute)31(Second)
② Use Windows file explorer to copy the file from the DVR to the PC.
③ Include “.fdx”, “mdx”, “tdx” files along with the video files when backing up video
files.
Example) “20050223181231”, Í Video File
“20050223181231.fdx”,
“20050223181231.mdx”,
“20050223181231.tdx”
Copy all 4 files together in to your PC.

2. Run “videoconverter.exe”

3. Click “Add” button and select the video file from your PC
4. Select the target directory and click Convert button.
5. To here the voice at the window media player after convert, please kindly install
Sharp G.723 audio codec.

55
Specification of Video Converter

1. Converted File Format : AVI RIFF File Format

Video Converter creates AVI files according to Microsoft AVI file format.
Video Codec: MJPEG
Audio Codec: Sharp G.726 Audio Codec

2. Maximum Size of AVI file : 1 Giga Bytes

3. MRX file : AVI File

MRX : AVI = 1 : 1
One MRX file can be converted one AVI file.
MRX : AVI = N : 1
Several MRX files can be converted one AVI file
MRX : AVI = 1 : N
One MRX file can be converted more than one AVI file.
MRX : AVI = N : N
Several MRX files can be converted several AVI files.

4. New AVI file will be created,

Whenever AVI file size reach 1GBytes,
Whenever hour is changed between frames in one MRX file,
Whenever there is a time different more than 2sec between MRX files,
Whenever recording resolution is changed,

56
 LOGLIST VIEWER

To see the downloaded log list from the DVR using CF or SD card, click loglistviewer
software.

Open the downloaded log list file and save it a windows standard format.

57
APPENDIX.1 MEANING OF LOG LISTS

VIDEOx LOSS: Video is lost on camera x

VIDEOx IN: Video is signaled on camera x
TIME CHANGED: User has changed the system time
HDD FULL: Hard disk is full
CF FULL: CF disk is full
SD FULL: SD disk is full
NOW xxx: xxx is the version before upgrade
NEW xxx: The system will be upgraded to xxx
UPGRADE SUCCESS: Upgrade is successful
ALARMx IN: Alarm x is occurred
MOTIONx IN: Motion on camera x is occurred
RECORD START: Recording is started
RECORD STOP: Recording is stopped
INCORRECT PASSWORD: User entered incorrect password
SEARCH xxxx: Search is done on xxxx
SEARCH LIST: Search list is started
SEARCH STOP: User stopped search
SAVE CONFIGURATION: User has saved menu configuration
INFORMATION: User has viewed the information page
CLEAR DATA xxx: User has cleared data of xxx
NETWORK SETUP: User has set up network setup
POWER OFF: User has turned off power normally
MENU ON: User has entered menu
CONFIG RESET: User hse reset the configuration
ADMIN PASSWORD SET: User has changed "admin password"
USER PASSWORD SET: User has changed "user password"
EDISK 001CF: Error occurred in CF
EDISK 001HD: Error occurred in HDD
EDISK 001SD: Error occurred in SD

58
APPENDIX. 2 MRX Error Messages

EDISK 001
"Disk failure"
EDISK 001HDD
"Disk failure"
EDISK 001SD
"Disk failure"
EDISK 001CF
"Disk failure"
EMICOM 001
"Clock error"
ESYS 001
"Cannot start program"
ESYS 002
"Clear error"
ESYS 003
"Upgrade error"
ESYS 004
"Backup error"
ESYS 005
"Format error"
ESYS 006
"No Upgrade File On CF/SD"
ESYS 007
"DB Recovery Error"
ENET 001
"Connection failed"

59
 SPECIFICATION
Item Type Description Remark
1 or 4 BNC In (Composite),
Video In/Out
1 BNC Out (Composite)
USB 1 USB connector, USB2.0 Slave Data Backup

In/Out Port Network 1 RJ45, Ethernet 100base-T

Serial 1 9-DSUB, RS-232C

2, 4 Terminal Block In
Alarm In/Out
1, 2 Terminal Block Out
720x240, 320x240 pixels NTSC
Frame Size
720x288, 320x288 pixels PAL

Record Speed 1 ~ 30 fps (NTSC), 1~25 fps (PAL)

JPEG Standard,
Compression
4 step Quality Level (Super, High, Medium, Low)
Mode Normal, Event, Pre-Record

Search Mode Time, Event

Key Input Button 13 Buttons Front

Status Status LED 4 LED (POWER, REC, ALM, LAN) Front

OS Embedded Linux
UI OSD
Record, Playback, Menu, System Manager( Log
S/W Manager Information, Video data Down Load, Self Test,
Upgrade), etc.
Recovery Power failure Auto Restart, Watch-Dog

HDD IDE interface, 1HDD (2.5”)

Storage
CF/SD Instant backup to CF/SD card

In DC 10~30V 3A

Power Turn On/Off 1 S/W

Consumption Avg. 6~10 Watts

Dimensions 210x145x43mm (WxDxH)
Mechanical Weight 1 Kg
Ventilation Fan less, Natural Convection, Dustproof Filter
Temp. Operational 0~50℃

60
 ©2007 990480 Rev C 9/07
sonstige andere Zwecke, also nicht als Lichtquellen, rät der Hersteller ausdrücklich ab.
fähige, wiederaufladbare, tragbare Lichtquellen vorgesehen. Vom Einsatz der Streamlight-Lampen für
PRODUKT-EINSATZ: Streamlight-Lampen sind für den Einsatz als sehr intensive, widerstands-
(Online Product Registration) auf. Bewahren Sie die Quittung oder den Kaufbeleg auf.
PRODUKTREGISTRIERUNG – Um Ihr Produkt zu registrieren, rufen Sie www.streamlight.com
WICHTIGER HINWEIS – Verwenden Sie ausschließlich original Streamlight®-Ersatzteile.
Bedienungsanleitung
déconseillée par le fabricant.
torches Streamlight pour une application autre qu’une source de lumière est spécifiquement
source d’éclairage à haute intensité, portable, rechargeable, pour service sévère. L’utilisation des
Instructions d’utilisation UTILISATION DU PRODUIT – Les torches Streamlight sont construites pour utilisation comme
duit (enregistrement en ligne du produit). Conservez votre reçu ou toute preuve d’achat.
ENREGISTREMENT DU PRODUIT – Visitez le site www.streamlight.com pour enregistrer votre pro-
Instrucciones de funcionamiento
IMPORTANT – Il ne faut utiliser que des pièces de rechange d’origine Streamlight®.
Operating Instructions
hazada por el fabricante.
Streamlight para cualquier otra finalidad, además de una fuente de luz, está específicamente rec-
fuentes de luz de alta intensidad, para trabajos pesados, recargables y portátiles. La utilización de
UTILIZACIÓN DEL PRODUCTO - Las linternas Streamlight se han diseñado para utilizarse como
(registro de producto por Internet). Conserve su recibo o prueba de compra.
RECHARGEABLES
REGISTRO DE PRODUCTO – Para registrar este producto visite www.streamlight.com
IMPORTANTE – Asegúrese de utilizar piezas de repuesto genuinas de Streamlight®.
sources is specifically discouraged by the manufacturer.
rechargeable, portable light sources. Use of the flashlights for any purpose other than light
PRODUCT USE: Streamlight flashlights are intended for use as high intensity, heavy duty,
(Online Product Registration). Retain your receipt or any proof of purchase.
PRODUCT REGISTRATION: To register your product, go to www.streamlight.com
IMPORTANT – Be sure to use genuine Streamlight® replacement parts.
Maximum Charge Continuous Charge
Length Weight Material Lamp Battery
Output Rate Run Tim Time
SL-20XP 13” 1.0 lbs. Super Tough 6 Volt 8 watt 5 Sub ‘C’ Up to 25,000 180 mA 1.5 hours 12-14
• Genuine Streamlight Parts and Accessories. (8 watt) Nylon Halogen Welded Stick Candlepower hours
IMPORTANT: Be sure to use genuine Streamlight replacement parts.
SL-20XP 13” 1.0 lbs. Super Tough 6 Volt 3 watt 5 Sub ‘C’ Up to 8,000 180 mA 3.75 hours 12-14
(3 watt) Nylon Halogen Welded Stick Candlepower hours
• Repuestos y accesorios genuinos de Streamlight.
IMPORTANTE: Use solamente repuestos genuinos de Streamlight. SL-20X 13” 1.8 lbs. Aircraft 6 Volt 10 watt 5 “1/2D” Up to 30,000 220 mA 1.5 hours 12-14
Aluminum Halogen Welded Stick Candlepower hours
• Pièces et accessoires Streamlight authentiques. SL-35X 17” 2.8 lbs. Aircraft 6 Volt 20 watt 5 “D” Up to 40,000 400 mA 1.5 hours 12-14
IMPORTANT: Il ne faut utiliser que des pièces de rechange Streamlight authentiques. Aluminum Halogen Welded Stick Candlepower hours
• Teile und Zubehör nur von Streamlight.
WICHTIG: Bitte nur Ersatzteile von Streamlight verwenden. Tiempo de
Salida Velocidad Tiempo
Longitud Peso Material Lámpara Pila funcionamiento
máxima de carga de carga
continuo
SL-20XP 33 cm 453 g Nilón Halógeno 6 volt Cilindro soldado Hasta 25.000 180 mA 1,5 horas 12-14
(8 vatios) superduro 8 vatios 5 Sub ‘C’ bujías horas
SL-20XP 33 cm 453 g Nilón Halógeno 6 volt Cilindro soldado Hasta 8000 180 mA 3.75 horas 12-14
(3 vatios) superduro 3 vatios 5 Sub ‘C’ bujías horas
SL-20X 33 cm 815 g Aluminio para Halógeno Cilindro soldado Hasta 30.000 220 mA 1,5 horas 12-14
aviones 6 volt 10 vatios 5 “1/2D” bujías horas
SL-35X 43,1 cm 1 268 g Aluminio para Halógeno Cilindro soldado Hasta 40.000 400 mA 1,5 horas 12-14
aviones 6 volt 20 vatios 5 “D” bujías horas
Intensité Durée Temps
Puissance
Longueur Poids Matériau Ampoule Accu de d’utilisation de
max.
Please visit recharge continue recharge
SL-20XP 33 cm 453 g Nylon extrême- 6 V, 8 W 5 accus soudés 25 000 180 mA 1,5 h 12 à 14
(8 W) ment résistant halogène « sub C » candelas heures
www.streamlight.com SL-20XP
(3 W)
33 cm 453 g Nylon extrême-
ment résistant
6 V, 3 W
halogène
5 accus soudés
« sub C »
8 000
candela
180 mA 3, 75 h 12 à 14
heures
SL-20X 33 cm 815 g Aluminium 6 V, 10 W 5 accus soudés 30 000 220 mA 1,5 h 12 à 14
for an pour aviation halogène « 1/2 D » candelas heures
SL-35X 43,1 cm 1 268 g Aluminium 6 V, 20 W 5 accus soudés 40 000 400 mA 1,5 h 12 à 14
pour aviation halogène «D» candelas heures
Authorized
Maximale Durchgehende
Service Center Länge Breite Material Lampe Batterie Laderate Ladedauer
Leistung Leuchtzeit
SL-20XP 33 cm 453 g Super-wider- 6 Volt 8 watt 5 Sub ‘C’ Bis zu 25.000 180 mA 1,5 Stunden 12-14
near you. (8 watt) standsfähiges Halogen geschweißter Kerzenstärken Stunden
Nylon Stab
SL-20XP 33 cm 453 g Super-wider- 6 Volt 3 watt 5 Sub ‘C’ Bis zu 8.000 180 mA 3,75 Stunden 12-14
(3 watt) Nylon standsfähiges Halogen geschweißter Kerzenstärken Stunden
Stab
SL-20X 33 cm 815 g Flugzeug- 6 Volt 10 watt 5 “1/2D” Bis zu 30.000 220 mA 1,5 Stunden 12-14
Aluminium Halogen geschweißter Kerzenstärken Stunden
Stab
SL-35X 43,1 cm 1 268 g Flugzeug- 6 Volt 20 watt 5 “D” Bis zu 40.000 400 mA 1,5 Stunden 12-14
Aluminium Halogen geschweißter Kerzenstärken Stunden
Stab
 The rechargeable battery contained in this product is recyclable. At the end of its useful life, under various country and state laws, it may be illegal to dispose of this battery in the municipal solid waste stream. Check with
your local solid waste officials for details in your area for recycling options or proper disposal.
La pila recargable de este producto es recicable. Al final de su vida útil, de acuerdo con las leyes de diferentes países y estados, puede ser ilegal deshacerse de esta pila en el sistema municipal de residuos sólidos. Llame a
los funcionarios encargados del control de residuos sólidos de su área para enterarse sobre las opciones de reciclaje o cómo deshacerse de la pila de forma apropiada.
L’accu contenu dans cette torche est recyclable. Dans certains pays, il peut être illégal de mettre cet accu aux ordures ménagères à la fin de son service utile. Consulter les autorités appropriées pour le recyclage de ces accus.
Die in diesem Produkt verwendete wiederaufladbare Batterie ist recycelbar. In einigen Ländern ist es aufgrund der regionalen Gesetzgebung verboten, Batterien nach Ablauf ihrer Lebensdauer dem allgemeinen Hausmüll
zuzuführen. Informieren Sie sich bitte bei der zuständigen Behörde nach den für Ihren Bezirk gültigen Bestimmungen für das Recycling oder für die Entsorgung im Hausmüll.
ENGLISH
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR STREAMLIGHT RECHARGEABLES
Thank you for selecting Streamlight, truly remarkable portable lights. As with any fine instrument,
reasonable care and maintenance of this product will provide years of dependable service.
Please read this manual before using your Streamlight. It includes important safety and operating
instructions and should be saved. Flashlight must be charged overnight before first use.
SAFETY
A. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. This manual contains important safety and operating instructions for
operating your Streamlight and charger.
B. DO NOT OVERDISCHARGE NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERIES. Read the instructions under Care and Use of
Nickel-Cadmium Batteries in this manual.
C. BEFORE USING THE BATTERY CHARGER, READ ALL INSTRUCTIONS AND CAUTIONARY MARKINGS ON
THE CHARGER.
D. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, or personal injury, do not attempt to use this
charger with any other attachment or unit. Likewise, do not attempt to charge the Streamlight with any
other charger.
WARNING: Never leave your Streamlight with its face against any surface while in operation. The
resultant heat build-up can cause a fire.
E. DON'T ABUSE THE CORD. Never carry charger and holder by cord or yank it to disconnect the charger
from a receptacle.
F. PLUG CHARGER DIRECTLY INTO AN ELECTRICAL OUTLET. DO NOT use an extension cord.
G. DO NOT OPERATE A DAMAGED CHARGER. Have damaged cords or plugs replaced immediately.
H. REMOVE THE FLASHLIGHT FROM THE CHARGER HOLDER BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY ROUTINE
CLEANING OR MAINTENANCE. DO NOT try to repair the unit or charger yourself. Take it to a qualified
service facility.
I. DO NOT INCINERATE THE BATTERY, EVEN IF IT IS SEVERELY DAMAGED OR COMPLETELY WORN OUT.
The batteries can explode in a fire. Handle the battery stick carefully and never attempt to short circuit.
J. A SMALL LEAKAGE OF LIQUID FROM THE BATTERY CELLS MAY OCCUR UNDER EXTREME USAGE OR
TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS. This does not necessarily indicate a failure. However, if the outer case seal
is broken and the leakage gets on your skin:
1) Wash promptly with soap and water.
2) Neutralize with a mild acid, such as lemon juice or vinegar.
3) If battery liquid gets into your eyes, flush them with clear water for a minimum of 10 minutes and seek
immediate medical attention. (Medical note: The liquid is a 25-35% solution of potassium hydroxide.)
K. DO NOT PUT ANY METAL OBJECTS INTO THE CHARGING TERMINALS LOCATED IN THE CHARGER
HOLDER. Although there is no electrical shock hazard, this action could cause a burn injury.
L. Use of this product for other than a lighting device is not recommended. Manufacturer specifically
disclaims liability for other than recommended use.
M. Always observe battery polarity. A reversed battery will damage the Streamlight when charging is
attempted. Never attempt to charge any batteries other than the nickel-cadmium type battery that is
Streamlight original equipment. Recharging alkaline or carbon zinc batteries will damage the light.
MOUNTING THE CHARGER
The Streamlight charger should never be mounted against any vinyl or heat sensitive surface.
The charger is designed to be mounted in any position up to 90° from vertical and up to six feet from its
power source. AC and DC power cords are available. Each of the Streamlight power cords has a molded
plug, which is keyed, and will fit into the charger only one (1) way. Use only approved Streamlight chargers
and holders. Decide on a convenient location and make sure there is enough clearance to retrieve the
flashlight.
Use the charging sleeve itself as a template and mark the location of the mounting holes with a scribe. Drill
the appropriate holes for the hardware you intend to use. The screws provided require 5/64" holes. Mount
the charger securely to the mounting surface.
Plug the charger cord into the charger sleeve and then connect the charger to an appropriate power source.
All DC chargers, those with cigarette lighter adapters or unterminated leads, are meant for 12V DC, 15 volts
maximum.
Before mounting a Streamlight charger in a vehicle, please read the following section.
INSTALLING A DIRECT WIRE CHARGER
The 12V DC Direct Wire Charge Cord (#22050) is offered for those who would like to permanently mount a
Streamlight charger in their vehicle.
IMPORTANT: Before making electrical connections in a vehicle, keep in mind that a shorted auto battery can
deliver hundreds of amperes, which can easily start a fire. Make all connections with insulated solder joints,
lugs, or other devices intended for such use. Be sure that your installation is fused.
Depending on the Streamlight model and the condition of its battery, a Streamlight can draw up to .4 amps,
400 mA. Ordinarily, it is recommended that the light be connected directly to the battery. If your vehicle is
used infrequently, i.e., weekly, we suggest that a Streamlight be hooked to an ignition key-switched line to
prevent the vehicle battery from discharging.
If you are familiar with a vehicle's electrical system, installing the Streamlight charger can be quite simple.
The positive lead (striped) should be connected to the far side of an unswitched fuse holder; this is the side
which is dead with fuse removed. The negative lead (unmarked) should be connected to a convenient
chassis ground. Some vehicles have an accessory fuse holder. If you install your own fuse, a one amp slow-
blow is recommended.
CHARGING
Remember to fully charge before use. Several charge/discharge cycles are necessary to achieve full battery
capacity. The Streamlight is designed to be left on charge continuously between uses. This ensures that the
light is always ready for use. There is no danger of overcharging the battery. See Care and Use of Batteries
for additional battery information.
To charge the Streamlight, turn off and insert it into the charger/holder. If the LED's are lit, it indicates that
the battery is charging. It takes approximately 12-14 hours for a full charge; 5-6 hours for a 60% charge. In
cases where the battery is severely discharged, it may take a few seconds for the LED’s to light.
With the proper lamp module installed, the Streamlight should run at least one hour after a full charge.
NOTE: Leaving the flashlight on, once the lamp has become dim, can reduce the useful life of the battery.
It is possible to extend the run time with some loss of intensity on an SL-20X or 35X by replacing its lamp
module with an SL-20XP or 20X lamp, respectively.
Also, the intensity of the SL-20XP and 20X can be increased at a loss of run time by replacing its lamp
module with an SL-20X or 35X lamp module, respectively. For lamp module identification, see the color code
list in Lamp Module Replacement.
CARE AND USE OF NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERIES
Since opinions within the battery manufacturing industry vary concerning the characteristics of nickel-
cadmiums, we do not intend to give a complete technical explanation of their operation. We would rather
describe as simply as possible how to get the most use from the nickel-cadmium batteries supplied with the
Streamlight.
1. Thoroughly read the section in this manual concerning safety procedures and charging the Streamlight.
2. Fully charge before first use.
 230 V Wechselstrom-Ladekabel Cordon de base de recharge en 230 V courant alternatif Cordón de cargador 230 V de CA 230V AC Charge Cord 22664
continu DC1, sans adaptateur d’allume-cigares without Plug
DC2-Ladekabel ohne Stecker Cordon de base de recharge en courant Cordón de carga CD2 sin enchufe DC2 Charge Cord 22050
Stecker für Zigarettenanzünder continu DC1, avec adaptateur d’allume-cigares con enchufe para encendedor with Lighter Plug
DC1-Ladekabel mit Cordon de base de recharge en courant Cordón de carga CD1 DC1 Charge Cord 22051
120 V Wechselstromladekabel Cordon de base de recharge en 120 V courant alternatif Cordón de carga 120 V de CA 120V AC Charge Cord 22311
Ladeschlauch (alle Modelle) Base de recharge (tous) Camisa de carga (todos) Charge Sleeve (all) 22052
Ladegeräte (alle Modelle) Nicht abgebildet
Accu (tous) Pas montré
Cargador (todo) No se muestra
Chargers (all) – – Not Shown
Schaumstoffverkleidung, nur 20XP Manchon en mousse, 20XP seulement Camisa de espuma, sólo 20XP Foam Sleeve, 20XP Only 250006 1 12
Gehäuse-Vorrichtung, 20XP gelb Corps, 20XP, jaune Conjunto de cuerpo, 20XP amarillo Body Assembly, 20XP Yellow 250012-2
Gehäuse-Vorrichtung, 20XP orange Corps, 20XP, orange Conjunto de cuerpo, 20XP naranja Body Assembly, 20XP Orange 250012-1
Gehäuse-Vorrichtung, 20XP schwarz Corps, 20XP, noir Conjunto de cuerpo, 20XP negro Body Assembly, 20XP Black 250012
Kontaktanschluß und -Streifen) le collet de contact et la languette) brida de contacto y tira) Contact Flange, and Strip)
(inklusive Gehäuseverkleidung, (comprend le manchon du corps, (incluye camisa de cuerpo, (includes Body Sleeve,
Gehäuse-Vorrichtung, 20XP Fût et projecteur, 20XP Conjunto de cuerpo, 20XP Body Assembly, 20XP
Kopf-/Zylinder-Vorrichtung, 35X Fût et projecteur, 35X Conjunto cabezal/barril, 35X Head/Barrel Assembly, 35X 351417
Kopf-/Zylinder-Vorrichtung, 20X Fût et projecteur, 20X Conjunto cabezal/barril, 20X Head/Barrel Assembly, 20X 201417 1 11
Schalterbausatz, 35X Kit de commutateur, 35X Juego de interruptor, 35X Switch Kit, 35X 35140
Schalterbausatz, 20X Kit de commutateur, 20X Juego de interruptor, 20X Switch Kit, 20X 20140
Schalterbausatz, 20XP Kit de commutateur, 20XP Juego de interruptor, 20XP Switch Kit, 20XP 25140 1 10
Kopf-„O“-Ring (alle Modelle) Joint torique de projecteur (tous) Aro tórico de cabezal (todos) Head "O" Ring (all) 201604 1 9
Lampenmodul, 35X Module d’éclairage, 35X Módulo de lámpara, 35X Lamp Module, 35X 35110
Lampenmodul, 20X Module d’éclairage, 20X Módulo de lámpara, 20X Lamp Module, 20X 20110
Lampenmodul, 20XP (3 Watt) Module de lampe, 20XP (3 W) Módulo de lámpara, 20XP (3 vatios) Lamp Module, 20XP (3 watt) 25157
Lampenmodul, 20XP (8 Watt) Module de lampe, 20XP (8 W) Módulo de lámpara, 20XP (8 vatios) Lamp Module, 20XP (8 watt) 25107 1 8
Linse (alle Modelle) Diffuseur, tous les modèles Lentes (todas) Lens (all) 20160 1 7
„O“-Ring, 20XP Linsenabdeckung Joint torique de bague de retenue, 20XP Aro tórico, tapa frontal 20XP "O" Ring, 20XP Face Cap 250005
„O“-Ring, 20X und 35X Linsenabdeckung Joint torique de bague de retenue, 20X et 35X Aro tórico, tapa frontal 20X y 35X "O" Ring, 20X & 35X Face Cap 201604 1 6
Linsenabdeckung, 20X und 35X Bague de retenue, 20X et 35X Tapa frontal, 20X y 35X Face Cap, 20X & 35X 201601
Linsenabdeckung, 20XP gelb Bague de retenue, 20XP, jaune Tapa frontal, 20XP amarilla Face Cap, 20XP Yellow 250002-2
Linsenabdeckung, 20XP orange Bague de retenue, 20XP, orange Tapa frontal, 20XP naranja Face Cap, 20XP Orange 250002-1
Linsenabdeckung, 20XP schwarz Bague de retenue, 20XP, noir Tapa frontal, 20XP negra Face Cap, 20XP Black 250002 1 5
Batterie 35X Accu, 35X Pila, 35X Battery, 35X 35170
Batterie, 20X Accu, 20X Pila, 20X Battery, 20X 20170
Batterie, 20XP Accu, 20XP Pila, 20XP Battery, 20XP 25170 1 4
„O“-Ring 20X und 35X Endkappe Joint torique, capuchon inférieur, 20X et 35X Aro tórico, tapa trasera 20X y 35X "O" ring, 20X & 35X Tail Cap 151706
„O“-Ring, 20XP Endkappe Joint torique, capuchon inférieur, 20XP Aro tórico, tapa trasera 20XP "O" ring, 20XP Tail Cap 250008 1 3
Feder, 20X und 35X Endkappe Ressort de capuchon inférieur, 20X et 35X Resorte, tapa trasera 20X y 35X Spring, 20X & 35X Tail Cap 201777
Feder, 20XP Endkappe Ressort de capuchon inférieur, 20XP Resorte, tapa trasera 20XP Spring, 20XP Tail Cap 250009 1 2
Endkappe, 20X und 35X Culot, 20X et 35X Tapa trasera, 20X y 35X Tail Cap, 20X & 35X 201708
Endkappe, 20XP gelb Culot, 20XP, jaune Tapa trasera, 20XP amarillo Tail Cap, 20XP Yellow 250003-2
Endkappe, 20XP orange Culot, 20XP, orange Tapa trasera, 20XP naranja Tail Cap, 20XP Orange 250003-1
Endkappe, 20XP schwarz Culot, 20XP, noir Tapa trasera, 20XP negro Tail Cap, 20XP Black 250003 1 1
Teil-Nr. Menge Artikel
N° de pièce Quantité Réf.
Nº de pieza Cantidad Artículo
Beschreibung Description Descripción Description Part No. Quantity Item
Replacement Parts • Piezas de Repuesto • Pièces de Rechange • Ersatzteile

3. Although the Streamlight is designed to be left on charge continuously, there are exceptions. If the 7. Replace face cap, battery stick and tail cap. While screwing the face cap on, try to keep the lamp module
surrounding temperature is below 10°F, continuous charging is not recommended. Additionally, if the from twisting by keeping pressure on the lens. If the lamp module twists, it will twist the wires behind it.
light is going to be unused for three months or more, remove from charge. Do not overtighten the face cap and the tail cap of the SL-20XP.
4. There are special considerations to note when using multi-cell rechargeable nickel-cadmium batteries, 8. Your Streamlight should be ready for use.
such as those found in certain Streamlight flashlights. If a nickel-cadmium battery is subject to repeated WARNING: Be sure to use genuine Streamlight replacement parts. Use of another manufacturer's
and extensive overdeep discharges, such as an aggressive conditioning procedure to eliminate "memory," replacement parts could affect product performance.
which runs the battery down completely on a regular basis, it can experience a voltage reversal of one of
the five cells. This can cause a build up of pressure inside the cell which could lead to venting of the
electrolyte, cell damage and early battery failure. In addition, should the pressure relief vent on the top
of the battery stick become damaged, this pressure build up could lead to the cell's bursting and possible
injury.
5. To obtain the safest and longest service from your rechargeable products, Streamlight, Inc., in
conjunction with the leading manufacturers of nickel-cadmium batteries, offers the following
recommendations:
A. Do not overdischarge nickel-cadmium batteries. Never leave the flashlight on once the lamp becomes
dim. Discharging the battery past this point can damage it or shorten its life.
B. Do not periodically "condition" or "exercise" your flashlight battery despite what you may have been
told about nickel-cadmium "memory." According to the most recent reports gained from technical
manuals of battery manufacturers, the actual existence of "memory" is extremely unlikely. A regular
ritual of deep discharging is specifically not recommended, unnecessary and will greatly shorten
battery and lamp life.
C. If the battery is overdischarged, there may be a small leakage of alkaline electrolyte from the safety
vent area on top of the cell. It appears as a white powdery substance and can affect the integrity of
the electrical contact. We recommend that your battery be periodically inspected and the contact area
wiped clean should any evidence of electrolyte leakage be present. Use caution when handling a STREAMLIGHT® LIMITED LIFETIME WARRANTY
battery that has leaked. The electrolyte is a strong caustic and can burn or irritate the skin and eyes.
D. While inspecting the battery, take note of the condition of the positive terminal cap on the top cell. Streamlight warrants this product to be free of defect for a lifetime of use. We will repair, replace
Some suppliers' batteries are subject to vent damage if this cap is dented, and the battery should be or refund the purchase price, at our option, of any Streamlight product that does not work or that you
replaced or serviced.
manage to break for as long as you own it.
NOTE: The rechargeable battery contained in this product is recyclable. At the end of its useful life, under
various country and state laws, it may be illegal to dispose of this battery in the municipal solid waste Of course, this limited lifetime warranty excludes abuse, batteries, bulbs and chargers.
stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for details in your area for recycling options or proper Rechargeable batteries and chargers have a one (1) year warranty with proof of purchase. Please
disposal or call 1-800-822-8837 for locating a drop off site near you. return your Streamlight to our factory to take advantage of this guarantee. Go to
LAMP MODULE REPLACEMENT www.streamlight.com for the location of an authorized Streamlight repair center near you.
1. Before working on the Streamlight, remove the tail cap and battery.
2. Unscrew and remove face cap to expose lamp module. note: One (1) "O" Ring and lens should stay in the
face cap as a sub-assembly, unless the lens is to be replaced. One (1) "O" Ring should stay on the
flashlight's head.
3. Pull lamp module an inch or so out of the flashlight and disconnect wires by pulling on the connectors,
rather than tugging on the wires themselves.
4. Check with the guide below to ensure compatibility of lamp module and flashlight.
Lamp Module Identification
SL-20XP (8 watt) lamp modules are black color coded, #25107
SL-20XP (3 watt) lamp modules are blue color coded, #25157
SL-20X lamp modules are white color coded, #20110
SL-35X lamp modules are red color coded, #35110 Serial # _________________________________________________________
5. Push connectors on to lamp pins; polarity can be disregarded.
6. Place lamp module back into flashlight, taking care not to pinch or twist wires. Before replacing the face Date of Purchase ______________________
cap, it is generally advised that the "O" Ring on the flashlight head be lightly coated with a household
lubricant.
 ©2007 990480 Rev C 9/07
sonstige andere Zwecke, also nicht als Lichtquellen, rät der Hersteller ausdrücklich ab.
fähige, wiederaufladbare, tragbare Lichtquellen vorgesehen. Vom Einsatz der Streamlight-Lampen für
PRODUKT-EINSATZ: Streamlight-Lampen sind für den Einsatz als sehr intensive, widerstands-
(Online Product Registration) auf. Bewahren Sie die Quittung oder den Kaufbeleg auf.
PRODUKTREGISTRIERUNG – Um Ihr Produkt zu registrieren, rufen Sie www.streamlight.com
WICHTIGER HINWEIS – Verwenden Sie ausschließlich original Streamlight®-Ersatzteile.
Bedienungsanleitung
déconseillée par le fabricant.
torches Streamlight pour une application autre qu’une source de lumière est spécifiquement
source d’éclairage à haute intensité, portable, rechargeable, pour service sévère. L’utilisation des
Instructions d’utilisation UTILISATION DU PRODUIT – Les torches Streamlight sont construites pour utilisation comme
duit (enregistrement en ligne du produit). Conservez votre reçu ou toute preuve d’achat.
ENREGISTREMENT DU PRODUIT – Visitez le site www.streamlight.com pour enregistrer votre pro-
Instrucciones de funcionamiento
IMPORTANT – Il ne faut utiliser que des pièces de rechange d’origine Streamlight®.
Operating Instructions
hazada por el fabricante.
Streamlight para cualquier otra finalidad, además de una fuente de luz, está específicamente rec-
fuentes de luz de alta intensidad, para trabajos pesados, recargables y portátiles. La utilización de
UTILIZACIÓN DEL PRODUCTO - Las linternas Streamlight se han diseñado para utilizarse como
(registro de producto por Internet). Conserve su recibo o prueba de compra.
RECHARGEABLES
REGISTRO DE PRODUCTO – Para registrar este producto visite www.streamlight.com
IMPORTANTE – Asegúrese de utilizar piezas de repuesto genuinas de Streamlight®.
sources is specifically discouraged by the manufacturer.
rechargeable, portable light sources. Use of the flashlights for any purpose other than light
PRODUCT USE: Streamlight flashlights are intended for use as high intensity, heavy duty,
(Online Product Registration). Retain your receipt or any proof of purchase.
PRODUCT REGISTRATION: To register your product, go to www.streamlight.com
IMPORTANT – Be sure to use genuine Streamlight® replacement parts.
Maximum Charge Continuous Charge
Length Weight Material Lamp Battery
Output Rate Run Tim Time
SL-20XP 13” 1.0 lbs. Super Tough 6 Volt 8 watt 5 Sub ‘C’ Up to 25,000 180 mA 1.5 hours 12-14
• Genuine Streamlight Parts and Accessories. (8 watt) Nylon Halogen Welded Stick Candlepower hours
IMPORTANT: Be sure to use genuine Streamlight replacement parts.
SL-20XP 13” 1.0 lbs. Super Tough 6 Volt 3 watt 5 Sub ‘C’ Up to 8,000 180 mA 3.75 hours 12-14
(3 watt) Nylon Halogen Welded Stick Candlepower hours
• Repuestos y accesorios genuinos de Streamlight.
IMPORTANTE: Use solamente repuestos genuinos de Streamlight. SL-20X 13” 1.8 lbs. Aircraft 6 Volt 10 watt 5 “1/2D” Up to 30,000 220 mA 1.5 hours 12-14
Aluminum Halogen Welded Stick Candlepower hours
• Pièces et accessoires Streamlight authentiques. SL-35X 17” 2.8 lbs. Aircraft 6 Volt 20 watt 5 “D” Up to 40,000 400 mA 1.5 hours 12-14
IMPORTANT: Il ne faut utiliser que des pièces de rechange Streamlight authentiques. Aluminum Halogen Welded Stick Candlepower hours
• Teile und Zubehör nur von Streamlight.
WICHTIG: Bitte nur Ersatzteile von Streamlight verwenden. Tiempo de
Salida Velocidad Tiempo
Longitud Peso Material Lámpara Pila funcionamiento
máxima de carga de carga
continuo
SL-20XP 33 cm 453 g Nilón Halógeno 6 volt Cilindro soldado Hasta 25.000 180 mA 1,5 horas 12-14
(8 vatios) superduro 8 vatios 5 Sub ‘C’ bujías horas
SL-20XP 33 cm 453 g Nilón Halógeno 6 volt Cilindro soldado Hasta 8000 180 mA 3.75 horas 12-14
(3 vatios) superduro 3 vatios 5 Sub ‘C’ bujías horas
SL-20X 33 cm 815 g Aluminio para Halógeno Cilindro soldado Hasta 30.000 220 mA 1,5 horas 12-14
aviones 6 volt 10 vatios 5 “1/2D” bujías horas
SL-35X 43,1 cm 1 268 g Aluminio para Halógeno Cilindro soldado Hasta 40.000 400 mA 1,5 horas 12-14
aviones 6 volt 20 vatios 5 “D” bujías horas
Intensité Durée Temps
Puissance
Longueur Poids Matériau Ampoule Accu de d’utilisation de
max.
Please visit recharge continue recharge
SL-20XP 33 cm 453 g Nylon extrême- 6 V, 8 W 5 accus soudés 25 000 180 mA 1,5 h 12 à 14
(8 W) ment résistant halogène « sub C » candelas heures
www.streamlight.com SL-20XP
(3 W)
33 cm 453 g Nylon extrême-
ment résistant
6 V, 3 W
halogène
5 accus soudés
« sub C »
8 000
candela
180 mA 3, 75 h 12 à 14
heures
SL-20X 33 cm 815 g Aluminium 6 V, 10 W 5 accus soudés 30 000 220 mA 1,5 h 12 à 14
for an pour aviation halogène « 1/2 D » candelas heures
SL-35X 43,1 cm 1 268 g Aluminium 6 V, 20 W 5 accus soudés 40 000 400 mA 1,5 h 12 à 14
pour aviation halogène «D» candelas heures
Authorized
Maximale Durchgehende
Service Center Länge Breite Material Lampe Batterie Laderate Ladedauer
Leistung Leuchtzeit
SL-20XP 33 cm 453 g Super-wider- 6 Volt 8 watt 5 Sub ‘C’ Bis zu 25.000 180 mA 1,5 Stunden 12-14
near you. (8 watt) standsfähiges Halogen geschweißter Kerzenstärken Stunden
Nylon Stab
SL-20XP 33 cm 453 g Super-wider- 6 Volt 3 watt 5 Sub ‘C’ Bis zu 8.000 180 mA 3,75 Stunden 12-14
(3 watt) Nylon standsfähiges Halogen geschweißter Kerzenstärken Stunden
Stab
SL-20X 33 cm 815 g Flugzeug- 6 Volt 10 watt 5 “1/2D” Bis zu 30.000 220 mA 1,5 Stunden 12-14
Aluminium Halogen geschweißter Kerzenstärken Stunden
Stab
SL-35X 43,1 cm 1 268 g Flugzeug- 6 Volt 20 watt 5 “D” Bis zu 40.000 400 mA 1,5 Stunden 12-14
Aluminium Halogen geschweißter Kerzenstärken Stunden
Stab
 230 V Wechselstrom-Ladekabel Cordon de base de recharge en 230 V courant alternatif Cordón de cargador 230 V de CA 230V AC Charge Cord 22664
continu DC1, sans adaptateur d’allume-cigares without Plug
DC2-Ladekabel ohne Stecker Cordon de base de recharge en courant Cordón de carga CD2 sin enchufe DC2 Charge Cord 22050
Stecker für Zigarettenanzünder continu DC1, avec adaptateur d’allume-cigares con enchufe para encendedor with Lighter Plug
DC1-Ladekabel mit Cordon de base de recharge en courant Cordón de carga CD1 DC1 Charge Cord 22051
120 V Wechselstromladekabel Cordon de base de recharge en 120 V courant alternatif Cordón de carga 120 V de CA 120V AC Charge Cord 22311
Ladeschlauch (alle Modelle) Base de recharge (tous) Camisa de carga (todos) Charge Sleeve (all) 22052
Ladegeräte (alle Modelle) Nicht abgebildet
Accu (tous) Pas montré
Cargador (todo) No se muestra
Chargers (all) – – Not Shown
Schaumstoffverkleidung, nur 20XP Manchon en mousse, 20XP seulement Camisa de espuma, sólo 20XP Foam Sleeve, 20XP Only 250006 1 12
Gehäuse-Vorrichtung, 20XP gelb Corps, 20XP, jaune Conjunto de cuerpo, 20XP amarillo Body Assembly, 20XP Yellow 250012-2
Gehäuse-Vorrichtung, 20XP orange Corps, 20XP, orange Conjunto de cuerpo, 20XP naranja Body Assembly, 20XP Orange 250012-1
Gehäuse-Vorrichtung, 20XP schwarz Corps, 20XP, noir Conjunto de cuerpo, 20XP negro Body Assembly, 20XP Black 250012
Kontaktanschluß und -Streifen) le collet de contact et la languette) brida de contacto y tira) Contact Flange, and Strip)
(inklusive Gehäuseverkleidung, (comprend le manchon du corps, (incluye camisa de cuerpo, (includes Body Sleeve,
Gehäuse-Vorrichtung, 20XP Fût et projecteur, 20XP Conjunto de cuerpo, 20XP Body Assembly, 20XP
Kopf-/Zylinder-Vorrichtung, 35X Fût et projecteur, 35X Conjunto cabezal/barril, 35X Head/Barrel Assembly, 35X 351417
Kopf-/Zylinder-Vorrichtung, 20X Fût et projecteur, 20X Conjunto cabezal/barril, 20X Head/Barrel Assembly, 20X 201417 1 11
Schalterbausatz, 35X Kit de commutateur, 35X Juego de interruptor, 35X Switch Kit, 35X 35140
Schalterbausatz, 20X Kit de commutateur, 20X Juego de interruptor, 20X Switch Kit, 20X 20140
Schalterbausatz, 20XP Kit de commutateur, 20XP Juego de interruptor, 20XP Switch Kit, 20XP 25140 1 10
Kopf-„O“-Ring (alle Modelle) Joint torique de projecteur (tous) Aro tórico de cabezal (todos) Head "O" Ring (all) 201604 1 9
Lampenmodul, 35X Module d’éclairage, 35X Módulo de lámpara, 35X Lamp Module, 35X 35110
Lampenmodul, 20X Module d’éclairage, 20X Módulo de lámpara, 20X Lamp Module, 20X 20110
Lampenmodul, 20XP (3 Watt) Module de lampe, 20XP (3 W) Módulo de lámpara, 20XP (3 vatios) Lamp Module, 20XP (3 watt) 25157
Lampenmodul, 20XP (8 Watt) Module de lampe, 20XP (8 W) Módulo de lámpara, 20XP (8 vatios) Lamp Module, 20XP (8 watt) 25107 1 8
Linse (alle Modelle) Diffuseur, tous les modèles Lentes (todas) Lens (all) 20160 1 7
„O“-Ring, 20XP Linsenabdeckung Joint torique de bague de retenue, 20XP Aro tórico, tapa frontal 20XP "O" Ring, 20XP Face Cap 250005
„O“-Ring, 20X und 35X Linsenabdeckung Joint torique de bague de retenue, 20X et 35X Aro tórico, tapa frontal 20X y 35X "O" Ring, 20X & 35X Face Cap 201604 1 6
Linsenabdeckung, 20X und 35X Bague de retenue, 20X et 35X Tapa frontal, 20X y 35X Face Cap, 20X & 35X 201601
Linsenabdeckung, 20XP gelb Bague de retenue, 20XP, jaune Tapa frontal, 20XP amarilla Face Cap, 20XP Yellow 250002-2
Linsenabdeckung, 20XP orange Bague de retenue, 20XP, orange Tapa frontal, 20XP naranja Face Cap, 20XP Orange 250002-1
Linsenabdeckung, 20XP schwarz Bague de retenue, 20XP, noir Tapa frontal, 20XP negra Face Cap, 20XP Black 250002 1 5
Batterie 35X Accu, 35X Pila, 35X Battery, 35X 35170
Batterie, 20X Accu, 20X Pila, 20X Battery, 20X 20170
Batterie, 20XP Accu, 20XP Pila, 20XP Battery, 20XP 25170 1 4
„O“-Ring 20X und 35X Endkappe Joint torique, capuchon inférieur, 20X et 35X Aro tórico, tapa trasera 20X y 35X "O" ring, 20X & 35X Tail Cap 151706
„O“-Ring, 20XP Endkappe Joint torique, capuchon inférieur, 20XP Aro tórico, tapa trasera 20XP "O" ring, 20XP Tail Cap 250008 1 3
Feder, 20X und 35X Endkappe Ressort de capuchon inférieur, 20X et 35X Resorte, tapa trasera 20X y 35X Spring, 20X & 35X Tail Cap 201777
Feder, 20XP Endkappe Ressort de capuchon inférieur, 20XP Resorte, tapa trasera 20XP Spring, 20XP Tail Cap 250009 1 2
Endkappe, 20X und 35X Culot, 20X et 35X Tapa trasera, 20X y 35X Tail Cap, 20X & 35X 201708
Endkappe, 20XP gelb Culot, 20XP, jaune Tapa trasera, 20XP amarillo Tail Cap, 20XP Yellow 250003-2
Endkappe, 20XP orange Culot, 20XP, orange Tapa trasera, 20XP naranja Tail Cap, 20XP Orange 250003-1
Endkappe, 20XP schwarz Culot, 20XP, noir Tapa trasera, 20XP negro Tail Cap, 20XP Black 250003 1 1
Teil-Nr. Menge Artikel
N° de pièce Quantité Réf.
Nº de pieza Cantidad Artículo
Beschreibung Description Descripción Description Part No. Quantity Item
Replacement Parts • Piezas de Repuesto • Pièces de Rechange • Ersatzteile

3. Although the Streamlight is designed to be left on charge continuously, there are exceptions. If the 7. Replace face cap, battery stick and tail cap. While screwing the face cap on, try to keep the lamp module
surrounding temperature is below 10°F, continuous charging is not recommended. Additionally, if the from twisting by keeping pressure on the lens. If the lamp module twists, it will twist the wires behind it.
light is going to be unused for three months or more, remove from charge. Do not overtighten the face cap and the tail cap of the SL-20XP.
4. There are special considerations to note when using multi-cell rechargeable nickel-cadmium batteries, 8. Your Streamlight should be ready for use.
such as those found in certain Streamlight flashlights. If a nickel-cadmium battery is subject to repeated WARNING: Be sure to use genuine Streamlight replacement parts. Use of another manufacturer's
and extensive overdeep discharges, such as an aggressive conditioning procedure to eliminate "memory," replacement parts could affect product performance.
which runs the battery down completely on a regular basis, it can experience a voltage reversal of one of
the five cells. This can cause a build up of pressure inside the cell which could lead to venting of the
electrolyte, cell damage and early battery failure. In addition, should the pressure relief vent on the top
of the battery stick become damaged, this pressure build up could lead to the cell's bursting and possible
injury.
5. To obtain the safest and longest service from your rechargeable products, Streamlight, Inc., in
conjunction with the leading manufacturers of nickel-cadmium batteries, offers the following
recommendations:
A. Do not overdischarge nickel-cadmium batteries. Never leave the flashlight on once the lamp becomes
dim. Discharging the battery past this point can damage it or shorten its life.
B. Do not periodically "condition" or "exercise" your flashlight battery despite what you may have been
told about nickel-cadmium "memory." According to the most recent reports gained from technical
manuals of battery manufacturers, the actual existence of "memory" is extremely unlikely. A regular
ritual of deep discharging is specifically not recommended, unnecessary and will greatly shorten
battery and lamp life.
C. If the battery is overdischarged, there may be a small leakage of alkaline electrolyte from the safety
vent area on top of the cell. It appears as a white powdery substance and can affect the integrity of
the electrical contact. We recommend that your battery be periodically inspected and the contact area
wiped clean should any evidence of electrolyte leakage be present. Use caution when handling a STREAMLIGHT® LIMITED LIFETIME WARRANTY
battery that has leaked. The electrolyte is a strong caustic and can burn or irritate the skin and eyes.
D. While inspecting the battery, take note of the condition of the positive terminal cap on the top cell. Streamlight warrants this product to be free of defect for a lifetime of use. We will repair, replace
Some suppliers' batteries are subject to vent damage if this cap is dented, and the battery should be or refund the purchase price, at our option, of any Streamlight product that does not work or that you
replaced or serviced.
manage to break for as long as you own it.
NOTE: The rechargeable battery contained in this product is recyclable. At the end of its useful life, under
various country and state laws, it may be illegal to dispose of this battery in the municipal solid waste Of course, this limited lifetime warranty excludes abuse, batteries, bulbs and chargers.
stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for details in your area for recycling options or proper Rechargeable batteries and chargers have a one (1) year warranty with proof of purchase. Please
disposal or call 1-800-822-8837 for locating a drop off site near you. return your Streamlight to our factory to take advantage of this guarantee. Go to
LAMP MODULE REPLACEMENT www.streamlight.com for the location of an authorized Streamlight repair center near you.
1. Before working on the Streamlight, remove the tail cap and battery.
2. Unscrew and remove face cap to expose lamp module. note: One (1) "O" Ring and lens should stay in the
face cap as a sub-assembly, unless the lens is to be replaced. One (1) "O" Ring should stay on the
flashlight's head.
3. Pull lamp module an inch or so out of the flashlight and disconnect wires by pulling on the connectors,
rather than tugging on the wires themselves.
4. Check with the guide below to ensure compatibility of lamp module and flashlight.
Lamp Module Identification
SL-20XP (8 watt) lamp modules are black color coded, #25107
SL-20XP (3 watt) lamp modules are blue color coded, #25157
SL-20X lamp modules are white color coded, #20110
SL-35X lamp modules are red color coded, #35110 Serial # _________________________________________________________
5. Push connectors on to lamp pins; polarity can be disregarded.
6. Place lamp module back into flashlight, taking care not to pinch or twist wires. Before replacing the face Date of Purchase ______________________
cap, it is generally advised that the "O" Ring on the flashlight head be lightly coated with a household
lubricant.
 990095 Rev A 1/06 ©Streamlight, Inc. 2006
SL-20X, SL-20X-LED, SL-20XP-LED, SL-20XP (8 W), ODER SL-35X
LAMPENMODULERSATZ FÜR
SL-20X, SL-20X-LED, SL-20XP-LED, SL-20XP (8 W), OU SL-35X
MODULE DE LAMPE DE RECHANGE POUR
SL-20X, SL-20X-LED, SL-20XP-LED, SL-20XP (8 W), O SL-35X
SUSTITUCIÓN DE LAS LÁMPARAS PARA
www.streamlight.com
SL-20X, SL-20X-LED, SL-20XP-LED, SL-20XP (8 W), OR SL-35X
LAMP MODULE REPLACEMENT FOR Fax: 800-220-7007
Fax: 610-631-0712
WIEDERAUGLADBAR 800-523-7488
PILES RECHARGEABLES 610-631-0600
RECARGABLES Eagleville, PA 19403 USA
RECHARGEABLES 30 Eagleville Road
Streamlight, Inc.

ENGLISH
REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTIONS
1. Remove the tail cap and battery before removing face cap to
expose lamp module.
2. Disconnect wires by pulling on the connectors, rather than
tugging on the wires themselves.
3. Push connectors on to new lamp pins and place lamp
module back into flashlight, taking care not to pinch or twist
wires.
4. Replace face cap, battery stick and tail cap. Keep the lamp
module from twisting.
WARNING: Be sure to use genuine Streamlight replacement
parts. Use of another manufacturer’s replacement parts could
affect product performance.
WARRANTY: The Lamp Module is warranted for a period of
six (6) months from date of purchase. Retain your receipt for
warranty replacement from the Factory or Authorized Service
Centers.
Lamp Module Identification
• SL-20X lamp modules are white color coded, #20110
• SL-20X-LED lamp modules are green color coded, #20211
• SL-20XP (8 watt) lamp modules are black color coded,
#25107
• SL-20XP-LED lamp modules are white color coded, #25127
• SL-35X lamp modules are red color coded, #35110

ESPANOL
INSTRUCCIONES PARA EL CAMBIO
1. Sacar la tapa posterior y la pila antes de sacar la tapa
frontal para exponer el módulo de la lámpara.
2. Desconectar los alambres tirando de los enchufes, en lugar
de tirar de los propios alambres.
3. Presionar los enchufes en las clavijas de la nueva lámpara y
colocar el módulo de la lámpara de nuevo en la linterna, con
cuidado de no apretar ni torcer los alambres.
4. Sustituir la tapa frontal, el cartucho de la pila y la tapa de la
parte posterior. No torcer el módulo de la lámpara.
ADVERTENCIA: Asegúrese de usar repuestos de cambio
Streamlight. El uso de repuestos de otro fabricante podria
afectar el rendimiento del producto.
GARANTÍA: El módulo de la lámpara se garantiza por un
periodo de seis (6) meses a partir de la fecha de compra.
Guarde su recibo por cambios en garantia o reparaciones
efectuados por Centros de servicio autorizados
Indentifición del módulo de la lámpara
• El código de los módulos de la lámpara SL-20X es de color
blanco, No 15110
• El código de los módulos de la lámpara SL-20X-LED es de
color verde, No 20211
• El código de los módulos de la lámpara SL-20XP (8 vatios)
es de color negro, No 25107
• El código de los módulos de la lámpara SL-20XP-LED
es de color blanco, No 25127
• El código de los módulos de la lámpara SL-35X es de color
rogo, No 35110
 DrÄgerman pss® - A Lung Demand Valve
positive pressure
Approvals
PSS® Series Lung Demand Valves are approved for use with Dräger compressed air respiratory
protection equipment conforming to EN137 and meeting the requirements of EC Council
Directive 89/686/EEC, BSEN 133. Equipment is CE Mark Approved and issued with EC Type
Examination Certificate.
EC Type examiner: SGS United Kingdom Ltd, Unit 202b Worle Parkway, Weston-super-Mare,
BS22 0WA, UK. Notified Body No. 0120.
For Your Safety
 Use and maintenance of equipment requires knowledge, and compliance with National
Regulations, Laws and Standards, governing the use of respiratory protection equipment in
the country of use.
 Use of equipment requires wearer training and observance of these Instructions for Use and
Instructions for Use supplied with the compressed air respiratory protection equipment.
 Use equipment only for the purpose specified in this manual, or as confirmed in writing by
Dräger.
 Only trained competent personnel should inspect and service equipment at regular intervals
and a record kept of such inspections and service.
 Dräger recommends a service contract be obtained from your Dräger Branch or Agent.
 Contact Dräger for details of Service Contracts and Service Training Courses.
 Notify Dräger if there is component fault or failure.
 Use only original Dräger Spare Parts for service and maintenance.
 Use only Dräger Test Equipment for service and maintenance.
Liability Statement
Responsibility for reliable function of equipment transfers to the owner or operator when serviced,
or repaired by untrained personnel, (not employed or authorised by Dräger) or when used in a
manner not conforming to its intended use.
Description
The high performance PSS® A Positive
Pressure Lung Demand Valve incorporates
a unique preset and sealed balanced piston
unit. Should sealed balanced piston unit be
tampered with Drägers’ guarantee is void.
Correct operational condition is valid only
if Dräger service and reseals the balanced
piston unit.
Intended Use
PSS® A Lung Demand Valve, used with
approved compressed air respirator y
protection equipment, facepiece and cylinder
combinations, provide the wearer with
respiratory protection when working in a
contaminated, or oxygen deficient gaseous
atmosphere.
Refer to Instructions for Use supplied with
the compressed air respiratory protection
equipment.
In the presence of chemicals; some substances,
e.g. Phosgene, may be absorbed by, or diffuse
through the material of the silicone diaphragm
of the PSS® Series lung demand valve. When
the lung demand valve is fitted with the non-
silicone diaphragm fit ‘green’ cover (1) Fig. 1
for identification.
In temperatures below freezing: correct
function of the Lung Demand Valve will be
impaired should water be trapped, then freezes
inside the Lung Demand Valve. It is important
that water is removed from the Lung Demand
Valve and connection hose. Thoroughly dry
after any cleaning operation.
Technical Data
Facepiece to Demand Val ve
Connection
Positive Pressure
Type A - Push-In
Full Technical Specification available from
Dräger.
Preparation for Use
Connecting Demand Valve to
Equipment
This instruction applies to demand valves with
quick release male coupling on hose.
 Insert male coupling of demand valve
into female coupling of equipment
medium pressure hose. Check security of
connection.
 Refer to Instructions for Use provided
with compressed air respiratory protection
equipment.
Pre Operational Checks
 Refer to Instructions for Use provided
with compressed air respiratory protection
equipment.
Important Note: If an audible leak is evident
from the lung demand valve – Do Not
restrict the outlet port.
Connecting Demand Valve to
Facepiece
 Check facepiece port, and demand valve O
ring are clean and undamaged.
 Push demand valve into facepiece port until
it clicks into position.
 Check attachment is secure. Pull demand
valve away from facepiece - there should be
no axial movement.
Operation and Use
 Refer to Instructions for Use provided
with compressed air respiratory protection
equipment.
After Use
Safety Warning: Do Not remove equipment
until in safe area, clear of hazard.
Dräger, while endeavouring to ensure correctness of statements
of fact and advice contained in this publication; gives no
guarantee or warranty in respect thereof, and accepts no liability
for any mis-statement or inaccuracy in publication, or for any
omission therefrom.
 Refer to Instructions for Use provided
with compressed air respiratory protection
equipment.
Note: Following venting of equipment press
reset button (6) to switch ‘Off’ positive
pressure mechanism.
 Pass equipment to Service Department.
Routine Maintenance
To be performed after Use.
Refer to Instructions for Use provided
with compressed air respiratory protection
equipment.
Cleaning, Disinfect i n g ,
Drying
Carefully clean, disinfect, and thoroughly
dry contaminated dir ty components as
necessary.
To ensure correct operational condition of
equipment covered in this Instruction for Use,
use only cleaning and disinfecting solutions
recommended by Dräger. Use of other
products invalidates the Dräger Warranty.
When using baths to contain cleaning and
disinfecting solutions, immersed components
and assemblies must only be agitated manually.
Any form of mechanical agitation, e.g.
ultrasonic, washing machines, dishwashers
etc, must be approved and covered by a written
agreement with Dräger.
Note: Cleaning solutions will eventually
remove lubrication from moving parts.
Following cleaning, disinfecting and drying
carry out functional tests. Re-lubricate
moving parts as required.
Safety Note: Refer to manufacturers’
usage instructions when using cleaning
and disinfecting agents. It is important
that attention be paid to concentration and
reaction times. Do Not use organic solvents,
such as Acetone, Alcohol, White Spirit,
Trichloroethylene or similar.
Dräger recommends only the following:
1. Cleaning
 Dräger Safety Wash.
 Sekusept
These products must be used with cold
water however never exceed temperature 30
degrees Celsius.
Note: Before disinfecting, rinse off cleaning
solution in clean water.
2. Disinfecting
 Incidur
This product must be used with cold water
however never exceed temperature 30 degrees
Celsius.
Note: Before drying, rinse off disinfecting
solution in clean water.
Details of cleaning and disinfecting agents are
available from Dräger on request.
3.Rinsing and Drying
Remove cleaning and disinfecting solutions
by rinsing in clean water, followed by
drying.
Do Not exceed a temperature of 60 degrees
Celsius when drying components. Immediately
remove from the drying cabinet when dry.
Never exceed a period of 30 minutes.
Lung Demand Valve
To internally clean and disinfect lung
demand valve it is important to follow these
instructions.
Instructions for Use
Refer to Fig. 1.
6
 Fold rubber cover (1) from front of body of
demand valve. Grip bayonet cap (2), turn
anticlockwise and remove bayonet cap.
Note: Positive pressure spring remains
attached to the bayonet cap. Do Not remove,
stretch or compress spring. Take care not
to damage spring during cleaning and
disinfecting procedures.
 Using thumb and forefinger carefully grip
centre plate of diaphragm (4) then tilt centre
plate and lift the diaphragm from the body of
lung demand valve. Remove slip ring (3).
Note: The diaphragm must not be ultra-
sonically cleaned, as this will affect the
bonded area of the diaphragm. Clean and
disinfect manually.
 Fold rubber cover back over front of demand
valve body to protect balanced piston
lever.
 Immerse, and manually agitate demand
valve, diaphragm, slip ring, and bayonet
cap in cleaning fluid. (Refer to cleaning fluid
instructions.)
 After cleaning, rinse components in clean
water.
 Immerse and manually agitate components
in disinfecting fluid. (Refer to disinfecting
fluid instructions.) 1 2 3 4 5
 After disinfection fold rubber cover from
front of demand valve and rinse components
in clean water. Take care not to damage
1
balanced piston lever (5). 0584
 Connect hose of demand valve to medium
pressure air supply. Press reset button (6)
and turn ‘ON’ air supply.
 Gently press balanced piston lever (5)
Order List
blowing out fluid residue.
Description Order Code
S a f e t y N o t e : We a r s u i t a b l e e y e
protection.
Plus A Lung Demand Valve - Short Hose 3338700
 Disconnect from air supply, dry components Diaphragm - Silicone 3338747
and, if necessary remove excess fluid.
 After drying, carefully locate outer bead Connector O-Ring R18352
of diaphragm into groove in demand valve
body. Rubber Cover - Green 3338799
 Carefully locate tapered side of slip ring into
Non-Silicone Diaphragm 3338751
recess in bead of diaphragm.
 Locate spring of bayonet cap in the centre
Sekusept ( 4 bottles @ 2 litres) 7904071
of the diaphragm and refit bayonet cap.
 Fold rubber cover back over front of demand Incidur Disinfectant (6 litres container) 7904072
valve.
 Press reset button to switch ‘Off’ positive Incidur Disinfectant (30 litres container) 7904073
pressure mechanism.
 Connect demand valve to equipment and
perform Pre Operational Checks as detailed
in Instructions for Use for equipment.
Maintenance and Test Intervals
Replacing Diaphragm
Refer to Fig. 1. Lung Description After Use Every
Demand Month
 Fold rubber cover (1) from front of body of
demand valve. Grip bayonet cap (2), turn Valve
anticlockwise and remove bayonet cap.
Clean and Disinfect as necessary mn
Note: Positive pressure spring remains Visual Inspection m u
attached to bayonet cap. Do Not remove,
stretch or compress spring.
Functional and Leak Test as defined in Instructions for Use
 Using thumb and forefinger carefully grip m u
supplied with respiratory protection equipment
centre plate of diaphragm (4) then tilt centre
plate and lift the diaphragm from the body
of lung demand valve. Remove slip ring (3).
Discard diaphragm.  Dräger Recommendation
 COSHH
 Carefully locate outer bead of new diaphragm
 Grease connector O-Ring of Demand Valve as required (Use Molykote 111 Grease)
into groove in demand valve body.
 Carefully locate tapered side of slip ring into
recess in bead of diaphragm. Note: Refer also to Instructions for Use provided with compressed air respiratory equipment.
 Locate spring of bayonet cap in the centre
of the diaphragm and refit bayonet cap.
 Fold rubber cover back over front of demand
valve.
 Press reset button to switch ‘Off’ positive
pressure mechanism.
 Connect demand valve to equipment and
perform Pre Operational Checks as detailed
in Instructions for Use for equipment.
Fault, Cause, Remedy,
Service and Test Intervals
 Refer to Instructions for Use provided with
the compressed air respiratory protection
equipment.
Storage - Ready for Use
 Store the lung demand valve ‘ready for use’
in a cool dry environment, free from dust
and dirt. Protect rubber parts from direct
sunlight.
 Refer also to the Instructions for Use
supplied with the approved compressed air
respiratory protection equipment.
Dräger Safety UK Limited Dräger Safety AG & Co. KGaA
Ullswater Close Revalstraße 1 Telefon: 0049451882-0
Riverside Business Park D-23560 Telefax: 0049451882-2080
Blyth Tel: +44 1670) 352891 Lübeck
Northumberland NE24 4RG Fax: +44 1670) 356266 Germany Internet http://www.draeger.com
3338727 : Edition 9 : April 2009 : Subject to Modification (A3-D-P)
 DrägerMan PSS® 90 Series
compressed air respiratory protection equipment Instructions for Use

Approvals easily out of exhalation valve.

 Press centre of rubber cover of demand
Or
b. Machine-wash using proprietary brand
DrägerMan PSS®90 Series compressed air respiratory protection equipment complies with EN137:2006
Type 2 and meets the requirements of EC Council Directive 89/686/EEC (PPE) and 97/23/EC (PED). valve checking supplementary supply. washing solutions. Do Not use Biological
A number of variants hold additional MED (96/98/EC) approval - contact Dräger for details.  ‘Close’ cylinder valve. Breathe normally was hi ng p ow d er. N ever exc eed a
to vent system. During venting observe temperature of 30 degrees Celsius
PPE - EC Type examiner: SGS United Kingdom Ltd, Unit 202b Worle Parkway, Weston-super- gauge - whistle alarm should sound at
preset pressure, (See Technical Data). Any other cleaning or disinfecting process
Mare, BS22 0WA, UK. Notified Body No. 0120. CE Mark Approved and issued with EC Type must be approved and covered by a written
Examination Certificate. When the gauge indicates zero, hold
breath. Facepiece should hold onto the agreement with Dräger.
PED - EC Type examiner: Lloyds Register Verification Limited, 71 Fenchurch Street, London EC3M face indicating positive seal.
 ‘Open’ the valve slowly but fully to pressurise Safety Note: Refer to manufacturers’ usage
4BS. Notified Body No. 0038. The equipment is manufactured in accordance with the requirements instructions when using cleaning and,
of Conformity Asssessment Modules B + D of the Pressure Equipment Regulations. the system.
where applicable, disinfecting agents.
Declarations of conformity accompany the product. It is important that attention be paid to
Note: If leak is detected then readjust the
head harness and retest. concentration and reaction times. Do Not
For Your Safety 1
use organic solvents, such as Acetone,
DrägerMan PSS®90 Series incorporates Dräger pre-set and sealed pressure reducer. The Dräger Alcohol, White Spirit, Trichloroethylene
guarantee is void should original seal caps be tampered with, removed, or broken. Correct operational Use or similar.
0156  Regularly observe gauge reading. Whistle
condition is only valid if Dräger service and re-seals pressure reducer.
 Use of equipment requires knowledge, and compliance with National Regulations, Laws and alarm sounds at pressure setting of whistle Dräger recommends the following:
Standards, governing the use of respiratory protection equipment in the country of use. warning unit.
 Go on to safe area, at least when whistle
 Use of equipment requires wearer training and observance of these Instructions for Use.
sounds, by shortest and safest route.
1.Cleaning
 Use equipment only for the purpose specified in this manual, or as confirmed in writing by  Dräger Safety Wash
Dräger.  Sekusept
 Only trained competent personnel should inspect and service equipment at regular intervals and After Use
a record kept of such inspections and service. These products must be used with cold water
 Dräger recommends a service contract be obtained from your Dräger Branch or Agent. Safety Warning: Do Not remove equipment however Never exceed a temperature of 30
 Contact Dräger for details of Service Contracts and Service Training Courses. until in safe area, clear of hazard. degrees Celsius.
 Notify Dräger if there is component fault or failure.
 Use only original Dräger Spare Parts for service and maintenance.  Ensure the positive pressure mechanism Note: Before disinfecting, rinse off cleaning
of the lung demand valve (A and AE) is solution in clean water.
Liability Statement activated to switch ‘Off’ positive pressure.
 Remove the facepiece then ‘Close’ cylinder
Responsibility for reliable function of equipment transfers to the owner or operator when serviced, 2. Disinfecting
or repaired by untrained personnel, (not employed or authorised by Dräger) or when used in a valve(s).  Wipex Cloths (for manual disinfecting)
manner not conforming to its intended use. 2  Unbuckle waistbelt, lift shoulder strap
buckles to loosen, remove equipment.
 Incidur

0157 This product must be used with cold water

Description
The DrägerMan PSS®90 Series incorporates
a Carbon Composite (antistatic) Backplate and
a professional carrying harness with shoulder
and waistbelt comfort padding. An adjustable
cylinder strap with Camlock fastening supports
single cylinder configurations. The pneumatic
arrangements use a high performance first stage
pressure reducer, with pressure gauge and whistle
warning unit, and are compatible with a wide
range of lung demand valves, facepieces and
compressed air cylinders.
Details of equipment variants and approved
accessories are available from Dräger on request.
Intended Use
The DrägerMan PSS®90 Series used in approved
lung demand valve, facepiece and cylinder
combinations, provides the wearer with respiratory
protection when working in a contaminated, or
oxygen deficient gaseous atmosphere.
Working duration of equipment is dependent
on capacity (volume) of cylinder selected, and
breathing rate of wearer.
Technical Data
High Pressure Connection:
200bar or 300bar
Standard G5/8 as per EN 144-02.
Other connections available to National
Standards.
Whistle Warning Unit
Pre-set by Dräger to between 50bar to 60bar.
Compressed Air Cylinders
4L to 12L capacity cylinders (200bar or
300bar) available in either steel or composite
materials.
Contact Dräger for details.
Preparation for use
Fitting Single Cylinder
 Check valve port and reducer handwheel
threads are undamaged, connector O ring in
position, and undamaged.
 Place backplate horizontal, extend the cylinder
strap and slide the cylinder through the strap
loop, locating the valve port to the handwheel
of the reducer.
 Lift the unit upright, screw handwheel into
the valve port, (handtight), and, if fitted, hook
anti-vibration strap to handwheel.
 Place backplate horizontal, take up slack on
the cylinder strap (Fig. 1), pull the strap over
the cylinder to activate the Camlock (Fig. 2),
secure strap to the Velcro.
Connecting Demand Valve to
Equipment
Note: Refer also to the Instructions for Use
provided with the Lung Demand Valve.
 Insert male coupling, of demand valve, into
female coupling of medium pressure hose.
Check security of connection.
Pre-Operational Checks
High Pressure Leak Test
Important Note: The following instruction refers
to equipment fitted with a mechanical pressure
gauge. Refer to the appropriate Instruction for
Use provided for variants, e.g. Bodyguard.
 Before opening cylinder valve, ensure positive
pressure mechanism of lung demand valve (A
and AE) is activated to switch ‘Off’ positive
pressure.
 Open cylinder valve slowly, but fully, to
pressurise system.
 Close cylinder valve and observe the pressure
gauge.
 Gauge reading should not decrease more than
10bar in 1 minute.
 Continue to Whistle Warning Unit Test.
Whistle Warning Unit Test
 A and AE - Cover outlet of demand valve
with ball of hand, press centre of rubber
cover, turning ‘On’ positive pressure. Slowly
vent system by carefully lifting ball of hand
maintaining a slow decrease in pressure.
 N - Slowly vent system. Carefully press
centre of rubber cover.
 During venting observe gauge. Whistle
should sound at preset pressure.
 Should whistle not sound at required
pressure, refer to Dräger Service.
Connecting Demand Valve to the
Facepiece
Note: Refer also to the Instructions for Use
provided with the Lung Demand Valve.
Type A
 Check facepiece port, and the demand valve
O ring, are clean and undamaged.
 Push demand valve into facepiece port until
it ‘clicks’ into position. Check attachment is
secure.
Type’s AE and N
 Check facepiece port and sealing ring are
clean and undamaged.
 Screw demand valve handwheel into
facepiece port. Handtight.
Operation
Putting on equipment
 Extend waistbelt and shoulder adjusting
straps. Put on equipment - taking weight on
shoulders by pulling on shoulder adjusting
straps. Do Not tighten.
 Fasten waisbelt buckle (Fig. 3). Pull ends
of waistbelt adjusting straps forward (Fig. 4)
until secure and comfortable on hip. Tuck
strap ends between body and waistbelt
pad. Pull down shoulder adjusting straps
(Fig. 5) until equipment is secure and
comfortable. Tuck strap ends under the
waistbelt.
 Extend facepiece head harness straps,
leaving centre strap in position, (Fig. 6).
Put neck strap over neck, insert neck
strap stud into hole in centre strap in head
harness.
 Ensure the positive pressure mechanism
of the lung demand valve (A and AE) is
activated to switch ‘Off’ positive pressure.
Carry out High Pressure Leak Test.
Important Note: Refer to the appropriate
Instruction for Use provided for variants,
e.g. Bodyguard.
 ‘Open’ valve slowly but fully to pressurise
system. Check gauge.
Putting on Facepiece
Note: Refer also to the Instructions for Use
provided with the Facepiece.
Safety Warning: Facial hair, beard stubble,
side whiskers, and the wearing of spectacles
will adversely affect and interfere with
facepiece seal. Correct fit of facepiece
only ensured if facepiece seal makes close
contact with skin.
 Detach neck strap stud from centre strap of
head harness.
3 use only cleaning and disinfecting solutions and
 Spread harness place chin into facepiece,
position harness over head, locating harness
centre plate with back of head.
 Tighten both lower (1), then upper straps
(2) evenly towards back of head. Fig. 7.
Only tighten centre strap (3) if necessary.
 On achieving face seal positive pressure
demand valves (A and AE) automatically
activate on first inhalation.
 Breathe normally.
Function Checks
 Inhale and hold breath. Unit must balance,
i.e. no audible leak.
 Continue breathing. Expired air should flow
Note: Do Not drop or throw down equipment however Never exceed a temperature of 30
as damage could occur.
degrees Celsius.
 Press the centre of the rubber cover of Note: Before disinfecting, rinse off cleaning
the demand valve to vent system and solution in clean water.
ensure positive pressure mechanism of
lung demand valve activated to switch ‘Off’
positive pressure.
3. Rinsing and Drying
Remove cleaning solutions by rinsing in clean
 Pass equipment to Service Department.
water, followed by drying.
Routine Maintenance Note: Remove excess water before drying.
To be performed after Use.
See also Maintenance and Test Intervals When drying components Never exceed a
Chart. temperature of 60 degrees Celsius. Immediately
remove from drying cabinet when dry. Never
Removal of cylinder exceed a period of 30 minutes.
3
Safety Warning: Cylinder valve should be closed Pressure Reducer and Hose
0020 and system vented.
Assemblies
 Lift free end of cylinder strap against Important Note: Do Not immerse pressure
Camlock to release, loosen strap. Unhook reducer and pneumatic assembly in
anti-vibration strap (if fitted) from the solutions.
reducer handwheel and unscrew handwheel
from the cylinder valve. Slide the cylinder  For cleaning, remove pressure reducer and
away from reducer and remove from hose assembly from backplate.
equipment.  Remove the locknut, washers and the
 Recharge the cylinder. reducer retaining screw.
 Unfasten hose loops, releasing hoses, and
It is recommended that a pressure limiting remove reducer and hose assembly.
device is fitted to the charging compressor  Using clean lint free cloth, moistened
to prevent over charging of the selected in cleaning solution, remove dirt and
cylinder. cont aminants from t he pneumatic
Charging Cylinders
assembly.
 Using clean lint free cloth, moistened in
4 Recharge to the rated pressure indicated on clean water, remove excess water, followed
0163 the label or stamped on the neck or shoulder by drying.
of cylinder. Dräger recommend a charge rate  Re-assemble reducer and hose assembly to
of 27bar/minute. Rapid charging will induce backplate and harness.
an increase in temperature resulting in an
incomplete charge - check pressure at ambient Lung Demand Valves
and if required ‘Top Up’ charge.
Refer also to the Instructions for Use provided
with the Lung Demand Valve.
Safety Warning: Air quality for compressed
air breathing systems should conform to
requirements of EN12021. Only charge
Facepiece
Refer also to the Instructions for Use provided
compressed air pressure vessels which:
with the Facepiece.
 Conform to National Standards.
 Feature original manufacturers test date Storage - Ready for Use
and test mark.
 Have not exceeded test date indicated  Fully extend shoulder straps, waistbelt and
on label affixed by last testing station. head harness of the facepiece.
 Store the equipment ‘ready for use’ in a
5 Visual Inspection cool dry environment, free from dust and dirt
0153 Check integrity of: and away from excessive heat. Protect the
equipment from any possible damage and
 Carrying system.
 All straps, buckles and harness. ensure that rubber parts are not subjected
to direct sunlight.
 Valves, connectors and manifold.
 Lung Demand Valve.
Safety Note: When stored ‘ready for use’, on
 Facepiece.
wall or bulkhead mounting, e.g. Fire Tender,
ensure equipment secured and supported
by mounting system.
C l e a n i n g , D i s i n fe c t i n g ,
Drying
When considered necessary by the user,
contaminated and dir ty components or
assemblies should be carefully cleaned and if
necessary disinfected then thoroughly dried.
Refer also to the appropriate Instruction for Use
provided for the lung demand valve, facepiece
6 and any variants, e.g. Bodyguard.
0017
To ensure correct operational condition of the
equipment covered in this Instruction for Use,
processes recommended by Dräger. The use
of any other products, or process, invalidates
2 the Dräger Warranty.
The assembled Carrying System, Harness and
Pneumatic Arrangement should be cleaned,
and or disinfected manually using a clean lint
free cloth, moistened in either cleaning or
1 disinfecting solution. Do Not immerse pressure
reducer and pneumatic assembly in solutions.
The harness can be easily removed and
either:
a. Manually cleaned in a bath containing
7 either cleaning or disinfecting solutions as
0018
recommended by Dräger.

3351447: Edition 5: September 2008: Subject to Modification - (A3-D-P)

 DrägerMan PSS® 90 Series
compressed air respiratory protection equipment Instructions for Use

Fault, Cause, Remedy Maintenance and Test Intervals

Refer to any associated Instructions for Use supplied with this product, e.g. facepiece. Dräger recommend that regular Inspection, Testing and Servicing of equipment be carried out in accordance with this table. Record all data in the log book for
the equipment. This table applies also to non-used (in storage) equipment. Refer also to any associated Instructions for Use supplied with this product.

Fault Possible Cause Remedy For detailed instructions for Inspection, Testing and Servicing of the facepiece, refer to the appropriate Instructions for Use.
High pressure leak Check security of all connections/seals Tighten or replace seals as necessary
Description Before After Use Every Every Every
Leak from pressure relief valve of MP hose 1 Damaged O-ring Replace O-ring
Use Month Year 6 Years
2 Weak Spring Replace spring
3 Damaged O-ring retainer Replace retainer Complete Clean and Disinfect m
Equipment
Leak from pressure relief valve of MP hose Reducer failure Contact Dräger Service Visual Inspection m m m
Relief valve component satisfactory
High or Low medium pressure Reducer out of specification Contact Dräger Service Functional and Leak Testing as defined in Instructions for Use m m m
Poor sounding whistle (if fitted) Dirt Clean and retest Flow and Static Tests per Manufacturer's instructions m
Whistle not functioning correctly Defective activation mechanism Contact Dräger Service (refer to Service Handbook)
Demand Valve Clean and Disinfect mn

Pressure Medium Pressure Check (refer to Service Handbook) m m

Miscellaneous Reducer
Replace Sintered Filter (refer to Service Handbook) m

Replace H.P. Connector O-ring (refer to Service Handbook) m

Description Order Code
Basic Overhaul (Repair Exchange Scheme) m
1 Litre Safety Wash and Dispenser 3380164
Contact Dräger Service
1 Litre Safety Wash Refill 3380165
Cylinder Charge to the correct pressure m m
5 Litre Safety Wash and Dispenser 3380166
5 Litre Safety Wash Refill 3380167 Charged pressure check. Check test date of Cylinder m
Sekusept (4 bottles @ 2 litres) 7904071 Re-certification - according to National Standards in the country
Wipex Cloths (pack of 50) 3380375 of use
Incidur (6 litres) 7904072 Cylinder Overhaul as necessary or at time of Cylinder
Valve Re-Certification.
Incidur (30 litres) 7904073

 Dräger recommendations
 Type A LDV - Grease ,as required, the connector O-ring of the LDV with Molykote 111 grease (3331247).

Important Note: Additional inspection and testing may be required in the country of use to ensure compliance with National Regulations governing the
Use, Maintenance, Examination and Testing of the compressed air respiratory protection equipment as described in this and associated Instructions
for Use.

Dräger, while endeavouring to ensure correctness of statements Dräger Safety UK Limited Dräger Safety AG & Co. KGaA
of fact and advice contained in this publication; gives no Ullswater Close Revalstraße 1 Telefon: 0049451882-0
guarantee or warranty in respect thereof, and accepts no liability Riverside Business Park, D-23560 Telefax: 0049451882-2080
for any mis-statement or inaccuracy in publication, or for any Blyth Tel: +44 1670 352891 Lübeck
omission therefrom. Northumberland NE 24 4 RG Fax: +441670 356266 Germany Internet http://www.draeger.com

3351447: Edition 5: September 2008: Subject to Modification - (A3-D-P)